Sythe. Te OF st eae plo! 1s 6A g as - ay ae tg a Cornell Mniversity Library BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME FROM THE SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND THE GIFT OF Henry W. Sage 1891 AT 3 at Cornell University Library The original of this book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924003957820 BACTERIOLOGY AND INFECTIVE DISEASES: A TEXT-BOOK or BACTERIOLOGY INCLUDING THE ETIOLOGY AND PREVENTION Or INFECTIVE DISEASES AND A SHORT ACCOUNT OF YEASTS AND MOULDS, HAMATOZOA, AND i PSOROSPERMS BY EDGAR M. CROOKSHANK, M.B. PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY, AND FELLOW OF KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON FOURTH EDITION RECONSTRUCTED, REVISED AND GREATLY ENLARGED LONDON H. K. LEWIS, 136, GOWER STREET, W.C. 1896, ai) [All rights reserved] Lonpon : H XK. Lewis, 186, Gower Srreer, W.C. Io SIR JOSEPH LISTER, BART., M.B., P.RS., WHO HAS CREATED A NEW EPOCH IN MEDICINE AND SURGERY, BY APPLYING A KNOWLEDGE OF MICRO-ORGANISMS TO THE TREATMENT OF DISEASE, This Work is, with permission, Dedicated BY THE AUTHOR AS A TOKEN OF ADMIRATION AND RESPECT PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. Tas book, though nominally a fourth edition, is practically speaking a new work. The progress of Bacteriology has been very rapid, and many new investigations have been made in connection with the etiology, prevention and treatment of communicable diseases. It has been necessary to reconstruct, enlarge and thoroughly revise the text of the third edition, and I have added twenty-six chapters. The most important researches conducted in bacteriological laboratories are those relating to the contagia. In many diseases of man and animals it has not been possible to identify the contagium with a bacterium, or indeed with any micro-organism ; but when the virus is chemically examined, or investigated with a view to protective inoculation, or utilised for experiments in serum-therapeutics, such researches are within the province of the bacteriologist. The recognition of the fact that in so many diseases the nature of the contagium has not yet been determined will have the effect of encouraging continued activity in this important field of scientific investigation. I hope that this work will continue to be of use as a text- book for the bacteriological laboratory, and that the chapters on the etiology and prevention of the communicable diseases Vili PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. of man and animals will be not only of scientific interest, but of practical value to Medical Officers of Health and Veterinary Inspectors. I have ‘divided the book into three parts. Part I. is mainly technical, and includes the most recent methods employed in studying bacteria and investigating the etiology of disease. Part II. deals with infective diseases and the bacteria associated with them. Any clinical or pathological evidence which may help to throw light on the nature and origin of the contagia is taken into account. The most effectual measures for stamping out these diseases are referred to, as they are intimately connected with a knowledge of the life-history of micro-organisms. Part III. contains descriptions of about five hundred bacteria. Many are of no practical importance and of very little scientific interest, but a text-book for the laboratory cannot be con- sidered complete unless an account is given of all bacteria which have been more or less completely investigated. I have endeavoured to refer to the original descriptions and to verity them by comparison with actual cultivations, but in a very great number of instances this has. been quite impossible, and I desire to acknowledge the assistance I have received from the works of several authors, especially those of Fligge, Frankel, Eisenberg, Baumgarten, Frankland, Sternberg, Lehmann and Neumann... I have rearranged’ the bibliography according to the chapters,fand the names of authors are given in alphabetical order. With the aid of the current numbers of the Annales de UInstitut Pasteur, the Zeitschrift fir Hygiene, the Centralblatt fir Bakteriologie und Parasitenkunde, and the Journal of Comparative Pathology and Bacteriology, it is possible to become acquainted with the most recent litera- ture of the subject. Many of the coloured plates illustrating the last edition - have not been reproduced. Those substituted for them have been drawn from my own preparations, and most of them PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. 1x have already appeared in my Reports to the Board of Agriculture and in other publications. One hundred and thirty-three woodcuts and photographs have been added in the text, and I have reverted to the plan which J adopted in the second edition, of having many of them printed in colours. I take this opportunity of thanking Professor Frankel for kindly permitting me to reproduce some of the photographs in his excellent Atlas. I am particularly indebted to Professor Hamilton for the use of clich’s of figures in his classical treatise on Pathology, and to the New Sydenham Society for several from the English translation of Professor Fliigge’s well- known work on micro-organisms. To my Demonstrator, Dr. George Newman, D.P.H., I am indebted for much assistance in correcting the proof-sheets, and for the preparation of an index. EDGAR M. CROOKSHANK. SAINT HILL, EAST GRINSTEAD, SUSSEX, August 1st, 1896. P.S.—Since this work was finally passed for press the ‘con- clusions of the Royal Vaccination Commissioners have been published. I have at the last moment added extracts in the form of a supplementary Appendix. E. M.C. September 18th, 1896. CONTENTS: PAR 2 Ts THEORETICAL AND TECHNICAL. PAGE CHAPTER I. HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION . ; ‘ . ‘ 1 CHAPTER II. MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA ‘ : x LT CHAPTER III. EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA . 30 CHAPTER IV. CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF BACTERIA : : . 39 CHAPTER V. IMMUNITY . ‘ ‘ - P 3 Z : s . 49 CHAPTER VI. ANTITOXINS AND SERUM THERAPY : . 06 CHAPTER VII. THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE ‘ 3 : . 65 CHAPTER VIII. MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA ; . 83 CHAPTER IX. PREPARATION OF NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVA- TION . ; : ‘ 99 xii CONTENTS. CHAPTER X. EXPERIMENTS UPON THE LIVING ANIMAL : : . CHAPTER XI. |: EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER ' CHAPTER XIL PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA PART II. ETIOLOGY AND PREVENTION OF INFECTIVE DISEASES, CHAPTER XIII. SUPPURATION, PY/EMIA, SEPTICAMIA, ERYSIPELAS CHAPTER XIV. ANTHRAX . CHAPTER XV. QUARTER-EVIL.—MALIGNANT GEDEMA.—RAG-PICKERS’ SEPTI- CAMIA.—SEPTICZMIA OF GUINEA-PIGS.—SEPTICEMIA OF MICE . CHAPTER XVI. SEPTICEMIA OF BUFFALOES.-—--SEPTIC PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CALVES.—SWINE FEVER.—SEPTICHMIA OF DEER.—SEPTI- C/EMIA OF RABBITS.—FOWL CHOLERA.——-FOWL ENTERITIS. —DUCK CHOLERA.—GROUSE DISEASE CHAPTER XVII. PNEUMONIA.—-INFECTIOUS PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CATTLE.— INFLUENZA CHAPTER XVIII. ‘ ORIENTAL PLAGUE.—RELAPSING FEVER.—TYPHUS FEVER.-— YELLOW FEVER 4 PAGE . 134 140 . 150 173 . 191 pb . 226 . 2338 CONTENTS. X1li PAGE CHAPTER XIX. SCARLET FEVER.—MEASLES : . : 261 CHAPTER XN. SMALL-POX.—CATTLE PLAGUE. . 284 CHAPTER NXXI. SHEEP-POX.—-FOOT-AND-MOUTH DISEASE 297 CHAPTER XNII. HORSE-POX.—COW-POX : ‘ 303 CHAPTER XXIII. DIPHTHERIA ‘ . : : 330 CHAPTER XXIV. TYPHOID FEVER. ‘ ‘ 340 CHAPTER XXV. SWINE FEVER. ; , ‘ 347 CHAPTER XXVI. SWINE MEASLES.—DISTEMPER IN DOGS.—EPIDEMIC DISEASE OF FERRETS.—EPIDEMIC DISEASE OF MICE. ; . 855 CHAPTER XXVII. ASIATIC CHOLERA.— CHOLERA NOSTRAS.—CHOLERAIC DIARRH@A FROM MEAT POISONING.— DYSENTERY.—CHOLERAIC DIAR- RHEA IN FOWLS : . 360 CHAPTER XXVIII. TUBERCULOSIS ; : ‘ ‘ : BTS CHAPTER XXIX. LEPROSY.—SYPHILIS.—RHINOSCLEROMA.—TRACHOMA . 406 CHAPTER XXX. ACTINOMYCOSIS.—MADURA DISEASE ' 413 CHAPTER XXXI. GLANDERS . . , ; : 451 xiv CONTENTS. CHAPTER XXXII. TETANUS, —RABIES.—LOUPING-ILL : ‘ ‘ 3 . 457 CHAPTER XXXIII. FOOT-ROT ; : . z ‘ , : ‘ . 464 CHAPTER XXXIV. FOUL-BROOD.—-INFECTIOUS DISEASE OF BEES IN ITALY.— PEBRINE.—FLACHERIE,— INFECTIOUS DISEASE OF CATER- PILLARS. : ; : : : 5 : . 469 Pad. LET. SYSTEMATIC AND DESCRIPTIVE. CHAPTER XXXV. CLASSIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES : . . 475 APPENDICES. APPENDIX I. YEASTS AND MOULDS . 2 : 7 5 , . 577 APPENDIX II. HHMATOZOA IN MAN, BIRDS, AND TURTLES.—HMATOZOA IN EQUINES, CAMELS AND FISH.—HA#MATOZOA IN FROGS . 589 APPENDIX III. PSOROSPERMS OR COCCIDIA.—AMCEBA COLI APPENDIX IV. APPARATUS, MATERIAL AND REAGENTS EMPLOYED IN A BAC- TERIOLOGICAL LABORATORY . : , : . 61 APPENDIX V. BIBLIOGRAPHY : : d ‘ . 639 SUPPLEMENTARY APPENDIX. EXTRACTS FROM THE FINAL REPORT OF THE ROYAL VACCINA- TION COMMISSION : : ; : : ; . 667 Onrea DHE LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. WOOD ENGRAVINGS AND PHOTOGRAPHS. . Ascococcus Billrothii, x 65 (Cohn) 14 . Spirocheta from Sewage Water, x 1200 (E.M. 0. ) 15 . Flagella (Koch, Brefeld, Warming, Zopf) é . 16 . Bacillus Megatherium (De Bary) . ; ‘ 17 . Clostridium Butyricum, x 1020 (Prazmowski) . 18 . Leuconostoc Mesenteroides; Cocci-chains with Arthrospores (Van Tieghem and Cienkowski) 19 . Spore-bearing Threads of Bacillus Rutieadis. double- stained with Fuchsine and Methylene Blue, x 1200 (E.M.C.) 20 . Bacilli of Tubercle in Sputum, x 2500 (E.M.C.) 21 . Comma Bacilli in Sewage Water, stained with Gentian Violet, x 1200 (E.M.C.) F 22 . Vibrios in Water contaminated with Sewage, x 1200 (E.M.C. ) . 22 . Refraction of Light (Carpenter) . - 66 . Spherical Aberration (Carpenter) 87 . Combination of Lenses in Abbé’s Homogeneous Immersion (Car- penter) . - . 67 . Chromatic Aberration (Carpenter) , 5 . 68 . Objective with Collar Correction (Zeiss) , . 69 . Microscope—English Model (Swift) 71 . Removable Mechanical Stage (Swift) : 72 . Microscope—Continental Model (Zeiss) . 7B . Tris Diaphragm (Zeiss) ‘ 74. . Abbé’s Condenser (Zeiss) . 75 . Microscope Lamp (Baker) i 6 . Large Microscope Lamp (Swift) . : 17 . Arrangement of Powell and Lealand’s Microscope in working directly on the Edge of the.Flame, with Stand for Micrometer Eye-piece to secure Steadiness and Accuracy of Measurement (Carpenter after Nelson) . ‘ 3 79 . Ramsden Micrometer Bye- -piece (Swift). : 80 . Micrometer Eye-piece (Zeiss) , . 81 . Inoculating Needles (E.M.C.) 84 . Freezing Microtome (Swift) 3 94 . Microtome (Jung) , ., 95 . Wire-cage for Test-tubes (Muencke) “100 . Hot-air Steriliser (E.M.C.) : ‘ 101 XVi LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. FIG. PAGE 31. Hot-water Filtering Apparatus (Muencke) : 102 32. Method of making a Folded Filter (E.M.C.) 103 33, Steam Steriliser (Baird and Tatlock) . 103 34. Incubator (Muencke) . 104 35. Method of Inoculating a Test- abe containing Sterile Nutrient Jelly (#.M.C.) ; 105 36. Levelling Apparatus (E. M. C) 107 37. Iron box for Glass Plates (Muencke) 108 38. Method of Inoculating Test-tubes in the Preparation of Plate-cultiva- tions (E.M.C.) 108 39. Damp-chamber containing Plate-cultivations (Bl M.C) 110 40. Pasteur’s Large Incubator (Becker) 111 +1. Petri’s Dish (Becker) ; 112 42. Glass Benches and Slides (Becker) 112 43, Koch’s Serum Steriliser (Muencke) 114 44. Hueppe’s Serum Inspissator (Baird and Tatlock) 115 45. Box for Sterilising Instruments (Becker) 116 46. Damp Chamber for Potato-cultivations (E.M.C.) 117 47. Apparatus for Sterilisation by Steam under pressure (Ciaind eel Tatlock) ‘i 119 48. Drop Cultivation (Fligge) 121 49. Simple Method of forming a Moist Cell (Schifer) : 122 50. Warm Stage (Schafer) . 123 51. Warm Stage shown in Operation (Schiifer) 123 52. Warming Apparatus in Operation (Israel) . 124 53. Section of Warming Apparatus and Drop-culture Slide (israel) 125 54. Israel’s Warming Apparatus : 125 55. Gas Chamber in use with Apparatus tor generating Carbonic Acid (Schafer) ‘ 5 126 56. Gas Chamber (Schafer) 126 57. Moist Cell adapted for Transmission of Electricity (Schafer) 127 58. Apparatus arranged for Transmitting Electricity (Schafer) 127 59. Slide with Gold-leaf Electrodes (Schafer) 128 60. Lister’s Flask (Becker) 128 61. Sternberg’s Bulb (Becker) , ' 128 62. Aitken’s Tube (Becker) 129 63. Miquel’s Bulb (Becker) 129 64. Pasteur’s Flask (Baird and Tatlock) 130 65. Pasteur’s Double Tube (Baird and Tatlock) 130 66. Frinkel’s Anaerobic Tube-culture (Frankland) 131 67. Anaerobic Culture Tube (Liborius) 132 68. Apparatus for Anaerobic Cultures (Roscoe and Lant) : 133 69. Koch’s Syringe (Baird and Tatlock) 135 70. Syringe with Asbestos Plug (Baird and Tatlock) 135 71. Hesse’s Apparatus (Muencke) . 142 72. Sedgwick and Tucker’s Tube (Baird and Tatlock) . 143 73. Pouchet’s Aeroscope (Hamilton) 143 74. Apparatus for Estimating the number - sf Colonies in a Plate-cultiva- tion (Muencke) : 146 75. Esmarch’s Roll-culture (Frankland) 147 76. Apparatus for Counting Colonies in a Roll- eatinee (Becker) . 148 77. Horizontal Micro-photographic Apparatus (Swift) . 156 103. ‘104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, . Reversible Micro-photographic Apparatus (E.M.C. ye : _ . Reversible Micro-photographic Apparatus pa in the Vertical Position (E.M.C.) : . . Large Micro-photographic ieaneesiins (Swift) . - Photograph of an Impression Preparation (E.M.C.) 2 . Photograph of a Cultivation of Bacillus anthracis (H.M.C.) . . Suppuration of Subcutaneous Tissue (Cornil and Ranvier) . Pus with Staphylococci, x 800 (Fliigge) . Subcutaneous Tissue of a Rabbit forty-eight hours fer an tuition of Staphylococci, x 950 (Baumgarten) . Ulcerative Endocarditis: Section of Cardiac Hassle. x 700 (Roky . Pure-cultures of Streptococcus Pyogenes(E.M.C.) . : : . Section of Skin in Erysipelas (Cornil and Ranvier) . ‘ 5 . Streptococcus Pyogenes Hominis; Pure-cultures on Nutrient Gela- tine (E.M.C.) . , Streptococcus Pyogenes Bovis ; Pure-cultures on Nutrient Gelatine, (E.M.C.) . Gonococcus, x 800 (Burm) . Bacillus Anthracis, x 1200. Blood Corpuscles and Bacilli unstained ; from an Inoculated Mouse (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . Pure-cultivation of Bacillus anthracis in Nutrient Gelatine (B. M.C.) . Colonies of Bacillus anthracis, x 86 (Flugge) . Impression-preparation of a Colony, x 70 ae . . Margin of a Colony, x 250(E.M.C.) . : . Filaments with Oval and Irregular Elements, x 800 (E, M.C. ) . Spores of Bacillus anthracis stained with Gentian Violet, x 1500 (E.M.C.) . Anthrax in Swine (E.M. C. ) : : F . ‘ , 100. 101. 102. Anthrax in Swine (E.M.C.) . i Bacilli of Quarter-evil, x 1000 (Frankel and Pfeiffer) Pure-culture of Bacilli of Quarter-evil in Grape-sugar Getie (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . Bacilli of Malignant Gidema, x “920 (Baumgarten) Pure-culture of Bacillus of Malignant (idema in Grape. Sugar Gelatine (Frankel and Pfeiffer) 5 Bacilli of Malignant (Edema, x 1000 (Frankel and Pfeiffer) Pure-cultivation of the Bacillus of Septiceemia of Mice in Nutrient Gelatine (E.M.C.) Bacterium of Rabbit Shptiowmins Blood of Spann, «x 700 Koch) Bacterium of Fowl-cholera, x 1200 (E.M.C.) - . Bacterium of Fowl-cholera, x 2500 (E.M.C.) . Bacterium of Fowl-cholera; Section from Liver of Fowl, x 700 (Fliigge) ‘ Bacillus of Hemorrhagic Septicmrita; 5 x 950 (Baumgarten) . Bacillus of Hemorrhagic Septicemia: Pure-culture in Gelatine (Baumgarten) . Bacterium Pneumonize ioumes from Pleural Cavity of a “Mouse, x 1500 (Zopf) . Friedlander’s Pneumococcus ; ‘Paeentene ii aeietit Galatine (Baumgarten) . Capsule Cocci from Paaumieitas x 1500 Baaneanten) Micrococcus of Sputum Septicemia, x 10C0 (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . b xvii PAGE 157 158 160 162 168 174 177 177 183 184 185 187 188 190 192 193 194 194 195 195 197 203 205 218 218 221 222 223 225 228 228 228 229 231 231 234 234 235 236° xviii LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. FiG, 117. 118. 119. 120. 121. 122. 123. 124, 125. 126. 127. 128, 129, 130. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. 136. Colonies of Sternberg’s Micrococcus, x 100 (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . Acute Catarrhal Pneumonia, x 480 (Hamilton) 3 Infectious Pleuro-pneumonia of Cattle (Hamilton) Infectious Pleuro-pneumonia of Cattle (Hamilton) Bacillus of Influenza, x 1000 (Itzerott and Niemann) Bacillus of Influenza, x 1200 (E.M.C) . . Bacilli of Plague and Phagocytes, x 800 (Aoyama) . Spirillum Obermeieri in Blood of Monkey inoculated with Spirilla after Removal of the Spleen (Soudakewitch) i : Pure-cultivations of Streptococcus Pyogenes (E.M.C.) Free Surface of Diphtheritic Larynx, x 350 (Hamilton) Bacillus of Diphtheria ; from a Cultivation on Blood Serum, x 1000 . (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . Pure-cultures of Bacillus Diphtheriz on Giveuanié: Gerding (BE. M.C. ) Typhoid Fever. Ileum of Adult, eee Sloughy and Infiltrated Patches (Hamilton) Typhoid Bacilli from a Colony ‘on iia Gsintine, x 1000 (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . 2 ci . . Typhoid Bacilli, x 950 (Baameatteay. Flagella of Typhoid Bacilli, x 1000 (Frinkel andl Pfeiffer) Colonies of the Typboid Bacillus (Frankel and Pfeiffer) Pure-culture of Typhoid Bacilli inoculated in the Depth of N utrient Gelatine (Baumgarten) . . Typhoid Bacilli in a Section of eileen, x 800 ‘(Fligge) Typhoid Bacilli in a Section of Intestine invading the Sabeieads and Muscular Layers, x 950 (Baumgarten) . . Ulceration of the Intestine in a Typical Case of vine: fever (E. M.C. ) . Klein’s Bacillus of Swine-fever (No. 1) . From a Preparation of Bronchial Mucus of Klein’ 8 Swine: fever Bacillus (No. 2) . Bacilli from an Artificial Culture with Spores, Bacillus No, 2 (Blein) - Blood of Fresh Spleen of a Mouse after Inoculation with Swine-fever . Bacillus No. 2 (Klein). , . “i 3 3 . Bacilli of Swine Erysipelas (Baumparten) . Blood of Pigeon inoculated with Bacilli of Swine iryaipelas, x 600 (Schiitz) . Pure-culture in Muteone Giiatine of Bacilli ane Serine Bysipelas (Baumgarten) . . Cover-glass Preparation of a Drop of Meat Infusion containing a _Pure-cultivation of Comma-bacilli (Koch) . Arthrospores of Comma-bacilli (Hueppe) . Flagella of Comma-bacilli; stained by Liffler’s Method (Frankel and Pfeiffer) . . Involution Forms of Comma: fasitls x "700 (Van Ermengem) : . Colonies of Comma-bacilli on Nutrient Gelatine ; natural size (Koch) . Colonies of Koch’s Comma-bacilli, x 60 (EM.C.) - . s . Cover-glass Preparation from the Contents of a Cholera Intestine, x 600 (Koch) . . Cover-glass Preparation of Gholews eiecta on Damp Tien, x 600 .(Koch) . . . Section of the tints Membrane of. a Gholers, fuvonting, x 600 (Koch) . : “ . . A ‘ 7 * PAGE 237 239 240 241 248 249 253 258 263 331 332 333 341 342 342 343 344 344 345 346 348 349 349 349 350 356 356 357 361 361 362 362 362 363 363 363 364 FIG, 154. 155. 156. 157. 158. 159. 160. 161. 162, 163. 164, 165. 166. 167. 168. 169. 170. 171. 172. 173. 174, 175. 176. 177. 178. 179. 180. 181. 182. 183. 184. 185. 186. 187, 188. 189. 190. 191. 192. 193. 191. LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Pure-cultivations in Nutrient Gelatine of Koch’s and of Finkler’s Comma-bacilli (E.M.C.) Comma-shaped Organisms with other Bacteria in ‘ Sewapedbli taminated Water, x .1200 Comma-bacilli of the Mouth, x 700 (Van inicn sei F Finkler’s Comma-bacilli, from Cholera nostras, x 700 (Fliigge) Deneke’s Comma- bacilli, from Cheese, x 700 (Fliigge) Pure-cultivation of the Spirillum Finkler-Prior, in Nutrient Gelatine (E.M.C.) Tropical Dysentery ; Mucous Hombrane of Large Intestine (Hamilton) Tubercle of the Lung in a very Early Stage, x 400 (Hamilton) Primary Tubercle of Lung two to three weeks old, x 50 (Hamilton) Large Oval Giant Cell.from Tubercle of Lung, x 300 (Hamilton) . Bacillus Tuberculosis, from Tubercular Sputum, x 2500 (E.M.C.) . Pure-cultivation of the Tubercle Bacillus on Glycerine Agar-agar (E.M.C.) : . Pure-cultivation in Sigeorine tea ee after ten months’ erat (E.M.C.) : i : Pure-cultivations of Tubercle Batiae in niG@iyeeriae heeacar a sub- culture from a Pure-culture in Glycerine Milk (E.M.C.). : Section through a Lupus Nodule of the Nose (Hamilton) Tubercular Ulceration of Mucosa of Ileum (Hamilton) Section of Lupus of the Skin; Giant Cell containing Tubercle Bacillus (Fliigge) . F : . Tuberculosis of Pleura; “ Grave Hivaass am (E.M.C.) : : . Tubercular Ulceration of the Intestine of a Cow (E.M.C.) Tubercular Ulceration of the Intestine of a Rabbit (E.M.C,). Tubercular Lungs of Rabbit (E.M.C.) . : é Cover-glass Preparation of Pus from aChancre, x 1050 (Lustgarten) Wandering Cell containing Bacilli (Lustgarten) Section of Liver from a Case of Actinomycosis in Man (E.M. C. ) Actinomycotic Tumour in the Throat of a Steer (E.M.C) ci Actinomycotic Tumour of the.Cheek (E.M.C.). Steer with Emaciation the Result of Actinomyeosis (E.M.C. ) Actinomycotic Growths from the Pleura resembling “ Grape- Disease ” (E.M.C.) . . at . ‘ Actinomycosis of the Skin (E.M. C. Jaa . Part of Human Foot with Madura Disease (E. M. C. i Bacilli of Glanders, x 700 (Fliigge) . Section of a Branch of the Pulmonary hechery dhowtine Gianders Bacilli penetrating the Wall (Hamilton) Pure-culture of the Tetanus Bacillus in@rape-sugar Gelatine (Friinkel and Pfeiffer) Foot of Sheep showing Disease of Henn (Brown) Section through the Foot showing a Crack extending through the Wall. . . . Secreting Membrane Savoted with Pingel Growths (Brown) Advanced Form of Disease of Skin between the Claws (Brown) Distortion of Hoof in an Advanced Form of Foot-rot (Brown) Diseased Comb. (Cowan) 5 ‘ - : 5 Spores of Bacillus Alvei (E.M.C. ) é . ‘ Pure-culture in Nutrient Gelatine (Cheshire wack Cheyne) xix PAGE 365 366 367 367 367 370 372 376 377 377 379 380 381 381 387 388 389 390 393 395 396 410 410- 417 424 424 425 425 430 448 452 453 458 465 465 466 466 467 469 470 470 XX Fig, 195. 196. 197. 198. 199. 200. 201. 202. 203. 204. 205, 206. 207. 208. 209. 210. 211, 212. 213. 214, 215. 216. 217, 218. 219, 220. 221. 292, 223, 204, 295. 226. 297, 228. 229, 230. 231. 232. 233. 234. 235. 236. 237, 938. 239, 240. 241. 242, LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. PAGE Cultivation on the Surface of Gelatine (Cheshire and Cheyne) . 471 Cladothrix Dichotoma (Zopf) . . : - . . 479 Friedlander’s Pneumococcus, x 1500 (Zopf) . . 483 Ascococcus Billrothii (Cohn) . i e : . . 498 Clostridium Butyricum (Prazmowski) . 7 . : . 503 Bacillus Cyanogenus, x 650 (Neelsen) 5 507 Pure-cultivation of Bacillus figurans on the Sarface of Wutrient Agar-agar (E.M.C.)_. 509 Photograph of Part of an iapeeseten Deepaation of Bacillus figurans on Nutrient Gelatine, x 50 (E.M.C.) ‘ . 510 Part of the same Specimen, x 200 : : ; 510 Bacillus Indicus : Colonies in Agar, x 60 ; . 518 Bacillus Neapolitanus, x 700 (Emmerich) 3 : . 522 Bacillus Megatherium (De Bary) 2 . 524 Pure-culture of Bacillus Megatherium in Gdinting (KE. M. C.) . 524 Bacillus Putrificus Coli, x 1000 (Bienstock) . . ‘ . 529 Bacillus Pyogenes Feetidus, x 790 (Passet) . : 5 . 530 Bacillus Saprogenes, No. 1 (Rosenbach) ‘ . 531 Bacillus Subtilis with Spores (Baumgarten) 535 Pure-culture of Bacillus Subtilis in Nutrient Gelatine (Gagupanteny 535 Pure-culture of Bacillus Subtilis on the Surface of Nutrient Agar (E.M.C) : - : : i . 536 Bacterium Zopfii (Kurth) : . = . es . 542 Beggiatoa Alba (Zopf) . - : . . 543 Phase-forms of Beggiatoa Persicina (Warning) . 544 Cladothrix Dichotoma (Zopf) F 3 2 : . 545 Crenothrix Kiibniana (Zopf) . : . 546 Leuconostoc Mesenteroides (Van Tieghem gal Gieniowaki) : 550 Micrococcus in Pyamia in Rabbits (Koch) . : 556 Proteus Mirabilis ; Swarming Islands on the Surface of Gelatine, x 285 (Hauser) : s . 561 Proteus Mirabilis ; Involution Forms, x 524 (Hanser) 5 ‘ 561 Proteus Vulgaris, x 285 (Hauser) 2 : . 2 . 562 Sarcina, x 600 (Fliigge) ‘ - : : : 563 Spirocheta Plicatile (E.M.C,) . z " . 566 Cormma-bacilli in Water contaminated with Sewage . . 567 Comma-bacilli of the Mouth, x 700 (Van Ermengem) ; . 568 Deneke’s Comma-bacilli, from Cheese, x 700 (Fliigge) ‘i . 568 Streptococcus in Progressive Tissue Necrosis in Mice (Koch) . 571 Vibrio Rugula, x 1020 (Prazmowski) . 5 . 574 Black Torula; Pure-cultivation on Potato (E, M. C.) : . 581 Head and Neck of Calf with Advanced Ringworm (Brown) . . 585 Non-pigmented Amceboid Forms (Marchiafava and Celli) . . 590 Pigmented Amceboid Forms (Golgi) . é . 590 Semi-lunar Bodies of Laveran (Golgi) . . 590 Rosette Forms with Segmentation (Golgi) ‘ : . 591 Hipgellates Forms (Vandyke Carter) . 591 “Surra” Parasites, occurring Singly and Fused, x 1200 : . 598 Parasites in the Blood of Rats (Lewis) : ‘ : 599 A Monad in Rat’s Blood, x 3000 (E.M.C.) : : : 601 Monads in Rat’s Blood, x 1200 (E.M.C.) ; 602 Monads in Rat’s Blood stained with Methyl Violet, x 1200 , M.C. ) 603 270. 271. 272. 273. LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, . Organisms in the Blood of Mud-fish (Mitrophanow) . Organisms in the Blood of the Carp (Mitrophanow) ». Amoeba cola in Intestinal Mucus (Lisch) . Warm Stage (Schafer) . Warm Stage (Stricker) . . Combined Gas Chamber and Wert Stage (Stricker) . Vertical Micro-photographic Apparatus (Leitz) . Koch’s Steam Steriliser (Muencke). . Hot-air Steriliser (Muencke) . Section of Hot-air Steriliser: (Maencke) . Hot-water Filtering Apparatus with Ring Burner (Rohrbeck) . Wire-cage for Test-tubes (Muencke) , 5. Platinum-needles (E.M.C.) . Damp Chamber for Plate-cultivations (B. M.C. 5 . Apparatus for Plate-cultivations (E.M.C.) . Box for Glass-plates (Muencke) . Glass Benches for Glass-plates (Becker) . Israel’s Case (Becker) . Damp Chamber for Potato Gaitivatious (E.M. ¢. ) . Koch’s Serum Steriliser (Muencke) . Serum Inspissator (Muencke) . D’Arsonval’s Incubator (Muencke) . Schlosing’s Membrane Regulator (Muencke) 266. 267. 268. 269. ? Gas Burner protected with Mica Cylinder (Muencke) Koch’s Safety Burner (Muencke) : Babés’ Incubator (Muencke) 2 Moitessier’s Gas-pressure Regulator (Muencke) Reichert’s Thermo-regulator (Muencke) Meyer’s Thermo-regulator (Muencke) . Siphon Bottle with Flexible Tube, Glass Boze, anda , Mohr's s fiugh- cock (.M.C.) . Desiccator (E.M.C.) DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE I. Bacteria, Schizomycetes, or Fission Fungi. Following p. 14. 1. Cocci singly and varying in size. 2. Cocci in chains or rosaries (strepto- coccus). 3. Cocci in a mass (staphylococcus), 4 and 5. Cocci in pairs (diplococcus). 6. Cocciin groups of four (merismopedia). 7. Cocci in packets (sarcina), 8. Bacterium termo. 9. Bacterium termo x 4000 (Dallinger and Drysdale). 10. Bacterium septicemie hemorrhagice. 11. Bacterium pneu- monie croupose. 12. Bacilius subtilis. 13. Bacillus murisepticus. 14. Bacillus diphtheria. 15. Bacillus typhosus (Eberth). 16. Spirillwm undula (Cohn). 17. Spirillum volutans (Cohn). 18. Spirillum cholere Asiatice. 19. Spirillum Obermeierit (Koch). 20. Spirocheta plicatilis (Fliigge). 21. Vibrio rugula (Prazmowski). 22. Cladothrix Férsteri (Cohn). 23. Cladothria dichotoma (Cohn). 24. Monas Okenii (Cohn). 25. Monas Warmingit (Cohn). 26. Rhabdomonas rosea (Cohn). 27. Spore-formation (Bacillus alvei). 28. Spore-formation (Bacillus anthracis), 29. Spore-formation in bacilli cultivated from a rotten melon (Frankel and Pfeiffer). 30. Spore-formation in bacilli cultivated from earth (Frankeland Pfeiffer). 31. Involution-form of Crenothria (Zopt). 32. Involution-forms of Vibrio serpens (Warming). 33. Involution- forms of Vibrio rugula (Warming). 34. Involution-forms of Clostridium polymyxa (after Prazmowski). 35. Involution-forms of Spirillum cholere Asiatice. 36. Involution-forms of Bacterium aceti (Zopf and Hansen). 37. Spirulina-form of Beggiatoa alba (Zopf). 38. Various thread-forms of Bacterium merismopedioides (Zopf). 39. False-branching of Cladothria (Zopf). DESCRIPTION OF PLATE II. Pure-cultivations of Bacteria. Following p. 100. Fie. 1.—Jn the depth of Nutrient Gelatine. A pure-cultivation of Koch's comma-bacillus (Spirillum cholere Asiatice) showing in the track of the needle a funnel-shaped area of liquefaction enclosing an air-bubble, and a white thread. Similar appearances are produced in cultivations of the comma-bacillus of Metchnikoff. Fie. 2.—On the surface of Nutrient Gelatine. A pure-cultivation of Bacillus typhosus on the surface of cbliquely solidified nutrient gelatine. xxii DESCRIPTION OF PLA'TES. Xxiil \ Fig. 3.—On the surface of Nutrient Agar-agar. Pure-cultivation of Bacillus indicus on the surface of obliquely solidified nutrient agar-agar. The growth has the colour of red sealing-wax, and a peculiar crinkled appearance. After some days it loses its bright colour and becomes purplish, like an old cultivation of Micrococcus prodigiosus. Fie. 4.—On the surface of Nutrient Agar-agar. A pure-cultivation obtained from an abscess (Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus). Fig. 5.—On the surface of Nutrient Agar-agar. A pure-cultivation obtained from green pus (Bacillus pyocyaneus). The growth forms a whitish, transparent layer, composed of slender bacilli, and the green pigment is diffused throughout the nutrient jelly. The growth appears green by transmitted light, owing to the colour of the jelly behind it. Fig. 6—On the surface of Potato. A pure-cultivation of the bacillus of glanders on the surface of sterilised potato. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE III. Plate-cultivation. Following p. 108. This represents the appearance of a plate-cultivation of the comma-bacillus of Cholera nostras, when it is examined over a slab of blackened plate-glass. The drawing was made from a typical result of thinning out the colonies by the process of plate-cultivation. At this stage they were completely isolated one from the other; but later they became confluent, and produced complete liquefaction of the gelatine. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IV. Streptococcus Pyogenes, Following p. 178. Fia. 1—From a cover-glass preparation of pus from a pyzemic abscess. Stained with gentian-violet by the method of Gram, and contrast-stained with eosin. x 1200. Powell and Lealand’s apochromatic #, Hom. imm. E. P. 10. Fig. 2.—From cover-glass preparations of artificial cultivations of the strepto- coccus in broth and in milk at different stages of growth. x 1200. Powell and Lealand's apocbromatic #; Hom. imm. E. P. 10. In these preparations there is a great diversity in size and form of the chains and their component elements. In the drawing examples are figured of the following: (a) Branched chains, (0) Simple chains composed of elements much smaller than the average size. (ce) Chains with spherical and spindle-shaped elements at irregular intervals. These are conspicuous by their size, and are sometimes terminal, (d e) Chains in which the elements are more or less uniform in size. (7) Complex chains with elements dividing both longitudinally and transversely, and varying considerably in size in different lengths of the same chain. XxiV DESCRIPTION OF PLATES, DESCRIPTION OF PLATE V. Bacillus Anthracis. Following p. 192. Fie. 1.—From a cover-glass preparation of blood from the spleen of a guinea- pig inoculated with blood from a sow. x 1200. Powell and Lealand’s apochromatic ~, Hom. imm. LE. P. 10. Fig. 2.—From a section of a kidney of a mouse. Under a low power the preparation has exactly the appearance of an injected specimen. Under higher amplification the bacilli are seen to have threaded their way along the eapillaries between the tubules, and to have collected in masses in the glomeruli. Stained with Gram’s method (gentian-violet), and eosin. x p00. Fic. 3.— Bacillus anthracis and Micrococcus tetragenus. From a section from the lungs of a mouse which had been inoculated with anthrax three days after inoculation with Micrococcus tetragenus. A double or mixed infection resulted. Anthrax-bacilli occurred in vast numbers, completely filling the small vessels and capillaries, and in addition there were great numbers of tetrads. Stained by Gram’s method (gentian-violet), and with eosin. x 500. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VI. Bacillus Murisepticus. Following p. 224. Fig. 1.—From a section of a kidney of a mouse which had died after inocula tion with a pure-cultivation of the bacillus. With moderate amplification, the white blood-corpuscles have a granular appearance, and irregular granular masses are scattered between the kidney tubules. Stained by Gram’s method with eosin. x 200. Fig. 2.—Part of the same preparation with high amplification. The granular appearances are found to be due to the presence of great numbers of extremely minute bacilli. x 1500. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VII. Casual Cow-pox. Following p. 278. Fic. 1—Case of W. P——,a milker, infected from the teats of a cow with natural cow-pox. There was a large depressed vesicle with a small central crust and a tumid margin, the whole being surrounded by a well-marked areola and considerable surrounding induration. Fie, 2.—The same case a week later, showing a reddish-brown crust on a reddened elevated and indurated base. DESCRIPTION OF ‘PLATES, XXV DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VIII. Bacillus diphtheriz and Bacillus typhosus, Following p. 332. FiG. 1.—Cover-glass preparation from « pure-cultivation of Bacillus diph- theriz on blood serum ; obtained from the throat in a typical case of diphtheria. Stained with gentian-violet. x 1200. Fig. 2.—Cover-glass preparation from a pure-cultivation of Bacillus typhosus on nutrient-agar; from the spleen in a case of typhoid fever, Stained with gentian-violet. x 1200. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES IX, AND X. Swine Fever. Following p. 348. PLATE IX.—Part of intestine from a typical case of swine fever, showing scattered ulcers and ulceration of the ileo-czecal valve. PLATE X.—From the same case of swine fever. The lungs were extensively inflamed and partly consolidated, and the lymphatic glands were enlarged and of a deep red or reddish-purple colour. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE NI. Bacillus tuberculosis. Following p. 378, The figures in this’plate represent the bacilli of tuberculosis in different animals, examined under the same’ conditions of amplifica- tion and illumination. x 1200. Lamp-light illumination, Fig. 1—Bacilli in pus from the wall of a human tubercular cavity. In this specimen the bacilli are shorter than those in tubercular sputum, and are very markedly beaded. Fig. 2.—Bacilli in pus from a tubercular cavity from another case in man. They are present in the preparation in enormous numbers. The proto- plasm occupies almost the whole of the sheath, and the bacilli are strikingly thin and long. Fig. 3.—Bacilli in sputum from an advanced case of phthisis, showing the ordinary appearance of bacilli in sputum; some beaded, others stained in their entirety; occurring both singly and in pairs, and in groups resembling Chinese letters. Me Fria. 4.—Bacilli in a section from the lung in a case of tuberculosis in man. The bacilli in human tuberculosis are found in, and between, the tissue cells ; and sometimes, as in equine and bovine tuberculosis, in the interior of giant cells, but not so commonly. Fic. 5.—From a cover-glass preparation of the deposit in a sample of milk from a tubercular cow. The bacilli were longer than the average length of bacilli in bovine tissue sections, and many were markedly beaded. Xxvi DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Fig. 6.—From a section of the brain in a case of tubercular meningitis in a calf, showing a giant cell containing bacilli with the characters usually found in sections of bovine tuberculosis. Fic. 7.—From a section of the liver of a pig with tubercle bacilli at the margin of a caseous nodule. Fig. 8.—From a cover-glass preparation of a crushed caseous mesenteric gland from a rabbit infected by ingestion of milk from a cow with tuberculosis of the udder. Fig, 9.—From a section of lung in a case of equine tuberculosis, showing a giant cell crowded with tubercle bacilli. Fie. 10.—From a section of lung from a case of tuberculosis in the cat, ‘with very numerous tubercle bacilli. Fig. 11.—From a cover-glass preparation of a crushed caseous nodule from the liver of a fowl, with masses of bacilli. These are for the most part short, straight rods; but other forms, varying from long rods to mere granules, are also found. Fig. 12.—From sections of the liver and of the lung in a case of tubercu- losis of a Rhea. Isolated bacilli are found, as well as bacilli packed in large cells, colonies of sinuous bacilli, and very long forms with terminal spore-like bodies and free oval grains, The preparations from which these figures were drawn were all stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method, with the exception of the first, which was stained by Ehrlich’s method. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XII. Tubercular Mamumitis. Following p. 394. Fic. 1.—From a section of the udder of a milch cow.. The tubercular deposit is seen to invade the lobules of the gland. Lobules comparatively healthy are marked off, more or less sharply, from the diseased ones in which the new growth in its progress compresses and obliterates the alveoli. Stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method and with methylene-blue. x 50. Fig. 2.—Part of the same preparation. On the right of the section part of a healthy lobule is seen. On the left a lobule is invaded by tubercular new growth composed of round cells, epithelioid cells and typical giant cells. Tubercie bacilli can be seen both singly and collected in groups. They are found in and between the cells, and in the interior of giant cells. Bacilli may be seen between the cells lining an alveolus and projecting into its lumen. x 800. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XIII. Tuberculosis in Swine. Following p. 400. Section of liver of a pig with scattered tubercular nodules. Microscopical sections of the liver showed tubercle bacilli in very small numbers. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. XXVil DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XIV. Bacillus Lepre. Following p. 408. Fig. 1.—From a section of the skin of a leper. The section is, almost in - its entirety, stained red, jand, with moderate amplification, has a finely granular appearance.%, Stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method (carbolised fuchsine and methylene-blue). x 200. Fie. 2.—Part of the same preparation with high amplification, showing that the appearances described above are due entirely to an invasion of the tissue by the bacilli of leprosy. x 1500. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XV. AND XVI. Actinomyces. Following p. 432. PLATE XV, Fic. 1.—From a preparation of the grains from an actinomycotic abscess in a boy; examined in glycerine. The drawing -has been made of a com- plete rosette examined by focussing successively the central and peripheral portions. Towards the centre the extremities of the clubs are alone visible; they vary in size, and if pressed upon by the cover-glass give the appearance of an irregular mosaic.. Towards the periphery the clubs are seen in profile, and their characteristic form recognised. At one part there are several elongated elements, composed of separate links. x 1200. Fig. 2.—Different forms of clubs from preparations in which the rosettes have been flattened out by gentle pressure on the cover-glass. x 2500. (a) Single club. (0) Bifid club. (¢) Club giving rise to four secondary clubs. (d@) Four clubs connected together, recalling the form of a bunch of bananas. (¢) Mature club with a lateral bud. (/) Apparently a further development of the condition represented at (e). ‘(g) Club with a lateral bud and transverse segmentation. (/) Single club with double tranverse segmenta- tion.. (4) Club with oblique segmentation. (j) Collection of four clubs, one with lateral gemmation, another with oblique segmentation, (#) Club with lateral buds on both sides, and cut off square at the extremity. (2) Club with a daughter club which bears at its extremity two still smaller clubs. (m) Club divided by transverse segmentation into four distinct elements. (nm) Elongated club composed of several distinct elements, (0) and (p) Clubs with terminal gemmation. (g) Palmate group of clubs. (r) Trilobed club. (s) Club with apparently a central channel. (¢) Filament bearing terminally a highly refractive oval body. PuatE XVI. Fig. 1—From a section of a portion of the growth removed from a boy during life. The tissue was hardened in alcohol, and cut in celloidin. The section was stained by Gram’s method and with orange-rubin. x 50. Fig. 2.—From the same section. A mass of extremely fine filaments occupies the central part of the rosette. Many of the filaments have a terminal enlargement. The marginal part shows a palisade of clubs stained by the orange-rubin. x 500. ' XXVili DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Fias. 3 and 4.—From cover-glass preparations of the fungus teased out of the new growths produced by inoculation of a calf with pus from a boy suffering from pulmonary actinomycosis. Stained by Gram’s method and orange-rubin. The threads’ are stained blue and the clubs crimson (a) In the younger clubs the thread can be traced into the interior of. the club (b). In some of the older clubs the central portion takes a yellowish stain, and in others the protoplasm is not continued as a thread, but is collected into a spherical or ovoid or pear-shaped mass. In others, again, irregular grains stained blue are scattered throughout the central portion (Fig. 4). » 1200. ; ¥ic. 5.—From a pure-culture on glycerine-agar. (@) branching filaments, (6) a mass of entangled filaments. Gram’s method. x 1200. Fig. 6.—From a similar but older cultivation. (a) a filament with spores, (2) chains of spores simulating streptococci. Gram’s method. x 1200. DESCRIPTION OF* PLATES XVII. AND XVIII. Actinomycosis Bovis. Following p. 434. PLATE XVII. Section of an actinomycotic tongue stained by the method of Gram and with eosin. Fig. 1.—This illustrates the appearance which is usually seen under a low power, when a section is stained by Gram’s method and with eosin. The central portion of a mass of the fungus is either unstained or tinged with eosin, while the marginal portion is stained blue. The reverse is seen, as a rule, in sections from man ; although under a low power the general appear- ance of sections from these two sources is somewhat similar. x 50. FG, 2.—a, 8, ¢, d, represent the earliest recognisable forms of the ray fungus in the interior of leucocytes. In ¢ the club-forms can be recognised. In f and g there are small stellate groups of clubs. x 500. Fig. 3.—A part of the section represented in Fig, 1, under a high power. The marginal line of blue observed under a low power is now recognised as the result of the stain being limited to the peripherally arranged clubs. At (a) part of a rosette has undergone calcification ; the clubs are granular, and have not retained the stain. At (b) and close to it there are the remains of rosettes in which the process of calcification is almost complete. x 500. PLATE XVIII. The figures in this plate are taken from sections of a case of so-called “osteosarcoma,” in which the growth of the fungus was remarkably luxuriant. The specimens were stained by Plauts’ method. Fig. 1.—Different forms of clubs in different specimens: x 1200. (a) Very small club-shaped elements. (6) A club with transverse segmentation. (ce) A club with lateral daughter clubs. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. Xxix (d and e) Clubs with terminal offshoots resembling teleutospores. (f) A club with developing daughter clubs on the left, and on the right a mature secondary club. : (g) A segmental club with lateral offshoots. (i) Two clubs undergoing calcification. Fig. 2.—A very remarkable stellate growth comprised of nine wedge-shaped collections of clubs radiating from a mass of finely granular material. x 500. Fie. 3.—A rosette undergoing central calcification, and consisting in part of extremely elongated clubs resembling paraphyses. Calcareous matter is also being deposited in the club-shaped structures. x 500. Fig. 4.—Part of a rosette with continuation of the club-shaped bodies into transversely segmented branching cells apparently representing short hbyphe. x 500. Fie. 5.—A rosette from another section in which similar appearances are observed as in Fig. 4. x 500, DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XIX, Pure-cultivations of Actinomyces. Following p. 488. These tubes were selected from a great number of cultivations in which there were different appearances. In some instances the growths had a faint tinge of pink. Fig. 1.—Pure-cultivation on the surface of potato, showing a luxuriant sulphur-yellow growth entirely composed of entangled masses of fila- ments. After three months’ growth. Fig. 2.—Pure-culture from the same series, on glycerine-agar. In this case the culture remained perfectly white. The jelly was coloured reddish- brown. After fifteen months’ growth. Fig. 3.—Pure-culture on glycerine-agar in which the growth was dark- brown, in parts black, and the jelly stained dark-brown. After nearly two years’ growth. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XX. AND XXI. Actinomycosis Bovis. Following p. 440. PLATE XX. Fig. 1.—From a section of an actinomycotic tongue stained by the triple method (Ziehl-Neelsen, logwood and orange-rubin). In this section the separate centres of growth are clearly shown. Each neoplasm consists of a fungus system, in which the masses of the fungus, situated more or less centrally, are surrounded with round cells, epithelioid cells, sometimes giant cells, and lastly fibrous tissue forming a more or less distinct capsule. In parts the fungi have fallen out of the section. x 50. Fig. 2.—From a section of a “tubercular” nodule from the lungs of a Norfolk heifer with pulmonary actinomycosis. The nodule is a multiple growth surrounding a bronchus, and is enclosed by a capsule, in the XXX DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. vicinity of which the pulmonary alveoli are compressed. It is composed of a number of separate neoplasms, and each of the latter is composed of secondary centres of growth resembling the giant-cell systems of bacillary tuberculosis. The new growth is composed of ray-fungi, large multi- nucleated cells, sometimes distinct giant cells, round cells, epithelioid cells, and, surrounding them, fibrous tissue. On examination of the same specimen with a higher power the typical rosettes of clubs are sometimes surrounded by multinucleated cells, and sometimes small rosettes are found like tubercle bacilli, in the interior of giant cells. From a pre- paration stained by Ziehl-Neelsen, logwood, and orange-rubin. x 50, PLATE XXI. Fie, 1.—(a) A leucocyte containing the fungus in its earliest recognisable form. (0) A large multinucleated cell containing the fungus in an early stage with the club-form already visible. (c) A leucocyte containing a small stellate fungus. (d) A large cell containing clubs arranged in a small rosette. (e) A multinucleated cell with clubs arranged in a palmate form. All the above are drawn from sections of actinomycotic tongues stained by the triple method. x 500. Fig. 2.—A giant cell with large vesicular nuclei at the periphery, and in the centre a fully formed rosette of actinomyces with a smaller growth within a “daughter” cell. From a section of the tongue of an ox stained by the triple method. «x 500. Fig. 3.—A very large circular giant cell, with its ring of nuclei at the periphery, enclosing several isolated tufts of actinomyces. From a section of a nodule in the lung. Stained by the triple method. x 500. Fig. 4.—Three rosettes of actinomyces surrounded by a row of large, some- what angular multinucleated cells. From a section of the tongue of an ox stained by the triple method. x 430. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXII. Bacillus tetani. Following p. 458. Fic. 1.—From a cover-glass preparation of a pure-cultivation of the tetanus bacillus in broth; stained with Neelsen’s carbolised fuchsine. x 1200. Lamplight illumination. Fic. 2.—From a cover-glass preparation from the same source; stained with Neelsen’s solution and methylene blue. x 1200. Lamplight illumination. PART I. THEORETICAL AND TECHNICAL. BACTERIOLOGY AND INFECTIVE DISEASES. CHAPTER I. HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION. Tue researches of Pasteur into the réle played by bacteria in the processes of fermentation and putrefaction, and the investigations of the practical mind of Lister, with the resulting evolution of antiseptic surgery, demonstrated the necessity for a more intimate acquaint- ance with the life-history of these micro-organisms. Further re- searches in diseases such as anthrax, the silkworm malady, pyemia, septicemia, and fowl-cholera, invested the science of Bacteriology with universal interest and vast importance; while the investiga- tions which established an intimate connection between bacteria and other infective diseases, and more especially the discovery by Koch of bacteria in tuberculosis and in Asiatic cholera, claimed the attention of the whole thinking world. Those bacteria which are connected with disease, and more especially those which have been proved to be the causa causans, are of predominant interest and importance. The first attempt to demonstrate the existence of a contagium vivum dates back almost to the discovery of the microscope. Athanasius Kircher, nearly two and a half centuries ago, expressed his belief that there were definite micro-organisms to which diseases were attributable. The microscope had revealed that all decom- posing substances swarmed with countless micro-organisms which were invisible to the naked eye, and Kircher sought for similar organisms in diseases which he considered might be due to their agency. The microscope which he described obviously could not 1 2 BACTERIOLOGY. admit of the possibility of studying, or even detecting, the micro- organisms which are now known to be associated with certain diseases ; and it is not surprising that his teachings did not at the time gain much attention. They were destined, however, to receive a great impetus from the discoveries which emanated from ‘the father of microscopy.” Antony van Leeuwenhoek had learned as a youth to grind and polish lenses, and later in life employed his spare time in constructing microscopes, and in conducting those researches which have made for him a name which is familiar to all microscopists. His researches were published in a series of letters to the Royal Society. In 1675 he described extremely minute organisms in rain-water, well-water, infusions of pepper, hay, and other vegetable and animal substances, in saliva, and in scrapings from the teeth; and, further, he was able to differentiate these minute living things by their size, their form, and the character of their movements. In 1683 these discoveries were illustrated by means of woodcuts, and there can be little doubt, from the drawings of these micro-organisms, that they are intended to represent leptothrix filaments, vibrios, and spirilla. Indeed, we can almost recognise these micro-organisms as bacteria from Leeuwenhoek’s graphic descriptions, apart from his figures. They were described as moving in the most characteristic manner, progressing with great rapidity, or spinning round like a top, and so excessively minute that they were only perceived with great difficulty. The smallest forms could hardly be examined individually ; but, viewed en masse, they closely resembled a swarm of gnats or flies. In another communication, published in 1692, he gives some idea of the size of these animalcules by stating that they were a thousand times smaller than a grain of sand. Others which were, comparatively speaking, of considerable length, were characterised by their peculiar mode of progression, bending and rolling on themselves—movements which, he adds, created both delight and astonishment in the mind of the observer. Leeuwenhoek himself was not disposed to believe in the possibility of such organisms being found in the blood in disease; but as soon as he had proved the actual existence of such minute creatures, theoretical © physicians were not wanting who at once attributed various maladies to their agency. Among these, Nicholas Andry is made conspicuous by his work published in 1701. Andry classed the minute organisms discovered by Leeuwenhoek as worms. In 1718 Lancisi believed that the deleterious effect of the air of malarial districts depended upon animalcules, and others considered HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION. 3 that the plague in Toulon and Marseilles in 1721 arose from a similar cause. In fact, by some, all diseases were attributed to vermicules, and this led to the theory being ridiculed and discredited. In spite of adverse criticism, the theory of contagium vivum survived, and Linnzus acknowledged it by placing the micro- organisms discovered by Leeuwenhoek, the contagia of specific fevers, and the causes of putrefaction and fermentation, into one class—‘“‘ chaos.” The theory was further supported by the writings of Plenciz, who, in 1762, very ably discussed the nature of contagium, as well as the relation of animalcules to putrefaction and disease. However, no proofs in support of these theories were forthcoming, and gradually the idea of contagium vivum fell into obscurity, and indeed came to be regarded by some as an absurd hypothesis. Though a causal relation of animalcules to diseases was for a time discredited, the natural history of these micro-organisms was studied with increasing interest. In 1778 Baron Gleichen described and figured a great number of micro-organisms which he had discovered in various vegetable infusions. Joblot, Lesser, Réaumur, Hill, and many others worked at the same subject, Hill remarked that there was hardly the least portion of matter or the least drop of fluid of any kind naturally found in the earth, which was not inhabited by multitudes of animalcules. But these observers inclined rather to searching for new forms than to studying more thoroughly those which had been already discovered; and, as a result, but little scientific progress was made until the time of Miiller, of Copen- hagen. Miiller, in 1786, criticised the work of previous writers, and pointed out that they had been too much occupied with merely finding new micro-organisms. Miiller took into account the form of the micro-organism, its mode of progression, and other biological characters, and on such data based a classification. Thus the scientific knowledge of these minute beings was considerably advanced by his writings and illustrations. The subject which now eclipsed all others in interest was the origin of these micro-organisms. Two rival theories were widely discussed—spontaneous generation, and development from pre-exist- ing germs; and the researches that were made in the course of this discussion, and the discoveries which resulted, indirectly yet materially advanced the germ theory of disease, and explain many of the phenomena in the life-history of the pathogenic microbes which have been brought to light in recent years. Spontaneous development of micro-organisms in putrescible infusions was believed in by many, but was supported by no one 4 BACTERIOLOGY. with greater persistency than Needham. Needham found that animalcules readily developed when meat infusion was boiled an transferred to a well-stoppered flask, and he could only explain this by supposing that they originated spontaneously from the material of the infusion. In 1768 Bonnet strenuously opposed these conclusions on purely theoretical grounds, and maintained that it was far more probable that the ova of the animalcules were present in the infusions or were suspended in the air enclosed in the flask. Spallanzani was the first to demonstrate by experiment the correctness of Bonnet’s arguments, It occurred to him to boil the infusion in flasks, and to seal the vessels during the process of boiling. As a result the flasks remained free from putrefaction, and animalcules only developed when the infusion was exposed to the air by making a hole in the flask. That Spallanzani’s experiments were reliable, and his conclusions correct, was evidenced by the fact that his simple precaution led to great practical results, as Francois Appert introduced, on this principle, the method of preserving meats, vegetables, and other provisions. The disciples of Needham nevertheless brought forward counter objections. Treviranus urged that a certain quantity and quality of air was necessary for the spontaneous development of these infusoria, and that by sealing the flasks, too small a quantity of air was in contact with the infusion, and, further, that this air had become changed in quality by the process of boiling. Spallanzani argued against these objections, but did not support his opinions by further experiments, so that the question remained for a time undecided. In 1836 Francis Schulze devised an experiment which brought still further evidence against Needham’s theory. Schulze filled a glass vessel half full with distilled water and different animal and vegetable substances. This was plugged with a doubly-bored cork, and through each perforation a glass tube was introduced, bent at a right angle. On boiling the flask, steam issued freely from each tube, and all parts were thoroughly sterilised. Each tube was then connected with a bulbed tube, one bulb containing concentrated sulphuric acid and the other a solution of potash, Fresh air was drawn into the flask by aspiration, and this was deprived of any germs which might be present by its passage through the sulphuric acid. The result was that the infusion remained without any development of micro-organisms. When, on the other hand, air was admitted without first being drawn through the sulphuric acid, the n asion in a short time teemed with animalcules. In other words, HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION. 5 Schulze demonstrated that in spite of free access to air, which had not been heated, the infusions remained free from germs. Schwann, in 1837, arrived at similar results. He found that putrescible substances remained sterile if exposed to an abundant supply of air which was heated by being passed through a melted mix- ture of metals. This convinced him that the cause of the decompo- sition which would otherwise have occurred must exist in the air. The objection remained that in the experiments of Schulze and Schwann, the air which was admitted to the flasks had undergone either a chemical or a thermal change, and therefore the theory of Needham was not yet entirely disposed of. In 1854 the final blow was dealt by Schriéder and Van Dusch. These investigators demonstrated that decomposition could be obviated without resorting either to thermal or chemical treatment of the air, as simple filtration of the air through cotton-wool was shown to be efficacious in excluding germs. Finally, Hoffman in 1860, and independently, Chevreuil and Pasteur in 1861, showed that even cotton-wool could be dispensed with, as a sterile solution would remain sterile when the neck of the vessel was bent into an S-shaped curve. Micro-organisms in the air entering the flask were deposited by gravitation in the bend of the tube. The advocates of spontaneous generation were ready with fresh objections. They now urged that the medium lost its power of undergoing decomposition by being boiled. This objection was at once set aside by the fact that when unfiltered air was admitted to the infusion, decomposition set in. Additional evidence was brought against spontaneous generation by the experiments of Pasteur, Burdon Sanderson, Lister, and others, in which it was shown that blood, urine, and milk would remain without decomposition, when all precautions were adopted to avoid contamination in filling the sterilised flasks. Even at this stage of this great scientific controversy fresh difficulties arose, for it was found that in certain solutions which had been boiled and hermetically sealed in flasks micro-organisms made their appearance. In 1872 Charlton Bastian published a research which was to prove that spontaneous generation actually took place. Decoctions of turnip and cheese which had been filtered, neutralised, and boiled for ten minutes, and hermetically sealed during the boiling, were found after a time to contain micro organisms. These results, however, were before long explained by the fact that in milk, infusions of hay, and certain other decoctions, the spores of bacilli are present, which are much more resistant 6 BACTERIOLOGY. than the bacilli themselves. In such cases mere scalding or boiling for a few minutes will not sterilise the solution. The bacilli are destroyed, but not their spores; and if the latter remain unhurt, they will germinate, and rapidly multiply. But if, as Tyndall found, the boiling be repeated a second and a third time, all the spores will be destroyed; for in the intervals between the boilings the spores sprout into bacilli, and the bacilli at the next boiling perish ; so that after three or four repeated boilings the infusion is rendered perfectly free from germs. While this discussion was occupying the attention of the whole scientific world, some investigators had been again following up the theory of a connection between micro-organisms and disease. In 1837 Cagniard Latour and Schwann independently made the discovery that the yeast plant was a living organism, and the true cause of yeast fermentation. The close analogy between the pro- cesses of fermentation and of certain diseases had long been held; and, therefore, when it was proved that fermentation was due to a micro-organism, fresh advocates appeared in support of the theory that diseases were produced by similar agencies. Boehm, in 1838, described certain organisms in cholera, which was at that time raging in Europe; but the researches of Bassi, who a year previously had discovered the cause of a disease of silkworms, attracted much greater attention. Bassi discovered that in this disease extremely minute spores existed on the bodies of the worms, which were conveyed from the sick to the healthy. They destroyed the healthy worms by germinating in their skins and growing into their bodies. These discoveries may be said to have brought the theory of contagium vivum to life again; and Henle, in reviewing the facts of the case in 1840, came to the conclusion that the cause of all contagious diseases must be of a living nature, and this he maintained, although he had searched in vaccine and small-pox lymph, in the desquamation of scarlet fever, and in other diseases without success. Bassi’s discovery and Henle’s doctrine encouraged a number of investigators, and remarkable results followed. In favus, in herpes tonsurans, in pityriasis versicolor, fungus threads and spores were found, and were regarded as being of etiological importance, inasmuch as the morbid lesions corresponded with the growth of ‘the particular fungus. Cholera became especially a subject for research. Swaine, Brittan, and Budd found micro-organisms in choleraic dejecta. Davaine described certain monads in the intestinal contents, but no HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION. 7 causal connection was established between these organisms and the disease ; and when the cholera disappeared the interest in contagium vivum waned, and was eclipsed by the question of fermentation. The discoveries which followed in this subject had a very important bearing on the micro-parasitic origin of communicable diseases. Pasteur, following up the researches of Cagniard Latour and Schwann, demonstrated in 1857 that the lactic, acetic, and butyric fermentations were produced by micro-organisms. Previously to this, in 1850, Davaine and Rayer had noted the existence of little rod-like or filamentous bodies.about the size of a blood corpuscle in the blood of a sheep that had died of splenic fever. Pollender had seen similar bodies in the blood of cows. Davaine did not at first pay much heed to this discovery; but in 1863 he thoroughly reinvestigated the subject, and conducted a series of experiments which led. him to the conclusion that the actual cause of splenic fever was an organised being whose presence and multiplication in the blood produced changes in that fluid of the nature of fermentation, resulting in the death of the animal. These conclusions were not accepted by all, and indeed, the evidence was so far incomplete that sceptics were justified in con- sidering that these experiments afforded only a working hypothesis. But Davaine’s comparison between this disease and fermentation attracted the attention of Pasteur, whose mind had been fully trained for entering upon this investigation by the researches which he had been carrying on in the interval between Davaine’s publications of 1857 and 1863. Pasteur, as already mentioned, had been working at fermentation, and his attention was next directed to studying the so-called diseases of wines, and subsequently to a contagious disease which committed ravages among silkworms. By laborious researches Pasteur was able to confirm the belief that this disease of silkworms was due to the presence of micro-organisms discernible with the aid of the micro- scope. These oval shining bodies in the moth, worm, and eggs had been previously observed by Cornalia, and described by Nageli as Nosema bombycis, and by Lebert as Panhistophyton. But it was reserved for Pasteur to introduce a means of combating the disease. Pasteur showed that when a silkworm, whose body contained these ‘micro-organisms, was pounded up with water in a mortar, and the mixture painted with a brush on the leaves on which healthy worms were fed, they would all without fail succumb to the disease. As the contagious particles were transmitted to the eggs, a method for preventing the spread of the disease suggested itself. 8 BACTERIOLOGY. Each female moth was kept separate from the others, and allowed to deposit her eggs on a small linen cloth. The moth was then pinned to the corner of the cloth, and left for future examination. When the time for this arrived, the moth was crushed up with water in a mortar, and a drop examined under the microscope. When any trace of corpuscular matter was found to be present, the cloth with its collection of eggs was burnt; and if not, the eggs were set aside for use. Complete as this appears to be as a demonstration of a causal connection between the micro-organisms and the disease, it could obviously be objected that there was no distinct proof that the corpuscular bodies constituted the actual contagium. There was no isolation of the organisms, no artificial cultivation of them apart from the diseased moth or worm, and subsequent production of the disease by means of the isolated organisms. The same objection was applicable to Davaine’s investigations. Davaine found rods in association with anthrax, and maintained that they were causally related ; but others stated that it was possible to inoculate animals with anthrax blood containing rods, and to produce the disease without being able to detect the rods again in the blood of the animal experimented upon. It was also urged that it was possible to infect with anthrax blood after the rods had disappeared, and to find a reappearance of the bacilli in the blood of the inoculated animal. The well-known fact that anthrax was especially prevalent in certain seasons and certain localities appeared to lend great support to these objections. The disease, in fact, was regarded by some as originating from peculiar conditions of climate and soil. The fallacies in these objections were, however, rapidly dispelled. Bollinger, in 1872, pointed out that the blood, from which the rods had disappeared, was still virulent owing to the presence of the spores of the bacillus, and that it was owing to the soil being impreg- nated with these spores that the disease broke out in certain localities. Yet there still remained many who refused to regard these particles as living bodies, some looking upon them simply as crystals; and the question of their importance remained undecided for several years. In 1877 Robert Koch published a memoir in which he fully described the life-history of the anthrax or splenic fever bacillus, and gave a complete demonstration of the life-history of the micro- organism, and the definite proofs of its pathogenic properties. He pointed out how the rods grew in the blood and tissues by lengthen- HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION. 9 ing and by cross division. Further, that in the blood or in serum or in aqueous humour they not only grew into long leptothrix filaments, but they produced enormous numbers of seeds or spores. He traced, by continuous observation on the warm stage, the whole life cycle, from the fission of the rods to the formation of spores and the sprouting of the spores into fresh rods. Further, he carried on the disease by inoculating from mouse to mouse for several generations, and observed that in the blood of the animal and in the swollen spleen the glass-like rods were always to be found. Pasteur also studied the microbe of splenic fever, and amply confirmed and extended the observations of Koch by his researches on the attenuation of the anthrax virus. Pasteur also met with adverse criticism. Paul Bert argued that the bacilli were of no importance, because he could destroy them by exposing material containing them to great pressure, and yet the material produced the disease on inoculation. But such measures did not destroy the spores; and finally, Paul Bert was convinced of his error when Pasteur demonstrated cultures of the anthrax bacillus in urine, from which successive generations were started, and that with such cultivations the disease could always be produced. It was, however, principally the researches of Koch which placed the doctrine of contagiwm vivum on a scientific basis. Koch’s improvements in the methods of cultivation, his recom- mendation of the necessary microscopical apparatus, his histological methods for examining these minute organisms, and his famous postulates for proving beyond controversy the existence of specific pathogenic micro-organisms, elevated the theory of contagium vivum to a demonstrated and established fact. The chain of evidence regarded by Koch as essential for proving the existence of a pathogenic organism was as follows :— 1. The micro-organism must be found in the blood, lymph, or diseased tissue of man or animal suffering from or dead of the disease. 2. The micro-organisms must be isolated from the blood, lymph, or tissues, and cultivated in suitable media—i.e., outside the animal body. These pure cultivations must be carried on through successive generations of the organism. 3. A pure cultivation thus obtained must, when introduced into the body of a healthy animal, produce the disease in question. 4, In the inoculated animal the same micro-organism must again be found. 10 BACTERIOLOGY. The chain of evidence is still more complete if we can from artificial cultures obtain a chemical substance which is capable of producing the disease independently of living micro-organisms. It is of very little value merely to detect or artificially to cultivate a bacterium associated with disease. We must endeavour to establish the exact relationship of the bacteria to disease processes, and the determination of the true pathogenic microbe is beset with fallacies. In many diseases bacteria have been regarded as the actual contagia, until a searching inquiry by other investigators has shown that the evidence was most unsatisfactory or entirely misleading. For example, in diseases with lesions of the external or internal linings of the body, extraneous micro-organisms may get into the circulation and be swept into the internal organs, where they either perish in the battle with the healthy tissues which are opposed to their existence, or they may gain the upper hand, and set up destructive processes. Such organisms, when found in association with these diseases, may be discovered in the blood and internal organs; and though only accidental epiphytes, often associated with septic complication, they may too readily be accepted by the enthusiast as the actual contagium of the disease in .question. Tt is only when such fallacies are exposed that we are brought once more face to face with the fact that the nature of the contagium in hydrophobia, variola, vaccinia, scarlet fever, measles, and many other diseases, is still undetermined. CHAPTER II. MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. Bacteria may be considered as minute vegetable cells destitute of nuclei. They are distinguished from animal cells by being able to derive their nitrogen from ammonia compounds, and they differ from the higher vegetable cells in being unable to split up carbonic acid into its elements, owing to the absence of chlorophyll. Von Engelmann and Van Tieghem include among the bacteria certain organisms, named by them Bacterium chlorinum, Bacterium viride, and Bacillus virens, which are coloured green by this substance, but it is quite possible that they may be Alga, and further researches are required before any conclusions are definitely arrived at as to the exact place these particular organisms occupy in the vegetable kingdom. Composition.—For our knowledge of the chemical composition of bacteria we are chiefly indebted to Nencki. Their constituents are found on analysis to vary slightly, according to whether the bacteria are in zoolgcea or in the active state. In the latter condition they are said to consist of 83°42 per cent. of water. In one hundred parts of the dried constituents there are the following :— A nitrogenous body . . : : : 84:20 Fat. : ; . : : : 6-04 Ash . ; : : ; A . : 4:72 Undetermined substances . ; ‘ 5:04 This nitrogenous body is called myco-protein, and consists of Carbon ‘ ‘ . ; ‘ ‘ ‘ 52°32 Hydrogen . i : . . : 3 T55 Nitrogen. : : : ‘ ‘ : 14:75 but no sulphur or phosphorus. The nitrogenous body appears to vary in different species, for in Bacillus anthracis a substance has been obtained which does not 11 12 BACTERIOLOGY. give the reactions of myco-protein, and, therefore, is distinguished as anthrax-protein. Considering bacteria as cells, we may speak of the cell-wall and the cell-contents. The cell-wall consists of cellulose, or, according to Nencki, in the putrefactive bacteria of myco-protein. It may be demonstrated by the action of iodine, which contracts the proto- plasmic contents, and renders the cell-wall visible. By staining cover-glass preparations of the anthrax bacillus by the method of Gram, the rods are at first uniformly stained, by subjecting them to iodine solution the protoplasmic contents are contracted, and alcohol decolorises the sheath, which may be then stained in contrast, with eosin. The cell-wall may be either pliable or rigid. liability is observed in the long filaments, which are endowed with a slow vermicular movement, while rigidity accounts for the maintenance of the characteristic form of several species, such as spirilla. The cell-protoplasm yields myco-protein. In some it is homogene- ous, and in others granular. The action of the aniline dyes indicates a close relation to nuclear protoplasm, though all nuclear stains are not suitable for bacteria. In ‘some cases also the bacteria remain stained under the influence of a reagent, which removes the colour from nuclei. The power of fixing the stain is not always present, - and indicates a difference in the protoplasm of different species. Thus in staining phthisical sputum, the nitric acid removes the stain from all bacteria and bacilli present, with the exception of the tubercle bacillus. This difference in the protoplasm of different species is also illustrated by the necessity, in many cases, of using special processes, owing to the ordinary methods being unsatisfactory or not producing any result. The protoplasm of some bacteria contains starch granules ; thus Clostridium butyricum gives the starch reaction with iodine. Sulphur granules are present in some species of Beggiatoa which thrive in sulphur springs. The colouring-matter of the pigmented bacteria is probably external to the cell as a rule: for example, in Micrococcus prodigiosus the pigment granules are distictly between the cells; on the other hand, in Beggiatoa roseo-persicina, or the peach-coloured bacterium, the special pigment bacterio-purpurin appears to be dissolved in the cell protoplasm. In Bacillus pyocyaneus the pigment is certainly not localised ‘entirely in the cell, for it becomes rapidly diffused in the surrounding medium, considerably beyond the confines of the growth itself. In several species, either as a result of a secretion from the cell or MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 13 of the absorption of moisture and consequent swelling of the outer layer of the cell-wall, a mucinous or gelatinous envelope develops around them. This envelope may form a capsule, such as we meet with in certain bacteria found in the rusty sputum of pneumonia, and in Micrococcus tetragenus ; or it may occur as a continuous sheath around a chain of bacteria, which by its disappearance sets free the individual links. The capsule is soluble in water, and under some circumstances is difficult to demonstrate, In the pneumo- coccus of Friedlander the capsule disappears on cultivation, but reappears in preparations made from an inoculated animal. In the pleuritic fluid of a mouse these cocci are often found with a parti- cularly well-marked capsule, and in other encapsuled cocci the extent of the envelope has been observed to vary considerably in the same species of bacterium. When this gelatinous material forms a matrix, in which numbers of bacteria are congregated in an irregular mass, we have what is termed a zooglea. The zooglean stage is a resting stage, often preceded or followed by a motile stage. Thus bacteria may be present in a solution in an active-state, and after a time a scum or pellicle forms on the surface of the liquid, which consists of zooglea. At the edges of the zooglea, individuals may be seen to again become motile, and after detaching themselves to swim off in the surrounding fluid. The zooglean stage may be observed sometimes in cultivations in broth, and also in nutrient gelatine which has become liquefied, The inoculated bacteria grow and multiply, and after a time a film appears on the surface of the liquefied layer. In cultivations on potato the appearances in this stage are varied, and sometimes extremely characteristic. In the case of a bacillus which readily develops on unsterilised potatoes, the zooglea may spread over the cut surface, forming a pellicle which can be raised en masse like a delicate veil. Another bacillus forms a zooglea, consisting of a tenacious layer which can be drawn out in long stringy threads. In Ascococcus Billrothii the gelatinous envelope develops to such an enormous extent that it forms the characteristic feature of the species. (Fig. 1.) Form.—The individual cells vary in form, and may either remain isolated or attached to each other. Round cells and egg- shaped cells are called cocci. The spherical form is the most common, but cocci are occasionally exclusively ovoid, as in Strepto- coceus bombycis. The giant cocci of some species are spoken of as -megacocci, to distinguish them from the ordinary cocci, or micrococci. 14 BACTERIOLOGY. The fission by which the cocci increase may take place in one direction only, and if the two resulting cells remain attached to each other they form a diplococcus. If these two cells again divide, and the resulting cells remain linked together, we get a chain or rosary, termed streptococcus. These chains may consist of a few individuals linked together, or of several hundreds, in which case the chains are generally curved or twisted. When the division occurs in two directions, so that four cocci result, a tetrad or merismopedia is formed ; when in three directions, one coccus divides into eight, and the result is a packet form or sarcinacoccus. Immediately after division, the daughter cells are not perfectly circular, but are flattened or facetted where they are opposite to Fic. 1.—Ascococcus Binirorui, x 65. [After Cohn.] each other. They gradually become rounded off, and each daughter cell is then ready to divide in its turn. In other cases the cocci after division only form irregular heaps or collections like bunches of grapes. This form is sometimes distinguished as staphylococcus, but it cannot be considered an important feature. When we find irregular masses of cocci united by intercellular substance and embedded in a tough gelatinous matrix, the form is described as ascococcus. Another type is the rod, characteristic of bacterium and bacillus. The rods may vary considerably in length. The very short rods with rounded ends are ditficult to distinguish from the oval cocci, but differ in that a rod, however short it may be, must have two sides parallel. The vibrio or bent rod may be considered as the connecting link between the rods and the corkscrew forms or DESCRIPTION OF PLATE I. Bacteria, Schizomycetes, or Fission Fungi. 1. Cocei singly and varying in size. 2. Cocci in chains or rosaries (strepto- coceus). 3. Cocci in a mass (staphylococcus). 4 and 5. Cocci in pairs (diplococcus). 6. Cocci in groups of four (merismopedia). 7. Cocci in packets (sarcina). 8. Bacterium termo. 9, Bacterium termo x 4000 (Dallinger and Drysdale). 10. Bacterium septicemie hemorrhagice. 11. Bacteriwm pneu- monie croupose. 12. Bacillus subtilis. 13. Bacillus murisepticus. 14. Bacillus diphtheria. 15. Bacillus typhosus (Eberth). 16. Spirillum undula (Cohn). 17. Spiritlum volutans (Cohn). 18. Spirillum cholere Asiatice. 19. Spirillum Obermeieri (Koch). 20. Spirocheta plicatilis (Fliigge). 21. Vibrio rugula (Prazmowski). 22. Cladothria Férsteri (Cohn). 23, Cladothrixn dichotoma (Cohn), 24. Monas Okenii (Cohn). 25. Monas Warmingii (Cohn). 26. Rhabdomonas rosea (Cohn). 27. Spore-formation (Bacillus alvei). 2x. Spore-formation (Bacillus anthracis). 29. Spore-formation in bacilli cultivated from a rotten melon (Friinkel and Pfeiffer). 30. Spore-formation in bacilli cultivated from earth (Frankel and Pfeiffer). 31. Involution-form of Crenothrix (Zopf). 32. Involution-forms of Vibrio serpens (Warming). 33. Involution- forms of Vibrio rugula (Warming). 34, Involution-forms of Clostridium poltymyxa (after Prazmowski). 35. Involution-forms of Spirillum cholere Asiatice. 36. Involution-forms of Bacterium aceti (Zopf and Hansen). 37. Spirulina-form of Beggiatoa ulba (Zopf). 38. Various thread-forms of Bacterium merismopedioides (Zopf). 39. False-branching of Cladothrix (Zopf). Plate I on \ Ve ¢ re Fiq 25. Fig. 26 > Fia. 30 fai uid \ / Tie \' ist | TE ' Hime Hid yf iggy Fug 38 Fig 39 a BACTERTA, SCHIZOVMYCETES, OR FISSLON FUNGL. dmeent Brooke, Day & Ser, Lath, MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 15 spirilla. Lastly, we have the filamentous forms, which may be straight, leptothrix, or wavy, spirocheta, or the wavy thread may be looped and entwined on itself, spirulina. The term involution form is applied to certain peculiar shapes, which result more especially in bacteria grown under abnormal conditions. They are round, oval, pear-shaped, or club-formed enlargements. ; Movement.—Many bacteria are devoid of movement through- out the whole of their life history. Others, during certain stages of their life cycle, and possibly some forms always, are endowed with locomotive power. The character of the, movement is very varied, and ranges from a slow undulatory motion to one of extreme rapidity. Many appear to progress in a definite direction. Others move continuously, first in one direction and then in another, and others again seem to hesitate before altering their course. . They may either glide along smoothly or progress with a tremulous motion. Fig. 2.—SprrocH&/Ta FRoM SEWAGE WatTER, x 1200. They appear to be able to avoid obstacles, and to set themselves ‘free from objects with which they have accidentally come into contact. Vibrios have a peculiar serpentine movement, but other forms, such as the commonly known Bacterium termo and segments of spirilla, such as comma-bacilli, revolve around their long axis as well as make distinct progression. The complete spirilla are characterised by the familiar corkscrew movement. With regard to cocci there is some doubt as to whether they are endowed with independent movement, any quivering or oscillation being generally regarded as only Brownian or molecular. In some straight thread- forms, which are motile, the movement is very slow and vermicular in character, but in wavy threads, such as the Spirocheta plicatilis, there is not only an undulatory motion, with rapid progression across the field of the microscope, but if they are confined by more or less débris, they give very peculiar and characteristic spasmodic movements. (Fig. 2.) The rod-forms of Proteus vulgaris exhibit very extraordinary 16 BACTERIOLOGY, movements on the surface of solid nutrient gelatine. Groups of rods may be observed to pass each other in opposite directions. Single individuals meet and progress side by side, or one or more individuals may part?from a group and glide away independently, Occasionally a number of rods progress in single file. It is, however, difficult to believe that these movements can occur on a solid surface. Fic. 3.—FLAGELLA. 1. Coccus with flagellum. 2. Similar coccus dividing, with two flagella. 3. Colony of flagellated macrococci of Beggiatoa roseo-persicina. 4. Short rod from the same Beggiatoa with flagella [all after Zopf]. 5. Bacillus with flagella [from a photograph by Koch]. 6. Bacillus subtilis [after Brefeld]. 7, 8. Short rod- forms of Beggiatoa roseo-persicina with one flagellum [after Zopf]. 9. Very long rod of the same, with flagellum at both ends [after Warming]. 10. Vibrio, with double flagellum at each end [after Warming]. 11. Vibrio, with flagella [from a photograph by the author]. °12. Spirillum with flagella [from a photo- graph by Koch]. 13. Spirillum with flagella [after Zopf]. 14. Spirillum with double flagella [after Zopf]. 15. Beggiatoa roseo-persicina, with a triple flagellum at one end; and 16, with a double flagellum at both ends [after Warming]. The author is inclined to believe that there is an almost inappreciable layer of liquid on the surface of the gelatine, which is expressed after the gelatine sets. In tubes of nutrient agar-agar gelatinised obliquely and then kept upright the liquid so expressed. collects at the bottom of the sloping surface, MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 17 The means by which bacteria are endowed with the power of spontaneous movement and of progression may still be said, in some cases, to be unsettled. The author has watched the move- ment of long slender threads in sewage-contaminated water, which could only be explained by the inherent contractility of the proto- plasmic contents; for if any drawing or propelling organ existed in proportion to the length of the organism, it would probably have been visible. But in many cases the organism is provided with a vibratile lash or flagellum at one end, or with one or more at both ends, or with numerous lateral and terminal flagella. Some observers believe that the movement of cocci is due to the Fic. 4.—BacILLus MEGATHERIUM. a. A chain of rods, x 250. The rest x 600. b. Two active rods. d to f. Successive stages of spore-formation. h to m. Successive stages of germination. [After De Bary.]‘ existence of a flagellum. In Bacterium termo the existence of a lash at either end was first determined by the researches of Dallinger and Drysdale. In motile bacilli, such as the hay bacillus and Bacillus ulna, and in vibrios and spirilla, the flagella can be readily recognised by expert microscopists with the employment of the best lenses, and, what is of equal importance, proper illumination. They are objects of extreme delicacy and tenuity, and in stained prepara- tions may be absent from retraction or injury. Koch succeeded in photographing them after staining with logwood, which turned them a brown colour. The author has observed them in vibrios in preparations stained with gentian violet, from which also they have been photographed, in spite of the violet colour, by the use of 2 18 BACTERIOLOGY. isochromatic dry plates, and more recently special methods have been introduced, by Léfiler and others, by which they can be stained and photographed with comparative facility. It is not certain whether the flagella are extensions of the cell- wall, or derived from the internal protoplasm. Van Tieghem holds the first view, and does not regard them as motile organs at all. Zopf, on the other hand, adheres to the second view, and moreover believes that they can be retracted within the cell-wall. Reproduction.—Bacteria multiply by fission and by processes which may be considered as representing fructification. The Fic. 5.—CLostTRIDIUM BUTYRICUM, x 1020. B. Stages of spore-formation. C. Stages of germination. ‘(After Prazmowski.] bacteria exhibiting the latter processes have been divided into two groups, distinguished by the formation of endospores in the one and of arthrospores in the other. In the process of fission the cell first increases in size, and a transverse septum forms from the cell-wall, dividing the internal protoplasm into two equal parts; these may separate and lead an independent existence, or remain linked together. In chains of cocci the individual cells are easily visible and distinct, but in the thread-forms resulting from the linking together of rods, as in the anthrax bacillus, the composition of the thread is only demonstrated by the action of reagents. Endospore formation may be conveniently studied in Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus megatherium, or Bacillus subtilis. The proto- MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 19 plasm becomes granular, and at certain points in the thread a speck appears, which gradually enlarges and develops into a circular or egg-shaped, sharply defined, highly refractive body. The spore grows at the expense of the protoplasm of the cell, which in time, together with the cell-wall, entirely disappears, and the spore is set free. These phenomena are best seen in an immotile bacillus in a drop-cultivation on a warm stage; the whole process may then be observed continuously from beginning to end. Spores may form in each link of the thread, so that a regular row results, or they may occur at irregular intervals. Spore-formation also occurs in bacilli which do not develop into leptothrix filaments. The spores may develop in the centre or at one end of the rod. In the tetanus bacillus a spore develops at the extreme end, producing the appear- ance of a drum-stick. The spore may be considerably wider, but is never longer than the parent cell. Fic. 6,—LEUcONOSTOC MESENTEROIDES ; COCCI-CHAINS WITH ARTHROSPORES (after Van Tieghem and Cienkowski). Arthrospore formation is illustrated in Leuconostoc mesenteroides. Certain elements in the chain of cocci, apparently not differing from the rest, become larger, with tougher walls, and more refractive. The remaining cells die, and these cells having acquired the pro- perties of spores are set free, and can reproduce a new growth in any fresh nourishing soil. That this occurs in all species which do not form endospores is at present only a supposition. Spores are invested by a thick membrane, which is believed to consist of two layers. To this they probably owe the property they possess of retaining vitality when desiccated, and of offering a greater resistance to the action of chemical reagents and heat than the parent cells. Spore-formation has been regarded by some as occurring when the nourishing soil is exhausted, thus providing for the perpetuation 20 BACTERIOLOGY. of the species. In anthrax the bacilli do not form spores in the living body, but when the animal dies the development of spores takes place, and hence the danger of contaminating the soil if the body is disposed of by burial. Klein, however, has pointed out that. if mice and guinea-pigs which have died of anthrax are kept un- opened, the bacilli simply degenerate and ultimately disappear. Thus there is good reason for believing that spore-formation is not due to exhaustion of the pabulum, but probably free access to oxygen constitutes an important factor in inducing this condition. Tf we inoculate a potato with anthrax, copious spore-formation occurs, though we cannot consider that the nourishing soil has been exhausted. But we have in this case the surface of the potato freely exposed to the air in the damp chamber. In the same way, in cultivations on agar-agar solidified obliquely (so as to get a large surface), spore-formation readily takes place. Contamination of IS an ie ee = Bey = ale ste) gaa SS esce ee estes Fic. 7.SPORE-BEARING THREADS OF BAcILLUS ANTHRACIS, DOUBLE-STAINED- WITH FUCHSINE AND METHYLENE BLUE, x 1200. the ground results, therefore, from animals in which a post-mortem examination has been made and the blood and organs freely exposed to the air; or from carcasses the hides of which have been soiled with excretions, and with blood which issues from the mouth and nostrils before death. When spores are introduced into a suitable medium at a favour- able temperature they develop again into rods. The spore loses its sharp contour, and, at one pole or on one side, a pale process bursts through the membrane, gradually growing into a rod from which the empty capsule is thrown off. Spores differ from the parent cells in their behaviour to staining reagents. Like them, they can be stained with aniline dyes, but not by the ordinary processes. They require to be specially treated. This is probably due to the tough capsule, which must be altered or softened by heat or strong acid, until it allows the stain to penetrate. MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 21 Once stained, they again differ from the parent cells in resisting decolorisation ; this fact is taken advantage of to double-stain spore- bearing bacilli (Fig. 7). In staining micro-organisms, the protoplasm is sometimes broken up into irregular segments or granules, as in many spirilla, and we may add the bacilli of tuberculosis and leprosy. The beaded appearance of the tubercle bacillus is well known. Some observers have regarded the beads, others the bright spaces between them, as spores. But spores in unstained preparations appear as glistening bodies with sharp contour. They do not stain at all, or very little, by the ordinary processes. These considerations led the author to stain and examine tubercular sputum and pure-cultures under careful illumination, and with such lenses as Powell and Lealand’s gs in. hom.imm. The tubercle bacillus in sputum (Fig. 8), as a rule, Fic. 8.—Bacitur or TUBERCLE In Sputum, x 2500 (from photographs). consists of a very delicate sheath, holding together a number of deeply stained granules, for the most part round or cylindrical, with irregular contour, and differing considerably in size, while the light interspaces are seen to vary in form according to the shape of the granules. On the other hand, particularly in old cultures, more or less spherical, sharply defined bodies are observed in the bacilli, and also set free. These are the true spores of the tubercle bacillus, and are quite distinct from the irregular granules. There can be no doubt that a tubercle bacillus consists of a very delicate sheath, with protoplasmic contents which have a great tendency to break up or coagulate into little segments or roundish granules, partly owing to their age and the conditions under which they are grown, and partly to the treatment they are subjected to in making a microscopical preparation. This does not always occur, for the bacilli at times are not beaded, but are stained in their entirety. In the leprosy bacilli a similar appearance occurs. In stained 22 BACTERIOLOGY. sections the rods have a beaded appearance, but the intervals between the granules are sometimes very long, and occasionally the protoplasm appears to have collected only at the extreme ends of the rod. The appearances in the case of the bacillus of glanders and the bacillus of hemorrhagic septicemia may be similarly explained. The fact that tubercular sputum preserves its virulence for several months, even after desiccation, is to be attributed to the formation of spores. Babés claims to have succeeded in differen- tiating them by double staining. In his definition of spirilla, Zopf gives the spore-formation as absent or unknown. In comma-bacilli in sewage water the author has often noted appearances suggestive of refractive spores; and the same also may be observed in vibrios, differing by their regular contour from the irregular spaces occasionally observed in stained preparations ; but they are only vacuoles. & ); Fic. 9.—ComMMa-BACILLI IN SEw- Fig. 10. VIBRIOs IN WATER CON- AGE WATER, STAINED WITH TAMINATED WITH SEWAGE, GENTIAN VIOLET, x 1200. x 1200. Respiration and Nutrition.—Like all a-chlorophyllous vegeta- bles, bacteria require for their nutrition oxygen, nitrogen, carbon, water, and certain mineral salts. Many require free access to oxygen, others can derive it from the oxidised compounds in the medium in which they grow. Pasteur divided bacteria into two great classes —the aerobic and anaerobic, and considered that the latter net only had no need of oxygen, but that its presence was actually deleterious. Though this view must be considerably modified, the terms are convenient, and are still retained. They are well illus- trated by the bacillus of anthrax, and the bacillus of malignant. edema; and a simple plan of demonstration has been employed by the author. A fragment of tissue from the spleen, for example, known to contain anthrax bacilli, is deposited with a sterilised inoculating needle, with the necessary precautions, on the surface of nutrient agar-agar in a test-tube; another tube of nutrient agar- agar is liquefied, and when cooled down almost to the point of MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 23 gelatinisation, a part is poured into the first tube, so that when it sets the piece of tissue is completely embedded. A piece of tissue from an animal suffering from malignant cedema is treated in the same way, and the tubes are placed in the incubator. If we examine them after two or three days, we shall find no change in the anthrax tube; the bacillus being eminently aerobic, no growth whatever has occurred. In the tube containing the bacilli of malignant edema there will be a more or less characteristic cultivation. — The nitrogen which is essential for building up their protoplasm can be obtained either from albumins, or from ammonia and its derivatives. That the albumins can be dispensed with was shown by Pasteur, who employed an artificial nourishing solution consti- tuted upon a formula representing the essential food constituents. Carbon is derived from such substances as cane sugar, milk sugar, and glycerine, and, in some cases, by the splitting up of complex proteid bodies. Water is essential for their growth, but deprivation of water does not kill all bacteria. Desiccation on potato is employed for preserving some micro-organisms, as a new growth can be started, when required, by transferring some of the dried potato to fresh nourishing ground. Comma-bacilli, on the other hand, are destroyed by drying. Sugar is used in making preserves, because by abstracting water it prevents the development of micro- organisms. Mineral or inorganic substances, such as compounds of sodium and potassium, and different phosphates and sulphates, are necessary in small proportions. CIRCUMSTANCES AFFECTING THE GrowrH oF BacTERIA. Tature of the Soil.—Though we know the elements necessary, we are, nevertheless, as yet unable to provide a pabulum suitable for all kinds of bacteria. Thus we are quite unable to cultivate some species artificially. Others will only grow upon special media. Many grow upon nutrient gelatine; but some species only if it be acid or alkaline respectively. Whether in the latter case this is due purely to the reaction or to the presence of the particular ingredients is an unsettled point. Though the comma-bacillus of Koch, like the majority of organisms, grows best on an alkaline medium, yet it is well known to flourish at the temperature of the blood on the surface of potato, which is acid. 24 BACTERIOLOGY. Temperature.—The influence of temperature on bacteria will be found to vary according to the species, but still for the majority we may distinguish a maximum, optimum, and minimum temperature. Many grow best at the temperature of the blood, and hence the value of nutrient agar-agar, which is not liquefied at 37° C. The tubercle bacillus will only grow satisfactorily at a temperature varying between 30° C, and 41°C. On the other hand, many forms grow between the limits of 5° C. and 45°C, At these temperatures their functional activity is paralysed, but they are not destroyed, for by removal to favourable conditions they spring again into life. Bacteria seem to have a special power of resisting the effects of cold. It has been stated that comma-bacilli exposed to a temperature of—10° C. for an hour, and bacilli of anthrax after exposure to a temperature of —110° C., still retained their vitality. Temperatures over 50° to 60° C. destroy most bacteria, but not their spores; spores . of anthrax retain their vitality after immersion in boiling water, but are destroyed by prolonged boiling. Roughly speaking, all patho- genic bacteria grow best at the temperature of the blood, and non-pathogenic bacteria at the ordinary temperature of the room. Movement.—Bacteria probably grow best when left undisturbed. Violent agitation of a vessel in which they are growing certainly retards their growth, but a steady movement is stated not to affect it; at any rate, anthrax bacilli grow with enormous rapidity in the blood-vessels, in spite of the circulation. Compressed Air.—Paul Bert maintained that a pressure of twenty-three to twenty-four atmospheres stopped all development of putrefactive bacteria. Oxygen, under a pressure of five or six atmospheres, is stated to stop their growth. Other observers have, however, obtained different results. Gases.— Hydrogen and carbonic acid are stated to stop the movements of the motile bacteria. Chloroform is believed to arrest the changes brought about by the zymogenie species. Electricity—Cohn and Mendelssohn found that a constant galvanic current produced a deleterious effect owing to electrolysis. At the positive pole the liquid became distinctly acid, and at the negative pole distinctly alkaline. With a weak current there appeared to be no effect, two powerful cells at the very least being necessary. Light—Downes has shown that sunlight is fatal to putrefactive bacteria. This is believed to be due to a process of induced hyper- oxidation, from which living organisms ordinarily are shielded by protective developments of the cell-wall, or of colouring-matter, . MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 25 which cut off injurious rays. Duclaux has investigated the same subject, and observed that micrococci were more sensitive to sun- light than the spore-bearing bacilli. Engelmann has described a bacterium whose movements cease in the dark, and Zopf states that in his cultures of Beggiatoa roseo-persicina the growth was much more strongly developed on the side of the vessel facing the light. Arloing, Marshall Ward, and Dieudonné have studied the effect of the ‘sun’s rays on anthrax spores, and on chromogenic and other bacteria, and maintain that they are bactericidal. The effect is due chiefly, if not entirely, to the blue rays. Chemical Reagents—Many substances, such as carbolic acid, corrosive sublimate, chlorine, bromine, have a marked effect upon the growth of bacteria. This will be more fully described in another chapter. In several cases the bacteria themselves secrete a substance which is injurious to their future development. Propucts oF GRowTH. Bacteria may be grouped together according to the changes pro- duced in the media in which they grow. Thus we have pigment- forming, phosphorescent, fermentative, putrefactive, nitrifying, and disease-producing bacteria. Chromogenic or pigment-forming bacteria elaborate during their growth definite colour stuffs. Such species are exemplified by Bacillus violaceus, which produces a striking purple growth; Bacillus pyocyaneus, which secretes pyocyanin, a substance which has been isolated and obtained in a crystalline form ; Micrococcus prodigiosus, which produces a pigment allied to fuchsine ; Beggiatoa roseo-per- sicina, which is characterised by the presence of bacterio-purpurin ; Sarcina lutea, Bacillus cyanogenus, and many others. Photogenic, or light-producing, bacteria are found more especially in sea-water, There are several species of phosphorescent bacilli, and according to Beyrinck the best medium for their cultivation is fish-broth made with sea-water. Photographs can be obtained of cultures by their own light. Zymogenic or ferment bacteria produce their changes in non- nitrogenised media. Bacterium aceti, by its growth produces the acetic fermentation in wine by which alcohol taking up atmospheric oxygen is converted into vinegar :— CHO + 0? = C?H'0? + H’0. The fermentation of urine, by which urea is converted into carbonate of ammonia, can be brought about by several micro-organisms, but 26 BACTERIOLOGY. notably by the Bacterium urea. The change produced is represented by the following formula :— co{Ni + 2H?0 = (NH) 200% Clostridium butyricum converts the salts of lactic acid into butyric acid, producing the butyric fermentation in solutions of starch, dextrine, and sugar. These bacteria are agents in the ripening of cheese, and the production of sauerkraut. Thus, in a solution neutralised with calcium carbonate :— 2[Ca(C*H0")'] + H2O = Ca(C"H70*)? + CaCO* + 3C0? + H°. In the so-called viscous fermentation of wines, Streptococcus viscosus: produces a gummy substance. According to Pasteur, the change may be thus represented :— 25(C°H0") + 25(H?0) = 12(0"H”0") 4 24(C°H4O5) 4 12(CO*) + 12(H?0). And as another example, the Bacillus acidi lactici may be mentioned, through the agency of which sugar of milk is converted into lactic acid :— CYVH4O = 4(C8H°0%). Saprogenic or putrefactive. bacteria play a most important part in the economy of nature. They produce changes allied to fermenta- tion in complex organic substances. Their action on proteids, according to Hoppe-Seyler, may be compared to digestion ; bodies like peptones are first produced, then leucin, tyrosin, and fatty acids ; lastly indol, phenol, sulphuretted hydrogen, ammonia, carbonic acid, and water. They abstract the elements they require, and the remainder enter into new combinations. Associated with the forma - tion of these substances are certain bodies which have a poisonous effect when introduced into animals. These poisonous alkaloids, ptomaines, produce a septic poisoning, which must be distinguished from septic infection. The effects of septic poisoning depend on the dose, whereas the effects of septic infection are, to a certain extent, independent of the dose. A small quantity of a septic poison may produce only transient effects, and a relatively large quantity may be necessary to produce vomiting, rigors, and death. Septic in- fection, on the other hand, may result equally from a small dose, because the poison introduced is a living organism which is capable of propagation and multiplication. Our knowledge of these alkaloids is largely attributable to the researches of Selmi, Gautier, and Brieger, and the result of their work will be referred to again. MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 27 Nitrifying bacteria play a very important part by providing plant life with a most necessary food. They occur in the soil, and two kinds have been described—the one kind converting ammonia into nitrous acid, and the other changing nitrous into nitric acid. To Winogradsky and Frankland we are principally indebted for our knowledge of these bacteria. Pathogenic bacteria are those which are genetically related to disease. Many organisms have been supposed to be pathogenic, or have been described in connection with diseases, which are only saprophytic associates. By saprophytic we mean organisms which feed upon dead organic matter. They include many forms which are found on the skin, in the intestinal canal, and sometimes in the internal organs, especially the liver and kidneys; the tissues have lost their vitality, and the organisms, through some lesion, have been carried into the circulation. That many organisms are causally related to disease, there is strong evidence in proof. No organism can be considered to be pro- ductive of disease unless it fulfils the conditions which have been laid down by Koch. Great stress must be laid upon the importance of successive cultivation through many generations, as the objection that a chemical virus may be carried over from the original source is thus overcome. Any hypothetical chemical poison carried over from one tube to another would, after a great number of such cultivations, be diluted to such an extent as to be inappreciable and absolutely inert. Though we may accept as a fact the existence of pathogenic organisms, we are not in all cases in a position to assert the means by which they produce their deleterious or fatal effects. Many theories have been propounded. It has been suggested that the pathogenic organisms may be compared to an invading army. The cells or phagocytes arrayed against them endeavour to as- similate and destroy them, but perish themselves in the attempt. This might explain the breaking down of tissue, and the for- mation of local lesions, but does not assist us in understanding the fatal result in thirty-six to forty-eight hours produced by the inoculation of the bacilli of anthrax. Another view is that the invading army seizes upon the commissariat, appropriating the general pabulum, which is so essential to the life of the tissues. This would hardly account for so acute and fatal a result as in anthrax, but would lead one to expect symptoms of inanition and gradual exhaustion. Moreover, against this theory we have the fact that death may result, in some cases, with the presence 28 BACTERIOLOGY. of comparatively few bacilli in the blood; and, again, the blood may teem with parasites such as the flagellated monads in well-nourished, healthy-looking rats, without apparently causing any symptoms whatever. In the same category may be placed the theory that eminently aerobic organisms seize upon the oxygen of the blood and produce death by asphyxia. Another explanation is afforded by the suggestion of interference with the functions of the lung and kidney by mechanical blocking of the capillaries. Here the same objection is met with in the case of anthrax, the same fatal result may occur with only a few bacilli, while other cases yield very beautiful sections, looking like injected preparations from the mapping out of the capillaries with the countless crowds of bacilli. Putrefactive bacteria derive their necessary elements from com- plex organic substances, and accompanying the residue we find the presence of poisonous substances. Pathogenic bacteria, in a similar way, give rise to virulent poisons. Anthrax bacilli produce poisonous principles in the blood which cause death, independently of the number of bacilli, provided there are sufficient present to develop a fatal dose. It has been also suggested that possibly a special ferment is secreted by some organisms, and that by the changes ultimately wrought by the action of this ferment the symptoms and _phe- nomena of disease arise. We have an analogy with this theory in the alkaline fermentation of urine by means of the torula ures. By the researches of Musculus, and later of Sheridan Lea, it has been shown that a ferment is secreted by the cells which can be isolated in aqueous solution, and is capable of rapidly inducing an active fermentation of urea. We can now understand how it is that in anthrax or in tuber- culosis we may find the presence of only a few bacilli, or that in tetanus we can have such a violent disturbance of the system produced by the presence of very few micro-organisms. We may conceive that different species of bacilli may vary greatly in their power of producing a toxin or secreting a ferment, just as the elaboration of pigment is much more marked in some species than in others; thus it need not follow that the number of micro- organisms bears any relation to the virulence or activity of the substance they produce. There is, however, yet another factor in the production of disease. We know that in health we are proof against most of these micro-organisms ; if it were not so, we should all rapidly fall victims to the tubercle bacillus or others, which in MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA. 29 health we inhale with impunity. We know that a microbe may only cause a local lesion in one animal, but death in another. It is still more striking that the same micro-organism, as is the case with anthrax, may have no effect whatever upon certain species of animals, though it is deadly to others. Again, an animal naturally susceptible to the effect of a pathogenic organism may be rendered proof against it. These matters will be discussed in a future, chapter. \ DistRiBuTION OF BACTERIA. Bacteria are commonly described as ubiquitous. They are ever present in the air, though not in such exaggerated numbers as is commonly supposed. In nutrient media exposed to the air one is often astonished at times at the comparatively few bacteria which develop in comparison to the amount of floating matter, such as mineral particles, scales, spores of fungi and débris known to be present. In water they are also present in considerable numbers, though of course varying according to the character of the water. Wherever there is putrefaction, they are present in vast numbers. In the soil, in sewage, in the intestines and, in uncleanly persons especially, on the skin and between the teeth, various species may always be found, but in the healthy blood and healthy tissues bacteria are never present. In a previous chapter the method of examining the blood of living persons has been described, and there is, by this means, ample opportunity for satisfying oneself that bacteria are never to be found in the blood in health. The organs removed from a perfectly healthy animal, with the necessary precautions, and placed in sterilised media, can be kept indefinitely without undergoing putrefaction, or giving any development of bacteria. This has been established by many observers, notably Cheyne and Hauser; and the results of former observers to the contrary must be attributed to imperfect methods admitting of accidental contamination. CHAPTER III. EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA. In the previous chapter several conditions were alluded to which affected the growth of bacteria, such as the nature of the nutrient soil, temperature, light, and electricity. The effect of certain chemical substances, and of excessive heat and cold, was also mentioned; but this constitutes a subject of such practical importance that it must be considered more fully. Agents which retard the growth of bacteria are generally spoken of as antiseptics, as distinguished from disinfectants which altogether destroy their vitality. Though chemical disinfectants, or germicides, when diluted, act as efficient antiseptics, the converse, that an antiseptic in a suffi- ciently concentrated form will act as a disinfectant, is not the case. The term “antiseptic,” indeed, should be restricted to those sub- stances or agents which arrest the changes bacteria produce, but which do not prevent their springing into activity when removed to favourable conditions. Thus excessive heat, which destroys bacteria and their spores, is a true disinfectant; and excessive cold, which only benumbs them, retarding their development without killing them, is an antiseptic. Spores have a greater power of resisting the action of these various agents than the parent cells, and many species of micro- organisms differ from each other in their resisting power. An exact knowledge of the subject can, therefore, only be based upon investigations which will determine the effect of these agents upon pure cultivations of the different micro-organisms causally related to putrefaction and disease. In the latter case, especially, this is not possible in the present state of our knowledge. In some cases of communicable disease there is considerable doubt as to the etiological importance of the organisms which have been described; in other cases no organisms have as yet been discovered, or the organisms 30 EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA. 31 cannot be artificially cultivated, or the disease is not reproduced by inoculation, so that there is no means of testing whether the agents have had any effect. One can, therefore, only draw general conclusions by selecting some well-known pathogenic and non- pathogenic micro-organisms, and considering the influence of chemicals, of hot air and of steam upon them, as representing the effect upon the various contagia of disease and the causes of putrefaction. Such knowledge must necessarily prove of the greatest im- portance: to the sanitarian, who is concerned in preventing the spreading of disease and in the disposal of putrefactive matter; to the surgeon, who is anxious to exclude micro-organisms during surgical operations, and to arrest the development of bacteria which have already gained an entrance in wounds; to the physician, in the treatment of micro-parasitic diseases. ‘The sanitarian and the surgeon must profit directly by such experiments, for in the disinfection of clothes and the sick-room by the one, and in the application of antiseptic dressings and lotions by the other, the micro-organisms are encountered, as in the experi- ments, outside the living body. The physician, on the other hand, is principally concerned in dealing with micro-parasites when circulating in the blood, or carrying on their destructive processes in the internal tissues. So far as our knowledge at present goes, the physician can avail him- self but little of the effect of the direct application of the substances which have been found to retard or destroy the growth of the organisms in artificial cultivations, for the concentrated form in which they would have to be administered would prove as deleteri- ous or as fatal to the host as to the parasites. Thus Koch has stated that to check the growth of the anthrax bacillus in man it would be necessary that there should be twelve grammes of iodine constantly in circulation, and that the dose of quinine necessary to destroy the spirilla of relapsing fever would be from twelve to sixteen grammes. The retarding influence, however, of certain substances when diluted, and the fact that disinfectants are some- times equally efficacious in a diluted form when their application is prolonged, seem to indicate measures which may be adopted, in some eases, with chances of success, such as the inhalation of antiseptic vapours in phthisis. For the most part the physician must look rather to combating the effects of micro-organisms by restoring to its normal standard the lowered vitality which enabled the bacteria to get a footing. 32 BACTERIOLOGY, There is no wider field for research than the determination of the real effect of disinfectants and antiseptics. Painstaking and laborious as the researches are which have been hitherto made, the subject is so beset with fallacies, leading, in some cases, to totally, erroneous conclusions, that it is not surprising that one meets on all sides with conflicting statements. The author has no intention of analysing these results, but a general idea will be given of the methods which have been employed, and for further details reference must be made to the original papers mentioned in the bibliography. Chemical Substances.—It was customary to judge of the power of a disinfectant or antiseptic by adding it to some putrescent liquid. A small portion of the latter was, after a time, transferred to some suitable nourishing medium, and the efficacy of the substance estimated by the absence of cloudiness, odour, or other sign of development of bacteria in the inoculated fluid. Koch pointed out: the errors that might arise in these experiments from accidental contamination, or from there being no evidence of the destruction of spores, and we are indebted to him for a complete and careful series of observations with more exact methods. Instead of employing a mixture of bacteria, Koch’s plan was to subject a pure cultivation of some well-known species with marked characteristics to the reagent to be tested. A small quantity was then transferred to fresh nourishing soil, under favourable con- ditions, side by side with nutrient material inoculated from a cultivation without treatment with the disinfectant. The latter constituted a control test, which is most essential in all such experiments. To test the resistant power of bacteria which are easily destroyed, two species were selected, Micrococcus prodigiosus, and the bacillus of blue pus. These were cultivate: on potatoes, the surfaces of which were sliced off and dried. A fragment trans- ferred to freshly prepared potato gave rise to a growth of the particular micro-organism ; but if after treatment with some reagent. no growth occurred, the conclusion was drawn that the reagent was efficacious in destroying the vitality of the bacteria. Anthrax bacilli in blood, withdrawn from an animal just killed, were taken to represent sporeless bacteria, while silk threads steeped in an artificial cultivation of the bacilli and dried, afforded a means of testing the vitality of spores. Even by employing pure cultivations on solid media, great precautions were necessary to avoid mistakes, When, for instance, a large quantity of the growth which had been subjected to some chemical solution was carried over to the fresh tube containing EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA. 33, the nutrient medium, or when a silk thread, which had been dipped in a solution, was directly transferred to the new soil, enough of the supposed disinfectant might be mechanically carried over to retard the development of the bacteria, though it was ineffectual in destroying them. From a growth not appearing, it was concluded that the spores or the bacteria had. been affected, and so a mistake occurred. To avoid this, Koch made a point of transfer- ring a minimum of the disinfected growth to as large a cultivation area as possible, so that any chemical substance mechanically carried over would be so diluted as to be inert. For the same reason, threads, after withdrawal from the disinfecting solution, were rinsed in sterilised water, or weak alcohol, and then trans- planted ; or, instead of judging from the development on nutrient gelatine, the effect of inoculation in a healthy animal was made the test. A few examples may be quoted in illustration. Silk threads, impregnated with anthrax spores, were placed in bottles containing carbolic acid of various strengths. A thread was removed from each on successive days, and transferred to nutrient gelatine, and the result noted. It was found that immersion of the thread in a 5 per cent. solution of carbolic acid was sufficient in two days to effect complete sterilisation, and seven days in a 3 per cent. solution was equally efficacious. Since for practical purposes a strength should be selected which would be effectual in twenty-four hours, Koch recommended that for general use, allowing for deterioration by keeping, a solution containing not less than 5 per cent. should be employed, and for complex fluids probably a still higher percentage would be necessary. In the case of sporeless bacilli the results were very different. Blood containing the bacilli, from an animal just killed, was dried on threads, and after exposure for two minutes to a 1 per cent. solution, was completely sterilised; and fresh blood mixed with a 1 per cent. carbolic solution produced no effect when inoculated. On the other hand, when the blood was mixed with a ‘5 per cent. solution, the virulence was not destroyed. The facility with which the bacilli are destroyed, compared with their spores, illustrates how easily errors may occur, when mere arrest of growth or loss of motility is regarded as a sign of the efficacy of disinfection. To test vapours, Koch exposed anthrax spores or the spores which occur in garden earth by suspending them over solutions, such as bromine or chlorine, in a closed vessel. After a time they were transferred to a nutrient medium to test their vitality. To test the power of sulphurous acid gas, the spores were spread about 3 34 BACTERIOLOGY. in a room in which the gas was generated by burning sulphur in the ordinary way for disinfecting a room. To test chemicals which might be recommended for disinfecting vans and railway carriages, spores were laid on boards, which were then washed or sprayed, and the spores then transferred to the nutrient gelatine. Sternberg has also made an elaborate series of experiments with regard to the action of germicides. In this case cultivations of well-known pathogenic organisms in liquid media were employed. The supposed germicide was added to the liquid cultivation, and after two hours a. fresh flask of sterilised culture was inoculated from the disinfected cultivation, and placed in the incubator. In twenty- four to forty-eight hours, if the chemical proved inefficient, there was evidence of a growth of bacteria. Blyth has investigated the disinfection of cultivations of Bacterium termo, of sewage, and typhoid excreta, and, in conjunction with Klein, the effect of well- known disinfectant materials on anthrax spores. Miquel, ‘Laws, and others have also contributed to our knowledge of the effect of antiseptics and disinfectants upon micro-organisms. In spite of all that has been done there is room for many workers; a great deal of ground must be gone over again to rectify discrepancies, examine conflicting results, and thus determine what observations may be relied upon for practical application. This may be illustrated by referring in detail to some experiments made with corrosive sublimate. Koch investigated a long list of chemical reagents, and according to these experiments the salts of mercury, and the chloride especially, proved most valuable. Where heat is not admissible, these- compounds were therefore highly recommended, though their poisonous nature is a drawback to their indiscriminate use. Koch stated that for disinfecting a ship’s bilge, where a 5 per cent. solution of carbolic acid must be left forty-eight hours, a 1 in 1000 solution of mercuric chloride would only require a few minutes. But there was good reason for doubting the efficacy of very dilute solutions; for, though according to Koch’s experiments anthrax spores subjected to a 1 in 20,000 solution of mercuric chloride for ten minutes, and then washed in alcohol, gave no growth in nutrient gelatine, silk threads exposed for ten minutes to a 1 in 20,000 solution, or even | in 10,000, still proved fatal to mice. Herroun cultivated ordinary septic bacteria in albuminous filtrates, containing 1 in 2000, and concluded that the value of mercuric chloride as an antiseptic was much over-rated. It is pre- cipitated by albumins though, as Lister has shown, the precipitate EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA. 35 of albuminate of mercury is redissolved when there is an excess of albumin present. Geppert, and later Behring, recognised that the methods employed for testing the efficacy of corrosive sublimate were unreliable. They found, for example, that corrosive sublimate could not be removed from silk threads by washing; and therefore to study the effect. of this antiseptic acting for a given time, it was necessary to dip the threads in ammonium sulphide solution after the treatment with corrosive sublimate. The author confirmed the results of Geppert and Behring, and made a series of experiments to test the value respectively of carbolic acid and corrosive sublimate in antiseptic surgery. The method of dipping an infected thread into an antiseptic solution for a few minutes, and then transferring it to the surface of a nutrient medium to test its efficacy in a given time, was discarded as fallacious; the thread being still wet with the solution when transferred to the medium, it was obvious that the action of the antiseptic continued for many days. To wash infected silk threads with alcohol after exposure to the antiseptic to stop its further action, also proved to be a fallacious method, for the author found in control experiments that absolute alcohol will destroy Streptococcus pyogenes, erysipelatis, and Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, acting for only one minute. Other methods were therefore resorted to, and cultures on the sloping surface of nutrient agar were at first used. The antiseptic was poured into the culture tube until the growth was covered, and when it had acted for a definite time (one minute, five minutes, or fifteen minutes) a solution was added which immediately stopped further action. In the case of corrosive sublimate, ammonium sul- phide was employed, which is quite inert as an antiseptic. The liquid contents of the test tube were carefully poured off, and an inoculation was made into a fresh tube of broth or agar from the culture still adhering to the surface of the nutrient medium. As the results disproved the efficacy of corrosive sublimate, it was thought possible that the solution had not been able in the time to penetrate the film of growth. Another plan was accordingly adopted. Cultures were made in broth, and when fully developed the supernatant liquid was carefully poured off. Corrosive sublimate solution was added to the test: tube, and agitated until any flocculent masses were dis- integrated and the whole of the liquid became uniformly turbid. Ammonium sulphide was added when the time had expired, and tubes of fresh broth were inoculated with the mixture. In the case of carbolic acid the cultures, after its action, were thoroughly washed 36 BACTERIOLOGY. with water, and its efficacy tested by making inoculations from the cultures in fresh media. The results were entirely in favour of carbolic acid. Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus and Streptococcus pyogenes were not destroyed, even when corrosive sublimate solution of 1 in 1000 was allowed to act for an hour. In the case of the cultures of streptococcus of erysipelas the results were different. A solution of 1 in 10,000 had no effect, but 1 in 4,000, acting for one minute, destroyed the culture. With carbolic acid the results were very striking. Cultures were exposed to solutions of 1 in 20, 1 in 30, 1 in 40, 1 in 50, for one minute, five minutes, fifteen minutes. The attempts to make subcultures in every case failed. Carbolic acid l in 40, acting for only one minute, was sufficient to destroy Streptococcus pyogenes and Streptococcus erysipelatis and Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus. Further experiments were made with tubercular sputum, the test being subsequent inoculation of guinea-pigs. Corrosive sublimate solution as strong as 1 in 500 had no effect, but 1 in 20 carbolic acid, shaken up with the sputum for one minute, completely neutralised it. Koch’s statements with reference to the germicidal power of corrosive sublimate in extremely weak solutions had led Lister to substitute it for carbolic acid as a detergent in surgery. The author’s experiments, which were undertaken in 1892, encouraged Lister to revert to the use of carbolic acid, which, indeed, had always proved efficacious in surgical practice. Lister pointed out that carbolic acid has also the great advantage of combining eagerly with fats and epidermis, so that the seat of operation can be effectually cleansed. These experiments also point to the conclusion that carbolic acid should be used in hospital wards for the disinfection of tubercular sputum instead of mercuric chloride and other less efficacious dis- infectants commonly in use. Hot Air and Steam.—Koch, in conjunction with Wolfhiigel, also made exhaustive experiments to test the value of hot air. A similar plan was adopted to that employed in disinfection with chemicals. Bacteria and spores were subjected for a certain time to a known temperature in the hot-air chamber, and then were transferred to a nourishing soil or inoculated in animals. Paper parcels, blankets, bags, and pillows, containing samples of micro-organisms wrapped up inside, were also placed in the hot-air chamber, to test the power of penetration of heat. The conclusions from these experiments were as follows :—- Sporeless micro-organisms at a little over 100° C. are destroyed in one hour and a half. EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA. 37 Spores of bacilli require three hours at 140° C. If enclosed in pillows and blankets, exposure from three to four hours to 140° C. is necessary. Spores of fungi require one and a half hours at 110° C. to 115° C. Further experiments showed that at the temperature necessary for the destruction of spores of bacilli almost all fabrics are more or less injured. Koch, in conjunction with Gaffky and Léffler, also investigated the effect of steam under pressure and at the atmospheric pressure. Rolls of flannel with anthrax spores or earth spores, and a thermometer wrapped up inside, were subjected to steam, and the results compared with the effect obtained with hot air. Thus in hot air four hours’ exposure to a temperature of 130° C. to 140° C. brought the temperature inside the roll to 85° C., and the spores were not injured; on the other hand, exposure to steam under pressure at 120° C. for one and a half hours, raised the internal temperature to 117° C. and killed the spores. By such experiments the superior penetrative power of steam- heat was established. To test steam-heat at the atmospheric pressure, water was boiled in a glass flask with its neck prolonged by means of a glass tube, the temperature in which was found to be uniform throughout. Anthrax and earth spores placed in the tube were found to be unable to with- stand steam at 100° C. even- for a few minutes. It was, therefore, concluded that disinfection by steam at atmospheric pressure was superior to hot air from its greater efficiency, and to steam under pressure from the simplicity of the necessary apparatus. Parsons and Klein made some experiments which were more in favour of dry heat than the above. These observers state that anthrax bacilli are destroyed by an exposure of five minutes at from 100° C. to 103° C. and that anthrax spores are destroyed in four hours at 104° C., or in one hour at 118° C. Guinea-pigs inoculated with tuberculous pus which had been exposed for five minutes to 104° C., remained unaffected. They concluded that as none of the infectious diseases, for which disinfecting measures are in practice commonly applied, are known to depend upon the presence of bacilli in a spore-bearing condition, their contagia are not likely to retain their activity after being heated for an hour to 105° C. (220° Fahr.) In experiments with steam the results. were in accordance with those already given, and complete penetration of an object 38 BACTERIOLOGY. by steam-heat for more than five minutes was deemed sufficient. They also arrived at the same result as in Koch’s experiments, viz., that steam-chambers are preferable: to those in. which dry heat is employed, though it must be borne in mind that some articles, such as leather, are injured by exposure to steam. PracticaL APPLICATION. Nurses and others attending infectious cases should freely use 1 in 40 carbolic for the hands and a weaker solution for the body generally. The skin of patients after recovery should be sponged with 1 in 40 carbolic. The dead should be wrapped up in a sheet soaked in 1 in 20 carbolie acid or a strong solution of chloride of lime. Infected clothing and bedding should be burnt unless in excep- tional cases, when they may be disinfected by boiling, or by exposure to dry heat at 105°C. to 110°C. for three hours, or by. steaming at 100°C. for fifteen minutes. Leather and other articles which would be destroyed by any of these processes should be sponged with lin 40 carbolic. The walls of the sick-room and furniture should be exposed to the fumes of burning sulphur, and next day washed down with 1 in 40 carbolic, and the room freely ventilated by opening all windows and doors. Rags should be burnt, or dis- infected by boiling or exposure to steam when supplied to manu- facturers. The importation of rags from places where there are eases of cholera or small-pox should be prohibited. Infected ships must be fumigated with sulphur, and the bilge disinfected with carbolic acid. Infected railway carriages should be disinfected in the same way as a sick-room. Tubercular sputum, cholera and typhoid evacuations and other excreta should be disinfected by 1 in 20 carbolic acid, or by a strong solution of chloride of lime. CHAPTER IV. CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF BACTERIA. Tux products of the metabolism induced by bacteria may be divided into three classes: (1) ptomaines or alkaloids; (2) albumoses or tox- albumins ; and (3) enzymes. Alkaloids and albumoses are directly poisonous ; enzymes or ferments are harmless except in the presence of proteids, which they are capable of transforming into poisonous albumoses. Promainges AND Tox-ALBUMINS. The study of these products may be said to date back to 1822, when Gaspard and Stick found an intensely poisonous principle in cadaverous extracts. In 1856 Panum discovered a poisonous substance in putrid flesh; and in 1863 Bergmann and Smiedeberg found a nitrogenous crystallisable substance in putrid beer which they named sepsin. In 1872 Gautier found that the decomposition of fibrine led to the formation of various complex alkaloidal sub- stances, and in 1875 Richardson obtained in pyemia an’ alkaloid, septin. This subject, however, received most attention from the classical researches of Selmi, the Italian toxicologist. Selmi, in a celebrated poisoning case, demonstrated ‘the presence of an alkaloid as the result of post-mortem changes. Similar substances were found in alcohol in which morbid specimens had been preserved. Thus the researches of Gautier and Selmi established the fact that albuminoid material undergoing decomposition leads to the forma- tion of cadaveric alkaloids. These animal alkaloids Selmi named ptomaines. Brieger, finding the bases derived from the products of putrefaction less poisonous than those obtained from the pathogenic bacteria, suggested the term towins for the latter. Ptomaines have been divided into two classes—those which are non-oxygenous, liquid, and volatile, and those which are oxygenous, solid, and crystallisable, They are, for the most part, precipitated by the ordinary reagents 39 40 BACTERIOLOGY. for alkaloids, such as chloride of gold, double iodide of mercury and potassium, picrie acid, and tannin. Phospho-molybdic acid precipitates them without exception. They are powerful reducing agents. Ferro-cyanide of potassium is converted into ferri-cyanide in their presence, and the addition of ferric chloride gives the Prussian blue test. Selmi discovered this test, and Brouardel and Boutmy regarded it as absolutely characteristic of ptomaines; but this is _not the case; some vegetable alkaloids, for example, behave in the same way. As examples of the non-oxygenous ptomaines there are :— Parvolin (C9H}8N) an oily base of an amber colour prepared from putrid mackerel and horse-flesh. Hydrocollidin (C°HN), from the same source. It is highly toxic, being compared by Gautier to the venom of the cobra di capello. Collidin (C8H™N), from putrid gelatine and the pancreas of a bullock, also highly toxic. Veuridin (COHMN?), from fish, flesh, and decaying cheese. Saprin (C5H14N2), isomeric with neuridin. Cadaverin (C6HN?), a third isomeride, from ordinary putrefac- tion and herring brine. Putrescin (C*H!N?) from putrefaction. The oxygenous ptomaines are in some instances found also in healthy tissues. They include the following :— Veurin (COH4NO), found in cadaveric putrefaction. Cholin (C7H®NO?), in bile. Muscarin (C'H3NO*), in a poisonous mushroom, Agaricus mus- cavtus, and in putrid fish. These are all highly poisonous. Gadinin (CTH'NO?), in putrefying codfish. Mytilotoxin (CSHMNO?), in poisonous mussels. Poisonous alkaloids are of great importance in connection with those cases of meat poisoning produced by sausages, hams, poultry, and cheese. Tyrotoxicon is a poisonous alkaloid obtained from cheese. The toxic substances of most interest to the bacteriologist are those isolated from pure cultivations of pathogenic bacteria, such as typhotoxin, isolated by. Brieger from cultivations of the bacillus of typhoid fever, and tetanin, from cultivations of the tetanus bacillus ; and the poisons known as albumoses or tox-albumins, se are allied to the albumose of snake poison. Pasteur, in 1885, suggested that in anti-rabic inoculations the immunity resulted from the action of a substance secreted by a microbe, though the microbe has not as yet been discovered in rabies. Salmon produced immunity from hog cholera by the injec- CHEMICAL .PRODUCTS OF BACTERIA. 41 tion of the toxic products in filtered culture fluids. Wooldridge, Hankin, and Martin studied the products of Bacillus anthracis. Charrin, and later Woodhead, Wood, and Blagovestchensky, investi- gated on these lines Bacillus pyocyaneus. Roux and Chamberland experimented with the bacillus of malignant edema; Roux with symptomatic anthrax; Chantemesse and Widal with the typhoid bacillus. Roux, Yersin, Brieger, Frankel, Martin, and Behring worked on the same lines with diphtheria. Koch introduced tuberculin, Kalning mallein, while others have utilised the products of streptococci and pneumococci. Anrep found an albumose in the medulla of rabid animals, and Babés claims to have found an albumose in both rabies and glanders. ' Cholera.—Brieger found several ptomaines, including putrescin and cadaverin, in pure cultures of the spirillum of Asiatic cholera, and Petri found in addition to poisonous bases a proteid body which produces in guinea-pigs muscular tremors, paralysis, and a rapidly fatal result. Roux and Yersin obtained from cultures a tox-albumin insoluble in water, which kills guinea-pigs'in two or three days, but has no effect on rabbits. Pfeiffer also investigated the toxic substances in cultures. Chloroform, thymol, and drying destroyed comma-bacilli, leaving their toxic products unaffected. Concentrated solutions of neutral salts and boiling produced secondary toxic substances, but the original toxic substances were ten or twenty times more virulent. Typhoid Fever.—Typhotoxin (C’7H!7NO?), the alkaloid ob- tained by Brieger from cultures of the typhoid fever bacillus, produces in mice and guinea-pigs salivation, rapid breathing, dilatation of the pupil, diarrhea, and death in twenty-four to forty-eight hours. At the post-mortem examination the heart is found in a state of systolic contraction, and the condition of the heart after death and the absence of convulsions during lite serve to distinguish typhotoxin from an isomeric base obtained by Brieger from putrid horse-flesh. Roux and Yersin have obtained a tox-albumin, It is soluble with difficulty in water, and more toxic to rabbits than guinea-pigs. Tetanus.—Brieger obtained the alkaloid tetanin from impure cultures of the tetanus bacillus. It is a base having the formula CHH22N?04, The hydrochloride is a very deliquescent salt, and soluble in alcohol. Tetanin injected into guinea-pigs produces rapid breathing, followed by tetanic convulsions. Another toxic product, tetanotoxin (C°H™N), produces the same effects as tetanin. The formula of a third base, spasmotoxin, has not been determined. Cadaverin and putrescin are also present in cultures. Kitasato and 1 42 BACTERIOLOGY. Wey] analysed the products of pure-cultures, and obtained the same substances, tetanin and tetanotoxin; and subsequently Brieger and Frankel found that in pure-cultures a tox-albumin could be obtained which is soluble in water, and infinitely more active than the toxic ptomaines. Anthrax.—In 1887 Wooldridge succeeded in protecting rabbits from anthrax by a new method. A proteid body obtained from the testis and from the thymus gland was used as the culture fluid. This proteid substance was dissolved in dilute alkali, and the solution sterilised by repeated boiling. This was inoculated with the anthrax bacillus, and kept at 37° C. for two or three days. A small quantity of the filtered culture fluid injected into the circulation in rabbits produced immunity from anthrax. Subcutaneous inoculation of extremely virulent anthrax blood, made simultaneously with the injec- tion of the protecting fluid, produced no effect. Wooldridge showed that the growth of the anthrax bacillus in special culture fluids gave rise to a substance which, when injected into the organism, protected not only against an immediate but also subsequent attacks. In 1889 Hankin worked under the guidance cf Koch in the Hygienic Institute of Berlin. The acquired tolerance of. the effect of ordinary albumoses, and the experiments of Sewall, who pro- duced immunity against lethal doses. of the albumose of snake poison by the injection of minute doses, led Hankin to expect that an albumose developed in anthrax cultures, and that the anthrax albumose would probably confer immunity from the disease. Hankin succeeded in isolating it from culture fluids. It was precipitated by excess of absolute alcohol, well washed in alcohol to free it from addition of ptomaines, filtered, dried, then redissolved and filtered through a Chamberland filter. With this substance Hankin suc- ceeded in producing immunity in mice and rabbits. Sidney Martin, working quite independently, grew anthrax bacilli in a solution of pure alkali albumin made from serum proteids. After ten or fifteen days the organisms were removed by filtration through a Chamberland filter. The filtrate contained proto-albumose and deutero-albumose, a trace of peptone, an alkaloid, and small quantities of leucin and tyrosin. The mixture of albumoses proved poisonous to mice. The anthrax alkaloid produced symptoms and lesions similar to the albumoses, but much more rapidly and severely. It is an amorphous yellow body, soluble in alcohol and alkaline in reaction. Martin concluded that the anthrax bacillus formed the albumoses and the alkaloid by digesting the alkali albumin; and suggested that the alkalinity of the albumoses explained their toxic CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF BACTERIA. 43 properties, the alkaloid probably being in a nascent condition in the albumose molecule. Tuberculosis.—Koch prepared a glycerine extract of the product of the tubercle bacillus in pure cultivations, and found that the injection of small doses produced a remarkable reaction, both local and general, in ‘tubercular: cases, and especially lupus. ‘This extract, called tuberculin, came to be extensively used as a therapeutic agent, but with disappointing results. Very shortly after the first announcement of Koch’s discovery, the author, in conjunction with Herroun, investigated the chemical properties and physiological effects of the products of the tubercle bacillus. Cultures in glycerine-broth were filtered through porcelain, and a clear amber-coloured liquid was obtained, which. gave important and suggestive chemical reactions. As this filtrate contained the products of the growth of the bacillus most probably in minute quantities, it was evaporated ‘at a low temperature over sulphuric acid. The viscous residue was dissolved in distilled water and tested on the healthy guinea-pig. The result.was a marked fall of temperature, staring coat, extreme irregularity .of the heart’s action, muscular spasms, loss of control over the extremities, and death. A preliminary examination of glycerine-broth cultivations having shown the presence of non-coagulable proteid bodies of the nature of albumose and peptone, and a crystallisable precipitate of a remarkable character resulting on the addition of iodine, the idea naturally suggested itself that the tubercle bacillus might form albumoses and an alkaloid or ptomaine similar to the substances isolated by Martin from pure cultivations of the Bacillus anthracis. Koch pointed out that the effective substance in his extract could be precipitated by absolute aleohol; the author and Herroun determined to investigate the properties and physiological effects of the separated products. They accordingly set to work to isolate the ptomaine, of the existence of which they had some qualitative indication, and at the same time to examine the properties of the albuminous bodies. In this endeavour the general method they found satisfactory was as follows. The clear filtrate from the culture was evaporated at 40° ©. to a very small bulk, and the residue thus obtained was mixed with an excess of absolute alcohol, which precipitated the albumoses and peptone. It was found that by adding the alcohol by degrees a partial separation of the albumose from the peptone could be effected, the latter being only precipitated when the alcohol was nearly absolute. The precipitated albumose was collected on dd BACTERIOLOGY. a filter and redissolved in distilled water. Iu another experiment the albumose underwent a second precipitation, and after washing was again dissolved. The alcoholic filtrate from the precipitated albuminous bodies was then concentrated at a very gentle heat until a viscous residue was left containing the glycerine originally present in the cultivating medium and the extractives and products of the bacillus soluble in alcohol. With this residue definite reactions of an alkaloidal substance or ptomaine were obtained. Careful experiments, however, led to the belief that the whole of the ptomaine was not separated from the albuminous precipitate hy simple addition of alcohol, and the above method was therefore slightly modified. The ptomaine is soluble in water and alcohol, and sparingly soluble in amyl-alcohol, but insoluble in benzine, ether, or chlovo- form, which liquids therefore fail to extract it from aqueous solutions. In its aqueous solutions it is distinctly but not strongly alkaline to test-paper. Phospho-tungstic acid gives with it a white flocculent precipitate. Phospho-molybidic acid gives «a pale yellow precipitate, soluble in ammonia to a blue solution which becomes colourless on boiling. In this respect: it resembles the vegetable alka- loids, aconitin and atropin. It must be remembered, however, that albuminous bodies are precipitated by both this and the preceding reagents, and in the case of the former x reduction of the phospho- molybdate giving the blue solution with ammonia is obtained. The reducing power of the ptomaine is shown by the conversion after a short time of ferri-cyanide of potassium to ferro-cyanide, giving the Prussian blue test with ferric chloride, to which much undue importance was attached by Brouardel and Boutmy, ‘The solution of albumose and solution of peptone are both capable of giving this reaction as well as many vegetable alkaloids. A solution of the ptomaine is not precipitated by ferro-cyanide of potassium or potassic bichromate. In strong solutions it yields precipitates with platinic chloride (yellow), gold chloride (pale yellow), and mercuric chloride (white). That yielded by the first of these reagents is granular in character, and quite insoluble in alcohol, though apparently soluble in water. The precipitation by gold chloride excludes amides and ammoniwn salts. With iodine in hydriodic acid or potassic iodide a precipitate is obtained which is occasionally crystalline, more often granular or amorphous. CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF BACTERIA. 45 This precipitate is soluble in alcohol, and is redeposited when the alcohol is evaporated. On heating it is redissolved into oily drops of a dark colour. With picric acid a granular precipitate is obtained, which under the microscope is seen to consist of minute crystals. This precipitate, on standing, is converted into rounded crystalline masses with numerous small crystals admixed. The ptomaine appears to be easily broken up by heating, especially in the presence of mineral acids or of baryta. The actual quantity obtained from a considerable amount of culture fluid was very small, and as it was possible that when the bacilli were grown in a medium richer in albumin, such as the animal body, more of these products might be formed, the liquid obtained by extracting large masses of tubercular growths from cattle was examined in a similar manner. In this extract, after filtration through porce- lain, an albumose, and minute quantities of a ptomaine were obtained which in reactions was identical with that obtained from the artificial cultivation of the bacillus, but present in even smaller amount. The probable explanation of this is, that in the living animal the ptomaine is constantly being removed ; or it may indicate that it is only formed in minute quantity under those conditions. Having succeeded in obtaining the albumose and the ptomaine in separate solutions, we next proceeded to ascertain the effects of these substances upon healthy and tubercular guinea-pigs. The effect of the ptomaine isolated from different series of cultures ‘was as follows. A rise of temperature occurred in tuber- cular animals, and distinct enlargement of tubercular glands. There was a slight indication of a depression of temperature or hypothermic effect on healthy animals. The albumose, whether obtained from pure cultivations of the bacillus or from tubercular tissue, pro- duced a marked rise of temperature in tubercular guinea-pigs. On the other hand, in a control experiment on a healthy guinea-pig there was an equally well-marked fall of: temperature. The effect upon the tubercular glands in the cases associated with marked rise of temperature was to render them well-defined, indurated, and painful, rather than any considerable increase in volume. Hunter made a chemical examination of Koch’s crude extract, and confirmed the presence of albumoses and alkaloidal substances. ‘The albumoses consisted chiefly of proto-albumose and deutero-albu- mose with hetero-albumose, and occasionally a trace of dys-albumose. Two alkaloidal substances were obtained in the form of platinum compounds of their hydrochlorate salts. In addition there were extractives, mucin, inorganic salts, glycerine, and colouring-matter. 46 BACTERIOLOGY. Swine Fever.—Schweinitz applied Brieger’s methods in the investigation of the products of the swine fever, or hog cholera bacillus. Broth-cultures were neutralised with dilute hydrochloric acid, and evaporated in the water bath. The residue was treated with 96 per cent. alcohol, and the filtered solution with mercuric chloride. A heavy crystalline precipitate was separated by filtra- tion, treated with water, and decomposed with sulphuretted hydrogen, and cadaverin and methylamine were isolated. The filtrate from the mercuric chloride precipitate was freed from excess of mercury by sulphuretted hydrogen, and the mercury sulphide filtered off. The residue, after concentration of the filtrate, was extracted with absolute alcohol, and the solution showed the presence of an alka- loidal salt. The double salt obtained with platinum chloride was submitted, after crystallisation, to an analysis, and the results gave the formula (C!4H*4N2PtCl°). The hydro-chloride is soluble in abso- lute alcohol as well as in water, and produces needle-like crystals. On treating the culture fluids with excess of absolute alcohol a white flocculent precipitate was obtained partly soluble in water, and re-precipitated by alcohol. It was obtained in the form of white crystalline plates. A watery solution gives almost insoluble needle- crystals on the addition of platinum chloride. These products were respectively termed sucholo-toxin and sucholo-albumin. Small doses of these substances produce in guinea-pigs a slight rise in tempera- ture, and ulceration at the seat of injection. Large doses produce a fatal result in six to twenty-four hours. Schweinitz asserts that he has produced immunity in guinea-pigs. An attempt to produce immunity in swine by injection of the albumose gave unsatisfactory results. Diphtheria.— Roux and Yersin finding that filtered cultures of the diphtheria bacillus produced paralysis, affecting chiefly the hind legs, and a fatal result in rabbits and guinea-pigs, proceeded to investigate the chemical products. They succeeded in obtaining a white amorphous substance which was extremely active when injected into guinea-pigs. It was precipitated by alcohol from an aqueous solution, and it was calculated that -0004 gram would destroy eight guinea-pigs of 400 grams, or two rabbits of 3 kilos. each. They concluded that the poison was an enzyme or ferment, as it not only acted in extremely small doses, but it was attenuated by heat and destroyed by boiling. Brieger and Frinkel confirmed these experiments, and asserted that the poison was a tox-albumin; but according to Martin their chemical analysis and reactions were vitiated by the fact that they CHEMICAL. PRODUCTS "OF BACTERIA. 47 had peptone in their cultivating medium. Martin examined the products by using as a culture medium a 1 to 2 per cent. solution of alkali-albumin in broth made from beef, omitting the peptone. After about thirty days the bacillus had converted the alkali-albumin into albumoses, which gave the reactions of proto- and deutero- albumose, with small quantities of an organic acid. A single dose of these albumoses produced weakness of the hind limbs, which after a time passed off. The animal was killed, and the nerves which were examined showed degeneration. Repeated intravenous in- jection on successive days, amounting in all to a dose of 1°69 grams per kilo. of body weight, produced high fever, followed by depres- sion of temperature, severe watery diarrhea, and emaciation. The tendon reflexes began to diminish after the ninth day, on the eleventh or twelfth day there was definite paralysis of the hind legs, and on the seventeenth day reflexes could scarcely be obtained. Martin thus gives his method of abstracting the poisonous pro- ducts either from cultures or from diphtheritic tissues. In dealing with tissues, the spleen and other organs are first finely minced and placed in rectified spirit, and the blood is also placed in spirit, and allowed to stand till the proteids are coagulated; they are then filtered, and the residue extracted with cold water, all the extracts are mixed together, and evaporated at 35° C. to a small .bulk, and thrown into absolute alcohol. Most of the albumoses are precipi- tated, the alcohol is poured off, evaporated to dryness at a low temperature, and extracted by absolute alcohol until nothing more dissolves. The residue is deutero-albumose and mineral salts. All the proteid is mixed together, dissolved in water, and precipitated by alcohol, the process being repeated to remove any traces of bodies soluble in aleohol and the excess of mineral salts. At the last precipitation the precipitate is allowed to stand under alcohol for about two months. The alcohol is then poured off, and the pre- cipitate dried a vacuo. The resulting product is a light yellowish-brown powder soluble in water, cold or boiling, giving a yellowish and faintly acid or nearly neutral reaction. It is composed of deutero-albumose with a slight amount of proto-albumose but no peptone. ‘It gives the ordinary actions of proteids and a well-marked biuret reaction. It is precipitated from solution by ammonium sulphate, and slightly by nitric acid. The reactions are similar to those of peptic deutero- albumose. The alcoholic extract of the tissues is strongly acid, and contains free fatty acid and an organic acid insoluble in chloroform. The organic acid is readily soluble in water and absolute alcohol, 48 BACTERIOLOGY. and insoluble in ether, chloroform, and benzine. It is a yellowish amorphous body, becoming a deep brown when made alkaline. Martin concludes that whereas the Bacillus anthracis produces albumoses and an organic base, in diphtheria we find albumoses and an organic acid, Glanders.-_Kalming has obtained from cultures of the glanders bacillus an extract similar to tuberculin. This crude extract is known as madlein, and is extensively used for the diagnosis of glanders. In a glandered horse it causes a rise of temperature and swelling at the seat of the injection, and the glandered nodules become swollen and painful. Finger claims to have produced immunity from glanders by inoculation of the products contained in sterilised cultures. Schweinitz extracted from cultures a non- poisonous albumose, and obtained only traces of a ptomaine. Suppuration and Pneumonia.—Brieger obtained a ptomaine from cultures of Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, and Roux and Yersin a tox-albumin fatal to rabbits and guinea-pigs in a few days. There was pus-formation at the seat of inoculation, with redness and swelling of the surrounding parts. From pure-cultures of the micrococcus of pneumonia Klemperer obtained a tox-albumin, for which the name pneumo-toxin has been suggested. ENZYMES OR FERMENTS. Many bacteria liquefy the nutrient gelatine in which they are cultivated. This is due to the development of a ferment or enzyme, which dissolves the albumin and gelatine. Enzymes are products of the vital activity of living bacteria. Bitter, and independently Sternberg, showed that when a liquefying bacterium is removed by filtration or destroyed by heat, the culture fluid retains the power of liquefying gelatine. As this occurs usually when the reaction is alkaline, bacterial enzymes resemble trypsin and papain rather than pepsin. They can be extracted with glycerine, and are quite harmless. If injected into animals no effect is produced, and after a few hours no trace of them can be found. According to Fermi, the influence of temperature on the enzymes produced by different bacteria will be found to vary very consider- ably. The enzyme of Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus is destroyed at 55° C., while the enzyme of Bacillus anthracis succumbs at «a temperature of 65° C. to 70° C. Some bacteria produce both enzymes and toxins, but many pro- duce enzymes and not toxins, and others toxins but not enzymes, CHAPTER V. IMMUNITY. THE condition of being insusceptible to an infective disease may be either natural or acquired. In studying the pathogenic organisms several examples of natural immunity will be encountered. The bacillus of septicaemia, so fatal to house mice, has been shown to have no effect upon field mice. The bacillus of anthrax is innocuous to cats and white rats. The bacterium of rabbit septicemia is equally inert in dogs, rats, and guinea-pigs. The immunity may be as in these cases complete, or only partial. Ordinary sheep are very easily affected with anthrax, but Algerian sheep succumb only to large doses of the virus. Natural immunity may not only be characteristic of certain species, but it may occur in certain indi- viduals of a susceptible species. The same immunity occurs in man, for certain individuals, though equally exposed during an epidemic of small-pox, may escape, whereas others readily fall victims to the disease. Acquired immunity is illustrated by the protection afforded by one attack of the exanthemata against subsequent attacks. Thus one attack of measles or small-pox, as a rule, affords complete protection. A knowledge of the immunity resulting in the latter case led to the introduction of inoculation of small-pox as a protection against natural small-pox. Immunity may be acquired by acclimatization, for the inhabit- ants of tropical climates are less susceptible to the diseases of the country, malarial fevers, for instance, than strangers. In civilised communities also, there appears to be a degree of acquired immunity, for infectious diseases like measles introduced among savages or isolated communities have assumed the most malignant type. The immunity acquired by protective inoculation constitutes, in connection with the study of pathogenic micro-organisms, a subject of pre-eminent interest and importance. Pasteur, in his researches 49 4 50. BACTERIOLOGY. upon fowl-cholera, observed that after non-fatal cases the disease either did not recur, or the severity of a subsequent attack was in inverse proportion to the severity of the first attack. It occurred to him to endeavour to obtain the virus of this disease in a form which would provoke a mild attack of the disease, and thus give protection against the virulent form. This attenuation or miti- gation of the virus was successfully attained by allowing cultiva- tions of the microbe in chicken-broth to remain with a lapse of several months between the carrying on of successive‘ cultiva- tions in fresh media. The new generations which were then obtained were found to have diminished in virulence, and ultimately a virus was obtained which produced only a slight disorder; on recovery the animal was found to be proof against inoculation with virulent matter. The explanation given by Pasteur of this change was, that prolonged contact with the oxygen of the air was the influence which diminished the virulence, and he endeavoured to prove this by showing that when broth was inoculated in tubes which could be sealed up, so that only a small quantity of air was accessible to the microbe, the virulence of the cultures was retained. Toussaint investigated the possibility of attenuating the virus of anthrax. Sheep injected with 3 cc. of defibrinated blood, con- taining anthrax bacilli, which had been exposed to 55°C. for ten minutes, recovered, and were afterwards insusceptible. Pasteur subsequently argued that this method did not admit of practical application, because difficulties would arise in dealing with infective blood in quantity, and artificial cultivations started from this blood could not be relied upon, as they proved sometimes as virulent as ever. Pasteur endeavoured to apply the same method for obtaining an attenuated virus of anthrax, as he had successfully employed in fowl-cholera. A difficulty was soon encountered, for in culti- vations of this bacillus, with free access of air, spore-formation readily takes place, and the spores are well known to have an extraordinary power of retaining their virulence. Pasteur found that the bacilli ceased to develop at 45°C., and he believed that spore-formation ceased at 42° to 43°C., the bacilli continuing to develop by fission only. The cultivations were, therefore, kept at this temperature, and at the end of eight days the bacilli were found to have lost their virulence, and were quite inert when inoculated in guinea-pigs, sheep, or rabbits. This total destruction was, however, preceded by a gradual mitigation, so that a virus IMMUNITY. 51 could be obtained, by taking it at the right time, which gave only a mild disease, and afforded subsequent protection. At Melun, in 1881, the protective inoculation against anthrax was put to a practical test. Sheep and oxen were inoculated with the mitigated virus, and then with a virulent form; at the same time other sheep and oxen were inoculated with the virulent form without previous vaccination, as a control experiment. The unpro- tected sheep died without exception ; the unprotected oxen suffered from cedematous swellings at the seat of inoculation, and a rise of temperature ; but all the protected animals remained healthy. As a result of these experiments an idea arose that by preventive inoculation with attenuated virus all communicable diseases would in time be eradicated; but this does not follow, for all communi- . cable diseases do not confer immunity after a first attack; in influenza the very reverse is believed to occur, and erysipelas of the ; face leads to an increased liability to subsequent attacks. Even with regard to the prevention of anthrax, Pasteur’s researches were opposed and criticised. Koch investigated the subject, and came to the conclusion that the process did not admit of practical applica- tion, chiefly on the ground that as immunity lasted only a year, the losses from the vaccination process would be as great or even greater than.from the spontaneous disease; further, there was danger in disseminating a vaccine of the strength required to be effectual. Chateau proved that the attenuation was due to the tempera- ture, and not to the prolonged effect of oxygen. By keeping cultivations at 42° to 43°C. in vacuo, the virulence was found to disappear in twenty-four hours, and by keeping cultivations at a low temperature with free access of air, the virulence was retained. Chauveau considered, therefore, not only that oxygen was not the agent, but that the mitigation was much more easily effected in its absence. ' In spite of these adverse criticisms, these researches nevertheless confirmed the principle of Pasteur’s conclusion, that immunity could be induced by experimental measures, and further showed that he had considerably advanced the methods by which this could be effected. Chauveau succeeded also in attenuating the virus by a modifica- tion of Toussaint’s method. Sterilised broth was inoculated with the bacilli, and placed in the incubator at 42° to 43°C. After the lapse of twenty hours it was removed to another incubator at 47° C. According to the time of exposure to this increased temperature, the mitigation varied in degree. Thus inoculation with the virus, before 52 BACTERIOLOGY. it was exposed to 47°C., was fatal to guinea-pigs; but after one hour at 47°C, the virulence was diminished, and, though ultimately fatal, life was prolonged ; after two hours’ exposure at 47° C. only half the animals died; and after three hours’ exposure they recovered, and were rendered refractory to subsequent inoculation. Attenuation of the virus of anthrax has also been induced by chemical means. Chamberland and Roux stated that a fresh growth started from a cultivation of bacilli which had been subjected for twenty-nine days to 2, of carbolic acid was found to be inert in guinea-pigs and rabbits. Bichromate of potash added to a cultiva- tion in the proportion of zz¢g9 tO sgyq gave, after three days, a new growth, which killed rabbits, guinea-pigs, and half the sheep inoculated ; after ten days, rabbits and guinea-pigs, but not sheep ; and after a longer time even guinea-pigs were unaffected. In other diseases similar results have been obtained. Arloing, Cornevin, and Thomas found that by inoculating a small quantity of the virus of symptomatic anthrax anywhere in the subcutaneous connective tissue, or a moderate quantity at the root of the tail, and even by intravenous injection, immunity was obtained from a virulent dose. In swine-erysipelas, Pasteur and Thuillier obtained attenuated virus upon quite another principle. They discovered that by passing the virus through pigeons the virulence was increased, but by passing it through rabbits it was progressively diminished. Thus a virus was obtained from the rabbit, which produced only a mild disease in pigs, and after recovery complete immunity. Similarly in rabies, Pasteur found that passage of the virus through various animals considerably modified its properties. By inoculating a monkey from a rabid dog, and then passing the virus through other monkeys, the virulence was diminished ; but by inoculating a rabbit from the dog, and passing the virus from rabbit to rabbit, the virulence increased. In rabies, Pasteur has employed another method of attenuating the virus. The spinal cord of inoculated rabbits is removed with all possible precautions, and portions a few centimetres in length are suspended in flasks in which the air is dried by fragments of potash. By this process the virulence is found to gradually diminish and finally disappear. Animals inoculated with portions of these cords, after suspension for a certain time, are rendered refractory to inoculation with virulent cords. Having rendered dogs, which had been previously bitten, free from the supervention of symptoms of hydrophobia by means of protective inoculation, Pasteur proceeded IMMUNITY. 53 to apply the same treatment to persons bitten by rabid animals, with results which tend to the belief that a real prophylactic for rabies has been discovered. Immunity may also be produced by injecting the toxic products existing in pure cultivations after removal of the bacilli. Salmon was the first to produce immunity in this way, by utilising the toxic products of the bacterium of hog-cholera, which were separated by filtration from the living micro-organisms; and shortly afterwards Wooldridge demonstrated that filtered anthrax cultures contained a substance which conferred immunity. Behring and Kitasato produced immunity by mixing cultures with terchloride of iodine. Vaillard filtered the cultures through porcelain, and attenuated the products by heating at different temperatures. Lastly, in the course of Behring’s and Kitasato’s experiments, it was found that the blood serum of animals rendered immune was capable of conferring immunity on other animals. The injection of the toxic products of pathogenic bacteria leads to the development of substances in the blood to which the term “ antitoxin ” has been applied. These protective substances neutralise or destroy the injected poison, and blood serum which has thus been rendered antitoxic can be utilised to confer immunity on other animals. Haffkine’s system of vaccination as a protection against Asiatic cholera is supposed to be based upon the principle of inducing the formation of antitoxins or defensive proteids. MECHANISM OF TwMUNITY. Raulin has shown that Aspergillus niger develops a substance which is prejudicial to its own growth, in the absence of iron salts in the nutrient soil, and Pasteur suggested that in rabies, side by side with a living microbe, there is possibly some chemical product or anti-microbe which has, as in Raulin’s experiment, the power of arresting the growth of the microbe. If we accept the theory of arrest by some chemical product, we must suppose that in the acquired immunity afforded by one attack of an infectious disease this chemical substance is secreted, and, remaining in the. system, opposes the onset of the micro-organism at a future time. In the natural immunity of certain species and individuals we must suppose that this chemical substance is normally present. Another theory is, that the micro-organisms assimilate the elements which they require for their nutrition from the blood and tissues, and render the soil impoverished or otherwise unsuitable for 54 BACTERIOLOGY. the development of the same species of micro-organisms hereafter ; this condition may be permanent, or the chemical constitution of the tissues may be restored to normal, when immunity ceases. If, however, we explain acquired immunity by the result of the growth of a previous invasion of micro-organisms, we are still confronted with the difficulty of explaining natural immunity. A third theory is that the tissues are endowed with some power of vital resistance to the development of micro-organisms, similar to the vital resistance to coagulation of the blood, which is supposed to exist in the-lining membrane of the healthy blood- vessel; that in some species and individuals this exists to a high degree, and hence their natural immunity. But this does not explain how one attack confers immunity from a subsequent one. One would expect that the vital resistance would invariably be lowered by a previous attack, and increased liability be the constant result. A fourth theory was propounded by Metchnikoff, who maintains that immunity depends upon phagocytosis. If anthrax bacilli are inoculated in the frog, white blood-cells, or phagocytes, are observed to incorporate and destroy them until they entirely disappear, and the animal is not affected. But if the animal, after inoculation, is kept at a high temperature, the bacilli increase so rapidly that they gain the upper hand over the phagocytes, and the animal succumbs. It hay also been suggested that bacteria may attract or repel the phagocytes, exercising either a positive or a negative chemvio- taxis. This power is supposed to depend upon some special product of the bacteria or possibly upon their toxins, as suggested by Roux. We must suppose that the negative chemio-taxis has become changed to a positive chemio-taxis in an immunised animal, so that the phagocytes, instead of withdrawing and leaving the bacteria to multiply, are readily drawn into the contest and destroy the invaders. . In septicemia of mice, the white blood-cells are attacked and disintegrated by the bacilli in a remarkable way. It is difficult, however, to accept these observations as affording a complete ex- planation of immunity. It is difficult to conceive that the leucocytes in the blood and tissues in the field mouse are differently constituted from those in the house mouse, so that they form an effectual barrier to the onset of bacteria in the one case, though so readily destroyed in the other, or that in acquired immunity the result is due to educating the phagocytes to respond to a positive chemio-taxis. IMMUNITY. 55 Phagocytosis cannot explain the immunity which results from the injection of filtered cultures, or of antitoxins, but when blood serum of immunised animals was shown to possess antitoxic properties, a new explanation of immunity was at once forthcoming. In the light of these discoveries immunity, whether natural or acquired, was regarded as due to the accumulation in the blood and tissues of substances which have the property of counteracting partially or entirely the products by which pathogenic bacteria produce their poisonous effects. These antitoxins, or protecting proteids, can be obtained not only from the blood but also from the spleen and the lymphatic and other glands. They result from the metabolism of the cells of the tissues of the body. Phagocytes in their conflict with bacteria may play a small | part, but it is more than probable that immunity is altogether independent of phagocytosis. CHAPTER VI. ANTITOXINS AND SERUM THERAPY. Ir has been clearly shown by the experiments of Fodor and Nuttall that some species of bacteria are killed by a mixture with fresh blood. Fodor pointed this out in the case of the anthrax bacillus, and Nuttall confirmed the experiments, and repeated them with a number of different species of bacteria. Behring and Nissen followed up this line of inquiry, and found that there was a great difference in the behaviour of freshly drawn blood to different bacteria. In some cases the bacteria were destroyed, in others their growth was only retarded, and in others again they were not affected at all. Bouchard pointed out that although the normal blood serum of a rabbit may be used for the cultivation of Bacillus pyocyaneus, the blood serum of a rabbit, which has been rendered immune, will attenuate or entirely nullify the pathogenic properties of the bacillus. Ogata and Jasuhara obtained similar results by cultivating anthrax bacilli in the blood of immune animals. Buchner demon- strated that this property of fresh blood belonged to the serum and not to the cellular elements, and strongly advocated the theory that the force opposed to invading bacteria was to be found in the serum rather than in phagocytes. Bimilar experiments were made with the bacteria of swine-fever, and Emmerich and Mastbaum discovered that the blood serum of immune rabbits could be used as a therapeutic agent to prevent the progress of the disease in animals already showing symptoms of infection. A new light was thrown upon this question by the experiments of Behring, Kitasato, Tizzoni and Cattani, and others in connection with tetanus and diphtheria. In these diseases the bacteria do not invade the body, but the poisonous principles elaborated at the seat of inoculation are absorbed into the system and produce deleterious effects. It was obvious that attention must be turned towards counteracting or destroying these poisonous products. 56 ANTITOXINS AND SERUM THERAPY. 57 It was in this direction that the experiments of Behring and Kitasato, in 1890, proved to be of profound importance. It was shown that the blood serum of a rabbit rendered immune against tetanus or diphtheria had no destructive or retarding effect on the growth of the bacilli, but it possessed the power of neutralising the poison developed by the agency of the bacilli. In short, the serum was shown to possess an antitoxic instead of a bactericidal power. Hankin conceived the idea that this property is due to substances of the nature of defensive proteids, and the blood serum of the naturally immune rat was found to contain a proteid body with well- marked alkaline reaction, possessing the power of destroying anthrax bacilli. Injection of this proteid into mice, together with fully virulent anthrax spores, prevented the development of the disease. Young rats are susceptible to anthrax, and, according to Hankin, they can be protected from anthrax by injection of the blood serum of the parent. Tizzoni and Cattani expressed the opinion that the antitoxic substance in the blood serum of animals rendered immune against tetanus is a globulin to which they gave the name tetanus antitoxin. Buchner proposed the term alewins (dAcéw, I defend), to signify these substances. Hankin subdivided them into sozins and phylaxins. Sozins are defensive proteids occurring in normal animals; phylaxins are only found in animals artificially immune ; and each of these are sub-classed by Hankin according to their power of attacking the bacteria themselves or the products they generate. Myco-sozins : Alkaline globulins from rat (Hankin), destroying an- (Sozins: thrax bacillus. Defensive _ proteids J mt in the nor- . pres’ ae Toxo-sozins : Ss Of rabbit, destroying poison of Vibrio Metchnikovi 7 (Gamaleia). Defensive proteids (Hankin) 4 ( Myco-phylaxins : ; Alexins (Buchner) of ney ee ps . typhoi acillus m- Phylaxins : Sanehy. Defensive _ proteids present in the animal after it has artificially been made immune. « Toxo-phylaxins : Of rabbit, etc., destroying diphtheria and tetanus poisons (Behring and Kitasato, anti-toxin of \ Tizzoni and Cattani). Tizzoni and Cattani immunised dogs and other animals against tetanus, and employed the antitoxin as a therapeutic agent. Its 58 BACTERIOLOGY. active substance was precipitated by alcohol. Behring, Kitasato, and Schiitz experimented with a view to conferring immunity upon horses. The cultures were mixed with terchloride of iodine, and injected at intervals of eight days, and the antitoxic power tested on mice. By using increasingly virulent cultures, the blood became increasingly antitoxic. Vaillard filtered tetanus cultures through porcelain, and heated the filtrate at gradually diminishing temperatures. The first in- jections were made with 10 cc., which had been raised to 60° C. for an hour, then a filtrate was used which had been heated to 55° C., and lastly, a filtrate which had been heated to 50°C. The blood became antitoxic, and by injecting increasing quantities of virulent filtrates the antitoxie power was rapidly intensified, and animals which were injected with antitoxin of full strength possessed immunity many months afterwards. Roux and Vaillard introduced another method. Virulent cultures were filtered through porcelain, and the filtrate mixed with Gram’s solution of iodine in iodide of potassium. To give immunity to a rabbit, 3 cc. of toxin with 1 cc. of Gram’s solution were injected on the first day, and increasing doses of toxin mixed with increasing doses of Gram’s solution on the following days. The same method was applied to horses, sheep, and cattle. The antitoxin was found not only in the blood, but in the urine and saliva, and in the milk in cows. With cows and goats it is necessary to proceed with the utmost care; while horses, on the other hand, bear the injections well, and are therefore more suitable for this purpose. It is also very easy to obtain large quantities of blood from the horse by inserting a trocar and cannula into the jugular vein. Friinkel was the first to produce immunity against diphtheria by injecting guinea-pigs with toxin which had been heated to 70° C. Behring mixed the toxin with terchloride of iodine, or employed small doses of pure toxin. Horses, sheep, goats, and dogs were rendered immune. . PREPARATION OF DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIN. For the preparation of diphtheria antitoxin Roux cultivates the diphtheria bacillus in alkaline broth with 2 per cent. of peptone, and by preference, in flasks in which the cultivating liquid can be exposed to a current of moist air at 37°C. After about three weeks the culture is filtered through a Chamberland filter, and if tested on a guinea-pig it will be found that jy of a cc. will kill an animal weighing five hundred grammes in forty-eight hours. The diphtheria ANTITOXINS AND SERUM. THERAPY. 59 toxin immediately before the injection is mixed with 3 of its volume of Gram’s solution. This is used for several weeks, and afterwards only pure toxin is injected. The horses employed for this purpose are animals no longer fit for work, and it is necessary to inject them first of all with mallein to be sure that-they are not suffering from glanders. In a horse inoculated by Roux, the injection began with 3 cc. of iodised toxin, increased to 1 ce. by the thirteenth day, and the injection continued daily. On the seventeenth day } ce. of pure toxin was injected, and this was increased by the forty-first day to 10 cc.; and on the forty-third day 30 cc. of pure toxin were injected, causing pronounced edema. The doses were still further increased, until on the eightieth day 250 cc. were injected. In two months and twenty days the horse had received 800 cc. of toxin. On the eighty-seventh day the serum obtained had an immunising power of over 50,000. By this is meant that a guinea-pig resisted inoculation of 4 cc. of virulent diphtheria culture when injected twelve hours beforehand with serum in quantity equal to the s5i55 part of its body weight. 7 There are two tests which can be applied to the serum. First, the antitoxic serum added to diphtheria toxin renders it inert; and, secondly, if serum is injected into a guinea-pig and toxin injected several hours afterwards, no result follows. Several ways have been suggested for estimating the immunising power of the serum. In Ehrlich’s system, the unit is represented by ‘1 cc. of anti- toxic serum, which, added to ‘8 cc. toxin, will neutralise it so that the whole may be injected subcutaneously in a guinea-pig without producing «edema. The standard toxin is a toxin of which °3 cc. is fatal to 1 kilo. of guinea-pig. But the preventive power of the serum is best expressed by the result of a subsequent injection of toxin. The immunising power is estimated by the number of grammes of guinea-pig which can be protected against the minimum fatal dose of toxin by 1 ce. of anti- toxie serum. The antitoxic serum can be kept in sterilised flasks in the dark, with the addition of a small piece of camphor, or it may be dried in vacuo, powdered, and thus supplied in a convenient form for trans- port. It has merely to be dissolved in water before use. Klein employed a modified plan by which he claimed to have obtained ‘antitoxin in a far shorter time than is possible by Roux’s 60 BACTERIOLOGY. method. Unfiltered attenuated cultures were injected into the horse. . Later, large quantities of living diphtheria bacilli from the surface of solid cultures, of gradually increasing virulence, were repeatedly injected so as to allow the bacilli to grow and multiply. In twenty-three days an antitoxic serum was obtained, one part of which was found capable of protecting 20,000 to 40,000 grammes of guinea-pig against more than a fatal dose of both living bacilli and the resulting toxin. Serum Treatment of Diphtheria.—The results obtained by Behring, Ehrlich, Kossel, and Wasserman, in the treatment of diphtheria in children in Germany by means of the curative serum, and by Roux and others in France, led to the adoption of the treat- ment. in this country. It is best to use an especially constructed hypodermic syringe, which can be easily taken to pieces, and placed in boiling water to sterilise it. The skin surface of the flank is washed, and disinfected with 1 in 20 carbolic, and the antitoxin is then injected. Thesyringe is taken to pieces, placed again in boiling water, and thoroughly cleaned. The dose will depend upon the age of the patient and the strength of the serum. From 10 cc. to 20 cc. are injected in children under fifteen, and 30 cc. to 40 cc. in older patients, and the injection may be repeated in 12 hours. The best results are said to be obtained by injecting every 12 hours, for the first 12, 36 or 48 hours, according to the nature of the case, 1,000 Behring’s units, this being the dose calculated according to the immunising power of the serum. The result of the injection is to lower the temperature and pulse, but frequently the reverse occurs, and in about half the cases an urticarial and sometimes a scarlatiniform rash is produced. Pains in the joints, in rare cases effusion, may also result from the injection. The beneficial results of the treatment are, according to the Report of the Medical Superintendents of the hospitals of the Metropolitan Asylums Board, as follows :— (1) Diminution of the faucial swelling and of the consequent distress ; (2) Lessening or entire cessation of the irritating and offensive discharge from the nose ; (3) Limitation of the extension of membrane; (4) Earlier separation of the exudation ; (5) Limitation and earlier separation of membrane in laryngeal cases ; (6) Improvement in general condition and aspect of patients ; ANTITOXINS AND SERUM THERAPY. 6] (7) Prolongation of life, in cases which terminate fatally, to an extent not obtained with former methods of treatment. Statistics have also been brought forward which show, assuming them to be reliable, a great reduction in the mortality after the antitoxin treatment. A few instances may be quoted to illustrate the statistical eviderice. According to Behring, in the four years prior to the employment of antitoxin, there were in Berlin 15,958 cases of diphtheria, with a mortality of 35:2 per cent. In 1894-5 there was an epidemic of 5,578 cases. Behring asserts that if the mortality had not been reduced by the antitoxin treatment 1,963 would have died instead of 1,056. Behring also states that in the Charité Hospital there were 299 patients, with 53 deaths, or 16-7 per cent. In the Bethania Hospital, where antitoxin was not employed, there were 249 patients, with 112 deaths, or 43 per cent. At Vienna, at the Anna Hospital for children, the mortality in 760 cases was 50°65 per cent., but after the introduction of anti- toxin there were 40 deaths in 159 cases, giving a mortality of 25:3 per cent. In New York, it is said that before the introduction of anti- toxin the mortality ranged from 30°67 to 37:34, while in 1895, under treatment with antitoxin, the mortality fell to 19°43; but it was also pointed out that since the introduction of antitoxin many children with trifling attacks had been treated, and reported as suffering from actual diphtheria, and that they would have recovered without antitoxin, and therefore these cases have given the remedy some credit which it does not deserve. In London, according to the Report of, the Medical Superin- tendents of the hospitals of the Metropolitan Asylums Board there were in 1894, before antitoxin was employed, 3,042 cases of diphtheria with 902 deaths or 29°6 per cent., and in 1895, when antitoxin was used, 3,529 cases with 796 deaths or 22°5 per cent. : a reduction of 7:1 per cent. below that of 1894. The conclusions drawn from the statistical and clinical observations are summed up in the Report thus :— The improved results in the diphtheria cases treated during’ the year 1895, are :-— (1.) A great reduction in the mortality of cases brought under treat- ment on the first and second day of illness. (II.) The lowering of the combined general mortality to a point below that of any former year. (III.) The still more remarkable reduction in the mortality of the laryngeal cases. 62 BACTERIOLOGY. (IV.) The uniform improvement in the results of tracheotomy at each separate hospital. (V.) The beneficial effect produced on the clinical course of the disease. A consideration of the statistical tables and clinical observations, covering a period of 12 months and embracing a large number of cases, in our opinion sufficiently demonstrates the value of antitoxin in the treatment of diphtheria. It must be clearly understood, however, that to obtain the largest measure of success with antitoxin it is essential that the patient be brought under its influence at a comparatively early date—if possible not later than the second day of disease. From this time onwards the chance of a successful issue will diminish in proportion to the length of time which has elapsed before treatment is commenced. This, though doubtless true of other methods, is of still greater moment in the case of treatment by antitoxin. Certain secondary effects not infrequently arise as a diet result of the injection of antitoxin in the form in which it has at present to be administered, and, even assuming that the incidence of the normal com- plications of diphtheria is greater than can be accounted for by the increased number of recoveries, we have no hesitation in expressing the opinion that these drawbacks are insignificant when taken in conjunction with the lessened fatality which has been associated with the use of this remedy. We are further of the opinion that in antitoxin serum we possess a remedy of distinctly greater valne in the treatment of diphtheria than any other with which we are acquainted. On the other hand it has been urged that the decline in the mortality in 1895 in London, which has been attributed entirely to the antitoxin treatment, may possibly be partly due to the pre- valence of a mild type of the disease, and that the fall in the mortality during the seven previous years from 59 per cent. in 1888 to 29 per cent. in 1894, continued in 1895. It is obvious that the whole subject requires to be very carefully considered, and. before any final conclusion can be arrived at as to the therapeutic value of antitoxin, the evidence of others who have had great experience in the treatment of diphtheria by the old and the new methods must be taken into account, and_reliable statistics allowed to speak for themselves. PREPARATION OF TETANUS ANTITOXIN, Auntitoxin for use in the serum treatment of tetanus is obtained from the horse. The tetanus bacillus is cultivated in an atmosphere of hydrogen, in flasks specially constructed for the purpose. In ANTITOXINS AND SERUM THERAPY. 63 about a fortnight the cultures are extremely toxic. The toxin is obtained free from bacilli by filtration through porcelain. Injec- tions may be given daily, subcutaneously or intravenously, beginning with 1 cc. of iodised toxin, and gradually increasing the dose until the pure toxin may be injected without danger. Roux and Vaillard produced immunity in about three months. When a few days have elapsed after the last injection, the blood is drawn, by means of a trocar and cannula, from the jugular vein into a sterilised glass vessel, and set aside to coagulate ; next day the serum is drawn off with a pipette, and used in the. liquid state, or dried in a vacuum over sulphuric acid, and subsequently powdered. When required for use the powder is dissolved in cold water. About 5 grammes are used for a dose. Serum Treatment of Tetanus.— The result, so far, of the employment of tetanus antitoxin in animals suffering from tetanus is disappointing, and the serum treatment is not likely to be of much value in veterinary practice. Nocard infected sheep with tetanus by inserting splinters of wood infected with spores into the muscles of the leg. Tetanus supervened in eleven days, and the splinters were removed, the tissues excised, and the wounds dressed with iodoform. About twelve hours after the symptoms had shown themselves, the sheep were inoculated with antitoxic serum at intervals of one hour, but they all succumbed to tetanus. In one case the total amount injected was 160 ce. of highly antitoxic serum. The antitoxin has been employed in tetanus in man. Kanthack has collected the history of a number of cases, and they indicate that the treatment is useless in acute cases in man with a short incubation period, while chronic cases with a long incubation period often recover after the treatment. At the same time it must be remembered that recovery often took place in chronic cases before the introduction of the antitoxin treatment. The question must still be considered to be sub judice, and a trustworthy conclusion can only be based upon a more extended use of the antitoxin and impartial reports of every individual case. ANTITOXIN OF Septic INFECTIONS. An anti-streptococcic serum has been prepared by Marmorek. A culture of streptococcus was intensified in virulence by inoculation from rabbit to rabbit, and highly virulent cultures gave rise to a powerful toxin. Roget and Charrin also, found that the serum of immunised rabbits and of a horse conferred immunity. A patient 64 BACTERIOLOGY. with puerperal fever was injected with 8 cc., on the follow- ing day with 16 cc., and on the third day with 25 cc. On the fourth day the temperature had fallen, and the patient recovered. Favourable results are said to have followed the use of the serum in 46 cases of erysipelas. Bokenham, working independently, cultivated the streptococcus in a mixture of broth and serum. Horses and asses were inocu- lated, and a considerable degree of immunity established. The serum of an inoculated ass possessed antitoxic power. Ruffer and Bullock succeeded in immunising four horses against the toxin of Streptococcus pyogenes ; two had been previously immu- nised against the toxin of the diphtheria bacillus. The streptococcus was cultivated by Marmorek’s methods in a mixture of two parts of blood-serum and one part of peptonised broth, and the virulence of cultures maintained by inoculation of rabbits. On testing the immunising power of the antitoxic serum on rabbits, the effect appeared to be slight in comparison with the antitoxins of the bacilli of diphtheria and tetanus. In treating cases of septic infection in the human subject, it has been recommended to commence with two injections of 10 cc., and.it is said that no unfavourable results have been met with which could be attributed to the effect of the serum. ANTITOXIN OF TyPpHoID FrveR anp OruEerR DiskaseEs. An antitoxic serum has been obtained by Chantemesse for use in cases of typhoid fever, and it is probable that attempts will be made to extend the principle of the antitoxic treatment to other infective diseases. CHAPTER VII. THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. THE instruments sometimes in use in biological and pathological laboratories are not sufficient for the study of bacteria. It is absolutely essential for the examination of such minute objects that the microscope should be equipped with an objective of sufficiently high magnifying power and with a special illuminating apparatus, while the mechanical arrangements of the stage must admit of the examination of plate-cultivations. It would not be within the scope of this work to give a detailed account of the mechanical arrange- ments and optical principles of the microscope. These matters are fully dealt with in special works on the subject,* but sufficient will be said to afford assistance in the selection of a suitable instrument, and to explain the improvements in the microscope which have been such an aid in bacteriological investigations. A magnified image of an object is the result of the change produced in the direction of rays of light which are made to pass through lenses. This alteration in the course of the rays is known as refraction. A ray of light passing from a rarer into a denser medium is refracted towards a line drawn perpendicularly to the surface of the latter. A ray of light passing through air and impinging on water will not pass on in the same direction, but will be refracted towards a line drawn perpendicularly towards the surface of the water. If the ray pass into glass instead of water a greater refraction will take place, and if it pass into diamond the bending in its course will be still greater (Fig. 11). The sines of the angle of incidence and refraction of different substances have a constant ratio to each other, which is known as the index of refraction, and this is determined for different substances by the refraction produced by the passage of rays from a vacuum. Thus the index of refraction for flint glass is about 1-6, * Carpenter: Zhe Microscope, Ndageli and Schwenderer: The Microscope in Theory and Practice. 65 5 66 BACTERIOLOGY. the sine of the angle of incidence of a ray passing from a vacuum into glass being to the sine of the index of refraction as 16 to 1. If we study the course of a pencil of rays we find that some of the rays are reflected instead of entering the medium and being refracted. When, for example, a pencil of rays falls upon water or glass, after passing through air, some of the rays are lost by reflection, and the proportion of the lost rays will increase with their obliquity. The diminution of the brightness of the image when pencils of rays have to pass through lenses is thus accounted for, and this loss of light increases when the number of surfaces Fie. 11.—THe Rerraction or Lic. through which the rays pass are, as in high-power objectives, increased. There is an additional loss when there is an increase in the difference between the refractive power of the different media through which light passes. When pencils of rays pass from glass. into air, and then into glass again, the loss is much greater than when the-air is replaced by a medium with a refractive index more nearly approaching that of glass. This explains the value of the immersion system, which will be referred to more fully later on, and also the advantage of cementing pairs of lenses with Canada balsam or glass paste. The lenses used in the optical arrangements THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE, 67 of a microscope are principally convex, and the imperfections which result must, if possible, be entirely overcome. These imperfections are spherical and chromatic aberration. Spherical aberration results from the unequal refraction of rays passing through lenses with eqiial curvatures. The rays passing through an ordinary convex lens do not all come to the same focus. The rays passing through the marginal portion come to a focus at a R N R?* ral Fr \4 | rT R BR!’ Fic. 12.—SpuHericAL ABERRATION, point much nearer to the lens than the focus of the rays passing through the more central portion of the lens (Fig. 12). If the whole aperture of the lens is used there must of necessity be blurring, for at the point at which the marginal rays form a distinct image the central rays will be out of focus, and at the point at which the central rays form a distinct image the marginal rays will have diverged, causing indistinctness. This is partially remedied by using a diaphragm and shutting out the marginal rays; but this is K_ > at the cost of loss of light and diminution of the angle of aperture. The difficulty is approximately —_ overcome in practice by using a combination of lenses. The aberration of a convex lens is the. fo opposite of that of a concave lens (Fig. 13). The ms makers of the best lenses endeavour to obtain this ’ A Fic. 13,—Con- correction as perfect as possible to get the sharpness = grnarton oF of the image, so essential in studying the mor- Lunszs In phology of bacteria. Azsi’s Homo- GENEOUS Im - Chromatic aberration is the result of the eae unequal refrangibility of the coloured rays which compose white light. If parallel rays of light pass through a convex lens the violet rays, which are the most refrangible, will come to a focus at a point much nearer to the’ lens than the focus of the red rays, which are the least refrangible; and the intermediate rays of the spectrum will be focussed at points between the red and the violet. A screen held at either of these foci will show an image with prismatic fringes (Fig. 14). 68 BACTERIOLOGY. The chromatic aberration may be reduced by stopping out the marginal rays; but as it is necessary to get the most perfect correction possible, advantage is taken of the different relations which the refractive and dispersive powers bear to each other in different glasses. By combining a double convex lens of crown glass with a plano-convex lens of flint glass, correction is obtained for the violet and red rays. An achromatic objective is constructed on this principle, but the result is not perfect, as the intermediate coloured rays remain uncorrected, and what is termed a secondary spectrum gives rise to images with coloured fringes, especially at the margin of the field. Abbé and Schott, after a great number of experiments, succeeded in discovering a glass with optical properties which removed the secondary spectrum, and objectives made with the new glass are termed apo-chromatic. There is much more Fic. 14.—CHRromatic ABERRATION. perfect concentration of the component rays than in the ordinary achromatic objectives, and the advantages thus obtained are very great. The objectives can be made of higher angle and admit of higher eye-pieces being used without materially diminishing the brilliancy and definition of the image. There is a complete absence of coloured fringes, and the perfect definition is invaluable in micro-photography. Another fault which has to be corrected is the aberration caused by covering a microscopical preparation with a cover-glass. Ross was the first to point out the difference in the image when the object was examined under a cover-glass, and that by altering the position of the front pair of lenses, in an objective corrected for an uncovered object, the objective could be corrected for the covered object (Fig. 15). Objectives are generally corrected for a standard thickness of cover-glass, but H. Lister devised a screw-collar adjustment by which the position of the front pair of lenses could be altered at will; and as it is almost impossible to obtain cover-glasses which THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. 69 do not vary slightly in thickness, the most perfect definition can only be obtained by adjusting for each separate cover-glass preparation. Immersion system.— All objectives were formerly used dry— that is to say, with an air space between the objective and the specimen to be examined—but high-power objectives are now almost entirely made on the immersion system, a drop of liquid being interposed between the objective and the cover-glass. About fifty years ago Amici ‘observed that if a drop of water intervened between the cover-glass or an uncovered object and the lens the image was more brilliant. The passage of rays from the object or the cover-glass into air, and again from air into glass, caused considerable loss of light. With objectives of wide angle of aperture the advantages were counteracted by the reflection of rays falling ob- liquely upon the lens. By inter- posing water more ravs are bent in or refracted, and enter the lens instead of being reflected and lost. Hartnack, Nachet, and others adopted the immersion system, and high-power water immersion lenses were constructed with high angle of aperture.* It was found that there was less necessity for correcting for covers of different thickness, as the aberration from this cause was diminished. The lenses were corrected for an average thickness of cover, and slight deviations produced hardly any appreciable effect. Wenham, Stephenson, Abbé, and Zeiss carried the system to perfection. They argued that the advantages obtained by water immersion would be intensified if a liquid could be found of the same refractive and dispersive power as crown glass. The media would be optically uniform, and the result a homogeneous immersion system. Fic. 15.—OBJECTIVE WITH COLLAR CoRRECcTION (5). * The angle of aperture is “the angle made by the most diverging of the rays of the pencil issuing from any point of an object that can enter the lens, and take part in the formation of an image of it.” The numerical aperture is defined by Abbé as equal to “the sine of the angle of aperture multiplied by the refractive index of the medium between the object and the objective.” 70 BACTERIOLOGY. After experimenting with different liquids—solutions of salts, and various essential oils—Abbé recommended cedar oil as most suitable for the purpose. In its optical properties it very closely resembles crown glass, and it is far more convenient for use than any watery solutions of salts, especially when it is necessary to mmake a more or less prolonged examination of an object. The difference between the dry, water, and oil immersion systems may be illustrated, as Frankel has pointed out, by a very simple experiment. If a glass rod is inserted into an empty test-tube, it is easily visible owing to the difference in refraction between the glass and the surrounding air. If the tube is filled up with water the rod is seen with difficulty, and if, instead of water, cedar oil is used, the part of the rod immersed in the oil will entirely disappear from view. The rays of light pass through an optically .- uniform medium in the experiment with cedar oil, and no refraction or reflection of rays of light can occur. To use an oil immersion objective, a minute drop of cedar oil is placed on the centre of the cover-glass, and the lens lowered by means of the coarse adjustment until it touches the oil. The specimen is then carefully brought into focus with the fine adjust- ment. If the slide is held between the finger and thumb of one hand, and moved from side to side while the other hand is working the fine adjustment, there can be no danger of injuring either the objective or the specimen. Microscopes are made upon either the Ross or the Jackson model. In the Ross model the body of the microscope is fixed at its base to a transverse arm, which is raised or lowered with it by the rack and pinion. In the Jackson model the body is supported for a great part of its length on a solid ‘“ limb.” In the Ross model, unless the body and transverse arm are very solid as in Powell and. Lealand’s microscopes (Fig. 23), there will be vibration at the ocular end; but in the Jackson model vibration is practically prevented, and this is most essential, especially in working with very high powers. The steadiness of the microscope also largely depends upon the form: of stand. There are four different types of stands. The tripod (Fig. 23); the plate, with double columns; the single column, ending in a plate or a bent claw; and the horse-shoe (Fig. 18). The tripod stand with cork feet is the steadiest form-of stand, but it is cumbrous and expensive, and these objections also apply to the model made by Ross. The single upright should be unquestionably condemned, as it THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. 71 Fic. 16.—ENGLIsh MODEL. 72 BACTERIOLOGY. freely admits of vibration, and is most inconvenient for laboratory work, The heavy horse-shoe form is compact and firm, and the weight of it can hardly be considered an objection. The tubular body is from eight to ten inches in length, and within it is a draw-tube with engraved scale. By extending the draw-tube greater magnification is obtained; but as this is at the cost of definition it should hardly ever be used in the examination of bacteria. A triple nose-piece is a great convenience, saving the time which is otherwise spent in replacing objectives of different magnifying power, and there is less risk of injuring them. Focus should be obtained by means of a rack and pinion coarse Fic. 17.—RemMovABLE MECHANICAL STAGE. adjustment. The sliding tube is not to be recommended, as the motion may be stiff, encouraging the use of force, which in turn may result in the objective being brought violently into contact with the specimen, injuring the lens or damaging the preparation; or it may get too loose and readily slip out of focus. The stage should be flat and rigid, either rectangular or circular, so long as it is sufficiently large to accommodate a plate-cultivation. A removable mechanical stage is of great advantage for working with high powers, as a motile bacterium can be constantly kept in view while one hand is engaged in working the fine adjustment (Fig. 17). It may also be employed as a finder if it is engraved with a longitudinal and vertical scale, and provided with a stop. The mechanical stage must be removable, so that the stage proper THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. <3 ~s Fra. 18. Continental MODEL. 74 BACTERIOLOGY. may be free from any attachments when required for the examina- tion of cultures. Diaphragms are necessary for regulating the amount of light. The plan of using a series of discs, with apertures of different. sizes, should be avoided, as they are easily lost, and bacteriological investi- gations may have to be made under conditions in which it is difficult to replace them. A better plan is a revolving plate with apertures of different sizes, but the most convenient form is the iris diaphragm (Fig. 19). The sub-stage condenser is quite as necessary in bacteriological work as a high-power objective. In fact, the condenser and the objective should be considered as forming one optical apparatus, and the microscope regarded quite as incomplete without a condenser as it would be without an objective. By means of the sub-stage con- denser (Fig. 20) the rays of light are concentrated at one point or on one particular bacterium ; and ~ for the best definition it is essential that there should be mechanical arrangements for accurately cen- tring and focussing the condenser. It may even with advantage be provided with a fine adjustment, To sum, up, a microscope for bacteriological investigation should be provided with (1) a steady stand of either the tripod or horse- shoe form; (2) a tubular body on the Jackson model; (3) a wide- angled sub-stage condenser, such as Abbée’s; (4) objectives of an inch, 2th of an inch, and a {3,th homogeneous immersion ; (5) a removable peed stage ; and for the most accurate work there should be centring arrangements and a coarse and fine adjustment to an oil- immersion sub-stage condenser such as Powell and Lealand’s, and a ;i,th homogeneous oil-immersion apo-chromatic objective. With regard to the choice of a microscope, it is chiefly a question of price. The most perfect instrument is the large model by Powell and Lealand, but it is most expensive, and quite unsuit- able for laboratory work. For general use excellent instruments are made by Zeiss, Leitz, Reichert, or Swift, The bacteriological microscopes of these makers are in the necessary equipment practically identical. The Zeiss microscope is the most finished, and costs about twenty pounds. A similar microscope by Leitz and by Swift costs about eighteen, and both make an excellent students’ Fie, 19.—Ints Diaruracm. THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. 75 bacteriological microscope, with a cheap form of adjustment to the sub-stage condenser, at a total cost of about fifteen pounds. Method of Ilumination.—Good daylight is the best for general work. The microscope should he placed near a window with a northern aspect. Direct sunlight should never be utilised, and the best light is that reflected from a white cloud. When daylight is not available good results can be obtained with either gas or a z Z Z Z Z Z Z Zs Wa Wd i|\ Fic. 20.—ABBE’s CONDENSER CONSTRUCTED BY ZEISS. paraftin lamp. In the author’s laboratory the microscope lamps are fitted with Welsbach incandescent mantles. These have many advantages over an Argand burner or a paraffin lamp. A steady and beautifully white light is obtained, and the lamps are quickly lit, and require comparatively little attention. In using high powers and carefully focussing the sub-stage condenser, the image of the fabric of the mantle is embarrassing, and is an objection to this light for the most accurate observations, but in other respects, and =I fon} BACTERIOLOGY. for general use, it is the best form of artificial illumination for the microscope, An ordinary paratin lamp of the cheapest form may be used, but there are many objections to it, such as the shape of the chimney, and the striz and detects in the glass. The best form ot parathn lamp is constructed by Baker and by Swift from = sug- Fic. 21.—Microscore Lamp. gestions by Nelson and Dallinger (Fig. 21); there is also a similar but much larger pattern which is made by Swift (Fig. 22). This form of lamp has a large flat bowl for the oil. It is attached to a standard, and ean be raised or lowered to the desired position. The chimney is of metal and blackened, so that there is no reflected light, and it may also with advantage be provided with a shade, so that no light reaches the eye except through the microscope. The burner may be made to revolve, so that either the edge or THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. 77 the flat of the flame may be utilised. Great care should be taken to have the wick evenly trimmed. The hest paraffin oil should be burnt, and it is as well to add a small lump of camphor. The metal chimney has an aperture in front, giving exit to the rays of light, which is closed in by a slip of glass. The glass is very liable to crack when exposed to the full force of the flame, and it is as well, therefore, to be provided with a stock of glass slips, which have ic, 22,—Larce Mickoscors LAMe. heen annealed by being enveloped in a cloth and boiled for two or three hours. The flat of the flame is used with low powers. The image of the flame is reflected by a plane mirror, and a bull’s-eye condenser interposed between the lamp and the mirror to give an equal iumination of the whole field, In working with high powers the lamp is turned with the flame edgewise, and the mirror is dispensed with. By working, as it is termed, directly on the edge of the flame, the illumination is greatly increased, and a band of light can 78 BACTERIOLOGY. be concentrated on that part of the microscopical preparation which requires most careful study (Fig. 23). To obtain the best definition considerable time must be spent in the arrangement of the illumination, The lamp and microscope having been placed in position, a low power is first used and the smallest diaphragm. On looking through the microscope it will probably be observed that the image of the diaphragm is not in the centre of the field. By moving the centring screw of the con- denser this may be adjusted. The image of the edge of the flame may not be central, and this must he adjusted by moving the lamp into position. The low power is then replaced by a high power, the largest diaphragm used, and the bacteria brought into focus. The diaphragm must now be replaced by one of medium size, and by racking the condenser up and down, a point will be arrived at when the image of the edge of the flame appears as an intensely bright band of light. If this is not exactly in the centre of the field the centring screws of the condenser must again be adjusted. Lastly, by trying different sizes of diaphragms, and focussing with the fine adjustment, and using the correction collar, we arrive at the sharpest possible image of the bacteria. a When the condenser has been accurately centred, it will still be necessary to focus it for each individual specimen, so as to correct for difference in the thickness of slides and the layers of mounting medium. Correction for different thickness of cover-glasses must in each case be made by means of the collar adjustment in the follow- ing way. A high-power eye-piece is substituted for the ordinary eye-piece, and the fault in the image will thereby be intensified. By moving the collar completely round, first in one direction and then the other, while carefully observing the effect on the image, it will be seen to become obviously worse whichever way the collar is turned. The collar must then be turned through gradually diminishing dis- tances until an intermediate point is reached at which the best image results with the high-power eye-piece, and on replacing this by the low-power eye-piece the sharpest possible image will be obtained. Effect of the sub-stage condenser.—The sub-stage condenser gives the most powerful illumination when it has been racked up until it almost touches the specimen. It produces a cone of rays of © very short focus, and the apex of the cone should correspond with the particular bacterium or group of bacteria under observation. The effect of the condenser without a diaphragm is to obliterate what Koch has termed the structure picture. If the component parts of a tissue section were colourless and of the same refractive power as THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. 79 (NWinon, ) Mieroseori IN WORKING DERKOTEY ON CPHEG Mpa i Or tris ia Wren Py neriiccr: TO SCT ATBADENESS AND ACCURACY IN MisASUREALIENT. POWELL AND LMALAND'S Hu sc Ce l ARRAN Nan 80 BACTERIOLOGY. the medium in which the section is mounted, nothing would be visible under the microscope. As, however, the cells and their nuclei, and the tissue fibres do differ in this respect, the rays which pass through them are diffracted, and an image of lines and shadows is developed. If in such a tissue there were minute coloured objects, and if it were possible to mount the tissue in a medium of exactly the same refractive power, the tissue being then invisible, the detection of the coloured objects would be much more easy. This is exactly what is required in dealing with bacteria which have heen stained with aniline dyes, and the desired result can be obtained by the use of the sub-stage condenser. If we use the full aperture of the condenser the greatly converged 5 rays play on the component parts of the tissue, light enters from Fic. 24.—RamspEN MicrRoMETER EYE-PIECE. all sides, the shadows disappear, and the structure picture is lost. If now a diaphragm is inserted, so that we are practically only dealing with parallel rays, the structure picture reappears. As the diaphragm is gradually increased in size the structure picture gradually becomes less aud less distinct, while the colour picture, the image of the stained bacteria, becomes more and more intense, When, therefore, bacteria in the living condition and unstained tissues are examined a diaphragm must be used, and when attention is to be concentrated upon the stained bacteria in a section or in a cover-glass preparation, the diaphragm must be removed and the field flooded with light. Micrometer.—For the measurement of bacteria a stage micro- meter may be used with a camera lucida. The stage micrometer consists of a slip of thin glass ruled with a scale consisting of tenths and hundredths of a millimetre. The image of this can be projected THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. 81 on a piece of paper, and a drawing made, and the object to be measured can then be projected on the paper and compared with the seale. In the Ramsden micrometer eye-piece (Fig. 24) two fine wires are stretched across the field of an eye-piece, one of which can be moved by a micrometer screw. In the field there is also a scale with teeth, and the interval between them corresponds to that of the threads of the screw. The circumference of the brass head is usually divided into one hundred parts, and a screw with one hundred threads to the inch is used. The bacterium to be measured is brought into a i -_ VAAL j | j LJ | Fic. 25.—MIcROMETER EYE-PIECE BY ZEISS. position in which one edge appears to be in contact with the fixed wire, and the micrometer screw is turned until the travelling wire appears to be in contact with the other edge. The scale in the field and the scale on the milled head together give the number of complete turns of the screw and the value of a fraction of a turn in separating the wires. In the micrometer eye-piece constructed by Zeiss, the eye-piece with a glass plate with crossed lines is carried across the field by means of a micrometer screw (Fig. 25). Each division on the edge of the drum corresponds to ‘01 mm. Complete revolutions of the drum are counted by means of a figured scale in the visual field. Another method of measuring bacteria will be referred to in the 6 82 BACTERIOLOGY. chapter on micro-photography. The unit of measurement is one thousandth of a millimetre or a micro-millimetre or micron, and is expressed by the Greek letter p. CARE OF THE MICROSCOPE. After use the objectives, sub-stage condenser, and eye-piece should be carefully wiped with soft linen, an old silk handkerchief, or chamois leather, and the microscope covered with a bell-glass to protect it from dust. If a lens comes into contact with Canada balsam it must be very carefully wiped with a soft rag moistened with alcohol, and then cleaned with a soft leather. Microscopes should not be exposed to the fumes of sulphuretted hydrogen, chlorine, or volatile acids. CHAPTER. VIII. MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. (4) Bacreria 1n Liquips, CuLrures, anD Fresa Tissuzs. Ix conducting bacteriological researches the importance of absolute cleanliness cannot be too strongly insisted upon. All instru- ments, glass vessels, slides, and cover-glasses should be thoroughly cleansed before use. A wide-mouthed glass jar should always be close at hand, containing refuse alcohol for the reception of re- jected slide preparations or dirty cover-glasses. When required again for use, slides can be easily wiped clean with a soft rag. Cover- glasses require further treatment, for, unless they are perfectly clean, it is difficult to avoid the presence of air bubbles when mounting specimens. They should be left in strong acid (hydro- chloric, sulphuric, or nitric) for some hours ; they are then washed, first with water and then with alcohol, and carefully wiped with a soft rag. The same principle applies in the preparation and employment of culture media; any laxity in the processes of sterilisation, or insufficient attention to minute technical details, will surely be followed with disappointing results by contamination of the cultures, resulting in the loss of much time. For the preparation of microscopical specimens it will be found convenient to use a platinum inoculating needle. This consists of two or three inches of platinum wire fused into the end of a glass rod about eight inches in length. Platinum is employed as it rapidly cools after being raised to a white heat in the flame of a Bunsen burner. It is thus completely sterilised, and in a few moments is cool enough not to destroy the bacteria with which it is brought into contact. When using platinum needles, either for inoculating fresh tubes in carrying on a series of pure cultures, or in transferring a small portion of a cultivation to a cover-glass for examination under the microscope, the careful sterilisation of the needle by heating the 83 84 BACTERIOLOGY. platinum wire till it is white hot in every part, and heating also as much of the glass rod as is made to enter the test-tube, must be carried out with scrupulous care. Indeed it is a good plan to Fic. 26.—INocuLATING NEEDLES. let it become a force of habit to sterilise the needle before and after use on every occasion, whatever may be the purposes for which it is employed. Unstainep Bacteria. The bacteria in liyuids, such as pus, blood, and culture-fluids, can be investigated in the unstained condition by transferring a drop with a looped platinum needle or a capillary pipette to a slide, covering it with a clean cover-glass, and examining without further treat- ment. If it is desirable to keep the specimen under prolonged observation, a drop of sterilised water or salt solution must be run in at the margin of the cover-glass to counteract the tendency to dry. Cultures on solid media can be examined by transferring a small portion with a sterilised needle to a drop of sterilised water on a slide, thinning it out, and covering with a cover-glass as already described. Tissues in the fresh state may be teased out with needles in sterilised salt solution, and pressed out into a sufficiently thin layer between the slide and cover-glass. Glycerine may in many cases be substituted for salt solution, especially for the examination of micro-organisms such as Actinomyces and mould fungi. _ ‘There is, as a rule, no difficulty in recognising the larger micro- organisms such as those just mentioned; but when we have to deal with very small bacilli and micrococci, they may possibly be mistaken for granular detritus or fat-erystals, or vice versa. They are ‘distinguished by the fact that fatty and albuminous granules are altered or dispersed by acetic acid, and changed by solution of potash; alcohol, chloroform, and ether dissolve out fat-crystals MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. 85 or fatty particles; on the other hand, micro-organisms remain unaffected by these reagents. Baumgarten demonstrated tubercle bacilli in sections by treating them with potash, which clarified the tissues and brought the bacilli clearly into view. Actinomyces and other vegetable structures will not disappear when sections are immersed in weak hydrochloric acid and mounted in glycerine. In examining unstained bacteria, it is necessary, in order to obtain the structure picture, that the light entering the microscope should be reduced by employing a small diaphragm, and the sub-stage condenser carefully centred and focussed. To focus an unstained specimen in which only bacteria are present, is often difficult. The slide may be gently raised towards the objective, and the stage may be constructed to enable this to be done with the index finger (Fig. 16). If on. tilting the slide the organisms come into focus it will serve as a guide in working the fine adjustment. Another plan when bacteria are examined in water, is to look for an air-bubble, and then to focus its edge until the bacteria appear in view. The simple method of covering the liquid with a cover-glass will not answer for a prolonged examination, as the liquid evaporates and the specimen dries up. To keep living bacteria under observation for any length of time, in order to study their movements or spore- formation, a special slide must be employed (p. 120). Srainep Bacteria. Weigert first pointed out the value of the aniline dyes for staining bacteria, and we are principally indebted to Koch, Ehrlich, Gram, and Léfler for many valuable processes. The staining of fresh preparations, especially those with no coagulable albumen to fix them, may be carried out by the method of His. A slide is prepared as already described for the exami- nation of micro-organisms in the fresh state. The reagents are then applied by placing them with a pipette drop by drop at one margin of the cover-glass, and causing them to flow through the preparation by means of a strip of filter-paper placed at the opposite margin. Babés recommends another rapid means of examining cultivations. A little of the growth, removed by means of a sterilised platinum hook or small loop, is spread out on a cover-glass into as thin a film as possible: when almost dry, a drop or two of a weak aqueous solution of methyl violet is allowed to fall from a pipette upon the film. The cover-glass with the drop of stain is, after a minute, 86 BACTERIOLOGY. carefully turned aver on to a slide, and the excess of stain gently and gradually removed by pressure with a strip of filter-paper. This affords a rapid means of demonstration—for example, of a, cultivation of Koch’s comma bacilli in nutrient gelatine—enabling, the microbes to be seen in some parts of the preparation both stained and in active movement. CovER-GLASS PREPARATIONS. Bacteria may be spreaul out into a thin layer on a cover-glass, and then treated with a dye, or sections of tissues containing bacteria can be stained and then mounted in the usual way. The method of making a cover-glass preparation is one which is very commonly employed. In addition to its value ax a means of examining bacteria in liquids and solid culture media, it affords the additional advantage of enabling, if necessary, a laree number of preparations to be made, which, when dried, can be preserved, stained or unstained, in ordinary cover-glass boxes; they are then in a convenient form for transport, and can be mounted permanently at leisure, The method is as follows: A cover-glass is smeared with the cut surface of an organ or pathological growth, or with sputum ; or a drop of blood, pus, or culture-fluid is conveyed to it with a looped platinum needle. It is absolutely necessary to spread out the micro-organisms into a sufliciently thin layer, so that the individual bacteria may be as much as possible in the sume plane, otherwise some in the field will be in focus aud others out of focus, and it would be impossible to obtain a satisfactory photograph of such a specimen. To overcome this it will be necessary, in the case of cultures on solid media, to diffuse the bacteria in a little sterilised water; and even cultures in liquids may sometimes with advantage be diluted in the same way. By means of another cover-glass the juice or fluid is squeezed out between them into a thin layer, and on sliding them apart each cover-glass bears on one side a thin film of the material to be examined; or a culture is spread out into a thin film by means of « hooked platinum needle. The cover-glass is then placed with the prepared side upwards, and allowed to dry. After a few minutes, it is taken up with a pair of flat-bladed or spring forceps, with the prepared side uppermost, and passed rapidly from above downwards three times through the flame of a spirit lamp or Bunsen burner. Two or three drops of an aqueous solution of fuchsine or methyl violet will be sufficient to cover the film, and after a minute or two the surplus stain is washed MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. 87 off with distilled water by means of a siphon apparatus or a wash- bottle. The cover-glass may be allowed to dry, and then mounted in Canada balsam, or it may, while still wet, be turned over on to a slide, the excess of water removed with filter-paper, and the exposed surface wiped dry. It may first be examined with a power of about 250 diams. ; and if a high magnification is required, which is usually the case, a droplet of cedar oil is placed on the cover-glass, and the specimen examined with an immersion lens. If the specimen is to be made permanent, fix the cover-glass at one corner with the thumb, and with a soft rag carefully wipe off the cedar oil ; then float off the cover-glass by running in distilled water at its margin, and having made a little ledge with a strip of filter-paper, place the cover-glass up against it upon one of its edges and leave it to dry. When perfectly dry mount in Canada balsam, or put it away in a cover-glass box provided with a label of contents. In many cases it is necessary or preferable to apply the stain for a much longer period. This may best be effected by pouring some of the staining solution into a watch-glass, and allowing the cover-glasses to swim on the surface, with their prepared side, of course, downwards. Throughout all these manipulations it is necessary to bear in mind which is the prepared surface of the cover-glass. Instead of using the watery solutions of the aniline dyes the author prefers in many cases to use stronger solutions, and to reduce the staining by a momentary immersion in alcohol. Very beautiful preparations of streptococci, sarcine and other bacteria can be obtained by this method, which is as follows: Cover-glass prepara- tions are stained with carbolised fuchsine (Neelsen’s solution) for about two minutes, rinsed in aleohol for a few seconds, quickly. washed in water, and either examined in water or dried and mounted in the usual way. The extent of decolorisation is a matter of practice : a momentary immersion in alcohol is sometimes sufficient ; too long immersion will remove too much of the colour ; too short immersion will leave the delicate outlines indistinct. This method is especially valuable for sarcine and streptococci, the divisions between the elements being sharply defined, and as any albuminous particles or débris in the preparation are decolorised, much cleaner and sharper preparations are obtained than with the watery solutions. Léffler’s and other concentrated solutions may also be used, but Neelsen’s solution may be regarded as the standard one for this method. 88 BACTERIOLOGY. Aniline oil, carbolic acid, and some other chemicals, when added to the aniline dyes, have the property of acting in the manner of mordants, in some way fixing the colour in the bacteria, so that they are not so readily acted upon by decolorising agents. Liffler’s Solution.—Potash intensifies the staining power, and Koch and Loffler have both used it with methylene blue, Léffler’s solution consists of 30 grammes of methylene blue in 100 grammes of 1 in 10,000 solution of potash. It may be used with advantage for almost all kinds of bacteria. Gram’s Method.—With a solution of gentian-violet the whole film on the cover-glass is at first stained violet. By immersing the cover-glass in a solution of iodine in iodide of potassium the stain is fixed in the bacilli, but not in any débris, pus cells, or tissue elements present in the film. Consequently by transferring the cover-glass to alcohol the bacilli alone remain stained, the violet colour being merely changed to blue. By employing a contrast colour, such as eosin, a double staining is obtained. In some bacteria the sheath is by this method differentiated from the protoplasmic contents. The stock solution of gentian-violet is prepared by shaking up 1 cc. of pure aniline with twenty parts of distilled water, and filtering the emulsion. Half a gramme of the best finely powdered gentian-violet is dissolved in the clear filtrate, and the solution filtered before use. The details of the method will now be described. In the first place, it is much better to employ the aniline-gentian-violet solution quite freshly prepared, and the following useful method is invariably used by the author: Place four or five drops of pure aniline in a test-tube, fill it three-quarters full with distilled water, close the mouth of the tube with the thumb, and shake it up thoroughly. Filter the emulsion twice, and pour the filtrate into a watch-glass or glass capsule. To the perfectly clear aniline water thus obtained add drop by drop a concentrated alcoholic solution of gentian-violet till precipitation commences. Cover-glasses must be left in this solution about ten minutes, transferred to iodine-potassic-iodide solution until in:two or three minutes the film becomes uniformly brown, and then rinsed in alcohol. The process of decolorisation may be hastened by dipping the cover-glass in clove-oil and returning it again to alcohol. The cover-glass is once more immersed in clove-oil, then dried by gently pressing between two layers of filter-paper, and finally mounted in Canada balsam. MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. 89 DovusieE Srarnine or CovER-GLASs PREPARATIONS. To double stain cover-glass preparations they can be treated by Ehrlich’s method for staining tubercular sputum, or by Neelsen’s modification, or by staining with eosin after treatment by the method of Gram. ‘ Ehrlich’s method is as follows: Five parts of aniline oil are shaken up with one hundred parts of distilled water, and the emulsion filtered through moistened filter-paper. A saturated alcoholic solution of fuchsine, methyl-violet, or gentian-violet, is added to the filtrate in a watch-glass, drop by drop, until precipitation commences. Weigert recommended that exactly eleven parts of the dye should be used to one hundred parts of the aniline solution. Cover-glass preparations are floated in this mixture for fifteen minutes to half an hour, then washed for a few seconds in dilute nitric acid (one part nitric acid to two of water), and then rinsed in distilled water. The stain is removed from everything except the bacilli; but the ground substance can be after-stained brown if the bacilli are violet, or blue if they have been stained red. Neelsen’s Solution and Methylene Blue.—Ziehl suggested the use of carbolic acid as a substitute for aniline oil, and Neelsen recommended a solution composed of 100 cc. of a 5 per cent. watery solution of carbolic acid, 10 cc. of absolute alcohol, and 1 gramme of fuchsine. This stain is commonly known as the Neelsen or Ziehl- Neelsen solution. Cover-glass preparations are floated on the hot dye for two minutes, they are then rinsed in dilute sulphuric acid 25 per cent., washed in water, immersed in watery solution of methylene blue for three minutes, again washed in water, dried, and mounted in balsam. Grams Solution and Eosin.—Double staining of cover-glasses can be obtained by combining Gram’s method with eosin. The method is very useful for differentiating the sheath of Streptococcus pyogenes and Bacillus anthracis, from the protoplasmic contents, and for staining preparations of pneumonic sputum, or of micrococci and other micro-organisms in pus. After decolorising the prepara- tion in alcohol, the cover-glass is transferred to a weak solution of eosin for two or three minutes, then washed again in alcohol, immersed in clove-oil, dried between filter-paper, and mounted in balsam. STAINING OF SPORES. A slight modification of the ordinary process employed in making cover-glass preparations has to be adopted to stain the spores of 90 BACTERIOLOGY. bacilli. Under ordinary circumstances the stain will not penetrate the sheath, but if it can be made to penetrate, it is not readily removed, The cover-glass preparation must be heated to a teim- perature of 210° C., for half an hour, or passed as many as twelve times through the flame of a Bunsen burner, or exposed to the action of strong sulphuric acid for several seconds, and then a few drops of a watery solution, of an aniline dye may be applied in the usual way. To double stain spore-bearing bacilli the cover-glass preparations may be floated, for from twenty minutes to an hour, on Ehrlich’s fuchsine-aniline-water, or on the Ziehl-Neelsen solution. The stain must be heated—by preference in a capsule placed in a sand-bath— until steam rises. The fuchsine is removed from the bacilli by rinsing in water and washing in weak hydrochloric acid, and then the preparations are washed again in water, and floated for a few minutes on a watery solution of methylene blue. They are again rinsed in water, dried, and mounted. Neisser’s decolorising solution consists of 25 parts of hydrochloric acid to 75 parts of alcohol. STAINING OF FLAGELLA. Koch first stained flagella by floating the cover-glasses on a watery solution of hematoxylin. From this they were transferred to a 5 per cent. solution of chromic acid, or to Miiller’s fluid, by which the flagella obtain a brownish-black coloration. The author succeeded in demonstrating and photographing flagella in prepara- tions stained with a saturated solution of gentian violet in absolute alcohol ; but these methods are now superseded owing to the much more satisfactory method introduced by Léoffler. Léffler’s method depends upon the employment of a mordant. Léoffler tried tannate of iron, and after a number of experiments the following method was introduced. An aqueous solution of ferrous sulphate is added to an aqueous solution of tannin (20 per cent.), until the mixture turns a violet-black colour, then 3 or 4 ce. of a 1 in 8 aqueous solution of logwood are added. This constitutes the mordant, and a few drops of carbolic acid may be added, and the solution kept in well-stoppered bottles. The dye consists of 1 ec. of a 1 per cent. solution of caustic-soda, added to 100 cc. of aniline water, inwhich 4 or 5 grammes of either methyl violet, methylene blue, or fuchsine, are dissolved. A cover-glass preparation is made in the ordinary way, the bacteria being diffused in water, and then spread out in a very thin film. After drying and very carefully fixing, the film is covered with the mordant, and the cover-glass MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. 91 held over the flame until steam rises. The mordant is then washed off with distilled water, and all traces removed from the edge of _. the cover-glass with alcohol. The stain is filtered, and a few drops allowed to fall on the film, and after a few minutes the cover-glass is again very carefully warmed until steam rises. The stain is then washed off with distilled water, and is ready to be examined and subsequently mounted. For some bacteria it is necessary to modify the solutions, either by the addition of acetic or sulphuric acid, or by varying the quantity of soda solution. Trenkmann introduced a modification of Loffler’s system. Cover- glasses are floated for from two to twelve hours on a solution consisting of 1 per cent. tannin and 3 per cent. hydrochloric acid. After washing in water the preparation is stained with a saturated alcoholic solution of any of the aniline dyes diluted in the propor- tion of 2 drops of the dye to 20 of water. The cover-glasses which remain in the solution for from two to four hours are then washed in water, and examined. The best results are obtained with carbolised fuchsine, diluted in the proportion of 2 drops to 20 drops of 1 per cent. carbolic. Trenkmann also recommended the use of catechu and logwood as mordants, with the addition of very dilute acid, and subsequent staining with fuchsine. Lutesch suggested the use of ferric acetate. To avoid any deposit on the surface of the preparation, freshly prepared saturated ferric acetate is used, and 5 to 10 drops of acetic acid are added to 16 cc. of the mordant. After warming the solution the preparation is washed in water, followed by 20 per cent. acetic acid, again thoroughly washed, and then stained with hot solution of fuchsine or gentian-violet in aniline water. Van Ermengem used a mordant composed of 1 part of 2 per cent. solution of osmic acid, 2 parts of 10 to 25 per cent. solution of tannin, with to every 100 cc. of this mixture 4 or 5 drops of acetic acid. A black ink is thus formed, and the solution is applied for from five to thirty minutes. After washing in water and alcohol the cover-glasses are placed in a solution of nitrate of silver and transferred to another solution composed of 5 grammes of gallic acid, 3 grammes of tannin, 10 grammes of acetate of soda, and 330 grammes of distilled water. In a few moments they are again placed in nitrate of silver, and then washed and mounted in balsam. Sclavo’s method answers well for certain micro-organisms. The preparations are left for one minute in solution of tannin, washed in distilled water, transferred for a minute to 50 per cent. phospho- molybdic acid, again washed and stained from three to five minutes 92 BACTERIOLCGY. in hot saturated solution of fuchsine in aniline water, washed in water, dried on filter paper, and mounted in balsam. The tannin solution consists of 1 part of tannin to 100 ce. of 50 per cent. alcohol. Nicolle and Morax also, have modified Léffler’s method. Per- fectly clean cover-glasses are used, and the film is dried without fixing in the flame. Cover-glasses are covered with the mordant, and heated for about ten seconds, and when steam rises the mordant is shaken off and the film rinsed with water. The same process is repeated three or four times, and finally the cover-glass is stained with Neelsen’s solution, holding it over the flame once or twice for a quarter of a minute ; it is then washed and examined. Bunge prefers as a mordant a mixture of aqueous solution of tannin with 1 in 20 aqueous solution of sesquichloride of iron in the proportion of 3 parts of the tannin solution, 1 part of the iron solution, with the addition of 1 cc. of a saturated watery solution of fuchsine added to 10 ce. of the mixture. The mordant is kept before use, and applied for five minutes. The preparation is then washed and stained with Neelsen’s solution. In another plan the cover-glasses are immersed for one half to one minute in 5 per cent. solution of acetic acid, washed and dried. The mordant is then applied three or’ four times, and the cover-glasses washed, dried, and then stained with gentian-violet, dipped in 1 per cent. acetic acid, washed, dried, and mounted. Peroxide of hydrogen may be added to the mordant, drop by drop; it becomes reddish-brown in colour, and must be shaken up and filtered before use. Cover-glasses are exposed to its action for about a minute, and Neelsen’s solution is used for staining. Hessert dispenses with the mordant. The film is fixed by treating cover-glasses with a saturated alcoholic solution of corrosive sublimate. After washing, the cover-glass is stained for thirty to forty minutes in a hot dye, by preference a 10 per cent. watery solution of saturated alcoholic solution of fuchsine. CovER-GLASs IMPRESSIONS. One of the most instructive ‘methods for examining micro- organisms is to make an impression-preparation. This enables us, in many cases, to study the relative position of individual micro- organisms one to another in their growth on solid cultivating media, and in some cases produces the most exquisite preparations for the microscope. A perfectly clean, usually small-sized, cover-glass is carefully deposited on a plate-cultivation, and gently and evenly pressed down. One edge is then carefully levered up, with a needle, MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. 93 and the cover-glass lifted off by means of forceps. It is then allowed to dry, passed through the flame three times, and stained as already described. In some cases of plate-cultures, especially where no liquefaction has taken place, the growth is bodily trans- ferred to the cover-glass, and a vacant area left on the gelatine or agar-agar, corresponding exactly with the form and size of the cover-glass employed. PRESERVATION OF PREPARATIONS. After examining a cover-glass preparation with an oil immersion objective the cedar oil must be carefully wiped off, and the slide set aside for the Canada balsam to set. At a convenient time all preparations should be sealed with a ring of Hollis’ glue; the cedar oil used at subsequent examinations of the specimen will not be able to work its way under the cover-glass, and prevent the balsam from hardening. When it is ringed cedar oil can be readily wiped off, and the specimen cleaned without danger of moving the cover-glass and injuring the preparation. (Bs) Bacrerra in Sections oF Tissuzs. Methods of Hardening and Decalcifying Tissues.—To harden small organs, such as the viscera of a mouse, they should be placed on a piece of filter-paper at the bottom of a small wide-mouthed glass jar, and covered with about twenty times their volume of absolute alcohol. Larger organs, pathological growths, etc., are treated in the same way, but must first be cut into small pieces, or cubes, varying from a quarter of an inch to an inch in size. Miiller’s fluid may also be employed, and methylated spirit may be sub- stituted for alcohol, from motives of economy. Tissues hardened in absolute alcohol are ready for cutting in two or three days, and those hardened in Miiller’s fluid in as many weeks. Teeth, or osseous structures, must first be placed in « decalcifying solution, such as Kleinenberg’s. When sufficiently softened, they are allowed to soak in water, to wash out the picric acid, and then transferred through weak spirit to absolute alcohol. Ebner’s solu- tion also gives excellent results, especially when the structures to be decalcified are placed in fresh solution from time to time. Methods of Embedding, Fixing, and Cutting.—The author finds that freezing with ether combined with the method of em- bedding in celloidin gives excellent results. The pieces of tissue to be embedded are placed, after the process of hardening is com- 94 BACTERIOLOGY. pleted, in a mixture of ether and alcohol for an hour or more. They are then transferred to a solution of celloidin in equal parts of ether and alcohol, and left there, usually for several hours. The piece of tissue is then placed in a glass capsule, and some of the celloidin solution poured over it. The capsule can be placed Fic, 27.—Swirt’s FREEZING MIcroTOME. bodily in 60 to 80 per cent. alcohol, and left until the following morning. The celloidin will then be of the consisteney of wax. The piece of tissue is next cut out, and after trimming off superfluous celloidin is put in water until it sinks. It is then transferred to gum, and frozen and cut with a freezing microtome. For cutting with Jung’s microtome, the tissues are embedded MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERLA. 95 1-22: eetey eceuioidin, and mou cork with¢ can be 96 BACTERIOLOGY. For fixing directly on cork, small organs and pieces of firm tissue such as the kidneys of i mouse, or liver, we may employ gelatine or glycerine gelatine, liquefied over a Bunsen burner in a porcelain capsule, Glycerine gelatine may be used with advantage for fixing irregular pieces of tissue, as it does not become of a consistency that would injure the edge of the knife. The cork, with spociimnen affixed, is placed in alcohol, and is ready for cutting sections next day. Material infiltrated with parafline must be cut perfectly dry, and the sections prevented from rolling up by gentle manipulation witb, a camel’s-hair brush. They must then be picked off the blade ot the knife with a clean needle, and dropped into a watch-glass containing xylol. This dissolves out the parafline. The sections are then transferred to alcohol to get rid of the xylol, and then to the staining solution, Staining Bacteria in Tissue Nections,—Sections of fresh tissues made with the freezing microtome are to be floated in ‘8 per cent. salt solution, and then carefully transferred, well spread out on a platinum lifter, to a watch-glaxs containing absolute alcohol. Simi- larly, sections selected from those cut with Jung’s microtome may be transferred from the spirit to absolute aleohol, The sections may be then stained by any of the methods to be described. Tt is often advisable to employ some method which will enable one to study the structure of the tissue itself; and sections, however stained, should always be first examined with low powers, to enable one to recognise the tissue under examination, and to examine in many cases the topographical distribution of massex of bacterin, With a power of about 250 diams. (one-sixth), very many bacteria can be distinguished ; and with the oil immersion lenses the minutest bacilli and micrococci can be recognised, and the exact form of individual bacteria accurately determined. As most good modern instruments «re provided with a triple nose-picce, there is no loss of time in examining a preparation successively with these different powers. Weigert’s Method.—A very useful method for staining both the tissue and the bacteria is as follows: Place the sections for from six to eighteen hours in a 1 per cent. watery solution of any of the basic aniline dyes (methyl violet, gentian violet, fuchsine, Bis- marck brown). To hasten the process, place the capsule containing the solution in the incubator, or heat it to 45° C. A stronger solution may also be employed, in which case the sections are far more rapidly stained, and are easily over-stained. In the latter case MICROSCOPICAL EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. 97 they must be treated with a half-saturated solution of carbonate of potash. In either case the sections are next washed with distilled water, and passed through 60 per cent. alcohol into absolute alcohol. When almost decolorised, spread out the section carefully on a platinum lifter and transfer it to clove-oil, or stain with picro-carmine solution (Weigert’s) for half an hour, wash in water, alcohol, and then treat with clove-oil. After the final treatment with clove-oil, transfer with the platinum lifter to a clean glass slide. Dry the preparation by pressure with a piece of filter-paper folded several times, and preserve in Canada balsam, dissolved in xylol. Gram’s Method.—In the method of Gram sections are stained for ten minutes in a capsule containing aniline-gentian-violet solution. Great care must be taken not to injure the sections. If there is any difficulty in finding them, it is best to carefully pour off the stain and fill up the capsule with water. The sections are then readily visible, and can be taken up on the end of a glass rod and placed in the iodine and iodide of potassium solution, where they remain for two or three minutes, until stained uniformly brown and resembling in appearance a boiled tea-leaf. They are then placed in absolute alcohol, and washed by carefully moving the sections in the liquid with a glass rod. When completely decolorised they are spread out on a lifter, and transferred to clove-oil until completely clarified. Each is transferred with a lifter to a slide, and the clove-oil is run off and then completely removed by gently pressing two or three layers of filter-paper upon the section. Finally, the section is mounted in Canada balsam. The process of decolorisation may be hastened by transferring the section from alcohol to clove-oil, and back again to alcohol, repeating this two or three times. On examination the tissue appears colourless, or slightly tinged yellow from too long immersion in the iodine solution, while the micro-organisms are stained blue or blue-black. Double staining is obtained by transferring the sections after decolorisation to eosin, Bismarck brown, or vesuvin. They are left in a watery solution for two or three minutes, then again washed in alcohol, before clarifying in clove-oil and mounting in balsam. Another instructive method is to place the decolorised sections in picro-carminate of ammonia for three or four minutes, and then treat with alcohol and clove-oil. A similar result is obtained by placing the sections in Orth’s solution (picro-lithium carmine), transferring to acidulated alcohol, and then passing through clove-oil and mounting in balsam. 7 98 BACTERIOLOGY. In Ehrlich’s method delicate sections are liable to be injured by immersion in the nitric acid, and therefore Watson-Cheyne suggested the use of formic acid. The Ziehl-Neelsen method, in which sulphuric acid is used instead of nitric acid, is much to be preferred to Ehrlich’s method. Ziehl-Neelsen Method.—The solution is warmed, and sections left in it for ten minutes. The red colour, which disappears when the section is placed in weak sulphuric acid (25 per cent.), may partly return when the section is placed in water. In this case the section must be again immersed in acid and passed backwards and forwards from acid to water until the red colour has completely, or almost completely, disappeared. It must be thoroughly washed in water to remove all traces of the acid, and then placed in a watery solution of methylene blue for two or three minutes, washed again in water, immersed in alcohol, clarified in clove-oil, and mounted in the usual way. Sections are brilliantly stained, and the results are very permanent. Many special methods of staining have been introduced, and will be given in subsequent chapters with the description of the bacteria to which they apply. The methods already described are those which are more or less in constant use in studying bacteria and in conducting original researches. CHAPTER IX. PREPARATION OF NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. To cultivate micro-organisms artificially, and, in the case of the pathogenic bacteria, to fulfil the second of Koch’s postulates, they inust be supplied with nutrient material free from pre-existing micro-organisms. Hitherto various kinds of nutrient liquids have been employed, and in many cases they still continue to be used with advantage, but for general use they have been, in a great measure, supplanted by the methods of cultivation on sterile solid media about to be described. The advantages of the latter methods are numerous. In the first place, in the case of liquid media, in spite of elaborate precautions and the expenditure of much labour and time, it was almost impossible or extremely difficult to obtain a pure culture. When a drop of liquid containing several kinds of bacteria is introduced into a liquid medium, we have a mixed cultivation from the very first. If in the struggle for existence some bacteria were unable to develop in the presence of others, or a change of temperature and soil allowed one form to predominate over another, then we might be led to the conclusion that many bacteria were but developmental forms of one and the same micro- organism ; while possibly the contamination of such cultures might lead to the belief in the transformation of a harmless into a patho- genic bacterium. The secret of the success of Koch’s methods greatly depends upon the possibility, in the case of starting with a mixture of micro-organisms, of being able to isolate them completely one from another, and to obtain an absolutely pure growth of each cultivable species. When sterile nutrient gelatine has been liquefied in a tube and inoculated with a mixture of bacteria in such a way that the individual micro-organisms are distributed throughout it, vnd the liquid is poured out on a plate of glass and allowed to solidify, the individual bacteria, instead of moving about freely as in a liquid medium, are fixed in one spot, where they develop individuals of 99 100 BACTERIOLOGY. their own species. In this way colonies are formed each possessing its own biological characteristics and morphological appearances. When an adventitious germ from the air falls upon the culture, it also grows exactly upon the spot upon which it fell, and can be easily recognised as a stranger. To maintain the individuals isolated from one another during their growth, and free from contamination, it is only necessary to thin out the cultivation, and to protect the plates from the air. The slower growth of the micro-organisms in solid media, affording much greater facility for examining them at various intervals and stages of development, is an additional point in favour of these methods; and the characteristic macroscopical appearances so frequently assumed are, more especially in the case of morpho- logical resemblance or identity, of the greatest importance. The colonies on nutrient gelatine (examined with a low power) of micro- organisms such as Bacillus anthracis and Proteus mirabilis, the naked eye appearances in test-tubes of the growth of the bacilli of anthrax and tubercle, and the brilliant growth of Micrococcus prodigiosus, may be quoted as examples in which the appearances are often very striking and sometimes quite characteristic. Sorip Menta. (A) Preparation or Nutrient GELATINE AND NUTRIENT AGAR-AGAR. Nutrient Gelatine is prepared as follows: Take half a kilo- gramme of beef (one pound), as free as possible from fat. Chop it up finely, transfer it to a flask or cylindrical vessel, and shake it up well with a litre of distilled water. Place the vessel in an ice- pail, ice-cupboard, or in winter in a cold cellar, and leave for the night. Next morn- ing commence with the preparation of all requisite apparatus. Thoroughly wash and rinse with alcohol about 100 test-tubes, and allow them to dry. Plug the mouths of the test-tubes with cotton-wool, taking care that the plugs fit firmly but not too tightly. Place them in their wire cages in the hot-air steriliser, to be heated for an hour at a temperature of 150°C. In the same manner cleanse and sterilise several flasks and a small glass funnel. In the meantime the meat infusion must be again well shaken, and the liquid portion separated by filtering and Fic. 29.—WIRE CacE FOR TEST-TUBES. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE II. Pure-cultivations of Bacteria, Fig. 1.—In the depth of Nutrient Gelatine. A pure-cultivation of Kochs comma-bacillus (Spirillum cholere Asiatic) showing in the track of the needle a funnel-shaped area of liquefaction enclosing an air-bubble, and a white thread. Similar appearances are produced in cultivations of the comma-bacillus of Metchnikoff. Fig. 2.—On the surface of Nutrient Gelatine. A pure-cultivation of Bacillus typhosus on the surface of obliquely solidified nutrient gelatine. Fic. 3.—On the surface of Nutrient Agar-agar. Pure-cultivation of Bacillus indicus on the surface of obliquely solidified nutrient agar-agar. The growth has the colour of red sealing-wax, and a peculiar crinkled appearance. After some days it loses its bright colour and becomes purplish, like an old cultivation of Micrococcus prodigiosus. Fig. 4.—On the surface of Nutrient Agar-agar. A pure-cultivation obtained from an abscess (Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus). Fie. 5.—On the surface of Nutrient Agar-agar. A pure-cultivation obtained from green pus (Bacillus pyocyaneus). The growth forms a whitish, transparent layer, composed of slender bacilli, and the green pigment is diffused throughout the nutrient jelly. The growth appears green by transmitted light, owing to the colour of the jelly behind it. Fie. 6.—On the surface of Potato. A pure-cultivation of the bacillus of glanders on the surface of sterilised potato. \ H keshanic fecit a he rst a —_ . Plate IL Fig 4 rent Brocks,Day & Son, Lith WAUIMCO IN TSE (CU Ib, 10 PURE NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 101 squeezing through a linen cloth or a meat press. The red juice thus obtained must be brought up to a litre by transferring it to a large measuring glass and adding distilled water. It is then poured into a sufficiently large and strong beaker, and set aside after the addition of 10 grammes of peptone, 5 grammes of common salt and 100 grammes of best gelatine. In about half an hour the gelatine is sufficiently softened, and subsequent heating in a water-bath causes it to be completely Coo | | | Fic. 30.—Hor Air STERILISER. dissolved. The danger of breaking the beaker may be avoided by placing a cloth, several times folded, at the bottom of the water-bath. The next process requires the greatest care and attention. Some micro-organisms grow best in a slightly acid, others in a neutral or slightly alkaline, medium. For example, for the growth and characteristic appearances of the comma bacillus of Asiatic cholera a faintly alkaline soil is absolutely essential. This slightly alkaline medium will be found to answer best for most micro-organisms, and may be obtained as follows :— With a clean glass rod dipped in the mixture, the reaction upon litmus-paper may be ascertained, and a concentrated solution of carbonate of soda must be added drop by drop, until red litmus- 102 BACTERIOLOGY. paper becomes faintly blue. If it has been made too alkaline, it can be neutralised by the addition of lactic acid. Finally, the mixture is heated for an hour in the water-bath. Ten minutes before the boiling is completed, the white of an egg beaten up with the shell is added, and the liquid is then filtered while hot. For the filtration, the hot-water apparatus (Fig. 31) can be used with advantage, furnished with a filter of Swedish paper, which may be conveniently made in the following way :— About eighteen inches square of the best and stoutest filter paper semigTIO™, is first folded in the middle, and Lill da ~ then creased into sixteen folds. The filter is made to fit the glass funnel by gathering up the folds like a fan, and cutting off the superfluous part. The creasing of each fold should be made firmly to within half an inch of the apex of the filter, which part is to ke gently inserted into the tube of the funnel. To avoid bursting the filter at the point, the broth, when poured out from the flask, should be directed against the side of the filter with a glass rod. During filtration the funnel should be covered over with a circular plate of glass, and the pro- cess of filtration must be repeated, Fic. 31.—Hor-water Firrerrxe if necessary, until a pale, straw- APPARATUS. coloured, perfectly transparent filtrate results. The sterilised test-tubes are filled to about a third of their depth by pouring in the gelatine carefully and steadily, or by employing a small sterilised glass funnel. The object of this care is to prevent the mixture touching the part of the tube with which the plug comes into contact ; otherwise, when the gelatine sets, the cotton- wool adheres to the tube and becomes a source of embarrassment in subsequent procedures. As the tubes are filled they are placed in the test-tube basket, and must then be sterilised. They are either lowered into the steam steriliser, when the thermometer indicates 100° C., for twelve minutes for four or five successive days, or they NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 103 may be transferred to the test-tube water-bath, and heated for an hour a day for three successive days. If the gelatine shows any turbidity after these processes it must Fic. 32.—METHOD OF MAKING A FOLDED Fitter. be poured back from the test-tubes into a flask, boiled up for ten minutes, and filtered once more, and the processes of sterilisation just described must be repeated. Fig. 33.—StTEAM STERILISER. Nutrient Agar-agar.—Agar-agar is a substance prepared from seaweed which grows on the coasts of Japan and India, and is supplied in long crinkled strips. It boils at 90° C., and 104 BACTERIOLOGY. remains solid up to a temperature of about 45° C. It is there- fore substituted for gelatine in the preparation of a jelly for the cultivation of those baeteria which will only grow, or grow best, in the incubator at the temperature of the blood. It may also be employed at ordinary temperatures for bacteria which liquefy gelatine. The preparation is conducted on much the same principles as those already described. Instead, however, of 100 grammes of gelatine, only about 20 grammes of agar-agar are employed (1:5 to 2 per cent.), and to facilitate its solution it must be allowed to soak in salt water overnight. For the filtration, flaunel is substituted for filter-paper, or may i be used in combination with the latter. The hot-water apparatus is invariably employed, unless, to accelerate the process, the glass funnel and receiver are bodily transferred to the steam steriliser. If the conical cap cannot be replaced, cloths laid over the mouth of the steriliser must be em- ployedinstead. It may be necessary to repeat the process of filtra- tion, but it must not be expected that such a brilliant transparency Fic. 34—Incuparor. can be obtained as with gelatine. The final result, when solid, should be colourless and clear; but if shghtly milky, it may still be employed. A little liquid gradually collects in the tubes, being expressed by the contraction of the agar-agar. Wort-gelatine is used in studying the bacteria of fermentation. Tt is made by adding from 5 to 10 per cent. of gelatine to beer-wort. Glycerine Agar-agar.—This is prepared by adding 5 per cent. of glycerine to nutrient agar-agar, after the boiling and before the filtration, and other modifications can be made for special purposes by the addition of grape-sugar or of gelatine. NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 105 After the final treatment in the steam steriliser some of the tubes of gelatine and agar-agar are placed upright and allowed to set, and others are placed on an inclined plane or in the blood-serum inspissator, and left to gelatinise with an oblique surface. (Bs) Mzrnops or EmpLtoyine. Nurrient JELLY In TEST-TUBES AND oN Guass PLaATEs. Test-tube-cultivations.—To inoculate test-tubes containing nutrient jelly, the cotton-wool plug is first twisted round in case there are any adhesions between the plug and the test-tube. It is then removed with the thumb and index finger of the-right hand, and placed between the fourth and fifth fingers of the left hand, instead of being put down on the laboratory table and thereby probably contaminated with bacteria or the spores of mould fungi. A sterilised needle charged, for example, with blood or pus con- taining bacteria, or with a colony from a plate-culture, is thrust once in the middle line into the nutrient jelly, and steadily withdrawn. The tube should be held horizontally or with its mouth downward, to avoid, as far as possible, accidental contamination from the gravitation of germs in the air; and the plug replaced as quickly Fic. 35.—MeEtuop or Inocuat- . : : ING A TEST-TUBE CONTAINING as possible. The cotton-wool project- grmaine Nurrtent JELiy. ing beyond the mouth of the tube is then thoroughly burnt in the flame of a Bunsen burner or blow- ‘pipe, and an india-rubber cap fitted over the mouth of the tuke The chances of error arising from contamination of the culti- vations are reduced by avoiding draughts at the time of inoculation, and it is best that these manipulations should be carried on in a quiet room in which the tables and floor are wiped with damp cloths, rather than in a laboratory in which the air becomes charged with germs through constant sweeping and dusting, and the entrance and exit of classes of students. In conducting any investigation a dozen or more tubes should be inoculated, and if by chance an adventitious germ, in spite of all precautions, gains an entrance, 106 BACTERIOLOGY. the contaminated tube can be rejected, and the experiments con- tinued with the remaining pure cultivations. When, however, one tube containing a liquid medium is in- oculated from another, as in the process of preparing plate-cultures, or when a culture is made from a tube in which the growth has liquefied the gelatine, it is obvious that the tubes cannot be inverted or held horizontally, and they must then be held and inoculated as in Fig. 38. To inoculate those tubes of nutrient media which have been solidified obliquely, the point of a straight sterilised needle charged with the material to be cultivated is traced over the surface of the jelly from below upwards, or the inoculated material may be spread out with a hooked or looped needle. Examination of Test-tube-cultivations—The appearances pro- duced by the growths in test-tubes can be in most cases sufficiently examined with the naked eye. In some cases the jelly is partially or completely liquefied, while in others it remains solid. The growths may be abundant or scanty, coloured or colourless. The nutrient jelly may itself be tinged or stained with products resulting from the growth of the organisms. When liquefaction slowly takes place in the needle track, or the organism grows without producing this change, the appearances which result are often very delicate, and in some cases very characteristic. The appearance of a simple white thread, of a central thread with branching lateral filaments, of a cloudiness, or of a string of beads in the track of the needle, may be given as examples. In some cases much may be learnt by examining the growth with a magnifying glass. Here, however, a difficulty may be encountered, for the cylindrical form of the tube so distorts the appearance of its contents, that the examination is rendered somewhat difficult. To obviate this, a very simple contrivance may be employed with advantage. This consists of a rectangular vessel, about four inches in height and two inches in width, which may be easily constructed by cementing together two slips of glass to form the back and front, with three slips of stout glass with ground edges forming the sides and base (Cheshire). The front may be constructed of thin glass, and the base of the vessel made to slope so that the test-tube when placed in the vessel has a tendency to be near the front. The vessel is filled with a mixture of the same refractive index as the nutrient gelatine. The latter has a refractive index rather higher than water, which is about 1°333; alcohol has a refractive index of 1:374. The vessel is filled with water, and alcohol is then added until the proper density is reached. he test-tube is placed in the NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 107 vessel, and held in position by means of a clip. The vessel can be fixed on the inclined stage of the microscope, and the contents of the tube conveniently examined with low-power objectives. Plate-cultivations.—By this method, as already mentioned, a mixture of bacteria, whether in fluids, excreta, or in cultivations on solid media, can be so treated that the different species are isolated one from the other, and perfectly pure cultivations of each of the cultivable bacteria in the original mixture established in various nutrient media. We are enabled also to examine under a low power of the microscope the individual colonies of bacteria, and to distinguish by their characteristic appearances, micro-organisms which, in their individual form, closely resemble one another, or are even identical. The same process, with slight modification, is also employed in the examination of air, soil, and water, which will be referred to later, The preparation of plate-cultivations, therefore, must be described in every de- tail: and to take an example, we will sup- pose that a series of plates is to be pre- pared from a test- cube-cultivation. Arrangement of Levelling Apparatus.—In order to spread out the liquid jelly evenly on the surface of a glass plate, and hasten its solidifica- tion, it is necessary to place the glass plate upon a level and cool surface. This is obtained in the following manner: Place a large shallow glass dish upon a tripod stand, and fill it to the brim with cold water; carefully cover the dish with a slab of plate-glass, or a pane of window-glass, and level it by placing the spirit-level in the centre and adjusting the screws of the tripod. Substitute for the spirit-level a piece of filter-paper the size of the glass plates to be employed, and cover it with a shallow bell-glass. Sterilisation of Glass Plates.—The glass plates are sterilised in an iron box placed in the hot-air steriliser, at 150° C., from one to two hours. As these plates are used also for other purposes, a quantity ready sterilised should always be kept in the box. Preparation of Damp Chambers—The damp chambers for the reception of the inoculated plates are prepared thus: Thoroughly ae Fic. 36.—LEVELLING APPARATUS. 108 BACTERIOLOGY. cleanse and wash out with 1 in 20 carbolic acid a shallow glass dish and bell. Cut a piece of filter-paper to line the bottom of the glass dish, and moisten it with the same solution. Method of Inoculating the Test-tubes.—In = a glass beaker or an ordinary glass tumbler, with a pad of cotton-wool at the bottom, place the tube containing the cultivation, the three tubes to be inoculated, three glass rods which have been sterilised by heating in the flame of a Bunsen burner, and a thermometer. Provide a strip of paper, a ee er ee ee large label, a pencil, a pair of forceps, and Gtass PLatas. inoculating needles. All is now ready at hand to commence the inoculation of the tubes. Liquefy the gelatine in the three tubes by placing them ‘in a beaker containing water at 30° C., or by gently warming them in the flame of the Bunsen burner. Keep the tubes, both before and after the inoculation, in the warm water, to maintain the gelatine in a state of liquefaction. Hold the tube containing the cultivation Fic. 38.—Metuop or JNocuLaTING TEST-TUBES IN THE PREPARATION oF PLATE-CULTIVATIONS. and a tube of the liquefied gelatine as nearly horizontal as possible between the thumb and index finger of the left hand. With the index finger and thumb of the right hand loosen the plugs of the tubes. Take the looped platinum needle in the right hand and hold it like a pen. Remove the plug from the culture-tube by using the fourth and fifth fingers of the right hand as forceps, and place it between DESCRIPTION OF PLATE III. Plate-cultivation. This represents the appearance of a plate-cultivation of the comma-bacillus of Cholera nostras, when it is examined over a slab of blackened plate-glass. The drawing was made from a typical result of thinning out the colonies by the process of plate-cultivation. At this stage they were completely isolated one from the other; but later they became confluent, and produced complete liquefaction of the gelatine. Plate IIL H. Crookshamk,fectt Vincent Brocks,Day & Son, Lith PLATE-CULTIVATION. NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 109 the fourth and fifth fingers of the left. Remove the plug of the other tube in the same way, placing it between the third and fourth fingers of the left hand. With the needle take up a droplet of the cultivation and stir it round in the liquefied jelly. Replace the plugs, and set aside the cultivation. Hold the freshly inoculated tube be- tween the index finger and thumb of either hand, almost horizontally, then raise it to the vertical, so that the liquid gelatine gently flows back. By repeating this motion and rolling the tube between the fingers and thumbs the micro-organisms which have been introduced are distributed throughout the gelatine. Any violent shaking, and consequent formation of bubbles, must be carefully avoided. From the inoculated tube, in the same manner inoculate a fresh tube of liquefied gelatine, introducing into it three droplets with a sterilised needle. After tilting and rolling this tube, as in the previous case, the same process is repeated with a third tube, which is inoculated from the second tube. This last tube must be inoculated in different ways, according to experience, for different micro-organisms. Some- times a sufficient separation of the micro-organisms is attained by inoculating the last tube with a straight, instead of a looped, needle, dipping it from the one into the other from three to five times. The next process consists in pouring out the gelatine on glass plates and allowing it to solidify. Preparation of the Gelatine-Plates.—The directions to be observed in pouring out the gelatine are as follows :— Place the box containing sterilised plates horizontally, and so that the cover projects beyond the edge of the table; remove the cover, and withdraw a plate with sterilised forceps ; hold it between the finger and thumb by opposite margins, rapidly transfer it to the filter-paper under the bell-glass, and quickly replace the cover of the box. On removing the plug from the tube which was first inoculated, an assistant raises the bell-glass, and the contents of the tube are poured on to the plate; with a glass rod the gelatine must be then rapidly spread out in an even layer within about half an inch of the margin of the plate. The assistant replaces the bell- glass, and the gelatine is left to set. Meanwhile a glass bench or metallic shelf is placed in the damp chamber, ready for the reception of the plate-cultivation, and when the gelatine is quite solid the plate is quickly transferred from under the bell-glass to the damp chamber; precisely the same process is repeated with the other tubes, and the damp chamber, labelled with the details of the experiment, is set aside for the colonies to develop. Not only plate- cultures should be carefully labelled with date and description, but 110 BACTERIOLOGY. the same remark applies equally to all preparations—tube-cultures, potato-cultures, drop-cultures, etc. Corresponding with the fractional cultivation of the micro- organisms obtained in this manner, the colonies will be found to develop in the course of a day or two, the time varying with the temperature of the room. The lower plate will contain a countless number of colonies which, if the micro-organism liquefies gelatine, speedily commingle, and produce, in a very short time, a complete liquefaction of the whole of ‘the gelatine. On the middle plate the colonies will also be very numerous, but retain their isolated position for a longer time; while on the uppermost plate the colonies are completely isolated from one another, with an appreciable surface of gelatine intervening. Examination of Plate-cultivations—The macroscopical appear- ances of the colonies are best studied by placing the plate on a Fic. 39.—Damp CHAMBER CONTAINING PLATE-CULTIVATIONS. slab of blackened glass, or on a porcelain slab if the colonies are coloured. To examine the microscopical appearances, a selected plate is placed upon the stage of the microscope. The smallest diaphragm is employed, and the appearances studied principally with a low power. These appearances should be carefully noted, and a sketch or photograph of the colony made. The morphological characteristics of the micro-organisms of which the colony is formed can be examined in the following way: A small looped or hooked platinum needle is held like a pen, and the hand steadied by resting the little finger on the stage of the microscope. The extremity of the needle is steadily directed to the space between the lens and the gelatine without touching the latter, until, on looking through the microscope, it can be seen in the field, above or by the side of the colony under examination. The needle is then dipped into the colony, steadily raised, and withdrawn. Without removing the eye from the microscope this manipulation can be seen to be successful by the colony being disorganised or NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 111 completely removed from the gelatine. It is, however, not easy to be successful at first, but with practice this can be accomplished with rapidity and precision. A preparation is then made by rubbing —_—_—_—_ { i mm iy Fic. 40.—Pasteur’s Larce IncussTor. the extremity of the needle in a droplet of water on a slide, covering with a cover-glass, and examining in the fresh state, or by spreading out the droplet on a cover-glass, drying, passing three times through the flame, and staining with a drop of fuchsine or gentian violet. Inoculations should be made in test-tubes of nutrient gelatine 112 BACTERIOLOGY. and agar-agar, from the micro-organisms transferred to the cover- glass before it is dried and stained, from any remnants of the colony which was examined, or from other colonies bearing exactly similar appearances. In this way pure cultivations are established, and the macroscopical appearances of the growth in test-tubes can be obtained. The plates should be replaced in the damp chamber as soon as possible; drying of the gelatine, or contamination with micro-organisms gravitating from the air during their exposure, may spoil them for subsequent examination. A much simpler method of plate-cultivation is to dispense with the levelling apparatus, and he 1 Pee PO? the liquefied jelly into shallow, flat dishes. Disk: They take up much less room, and in many ways are more convenient (Fig. 41). Nutrient agar-agar can also be employed for the preparation of plate-cultivations, but it is much more difficult to obtain satis- factory results. The test-tubes of nutrient agar-agar must be placed in a beaker with water and heated until the agar-agar is completely liquefied. The gas is then turned down, and the temperature of the water allowed to fall until the thermometer stands just above 50° C. The water must be maintained at this temperature, and the test-tubes must be in turn rapidly inoculated and poured out upon the glass plates, or better still, into glass dishes, as already described. A very much simpler plan is to liquefy the agar, pour it into Fic. 42.—Giass BENcHES AND SLIDES. a shallow dish, and allow it to solidify. The culture material is thinned out in sterilised broth, and a few drops are spread out over the surface of the agar. The dishes are then placed in the incubator at 37° C. Glass plates may also be employed in a much simpler way. The nutrient jelly is: liquefied, poured out, and allowed to set. A needle charged with the material to be inoculated is then drawn in lines over the surface of the jelly. This method is of use for inoculating different organisms side by side, and watching the effect of one upon the other, or a micro-organism in this way may be NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 113 sown upon the gelatine which has been already altered by the growth of another micro-organism; the change produced in the gelatine, as in the case of the Bacillus pyocyaneus, extending far beyond the limits of the growth itself. Nutrient jelly may also be spread out on sterilised glass slides, which after inoculation are placed in damp chambers for the growths to develop. Esmarch’s Roll-cultures.—Esmarch introduced a modification of the method of plate-cultivation which may sometimes be used with advantage. The ordinary test-tubes may be employed, or tubes considerably larger in size. After the liquid jelly has been inoculated in the tube, instead of pouring it out on toa glass plate or into a dish, the cotton-wool plug is replaced, and an india-rubber cap fitted over the mouth of the tube. The tube is then placed horizontally on a block of ice or in a vessel containing iced water. The neck of the tube is steadied with the left hand, and the tube turned round and round with the right hand. In a very short time the gelatine sets, and the tube is lined inside with a thin coating. There is far less danger of contamination, and the cultures are in a much more convenient form when circumstances render it necessary to move them. (c) Preparation AND EMPLoyMENT or SoLipiFIED Bioop. Serum. Solid Blood Serum.—The tubercle-bacillus, the bacilli of glanders and of diphtheria, and many other micro-organisms, thrive well when cultivated on solid blood serum. This medium has the additional advantage of remaining solid at all temperatures. The technique required for its preparation and sterilisation is as follows : Several cylindrical vessels, about 20 cm. high, are thoroughly washed with carbolic acid (1 in 20), and then with alcohol, and finally rinsed out with ether. The ether is allowed to evaporate, and the vessels are then ready for use. The skin of the animal selected— calf, sheep, or horse—is washed with carbolic at the seat of operation, and the bleeding performed with a sterilised knife or a trocar and cannula. The first jet of blood from the vein is rejected, and that which follows is allowed to flow into the vessels until they are almost full, The ground-glass stoppers, greased with vaseline, are replaced, and the vessels set aside in ice, as quickly as possible, for from twenty-four to thirty hours. By that time the separation of the clot is completed, and the clear serum can then be transferred to 8 114 BACTERIOLOGY. plugged sterilised test-tubes. These should be filled, with a sterilised pipette, to about one-third of their capacity. Formerly the tubes were sterilised by Tyndall’s process of dis- continuous sterilisation. The tubes were placed in Koch’s serum steriliser, with the temperature maintained for an hour or more at 56° C., and this was repeated for six successive days, the temperature on the last day being gradually raised to 60°C. This completed the sterilisation, and to solidify the serum the tubes were arranged in the inspissator at the angle required, and the temperature was kept between 65° C. and 68° C. Directly solidification took place the tibes were removed. The new process is much less tedious, and consists in taking every possible pre- caution to obtain the blood without contamination by bac- teria in the air or in the vessels employed. There is then no need to sterilise the serum, and it can be coagu- lated immediately. The tubes. are tested by placing them in an incubator at 37° C. for a week, and if any show signs of contamination they are discarded, and the rest Fic. 43.—Kocu’s Serum StTeritiser. can be used or kept in stock. The serum should then present the character of being hard, solid, of a pale straw colour, and transparent. A little liquid collects at the lowest point, and the serum is sometimes milky in appearance at its thickest part. Liffler’s Blood Serum is prepared by mixing two-thirds of fresh serum with one-third of broth, prepared in the usual way but with the addition of 1 per cent. grape-sugar. The mixture is decanted into test-tubes, avoiding the formation of air-bubbles, and it is then coagulated in the usual way. The serum may be employed not only in test-tubes, but also in small flasks, glass capsules, or other vessels, all of which must be cleansed and sterilised. Hydrocele fluid and other serous effusions may be prepared in the same manner. Gelatine may be added to the serum in the pro- portion of 5 per cent. NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION, 115 Inoculation of the Tubes——A. small portion of a culture or of the material to be inoculated is taken up with a sterilised platinum needle, and traced over the sloping surface of the serum; or a fragment of tissue, such as diphtheritic membrane or tubercle, may be introduced into the tube and rubbed gently over the serum so as not to hreak the surface. Fic. 44.—Hurprr’s Serum INSPISsaTor. (p) PREPARATION AND Empioyment or SreriLisep Poraro. Potato-cultivations._—Sterilised potatoes form an excellent medium for the cultivation of many micro-organisms, more especially the chromogenic species. Potato-cultivations also give in some cases very characteristic appearances, which are of value in distinguishing bacteria which possess morphological resemblances. Preparation of Sterilised Potatoes.—Potatoes, preferably smooth- skinned, which are free from ‘“‘eyes” and rotten spots, should be selected, If they cannot be obtained without eyes and spots, these must be carefully picked out with the point of a knife. The potatoes are well scrubbed with a stiff brush, and allowed to soak in 1 in 20 carbolic for a few minutes. They are then transferred to the potato- 116 BACTERIOLOGY. receiver, and steamed in the steam steriliser for twenty minutes to half an hour, the time varying according to the size of the potatoes. When cooked, the potato-receiver is withdrawn and left to cool, the potatoes being retained in it until required for use. Damp chambers are prepared ready for the potatoes, the vessels being cleansed and washed with carbolic as described for plate- cultivations. Small glass dishes of the same pattern as the large ones may be employed for single halves of potatoes. Potato-knives and scalpels, which have been sterilised in an iron box by heating them in the hot-air steriliser at 151° C. for one hour, should be ready to hand. Knives sterilised by heating them in the flame of a Bunsen burner should afterwards be placed upon a sterilised glass plate and covered with a bell-glass. It must not be forgotten, Fic. 45.—Box ror STERILisinc INSTRUMENTS. however, that heating the blades in the flame destroys the temper of the steel, and therefore knives and other instruments should preferably be sterilised in the hot-air steriliser, enclosed in an iron box, or simply enveloped in cotton-wool. Inoculation of Potatoes.—The coat-sleeves should be turned back, and the hands, after thorough washing with good lathering soap, be dipped in 1 in 40 carbolic. An assistant opens the potato- receiver, and a potato is selected and held between the thumb and index finger of the left hand. With the knife held in the right hand, the potato is almost completely divided in the direction which will give the largest surface. The assistant raises the cover of the damp chamber, and the potato is introduced, and while the knife is withdrawn, allowed to fall apart. The cover is quickly replaced, and another potato treated in the same way, is placed in the same damp chamber. The four halves are then quite ready for inoculation. As an extra precaution, the left hand is again dipped in carbolic, and one half of a potato is taken up between the tips of the thumb and index finger, care being taken to avoid touching the cut surface. Holding it with its cut surface vertical, NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 117 a small portion of the substance to be inoculated is placed on the centre with a sterilised platinum needle. With a sterilised scalpel the inoculated substance is rapidly spread over the surface of the potato with the flat of the blade, to within a quarter of an inch of the margin, and the potato is then as quickly as possible replaced in the damp chamber. With another sterilised scalpel a small portion of the potato from the inoculated surface of the first half is in the same way spread over the surface of the second half, thus thinning out the bacteria as in plate-cultivations. Exactly the same is repeated with a third potato, and even a fourth, so that a still further thinning out or fractional cultivation of the micro- organisms may be obtained. In some cases it is necessary to place the cultures in an incubator (Fig. 40) ; others grow very well at the Fic. 46.—Dame CHAMBER FOR POTATO-CULTIVATIONS. temperature of the room. As in plate-cultivations, the potato may also be inoculated by simply streaking it in lines with a needle charged with the material to be cultivated. Potato in Test-tubes.—Large surfaces of potato are employed when we wish to obtain cultures of micro-organisms in considerable quanti- ties, as in the examination of the products of chromogenic bacteria ; but under ordinary circumstances potato is employed in test-tubes. The central portions of raw potatoes are cut out in cylindrical pieces with a cork-borer. These are divided obliquely in their whole length, and each half is placed in a test-tube. The test-tubes are plugged with cotton-wool, and then steam in the steam-steriliser for twenty minutes. The sloping surface is inoculated in the same way as obliquely solidified jelly, and the advantages are great. The cultures are obtained in a more convenient form, and there is less danger of contamination. Potato-paste may be employed when it is desirable to obtain an extensive growth of certain bacteria. The potatoes are boiled for an hour, and the floury centre squeezed out of the skins. This is then mashed up with sufficient sterilised water to produce a thick 118 BACTERIOLOGY. paste, and is heated in the steam steriliser for half an hour for three successive days. {£E) PREPARATION AND Empioyment oF BreaD-Paste, VEGETABLES, Fruit, Wurre oF Eaa. Some micro-organisms, more especially mould fungi, grow very well on bread-paste. This is prepared by removing the crust from slices of bread and drying them in the oven. They are then broken up, and reduced to a fine powder with a pestle and mortar. Small, carefully cleansed, conical, or globe-shaped flasks are plugged with cotton-wool and sterilised in the oven. When cool, a small quantity of the powder is placed in them, and sterilised water added in the proportion of one part to every four of the powder. The paste is sterilised by steaming in the steriliser at 100° C. for half an hour for three successive days. The flasks can be reversed, and may be inoculated with a platinum needle. Boiled carrots and other vegetables, and various kinds of stewed fruit, are also occasionally employed for the cultivation of bacteria. The sterilisation of these media must be carried out on the principles already explained. White of egg may be solidified in shallow glass dishes, in the steam steriliser. After inoculation the dishes should be placed in a damp chamber. Lieurip MEpIA. (fF) Preparation or Sverttisep Brora, Liquip Buioop Serum, Urine, M1tx, Vecrerasie Inrusions, AND ArtiriciaL Nourisu- ing Liquips. Nutrient liquids are still largely employed. For inoculation ex- periments when the presence of gelatine is undesirable, for studying the physiology and chemistry of bacteria, and when for any object a rapid growth of micro-organisms is necessary, the employment of liquid media is not only advisable, but absolutely necessary. Liquid media comprise two distinct groups—natural and artificial. Natural media include meat broth, blood, urine, milk, and vegetable infusions; artificial media are solutions composed from a chemical formula representing essential food constituents. Broth may be made from beef, pork, chicken, or fish in the manner which has been described for the preparation of nutrient gelatine, simply with omission of the gelatine. After the process NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 119 of neutralisation with carbonate of soda solution, the flask of broth is placed int the steam steriliser for half an hour at 100°C. A clear liquid results on filtration which is transferred to, plugged sterilised flasks or test-tubes, and sterilisation effected by exposing them in the steam steriliser for half an hour at 100° C. for two Fic. 47.—APPARATUS FOR STERILISATION BY STEAM UNDER PRESSURE. or three successive days, or by using the apparatus for sterilising by steam under pressure. For some bacteria a more suitable cultivating medium is obtained by the addition of glycerine or grape-sugar. Liquid Blood Serum.—tThe preparation of blood’ serum has already been described. It may be required for cultivations before the final treatment by which it is solidified, for example, in the method of drop-cultivation, and may be used with the addition of glycerine or grape-sugar. Hydrocele fluid, peritonitic and pleuritic 120 BACTERIOLOGY. effusions, can also be employed after sterilisation in the steam steriliser, The fluid should be withdrawn with a sterilised trocar and cannula, and received into plugged sterilised flasks. Urine.—In order to obtain urine free from micro-organisms the following precautions must be observed : The orifice of the urethra must be thoroughly cleansed with weak carbolic. The first jet of urine should be rejected, and the rest received into sterilised vessels, which must be quickly closed with sterilised plugs. If these pre- cautions be not attended to, the urine must be rendered sterile by the means described for the sterilisation of broth. Milk.—If milk has been drawn into sterile flasks, after thoroughly cleansing and disinfecting the teats and hands, it may be kept without change. If procured without these precautions, it must be steamed in the steriliser for half an hour for five successive days. Vegetable and other Infusions.—Infusions of hay, cucumber, and turnip are used for special purposes, and more rarely decoctions of plums, raisins, malt, and horse-dung. They are mostly prepared by boiling with distilled water, after maceration for several hours. The filtrate is received into sterile flasks and sterilised in the usual way in the steam steriliser. Artificial Fluids.—Pasteur’s solution is prepared by mixing the ingredients in the following proportions :— Distilled water 100 Pure cane-sugar . 10 Ammonium tartrate 1 Ash of yeast ‘ 075 Mayer’s modification of the nourishing fluid employed by Cohn is as follows :— Distilled water ; 20 Ammonium tartrate 2 Phosphate of potassium “A Sulphate of magnesium ‘1 Tribasic calcium phosphate ‘01 Drop-cultures.—This method of cultivation is a particularly instructive one. It enables us to study many of the changes which take place during the life history of micro-organisms. This is illustrated, for example, in a drop-culture of the anthrax bacillus, in which we can watch the gradual growth of a single bacillus into NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 121 a long filament, and the subsequent development of bright oval spores. It is necessary carefully to observe the minutest details in order to maintain the cultivation pure. An excavated slide is thoroughly cleaned, and then sterilised by being held with the cupped side downwards in the flame of the Bunsen burner. A ring of vaseline is painted round the excavation, and the slide is then placed under a glass bell. Meanwhile a carefully cleansed cover- glass is also sterilised by passing it through the flame, and should be deposited on a sterilised glass plate. With a sterilised looped needle, a drop of sterile broth is transferred to the cover-glass, and this is inoculated by touching it with another sterilised needle charged with the material to be examined, without disturbing the form of the drop. It is quite sufficient just to touch the drop b 4, Fic. 48,—Drop Currivation. (a) Drop of broth; (b) layer of vaseline. instead of transferring a visible quantity of blood, juice, or growth, as the case may be. ‘The slide is then inverted and placed over the cover-glass, so that the drop will come exactly in the centre of the excavation, and is gently pressed down. On turning the slide over again the cover-glass adheres, and an additional layer of vaseline is painted round the edges of the cover-glass itself. The slide must be labelled, and if necessary, placed in the incubator, and the results watched from time to time. Instead of broth, liquid blood serum may be employed in this form of cultivation. If it is required to preserve the drop-cultivation as a microscopic preparation, the cover-glass is gently lifted off and allowed to dry. Any vaseline adhering to the cover-glass should be wiped off, and the cover-glass can then be passed through the flame and stained in the usual manner. Moist Cells—Unless drop-cultures are very carefully prepared 122 BACTERIOLOGY. they are liable to dry up, if kept for examination for several days. Many therefore prefer employing a moist cell, of which there are several different forms in use. The drop-culture slide may be converted into a moist cell by having a deep groove cut round the circumference of the con- eavity. This groove is filled with sterilised water by means of a pipette.. A ring of vaseline is painted with the camel’s-hair brush outside the groove, and the cover-glass, with the drop-cultivation, is inverted and placed over the concavity. This form is very useful, as the slide can be easily cleansed and effectually sterilised by holding it in the flame of the Bunsen burner. A very simple form of moist cell recommended by Schafer Fic. 49.—SrmeLteE MEtTHop oF Formine a Moist CELL. may be used in some cases, but possesses the disadvantage of not admitting of sterilisation by heat. A small piece of putty or modelling wax is rolled into a cord about two inches long and 3 inch thick. By uniting the ends a ring is formed, which is placed on the middle of a clean glass slide. A drop of water is placed in the centre of the ring, and the cell roofed in by applying a cover-glass. A cell somewhat similar in form, which has the advantage of permitting of thorough cleansing, may be constructed by cementing a glass ring with flat surfaces to an ordinary slide. Vaseline is applied with a camel’s-hair brush to the upper surface of the ring, and one or two drops of water placed with a pipette at the bottom of the cell. The cover-glass, with the preparation, is then inverted over the cell and gently pressed down upon the glass ring. The vaseline renders the cell air-tight, and, to a certain extent, fixes the cover-glass to the ring. i NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 123 Warm Stages—To apply warmth while a preparation is under continuous observation, we must either place the microscope bodily Ja SEE Fig. 50.—Warm Stace. within a special incubator, with the eye-piece protruding through an opening, or we must employ some means of applying heat directly to the preparation. A simple warm stage may be made of an oblong copper plate, pt pil Nm | re Fig. 51.—Warm STAGE SHOWN IN OPERATION. two inches long by one inch wide, from one side of which a rod of the same material projects. The plate has a round aperture in the 124 BACTERIOLOGY. middle, half an inch in diameter, and is fastened to an ordinary slide with sealing-wax. The drop to be examined is placed on a large-sized cover-glass and covered with a smaller one. Olive oil or vaseline is painted round the edge of the smaller cover-glass to prevent evaporation, and the preparation is placed over the aperture in the plate. The slide bearing the copper plate is clamped to the stage of Fic. 52.—-Ispag’s WARMING APPARATUS IN OPERATION. the microscope. The flame of a spirit-lamp is applied to the extremity of the rod, and the heat is conducted to the plate and thence transmitted to the specimen. In order that the temperature of the copper plate may be approximately that of the body, the lamp is so adjusted that a fragment of cacao butter and wax, placed close to the preparation, is melted. Lsrael’s Warming Apparatus.—It is obvious that in employing very high powers a difficulty will be presented by the warm stages NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 125 commonly used for accurate observations, such as Schifer’s or Stricker’s, owing to their interference with the illumination. To WEL" Fic. 53.—SEcTION OF ISRAEL’: WARMING APPARATUS AND DROP-CULTURE SLIDE. overcome this an apparatus has been constructed by which the slide is warmed from above (Figs. 52, 53). . The drop-culture slides are provided with a shallow groove, ‘1 mm. deep and 1 mm. broad, cut round the concavity. Into this the cover-glass fits, so that its upper surface is level with that of Fic. 54.—IsRaEL’s WaRMING APPARATUS. the slide. The heating apparatus consists of a flat disk-shaped box with a central conical aperture. The entrance and exit pipes are fixed on at a right angle to the 126 BACTERIOLOGY. side (Fig. 54). The former, z, is of metal, andthe latter, a, of glass fitted with a thermometer, the bulb of which, &, is contained within the box. A partition, s, keeps up a current between the openings Fig. 55.—Gas CHAMBER IN USE WITH APPARATUS FOR GENERATING CaRBONIC ACID. of the pipes, which are supported on a stand and connected by tubing with the hot-water supply. A mixture of paraffine and vaseline is recommended for indicating the temperature of the chamber, and experience has shown that if a temperature of 37°C. is required the temperature of the water in the box must range between 42° and 47° C. Fic. 56.—Gas CHAMBER. Gas Chambers.—To investigate the action of gases or vapours upon micro-organisms, a modification of the moist cell may be employed. A piece of glass tubing is first fixed to the slide by means of NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION, 127 sealing-wax, and the ring of putty is so placed as to include one end of it. leaving a small interval at the side, or a little notch is made in the putty opposite, so as to afford an exit for the gas or vapour. Fic. 67.—Motst CELL ADAPTED FOR TRANSMISSION OF ELECTRICITY. Application of Electricity.—To study the effect of electricity we may prepare a drop-culture in the moist cell. The cover- glass to be used is provided with two strips of tinfoil, which are Fig, 58. —APPARATUS ARRANGED FOR TRANSMITTING ELECTRICITY, isolated from the brass of the microscope, and so arranged that a current of electricity may be passed through them. A much simpler plan, which may also be employed, is to take an ordinary glass slide and coat the surface with gold-size, The 128 BACTERIOLOGY. slide is then pressed firmly down on gold-leaf or tinfoil ani allowed to dry. When dry, the metal is scraped away, leaving two triangles with a small interval between them. Fic. 59.—Sime with GoLp-LEAr ELECTRODES, The liquid containing the micro-organisms is placed between the electrodes, covered with a cover-glass, and then subjected to the electric current. (c) Meruops or EmpLoyine anp Srorina Liquip Menta. Cultivations in liquid media can be carried on in test-tubes, but it is more satisfactory to employ special forms of flasks, bulbs, and U tubes, such as those employed by Pasteur and his school, and by Lister, Sternberg, and Aitken. Lister's Flasks.—These flasks were especially introduced by Lister as a means of storing liquid nutrient media. They are so constructed that after removal of a portion of the contents, on restoring the vessel to the vertical position, a drop of liquid always remains in the extremity of the nozzle, which prevents regurgitation of unfiltered air. Sternberg’s Bulbs.—The method of intro- ducing liquid into the bulb employed by Fic. 60.—Lister’s Sternberg, and of sterilising and inoculating ae it, is as follows: The bulb is heated slightly over the flame, and the extremity of the neck, after the sealed point has been broken off, is plunged beneath the surface of the liquid. As the air cools the liquid is drawn into the bulb, usually filling it to about one-third of its capacity. (= The neck of the flask is again sealed up, and the liquid which has been introduced is sterilised by repeatedly boiling the flasks in the water-bath. They should then be placed in the incubator for two or three days ; Fic. 61.—Srerx- BERG’S Burs. NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 129 and if the contents remain transparent and free from film, they may be set aside as stock-bulbs, to be used when required. To inoculate the liquid in the bulb the end of the neck is heated to sterilise the exterior, the bulb is gently warmed, and the extremity of the neck nipped off with a pair of sterilised forceps. The open extremity is plunged into the liquid containing the micro-organisms, and a minute quantity enters the tube and mingles with the fluid in the bulb without fear of contamination by atmospheric germs. The extremity of the neck is once more sealed up in the flame of a Bunsen burner. Aitken’s Tubes.—These tubes are plugged and sterilised, and the nutrient medium introduced as into ordinary test-tubes. Instead of withdrawing the cotton-wool plug, they are inoculated through a lateral arm. The sealed extremity of the arm is nipped off with sterilised forceps, and the inoculating needle is carefully introduced through the opening thus made. It is directed along the arm until it touches the opposite side of the test-tube, where Fic. 62.—AITKEN’S —_ it, deposits the material with which it was charged, auEe: The needle is withdrawn, and the end of the lateral arm again sealed up in the flame; the test-tube is then tilted until the liquid touches the deposited material; on restoring the tube to the vertical, the material is washed down with the nutrient liquid. Miquel’s Bulbs—The tube a boule of Miquel is also a very useful form. It consists of a bulb of 50 cc. capacity, blown in the middle of a glass tube. The part of the tube above the bulb is contracted in two places, and can either be left quite straight or made to curve slightly. Between the contrac- tions the tube is plugged with asbestos. The portion of the tube below the bulb is S shaped, Fic. 63.—Miqust’s Bus. and drawn out at its extremity into a fine point. The bulb is charged with nutrient liquid and inoculated by aspiration, and the point of the S tube sealed in the flame of a Bunsen burner. 9 130 BACTERIOLOGY. Pastewr’s Apparatus.—Special forms of tubes, bulbs, and pipettes are employed by the school of Pasteur. The tubes are provided with lateral or with curved arms drawn out to a fine point, and with slender necks plugged with cotton-wool. A double form (Fig. 65) shaped like a tuning- fork, each limb with a bent arm, is con- Fic. 64.—PasTEur’s FLASK. venient for storing sterilised broth. The sealed end of an arm is nipped off with sterilised forceps, the sterile broth aspirated into each limb, and the arm again sealed in the flame; a series of such tubes can be arranged upon a rack on the working table. Bulbs with a vertical neck drawn out to a fine point, others with a neck bent at an obtuse angle, plugged with cotton- wool, and a lateral curved arm drawn out to a fine point, are also émployed. For a description of these various vessels and their special advantages, the works of Pasteur and Duclaux must be con- lted: Fic. 65.—PasTEvur’s DouBLe sulted. TURE. (H) CuLrivaTion or ANAEROBIC BacTerta. To cultivate anaerobic organisms the same media are employed as for aerobic organisms, but the methods must be modified, or special apparatus used, so that the oxygen in the air may be excluded. In the preparation of plate-cultivations, before the film of gelatine has completely hardened it is covered with a sheet of mica, and the edges are sealed with melted paraffine. By this process the air is not completely excluded, so that only those organisms which are not strictly anaerobic can be grown by this method. Liborius recom- mends boiling a considerable volume of gelatine in a tube, cooling it, and after thoroughly distributing the organisms in the still liquid jelly, rapidly solidifying it by placing the tube in iced water. By this NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 131 process very little air re-enters the jelly, and colonies of even strictly anaerobic bacteria will develop in the lower part of the tube. The drawback is the difficulty encountered in examining the colonies, and in preparing sub-cultures. For this purpose the tube must be broken, or carefully warmed until the jelly can be shaken out. Esmarch first prepares a roll culture, and when the gelatine film has set, the tube is completely filled with liquefied gelatine which has been cooled down almost to the temperature at which it solidifies. The same difficulty arises as ‘in the previous method, in the examination of the colonies. Buchner places the culture tube inside a much larger tube containing a small quantity of pyro- gallic acid and closed with a gutta-percha cap. The pyrogallic acid absorbs the oxygen, but the method is not altogether success- ful. The most satisfactory plan is to exhaust the air . with an air pump, or to substitute an atmosphere of hydrogen which does not affect the growth of the bacteria. Various forms of flasks and tubes for cultivating ,,, 66 ron . —FRANKEL’s ANAEROBIC TUBE-CULTURE™ bacteria have been devised, a,a, Glass tube through which hydrogen is which can be easily con- passed; b, exit tube; vc, india-rubber nected with an exhausting stopper coated externally with paraffin (FRANKLAND). apparatus, and _ readily sealed by the flame of the blowpipe when the air has been removed. If hydrogen is employed the most convenient plan is to use a Kipp’s apparatus, from which the hydrogen is passed through two bottles, one containing a solution of lead, to remove any sulphuretted hydrogen, and the other pyrogallic acid, to intercept any oxygen. 132 BACTERIOLOGY, In the method recommended by Friinkel a tube of gelatine is . liquefied, and inoculated. A gutta-percha stopper is substituted for the cotton-wool plug (Fig. 66). It is perforated by two holes, through which two tubes pass which are bent at a right angle. One tube only just passes through the stopper, the other reaches down to the bottom of the test-tube. The horizontal part of each tube has a narrow neck. . The long tube has a plug of steril- ised cotton-wool, and is connected with a short piece of india-rubber tubing by which it can be connected with Kipp’s apparatus. The hydrogen drives the air out of the liquefied jelly and out of the test-tube, and after about half an hour the horizontal tubes are sealed up, and the test-tube is made into a roll culture. Liborius employs a tube with a narrow neck and a lateral arm (Fig. 67). The tube is filled up to the height of the arm with either nutrient agar or a mixture of nutrient agar with 2 per cent. of grape- sugar. The liquefied jelly is inoculated in the usual way, and hydrogen passed through the lateral arm. When the air has been completely driven out, the tube is sealed up. To cultivate anaerobic organisms in broth, such as the tetanus bacillus, a flask is inoculated with the bacillus, and a stream of hydrogen is passed through the broth by means of a tube passing down to the bottom of the flask. The air in the flask escapes by a lateral arm which is bent down at a right angle, and immersed in a capsule of mercury. When the air has been completely expelled the entrance tube is hermetically sealed, and the mercury in the capsule prevents any air from re-entering the flask by the lateral arm (Fig. 68). Fic. 67.—ANAEROBIC CUL- TURE-TUBE (LIBORIUS). Meruop or Fixing Cultures. The colonies in plate-cultivations and the growths of bacteria in test-tubes may be stopped at any stage of their growth, and permanently fixed by exposing the culture to the fumes of formic NUTRIENT MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. 133 aldehyde. The test-tubes, dishes, or capsules are placed in a cylin- drical glass vessel containing a pledget of cotton-wool moistened with , | Fic. 68.—APpPaRATUS FOR ANAEROBIC CULTURES. (RoscoE AND Lunt.) formic aldehyde. The vessel is fitted with a ground glass stopper and set aside. The growth almost immediately ceases. Any liquefied gelatine is hardened, so that the exact appearances of cultures are obtained in a permanent form. CHAPTER X. EXPERIMENTS UPON THE LIVING ANIMAL. To carry out the last of Koch’s postulates, and so complete the chain of evidence in favour of the causal relation of micro-organisms to disease, and to study the mode of action of a pathogenic bacterium, it is necessary to introduce into a living animal a pure cultivation of the micro-organism or its chemical products. For this purpose various animals are employed, such as mice, rabbits, guinea-pigs, pigeons, and fowls. Inhalation.—The animals may be made to inhale an atmosphere impregnated with micro-organisms by means of a spray. In this way Friedlander succeeded in administering the bacteria of pneu- monia to mice; and the production of tuberculosis by experimental inhalation has thrown light upon the clinical records of cases reported as instances of the infectiousness of phthisis. Ingestion.—A sheep fed upon potatoes which have been the medium for the cultivation of the anthrax bacillus dies in a few days. Rabbits fed on cabbage sprinkled with a culture of the bacillus of fowl cholera, rapidly succumb to the disease. Animals fed upon the nodules of bovine tuberculosis or upon tubercular flesh and milk will be readily infected. Milk, or bread soaked in milk, is a very convenient medium, and from a public health point of view, a most instructive way of administering and testing the effect of pathogenic bacteria. Vaccination and Subcutaneous Inoculation.—Vaccination may be performed by making a few superficial scratches and inoculating the wound with a sterilised platinum needle charged with the micro- organisms. Another simple method is to take a sterilised scalpel, infect the point with the material to be inoculated, and then make a minute puncture or incision. In either case a situation should be selected, such as the root of the ear, which cannot be licked by the animal after the operation. 134 EXPERIMENTS UPON THE LIVING ANIMAL. 135 Subcutaneous inoculation is very simple and effectual, and con- sequently the method most frequently employed. The animal selected—for example, a guinea-pig—is held by an assistant, who covers it with a towel, leaving only the hind extremities exposed. By so doing, and gently laying it upon its back, with its head low, a guinea-pig passes apparently into a state of hypnotism, and the Fic. 69.—Kocnw’s SYRINGE. trivial operation can be performed with little or no movement on the part of the animal. From a spot on the inner side of the thigh the hair is cut close with a small pair of scissors curved on the flat, and the skin must be thoroughly purified with 1 in 20 carbolic acid. A small fold of skin is then pinched up with a pair of sterilised forceps, and with a pair of sharp sterilised scissors, or with a tenotomy knife, a minute incision is made. A sterilised platinum loop is charged with the material to be inoculated, and the loop is gently inserted under the skin, forming a small pocket in the subcutaneous tissue. The needle is then withdrawn, and the sides of the wound gently pressed into apposition and painted over with collodion. Fie. 70.—SyYRINGE WITH ASBESTOS PLUG. In inoculating a mouse the same process is adopted, with the exception that the root of the tail is the usnal site of the operation. In some cases it may be necessary to inoculate cultures diffused in sterilised salt solution, or blood or lymph containing bacteria, or a culture in broth, or a filtrate containing the toxic products, 136 . BACTERIOLOGY. and then a hypodermic syringe may be required. One of the ordinary pattern may be used, but it is very much better to employ a syringe which has been especially constructed to admit of thorough dis- infection. Koch’s syringe is a convenient form, the liquid being expressed by pressure on a rubber ball. The author has generally preferred to improvise a substitute for the hypodermic syringe which can be quickly made, and is destroyed after use, so that there can be no possible risk of accidentally infecting other animals. A short length of ordinary glass-tubing is sterilised, and plugged at one end with sterilised cotton-wool ; about three inches from the plug a bulb is blown about the size of a marble, and two inches below this the glass is drawn out into a long capillary tube. A sufficient quantity of the liquid to be injected rises up into the tube by capillary attraction, or can be drawn up by means of an india-rubber ball, until the bulb is full. The point of the capillary tube is inserted through the opening in the skin, and gently pushed into the subcutaneous tissue, and then withdrawn for a short distance. By pressure on the bulb the contents of the tube are injected. In dealing with chemical products there is no risk in applying the lips and blowing out the contents of the tube, or indeed of filling it by suction, for if too much force were applied the liquid which might enter the mouth would be stopped by the cotton-wool plug. A number of these capillary tubes can be placed in a small case, and when it is necessary to go to a distance to investigate an outbreak, they will be found most convenient to bring back lymph or blood to the laboratory for further study. Sternberg takes a piece of glass-tubing, blows a bulb at one end, and draws out the other end into a thin tube. By heating the bulb and then dipping the tube into the liquid to be inoculated the latter rises in the tube as the bulb cools. After inserting the point of the tube subcutaneously the bulb is again heated, and the liquid is forced out into the tissues. : Intravenous Injection.—A cultivation of micro-organisms may be mixed with sterilised water, and then injected with a syringe directly into the circulation. This may be performed without much difficulty by injecting, with a hypodermic syringe, the large vein at the base of the ear in rabbits, or the jugular vein in large animals. Special Operations.._In many cases it is absolutely necessary to perform an operation of greater severity. After the administration of an anesthetic, infective material may be inserted, or injected, into the peritoneal cavity, or injected into the duodenum in the manner EXPERIMENTS UPON THE LIVING ANIMAL. 137 employed in the case of Koch’s comma bacilli by Nicati and Rietsch. In such cases antiseptic precautions must be rigidly followed, and use made of iodoform and other antiseptic dressings. The disinfec- tion of the skin of the animal, of the instruments employed, and of the hands of the operator, are details essential to secure success. To inoculate tubercular matter, sputum may be rubbed up with distilled water, and some of the mixture injected into a tracheal fistula; or the first steps of the operation of iridectomy may be performed and tubercular material inserted into the anterior chamber of the eye, but this method is only justifiable when it is absolutely necessary for the results and changes to be observed from day to day. To inoculate rabbits or other animals with the virus of rabies, the skull is trephined, and an emulsion prepared from the spinal cord of a rabid animal is injected beneath the dura mater. Before every inoculation the instruments must be sterilised in a hot-air steriliser or by immersion in boiling water in a flat dish or enamel tray heated by a spirit-lamp, and after each operation all instruments should be placed in carbolic acid (1 in 20) or in boiling water, wiped dry, and again sterilised in the hot-air steriliser, before they are put away. If these precautions are not observed, instances of accidental infection are sure to occur. After the inoculation is completed a careful record must be made of the date and details of the experiment. The form in which the virus was used, the quantity employed, and the seat of inoculation, must be taken into account. The animals must be kept under close observation, the temperature taken, and any signs of illness, such as ceasing to feed, difficulty in breathing, staring coat, and any local signs, such as the development of a tumour or an enlargement of the lymphatic glands, must be carefully noted. It is perhaps hardly necessary to add that in this country no experiments of any kind may be performed on living animals without a license. Meruop or DissEcTION AND EXAMINATION. All animals that die after an experimental inoculation should be examined immediately after death. Every precaution must be taken in conducting the dissection, to exclude extraneous micro- organisms, and all instruments employed must have been sterilised in the hot-air steriliser, or by immersion in boiling water. If a mouse, for example, has died after inoculation with anthrax, it should be at 138 BACTERIOLOGY. once pinned out by its feet on a slab of wood or in a gutta-percha tray, and bathed with 1 in 40 carbolic. In the same way, before examining a dead rabbit, a stream of carbolic should be directed over it to lay the fur, which otherwise interferes with the dissection. The hair should be cut away with sterilised scissors from the seat of inoculation, which is the first part to be examined, and any suppuration, hemorrhage, cedema, or other pathological change should be carefully noted. From any pus or exudation that may be present, material for inoculations should at once be taken, and cover-glass-preparations made for microscopical examination. To examine the internal organs and to make inoculations from the blood of the heart or spleen, the skin is cut through from below upwards in the median line of the abdominal and thoracic regions. The abdominal cavity is then opened, and the walls pinned back on either side of the animal. Any abnormal appearances in the peritoneum should be noted, and the state of the spleen should be carefully examined by turning the intestines aside. After noting its appearances, it should be removed with sterilised forceps and scissors, and deposited upon a sterilised glass slide, and incised with sterilised scissors. The cut surface is then touched with the point of a sterilised inoculating needle, and cultures are made in test-tubes of nutrient gelatine and agar-agar, and also on potato, and in broth in the form of drop-cultivations. Precisely the same care must be taken in examining lymphatic glands, tubercles, or pathological nodules ; any chance putrefactive micro-organisms on the surface should be destroyed by carbolic acid or the actual cautery; an incision is then made, and a minute fragment snipped out of the centre of the nodule, which can be inoculated in the living animal or transferred to a cultivating medium. The examination of the thorax is made by cutting through the ribs on either side of the sternum with sterilised scissors, and turning the sternum up where it will be out of the way. The pericardium is then opened, and the right auricle or ventricle pierced with the point of a sterilised scalpel, and inoculations and cover- glass-preparations are made from the blood which escapes. The lungs also require to be especially studied. They should be incised with a sterilised scalpel, and inoculations and cover-glass- preparations made from the cut surface. It may be necessary to embed a piece of lung or fragment of spleen, so that it shall be free from air. This may be done by isolating a fragment with the precautions just described, and depositing it upon the surface of a test-tube of nutrient agar-agar. The contents of another tube, EXPERIMENTS UPON THE LIVING ANIMAL.’ 139 which have been liquefied, and allowed to cool almost to the point of gelatinisation, must then be poured over it. From a potato a little cube must be cut, the tissue deposited in the trough thus formed, and the cube replaced, or cultures may be prepared by any of the methods which have been described for dealing with anaerobic bacteria. Blood may also be taken directly from a vein by laying it bare by dissection, making a small opening with sterilised scissors, and inserting a looped platinum needle, the needle of a hypodermic syringe, a capillary tube, or the extremity of the capillary neck of a Sternberg’s bulb. If the cultivation, in spite of these precautions, is contaminated, or if there was more than one organism present in the blood or tissues under examination, it will be necessary to separate the different kinds by plate-cultivation. Having completed the dissection, the organs of such a small animal as a mouse may be removed en masse, and transferred to absolute alcohol for subsequent examination. In other cases it may be only necessary to reserve portions of each organ. Jn experimenting with a virulent micro-organism like anthrax, any remaining part of the animal should be cremated, and the hands and all instruments should be thoroughly disinfected. ‘ Isolation of Micro-organisms during Life——Micro-organisms in the living subject may be isolated from the pus of abscesses, or other discharges, and from the blood and tissues. Abscesses should be opened, and other operations performed, when practicable, with Listerian precautions, and a drop of the discharge taken up with a looped néedle or capillary pipette, as already explained. To make a cultivation from the blood of a living person, the tip of a finger must be well washed with soap and water and sponged with 1 in 20 carbolic. “Venous congestion is produced by applying an elastic band or ligature to the finger, which is pricked with a sterilised sewing needle. From the drop of blood which exudes the necessary inoculations and examinations can be made. Another way of extracting blood from the living patient is to apply a leech. This method has been found of considerable value in experimenting upon the blood of patients suffering from malaria, and may be useful in other diseases, if the blood is required for further examination, or in quantity. CHAPTER, XI. EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER. AIR, THE air, as is well known, contains in suspension, mineral, animal, and vegetable substances. The mineral world is represented by such substances as silica, silicate of aluminium, carbonate and phospate of calcium, which may be raised from the soil by the wind, and particles of carbon, etc., which gain access from acci- dental sources. Belonging to the animal kingdom we find the débris of perished creatures, as well as, sometimes, living animals. The vegetable world supplies micrococci, bacilli, and other forms of the great family of bacteria, spores of other fungi, pollen seeds, parts of flowers, and so forth. The air of hospitals and sick rooms has been found to be especially rich in vegetable forms; fungi and spores have been stated to be present in particularly large numbers in cholera wards; spores of tricophyton have been dis- covered in the air of hospitals for diseases of the skin, and of achorion in wards with cases of favus. The tubercle bacillus is said to have been detected in the breath of patients suffering from phthisis. These points indicate that, in addition to the interest for the micro-biologist, considerable importance, from a hygienic point of view, must be attached to the systematic examination of the air. A knowledge of the microbes which are found in the air of marshy and other unhealthy districts, and in the air of towns, dwellings, hospitals, workshops, factories, and mines, will be of practical value. Miquel, who has particularly studied the bacteria in the air, has found that their number varies considerably. The average number per cubic metre of air for the autumn quarter at Mont- souris is given as 142, winter quarter 49, spring quarter 85, and summer quarter 105. In air collected 2,000 to 4,000 metres above the sea-level, not a single bacterium or fungus spore was found, while in 10 cubic metres of air from the Rue de Rivoli (Paris) the number was computed at 55,000. 140 EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER. 141 The simplest method for examining the organisms in air consists in exposing plates of glass or microscopic slides coated with glycerine, or with a mixture of glycerine and grape sugar, which is stable, colourless, and transparent. Nutrient gelatine spread out’ on glass plates may be exposed to the air for a certain time, and then put aside in damp chambers for the colonies to develop. Sterilised potatoes, prepared in the usual way, may be similarly exposed. In both the last-mentioned methods separate colonies develop, which may be isolated, and pure cultivations carried on in various other nutrient media. Nutrient gelatine has also been employed in the special methods of Koch and Hesse. Koch's Apparatus——This consists of a glass jar, about six inches high, the neck of which is plugged with cotton-wool. In the interior is a shallow glass capsule, which can be removed by means of a brass lifter. The whole is sterilised by exposure to 150° C. for an hour in the hot-air steriliser. The nutrient gelatine in a stock-tube is liquefied, and the contents emptied into the glass capsule. The jar is exposed to the air to be examined for a definite time, the cotton-wool plug replaced, and the apparatus set aside for the colonies to develop. Hesse’s Apparatus.—The advantage of this apparatus is that it enables the experimenter to examine a known volume of air. A glass cylinder, 70 cm. long and 3°5 cm. in diameter, is closed at one end by an india-rubber cap, perforated in the centre. Over this fits another cap, which is not perforated. The opposite end of the cylinder is closed with a caoutchoue stopper, perforated to admit a glass tube plugged with cotton-wool. The tube can be connected by means of india-rubber tubing with an aspirating apparatus, which consists of a couple of litre-flasks, suspended by hooks from the tripod-stand which supports the whole apparatus. The cylinder, caps, and plug are washed with solution of carbolic acid, and then with alcohol. After being thus cleansed, 50 cc. of nutrient’ gelatine are introduced, and the whole sterilised by steaming for half an hour for three successive days. After the final sterilisation, the cylinder is rotated on its long axis, so that the nutrient medium solidifies in the form of a coating over the whole of the interior. When required for use, the cotton-wool plug is removed from the small glass tube, and the latter connected with the upper flask by means of the india-rubber tubing. The apparatus is placed in the air which is to be examined, the outer india-rubber cap removed from the glass cylinder, and the upper flask tilted until the water begins to flow into the lower one. 142 BACTERIOLOGY. The emptying continues by siphon action, and air is drawn in along the cylinder to replace the water. When the upper flask is empty, the position of the two is reversed, and the flow again started. When a sufficient volume has been drawn through the cylinder, the outer cap and the cotton-wool plug are replaced, and it is set aside for the colonies to develop. As an example, twenty-five litres of air from an open square in Berlin gave rise to three colonies of bacteria and sixteen moulds; on the other hand, two litres from a school- ee Fic. 71.—Hessr’s APPARATUS. room just vacated by the scholars gave thirty-seven colonies of bacteria and thirty-three moulds. Porous substances, such as sand, powdered glass, or sugar, may be used for the filtration of samples of air; and an apparatus is employed in a convenient form to be conveyed to the laboratory for the subsequent examination. Petri’s Apparatus consists of a glass-tube 9 cm. long, containing two sand-filters separated from each other. A known volume of air is aspirated through the tube. The bacteria are arrested and can EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER. 143 be examined by spreading the sand out in a dish and covering it with nutrient gelatine ; or it may be shaken up with sterilised water and plate-cultivations prepared. The sand-filter nearest to the aspirator should remain free from bacteria. Sedgwick and Tucker employ a glass cylinder which is drawn out at one end into a narrow tube to contain sterilised powdered cane sugar. Both ends of the apparatus are plugged with sterilised cotton-wool. By means of an exhausting apparatus a known volume of air is drawn through the tube. The cotton-wool plug is re- é < > Fic. 72.--SEDGWICK AND TUCKER’s TUBE. moved, and liquid gelatine is introduced into the cylinder, the plug is replaced, and the sugar is shaken into and quickly dissolves in the jelly. The cylinder is then treated in the same way as a roll-culture, and set aside for the colonies to develop (Fig. 72). Various forms of ‘“ aeroscopes” and “ aeroniscopes” have from Fic. 73.—PoucHet’s AEROSCOPE. time to time been employed. Pouchet’s aeroscope consists of a small funnel, drawn out to a point below which is a glass slip coated with 144 BACTERIOLOGY. glycerine. The end of the funnel and the glass slip are enclosed in an air-tight chamber, from which a small glass tube passes out and is connected by india-rubber tubing with an aspirator (Fig. 73). The air passing down the funnel strikes upon the glycerine, which arrests any solid particles. For a full description of the apparatus employed by Maddox, Cunningham, and Miquel, reference should be made to the writings of these authors, and particularly to the treatise published by the last-named. SoIL. Surface soil is exceedingly rich in bacteria. Miquel has com- puted that there exists in a gramme of soil an average of 750,000 germs at Montsouris, 1,300,000 in the Rue de Rennes, and 2,100,000 in the Rue de Monge. As agents in putrefaction and fermenta- tion they play a very important réle in the economy of nature ; but there exist in addition, bacteria in the soil which are patho- genic in character. Pasteur has succeeded in isolating the bacillus of anthrax from the earth. Sheep, sojourning upon a plot of ground where animals with anthrax have been buried, may succumb to the disease. Pasteur considered that the spores were conveyed by worms from buried carcasses to the surface soil. The bacilli of malignant cedema and tetanus are also present in soil. Nicolaier produced tetanus in mice and rabbits by inoculating a little garden earth under the skin. To obtain a cultivation of the microbes in soil a sample of the latter must be first dried and then triturated. It may then be shaken up with distilled water, and from this a drop transferred to sterilised broth. The employment of. solid media is, however, much more satisfactory: a sample of earth is collected, dried, and triturated, and a small quantity sprinkled over the surface of nutrient gelatine prepared for a plate-cultivation. In another method the gelatine is liquefied in a test-tube, the powder added, and distributed, in the usual way, throughout the medium, which is then poured out upon a glass plate or made into a roll-culture. In the same way the dust which settles from the air in houses and hospitals, or food substances in powder, may be distributed in nutrient gelatine, and examined both for aerobic and anaerobic bacteria. The different kinds which develop, must be thoroughly investigated as regards their morphological and biological charac- ters, and pathogenic properties. EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER. 145 ‘WATER. In the case of water, as in that of air, a knowledge of the micro-organisms which may be present is not only of interest to the bacteriologist, but of the greatest importance in practical hygiene. Common putrefactive bacteria and vibrios may not be hurtful in themselves, but they indicate the probability of the presence of organic matter in which there may be danger. The detection of Bacillus coli communis may be taken to indicate a probable contamination with human excreta. The Microzyme Test which was introduced for the detection of putrefactive bacteria, consisted in adding three or four drops of the sample of water to 1 or 2 cc. of Pasteur’s fluid, the nourishing fluid having been previously boiled in a sterilised test-tube. If the’ microzymes or their germs existed in the water, the liquid in a few days became turbid from the presence of countless bacteria. This test is of no real value, for it does little more than indicate that bacteria are present, which we know to be the case in all ordinary water, and even in ice. On the other hand, the bacteriological test. of Koch is a most valuable addition to the usual methods of water analysis. It enables us not only to detect the presence of bacteria, but to ascertain approximately their number, and to study very minutely their morphological and biological characteristics. The importance of a thorough acquaintance with the life-history of the individual micro-organisms cannot be too strongly insisted upon. For example, by such means the spirillum of Asiatic cholera can be distinguished from most other comma-shaped, organisms, and inasmuch as its presence may be an indication of contamination with choleraic discharges, such water should be condemned for drinking purposes, even though we are not yet in a position to affirm that the microbe is the cause of the disease. The detection of the bacillus of typhoid fever or of the Bacillus coli communis. in suspected water or milk would be evidence of considerable importance. Koch’s test, in short, consists in making plate-cultivations of a known volume of water, counting the colonies which develop, isolating the micro-organisms, and studying the characters of each individual form. Collection and Transport of Water Samples——Sternberg’s bulbs, or Erlenmeyer’s conical flasks of about 100 cc. capacity, may be employed with advantage for collecting the samples of water. The latter are cleansed, plugged, and sterilised in the hot-air steriliser. 10 146 BACTERIOLOGY. When required for use, the plug is removed and held between the fingers, which must not touch the part which enters the neck of the flask. About 30 cc. of the water to be examined are intro- duced into the flask, and the plug must be quickly replaced and covered with a caoutchoue cap. If collected from a tap, the water should first be allowed to run for a few minutes, and the sample should be received into the flask without the neck coming into contact with the tap. From a reservoir or stream, the flasks may be filled by employing a sterilised pipette. During transport contact between the water and cotton-wool plug must be avoided, and if likely to occur the sample must be collected and forwarded in a Sternberg’s bulb. Examination by Plate-cultivation.—The apparatus for plate- cultivation should be arranged as already described. Crushed ice Fic. 74.—APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING THE NUMBER OF COLONIES IN A PLATE-CULTIVATION. may be added tothe water in the glass dish to expedite the setting of the gelatine, so that the plate may be transferred as quickly as possible to the damp chamber. The caoutchouc cap is removed from the flask, and the cotton-wool plug singed in the flame to prevent contamination from adventitious germs on the outside of the plug. The flask is then held slantingly in the hand, and the plug twisted out and retained between the fingers. With a graduated pipette a measured quantity (5 or 25 cc.) of the sample is transferred to a tube of liquefied nutrient gelatine, and the plugs of the flask and of the tube quickly replaced. If the water is very impure, it may be necessary to first dilute the sample with sterilised water. The inoculated tube must be gently inclined backwards and forwards, and rolled as already explained, to distribute the germs throughout the gelatine, and the gelatine finally poured on a plate, When the gelatine has set, the plate is transferred to a damp chamber, which should be carefully labelled and set aside in a place EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER. 147 of moderate temperature. In about two or three days the cultivation may be examined. In some cases the colonies may be counted at once ; more frequently they are so numerous that the plate must be placed on a dark background, and a special process resorted to. A glass plate, ruled by horizontal and vertical lines into ‘centimetre squares, some of which are again subdivided into ninths, is so arranged on a wooden frame that it can cover the nutrient-gelatine plate without touching it (Fig. 74). A lens is used to assist in dis- covering minute colonies. If then the colonies are very numerous, the number in some small division is counted, if less in some large one, and an average is obtained from which the number of colonies on the entire surface is calculated. A separate calculation of the liquefied colonies should be also made, and their number, as well as the total number of colonies present in 1 cc. of the sample, recorded. Any peculiar macroscopical appearances, colours, etc., should be noted, and then the microscopical appearances of the colonies studied. Lastly, examination of the individual organisms should be made by cover-glass preparations, and by inoculation of nutrient gelatine, potatoes, and other media. Instead of plates, Petri’s dishes may be used both for gelatine and agar-agar cultivations. ia eo a e a? of ja o 50 ® } : Se sf 2. = vy / “ Fic. 75.—Esmarcu’s Roii-Cuirure. a, India-rubber caps; 6 b b, longitudinal line drawn on the tube; ¢,c,c, transverse lines for counting colonies (FRANKLAND). Another plan is to take a measured quantity of the sample of water and prepare a roll-culture, using a large-sized test-tube (Fig. 75). The colonies can be counted with the aid of a lens (Fig. 76). Microscopical preparations and sub-cultures can be made from the colonies, and the anaerobic bacteria can be examined by Frankel’s modification of this method (p. 131). A drop of the sample of water may also be added to liquefied nutrient gelatine in a test-tube, the organisms distributed, and the gelatine allowed to solidify in the tube. A rough comparison of water samples may be made in this way. Microscopic Examination.—A drop of the water may be mounted and examined without staining; or allowed to evaporate on a cover- 148 BACTERIOLOGY. glass, which is then passed through the flame, and stained in the usual manner. Parietti’s Method.—As typhoid fever bacilli are apt to be crowded out by more rapidly growing micro-organisms, some method had to be devised for restraining the growth of the latter, and Chantemesse and Widal suggested the use of carbolic acid. Parietti put this into practice by the method he introduced. This consists in adding to tubes of broth about five drops of a mixture composed of sterilised water (100 parts), hydrochloric acid (4 parts), and carbolic acid (5 parts). The tubes are first tested by incubation, and are then ready for use. A few drops of the suspected water are added —— = oe n ——— eee Fic. 76.—APPaRaTus ror CountTinc CoLonius In a Rott CuLture. to the broth, and if it becomes turbid in a day or two the typhoid fever bacillus is present in the form of a pure-culture. An excess of bacteria in a fresh sample indicates an excess of organic matter, and points to possible contamination with sewage. Where there is such contamination we are very likely to. find pathogenic bacteria; and moreover impure water is a constant source of danger, for if the contagia of infectious diseases are introduced they will retain their vitality in such water for a long period, and will in some cases even multiply, whereas the same organisms introduced into pure water would in a short time perish. The actual number of bacteria in water is not of very great importance, and it must be remembered that if a sample is set aside for a few days there will be an enormous increase in the number of bacteria present; but in dealing with perfectly fresh samples it EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL, AND WATER. 149 may be said that water containing less than 100 bacteria to the eubic centimetre is very pure water. Water containing 1,000 or more should be filtered. Water containing 100,000 to 1,000,000 is contaminated with surface water or sewage. It is necessary to bear in mind that in typhoid fever and Asiatic cholera the excreta contain the bacteria in great numbers, and wells and streams receiving surface water may be contaminated in various ways. The cholera bacillus dies as a rule quickly in distilled water, while it preserves its vitality for a long time in water of a bad quality. It is necessary to lay stress upon the fact that a bacterio- logical analysis may show the presence of pathogenic bacteria when their detection is not possible by any other means. They may be present in water in such small numbers that no chemical analysis would detect any contamination, but as they are living organisms capable of increasing in a suitable environment, they can readily be discovered by bacteriological methods. The examination of rain water, drinking water, tap water, sea water, various liquids and infusions, by these methods, opens up a wide field for research. Pettenkofer has shown that impregna- tion of water containing many bacteria with carbonic acid diminishes the number of the latter. The examination of waters before and after filtration, or after addition of chemical substances, are matters which require further investigation, though a great deal of work has already been accomplished. The reader will find in Micro-organisms in Water by P. and G. Frankland, a very complete account of.this subject with valuable analytical tables. CHAPTER XII. PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. THE production of pictures of microscopic objects by photographic means was attempted at an early date. Some authorities regard the very earliest recorded experiments as being the first experi- ments alike in photography and micro-photography., The experi- ments of Wedgwood and Sir Humphry Davy were embodied in a paper read before the Royal Institution in 1802. They obtained with the solar microscope impressions upon paper, and with greater success upon white leather, though the results were transitory when exposed to daylight. In 1816 Nicéphore Niepce described his experiments in con- nection with fixing the image obtained by the camera. He was at first only able to obtain negatives, and these’ were transitory. But, after joining with Daguerre, who had been experimenting in the same direction, a process was invented which was published in 1839 under the name of daguerreotype. This invention, and the rapid improvements which followed, were taken advantage of by Reade, Donné, Hodgson, Kingsley, and Talbot, who were ,early workers in the field of micro-photography. So early as 1845 it is stated that Donné produced a work illustrated with engravings copied from daguerreotypes. Subsequently this interesting branch of photography was taken up by many in France and Germany, in America, and in England. Of those to whom we are indebted for the literature of the subject, and for many improvements, the names of Wenham, Dancer, Draper, Maddox, Shadbolt, Redmayne, Woodward, Highley, Deecke, Moitessier, Gerlach, Koch, Sternberg, Frankel, Pfeiffer, and Pringle may especially be mentioned. Of these workers the name of Woodward stands pre-eminently foremost. His skill in microscopical manipulations, combined with access to the very best apparatus and objectives, placed at 150 PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 151 his disposal in the Museum at Washington, enabled him to obtain photographs of diatoms which probably have never been surpassed. ’ To Koch belongs the credit of being the first to extend the application of micro-photography to the delineation of bacteria. A series of instructive photographs was first published by him in 1877. These were photographs of cover-glass preparations, and all admirably illustrated the subjects from which they were taken; while two, showing the flagella of bacilli and Apirille, were idanphs in this new departure. Lewis, in India, was one of the first to illustrate his writings on the subject of micro-organisms by means of photographs. About the same time Sternberg, in America, took some excellent photographs of bacteria. Heliotype reproductions of these were published in 1884. Hauser and Van Ermengem and many other bacteriologists successfully resorted to photography for illustrating their researches, and Frankel and Pfeiffer’s, and Itzerott and Niemann’s atlases of photographs of bacteria, in microscopical specimens and cultivations, are especially worthy of mention. Opinions have differed widely as to the merits of photographic illustrations. Many, taking the standpoint solely of a comparison with drawings, have decried their use. By judging from such a comparison alone the real value of photographs may be lost sight of. On the other hand, many who have looked at the question from all sides, have been led to value even a defective photograph more than an ordinary drawing. In his first publication on this subject, Koch strongly advocated photography on the ground that illustrations would then be as true to nature as possible. The photographs which accompanied his paper were all taken from preparations of bacteria which had been made from blood, cultivations, or infusions, by drying a thin layer on a cover-glass and staining, or from specimens prepared in the same way but left unstained. But when, having committed himself to this opinion, Koch attempted, later, to photograph the bacteria in animal tissues, he was led to modify his previous conclusion. For though no trouble was spared, yet disappointing results were met with. This was owing, he explains, to the fact that the smallest and most interesting bacteria can only be made visible in animal tissues by staining them, and thus obtaining the advantage of colour. This introduced the same difficulties which are met with in photographing coloured objects, such as tapestry and oil paintings. 152 BACTERIOLOGY. As these difficulties had been to a certain extent obviated by the use of eosin-collodion, Koch adopted the same method for photo- graphing stained bacteria. By the use of eosin-collodion, and by shutting off portions of the spectrum by coloured glasses, he succeeded in obtaining photographs of bacteria which had been stained with blue and red aniline dyes. But, owing to the long exposure which was necessary, and the unavoidable vibrations of the apparatus, the results were so wanting in definition that they not only proved unsatisfactory as substitutes for drawings, but did not in some cases give any evidence of what was to be seen in the preparations. Koch, in consequence, stated that he would abstain from publishing photographic illustrations until he had the advantage of improved methods. ; We find, however, in spite of this, that in 1881 Koch published a series of reproductions from his negatives in illustration of what could be accomplished by photography. Here again we find that many of the photographs of cover- glass preparations were admirable, but those of tissue-sections gave evidence of the difficulties Koch encountered, and were undoubtedly unsatisfactory from the want of flatness of field, some of the illustrations recalling rather a map of a mountainous country than a microscopical preparation. In consequence of the difficulties met with in attempting to photograph bacteria stained with the aniline dyes most commonly used, Koch recommended that the preparations should be stained brown, pointing out as his reason that, though the bright and concentrated colour of the red and blue aniline dyes catches the eye far more readily than the somewhat sombre brown colours, yet no one up to the time of his publication' had succeeded in obtaining good photographs of bacteria which had been stained either blue or red, and mounted in Canada balsam, while there was no difficulty in obtaining photographic representations of prepara- tions stained yellow or brown. Though this stain could be easily employed in most cover-glass preparations, it was by no means easy to obtain a good differential stain of bacteria in the tissues by employing Bismarck brown. An attempt was, therefore, made to photograph preparations stained blue and red by the aid of the dry-plate process, and by interposing glasses of suitable tints. After many fruitless experi- ments this method had to be abandoned, and: the method of staining the object brown was adopted. In many cases this gave excellent PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 153 results; in others again, compared with the results of staining with blue or red stains, there was much to be desired, and further improvement was needed. That a stain, such as yellow or brown, must be employed which absorbs the blue rays, and acts on the sensitive plate like black, which absorbs all the light, constituted the first condition laid down by Koch as an essential for success. It was further pointed out that the suitability of the stain could be ascertained by first passing the light, to illuminate the preparation, through a solution of ammonio-sulphate of copper, under which condition the bacteria would appear black on a blue ground. The second condition was, that sunlight must be employed, but that direct projection upon the object was disadvantageous, and it must, therefore, be diffused by the interposition of one or more plates of ground glass. Lastly, an illuminating condenser was recommended, of such construction that the diffused sunlight brightly illuminates the object from all sides. Sternberg encountered the same difficulty in photographing red, blue or violet preparations, while he produced excellent pictures of preparations stained with aniline brown, or a weak solution of iodine (iodine grs. iij, potassic iodide grs. v, distilled water grs. 200). Thus the results of a large number of attempts to photograph the tubercle bacillus in sputum, only ended in producing such extremely faint impressions, that any one unacquainted with the object as seen under the microscope could form scarcely any idea of its form or minute structure with even an accompanying explanation and the closest inspection of the photograph. Dufrenne, in attempting to photograph the same object by the ordinary method, found the plates were uniformly acted on, or the image was so faint, or so lacking in contrast, that they were useless for obtaining proofs on paper or glass. By interposing green glass between the objective and the sensitive plate, so that the red rays were absorbed, while the green rays passed through and acted on the plate, he states that better results were obtained. The work of Hauser illustrated the great value of photography in the production of pictures of impression-preparations and colonies in nutrient gelatine. To give the general effect, as well as faithfully reproduce the minute details in these difficult subjects would in most eases create insurmountable difficulties, except to the most accom- plished draughtsman. Hauser employed Gerlach’s apparatus and Schleussner’s dry 154 BACTERIOLOGY. plates, and obtained the illumination by means of a small incan- descent lamp, which gave a strong, white light, with three or four Bunsen elements. In another respect Hauser’s results were of practical value. The preparations to be photographed were stained brown as recommended by Koch, but they were mounted in the ordinary way in Canada balsam. The objection to the mounting medium most commonly employed was thus set aside. The prevalent idea, however, that the preparations must be stained brown was still a formidable obstacle, and the way out of this difficulty was clearly shown by Van Ermengem’s photographs. These were pictures of comma-bacilli which had been stained with fuchsine and methyl violet. These photographs afforded the first practical illustration of the value of isochromatic plates in micro-photography which had been previously noted by Van Ermengem in 1884, and their intro- duction marks a distinct era in the progress of micro-photography. A short explanation may be given of what is meant by isochro- matic, or what have been more properly termed orthochromatic dry plates. The difficulties encountered in photographing certain stained preparations have been mentioned. It is a familiar fact that in portraits, blue or violet comes out almost or quite white, while other colours, such as yellow, are represented by a sombre shade or perhaps black. This failure in correctly translating colours is explained by the wan’ of equality between the strength of the chemical and luminous rays. If the rays of the spectrum are pro- jected upon a photographically sensitive surface, the greatest effect is found to take place at the violet end. In other words, the violet and blue rays are more actinic or chemically powerful, while the yellow and orange have scarcely any effect. The dyes employed in staining give corresponding results: blue and violet give but a faint impression, yellow and orange a black picture. These results are most clearly demonstrated in a photograph of an oil painting taken in the ordinary way; and they led to experiments being made which have resulted in orthochromatic photography. The effect of interposing coloured glasses has already been referred to. It was found later that, if plates were coloured yellow, e.g., with turmeric, the blue and violet rays were intercepted, and their actinism reduced. In 1881, Tailfer and Clayton produced the so-called isochromatic plates. The emulsion of bromide of silver and gelatine was stained with eosin, and it was claimed that colours would be represented with their true relative intensity. Chlorophyll and other stains have been tried, and by such methods the ordinary gelatine dry plates can be so treated that they will reproduce PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 155 various colours, according to their relative light intensity, and thus be rendered iso- or, what is now more commonly known as, ortho- chromatic. APPARATUS AND MATERIAL. Micro-photographic Apparatus.—As is well known, various forms of apparatus have from time to time been recommended and em- ployed by different workers. Many use the microscope in a vertical position, with the camera superposed or fitted to the eye-piece end of the’ microscope tube; or the microscope tube may be screwed off from the body of the microscope, and a pyramidal camera adjusted in its place, the base of the pyramid being represented by the ground glass screen. Others again prefer that the microscope and camera should be arranged horizontally. In another form the ordinary microscope is dispensed with, the objective, stage, and mirror are adapted to the front of the camera, and provided with suitable arrangements for holding the object, supporting the mirror, and adjusting the different parts. Lastly, the camera may be dispensed with, the operating-room, which must be rendered impervious to light, taking its place, while the image is projected and focussed upon a ground glass screen, which has a separate support.* The horizontal position affords greater stability than the vertical, so that the former is to be preferred. The vertical model with the camera fixed to the microscope is particularly to be avoided, as the weight of the camera bears directly upon the microscope, and must affect the fine adjustment, and any vibration in one part of the apparatus is communicated throughout. The simplest apparatus consists of a camera fixed upon a base- board four or five feet in length, upon which the microscope can be clamped, and which carries also a lamp and a bull’s-eye condenser (Fig. 77). Simplicity and economy must always be borne in mind in recommending any apparatus of this kind, for to insist upon the necessity of a very elaborate apparatus, or a specially fitted-up room, or that a special room should be built with windows facing in a definite direction, willin most cases at once place photography beyond the reach of those who might otherwise employ it. Yet to fulfil * For an excellent account of the forms of apparatus which have been employed by different workers the reader is referred to the section on Micro- photography in Beale’s How to work with the Microscope. 156 BACTERIOLOGY. all the purposes for which the apparatus may be required, including the employment of the highest powers, and also that one may be enabled to work for long intervals of time with due comfort, an accurate and complete apparatus will be found to be most desirable. Though most preparations will admit of being photographed when the stage of the microscope is vertical, yet if we require to photograph micro-organisms in liquids, or colonies upon partially liquefied gelatine, the apparatus must admit of being placed so that the stage of the microscope becomes horizontal. In addition, the apparatus is rendered somewhat complex if we employ powerful TTY Fic. 77.—HorizontaL Micro-PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS. artificial ight. Sunlight, no doubt, is the best and cheapest, but it is not always available, especially in a city like London; and, moreover, evenings and dull days will probably be the very time which can be best spared for this work. We must, therefore, fall back upon the parafiine lamp, or the magnesium, oxyhydrogen, or electric light. To fulfil all these conditions Swift has constructed an apparatus under the author’s directions (Fig. 78). It is merely a modification of the ordinary horizontal model, which admits of being readily placed PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 157 in the vertical position, while the illumination is supplied from an oxyhvdrogen lantern. To place the apparatus in the vertical position two small hinged RL ST “AMMVUVLEY OFT ATDOLOTT-OMOLPAL SULEESHOTADEY brackets, at the end distant from the camera, are forced up with a smart blow of the hand. The corresponding ends of the stretcher bars are dislodged from their fittings, and allowed to descend; when 158 BACTERIOLOGY. horizontal, the opposite extremities of the bars are easily released from their sockets. The leg or support at this end can then be Fic. 79.—REVERSIBLE Micro-PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS ARRANGED IN THE VERTICAL PosITION. turned up and fixed underneath the apparatus by a button, and the end of the apparatus itself gently lowered to the ground. PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 159 A hinged end-piece is also to be turned out to increase the base upon which the whole apparatus will stand when raised to the vertical. The two-legged support at the opposite end of the apparatus is next worked down by a quick thread screw, and on raising the apparatus to the vertical, the two-legged support drops to the ground, and assists in maintaining the stability of the whole. If itis thought necessary, a simple means can be readily devised for clamping the apparatus, in either position, to the wall of the room, so as to eliminate as much as possible all chances of vibration. A second quick thread screw moves the base-board upon which the camera and central sliding-board are mounted, so that the camera, niicroscope and lantern can be raised to a convenient height from the ground. The various parts of this apparatus may be described in detail. The Microscope and its Attachments.—It is most essential that the microscope should be perfectly steady. ‘The microscope was made by Zeiss, and to ensure steadiness, the horse-shoe footpiece fits under a projecting ledge, and is then clamped by a cross-piece, so that it is firmly fixed. The microscope with the means for clamping it and the oxy- hydrogen lantern are. carried upon an independent sliding-board, which admits of movement to or from the camera. The sliding-board also moves upon a centre, which enables the microscope to be turned out from the median line; in fact, to be turned at a right angle to the position it occupies when ready for the exposure. The object of this contrivance,is to enable the operator to sit down by the side of the apparatus, and with comfort to arrange the object in the field of the microscope. On turning the microscope back into the median line, it is fixed in the optical axis of the apparatus by means of a suitable stop. The sliding-board is provided with a small grooved wheel receiving an endless cord, made of silk or fishing-line, which passes round the grooved, milled head of the fine adjustment of the microscope. When the sliding-board is returned to the median line of the apparatus, the milled wheel connected with the fine adjustment impinges upon the. wheel of the long focussing rod. The latter is provided with an india-rubber tire, which grips the teeth of the milled wheel, and thus the long focussing rod is placed in connection with the fine adjustment of the microscope. IMlumination.—The oxy-hydrogen lamp has been more frequently employed by the author than the paraffine lamp, partly on account of the diminished time in exposure, especially when employing very 160 BACTERIOLOGY. Fic.''80,—Swirt’s [LARGE Micko-PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS, PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 161 high powers ; this is of great importance where there is likely to be vibration from passing traffic. With rapid plates and the highest powers, the exposure has only been two or three seconds, whereas with the paraffine lamp it may vary from three to ten minutes, or even longer. Walmsley gives the following table for exposures with the paraffine lamp :— 14 inch objective : : ; 3 to 45 seconds. ae 5 4 2 7, 90 ,, as Pe 3 ,, 3 minutes. S45 5 : : : : 2 yy TF s vo on a ‘ : 3 : Bs MOY og The illuminating apparatus represented in the accompanying engraving (Fig. 78) consists of a lantern which not only moves together with the microscope on the central sliding-board, but can be moved independently to or from the microscope, and be clamped with screws at the requisite distance for obtaining the best illumination. It is provided with two 3-inch condensing lenses of long focus, constructed of optical glass, which is much whiter than that used for ordinary lantern condensers. The lime-cylinders should be of the hardest and best quality, as they give a more actinic light than those made of soft lime. The “ Excelsior” lime-cylinders are strongly recommended. They are supplied in hermetically sealed tins which can be easily opened and re-sealed, so that a cylinder. can be taken out and used, and the rest preserved for a future occasion. The hydrogen can be obtained by using the coal-gas supplied to the house, and the oxygen should be supplied preferably in a compressed state in iron bottles. Not only are the bottles much less cumbrous than the bags, but a small quantity of gas can be used, and the residue left for an indefinite time; moreover, the gas is always at hand to be turned on when required. On the other hand, the retention of unused gas in bags is liable to cause their corrosion, owing, it is believed, to impurities which are carried over in’ the manufacture of the oxygen. If gas is not laid on in the house, then it also must be procured in a compressed state in bottles. As the blow-over jet is recommended on account of its safety, the bottles should be supplied in this case with a supplementary valve. It is then just as easy and free from danger to employ the compressed gas as it is to make use of the house-supply. The Camera. long-focus, half-plate camera is mounted upon a sliding platform. This admits of the camera being pushed up to 11 162 BACTERIOLOGY. the microscope when it is in the long axis of the apparatus, so as to make a light-tight combination. The opening which is filled in an ordinary camera by the lens can be shut off by means of an ternal shutter, which is opened and closed by turning a screw at the side of the camera, The dark-back is provided with plate-carriers, so that either half, quarter, or lantern-size plates can be employed. It will he found convenient to have two or more dark-backs, so that several plates may be exposed without rearranging the light for each exposure, Much more elaborate and expensive micro- photographic cameras have been constructed by Zeiss, and also by Swift. The latter has | Fic. 81.—PHoTocrarH OF AN IMPRESSION PREPARATION. carriel out a suggestion made by Pringle for a support at the ocular end (Fig. 80). The Dark-room.—In every bacteriological laboratory there should be a developing room provided with shelves, gas, water-tap, and sink, but these arrangements are not absolutely indispensable. All that is essential is a room impervious to light; and a closet or cupboard, if it can be ventilated, will answer perfectly well, with a jug and basin instead of the tap and sink. The steam-steriliser employed in the preparation of nutrient media for cultivating bacteria, if not required at the time for such purposes, may be filled to the brim with water, and will form an excellent cistern and tap, while a pail, or small sanitary bin, may be utilised as a sink. Various kinds of lamps are made for the dark-room, burning PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 163 either candles, oil, or gas. In any case, the light must pass through two thicknesses of ruby glass. Dry Plates—A small supply of any of the ordinary plates in the market may be procured for preliminary trials in acquiring a knowledge of the processes ; but to overcome the difficulties of certain stained preparations, the isochromatic or orthochromatic plates should be used. The } plate will be found to be the most suitable size. There are numerous formule for the requisite solutions for developing and fixing the negatives, and instructions are usually enclosed in the boxes of dry plates, but it is best to abstain from trying a number of different formule, as it leads to a great expendi- ture of time. There is a temptation to do this, it being supposed that there is probably some great advantage in one formula over another. It is much better to get accustomed to the behaviour under different exposures of one, or perhaps two methods. In France the iron developer is much in vogue, and is recom- mended by Tailfer and Clayton for use with their isochromatic plates. It has the advantage of great simplicity in the mode of employment, and, therefore, is very suitable for a beginner. In England, on the other hand, the alkaline developer is very much used, as it gives more command over the plate, enabling the photographer more fully to compensate for incorrect exposure. It is very desirable before attempting to take photographs with the microscope to learn how to take photographs with an ordinary landscape camera, and to get thoroughly accustomed to the use of some good developer, so that mistakes may be corrected and the clearest and sharpest negatives obtained. Practica, MANIPULATION. Arrangement of Apparatus—For working with the paraftine lamp, the mode of procedure is, as regards the illumination, briefly as follows. The sub-stage condenser is dispensed with when a low power is employed, as well as the mirror, and the lamp is so placed that the image of the flat of the flame appears accurately in the centre of the field of the microscope. A. bull’s-eye condenser is then interposed, so that the image of the flame disappears, and the whole field is equally illuminated. With high powers the sub-stage achromatic condenser is necessary, and a more intense illumination is obtained by using the flame edgewise. In using a low power with the oxyhydrogen light, the lantern is withdrawn some little distance from the microscope, and the top combination of the achromatic condenser removed. 164 BACTERIOLOGY. It is best to begin with the use of a low power, and a trial object, such as the blow-fly’s tongue, spine of Echinus, or trachea of silkworm. In order to explain the management of the apparatus (as represented in Fig. 78) the steps in the arrangement of the apparatus and exposure of the plate will be described in detail for the employment of a high power and the oxyhydrogen light. The solutions being ready for use, it is proposed to take a photograph of tubercle bacilli in sputum, with a }, apochromatic oil-immersion objective. The first point to claim attention is the arrangement of the light. Having lighted the gas at the hydrogen jet, the lime-cylinder should be revolved until heated equally all round. The oxygen is then carefully turned on until only a small spot of incandescence is produced. The central sliding-board is turned out, a low power screwed on to the microscope, and the image of the bright spot focussed and accurately centered. ‘To protect the sight, an eye-piece provided with a smoked glass shade is used. The immersion objective is then substituted for the low power, and the oxygen turned on until the right admixture of gas is obtained to produce a brilliant illumination. It is well at this stage to sit down to focus the selected object, and to spend some little time in searching for the most characteristic part of the specimen to be photographed. This being decided upon, the eye- piece is carefully withdrawn, and the central sliding-board rotated back into the median line. To make a light-tight connection between the camera and the’ microscope, the camera is pushed up until a velvet-lined tube, which occupies the position of the lenses of an ordinary camera, is enclosed within a short wide tube which is adapted to the eye-pieca end of the microscope. On opening the camera-shutter the image will be projected upon the ground glass screen of the camera, It is necessary, however, to obtain the exact focus, and to effect this the ground-glass sereen is turned away, and the dark-back with a piece of plain glass is substituted. Here again time may be well spent in getting the sharpest image, with the aid of a focussing glass of proper focal length. The greatest delicacy in manipulation is necessary, as in working’ with such high powers a turn too much of the fine adjustment will cause the image to vanish. Having determined the best visual focus, which will be found with the high-power objectives of most makers to correspond with the chemical focus, the dark-back must be cautiously removed, to. prevent any vibration, and the plain PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 165 glass replaced by a sensitive plate. To effect this change, the operator retires to the dark-room, and opens a box of plates with as little exposure to the red light as possible. Having removed a plate, it is necessary to ascertain which is the sensitive side. This may be done by momentarily exposing it to the red light, and seeing which is the sensitive side by the dull appearance of the film. A less satisfactory way is to moisten the tip of a finger, and press it at one corner of the plate. The film side will be recognised by imparting a sticky sensation, The film must be dusted with a camel’s-hair brush, as well as the dark-back, and the plate is placed film-side downwards in the dark-back, which is then securely closed. Care should be taken that the plates then remaining in the box are packed away before light is admitted to the dark-room. Exposure of the Plate——On returning to the apparatus, the camera-shutter is closed. Then the dark-back is gently slid into its place, and its slide withdrawn. A few moments are allowed to elapse, so that the least possible vibration, which might be caused by inserting the dark-back, has had time to cease, and all is ready for the exposure. In the case of the object we have selected, three seconds will probably be the exposure required. This is done by opening and closing the camera-shutter with one hand, while a watch can be held in the other. The slide of the dark-back is then carefully closed, and the plate is ready to be carried off to the developing room. As the light will not be again required until the next exposure, the oxygen must be turned off, while the coal-gas may be allowed to play over the lime. Development and Fixation of the Image.—It is well to be systematic, and therefore, before the plate is taken out of the dark-back, light is admitted to the dark-room, and everything arranged so that the position of the trays and bottles may be remembered in the dark. First, let the ruby lamp be lit, place two dishes or trays close by, and a row of four dishes within easy reach. Pour out some fixing solution in the first porcelain dish, alum in No. 2, and water in Nos. 3 and 4. Put the necessary quantity of “pyro” solution into the glass measure, and place it with the ammonia drop-bottle in front of the ruby light. Then, when all light except that from the ruby lantern has been excluded, everything is ready to commence the development of the plate. 166 BACTERIOLOGY. Opening the dark-back, the plate may be turned out on to the palm of the hand. The film side is then uppermost, and the plate is to be transferred in the same position to a tray, and covered with water. This is to soak the film and obtain an equal action of the developer ; or the solution of fresh pyro may be poured on to the plate without previous soaking, if the flow is uniform, and the formation of bubbles avoided. In the first case the water is run off and the pyro allowed to flow evenly over the plate. To protect the plate from prolonged exposure to the ruby light, a second tray may be inverted over it, or the developing tray covered with a piece of card-board. Gently rock the tray for a minute or so, then to a few drops of ammonia in a measuring glass add the pyro from the developing tray, and pour the mixture back again over the plate. After again gently rocking the tray for a few minutes, more ammonia is added by drops in the same way. If the exposure has been properly timed,—and the time necessary must be ascertained by trial for each preparation,—the image will gradually begin to appear, and the action must be allowed to continue until sufficient density has been obtained. To determine this requires some experience. It is generally recommended to take the plate out of the tray and hold it for a moment, film-side towards the operator, in front of the ruby light. Though the plate is not nearly so sensitive when the image has commenced to develop, and there is, therefore, not the same danger of fogging, a safer plan is to occasionally turn the plate film downwards in the tray, and when the image appears on the back the development will be found to be completed. With such a preparation as tubercle bacilli in sputum it is not easy to trace the gradual formation of the image, and hence the advantage of commencing with a well-marked object such as the blow-fly’s tongue. It is then easy to watch the gradual progress of the image. The bright parts or high-lights appear first, then gradually the half-tones, or less brightly-lighted parts, and lastly every shade except the deepest shadows is represented. When, however, all action seems to have ceased, we must still wait until we have judged, in the manner already described, that the density is sufficient. This being determined, we pour off the developing solution and thoroughly wash the plate with water. It is then ready to be placed in dish No. 1, containing ‘“‘ hypo,” and here it must be left for some minutes after all appearance of creaminess has disappeared from the back. White light may now be admitted, the plate removed from the hypo and thoroughly washed under the tap, PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 167 and then placed in dish No. 2. When another plate is ready to take its place, transfer it to dish No. 3, and then to No. 4, and, after a good final washing under the tap, place it upon a rack to dry. If there is any tendency for the film to detach itself from the plate, “to frill,” the alum bath must be used before fixing, as well as after. | Frilling or blistering may be due to an error in manufacture, and is liable to occur in hot weather, or when using a developer too strong in ammonia. If it occurs during washing or fixing, the alum bath must be employed before the hypo. ogging, or the appear- ance of a veil over the plate, may arise from error in the manu- facture, from admission of extraneous light, from over-exposure, or from prolonged exposure to the ruby light during development. Care must be taken that the camera and dark-room are light-tight. Crystallisation, or powdery deposit, upon the negative when dry, is due to insufficient washing out of the hyposulphite of soda. Thin- ness of the image, or want of density, may be due to insufficient development, too weak a developer, or too short or too long an exposure. Zoo great density results from too long immersion in the developer. Spots may sometimes occur upon the negatives. They may be caused by dust upon the plate or by air bubbles in the developer. In the text-books of photography full accounts of failures will be found, their causes and prevention; but it will be advantageous when. these difficulties are encountered to take the negatives to a skilled photographer and get advice upon them. It is necessary to persevere, and not be disheartened if several negatives have to be made of a preparation before a successful result is obtained. It may here be remarked that the beginner will far more rapidly learn the technique if he avail himself of a practical demon- stration from a photographer. When he has learnt to obtain suc- cessful negatives, if he prefer silver prints, and time is an object, it will be found to be true economy to get the printing and mounting done by a professional photographer. The credit of a successful photograph of bacteria is due to the bacteriologist who prepares the microscopical specimen and obtains the negative. Determination of the Amplification.—The amplification varies not only with the objective employed, but with the distance of the focussing screen from the object. In order to ascertain the amplification afforded by a, certain objective at a certain distance, a photograph should be taken, under the same conditions, of the lines of a micrometer slide. It is easy then to calculate the amplification 168 BACTERIOLOGY. obtained in the micro-photograph; supposing, for example, in the micro-photograph the lines which are ;j55 inch apart are delineated 1 inch apart, the magnifying power must be 1,000 diameters. Moreover, having thus ascertained the amplification, we can accurately compute from the photograph the size of the objects taken. Value of Photographs.—It is not necessary to compare the relative merits of diagrams and photographs. Diagrams which do not purport to be accurate representations, but are intentionally the means for simplifying instruction, will always be valuable, even if we have the original preparations under the microscope before us. We must consider the relative merits of photographs and of drawings which purport to be exact representations of what is seen under the microscope. Thus in the case of micro-organisms, when their biological characters are studied under low powers of the microscope, photographs are preferable because they give a more faithful re- presentation. At the same time, apart from this comparative value, we must not lose sight of the actual value of photography in placing within the reach of the student or investigator, who may not be a draughtsman, a most valuable means for illustrating all kinds of preparations. For double-stained or triple-stained tissue pre- Fic. 82. — Puoro- : : crara. or a Parations an accurately coloured drawing leaves Cuitivation or little to be desired; but if we reproduce the same Bactttus = AN- by a wood engraving, and so lose the advantage is of the coloured picture, which is instructive in indicating the method of staining, a photograph will, in many cases, be far more satisfactory. When we have to deal with the growth of bacteria en masse, as in test-tube and plate-cultivations, with colonies as seen under a low power of the microscope, and with impression-prepara- tions both under low and high powers, unless the bacteriologist is a most accomplished draughtsman as well as an accurate and reliable observer, photography undoubtedly affords the best mode of illustration. The apparatus being ready and at hand, a negative can be produced in a few minutes of a preparation which, from the amount of detail it contains, would take perbaps several hours to draw and colour. From that negative any number of facsimiles can PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA. 169 be obtained, whereas an original drawing, even in the best hands, if cut on wood or lithographed, is almost certain to fall short of being an exact copy. With regard to individual bacteria, the result is more satisfactory in many cases than a drawing; for there is the advantage of being absolutely certain that any particular structure, form, or shape which may be represented is actually what exists, and not what may have been evolved by unconscious bias in the mind of the observer. Many illustrations might be given of this. Thus Lewis, who was a most conscientious observer, published an account of organisms in the blood of rats in India, and illustrated it with a wood engraving and with micro-photographs. The identity of the organisms which were found in the common brown rat of this country was established much more readily from these photographs than from the wood engraving or the description in the letterpress. A micro-organism, even under the highest powers, appears as so’ minute an object that to represent it in a drawing requires a very delicate touch, and it is only too easy to make a picture which gives an erroneous impression to those who have not seen the original. If, on the other hand, to represent the object more clearly we draw an enlarged picture, we can only do so by repre- senting what we think the object would be like if it could be amplified to the size represented. In such cases a photographic enlargement is certainly more valuable. Photography enables us also to record rapid changes, and it is possible that as the art advances we may find that the film is more sensitive than the human retina, and brings out details in bacteria which would be otherwise unseen. Photographs can be readily transmitted by post, and when we can neither make a great number of preparations to illustrate some object, nor perhaps be able to go to the expense of having a drawing reproduced, this method will be of value in enabling others to benefit by our observations. The author is convinced that if the employment of photography is encouraged in bacteriological and other research laboratories for depicting microscopical preparations and cultivations of bacteria, the results of increasing experience and practice will lead to its being made more general use of as a faithful and graphic method, valuable alike for class demonstrations and for illustrating publications. PART II. ETIOLOGY AND PREVENTION OF INFECTIVE DISEASES. 171 CHAPTER XIIT. SUPPURATION, PYMIA, SEPTICHMIA, ERYSIPELAS. ABSCESS. WHEN inflammation is followed by an accumulation of leucocytes and of plasma which does not coagulate, the result is a white or creamy liquid called pus, and when the surrounding tissues are involved so that a cavity develops containing pus, we have what is termed an abscess. The almost constant association of bacteria with the production of pus has created a belief that they are the direct cause of suppuration. Ogston found micrococci present in all acute abscesses, and concluded that acute inflammation was invariably due to their presence. The fact that inflammation occurs more frequently in the external tissues of the body is accordingly explained by the ready entrance of bacteria which are in the air; and suppuration following pericarditis, pleurisy, and other conditions in which air is excluded is attributed to the presence of pyogenic cocci, which have gained access by the blood stream. There is no pyogenic organism constantly present, but several different species of bacteria have been isolated from pus and carefully studied, and the antiseptic treatment is based upon the principle of excluding bacteria in surgical operations, and destroying any which may have previously obtained access to wounds and broken surfaces. Inflamed tissue and pus form a most suitable medium for the growth of bacteria, which in some cases are unquestionably only accidental epiphytes. In tuberculosis, actinomycosis, and glanders, pus formation may take place without the presence of pyogenic cocci ; and it is generally believed that chemical irritants, such as croton oil, turpentine, iodine, cadaverin, and tuberculin, will excite the formation of pus in the absence of bacteria, although Klemperer, after a number of very careful experiments, maintains that no genuine pus will be produced if the chemical irritants are first carefully sterilised. 173 174 INFECTIVE DISEASES. The bacteria which have been isolated from pus include :— Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, albus, and citreus, Staphylo- coccus cereus flavus and albus, Streptococcus pyogenes, Micrococcus pyogenes tenuis, Micrococcus pneumonie croupose, Bacillus pyo- cyaneus, Bacillus pyogenes feetidus, Micrococcus tetragenus, Bacillus intracellularis meningitidis, Gonococcus, Bacillus septicus vesice, Urobacillus liquefaciens septicus, Bacillus typhosus, Bacillus coli communis, Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus tuberculosis, Bacillus mallei, and Actinomyces. Fic. 83.—SuPPURATION OF SUBCUTANEOUS TISSUE. d, Leucocyte containing micrococci; d’, leucocyte with pale nucleus showing necrosis ; ¢, fixed connective tissue cells, much enlarged, containing several nuclei, of which some (7’) are pale and necrotic; numerous cocci, diplococci, and short chains. (Cornit and RANVIER.) Some idea of the distribution of the bacteria most commonly occurring in pus may be gathered from the records made by Passet and by Karlinski. Passet examined acute abscesses, and found Staphylococcus * pyogenes aureus and albus in 11 cases, Staphylococcus pyogenes albus alone in 4, Staphylococcus pyogenes albus and citreus in 2, Streptococcus pyogenes alone in 8, Staphylococcus pyogenes albus and Streptococcus pyogenes in 1, and Staphylococcus pyogenes albus and citreus, and Streptococcus pyogenes in Il. SUPPURATION, PYAMIA, SEPTICAMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 175 Karlinski tabulated his cases thus :— a gd n a 2al on a 3 & 4 AEE EEE g (84/85/84) 82/38 |28)/ 35 | F DISEASE. & 8 58 8 22 oe Bz Ete < S828 las) ce (83 /ae|38) 2 Bel selgo sh (ea mse B ae |ae ne Q & a~é FI ra Mastitis . . | 36} 92) 4 Ae | Ge | yes | es Subcutaneous Abscess 30/10] 2 gsi 6/2i2js— Phlegmon . ; BN Did eases Meeks OME | eoce lf ed) Sea ee Furuncle D0 Oi fess 10) bees ae | | ee Bubo . z 17| 8] 1 1) 7]—|—|-|-- Subperiosteal Abscess . V6: 2665) oe Pe | es ed eee ee Panaritium Cutaneum TG be |e 9. hee Wie eee ee Panaritium Osseum . : wo]; 7/—]j] 8/—;/—-J—{—-]—- ‘Dental Abscess . VO) Sp Se ylcae Pa Be ae aces es Hordeolum F LO 26. |e ee ee es Abscess of the Middle Ear Bel) Oe Ne a ee ee Oey ees Carbuncle . ; 4/ 2}/—} 1] 1]}— — | 4 Osteomyelitis 3} 2}—} 1/—!—j—J—-i- Total. .l200! 82! 7!a5}45} 6/3] 21 4 Pyzmra AND SEPTICEMIA. When pyogenic micrococci get access to the blood stream they may be carried into distant parts, and by multiplying produce meta- static abscesses in the lymphatic glands, bones, joints, and internal organs, a condition which is recognised as pyzemia. If there is a general invasion of the blood stream by micrococci, and absorption of their poisonous products, septicemia results, and death may occur before the development of any secondary lesions. When septic micro-organisms multiply locally, and their chemical products are absorbed, or their products are separated from putrid material and injected into the circulation, the result may be called sapremia. The blood in septicemia contains living organisms, and is infective. The blood in sapremia contains only the toxic chemical products, and is not infective. The one is septic infection and the other septic intoxication. Pysmia may follow accidental wounds, surgical operations, parturition, acute suppuration of bones, scarlet fever, typhoid fever, and other diseases. To avoid pyemia in surgery and midwifery, the greatest care must be taken to prevent micro-organisms from being conveyed by instruments, sponges, bandages, and by the hands of the surgeon or the obstetric physician. By the use of antiseptics and absolute cleanliness the chances of infection are reduced to a minimum. 176 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Rosenbach examined six cases of metastatic pyeemia: Strepto- coccus pyogenes was found five times, partly in the blood and partly in the metastatic deposits, and twice in company with Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus. Baumgarten, also, found Streptococcus pyogenes in the internal organs in pyemic cases, and Eiselsberg found Streptococcus pyogenes in company with Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus in the blood of cases of septicaemia. Frankel isolated a streptococcus from puerperal fever, which he at first called Streptococcus puerperalis, but subsequently identified with Streptococcus pyogenes. These researches have been confirmed by others. Winkel obtained a pure cultivation of a streptococcus from the blood of the heart in a case of puerperal peritonitis. It produced erysipelatous redness when inoculated in the rabbit’s ear, and in form and in cultivation was similar to the streptococcus in erysipelas. Cushing also found Streptococcus pyogenes associated with puerperal infection. The cocci were found in endometritis diphtheritica as well as in secondary puerperal inflammation. These observations were still further confirmed by Baumgarten, and Bumm isolated the same organism in puerperal mastitis. DESCRIPTION OF BACTERIA IN Pus. A description may now be given of the cocci most frequently found. Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus and albus and_ Strepto- coccus pyogenes and Gonococcus are the most important of these. Staphylococcus pyogenes citreus, cereus albus and flavus, are pro- bably merely epiphytic. Micrococcus tetragenus, Micrococcus pyogenes tenuis, Bacillus pyogenes feetidus, Bacillus pyocyaneus, Bacillus coli communis, Bacillus septicus vesice, Urobacillus lique- faciens septicus, and Bacillus intracellularis meningitidis will be described fully in Part III. The description of Actinomyces, of Micrococcus pneumonie croupose and of the bacilli of anthrax, tuberculosis, glanders, and typhoid fever, will be found in other chapters in Part JI. Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus (Rosenbach),—Yellow coccus in pus (Ogston). Cocci singly, in pairs, very short chains, and irregular masses. Cultivated on nutrient agar-agar, an orange- yellow culture develops, looking like a streak made with oil paint. One variety grows on nutrient gelatine without liquefying it ; another produces rapid liquefaction, and the growth subsides as SUPPURATION, PYMIA, SEPTICEMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 177 an orange-yellow sediment. On potatoes and blood serum a similar orange-yellow culture grows luxuriantly. They may also form colourless growths in sub-cultures, and are then indistinguishable from Staphylococeus pyogenes albus. The cocci do not cause any septic odour in pus, nor does any gas develop. Albumin is con- verted by their action into peptones. They produce rapid ammoniacal fer- mentation in urine (Shattock). The niicro-organisms injected into the pleura or knee of a rabbit produce, asa rule, a fatal result on the following day ; but if it survives longer, it eventu- ally dies of severe phlegmon. If injected into the knee of a dog, suppuration occurs, followed by disintegration of the joint. Injected into the peritoneal yg, 84—Pus wren SrapHyto- cavity of animals, they set up perito- coccr, x 800 (FLtaex). nitis, and introduced into the jugular vein they produce septicemia and death. When a small quantity of a cultivation is introduced into the jugular vein after previous fracture or contusion of the bones of the leg, the animal dies in about ten days, and abscesses are found in and around the bones, and in some cases in the lungs and kidneys, and the cocci are found in the blood and pus. Garré caused sup- puration by inoculating a pure-culture in a wound near his finger nail. Bockhart suffered from several pustules after vaccinating his arm witha pure-culture suspended in salt solu- tion, and Bumm gave himself a hypodermic Fic. 85.—Suscuranzous Tissue ov A Rappit 48 injection of a pure- Hours arTer AN INJECTION OF STAPHYLOCOCCI, x 950 (BAUMGARTEN). culture and produced an abscess. This micro- organism is practically ubiquitous. It has been cultivated from the skin and mucous membranes and secretions of healthy persons, and it occurs in the air, in soil, in dust, and in water, and in 12 178 INFECTIVE DISEASES. association with suppuration, pyemia, puerperal fever, and acute osteomyelitis. Staphylococcus pyogenes albus (Rosenbach).—Cocci micro- scopically indistinguishable from the above. In cultivations also they resemble Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, but the growth consists of opaque white masses. They, as a rule, liquefy nutrient gelatine very rapidly, and subside to the bottom as a white sediment ; more rarely they liquefy very slowly; and a variety has also been described which does not produce any liquefaction. They are similar to the above-mentioned in their pathogenic action, Pure-cultivations of the organism were obtained from a case of acute suppuration of the knee-joint. Staphylococcus pyogenes citreus (Passet).—Cocci singly, in pairs, very short chains, and irregular masses. If cultivated on nutrient gelatine or nutrient agar-agar, a sulphur or lemon-yellow growth develops. When inoculated under the skin of mice, guinea- pigs, or rabbits, an abscess forms after a few days, from which a fresh cultivation of the micro-organism can be obtained. Staphylococcus cereus albus (Passet).—Cocci, morphologic- ally similar to the above, but distinguished by forming on nutrient gelatine a white, slightly shining layer, like drops of stearine or wax, with somewhat thickened, irregular edges. In the depth of gelatine they form a greyish-white, granular thread. In _plate-cultiva- tions, on the first day, white points are observed, which spread themselves out on the surface to spots of 1 to 2mm. When culti- vated on blood serum a_ greyish-white, slightly shining streak develops, and on potatoes the cocci form a layer which is similarly coloured. Staphylococcus cereus flavus (Passet).—Cocci which produce in nutrient jelly a growth which, at first white, becomes lemon- yellow, somewhat darker in colour than Staphylococcus pyogenes citreus. Microscopically Staphylococcus cereus flavus corresponds with Staphylococcus cereus albus. Inoculation experiments with both kinds give negative results. Streptococcus pyogenes (Rosenbach).—Cocci occurring singly, in masses, and in chains. The individual cocci are small spherical cells, with a special tendency after fission for the resulting elements to remain attached to each other, forming chains or rosaries. In cultures on solid media they often occur in the form of staphylococci, but in liquid cultures there may be a few, three or more elements, linked together ; or a great number, forming long chains which may be straight, serpentine, or twisted. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IV. Streptococcus Pyogenes, Fig. 1—From a cover-glass preparation of pus from a pyzmic abscess. Stained with gentian-violet by the method of Gram, and contrast-stained with eosin. x 1200. Powell and Lealand’s apochromatic #, Hom. imm. E. P. 10. Fig. 2.—From cover-glass preparations of artificial cultivations of the strepto- coccus in broth and in milk at different stages of growth. x 1200. Powell and Lealand’s apochromatic J; Hom. imm. E. P. 10. In these preparations there is a great diversity in size and form of the chains and their component elements. In the drawing examples are figured of the following: (a) Branched chains. (0) Simple chains composed of elements much smaller than the average size. (ce) Chains with spherical and spindle-shaped elements at irregular intervals. These are conspicuous by their size, and are sometimes terminal, (d e) Chains in which the elements are more or less uniform in size. (f) Complex chains with elements dividing both longitudinally and transversely, and varying considerably in size in different lengths of the same chain. Plate IV . aneaes _ a att Mlouet . ye 08 saa et STREPTOCOCCUS PYOGENES Vincent Brocks,Day & Son, Lith SUPPURATION, PY#MIA, SEPTICHMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 179 The individual elements composing the chains will be found to vary considerably in size: here and there in a preparation will be found a chain composed of excessively small cocci, in another part the elements will be all on a larger scale, and again in another part they will be peculiarly conspicuous on account of their size. So great is the diversity in the size of the cocci in some of the chains, that one might imagine that there was more than one kind of streptococcus present in a preparation, until on examining some of the longest chains it is observed that various sizes are repre- sented in different lengths of the same chain. Very characteristic appearances result from the fact that the cocci enlarge and divide both longitudinally and transversely ; and, indeed, the largest, for the most part, clearly show a division in two directions, resulting in the formation of tetrads. In addition to the forms resulting from the fission of the cocci, there are here and there in a chain, and sometimes terminally, larger elements, which are spherical, spindle-shaped, or in the form of a lemon. In the length of the chains, as in the size of the individual cocci, there is usually great diversity.. In some cases they are composed of only a few, three or four cocci; in others eight, ten, or twenty. Here and there an exquisite rosary will extend in a straight line across the field of the microscope, or be twisted, curved, or serpentine; in some preparations twisted or entangled strands are observed which are composed of several hundred elements. Such chains will be found to be much thicker in one part than another. Another char- acteristic appearance is produced by separation of the elements resulting from fission in the long direction of the chain, by which lateral twigs or branches are formed. Another character, which is very striking, may be seen when the individuals in a chain have become separated; an unstained or faintly stained membrane may be found bridging across the interval. This will become still more visible in preparations contrast-stained with eosin. In plate-cultivations the appearances of the colonies are not very striking. They appear to the naked eye after three or four days as extremely minute, greyish-white, translucent dots, which under the microscope have a slightly yellowish-brown colour. They are finely granular and well defined. They do not liquefy the gelatine, and after several weeks may not exceed the size of a pin’s head. Tf the surface of nutrient gelatine solidified obliquely be traced over once or twice with a platinum needle bent at the extremity into a little hook charged with the cocci, a ribbon-shaped film develops in two or three days. This film is composed of minute, 180 INFECTIVE DISEASES. greyish-white, translucent dots or droplets, which can be more easily recognised with the aid of a pocket lens (Fig. 87). According to the number of organisms sown on the jelly, the dots or colonies may be completely isolated, or form a more or less continuous film. The film by reflected light has an iridescent appearance like mother-of-pearl, but has a bluish or bluish-grey tint by transmitted light, and with a pocket lens appears distinctly brownish. The gelatine is not liquefied, and even after several weeks the cultivation is limited to the inoculated area, and the individual colonies are, as a rule, not larger than pins’ heads. In gelatine-cultivations of the same age, but kept in the incubator at 18° C., the colonies get irregular in form, especially at the margin of the film, and give the growth an arborescent, fringed, or serrated appearance. Cultivated on the oblique surface of nutrient agar-agar at 37° C. the growth is very similar, forming a film composed of minute white colonies like grains of sand; but the film appears less transparent, is whiter, and the colonies have a greater tendency to get irregular in form. If inoculated with one tracing of the needle the growth is scanty, but tends to get thicker in the centre than towards the margins, which may have a terraced appearance. Inoculated in the depth of gelatine, there appears after a day or two at 18° C. a thread-like growth along the track of the inoculating needle. This delicate growth is found on examination with a pocket lens to consist of a linear series of extremely minute granules. In a few days more, the beads or granules become more marked, but even after weeks, the cultivation only appears like a string of minute, white, compact, globular masses or grains. In broth at 37° C. the cocci in twenty-four hours create a turbidity, and gradually develop beauti- ful chains varying in length according to the age of the cultivations. Even in forty-eight hours there may be chains of eight, ten, twenty, or a hundred elements. After a few days the growth settles down at the bottom of the tube in the form of a white deposit, while the supernatant liquid becomes again clear. Inoculated subcutaneously in the ear of rabbits, they produce in two days an inflammatory thickening with. erysipelatous redness, or sometimes suppuration. They may occur in vaccine lymph, as the result of con- tamination, and Pfeiffer suggested that before calf lymph is employed for vaccination it should be tested on a rabbit’s ear. If in two days no rash has been produced, the possibility of the presence in the lymph of Streptococcus pyogenes or erysipelatis is excluded. : SUPPURATION, PYMIA, SEPTICZMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 181 According to Fliigge and others, after subcutaneous inoculation of mice with a small quantity of a cultivation, there is no result in 80 per cent. of the animals experimented upon. Sometimes there is limited pus formation at the seat of inoculation, sometimes the animals die without any very striking pathological appearances. They occur in abscesses, pyeemia, and septicemia, and are often found in diseases such as scarlet fever and typhoid, associated with septic complications. They have been isolated from air, soil, and water. The streptococcus found in erysipelas agrees in description, and is merely a variety of Streptococcus pyogenes. It has been definitely established by the researches of Frankel and Freudenberg, and later by those of the author, Raskin, Prudden, and Bayard Holmes, that Streptococcus pyogenes is frequently found in scarlet fever and diphtheria, and in other diseases associated with septic complica- tions. The author has isolated Streptococcus pyogenes from acute abscesses, from suppuration after surgical operations, from pyemia, from pyemia after scarlet fever, and from purulent peritonitis. Some of these cultures have been kept up for very long periods, extending over some years, so that opportunities occurred for a complete investigation into the life history of this micro-organism. Variations in the appearances of cultures have been observed when obtained from the same source. A number of cultures from pus were prepared on gelatine and agar, made according to the usual formula, but at different dates, and, therefore, varying slightly in composition and quality. Sub-cultures were also started in nutrient gelatine of precisely the same composition, but from primary cul- tures of the same micro-organism in different media—agar-agar, milk, and broth. The descriptions of the streptococcus hitherto published were then found to be inadequate. The different cultures and sub-cultures presented striking variations in the microscopical and macroscopical appearances. Some sub-cultures on gelatine, for exam- ple, exhibited a finely dotted appearance, others showed every variety in the size, and degree of opacity of the colonies (Fig. 89). Cultures in broth also, varied in appearance, owing to slight variation in the composition of the medium, to slight differences of temperature, and other conditions difficult to determine. The addition of glycerine to broth materially alters the appearance of the culture. It was con- clusively proved that minute differences arise from different conditions of the cultivating media. The author was led to study exhaustively the streptococcus of acute suppuration in bovines. Primary cultures of Streptococcus pyogenes from man, and primary cultures from 182 INFECTIVE DISEASES. a case of purulent peritonitis in a cow, were carried through sub-cultures under exactly similar conditions. -Cultivations of the Streptococcus pyogenes bovis exhibited variations in microscopical and cultural characters which were even more marked than in the case of the Streptococcus pyogenes hominis. By selecting certain cultures from both sources there was a striking similarity if not identity between them, but, when compared under exactly identical conditions, there was more difference in cultural characters between the Streptococcus pyogenes bovis and the Streptococcus pyogenes hominis than between the Streptococcus pyogenes hominis and the Streptococcus erysipelatis, and they may therefore be regarded as distinct varieties (Figs. 89, 90). Some of the diseases and conditions in which Streptococcus pyogenes has been found may be alluded to more in detail. Spreading Gangrene—From a case of spreading gangrene, which was identical with Ogston’s erysipelatoid wound gangrene, and regarded by him as the most intense and dangercus form of erysipelas, Rosenbach obtained pure-cultivations of a streptococcus by incisiug the skin of the limb, and inoculating tubes from the turbid reddish fluid which escaped. That the streptococcus was identical with Streptococcus pyogenes was ascertained by comparison with a cultivation derived from pus, of the mode of growth, and of the effect on animals. Surgical Fever.—Hiselsberg proved the presence of a streptococcus in the blood of several cases of surgical fever in Billroth’s clinic. The organism was identified by cultivation with Streptococcus pyogenes. Diphtheria.—In three cases of typical diphtheria, Loffler found a streptococcus. He isolated it by cultivation, found that it was similar in form, characters on cultivation, and effects after inoculation, to Fehleisen’s streptococcus of erysipelas. Léffler was not inclined to regard them as identical, because Fehleisen never found his cocci in the blood-vessels. Fliigge named the organism Streptococcus articulorum, and states, that after subcutaneous inoculation or injection of a cultiva- tion in mice, a large proportion of the animals die, and in the sections of the spleen and other organs the streptococci are again seen. Baum- garten investigated the same subject, and decided that the streptococcus was identical with Streptococcus pyogenes. Small-pox.—Hlava has established the presence of Streptococcus pyogenes in the pustules of variola, and Garré found streptococci in the internal organs in a case of variola hemorrhagica. In a fatal case of variola complicated with pemphigus, Garré found a streptococcus in the pemphigus vesicles. Whether it was identical with Streptococcus erysipelatis Garré left an open question. Yellow Fever.—Babes observed the presence of streptococci in the vessels of the kidney and liver in yellow fever. Cultivation experiments are wanting. It was probably a case of secondary infection with Strepto- coccus pyogenes. SUPPURATION, PYZMIA, SEPTICEMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 183 Bilious Fever.—Babes, in a case of fiévre bilieuse typhoide, found masses of streptococci filling the vessels of the liver, kidney, and spleen. This was probably another instance of secondary infection with Strepto- coccus pyogenes. Measles.—From the blood and inflammatory post-products in measles, Babes isolated a streptococcus, which he describes as closely resembling the Streptococcus pyogenes. Ulcerative Endocarditis —Wyssokowitsch found cocci in the internal “organs in ulcerative endocarditis, and produced the disease in animals, after injury to the valves, by injection of Streptococcus pyogenes and other organisms. Weichselbaum, by microscopical research and by cultivation experiments, proved the presence of Streptococcus-pyogenes in acute verrucous endocarditis. Baumgarten confirmed this. He found Fic. 86.—U.cerative Enpocarnitis : SEcTION or Carpiac Muscts, x 700 (Koc#). Streptococcus pyogenes alone in one case and accompanied by Staphylo- coccus aureus in another. Broncho-pneumonia.—Thaon found a streptococcus in the lungs of children in fatal cases of broncho-pneumonia, complicating measles, diphtheria, aud whooping cough. It was regarded as identical with the streptococcus isolated by Léffler from diphtheria. Frankel discovered a streptococcus in the lungs of a case of true croup complicated with broncho-pneumonia, and by cultivation established its identity with Streptococcus pyogenes. Anthraz.—Charrin found cocci in rabbits, examined some hours after death from anthrax. These, when isolated, produced death in rabbits from septicemia, without suppuration. Chains composed of from fifteen to twenty elements were found in all the organs. This was probably another instance of Streptococcus pyogenes. Syphilis.—Kassowitz and Hochsinger found the presence of a strepto- 184 INFECTIVE DISEASES. coccus in the tissues and internal organs, and especially in the blood- vessels, in fatal cases of congenital syphilis. These observers regarded their discovery as having an important bearing on the etiology of syphilis, but Kolisko pointed out that it was only the result of septic infection with presence of Streptococcus pyogenes, as had already been established in scarlet fever. Cerebro-spinal Meningitis.—From the meningeal exudation of a case of apparently idiopathic cerebro-meningitis, Banti found Streptococcus pyogenes and Staphylococcus aureus and albus. The cocci probably entered through an abscess of the jejunum. Fic. 87.—PvuRE-CULTURES OF STREPTOCOCCUS PYOGENES. a, On the surface of nutrient gelatine ; ), in the depth of nutrient gelatine ; c, on the surface of nutrient agar. Blepharadenitis and Dacryocystis.—Widmark isolated by cultivations Streptococcus pyogenes and other organisms from cases of blepharadenitis and phlegmonous dacryocystis. In phlegmonous dacryocystis Widmark found Streptococcus pyogenes almost exclusively. Leukemia.—Fligge cultivated a streptococcus from necrotic patches in the spleen of a fatal case of leukemia. Cultures corresponded very closely with Streptococcus pyogenes. Inoculation in the ears of rabbits produced similar results to Streptococcus pyogenes or erysipelatis. Fliigge calls it Streptococcus pyogenes malignus, but concludes that it is probably dentical with the streptococcus from pus. SUPPURATION, PYMIA, SEPTIC/MIA, ERYSIPELAS. 185 ERYSIPELAS. Erysipelas is an acute inflammation of the skin, occurring in connection with wounds, when it is traumatic, and on surfaces apparently sound, when it is idiopathic, as in erysipelas of the face. It is highly contagious in surgical wards, and it gives rise to rapidly fatal puerperal fever in lying-in hospitals. In such cases the virus is obviously conveyed from sick to healthy persons by direct contact, or by instruments and sponges, or by the hand of the surgeon, physician, or nurse, and possibly by the air. Fic. 88.—SrecTIoN oF SKIN IN ERYSIPELAS. v,v, two lymphatic vessels containing leucocytes and m,m, streptococci ; t, connective ‘tissue 5 a, connective tissue and wandering cells. x 600 (Cornin and RANvrER). Streptococcus of Erysipelas.—In 1882, Fehleisen isolated a streptococcus in erysipelas, described the appearances on cultivation, and maintained that it could be distinguished from the streptococcus of suppuration. Rosenbach agreed that the two micro-organisms could be distinguished by parallel experiments, and named the one Streptococcus pyogenes and the other Streptococcus erysipelatis. (Fehleisen). Rosenbach asserted that the colonies of the latter were more opaque and whiter than those of Streptococcus pyogenes and the growth more marked in the depth of nutrient gelatine, while microscopically the chains were better marked and larger, and the individual cocci larger than in Streptococcus pyogenes. Others who investigated this subject could not distinguish them with certainty, either by their morphological or cultural characters or effects on inoculation. Passet found that inoculation of Strepto- coccus pyogenes induced a condition very similar to that produced by inoculation of Streptococcus erysipelatis. Hoffa and Hajek described minute differences, but Biondi and Eiselsberg failed to confirm these. 186 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Baumgarten failed to prove any essential difference. Mitchell Prudden found that Streptococcus pyogenes injected into the sub- cutaneous tissue of the ears of rabbits, produced in one no effect ; in four, slight transient redness; in five, local redness followed by abscess ; in twelve, well-marked erysipelatous redness, followed by complete resolution in seven, abscess in three, and death in two. Passet, Biondi, Hiselsberg, Baumgarten, and Mitchell Prudden concluded that, in their morphological, biological, and pathogenic characters, so far as animals are concerned, the two organisms are practically identical. The author investigated the morphology and cultural characters of the Streptococcus erysipelatis, which he had isolated from a typical case. This result cleared up the conflicting statements which had been made by different observers. By carrying out absolutely parallel experiments, the Streptococcus pyogenes and Streptococcus erysipelatis were unquestionably distinguishable, as Fehleisen and Rosenbach had asserted. In both cases, however, inoculation of a trace of a culture from a solid medium produced only transient redness. Injection hypodermically of a broth-culture produced in both cases a spreading erysipelatous redness, followed by suppuration. It was found that primary cultures of the two micro-organisms, cultivated under precisely the same conditions, differed in the size and character of their chains, in the size of the individual elements, in the greater opacity of the colonies of Strepto- coccus’ erysipelatis, in a greater tendency to confluence, and in a more rapid growth. The author found that the difference was most marked in broth-cultures. Abundant floceuli were formed by Streptococcus pyogenes ; a powdery deposit with special tendency to form a granular adhesive film at the bottom of the culture flask, in the case of the streptococcus of erysipelas. Lastly, they differed in their power of resisting germicides. Fehleisen inoculated patients in hospital suffering with malignant growths, and produced a typical erysipelas with sub-cultures after an incubation of from sixteen to twenty hours, The disease was marked by rigors, fever, and general disturbance. Patients who had recently suffered from erysipelas had an immunity. Emmerich succeeded in proving the. presence of streptococci in the air of a hospital where erysipelas had broken out. These cocci in their form, their characters on cultivation, and their inoculation results, were identified with the Streptococcus erysipelatis. It is not therefore exclusively parasitic. Streptococci identical or agreeing very closely in their description SUPPURATION, PY#MIA, SEPTICEMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 187 with Streptococcus pyogenes, have been found in cattle plague, foot und mouth disease, strangles, contagious mammitis in cows, and progr sive tisste necrosis in mice, and they will be referred to fully in subsequent chapters. EXAMINATION AND CULTIVATION OF STREPTOCOCCI, Cover-glass preparations can be stained with the watery solutions of the aniline dyes. In some cases very beautiful preparations can he obtained by using Neelsen’s solution, and removing excess of a, Fic. 89.—Streprococcus Pyocexes Hominis. Pure-cultures on nutrient gelatine. a, Sub-culture from agar. b, Sub-culture from broth, c, Sub-culture from milk. d, Sub-culture from milk. stain by rinsing in alcohol. To examine pus, milk, or broth, take an ordinary platinum needle bent at the extremity into a booklet. Dip it into the liquid to be examined, and spread it on a cover- elass into as thin a film as possible; the preparation is treated in the ordinary way, that is to say, the film is allowed to dry, and the cover is taken up with forceps, and passed three times through the flame with its prepared side uppermost. Gram’s Method with Eosin.—In this way the streptococci are stained blue, and stand out in marked contrast to the rest of the preparation. Use freshly prepared solution. Float the cover-glasses 188 INFECTIVE DISEASES. on the solution for ten minutes to half an hour, then triasfer them to iodine-potassic-iodide solution, wnitil they assume the colour of a tea leaf; then immerse them in alcohol until they are decolorised ; dip them in an alcoholic solution of eosin for a few moments, and then transfer them to clove oil to clarify the film; to remove the clove oil gently press the cover between two layers of clean filter paper, then mount in xylol balsam. A wood method for cultivating streptococci is to employ a steril- ised looped platinum wire, aud to spread a droplet, for example, of pus or blood, over the surface of nutrient agar-agar solidified obliquely. “ b. ¢. i. Fig. 90.—Srrerrococets PyockNes Bovis. Pure-cultures on nutrient gelatine. a, Sub-culture from agar, b, Sub-culture from broth. ¢, Sub-culture from milk. d, Sub-culture from milk. The tubes are then placed in the incubator at 37° C.; the strepto- cocci will appear in the course of two or three days in the form of minute dotted colonies. If present alone, and in considerable quantities, the inoculated surface will exhibit a pure cultivation consisting of a number of such colonies, whilst a flocculent mass is observed in the liquid which collects at the bottom of agar-agar tubes; this flocculent mass will be found to be composed of chains. From such a tube inoculate a number of the small flasks employed in Pasteur’s laboratory for cultivations in lquids. In this way a number of pure-cultivations in milk and broth are established, which can be veidily examined from time to time. From a pure- SUPPURATION, PYAMIA, SEPTICEMIA, ERYSIPELAS. 189 cultivation in broth or agar-agar tubes of nutrient gelatine can be inoculated. Cover-glass-preparations from the growths on solid media can be made in the usual way, and stained with either a watery solution of fuchsine or gentian violet : but to stain prepa- rations made from milk or broth, or from the liquid in agar-agar tubes, use the method of Gram; the stain will then be removed, except. from the streptococci, and very beautiful preparations result. GonorRHa@A. Gonorrhea is the result of a catarrhal inflammation of the mucous membrane of the urethra, vagina, or conjunctiva caused by a characteristic pyogenic organism discovered by Neisser in 1879. Gonococeus of Neisser.-—Cocci, usually in pairs 1°6-p in length, ‘8 » in width, and tetrads, with those surfaces of the com- ponent elements which are in contact, flattened. The elements are more or less kidney-shaped, and are separated by a clear unstained interval. They are found free in the pus and. also in the interior of the pus cells. They stain with the aniline dyes, but are decolorised by Gram’s solution. They do not grow on the ordinary media, such as gelatine, agar, and potato, in marked contrast to the common pyogenic cocci; but Bumm succeeded in obtaining a cultivation by using human blood serum, which was procured for the purpose from the placenta. They give rise to a very delicate growth in the form of an almost invisible film, with a moist appearance, which attains its full development in a few days. Steinschneider used human blood serum and agar incubated at 35° CO. Krall recommended either agar with grape-sugar and blood serum, or the same mixture with the addition of 5 per cent. glycerine. Others have employed nutrient agar with the surface moistened with sterilised human blood. More recently Keifer has been successful with a medium which is prepared in the following way: ascitic fluid is filtered and sterilised by Tyndall’s process, to this is added an equal quantity of the following mixture, agar 3:5, peptone 5, glycerine 2, salt °5 (per cent.). The ascitic agar is solidified in a Petri’s dish, and the culture incubated at 36° C. : They have also been cultivated in albumin from plovers’ eggs, and in the fluid obtained from a case of synovitis of the knee joint. Inoculation of rabbits, dogs, horses, and monkeys, has been invariably unsuccessful, but sub-cultures produce the disease in the healthy urethra. 190 INFECTIVE DISEASES. The cocci are found in pus from the urethra and other mucous membranes affected by the disease. They have also been found in urethral and inguinal abscesses in association with Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus. Mernop oF STAINING. Cover-glass preparations are made in the usual way, and double stained with Léffer’s methylene blue, and eosin. Schiitz recommends floating the cover-glasses for five or ten minutes in a saturated solution of methylene blue in 5 per cent. solution of-carbolic acid. They are washed in water, rinsed in very weak acetic acid, and again washed in water. Safranin may be used as a contrast stain. Fic. 91.—Gonococcus x 800 (Bumm). a, free cocci; b, cocci in pus cells ; ¢, epithelial cell containing cocci. Eeyprian OPHTHALMIA. There are two forms of ophthalmia in Egypt, one associated with Gonococcus and the other with a bacillus closely resembling the bacillus of mouse-septiceemia, but there are minute differences. Bacillus of Ophthalmia (Koch and Kartulis). Minute rods which do not grow on gelatine but readily on blood serum and nutrient agar, forming a plainly visible, whitish-grey shining growth. Animals are insusceptible, but cultures produced the disease in the human conjunctiva in two out of six cases. CHAPTER XIV. ANTHRAX. ANTHRAX is a very fatal malady, and most irregular in its be- . haviour. At one time it attacks only one or two animals, and at another time it will destroy nearly all the stock on a farm. Farmers formerly regarded the disease as non-communicable, and possibly the result of excessive or improper feeding, or faulty sani- tation, or of climatic conditions over which no control could be exercised. It is obvious that so long as the disease was regarded as the result of unknown conditions, no explanation could be given of its recurrence from time to time, or of certain animals contracting the disease and others not, and no measures of any use could be suggested to cope with an outbreak. Anthrax has always been more prevalent on the Continent than in England, and this to some extent accounts for the fact that it has received greater attention abroad. In France, Germany, Hungary, Russia, and in India and Persia, anthrax at times produces wide- spread losses. In Siberia it is still known on this account as the Siberian Plague. On the Continent there are certain localities known as anthrax districts on account of their reputation for anthrax—for example, in the Upper Bavarian Alps in Germany and in Auvergne in France. In 1849, Pollender happened to examine the blood of a cow after death from anthrax, and discovered peculiar rod-like bodies among the blood cells. The same observation was made independ- ently by Brauell and Davaine about the same time, but the greatest importance must be attached to the publication of Davaine’s further researches in 1863. Many ridiculed the discovery of bacilli, and stoutly maintained that they were only blood crystals or accidental structures of no importance. For many years very little progress was made, and the statements of other observers who were able to verify and add to Pollender’s and Davaine’s discoveries, were still received with scepticism. 191 192 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Within the last few years a great change of opinion has taken place. Bacteriologists have investigated the whole subject, so that at the present day we know exactly the cause of anthrax. Bacillus anthracis (uctéridie du charbon, Bacillus of splenic fever, Wool-sorters’ disease, ov malignant pustule).—Rods 5 to 20 p long and 1 to 1:25 p» broad, and threads; spore-formation present. As a thorough knowledge of the life-history of this bacillus is of the greatest importance, the various steps to be followed in a practical study of it will he successively treated in detail. Its morphological Fic. 92.—Bacitius ANTHRACIS, * 1200. Blood corpuscles and bacilli unstained ; from an inoculated mouse (FRANKEL and PFEIFFER). and biological characteristics have been very completely worked out, and it serves as an excellent subject for gaining an acquaintance with most of the methods employed in studying micro-organisms. A mouse inoculated with the bacillus or its spores will die in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours, or more rarely in from forty-eight to about sixty hours. Examination after Death.—The spleen is found to be considerably enlarged, and may be removed, and examined by making cover-glass preparations, inoculations in nutrient media, and subsequently sections. Cover-glass Preparations.—In cover-glass preparations of the blood of the spleen the bacilli are found in enormous numbers. Preparations should also be made with blood from the heart and with the exudation from the lungs and other organs ; it will be DESCRIPTION OF PLATE V. Bacillus Anthracis. Fic. 1.—From a cover-glass preparation of blood from the spleen of a guinea- pig inoculated with blood from a sow. x 1200. Powell and Lealand’s apochromatic y; Hom.imm. E. P. 10. Fig. 2.-From a section of a kidney of a mouse. Under a low power the preparation has exactly the appearance of an injected specimen. Under higher amplification the bacilli are seen to have threaded their way along the capillaries between the tubules, and to have collected in masses in the glomeruli. Stained with Gram’s method (gentian-violet), and eosin. x 500. Fig. 3.—Bacillus anthracis and Micrococcus tetragenus. From a section from the lungs of a mouse which had been inoculated with anthrax three days after inoculation with Micrococcus tetragenus. A double or mixed infection resulted. Anthrax-bacilli occurred in vast numbers, completely filling the small vessels and capillaries, and in addition there were great numbers of tetrads. Stained by Gram’s method (gentian-violet), and with eosin. «x 500. Plate V. [LN : SAS Si yy OG a — nt Bre oks, Day & Son, Lith. Fig 3. Fig Za BACILLUS ANTHRACIS ANTHRAX, 193 noted that in these the bacilli are present in very small numbers, or altogether absent. The bacilli should be examined both unstained and stained. The rods are straight or sometimes curved ; rigid and motionless. They can be stained with a watery solution of any of the aniline dyes, and are then seen to be composed of segments with their extremities truncated at right angles; between the segments a clear linear space exists, which gives them a characteristic appear- ance (Plate V., Fig. 1). By double staining, with Gram’s method and eosin, the rods are seen to consist:of a membrane or hyaline sheath with protoplasmic contents. Drop-cultwres.—A. little of the blood from the spleen or heart may be employed to inoculate sterilised broth or blood serum. Several of these cultures should be prepared, and some of them placed in the incubator, and examined at intervals of a few hours. It will be observed that the rods grow into long homogeneous fila- ments, which are twisted up in strands, and partly untwisted in long and graceful curves. The filaments begin to swell, become faintly granular, and bright, oval spores develop (Plate 1). The cultures in the incubator develop rapidly. A temperature of 30° to 37° C. is the most favourable for spore-formation. The spores are eventually set free, and by making a fresh cultivation, or by injecting them into a mouse or guinea-pig, they germinate again into the characteristic bacilli, which in their turn grow into filaments and spores. When the spore: germinates it swells, the envelope becomes jelly- like, and gives way at one or other pole, and the contents escape and grow into a rod. . Test-tube Cultivations in Nutrient Gelatine.— Typically characteristic appearances are obtained by inoculating a 5 to 8 per cent. nutrient gelatine. A whitish line develops in the track of the inocu- lating needle, and from it fine filaments spread out in the surrounding medium (Fig. 93). The fila- Fie. 93.—Purn Cut- ments are more easily observed with a magnifying TIVATION or Ba- glass. Ina more solid nutrient gelatine the growth ee appears only as a thick white thread. As lique- Lams, faction of the gelatine progresses, these appearances gradually alter, and the growth subsides ‘to the bottom of the tube as a white flocculent mass. In exhausted culture-media, and sometimes in the blood, filaments are seen in a state of degeneration. 13 194 INFECTIVE DISEASES, This has also been observed in sections of the internal organs of a rabbit which had been inoculated with the anthrax bacillus and had died of septicemia the following morning. Test-tube Cultivations in Nutrient Agar-agar.—Cultivated upon a Fic. 94.—Cotonies or BaAcILLUS ANTHRACIS, x 80 (FLUGGE). w, after 24 hours; b, after 48 hours. sloping surface of nutrient agar-agar a viscous snow-white layer is developed, but without access of air no cultivation can be obtained, the bacilli being aerobic. This can be demonstrated by completely embedding a piece of lung or spleen pulp containing bacilli, in nutrient agar-agar (p. 22). Potato - cultivations. —In about thirty-six to forty-eight hours a creamy- white or very faintly yellowish layer forms over the inoculated surface, usually with a translucent edge, and sometimes a strong, penetrating odour of sour milk. Plate-cultivations.—From the spleen Fic. 95.—IMPRESSION-PREPARA- or blood of the heart cultivations may TION OF A COLONY, x 70. be made in nutrient gelatine on plates. The colonies develop in about two days, according to the temperature of the room. They appear to the naked eye as little white spots ANTHRAX. 195 or specks, which, on examination with a low power of the microscope and small diaphragm, exhibit two distinct forms. One form, on careful focussing, has the appearance of a little compact ball of Fic. 96.—MarGIn oF a Cotony, x 250 twisted threads; in the other, liquefaction of the gelatine has commenced, and the threads spread out like loeks or plaits of hair in the neighbouring gelatine. These appearances are perfectly characteristic (Figs. 94, 96). Cover-glass Impressions.—TIhe plate-cultivations should be also examined as soon as the colonies appear, by making cover-glass im- pressions (Fig. 95). The filaments, examined with a high power, will be seen to consist of a number of rods or segments which are perfectly regular in form. On the other hand, filaments from a tube-cultiva- tion in a solid medium will often be found to be composed, not only of rods, but here and there of the so- called involution-forms (Fig. 97). Fic. 97.—FiLaMENTs WITH OVAL AND : . IRREGULAR ELEMENTS, x 800. From cultures in gelatine and Lae glycerine agar, very striking preparations are sometimes; obtained, with numerous large spherical and lemon-shaped elements. In‘ a 196 INFECTIVE DISEASES. cover-glass preparation from a potato-culture the individual segments will be found to have a great tendency to be isolated one from the other, and there is copious spore-formation. Preservation of Spores.—Spores may be preserved simply by allow- ing anthrax blood to dry and then sealing it in a tube. The spores from a potato-cultivation are treated as follows :—The inoculated surface bearing the creamy cultivation is sliced off in a thin layer, and is mashed up with distilled water in a glass capsule. Sterilised silk-thread is cut up into lengths of about a quarter of an inch, and allowed to soak in the paste for some hours, under a bell-glass. The threads are then picked out with a pair of forceps, and laid upon a sterilised glass plate, covered with a bell-glass, and allowed to dry. From the plate, when perfectly dry, they are transferred to a small test-tube, which can be plugged with cotton-wool, or sealed in the Bunsen burner. Examination of the Tissues.—The organs should be hardened in absolute alcohol, and sections prepared and stained by the ordinary methods. The method of Gram is the most instructive, and eosin a very satisfactory contrast stain. The capillaries in the lungs, liver, kidney, spleen, skin, mucous membrane, etc., will be found to contain bacilli: In some cases the bacilli are so numerous that a section under a low power has the appearance of an injected specimen. Inoculation of Animals.—A. thread containing spores, a drop of blood from an infected animal, or a minute portion of a cultivation, introduced under the skin of a mouse or guinea-pig, causes a fatal result, as a rule, in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours. Sheep fed upon potatoes which have been the medium for cultivating the bacillus, die in a few days. Goats, hedgehogs, sparrows, cows, horses, swine, and dogs are all susceptible. Rats are infected with diffi- culty. Frogs and fish have been rendered susceptible by raising the temperature of the water in which they lived. Cats, white rats, and Algerian sheep have an immunity from the disease. Attenuation of the Virus. — Toussaint attenuated cultures by exposing them for ten minutes to 55° C. Pasteur obtained a similar result by resorting to lower degrees of temperature; and Koch, Gaffky, and Léffler concluded from their experiments, that from 42° to 43° C. the bacillus was most easily deprived of its poisonous properties. By cultivating the bacillus in neutralised broth at 42° to 43° C. for about twenty days, the infecting power is weakened, and animals inoculated with it (premier vaccin) are protected against the disease. To obtain. a still more perfect immunity, they are ANTHRAX. 197 inoculated a second time with material (dewwiéme vaccin) which has been less weakened. The animals are then protected against the most virulent anthrax, but only for a time. From a weakened culture, according to Klein, new cultures of virulent bacilli can be started, and a culture that can be used as a vaccine for sheep kills a guinea-pig, and then yields bacilli that are fatal to sheep. The virulence of the bacillus is also altered by passing the bacillus through different species of animals. The bacillus of sheep- or cattle is fatal when re-inoculated into sheep or cattle; but if inoculated in mice, the bacilli then obtained lose their virulence for sheep or cattle, only a transitory illness results, and the animals are protected for a time against virulent anthrax. Exposure to a temperature of 55° C., or treatment with ‘5 to i per cent. carbolic acid, deprives the bacilli of their virulence. Chauveau obtained a similar result by cultivating the bacillus at 38° or 39° C. under a pressure of eight atmospheres. The possibility of mitigating the virus depends upon the species of animal; rodents cannot be rendered immune by any known anthrax vaccine. The nature of the toxic products has been described in a previous chapter (p. 42). Mernops oF Sraininc THE BACILLUS ANTHRACIS. Cover-glass preparations of blood, etc., can be stained with a watery solution of any of the aniline dyes, or with Neelsen’s solution and subsequent treatment with alcohol (p. 87). The preparations may be dried and mounted permanently in Canada balsam, but the typical appearances are best observed in freshly stained specimens examined in water. , : The sheath and protoplasmic contents can be demonstrated in cover-glass preparations from the eo ®@ ® blood or spleen which have been eo o © stained with eosin after the method _ : of Gram. Spores must be stained by the special methods already described. : Oo The most satisfactory preparations are obtained by double-staining with . Fie. 98.—Srorms or Bactiius Ziehl-Neelsen solution and methy- Te SE eee oe . GENTIAN VIOLET, x 1500. lene blue (Fig. 7). Tissue sections are best stained by the method of Gram, and after-stuined with eosin, picrocarminate of ammonia, or picro-lithium- carmine, 198 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Oriain AnD Mope oF SPREAD. As every outbreak of anthrax is the result of the introduction into the system of the bacilli, the question naturally arises, how are they introduced on the farm? Where do they come from? and what are the channels of infection ? The spores of the bacilli may get into the soil, and may remain there in a dormant state for many years. The spores were believed by Pasteur to be taken up by earth-worms, carried to the surface and deposited in their castings. Animals grazing are thus liable to be infected; but Koch’s experiments tended to disprove this theory. Anthrax has been known to break out among cattle grazing on a field where several years previously some Russian hides from infected animals had been buried. By some means or other the spores may contaminate the grass, and hay imported from an anthrax district may start the disease on a farm on which it had never been known to occur. The spores may in a similar way be introduced with blood manure and bone manure, and with refuse used as manure. The skin, hair, wool, hoofs, and horns of infected animals, if soiled with blood, are contaminated by the bacillus. Another way in which the disease can be communicated may be illustrated by the transmission of the disease to man. Those who handle carcasses, wool or hides of infected animals are liable to contract the disease. Slight scratches, cuts, bites, and pimples, may readily be inoculated with the bacilli or their spores. Veterinary surgeons, butchers, herdsmen, cattle drovers—in fact, all those whose occupation leads them to cut open or skin cattle, sheep, or horses, or to handle hides and wool—are liable to fall victims to this disease. In one case which was brought to the author’s notice, a veteri- nary surgeon had been called to see a bullock which had died suddenly in a meadow. A post-mortem examination was made, and the veterinary surgeon wiped his hands, which were soiled with blood, on some rough grass, and then washed them in a stream. The sedgy grass made some small cuts on his fingers, and the result was that he was simultaneously inoculated with the blood of the bullock. Local anthrax followed, two of his fingers were amputated, and he fortunately recovered. In another case a butcher dressed the carcass of a beast which had died suddenly, and while doing so scratched a pimple on his neck. An anthrax pustule developed, and after a very serious illness he also recovered; but in many cases the attack is fatal. ‘“ Wool-sorters’ disease” is ANTHRAX. 199 anthrax of the lungs. Bales of foreign wool contain not only wool from living sheep, but wool which has been clipped from skins of dead sheep. If any of the sheep died from anthrax the wool is sure to be contaminated with blood containing the bacilli, and then wool-sorters engaged in picking the wool readily inoculate them- selves through a scratch or pimple, or by inhaling the spores. In many cases Wool-sorters’ disease is fatal. A farm may become extensively infected by the diving animal. Blood containing the bacilli may be discharged from the mouth and nostrils, or be passed with the contents of the intestinal canal and bladder. The droppings contaminate the pasture or byre, and spore formation, especially in warm weather, quickly takes place. From this cause the disease may not only be conveyed to healthy cattle grazing with infected animals, but fresh cases may occur, year after year, on the same farm, and if hay is cut and sold off the farm, other cattle at a distance are similarly infected. If the flooring of cattle sheds is once soiled by infected animals it is easy to account for those otherwise mysterious outbreaks which occur when the cattle are taken in for the winter. Another source of danger arises when blood from a diseased animal is washed into brooks or streams, for thus the disease may be carried to farms in which it was previously unknown. PREVENTIVE MEASURES. Early recognition and prompt action are essential to prevent the spread of any communicable disease. 7 Unfortunately in the case of anthrax only too often the very first indication of the existence of the disease is the sudden death in the pasture or byre of an apparently healthy beast, or possibly of one or more sheep. Nevertheless, the importance of being able to recognise any early indications is very great, because an im- mediate and careful examination should at once be made of the stock on the farm, and suspicious cases isolated from the rest. The stock-man may notice that one or two animals tend to keep away from the others. They look dull and cease feeding, and possibly shivering may be observed. In horses swelling of the throat may occur, and in some places there is discharge of blood from the orifices. Death follows the appearance of these symptoms in a few hours, and often with startling suddenness. Cattle die rapidly, but sheep, though rapidly contracting the disease, do not as a rule die so suddenly. 200 INFECTIVE DISEASES. The characteristic sign after death is enlargement of the spleen to three or four times its natural size. It is not only enlarged, but extremely soft and dark in colour. Blood spots are visible on the internal organs generally, and the intestine often contains a quantity of blood. The examination of a drop of blood will show under the microscope the characteristic bacilli. It is, however, quite unnecessary to make an elaborate post-mortem examination in order to satisfy oneself whether the disease is really anthrax or not. If an animal has died suddenly and has created a suspicion of anthrax, all that it is necessary to do is to cut cff an ear—or a foot in the case of a sheep-—and make a cover-glass preparation at the first opportunity. A farmer with a case of anthrax must be made to realise the fact that an enormous quantity of poisonous material has to ke dealt with. In fact, an infected animal is more dangerous when dead than alive. The owner or person in charge must immediately notify to a police constable the existence, or even a suspicion of the existence, of the disease. Prompt measures must be taken to destroy the carcass and all traces of the blood, and thus to reduce to a minimum the chance of the disease spreading to the rest of the stock, and of creating fresh outbreaks in the future. Every possible precaution must be taken to prevent the blood of the dead animal from contaminating the pasture, byre, or water supply. The rest of the stock should be removed from the pasture or cowshed where the disease has broken out. It is desirable to give a complete change of food and water, and the whole of the stock should be examined every day for a week, and any animals showing a rise of temperature should at once be isolated from the rest. Preventive inoculation has been recommended to protect the rest of the stock, but there is not sufficient evidence of the safety of the process to lead to the adoption of this treatment. Animals ready for the butcher may be removed from the risk of infection by immediate slaughter. To disinfect the pasture the best plan is a heavy top-dressing of lime, and after six weeks stock may be readmitted, though not without some risk. If year after year cases of anthrax occur on a particular pasture, the most obvious precaution is to keep stock from it altogether and convert it into arable land. As roots grown on anthrax- infected soil have been known to convey the disease, the wisest course if we have to deal with a small field or comparatively small tract of land is to throw it out of cultivation or to plant it with trees. ANTHRAX. 201 DisposAL OF THE CARCASS. The surest method to render harmless all the bacilli which exist in the carcass is burning, but cremation offers practical difficulties, especially if several carcasses have to be destroyed. In the case of an animal dying in a town, the local conditions may render it best to adopt destruction by burning or by means of chemicals. In such a case the carcass should be covered with quicklime, and then taken, in charge of an officer of the Local Authority, to a horse-slaughterer’s or knacker’s-yard, and destroyed by exposure to a high temperature, or by chemical agents especially in the vicinity of chemical works. Under the usual circumstances of death occurring on a farm, fortunately the simple plan of burial, with the addition of lime or other chemical agents, is perfectly efficacious, and even without the use of chemicals if the carcass has been left unopened, as the bacilli die rapidly if air is excluded. Some experiments carried out by M‘Fadyean clearly indicate the importance of leaving the carcass unopened. On July 16th a sheep was infected with anthrax by feeding it with a virulent culture. Five days later it died, and a microscopic examina- tion of blood from the ear, immediately after death, showed very many anthrax bacilli. The carcass was left unskinned and unopened until July 27th, when the various organs were cut out of the chest and abdomen and placed in a tin box. The box was then buried at a depth of about two feet in garden earth, and left there undisturbed until February 15th, when it was exhumed. The organs had become con- verted into adipocere, and this was thoroughly mixed up with water and administered to a sheep. The sheep remained perfectly healthy. In another experiment a rabbit was inoculated with anthrax on June 1st. It died on June 3rd, and blood from the ear contained the bacilli. The rabbit was left unopened for three days, and then placed in a flower pot and buried in garden earth at a depth of two feet. It was exhumed on February 15th. The tissues were all destroyed by putrefaction, and the earth in contact with the bones was administered to a sheep without conveying the disease or producing any ill effects. Thus, in the first experiment, the lungs and the intestines, in which spore formation was most likely to occur, were used as a test, and in the second experiment the entire carcass. In both cases there was destruction or disappearance of the bacilli, and these tests, therefore, confirm in a very marked way the opinion that prompt burial of the unopened carcass is a perfectly safe plan to adopt. 202 INFECTIVE DISEASES. If an animal has died in a meadow, a pit six feet deep should be dug close to the carcass, and if quicklime can be procured with- out delay the carcass should be buried with a layer about a foot in depth beneath it and with about the same quantity to cover it, and the pit filled up with the excavated soil. If there are any traces of blood where the animal lay, the contaminated ground should be covered with quicklime or drenched with strong carbolic acid, and the whole of the site of burial fenced off for six months. If an animal dies near a brook or stream then the carcass must be removed for burial to a sufficient distance to prevent any reasonable probability of contamination of the water. If death has occurred in the byre, the carcass must be removed to the nearest and most convenient spot for burial, any fodder or litter which may have been in contact with the deceased animal must be destroyed, and the shed and cart and any utensils, hurdles, etc., disinfected. For the latter purpose thorough scouring with water and then washing with limewash is recommended. The limewash should be prepared immediately before use, and four ounces of chloride of lime, or half a pint of commercial carbolic acid, be added to each gallon of limewash. The following is an illustration of the value of preventive measures based upon a knowledge of the exact nature of the disease. A farm on the banks of the Yeo was repeatedly attacked by anthrax. One morning two sheep died, and other cases followed. The farmer learnt that his predecessor had buried cattle which had died of anthrax on the very spot where the sheep were folded. He removed his flock, and had no further losses among the sheep, but he continued to lose cattle grazing in the pastures by the river. These pastures were occasionally flooded by the Yeo. Another farmer in the same locality heavily manured a field, and shortly afterwards anthrax broke out in a most deadly form on his farm. What was the cause of these mysterious outbreaks? The explanation was forthcoming, and prevention an easy matter. The river Yeo received the washings from the wool factories at Yeovil, and the pastures were contaminated by anthrax spores in the deposit which was left behind when the flood subsided. In the second instance, it was found that the manure used for dressing the pasture consisted of a quantity of refuse from the wool factories. Infected wool from foreign countries is one of the principal sources of the disease in this country, and the remedy is to insist upon the factories destroying their refuse instead of its being allowed to contaminate the rivers or to be sold as manure. ANTHRAX. 203 So long as this source of the disease was unknown anthrax continued to be spread through the agency of the wool factories. Anthrax spores may also be introduced with foreign oats, hay, and manure, so that it is almost impossible absolutely to prevent the importation of the disease; but the danger of its unlimited extension and disastrous losses can be minimised, and the com- munication of the disease to man and to swine entirely avoided by simple precautions. ANTHRAX IN SWINE. The occurrence of anthrax in swine is a subject upon which there has long been considerable diversity of opinion. Some of the Fic. 99.—ANTHRAXx In Swine. From a photograph taken during life, showing a swollen condition of the neck and throat six days after ingestion of part of the viscera of a bullock which had died from anthrax. earliest writers on the diseases of animals speak of outbreaks of anthrax among swine, but whether any or all of these outbreaks were examples of true anthrax has long been a matter of un- certainty; for it is well known that diseases quite distinct were included under the name anthrax. Menschel states that in an outbreak in which twenty-four persons were attacked with malignant pustule, many of them from eating the flesh of beasts suffering from anthrax, pigs which were fed on the same flesh also became affected, and a woman who ate some of the diseased pork was subsequently ill. Roche-Lubin, while apparently accepting the occurrence of anthrax in swine, taught that the pig resisted inoculation with the blood of a different species. 204 INFECTIVE DISEASES. In this country accounts have been published from time to time of a fatal disease in pigs induced by eating the flesh of animals which had died of what was described as ‘‘ blood-poisoning.” Some very striking cases occurred in the practice of Mr. Wilson, of Berkhampstead, and were reported in the Veterinarian. A farmer consulted Mr. Wilson respecting an illness with which his pigs were affected, stating that two or three were dead and many others seriously ill. They were strong hogs, ranging from six to nine months old. On inquiry it was ascertained that the farmer had lost a beast suddenly about a week previously, that the carcass had been opened in the yard, and the viscera thrown to the pigs. Mr. Wilson expressed the belief that the disease was anthrax, and stated that he found the pigs exhibiting many of the symptoms observable in cattle, with the additional one of enlargement round the throat from infiltration of a yellow fluid causing discoloration of the skin. Also, in the reports of the Agricultural Department of the Privy Council thirteen pigs were reported as suffering from anthrax in 1886, and one hundred and fifty-nine in 1887. But the question arose whether the disease in the pigs was genuine anthrax or septic poisoning. Williams says: ‘The flesh of animals which have died or have been killed whilst suffering from the disease [anthrax] should not be used as food either for men, pigs, or dogs, as it is apt to cause death by blood poisoning”; and Steel writes: ‘‘ Pigs, dogs, and poultry should not be allowed to feed on blood, flesh, and ejecta of anthrax victims,” but no statement is made as to the nature of the illness produced. No doubt these writers have been greatly influenced by the opinion of many bacteriologists, for Toussaint maintained that pigs could not be infected with anthrax, and a similar view was at one time upheld in this country by Klein, who stated that pigs were very insusceptible. In Germany also, pigs have been credited with an immunity from this disease. In the face of these conflicting statements the author carried out a series of experiments in order to ascertain the nature of the disease in swine resulting from the ingestion of the offal of animals which had died of anthrax; and the result of inoculation with blood _ of animals which had died of anthrax, and with pure cultivations of the Bacillus anthracis. As a result of these experiments genuine anthrax was produced in swine (a) by feeding them with anthrax offal; (0) by injection of blood of a bullock which had died of anthrax; (¢) by passing ANTHRAX. 205 bacilli through the guinea-pig, and transmitting them to swine by injection of blood from the spleen ; (d) by injecting a pure cultiva- tion of the anthrax bacillus; (e) and lastly, the anthrax bacillus was isolated from swine in which the disease was accidentally induced on a farm, and the disease reproduced by inoculation of guinea-pigs and mice with blood from the spleen. The Author's Conclusions.—Swine of all ages can be affected with anthrax. If the disease is induced by ingestion of anthrax offal, the tonsils are ulcerated, and constitute the point of access of the bacilli to the blood. In such cases the characteristic symptom is Fic. 100.—ANTHRAX IN Swine. From a photograph taken post-mortem. Death occurred four days after the ingestion of offal from a bullock which had died of anthrax, and there was well-marked cedema of the throat, cheeks, and eyelids. enormous swelling around the throat. If the disease is induced by hypodermic injection, the same cedematous infiltration of the tissues oceurs at the place selected for inoculation. Death may occur in twenty-four hours, or not until after five or six days. There is a rapid rise of temperature, usually a rash-like discoloration of the skin, sometimes loss of power over the limbs, and general weakness and disinclination to move; the animal may le helplessly on its belly, and utter plaintive cries when disturbed. At the post- mortem the most characteristic feature is the gelatinous edema which, in the case of ingestion of offal, is found around the throat. There is usually congestion of all the organs and engorgement of 206 INFECTIVE DISEASES. the heart and large vessels, fluid in the cavities of the chest and abdomen, and enlargement and hemorrhage into the lymphatic glands. There is in some cases inflammation of the intestines with submucous and subserous hemorrhages. The spleen may be normal in size, pale and flabby, and the liver only slightly congested and friable; in other cases the condition is characteristic, the spleen is the seat of hemorrhage, causing more or less local enlargement, which is superficially of a deep purple colour; the liver may also be greatly congested, very friable, and marked with purple patches. The examination of the bloodof the heart and spleen for anthrax bacilli must be carried out with great perseverance and discrimi- nation, as they are present only in small numbers, and in some cases have given place entirely to septic organisms. Inoculation with the blood will produce either typical anthrax, or malignant cedema or some other form of septicemia. Possibly in the cases arising from ingestion of offal the ulcerated condition of the throat affords a nidus and a means of access for septic organisms. It is also well known that blood in a state of putrefaction may contain the bacillus of malignant cdema. In the presence of putrefactive organisms the anthrax bacillus rapidly disappears. If, therefore, inoculation of guinea-pigs or mice is used as a test for ascertaining the nature of an outbreak in swine, it must not be concluded, if Pasteur’s or some other form of septicemia result, that the disease was not anthrax, while, on the other hand, the discovery of the anthrax bacillus in the blood of the pig, or the production of anthrax in guinea-pigs or mice, is positive evidence as to the nature of the original disease. Peuch, in France, had obtained similar results by injecting pigs with anthrax blood and anthrax cultures. He also carried out some interesting experiments bearing on public health. The leg of a pig which had died of anthrax was covered with pounded sea-salt. Previously to the curing, a slice of the flesh was squeezed in a meat- press, and the liquid thus obtained was employed for inoculation. The animals inoculated died of typical anthrax. In six weeks the curing was considered to be completed, and a slice was cut from the ham and soaked in filtered water. The juice was extracted in the meat-press, and employed for the inoculation of four guinea-pigs and three rabbits. Slight swelling and a certain amount of redness at the seat of inoculation were the only results. A few drops of the muscle-juice were added to sterilised broth, and produced a mixed cultivation of micrococci and motile bacilli. A rabbit and two guinea-pigs inoculated with the cultivation remained quite healthy. ANTHRAX. 207 These experiments demonstrated that salting destroys the viru- lence of the flesh of pigs which have died of anthrax, but in order to obtain this result the salting must be thoroughly carried out. If the process be incomplete the flesh is still virulent. Thus the leg of a pig salted for only fourteen days furnished a juice which possessed a certain amount of virulence. Out of three inoculated rabbits, one died in ninety-seven hcurs of anthrax, and the others recovered. Three guinea-pigs all succumbed, and a fourth guinea- pig inoculated with a cultivation from the muscle-juice also died. Peuch considers that there is danger in consuming flesh which has not been thoroughly cured. As it has been clearly shown that pigs may become infected with anthrax, these animals come under the Anthrax Order of 1886. This provides for the disposal of the carcass; and although Peuch has shown that salting destroys the virulence of the flesh of pigs which have died of anthrax, there can be no doubt that it is quite right that such animals should be condemned as unfit for food. Further, the recognition of the occurrence of true anthrax in swine is an additional reason for condemning the Continental practice of eating hams, sausages, etc., in the raw state. Indeed, the viru- lence of anthrax flesh suggests one possible explanation of some of those obscure cases of meat poisoning which have occurred in this country. It is possible that the flesh of animals which had died of anthrax was used in the preparation of sausages, pork-pies, etc., and that the cooking was not sufficient to deprive the meat of its poisonous properties. Equine ANTHRAX. Veterinary authorities have described “ Anthrax in the Horse,” but it remains to be seen whether there are not two or more affec- tions included under this heading. Fleming says: “The most acute form of anthrax, the apoplectic, is somewhat rare in the horse, and has perhaps been most frequently observed on the Continent. Though cases are recorded, but through an error in diagnosis, under other names in the veterinary literature of this country, I have only witnessed two cases in England ; though during the intense summer heat in the north of China I had several.” The question to which the author is in a position to give a definite answer is, whether the disease produced by the Bacillus anthracis ever occurs in the horse. Whether that has been pre- viously determined, at any rate in this country, it is difficult to say. 208 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Fleming in describing the pathological anatomy of anthrax in the horse, says: ‘The spleen is double and treble its ordinary volume ; its surface is sometimes bosselated by tumours; its texture is softened and transformed into a viscid reddish-brown or violet mass, and the mesenteric glands are infiltrated. The blood in it has been found to contain bacteridia when examined soon after death.” Williams, who says that “anthrax in the horse rarely occurs in this country,” adds, that it is prevalent in India, and is there termed ‘‘Loodiana disease,” and in Africa ‘ Horse-sick- ness.” But ‘ Horse-sickness,” from recent researches, is certainly not anthrax. Williams described a case which occurred in 1879 as one of anthrax. A carriage-horse died suddenly while in harness ; “a large black tumour was found in the lungs, and the pulmonary arteries were engorged with black tarry blood, which, when micro- scopically examined, was found to contain the bacilli in a most perfect form, and very numerous indeed.” In 1884, an outbreak of charbonous fever occurred in Liverpool. Williams proceeded to investigate the outbreak, and found two horses dead on his arrival, one having died only a few hours previously. The bacilli from the blood in this case are figured, and the following statement made : “‘ These bacilli seem to differ from those of splenic fever, being rather smaller in diameter, and so far as my observations go, multiply by fission only, not developing spores.” On the other hand, the author investigated the blood of a mare which was supposed to have died of anthrax, and on examining cover-glass preparations of the blood, it was found to contain large numbers of bacilli with the characteristic microscopical appearances of anthrax bacilli. To place the question beyond any possible doubt a number of tubes of agar-agar were inoculated. These, after three days in the incubator, produced typical cultivations, and on examina- tion by the ordinary methods and by double-staining, yielded very beautiful preparations of filaments and spores. At the same time that the cultivations were prepared, two mice were inoculated at the root of the tail with a trace of the blood. Two days afterwards they were both found dead, and with the characteristic post-mortem appearances, spleen much enlarged, and anthrax bacilli in enormous numbers. There can be no doubt that true anthrax occurs in the horse ; and the author, in 1887, recommended that it should be scheduled under the Contagious Diseases (Animals) Act, and equine anthrax has been included in the Anthrax Order of 1895. More recently Pemberthy has described cases of equine anthrax ANTHRAX. 209 which he believes to have been the result of infection from feeding on foreign oats or imported hay. Preventive Inoculation.—The prevention of anthrax by means of protective inoculation or vaccination has been attempted on a very large scale in France, and it is claimed that the results have been very beneficial to agriculture in that country :— Animals Mortality. Total | No. of| Vacci- Total |Average No. of | Veteri-/ nated Joss loss A Year. Animals | nary after After | After | nuying| Total. | per | before Vacci- | Re- | Receipt | ist 2nd | seat oF cent. | Vacci- nated. | ports. of Vacci- | Vacci- Year. nation. Reports. | nation. | nation. 1882 | 270,040 112 | 243,199 756 847 | 1,037 2,640 | 1:08 | 10% 1883 268,505 103 | 193,119 436 272 784° 1,492 | 0-77 1884 | 316,553 109 231,693 770 | 444 | 1 3,083 2,247 | 0-97 1885 | 342,040 144 | 280,107 884 735 990 2,609 | 0°93 1886 | 313,288 88 | 202,064 652 303 514 1,469 | 0°72 1887 | 293,572 107 | 187,811 718 737 968 2,423 | 1:29 Sheep( 1888 | 269,574 50 | 101,834 149 181 300 630 | 0°62 1889 | 239,974 48 88,483 238 285 501 1,024 | 1°16 1890 223,611 69 69,865 331 261 244 836 | 1:20 1891 218,629 65 53,640 181 102 77 360 | 0°67 1892 | 259,696 70 | . 63,125 319 183 126 628 | 0:99 \1893 | 281,333 30 73,939 | 284 56 224 514 | 0°69 Total . | 3,296,815 990 | 1,788,677 4,406 | 6,798 | 16,872 | 0°94 5,668 3 (0°32%) | (0°24%) | (0°38%) (1882 35,654 127 22,916 22 12 48 82 | 0°35 5% 1883 26,453 130 20,501 17 1 46 64 | 0°31 1884 33,900 139 22,616 20 13 52 85 | 0°37 1885 34,000 192 21,073 32 8 67 107 | 0°50 1886 39,154 185 22,113 18 vd 39 64 | 0°29 Oxen : 1887 48,484 148 28,083 23 18 68 109 | 0°39 or 1888 34,464 61 10,920 8 4 35 47 | 0°48 Cows 1889 32,251 68 11,610 14°]. 7 31 52 | 0°45 1890 33,965 xa 11,057 5 4 14 23 | 0°21 1891 40,736 68 10,476 6 4 4 14 | 0-18 1892 |, 41,609 71 9,757 8 3 15 26 | 0:26 4 1 13 18 | 0°18 1893 38,154 45 9,840 438,824 | 1,255 | 200,962 177 82 432 (0°09% ) | (0°04% ) | (0°21%) 210 INFECTIVE DISEASES. The vaccine is supplied, by a company in Paris, in two strengths. Reports are supplied by veterinary surgeons, and the results have been tabulated by Chamberland and published, and commented upon by Cope in a report to the Board of Agriculture (1894), The column of deaths, in the above table, includes the animals which died from the vaccination, and those which died from natural infection. It is claimed that the percentage of losses has been reduced from 10 per cent. to ‘94 per cent. in sheep, and from 5 per cent. to 34 per cent. in cattle. Cope, in the report just referred to, regards these conclusions as somewhat fallacious, because in order to prove that the animals inoculated received immunity, it should be shown that they were subsequently exposed to the risks of natural infection. This was not the case. But a report obtained from the Bureau in Paris gives the actual number of animals on each of the infected farms, and the number which have died of the disease ; and when compared with Chamberland’s statistics it is evident that nine-tenths were not on farms where the disease appeared—at least, during 1889-92—-and that the deaths from anthrax on those farms where it was reported to exist were, if anything, higher than they were supposed to be prior to the introduction of the system of vaccination ; and in spite of the immense number of animals vaccinated the official returns obtained from Paris, by Cope, indicate that the mortality from anthrax, calculated in the ordinary way, remains as high as ever. Anthrax in France. No, of = % : eur, | Outbrenis re-| NE, Satan | No paphion | Perogtago of 1889 618 22,599 1,458 65 1890 536 24,073 1,123 47 1891 570 21,356 14 68 1892 607 28,199 1,58] 56 CATTLE. 1889 _ 6,059 700 116 1890 _ 5,365 Ti1 Met 1891 _ 7,299 849 11:6 1892 = 5,058 804 15°9 SHEEP. F 1889 _ 16,540 755 46 1890 —_ 18,708 352 bey 1891 5 14,057 545 42 1892 — 23,141 T17 B4 ANTHRAX. 211 In Germany, veterinary and agricultural authorities agree that the results have not met with the success which has been claimed for vaccination in France. Experiments were undertaken for the German Government, and in one set of experiments twenty-five sheep were vaccinated with the first vaccine without an accident, but three died five days after the second vaccine. In another experiment two hundred and fifty-one sheep were vaccinated with only one death, and subsequent inoculation with virulent anthrax proved that they had immunity. Six head of cattle were vaccinated without any loss, and six more were used for a control experiment. Inoculation with virulent virus proved fatal to the control animals, but the vaccinated were pro- tected. Thess, with other animals similarly vaccinated, amounting in all to two hundred and sixty-six sheep and eighty-three head of cattle, were then turned out to graze on infected pastures with two hundred and sixteen unvaccinated sheep as a control experiment. Within five months four of the vaccinated and eight of the un- vaccinated sheep died of anthrax, and one of the vaccinated and one of the unvaccinated cattle. The result of these experiments led to the following conclusions :— (1) That the first vaccine is mild and harmless. (2) That the second vaccine, even in the hand: of experts, is dangerous and often fatal. (3) That sheep are more affected than cattle by the injections, exhibiting fever and other indications of illness. (4) That cattle and sheep which recover from the vaccination have an immunity against authrax when tested by experimental inoculation. (5) That vaccinated cattle and sheep tested by exposure to natural infection by grazing on infected pastures contract the disease in the ordinary way. (6) That the time for which immunity is conferred has not been determined. In England, Klein tested the vaccine, with the result that animals either succumbed to the vaccine, or to virulent anthrax after recovery from the vaccine. Protective inoculation has also been employed in a few instances by leading agriculturists, but with very unsatis- factory results. Stamping-out System.—In Germany the conclusion is that the safest. measures are destruction of carcasses and disinfection, and that inoculation will have no effect in lessening the loss caused by this disease. 212 INFECTIVE DISEASES. In England the stamping-out system has been advocated for many years, and is still regarded as the only reliable means for suppressing the disease ; and the possible introduction of the disease among healthy stock by vaccination, and especially in localities in which anthrax is unknown, would be contrary to the principles upon which the system is based. These principles are illustrated by the following extracts from the Anthrax Order of 1895 :— NortIFICATION. 2.—(1) Every person having or having had in his possession or under his charge, an animal affected with or suspected of anthrax, shall, with all practicable speed, give notice of the fact of the animal being so affected or suspected, to a constable of the police force for the police area wherein the anima] so affected or suspected is or was. (2) The constable shall forthwith give information of the receipt by him of the notice to an Inspector of the Local Authority, who shall forth- with report the same to the Local Authority. (3) The Inspector of the Local Authority shall forthwith give information of the receipt by him of the notice to the Medical Officer of Health of the Sanitary District in which the affected or suspected animal is or was. Duty of Inspector to act immediately. 3. An Inspector of a Local Authority on receiving in any manner whatsoever information of the supposed existence of anthrax, or having reasonable ground to suspect the existence of anthrax, shall proceed with all practicable speed to the place where such disease, according to the information received by him, exists, or is suspected to exist, and shall there and elsewhere put in force and discharge the powers and duties conferred and imposed on him as Inspector, by or under the Act of 1894 and this Order. Public Warning as to Existence of Disease. 4.—(1) The Local Authority may, if they think fit, give public warning by placards, advertisement, or otherwise, of the existence of anthrax in any shed, stable, building, field, or other place, with or without any particular description thereof, as they think fit, and may continue to do so during the existence of the disease, and, in case of a shed, stable, building, or other like place, until the same has been cleansed and dis- infected in accordance with this Order. (2) It shall not be lawful for any person (without authority or excuse) to remove or deface any such placard. Wilk of Diseased or Suspected Cow not to be Removed. 5. Where anthrax exists or has existed in any shed, stable, building, or other place, it shall not be lawful to remove from such shed, stable, ANTHRAX. 213 building, or other place the milk of any cow which is affected with or suspected of anthrax. Removal of Dung or other Things. 6. It shall not be: lawful for any person to send or carry, or cause to be sent or carried, on a railway, canal, river, or inland navigation, or in a coasting vessel, or on a highway or thoroughfare, any dung, fodder, or litter that has been in any place in contact with or used about a diseased or suspected animal, except with a Licence of the Local Authority for the District in which such place is situate, on a certificate of an Inspector of the Local Authority certifying that the thing moved has been, so far as practicable, disinfected. Disposal of Carcasses. 7.—(1) The carcass of an animal which at the time of its death was affected with or suspected of anthrax shall be disposed of by the Local Authority as follows :— (i.) Either the Local Authority shall cause the carcass to be buried as soon as possible in its skin in some convenient or suitable place removed from any dwelling house and at such a distance from any well or watercourse as will preclude any risk of the contamination of the water therein, and at a depth of not less than six feet below the surface of the earth, having a layer of lime not less than one foot deep beneath, and a similar layer of lime above, the carcass ; (ii.) Or the Local Authority may, if authorised by Licence of the Board, cause the carcass to be destroyed, under the inspection of the Local Authority, in the mode following: The carcass shall be disinfected, and shall then be taken, in charge of an officer of the Local Authority, to a horse-slaughterer’s or knacker’s-yard approved for the purpose by the Board, or other place so approved, and shall be there destroyed by exposure to a high temperature, or by chemical agents. (2) With the view to the execution of the foregoing provisions of this Article the Local Authority may make such Regulations as they think fit for prohibiting or regulating the removal of carcasses, or for securing the burial or destruction of the same. (3) Before a carcass is removed for burial or destruction under this Article it shall be covered with quicklime. In no case shall the skin of the carcass be cut, nor shall anything be done to cause the effusion of blood. (4) A Local Authority may cause or allow a carcass to be taken into the District of another Local Authority to be buried or destroyed, with the previous consent of that Local Authority, but not otherwise. Digging Up. 8. It shall not be lawful for any person, except with the Licence of the Board or permission in writing of an Inspector of the Board, to dig t 214 INFECTIVE DISEASES. up, or cause to be dug up, the carcass of any animal that has been buried. Disinfection in Case of Anthrar. 9.—(1) The Local Authority shall at their own expense cause to be cleansed and disinfected in the mode provided by this Article— (a) All those parts of any shed, stable, building, or other place in which a diseased or suspected animal has been kept or has died or been slaughtered ; (b) Every utensil, pen, hurdle, or other thing used for or about any diseased or suspected animal ; (c) Every van, cart, or other vehicle used for carrying any diseased or suspected animal on land otherwise than on a railway. (2) The mode of the cleansing and disinfection of such shed, stable, building, or other place, or the part thereof, shall be as follows :— (i.) All those parts aforesaid of the shed, stable, building, or other place shall be swept out, and all litter, dung, or other thing that has been in contact with, or used about, any diseased or suspected animal shall be effectually removed therefrom ; then (ii.) The floor and all other parts of the shed, stable, building, or other place with which the diseased or suspected animal or its droppings or any discharge from the mouth or nostrils of the animal has come in contact, shall be, so far as practicable, thoroughly washed or scrubbed or scoured with water; then (iii.) The same parts of the shed, stable, building, or other place shall be washed over with limewash made of freshly burnt lime and water, and containing in each gallon of limewash four ounces of chloride of lime or half a pint of commercial carbolic acid, the limewash being prepared immediately before use ; (iv.) Except that where any place as aforesaid is not capable of being so cleansed and disinfected, it shall be sufficient if such place be cleansed and disinfected so far as practicable. (3) The mode of the cleansing and disinfection of such utensil, pen, hurdle, or other thing, and such van, cart, or other vehicle aforesaid, shall be as follows :— (i.) Each utensil, pen, hurdle, or other thing, van, cart, or other vehicle, shall be thoroughly scraped, and all litter, dung, sawdust, or other thing shall be effectually removed therefrom ; then (ii.) It shall be thoroughly washed or scrubbed or scoured with water ; then (iii.) It shall be washed over with limewash made of freshly burnt lime and water, and containing in each gallon of limewash four ounces of chloride of lime or half a pint of commercial carbolic acid, the limewash being prepared immediately before use. (4) All litter, dung, or other thing that has been removed from any such shed, stable, building, place, van, cart, or vehicle as aforesaid, shall be forthwith burnt or otherwise destroyed or disinfected to the satisfac- tion of an Inspector of the Local Authority. ANTHRAX. 215 (5) The Local Authority may make such Regulations as they think fit for the purpose of carrying out the provisions of this Article. Occupiers to give Facilities for Cleansing. 10.—(1) Where the power of causing any place, thing, or vehicle to be cleansed and disinfected under this Order is exercised by a Local Authority, the owner and occupier and person in charge of the place, thing, or vehicle shall give all reasonable facilities for that purpose. (2) Any person failing to comply with the provisions of this Article shall be deemed guilty of an offence against the Act of 1894. Regulations of Local Authority as to Movement of Animals, Fodder, ete, 11. A Local Authority may make such Regulations as they think fit for the following purposes, or any of them :— (a) For prohibiting or regulating the movement of any diseased or suspected animal into or out of any shed, stable, building, field, or other place, or any part thereof ; (5) For prohibiting or regulating the movement of any animal into or ont of any shed, stable, building, field, or other place, or any part thereof, in which there is or has been any diseased or suspected animal ; and (c) For regulating the removal out of any shed, stable, building, field, or other place of any fodder, litter, or other thing that has been in contact with or used for or about any diseased or suspected animal ; but nothing in any such Regulation shall authorise movement in contravention of any provision of any Order of the Board for the time being in force ; and a Regulation under paragraph (b) of this Article shall operate so long only as any animal which in the judgment of the Local Authority is diseased or suspected remains in the shed, stable, building, field, or other place to which the Regulation refers, and, in case of a shed, stable, building, or other like place, until the same has been cleansed and disinfected in accordance with this Order. Slaughter in Anthrax and Compensation. 12.—(1) A -Local Authority may if they thmk fit cause to be slaughtered— _ (a) Any animal affected with anthrax or suspected of being so affected ; and (6) Any animal being or having been in the same field, shed, or other place, or in the same herd or flock or otherwise in contact with animals affected with anthrax, or being or having been in the opinion of the Local Authority in any way exposed to the infection of anthrax. (2) The slaughter of animals under this Article shall be conducted in such mode as will so far as possible prevent effusion of blood. 216 INFECTIVE DISEASES. (3) The Local Authority shall out of the local rate pay compensation as follows for animals slaughtered under this Article :— (a) Where the animal slaughtered was affected with anthrax the compensation shall be one-half of the value of the animal immediately before it became so affected ; and (b) In every other case the compensation shall be the value of the animal immediately before it was slaughtered. (4) Provided, that if the owner of the animal gives notice in writing to the Local Authority, or their Inspector or other officer, that he objects to the animal being slaughtered, it shall not be lawful for the Local Authority to cause that animal to be slaughtered except with the further special authority of the Board first obtained. Keeping of Swine in Slaughter-houses. 16. It shall not be lawful for any person, in any case in which the slaughter of any animal is authorised or required by this Order, to use for such slaughter any slaughter-house in which swine are kept. Whether an anthrax virus can be obtained which is absolutely incapable of creating centres of infection, and can therefore be recommended with safety for vaccination as an auxiliary and voluntary measure, is a matter for further investigation. CHAPTER XV. QUARTER-EVIL.—MALIGNANT (EDEMA.—RAG-PICKERS’ SEPTICEMIA.-— SEPTICEMIA OF GUINEA-PIGS.—-SEPTICZMIA OF MICE. QUARTER-EVIL in cattle, malignant cedema, and rag-pickers’ septicaemia in man, septicemia in .guinea-pigs, and septicemia in mice, are all varieties of septicemia produced by bacilli. An account of quarter-evil, malignant cedema, and rag-pickers’ septicemia may appropriately follow the chapter on anthrax, as they have certain similarities to that disease. They are, however, not only distinct from anthrax, but must be carefully distinguished from each other. In connection with these forms of bacillary septicemia in man and cattle we may study bacillary septicemia in small animals. QUARTER-EVIL. The disease known in this country as quarter-evil or black-leg is identical with the French Charbon symptomatique and the German Rauschbrand. Symptomatic anthrax in a very slight degree resembles anthrax. The disease occurs usually in young cattle from a few weeks to about twelve months old, and attacks sheep and horses, but not swine or poultry. It is characterised by the develop- ment of an emphysematous swelling of the subcutaneous tissue and muscles, generally over the hind quarter. Infected animals cease feeding, the temperature rises, lameness supervenes, and death occurs in about forty-eight hours. The tumour on incision is found to contain a quantity of dark sanguineous fluid, with characteristic bacilli. Bacillus of Quarter-evil (Bucille du charbon symptomatique, Rauschbrand bacillus)—Motile rods with rounded ends, 3 to 5 p in length, +5 to ‘6 » in breadth. Spore-formation present. The spores are oval, generally situated near the extremity of the rods, and when fully developed considerably exceed the rods in diameter. 217 218 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Involution forms are freely developed in old cultures, and in cultures made in unsuitable media. Fic. 101. Bacttrt or QuARTER-EVIL x 1000. From an agar culture (FRANKEL and P¥re1FrERr). liquefaction commences. In the depth of nutrient gelatine the growth occurs in two or three days at 20° to 25° C. towards the lower part of the track of the inoculating needle. The gelatine slowly liquefies, and there is considerable formation of gas with the development of a peculiar odour. Spore- formation occurs freely in cultures, but not in the blood of infected animals until after death. Guinea-pigs inoculated with a pure- culture, or with spore-bearing threads, die in twenty-four to thirty-six hours. An em- physematous infiltration with sanguineous serum is produced at the seat of inoculation, and the surrounding muscles are of a dark colour. The internal organs are more or less congested. The bacilli are found in the local exudation and in the surrounding tissue, and some hours after death in The bacilli possess numerous flagella, and their power of movement at once distinguishesthem from anthrax bacilli. They can be cultivated in the ordinary media in the absence of oxy- gen, but more readily with the addition of grape-sugar or glyce- rine. Radiating fila- ments grow out from the more or less spher- ical colonies directly Fic. 102. Pure-CuLTure oF BAcILLi OF QUARTER-EVIL IN GRAPE-SUGAR GELA- TINE (FRANKEL and PFEIFFER). QUARTER-EVIL. 219 increasing numbers in the blood of the heart and in the internal organs. Quarter-evil and malignant edema, though possessing points of resemblance, are distinct diseases. Not only do the bacilli in the two cases differ in minute morphological and biological details, but Kitasato showed that guinea-pigs rendered immune against virulent quarter-evil had no immunity against malignant edema. Protective Inoculation.—Arloing, Cornevin and Thomas have producel immunity by inoculating healthy cattle with a small quantity of the fluid from the tumour of an infected animal. Recovery takes place, and subsequent inoculation-with a strong dose is without effect. Similar results may be obtained by intravenous injection of a few drops of the exudation. For general application of the system of protective inoculation, the virulent liquid and affected muscles are dried at 32° to 35°C., and the dried mass triturated with water and heated to 100°C. This is used as the first vaccine. An infusion similarly prepared, but only heated to 80° C., forms the second vaccine. The dry powder is a convenient form for general distribution, and {4 of a gramme is triturated with 5 ce. of water, and 4 cc. is injected into each animal. In about ten days the second vaccine is employed, and cattle so treated are said to have a complete immunity from fatal doses. The place chosen for the injection is the under surface of the tail, a short distance from the extremity. The hair is clipped at this spot, and the point of a syringe is pushed in between the skin and the bone, and the vaccine slowly injected. Roux and Chamberland produced immunity by inoculation of filtered cultures. Cultures in broth were deprived of bacilli by heating to 115° C., or by filtration through porcelain. Guinea-pigs were inoculated with three doses of 30 cc. at intervals of two days, and subsequently injected with a solution of virulent black-leg powder and lactic acid, which killed control animals in twenty-four hours. Kitt employed cultures on agar a fortnight old, or fresh cultures sterilised by steam for thirty minutes. It was found possible to confer immunity in oxen, sheep, and guinea-pigs against the most virulent extract. Kitt’s method has the advantage over others of only necessitating one single injection. Whether these experiments are of scientific interest rather than of practical value may be regarded as an open question. On the Continent, and especially in France, vaccination against quarter-evil has been carried out extensively ; and by comparing the 220 INFECTIVE DISEASES, mortality among the vaccinated and unvaccinated in localities where the disease commonly occurs, it has been said that the results are extremely favourable. The matter was investigated in this country by a committee of the Midland Veterinary Medical Association, and in the course of the experiments some surprising results were obtained. Six calves and four sheep were vaccinated, and five calves and two sheep were left unvaccinated as a control experiment. The seventeen animals were subsequently inoculated with virulent virus in the form of dried and powdered muscle. In forty-eight hours all the sheep died, and all the calves exhibited a swelling at the seat of inoculation. In another set of experiments, healthy calves inoculated with fresh juice from the tumour in a case of quarter-evil were not materially affected. The possibility of those calves which possess a natural immunity being classed as protected by the inoculation must be admitted, and the efficacy and safety of the process is by no means established. Matienant CEpEMA. The disease known by surgeons as progressive gangrene, gan- grenous emphysema, or surgical gangrene, has been shown by the researches of Chauveau, Arloing, Rosenbach and Babés, to be due to a bacillus identical with the microbe septique of Pasteur and the bacillus of malignant edema of Koch. The bacillus or its spores may be spread by the neglect of antiseptics. The disease occurs especially after compound fractures and gun-shot wounds. If a guinea-pig is subeutaneously inoculated with earth, putrid fluid, or hay dust, death frequently occurs in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours. At the autopsy the most characteristic symptom is a widespread subcutaneous cedema accompanied by air-bubbles. This originates from the point of inoculation, and contains a clear reddish liquid full of motile and non-motile bacilli. The internal organs are little changed, the spleen is enlarged and of a dark colour, and the lungs are hyperemic, and have hemorrhagic spots. Examined immediately after death, few or no bacilli are detected in the blood of the heart, but in that of the spleen, liver, lungs, and other organs, in the peritoneal exudation, and in and upon the serous coating of the abdominal organs, they are present in large numbers. If, on the other hand, the animal is not examined until some time after death, the bacilli are found in the blood of the heart, and distributed all over the body. Bacillus Gidematis Maligni, Koch (Pasteur’s Septicsemia),— MALIGNANT CEDEMA. 221 Rods from 3 to 3:5 w long and 1 to 1:1 » wide; they mostly lie in pairs, and then appear to be double this length. ‘The rods are rounded at their ends, and form threads which are sometimes straight, but more commonly curved. In stained preparations they have a somewhat granular appearance. They are motile, possessing flagella, and form spores. The bacilli are distinguished from anthrax bacilli by their being somewhat thinner, by their rounded ends, and by their motility. Moreover, anthrax bacilli never appear as threads in fresh blood, and are differently distributed throughout the body. They are anaerobic, and can be cultivated on blood serum and on neutral solution of Liebig’s meat extract in an atmosphere of carbonic acid. By embedding material containing bacilli in nutrient agar-agar _ aa Fic. 103. Bactiti or Matienant CEpEMA x 950. From the subcutaneous tissue of a guinea-pig. (BAUMGARTEN. ) and nutrient gelatine, characteristic cultivations are obtained. The following process may be adopted to obtain a pure cultivation. A mouse inoculated subcutaneously with dust, as a rule, dies in one to two days. It is then pinned out, back uppermost, on a slab of wood, and the hair singed with a Paquelin’s cautery from one hind leg up to the neck, across the latter, and down again to the opposite hind leg. Following the cauterised line, the skin is cut through with sterilised scissors, and the flap turned back and pinned out of the way. With curved scissors little pieces of the subcutaneous edematous tissue, in the neighbourhood of the inoculated spot, are cut out, and sunk with a platinum needle in a 1 per cent. nutrient agar-agar, or 5 per cent. nutrient gelatine. Fragments of tissue may also be embedded by the method already described for anaerobic bacteria. 222 INFECTIVE DISEASES. The inoculated tubes are placed in the incubator. In a few hours a whitish turbidity spreads out from the piece of tissue, and upwards in the needle track. Examined microscopically, the turbidity is found to be due solely to the development of the bacilli of edema. The surface exposed to the air exhibits no trace of the bacilli. To investigate the tubes microscopically, a sterilised glass tube with a capillary end may be used, with its neck plugged with sterilised cotton-wool, and provided at the mouth with a suction ball. _ The capillary end is thrust into the cultiva- tion, and a small fragment removed by aspiration. In the course of the first day the bacilli spread throughout a great part of the agar-agar in such a way that a more or less equally diffused cloudiness of the medium en- sues, with subsequent appearance of strongly marked clouds or lines of turbidity. At the same time gas-bubbles develop along the needle track, and a collection of liquid takes place, while spore-formation also commences. The following day these appearances are more marked, the opacity is more pronounced, the development of gas increases, and the liquid contains more spore-forming bacilli and nu- merous free-spores. The nutrient-gelatine cultures during the first day show no macroscopic change, but Fic. 104, Pure-currure after a few days the piece of tissue is sur- ov Bacitius or Matie-. rounded with a white halo. This gradually ae vieans aa spreads in all directions, and is apparently UGAR GELATINE (FRAN- ‘ . i , KEL and Prerrrer), beset with hairs. ‘The gelatine liquefies, and the fragment of tissue, degenerated bacilli, and spores, sink to the bottom. The cultivation is also very characteristic in a 4 per cent. nutrient agar-agar. If placed in the incubator, in a few hours a cloudiness forms around the piece of embedded tissue, which is caused by bacilli gradually spreading in all directions in the nutrient medium. Mice inoculated from these cultivations die more quickly than from the original infection from dust. On potatoes they are cultivated by introducing a piece of liver or other tissue containing the bacilli, into the interior of a sterilised potato, and incubated at 38°C. The bacillus is not deprived of its virulence by cultivation. MALIGNANT (EDEMA. 223 The spores of the cedema-bacilli appear to be very widely dis- tributed. They are found in the upper cultivated layers of the soil, in hay dust, in decomposing liquids, and especially in the bodies of suffocated animals, which are left to decompose at a high temperature. From any of these sources animals can be successfully inoculated. The bacillus is not only pathogenic in guinea-pigs, rabbits, and mice, but also in man and in farm animals, including calves but not cattle. Pure-cultures inoculated in animals produce cedema at the seat of inoculation without appreciable gas formation and without any putrefac- tive odour. The odour yf and frothy effusion resulting from the in- / oculation of earth are i due to other bacteria, + : \ which are introduced ~ eet’ f simultaneously with F ae 2 LZ. : the bacilli of malig- ee NC oN ad nant cedema. The er ee a, spleen is sometimes slightly enlarged. By a pe touching with a cover- i — glass the capsule of wie, 105. Bactzr or Matienant CEpema x 1000. the spleen, or by ex- From an agar culture (FRANKEL and P¥EIFFER). amining the serous effusion, the bacilli are found in abundance ; but if a preparation is made from the interior of the spleen or from the blood of the heart, no bacilli will be found until several hours after death. In this respect there is a marked difference from anthrax. Another differeace is shown in spore-formation, which occurs in the living body in malignant edema, but never in anthrax. Animals which recover from the disease are said to be protected. Protective Inoculation.—Roux and Chamberland produced immunity by injecting the chemical products in the filtrate obtained from cultures in broth. The serum from fatal cases will, it is said, confer immunity on other animals. There is a variety of this bacillus in soil according to Fliigge, agreeing in morphological and cultural but not in pathogenic characters. 224 INFECTIVE DISEASES. RaG-PIcKERS’ SEPTICEMIA. Rag-pickers’ disease has a resemblance to anthrax or wool-sorters’ disease. After death the spleen is found to be enlarged, the in- ternal organs are congested, and there are hemorrhages on the serous membranes. Bordoni-Uffreduzzi isolated bacilli which are quite easily distinguished from anthrax bacilli. They were found in the blood and in sections of the internal organs. Proteus hominis capsulatus.—Rods with rounded ends, singly, in pairs, and in filaments, somewhat smaller than anthrax bacilli, and often irregular in form. Spore-formation not described ; they have a well-marked capsule. Colonies are circular, appearing at first granular, and later possessing a filamentous structure. In the depth of gelatine they grow in the shape of a round-headed nail, like a culture of Friedliinder’s pneumococcus. On the surface of gelatine they form a shining white layer. On agar the growth is somewhat transparent. On potato a moist, glistening film gradually spreads over the surface. They do not liquefy blood serum, and the growth is similar to that obtained on agar. They prove fatal to mice and dogs, but rabbits and guinea-pigs are not very sus- ceptible. Dogs die usually on the second day after intravenous injection, and after death there is congestion of the internal organs and of the intestinal mucous membrane. Cidema is produced at the seat of inoculation in mice. There are hemorrhages in the lymphatic glands, and congestion of the liver and kidneys. Similar organisms have been described by Kolb and by Babés in purpura hemorrhagica. SEPTICEMIA OF GUINEA-PIGS. Guinea-pigs and mice sometimes die of septicemia, characterised by congestion of the lungs, liver, and kidneys, inflamed peritoneum, pleural and pericardial exudation, congested spleen, and congestion of the mucous and serous coats of the intestine. Klein isolated a bacillus from the blood and the internal organs in these cases. Bacillus of Septiczeemia in Guinea-pigs.—Rods with rounded ends, motile, with pleomorphic forms, cocci, short rods and filaments. Colonies appear as small, circular, white dots, which enlarge and become irregular in outline. In the depth of: gelatine a white filament develops, and on the surface the growth rapidly spreads with a crenated outline. Broth becomes turbid, and after the second day a, copious white sediment is deposited. Spore-formation not observed. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VI. Bacillus Murisepticus. Fig. 1.—From a section of a kidney of a mouse which had died after inocula- tion with a pure-cultivation of the bacillus. With moderate amplification, the white blood-corpuscles have a granular appearance, and irregular granular masses are scattered between the kidney tubules. Stained by Gram’s method with eosin. x 200. Fig. 2.—Part of the same preparation with high amplification. The granular appearances are found to be due to the presence of great numbers of extremely minute bacilli. x 1500. Belt wht avy \ BACILLUS MURISEPTICUS Vincent Brooks, Day & Son, Lith SEPTICEMIA OF MICE, 225 According to Wooldridge, the chemical products of this bacillus, separated by filtration, produce on inoculation immunity against ‘virulent bacilli. SErticam1a oF MICE. Mice inoculated with a minimum quantity of putrid fluid often die of septicemia. They rapidly sicken, their eyes inflame, their eyelids stick together, they become soporific, and death occurs in forty to sixty hours. There is slight edema at the seat of inoculation, and enlargement of the spleen ; the bacilli are found free and in the interior of white corpuscles, both in the cedematous tissue and in the blood capillaries. Bacillus of Septiczemia of Mice (Koch). —Extremely minute bacilli, *8 to 1 » long, and ‘1 to 2 » broad, and filaments. In cultivations in gelatine they do not appear to make threads, but the bacilli lie together in masses. Spores have been observed. The bacilli are probably non-motile. They are most commonly in the interior of white blood corpuscles. In these they increase, and in many cases a white blood cell is represented only by a mass of bacilli. A minimal quantity of blood containing the bacilli produces the disease if inoculated in house-mice or sparrows. Field-mice have an immunity. Rabbits and guinea-pigs inoculated in the ear suffer only from a local erythema, on a ee which disappears after five or six days, and ayayon or THE renders them for a time immune. Rabbits Bacmuvs or Szpri- inoculated in the cornea suffer from an intense ©#MIa or MIcE IN : A aa : Nutrient GELATINE. inflammation of the eyes. The bacilli form in atten tui aac plate-cultivations scarcely perceptible cloud-like specks, and in a test-tube of nutrient gelatine they form a delicately clouded cultivation along the needle track. An identical bacillus has been isolated in swine measles. 15 ‘CHAPTER XVI. SEPTICEMIA OF BUFFALOES.—SEPTIC PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CALVES.—SWINE FEVER.—-SEPTICEMIA OF DEER.—-SEPTICHMIA OF RABBITS. — FOWL CHOLERA. — FOWL ENTERITIS. — DUCK CHOLERA.—GROUSE DISEASE. THERE are several varieties of septicemia occurring naturally in buffaloes, deer, calves, and birds, and artificially induced by inocula- tion of rabbits with septic material. They are associated with bacteria which agree in their morphological and cultural characters, though in some cases differing in their pathogenic properties. As the differences between the bacteria cultivated from these different sources is not greater than the differences which, exist between the morphological, biological, and pathogenic effects of varieties of the tubercle bacillus, it will be convenient and fully justifiable to follow Hueppe and Baumgarten, and regard them as varieties of the bacillus of hemorrhagic septicemia. Errpemic Diszase oF BUFFALOES. Oreste and Armanni investigated an epidemic among herds of young buffaloes in Italy (Biiffel-seuche). The disease was extremely acute, death occurring in from twelve to twenty-four hours. It was probably identical with an epidemic disease described by Bollinger in deer. Thesymptoms were fever, rapid pulse, discharge of mucus from the nose and mouth, and a local swelling of the head and face leading to suffocation. The only marked feature after death was hemorrhagic inflammation of the small intestine. The bacilli were identical with those found by Schiitz in swine fever. Cultures inoculated in young buffaloes produced the disease. The bacilli were pathogenic to mice, guinea-pigs, rabbits, pigeons, and fowls, death taking place in from one to three days. 226 EPIDEMIC DISEASE OF DEER AND BOARS. 227, Septic PLEURO-PNEUMONIA IN CALVES. Septic pleuro-pneumonia is'a disease which attacks young calves within the first two months after their birth. Percussion and auscultation reveal lung mischief. The disease is. very rapid and fatal, death occurring on the second or third day. In the less acute cases one or more lobes of the lungs are found after death in a state of lobular and inter-lobular pneumonia. The inter-lobular connective tissue is distended with exudation, giving rise to white or yellowish bands between the inflamed lobules, which produce a marbled appearance, recalling the condition of the lungs in infectious pleuro-pneumonia. The internal organs are congested, and there are very often hemorrhagic spots on the mucous and serous coats of the small intestine. All the organs contain rods identical with those of septicemia of rabbits. Rabbits, guinea-pigs, and mice were infected. A calf was injected in the pleural cavity with a broth- culture, and died in twenty hours. Swine Fever. This disease will be described in a separate chapter: Several bacteria have been isolated by different investigators. In swine fever in Germany (Schwein-seuche) Liffler and Schiitz isolated a bacillus which has been identified with the bacillus isolated by Salmon and Smith from hog-cholera in America, and with the bacillus of rabbit septicaemia and of fowl cholera. Eprpemic Disease or Deer anp Boars. A very fatal epizootic (Wildseuche) occurred in the royal game preserves near Munich, destroying one hundred and fifty-three deer and two hundred and thirty-four boars (Bollinger). The disease lasted from twelve hours to six days. In the less acute cases pneu- monia and pericarditis supervened. In cattle there was also severe hemorrhagic inflammation of the small intestine. In another form it produced swelling of the head, face, neck, and tongue. The virus proved fatal to rabbits in six to eight hours, and to sheep and goats in about thirty hours. A pig inoculated with a few drops of blood died in twenty-two hours. Kitt also investigated this malady. The bacteria were found to be identical, in their appearance and pathogenic properties, with extremely virulent bacteria from swine fever. Schiitz distinguished them from the bacteria obtained from swine fever by their pathogenic effect on pigeons, but cultures obtained from swine fever do not act uniformly in this respect. 228 INFECTIVE DISEASES. SEPTICEMIA IN RABBITS. Koch minutely investigated a disease of rabbits produced by inoculation with impure river water and with putrid meat infusion. Bacteria are found in the blood in abundance, and may be readily cultivated. The smallest quantity inoculated subcutaneously or in the cornea Sas of a rabbit produces a rise of tempera- ’ 6 ae ture and laboured breathing after ten &. eee & to twelve hours, and death in sixteen e 2 — to twenty hours, The spleen and lymphatic glands are found to be Fic. 107.—Bactzrium or RaBsBiT enlarged, and the lungs congested, Septice#mia; Bioop or Spar- e Row, x 700 (Kocu). but there are no extravasations, and no, peritonitis. Mice and birds are very susceptible; guinea-pigs and white rats have an immunity. Davatne’s SEPTICZMIA. A disease was produced by Davaine by injecting rabbits with putrid blood. Rabbits, mice, fowls, pigeons, and sparrows are sus- ceptible, and guinea-pigs and rats are insusceptible to the bacteria found in this disease. Rabbits inoculated with a trace of blood con- taining the bacteria, or with a culture, died in from twenty-four to thirty-six hours. The spleen, liver, lungs, and intestines are highly congested, and sometimes extravasations and peritonitis are found. Fow.i CHOLERA. Fowl cholera is an epidemic disease of the poultry-yard much dreaded in France, and well known through the researches of Perroncito, Toussaint, Pasteur, and Kitt. oe GER @ \P ey “ he g Me re Fic. 109.—Bactrrium or Fowu Fic. 108.—BactTer1um or FowL CHoLera, Cuotzra, x 2500, Muscle juice ’ i x 1200. From blood of inoculated Fowl. of Fowl. Fowls suffering from the disease usually die in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours. The disease shows itself by the fowls becoming FOWL CHOLERA. 229 somnolent. They suffer from weakness of the legs, and their wings trail. There is frequently diarrhea, with slimy greenish evacuations, and death usually ensues after a slight convulsive attack. On making a post-mortem examination the viscera will be found to be congested, and there is intense inflammation of the mucous membrane of the intestine, with hemorrhages. The blood from the heart, and the intestinal contents, contain the bacilli which were at one time believed to be peculiar to this disease. Inoculation subcutaneously, or administration with food, of a small quantity of a broth cultivation will produce death in twenty-four to thirty-six hours. Pigeons, pheasants, sparrows, Fic. 110.—Bacterium or Fowt CHoLera. Section from liver of a x 700 \(Fiuaer). rabbits, and mice are susceptible. In guinea-pigs, sheep, and horses, an abscess develops at the seat of inoculation. Rabbits ‘are readily infected by sprinkling a broth-cultivation on cabbage leaves or any suitable food. It was with this microbe that Eee proposed to eradicate the plague of rabbits in Australia. Fowl cholera has an additional interest, as it was with this disease that Pasteur first investigated the attenuation of virus. Broth-cultures which were several months old were found, when injected, to produce apparently only a local effect. This weakening of the virus was attributed by Pasteur to exposure to oxygen. After recovery the fowls were protected against the action of virulent cultures, while fowls not immunised died the following day. Kitt, by working with pure-cultures on solid media, showed that the 230 INFECTIVE DISEASES. weakening was not due to prolonged exposure to oxygen, but that old contaminated broth-cultures after a time completely lost their power, owing to the antagonism of the bacteria accidentally present. Filtered broth-cultures contain the toxic products of the bacillus, and produce slight illness and subsequent immunity. Fow. EntTERITIS8. Fowl enteritis is an acute infectious disease of fowls, the course and symptoms of which are regarded by Klein as distinct from fowl cholera. The fowls suffer from diarrhea, with liquid greenish evacuations, but are never somnolent, and death occurs in one or two days. After death the mucous membrane of the intestine is ‘found to be congested, and coated with grey or yellowish mucus; the liver is congested, spleen enlarged, and lungs normal. There are a few bacilli in the blood of the heart, very many in the spleen and liver, and they are in the form of a pure-culture in the mucus of the intestine. Klein says that the bacilli are a little longer and thicker than those found in fowl cholera, which they only slightly resemble, and that the course of the disease, the symptoms and pathological appearances, definitely distinguish it from fowl cholera, but that nevertheless it belongs to the same family of bacilli. Pigeons are said to be insusceptible, rabbits only slightly susceptible. By feeding and by subcutaneous inoculation the disease can be communicated to healthy fowls, but there is no sign of illness until the fourth day. As regards attenuation, the bacilli behave like those from cases of fowl cholera. Duck CHOLERA. Duck cholera is an epidemic disease of ducks which was investi- gated by Cornil. The symptoms are similar to those of fowl cholera. They suffer from diarrhea and weakness, followed by death in two or three days. The bacillus cultivated from the blood of ducks is pathogenic in ducks but not in fowls or pigeons, and large doses are required to kill rabbits. Grouse DIsEAsE. Grouse disease is an acute infectious disease of red grouse. According to Klein the chief pathological feature is severe pneu- monia ; there is also patchy redness of the serous,and mucous linings GROUSE DISEASE. 231 of the intestine, and the liver is congested and dark, but the spleen -is not enlarged. The bacilli are found in the heart, lungs, and liver, and in the extravasated blood. Cultures inoculated in mice and i ae guinea-pigs produce pneumonia sae Gel re. and death. Sparrows are sus- . on ~~ > ; : we ceptible, and other small birds. << ae Fowls, pigeons, and rabbits are Oly eer insusceptible. Bacillus of Hzmor- Fic. 111.— Bactttus or Hamorriacic Septiczmia. * Blood of a Rabbit after rhagic Septicemia.—Very death from Septicemia x 950 (Baum- short rods, with rounded ends, GARTEN). ‘6 to 7 pin width and 1-4 pin Fie. 112. — Bacittus oF Hevorruscic SEPTICEMIA (Rabbit Septicemia). Pure- culture in Gelatine after four days (BAUMGARTEN. ) length. In stained preparations the rods are observed to be deeply stained at the ends and to have a clear interval in the middle; they were on this account mis- taken by earlier observers for dumb-bell micrococci or diplococci. They are non- motile, and spore-formation is unknown. They grow readily in the ordinary media. The colonies in nutrient gelatine appear about the third day. They are circular in form, with a sharp dark outline, and of a yellow colour, lighter at the peri- phery. Later, the central zone is finely granular, and of a dark yellowish-brown colour, with the lighter peripheral zone more clearly defined. In the depth of gelatine a delicate filament develops in the track of the needle, composed of minute spherical colonies, somewhat trans- parent, and yellowish-white in colour. At the point of puncture there may be no growth visible, or a flat and very limited growth. Inoculated on the surface of nutrient media a thin layer develops, with an irregular serrated and thickened border. On potato different results have been obtained by different observers. Some maintain that a greyish-white or yellowish film will develop at the temperature of the blood ; but aecording to Caneva, the bacilli, whatever their source, 232 INFECTIVE DISEASES. will not grow on potato, while Bunzl-Federn maintains that the bacilli from fowl] cholera and rabbit septicemia do grow upon potato, but those from septicemia in deer, buffaloes, and swine do not. Opinions differ with regard to their action on milk. The reaction for phenol and indol is given in all cases, except with cultures obtained from septicemia of buffaloes. The virulence of the bacilli may be diminished and attenuated, but it may subsequently be restored by successive inoculation in animals. The pathological lesions vary in different animals. The most common result is con- gestion of the internal organs and hemorrhage. The bacilli culti- vated from cattle or deer produce fatal results when inoculated in swine. The bacilli from any of these sources inoculated in pigeons will produce fowl cholera, but the bacilli isolated by Schiitz from swine, and those from deer, are not fatal to fowls. Further, the bacilli cultivated from swine fever are fatal to guinea-pigs, while the bacilli from rabbit septicemia have very little effect upon them. The bacilli have been found in association with diseases of cattle, swine, deer, birds, rabbits, and mice, and have been cultivated from healthy mucous membrane. Veranus Moore found the bacilli in the mucus from the upper air passages, of 71 per cent. of cattle, 85 per cent. of cats, and 33 per cent. of dogs. From these sources inoculations were made in rabbits, and rapidly fatal septicemia was produced, associated in less acute cases with peritonitis, pleurisy, and pericarditis. CHAPTER XVII. PNEUMONIA.—INFECTIOUS PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CATTLE.— INFLUENZA. Acute Croupous Pneumonia. PNEUMONIA is an acute inflammation of the lungs with fibrinous infiltration of the air vesicles and interstitial tissue. There are varieties of pneumonia, and one form is commonly believed to be infectious. The lung passes through three stages—engorgement, red hepati- sation, and grey hepatisation. In the first stage the lung is of a deep red colour, but still vesicular; in the second stage the affected part is more or less solid, and has the consistency of liver, owing to the fibrinous lymph which is poured out into the alveolar cavities. In the grey hepatisation, the exudation contains more leucocytes: and less fibrin, and this is followed by the stage of suppurative softening and finai absorption. The sputum at the commencement of the disease is rusty, from the presence of blood, and later on has the appearance of prune juice. Examination of the sputum by Gram’s method will reveal numerous micro-organisms, and two of these are deserving of special study—the pneumococcus of Friedlander, which is present in a considerable proportion of cases, and Sternberg’s micrococcus, which was found in'sputum by Talamon. In 1888, there was considerable prevalence of pneumonia in Middlesbrough, with strong tendency to occur in groups of cases; but there was admittedly room for doubt whether the clinical and post-mortem appearances were not identical with ordinary pneumonia. Dr. Ballard maintained that there were facts and considerations which appeared to show that the disease was com- municable from the sick to the healthy, and that it was a specific febrile disease, and Klein isolated and described the micrococcus present in these cases. Bacterium Pneumonize Crouposz (Pneumococcus, Fried- 233 234 INFECTIVE DISEASES. linder).—Cocci ellipsoidal and round, singly, or in pairs (diplococei), Fie. 113.—Bacrerium PNEUMONIE Crovupos#&, FROM PLEURAL Cavity rods and thread-forms. The cell- membrane thickens, and develops into a gelatinous capsule, which is round if the coccus is single, and ellipsoidal if the cocci occur in pairs or in rod-forms. Oultivated in a test-tube of nutrient gelatine they grow in the form of a round- headed nail, without liquefaction of the gelatine (Fig. 114). The cocci when artificially cultivated have no capsule, but it again appears after their injection into or A Mousz, x 1500 A, BL animals, Thread-forms. OC, D, E. Short Th as rod-forms. G. Diplococci. H. See Cocci. I. Streptococci. (Zopf.) can also be cultivated on blood serum and on _ boiled potatoes. They occur in pneumonic exudation. In- oculation of dogs with a cultivation of the cocci occasionally gave positive results; but in rabbits no results followed. Guinea- pigs proved to be susceptible in some cases ; but thirty-two mice, after injection of a cultivation diffused in sterilised water, into the lungs, died without exception. The lungs were red and solid, and contained the cocci, which were also present in the blood, and in enormous numbers in the pleural exudation. Inhalation experiments by spray- ing the cocci diffused in water into mouse cages produced pneumonia and pleurisy in three out of ten mice, The nail-shaped cultivation is not always produced, nor are these conclusions accepted by all investigators. METHODS OF STAINING FRIEDLANDER’S PNEUMOCOCCUS. Fig. 114.—FR1EDLANDER’S Pyevumococous. Pure- culture in nutrient- gelatine four days old (BAUMGARTEN). Cover-glass preparations of pneumonic sputum or exudation may be treated as follows :— PNEUMONIA. 235 (a) Stain by the method of Gram, and after-stain with eosin. (4) Treat with acetic acid, then stain with gentian-violet or Bismarck- brown. Examine in distilled water, or dry and preserve in Canada balsam. (c) Float them on weak solutions of the aniline dyes twenty-four hours ; differentiation between coccus and capsule is thus obtained. (d) Stain with osmic acid ; the contour of the capsules is brought _ out. Fic. 115.—CarsvuLe-coccl FRom PNEUMONIA, x 1500 (BAUMGARTEN). Sections of pneumonic lung should be stained by— (a) Method of Gram. (6) Method of Friedlander. This method is employed to demonstrate the capsules in tissue sections. It consists in placing the sections twenty- four hours in the following solution :— Fuchsine . F ‘ 1 Distilled water 100 Aleohol . - 2 5 - 5 Glacial acetic acid . F ‘ F : : 2 They are then rinsed with alcohol, transferred for a couple of minutes to a 2 per cent. solution of acetic acid, and treated with alcohol and oil of cloves in the usual way, and preserved in Canada balsam. Sternberg’s micrococcus was first found in the blood of rabbits inoculated with saliva. Three months afterwards, Pasteur encoun- tered the same organism in rabbits inoculated with the blood of a child suffering from rabies. The same organism in 1883 was found by Talamon in pneumonic sputum. It was identified by Sternberg. Two years afterwards further observations were made by Frankel, Gamaleia, and others. It has also been found in purulent meningitis by Netter, and by Monti in cerebrospinal meningitis, by Weichsel- baum in ulcerative endocarditis, and by others in acute abscess of the middle ear, and in purulent inflammation of the joints following pneumonia. 236 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Sternberg’s Micrococcus. (Microbe de salive, Pasteur ; Micro- coccus Pasteuri, Sternberg ; Lancet-shaped micrococcus, Talamon ; Streptococcus lanceolatus Pastewri, Gamaleia; Diplococcus pneu- monic, Weichselbaum ; Bacillus septicus sputigenus, Fligge ; Micrococcus of sputum septicemia, Frankel.) Spherical or oval cocci, singly, in pairs or in chains, often lanceolate and capsuled. Stain readily with the aniline colours and by Gram’s method ; non-motile. They flourish in alkaline media in the incubator. In broth they produce in twelve hours a cloudiness due to the develop- Fic. 116.—Micrococctus or Sputum Septic#Mia. From the blood of a Rabbit. x 1000 (FRANKEL AND PFEIFFER). ment of cocci and short chains. After a time these subside to the bottom of the tube, and the liquid above becomes clear. In plate-cultivations the colonies are small, circular, white, and granular. In the depth of gelatine, minute white colonies develop along the track of the needle without liquefaction of the gelatine; and on the sloping surface of nutrient agar or blood serum minute trans- parent drops appear along the line of inoculation, They grow in milk, coagulating casein; but they do not grow on potato. Sub- cultures quickly lose their virulence, but regain it by inoculation. PNEUMONIA. 237 The injection of a minute quantity (-2 cc.) of a virulent culture subcutaneously proves fatal to mice and rabbits in from twenty- four to forty-eight hours. Immediately afterwards there is a rise of temperature of 2° or 3° C., later it falls, and just before death it is several degrees below normal. After death, the post-mortem appearances of septicemia are observed, in addition to diffuse inflammatory edema extending in all directions from the point of injection. The subcutaneous connective tissue contains sanguineous serum and micrococci in abundance. The liver and spleen are some- Fic. 117.—Cotoytes or STernBerc’s Micrococcus. Agar plate-cultivation, after 24 hours. x 100 (FRANKEL AND PFEIFFER). times dark and engorged, and blood from the heart and internal organs teems with micrococci. There is no indication of pneumonia after subcutaneous inocula- tion, but intra-pulmonary injections produce fibrinous pneumonia, often fatal (Talamon, Gamaleia). The result is usually fatal in rabbits and sheep, but dogs, as a rule, recover. Injection of cultures into the trachea of rabbits is said to induce typical pneumonia (Monti). _ Sternberg concludes that this micrococcus is the cause of acute infectious pneumonia, but the micrococcus is undoubtedly associated with widely different pathological processes, and the possibility of its being a saprophyte, which finds in pneumonia a suitable soil for its development, must not be overlooked. 238 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Klein’s Micrococcus.—Klein found in pneumonic sputum a diplococcus which does not appear to differ from Sternberg’s micro- coccus. In cover-glass preparations the bacilli are surrounded with a halo, but no definite capsule, as in Friedlinder’s coccus. They appear as short rods constricted in the centre, or dumb-bell forms, and forms intermediate between cocci and bacilli. In gelatine, after two or three days, greyish-white spots appear, which enlarge in the next two or three days into flat, translucent, greyish-white plaques, with irregular serrated outline. Colonies beneath the surface are spherical, and of a brownish-yellow colour. In test-tubes in the depth of the gelatine a whitish-brown filament develops on incuba- tion, composed of minute spherical colonies, and on the surface the growth spreads out into a greyish-white film with serrated margin. On the surface of obliquely solidified gelatine the growth forms a thin whitish film, which enlarges in breadth with irregular outline, reaching its maximum in about a fortnight. The growth on agar is very similar. Broth becomes uniformly turbid in twenty-four hours, then a powdery precipitate makes its appearance. On potato there is a thin, moist, faintly yellowish-brown film. Cultures examined in the fresh state show many rods in a resting stage, and others actively motile. In addition to the dumb-bell forms there are others of greater length, and in old cultures involuted and degenerated forms. Spore-formation has not been observed. A broth-eulture inoculated into two rabbits produced a local tumour which subsided in a week. Death ensued in one case in eight days, and in the other in three weeks. There was purulent matter at the seat of inoculation in one ; in the other, pericardial exudation and hyperemia of the lungs. Broth-cultures inoculated intravenously produced no effect. In guinea-pigs there was swelling at the seat of inoculation, or slight indication of disease and recovery. Cultures inoculated in mice produced rapid breathing, drowsiness, and death in from twenty-four to ninety-six hours. The internal organs were con- gested, the lungs inflamed, and the blood and organs in the inoculated animals contained the diplococci in considerable numbers. Foa isolated a coccus which he named the Micrococcus lanceolatus capsulatus. It produced in small animals either rapid septicemia and death, or local edema and death at a later period. Protective Inoculation.—Immunity has been produced in rabbits by the intravenous injection of the virus in a diluted form. Blood obtained from immunised rabbits was kept at 10° C. for twelve hours, and then filtered, and animals injected with it acquired immunity against virulent cultures (Emmerich). INFECTIOUS PLEURO-PNEUMONIA. 239 Filtered cultures are said to confer immunity for six months, and raising the temperature of filtered cultures increases the strength of the substance which gives immunity (Klemperer). The blood serum of immune animals can confer immunity on other animals, and, it is said, will arrest the progress of the disease produced by injection of healthy animals with virulent cultures. The cultures contain a proteid body, for which the name pneumo-toxin has been suggested, and anti-pneumo-toxin has been isolated from immunised blood serum. Inrectious PLEURO-PNEUMONIA. Infectious pleuro-pneumonia is a highly infectious disease peculiar to cattle; it is characterised by rise of temperature and exudation into the lungs. It is often fatal, and sometimes exists in an extremely chronic form. It is believed to have been unknown in England previously to 1840, and is supposed to have been introduced from Holland, where in one year it destroyed seven thousand cattle. Fie. 118.—AcuTs CatTaRRHsaL Pneumonia (Ox). u, Coagulated mucus with catarrhal cells (c) embedded in it; b, catarrhal cells sprouting from alveolar wall. x 480. (Hamilton.) The disease cannot be conveyed artificially. A living, diseased animal must be the medium of infection. The disease is apparently only. communicated by cohabitation. Brown injected large quanti- ties of lymph from diseased lungs into the jugular vein, into the 240 INFECTIVE DISEASES. tissue of the lungs, and into the trachea, without any result except a small abscess at the seat of puncture. Administration of the virus by the mouth gave equally negative results. The lungs from a recently killed animal infected with pleuro-pneumonia were placed in a shed oceupied by healthy heifers, and left there for several days. Fodder, litter, and manure were taken from places in which there were diseased cattle, and placed in contact with healthy cattle, and sub- sequently all the animals used in these experiments were slaughtered and carefully examined, and the results were absolutely negative. Similarly negative results followed experiments made by Sander- Fie. 119.—INFectTious PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CATTLE, x 480. a,a,a, Exudation in air-vesicles, composed of a network of fibrinous lymph with entangled leucocytes; 0,b, the same caseating; c, the air-vesicle filled with leucocytes only. In the centre is a blood-vessel filled with a fibrinous plug. (Hamilton.) son and Duguid, and thus confirmed the conclusion arrived at by Brown, that the disease could only be communicated by actual contact of a living, diseased animal with a healthy one. The symptoms of the disease in cattle are a rise of temperature to 105° or 107°, and a peculiar dry cough, and later the usual indications of pneumonia, difficulty in breathing, and dulness on percussion. Asa rule, death follows from exhaustion ; but the disease may also assume a chronic form, if the animal escapes slaughter, and the lung may become gangrenous or tubercular. The period of incubation is about thirty days, but it is uncertain, The lesions are Fic. 120.—Inxrectiots PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CaTrLe, x 50. a,a,a, Spaces in deep layer of pleura and interlobular septa filled with fibrinous lymph; 6, deep layer of pleura running down to an interlobular septum ; ¢,¢, air-vesicles filled with fibrinous lymph; 4, blood-vessels of alveolar walls, much congested; e, large congested plood-vessels ; f,f, interlobular septa infiltrated with fibrinous lymph;! 9, blood-vessel in interlobular septum (Logwood, Eosin and Farrant’s solution).— HAMILTON. 16 242 INFECTIVE DISEASES. limited almost entirely to the lungs ; congestion is quickly followed by inflammation and effusion into the air vesicles and the intra- lobular fibrous tissue which is so well marked in the lungs of cattle. Leucocytes are entangled in the fibrinous lymph, and the intra- lobular septa are enormously enlarged, so that the red lobules are mapped out by the paler septa, and produce on section of the diseased parts a very striking marbled appearance. A somewhat similar appearance is sometimes observed in septic pleuro-pneumonia in calves. The effusion occurs also in the air vesicles. The stages of grey hepatisation and suppurative softening have not, as a rule, time to develop. Hzmorrhagic infarctions are sometimes produced, which in turn become gangrenous or cheesy, and a capsule may form round the diseased part. Roy found micro-organisms in the lymph, but attached no importance to them. Bruylants and Verriet also described a micro-organism in the lymph. Later, Poels and Nolen isolated a micrococcus resembling Friedlinder’s pneumococcus. Inoculation in the lungs produced a condition in cattle which they considered indicative of pleuro-pneumonia. Lustig was unable to confirm these observations, but succeeded in isolating from lymph a bacillus and three species of micrococci. ‘One of the micrococci formed an orange growth when cultivated, and was regarded as the specific micro-organism, as it caused sub- cutaneous tumefaction, and, it is said, some degree of immunity. Brown cultivated a number of organisms which on inoculation only produced local irritation. Intravenous injection produced death from septicaemia in one case in thirty-six hours. Arloing isolated four different organisms, including a bacillus which was named Pneumo-bacillus liquefaciens bovis. Later, he prepared a fluid from broth-cultures, pnewmo-bacillin, which pro- duced a more marked rise in temperature in animals suffering from pleuro-pneumonia than in healthy animals, and its use was suggested as an aid in diagnosis. Arloing named the micro- organisms provisionally Pneumo-bacillus liquefaciens bovis, Pneumo- coccus gutta cerei, Pneumococcus lichenoides, and Pneumococcus flavescens. Pneumo-bacillus liquefaciens bovis.—Short rods, non- motile; spore-formation not observed. They rapidly liquefy gelatine, and form on potato a white layer, which becomes brownish and sometimes greenish. According to Arloing pure-cultures produce in the ox, when injected subcutaneously or in the lung, the same lesions which are produced by virulent lymph. Guinea-pigs and rabbits are slightly susceptible, dogs are immune. INFECTIOUS PLEURO-PNEUMONIA. 243 Nocard does not accept Arloing’s conclusions, and expresses the opinion that the virus is particulate, but is not due to any micro- organism which can be detected or cultivated by the methods at present adopted. In the opinion of the author, who has also examined the micro-organisms in pleuro-pneumonia, it is fully justifiable to regard the nature of the contagium as unknown. Preventive Inoculation.—In 1852 Willems introduced inocula- tion. The liquid from the lungs of an animal with pleuro-pneumonia, which had recently died, was inoculated in the extremity of the tail by a puncture with a lancet. Swelling occurred at the seat of inocu- lation, and on recovery the animals were believed to be protected. A Dutch Commission reported that the inoculation gave a temporary protection. A Belgian Commission in the following year reported that the phenomena of inoculation could be produced several times in succession in the same animal, and that it was not a certain preventive. A French Commission in 1854 concluded that a power of resisting infection was given, but the period was undetermined. Protective inoculation continued to be employed, and various modi- fications of the method were introduced. Threads soaked in lymph were inoculated, or the lymph subcutaneously or intravenously injected. The usual result of the inoculation is swelling and, in about ten or fourteen days, effusion of straw-coloured fluid, which is occasion- ally blood-stained. Gangrene may follow, involving amputation of the tail, Germont and Loire in Queensland adopted the method— which was suggested by Pasteur—of inoculating calves in the loose cellular tissue behind the shoulder. This produces intense edema and a quantity of lymph. There has been much controversy with regard to the value of protective inoculation. Stamping-out System.—Brown maintains that pleuro- pneumonia can be exterminated only by slaughter of the diseased animals, and quotes the results experienced in the Netherlands in support of his views. In 1871 slaughter for pleuro-pneumonia was commenced in the Netherlands. There were 6,000 cattle attacked by the disease. In 1872 owners were compelled to slaughter not only diseased cattle, but those which had been in contact with them, unless inoculated, and the attacks were, in consequence, reduced to 4,000. In 1873 it was forbidden to move cattle out of infected districts, and the attacks were reduced to 2,479. In 1876 slaughter of the whole herd was decreed, and during the first year of this heroic system the cases fell 244 INFECTIVE DISEASES. from 2,227 in 1875, to 1,723 in 1876, to 951 in 1877, to 698 in 1878, to 157 in 1879, and to 48 in 1880. In England the Pleuro-pneumonia Act came into force on September Ist, 1890. Notification was to be given by the owner to a police constable of the district, who was required to transmit the information to the Local Authority and also to the Board of Agriculture. An inspector, with the aid of the veterinary surgeon, arranged for the slaughter of the suspected animal, and, if the disease proved to be pleuro-pneumonia, of the rest of the herd. The results are shown in the following table :— : Diseased Cattle. | Cattle Number | Number ; Number | Healthy pings YEARS. of of of Cattle in but Foard - Infected Fresh Cattle contact free from Counties, | Outbreaks. | Attacked. ; ; slaughtered. Pleuro- f Killed. Died. Pasunonia. foal | 1890 36 465 2,057 2,022 37 | 11,301 1891 | 97 192 | 778 | 778 | — | 9491 232 1892 10 35 | 134 134 _ 3,477 188 | 1893 4 9 30 30 _— | 1,157 86 \ 1894 | 2 2 | 15 15 a | 391 41 Thus the number of cases was reduced from 2,057 in 1890 to 15 in 1894. A departmental committee appointed in 1892 to inquire into pleuro-pneumonia and tuberculosis, came to the following conclusions with regard to pleuro-pneumonia :— (1) That the system of compulsory slaughter be applied not only to all diseased cattle, but also to all cattle which have been in association with them, or otherwise in any manner exposed to the infection of the disease. (2) Compulsory slaughter should be accompanied by supplementary measures, such as restrictions on the movement and sale of cattle within, or coming from, infected districts. (3) Any exception to, or modification of, the system of compulsory slaughter, as provided in the Slaughter Order, 1888, should only be applicable to cattle in the dairy yards, byres, and cowsheds of large towns, the owners or occupiers of which may claim in writing the privi- lege of exemption for their cattle from immediate slaughter, on the following conditions :— INFECTIOUS PLEURO-PNEUMONIA. 245 (a) No head of cattle that has been brought into such dairy premises shall be removed therefrom, except for the purpose of immediate slaughter. (b) In the event of an outbreak of pleuro-pneumonia, all the diseased cattle shall be slaughtered. {c) All the remaining cattle on such premises where an outbreak has occurred shall be branded, and regularly subjected to the ther- mometer test ; and whenever a continuous increase of temperature, rising above 104°, is shown, they shall be slaughtered. (d) No fresh cattle shall be admitted into such premises while any of the cattle thus branded remain alive. (4) Inoculation cannot be recommended as a means of eradicating pleuro-pneumonia, nor as practicable under existing conditions. Although it is open to owners to inoculate their cattle, it should be distinctly understood that that operation shall not give them any immunity from the regulations above suggested. The order at present in force is the Pleuro-Pneumonia Order of 1895. In addition to regulations for the movement of cattle, for disposal of carcasses, for markets, and for compensation for slaughter, the Order contains the following provisions :-— NOoTIFICATION. Notice of Disease. (1) Every person having or having had in his possession or under his charge a head of cattle affected with or suspected of pleuro-pneumonia shall with all practicable speed give notice of the fact of the head of cattle being so affected or suspected to a constable of the police force for the police area wherein the head of cattle so affected or suspected is or was. (2) The constable receiving such notice shall immediately transmit the information by telegraph to the Board of Agriculture. (3) The constable shall also forthwith give information of the receipt by him of the notice to an Inspector of the Local Authority, who shall forthwith report the same to the Local Authority. Duty of Inspector to act immediately. (1) An Inspector of a Local Authority on receiving in any manner whatsoever information of the supposed existence of pleuro-pneumonia, or having reasonable ground to suspect the existence of pleuro-pueumonia, shall proceed with all practicable speed to the place where such. disease, according to the information received by him, exists, or is suspected to exist, and shall there and elsewhere put in force and discharge the powers and duties conferred and imposed on him as Inspector by or under the Act of 1894 and this Order. (2) The Inspector shall forthwith report to the Board of Agriculture. 246 INFECTIVE DISEASES. No Movement into or out of Plewro-pneumonia Infected Place without Licence. Cattle shall not be moved into or out of an Infected Place except with a Movement Licence of an Inspector or officer of the Board, and such cattle shall not be moved except in accordance with the conditions contained in such Licence. Pleuro-pneumonia found in a Market, Railway Station, Grazing Park, or other like Place, or during Transit. The Inspector of the Local Authority shall cause to be seized all the cattle affected with pleuro-pneumonia, and also all cattle being in or on the market, fair, sale-yard, place of exhibition, lair, landing-place, wharf, railway station, common, uninclosed land, farm, field, yard, shed, park, or other such place as aforesaid, and shall forthwith transmit the information by telegraph to the Board of Agriculture. The Inspector of the Local Authority shall cause all such cattle so seized to be detained at the place where they are seized, or to be moved to some convenient and isolated place and there detained. Removal of Dung or other Things. It shall not be lawful for any person to send or carry, or cause to be sent or carried, on a railway, canal, river, or inland navigation, or in a coasting vessel, or on a highway or thoroughfare, any dung, fodder, or litter that has been in an Infected Place, or that has been in any place in contact with or used about a diseased or suspected head of cattle, except with a Licence of an Inspector or officer of the Board or of an Inspector of the Local Authority. Report to Board of Cattle that have been in Contact with Cattle affected with Pleuro-pneumonia. Where it appears toa Local Authority that there is within their District any head of cattle which has been in the same field, shed, or other place, or in the same herd, or otherwise in contact, with any head of cattle affected with pleuro-pneumonia, or otherwise exposed to the infection thereof, the Local Authority shall forthwith report the facts of the case to the Board of Agriculture. Disinfeetion. An Inspector or officer of the Board may cause or require any shed or other place which has been used for a head of cattle while affected with or suspected of pleuro-pneumonia, and any utensil, pen, hurdle, or other thing used for or about such head of cattle, to be cleansed and disinfected to his satisfaction. Occupiers to give Facilities for Cleansing. (1) The owner and occupier and person in charge of any shed or other place which has been used for any head of cattle while affected with or suspected of pleuro-pneumonia shall give all reasonable facilities to an INFLUENZA. 247 Inspector or officer of the Board for the cleansing and disinfection of such place, and of any utensils, pens, hurdles, or other things used for or about such cattle. (2) Any person failing to comply with the provisions of this Article shall be deemed guilty of an offence against the Act of 1894. Prohibition to Expose or Move Diseased or Suspected Cattle. (1) It shall not be lawful for any person— (a) To expose a diseased or suspected head of cattle in a market or fair, or in a sale-yard, or other public or private place where cattle are commonly exposed for sale ; or (6) To place a diseased or suspected head of cattle in a lair or other place adjacent to or connected with a market or a fair, or where. cattle are commonly placed before exposure for sale ; or (c) To send or carry, or cause to be sent or carried, a diseased or suspected head of cattle on a railway, canal, river, or inland navigation, or in a coasting vessel ; or (4) To carry, lead, or drive, or cause to be carried, led, or driven, a diseased or suspected head of cattle on a highway or thorough- fare: or (e) To place or keep a diseased or suspected head of cattle on common or uninclosed land, or in a field or place insufficiently fenced, or in a field adjoining a highway unless that field is so fenced or situate that cattle therein cannot in any manner come in contact with cattle passing along that highway or grazing on the sides thereof ; or (f) To graze a diseased or suspected head of cattle on pasture being on the sides of a highway ; or (g) To allow a diseased or suspected head of cattle to stray on a highway or thoroughfare or on the sides thereof or on common or uninclosed land, or in a field or place insufficiently fenced. INFLUENZA. Influenza is an infectious disease characterised by a catarrh of the respiratory or the gastric mucous membrane, accompanied by great prostration and mental depression, and frequently ending fatally by pneumonic complication. One attack is not protective. The disease has occurred in the form of great epidemics, like the pandemic of 1890, which is said to have started from Bokhara, and travelled to St. Petersburg, Berlin, Paris, and London, whence it spread all over this country. The incubation period is extremely short, only a few hours, so that numbers are attacked almost simultaneously. The occurrence of cases in succession in a family, the importation of the disease by an infected person, and the escape of persons in completely isolated localities, point to the existence of a living contagium. Pfeiffer claims to have identified it with a 248 INFECTIVE DISEASES. bacillus which was found by him in the purulent bronchial secretion, and, by Canon, in the blood. Bacillus of Influenza.—Very small rods, singly or in leptothrix filaments. They stain with the aniline dyes, but not by Gram’s method. They are non-motile and aerobic; they do not grow in gelatine at the temperature of the room. On glycerine-agar very small transparent drop-like colonies develop in about twenty-four hours. In broth there is only a very scanty growth of whitish particles on the surface, which subside and form a woolly deposit. They are found especially in the bronchial secretion, and only in cases of influenza. Canon obtained them by puncturing the finger, Fic. 121.—Bacitius or INFLUENZA. From a culture on gelatine, x 1000. (ITzerorTr AND NIEMANN.) and allowing a few drops of the blood to fall upon the surface of glycerine-agar in a Petri’s dish. The organism will retain its vitality for fourteen days in sputum, but is quickly detroyed by drying. It is said that by applying the bacillus to the nasal mucous membrane in monkeys, symptoms similar to influenza were produced. METHOD OF STAINING. To stain the bacilli use Neelsen’s solution or Liiffler’s methylene- blue; or the following method :— Canon’s method.—Spread the blood on cover-glasses, allow them to dry, immerse for five minutes in absolute alcohol, and stain in the following solution :— INFLUENZA. 249 Aqueous solution of methylene-blue, strong, 40 parts; 4 per cent. solution of eosin in 70 per cent. alcohol, 20 parts; distilled water, 40 parts. Float the cover-glasses from three to six hours in a capsule placed in the incubator at 37° C., wash with water, and dry and mount in balsam, The red corpuscles will be stained pink, and the leucocytes, with the bacilli in them, blue. s rd rd yg err ere = a1 Py 8 =—— 4 Qe c~ AY aw” 4 ft a. o 8 A 1 eer ee \ 3 Ney Ps NG i, id ae ee Catal / v3 " wont . ‘ \ a T= ? 3 = f 8 oe ft Sta ed < Sts = Ra ——N Fic. 122.—BacitLus oF INFLUENZA. From a cultivation showing filaments composed of long and short rods, cocci-forms and irregular elements. x 1200. Equine INFLUENZA. Equine influenza, or ‘“ pink-eye,” has been noticed to be prevalent at the same time as epidemics of influenza in man, but there does not appear to be any evidence of intercommunicability or of any relation between the two diseases. CHAPTER XVIII. ORIENTAL PLAGUE.—RELAPSING FEVER.—TYPHUS FEVER.—YELLOW FEVER. Tue PLAGug. Tue plague is a highly infectious disease, having its origin in putrefaction and filth, in tropical climates. The virus in its effects resembles that of typhus. The period of incubation varies from a few hours to a week. The disease produces high temperature and decomposition of the blood, and dark hemorrhagic patches appear on the skin, but there is no eruption. Lymphatic inflammation and buboes almost invariably occur. The virus is intensified by warmth and overcrowding in houses, and dissipated by exposure to fresh air. When the plague occurred in this country it was recognised as a foreign pestilence from the East, and once imported it was fostered and intensified in virulence wherever there was filth, putrefaction, and overcrowding. The disease, like the small-pox, was communicated from one person to another. If a case occurred in a house other inmates were liable to suffer from the disease, while visitors to the house ran a similar but less risk. There was a good deal of variation both in the infectivity of the virus and in the susceptibility of individuals, so that one contemporary writer remarked that “no one can account for how it comes to pass that some persons shall receive the infection and others not.” Medical men were credited with enjoying an extraordinary degree of immunity, though there were members of the medical profession who undoubtedly died of the plague. This tradition has been supported, to a certain extent, by the experience of the plague in modern times. In the epidemic in Egypt, in 1835, of the ten French physicians engaged there, only one died; and while those | who buried the victims of the plague were liable to suffer from it, and many did so, yet the medical men made more than one hundred post-mortem examinations without any death resulting. 250 THE PLAGUE. 251 The clothes and coverings of the infected often spread the disease, and yet there are numerous examples of persons who without having adopted any method of protection occupied the beds of plague patients without contracting the malady. The plague is transmissible from one country to another by sea. An infected ship becomes an infective centre as readily as an infected house. Once imported, whether by land or sea, the virus from infected persons or merchandise spreads wherever the environment. is favourable for its development and extension. Old London afforded in every way a suitable environment for the plague. The situation of the city was unhealthy, and the old town ditch was a receptacle for all kinds of filth. The houses projected over the roadway, and the streets were saturated with constant contributions of slops and of excrement from animals and human beings. The houses were often filthy and unventilated, and the floors strewn with rushes, which were seldom changed. Erasmus goes so far as to say that the rushes were piled the new upon the old for twenty years, and were fouled with spillings of beer, fragments of fish, expectoration, vomit, excrement, and urine. Another very striking insanitary feature of Old London was the overcrowded state of the graveyards, which was well calculated to predispose to pestilence, if not actually to produce it. The burials were so frequent in St. Paul’s Churchyard that a new grave could searcely be dug without bodies being exposed in all stages of putrefaction. In 1894 the plague broke out in China, with all the symptoms of the fatal bubonic pest of Old London. The disease was confined to the poorest classes and the most overcrowded and most filthy localities. In Canton the deaths exceeded one hundred thousand, and in Hong-Kong numbered about ten thousand. The disease was contagious, and mainly diffused by personal contact. Death occurred, as a rule, in from twenty-four hours to five days. The English and European community escaped, with the exception of a very few out of a large number, mostly soldiers, employed in cleansing the houses. The disease was a specific fever, intensely fatal, accom- panied by high temperature, cerebral congestion, delirium, and the formation of buboes. The buboes consisted of exquisitely painful and swollen lymphatic glands. All the glands, in some cases, were affected. According to Cantlie the glandular swelling when first recognised was almond-shaped in the inguinal region, and globular in other regions, with peri-glandular edema. The swelling rapidly increased in size, becoming softer, less definite in outline, and less tender, until 252 INFECTIVE DISEASES. by the end of five or six days it consisted of an elevated mass, doughy to the touch, almost circular, with a diameter of six inches. The skin over the swelling was livid and dimpled. The swelling was in some cases due to purulent effusion, but more frequently on incision there was only an escape of sero-sanguineous fluid. The cervical glands in very severe cases sometimes attained an enormous size. Three out of seven Japanese medical men were attacked and one died, but none out of eleven English doctors, though they were equally exposed to infection. Of eight Englishmen attacked seven were among the soldiers employed, and only two died. No nurses or attendants on the sick were attacked. The virus appeared to be intimately connected with filth in the soil. According to the Chinese, rats, poultry, goats, sheep, cows, and buffaloes are susceptible. In the houses and hotels dead rats were found in great numbers : it was said that they emerged from their haunts in sewers and drains, appeared to be dazed, and limped about, owing to the formation of buboes in their hind legs. Rats, mice, and guinea-pigs inoculated with virus from a human lymphatic gland died with development of buboes. It appears to be clearly proved that rats suffer from the plague in common with man, and it has also been suggested that they may serve to spread the disease. Bacilli were found in human blood and in the swollen lymphatic glands by Kitasato, and independently by Yersin. Bacillus of Plague.—-Short rods with rounded ends. They stain with aniline dyes, but not by Gram’s method. The stain collects at the ends of the rods, leaving a clear space in the middle. Sometimes the rods are surrounded by a capsule. They are found in abundance in the buboes, and in small numbers in the blood in very serious and rapidly fatal cases. Material from the buboes inoculated on agar gives rise to white transparent colonies, which have an iridescent edge when examined by reflected light. The bacilli grow more readily on glycerine-agar and on solidified serum. In broth cultures the liquid remains clear, and a flocculent deposit forms on the sides and at the bottom of the vessel. An alkaline solution of peptone 2 per cent., with from 1 to 2 per cent. of gelatine, is the best nutrient medium. In cultures the bacilli develop chains of short rods and well-marked involution forms. Swollen and degenerated forms are found most abundantly in old cultures, and stain with difficulty. Mice, rats, and guinea-pigs, inoculated with bubonic tissue, die in a few days, numerous bacilli being found in the lymphatic glands, THE PLAGUE. 253 spleen, and blood. Guinea-pigs die in from two to five days, and mice in one to three days. In guinea-pigs after some hours there is edema at the seat of inoculation, and the lymphatic glands are swollen. After twenty- four hours the animal refuses to eat, has a staring coat, and after a time suddenly falls on its side, and is attacked by convulsions, which become more and more frequent until death occurs. After death the seat of inoculation is found to be extensively adematous, and the neighbouring lymphatic glands enlarged and filled with bacilli, The intestine is often congested, and the liver is Fic. 123.—Bacitii or Puacur anp PuHacocytes. x 800. From human lymphatic gland. (Aoyama.) congested and enlarged. In less acute cases an abscess of the abdominal wall occasionally results. The bacilli are sometimes found in the pleural and peritoneal exudation. The liver and spleen also contain many bacilli. Those in the blood are a little longer than those in the lymphatic glands. Inoculations can readily be made from guinea-pig to guinea- pig by using the pulp of the spleen, or the blood. Cultures lose their virulence gradually, but the virus can be intensified by successive inoculations in animals. The disease is infectious to mice as well as inoculable. Pigeons are insusceptible. Rats and flies may convey the bacilli. According to Aoyama, the bacilli found in the blood of plague 254 INFECTIVE DISEASES, patients and in the buboes are not identical. The bacilli in the buboes are different in form, and they stain by Gram’s method. There is no doubt that the micro-organism which was found in blood is very similar to the bacillus of fowl cholera, and it is quite possible that the so-called plague bacillus is really identical with the bacillus of hemorrhagic septicemia, and that the real nature of the contagium in bubonic plague is unknown. Protective Inoculation.—Yersin, Calmette, and Borrell claim not only to have produced immunity, but to have cured animals after infection. Cultures on agar heated to 58° C. for an hour were attenuated, and rabbits after intravenous or subcutaneous inoculation were protected against virulent cultures. The serum of immunised rabbits was capable of protecting from subsequent virulent cultures, and neutralising the effect of a previous inoculation of a virulent culture. A horse was inoculated with cultures which killed mice in two days, and after six weeks a serum was obtained which produced immunity in mice and guinea-pigs. Stamping-out System.—It is not until the sixteenth century that we hear of preventive measures being attempted in England, and then they appear to have been adopted only when an outbreak threatened to be very serious. Early in the sixteenth century all those who had the plague in their houses were ordered to put up wisps, and to carry white rods in their hands. In 1543 the Plague Order of Henry VIII. was issued. In place of wisps the sign of the cross was to be made on every infected house, and to remain there for forty days. Persons afflicted with the disease were to refrain, if possible, from going out of doors, or for forty days to carry a white rod in the hand. All straw from the infected houses was to be carried into the fields and burnt. Churchwardens were directed to keep beggars out of churches on holy days, and all streets and lanes were to be cleansed. In 1547 the means of notification was a blue cross with the addition of the inscription Lord have mercy upon us. Later on the colour of the cross was changed to red. With the outburst of the plague in 1563, came an attempt to enforce a terrible system of compulsorily shutting up infected families. The doors and windows in such houses were to be closed, and no inmates were to leave the premises and no visitors to be allowed for forty days. No better incubator on a large scale could possibly have been devised for both breeding and intensifying the virulence of the plague bacillus, or whatever may be the contagium vivum of this disease. This compulsory shutting up of the sick with the healthy amounted +o a compulsory infection of many of the unfortunate inmates who might THE PLAGUE. 255 otherwise have escaped, and very naturally the order was frequently infringed. In 1568 the Lord Mayor of London drew up instructions for the Aldermen for dealing with the plague. It was enacted that constables and officers should search out infected houses and report to the authorities, In other words, that there should be notification by the police. All infected houses were to be shut up, and no person to be allowed to come out for twenty days, All bedding and clothes used by the victims were to be destroyed. At Westminster these instructions were to be enforced under a penalty of seven days in the stocks, with imprisonment to follow, making in all a punishment of forty days. In 1581 the Lord Mayor transferred notification from the constables to searchers. Two honest and discreet matrons in every parish were to search the body of every such person that happened to die in the parish. They were ordered to make a true report to the clerk of the parish, and the said clerk had to report to the wardens of the parish. For failing to notify, the penalty was an exemplary term of imprisonment. The searchers were of course likely to be offered heavy bribes by the people to suppress reports, owing to their anxiety to avoid the shutting up of infected houses. The continued prevalence of the plague led to the publication, in 1593, of a book by Simon Kellwaye. One chapter ‘‘teacheth what orders magistrates and. rulers of citties and towns should cause to be observed,” which included among other regulations that no dunghills were to be allowed near the city, and the streets were to be watered and cleansed. No surgeons or barbers who let blood were to cast the same into the streets. All those visiting and attending the sick to carry something in their hand to be known from other people ; and if the infection were in few places, all the people were to be kept in their houses during the time of their visitation, and when this was over, all clothes, bedding, and other such things used upon the sick, were to be burnt. In 1603 Thomas Lodge recommended that discreet and skilful men should be appointed in every parish to notify sickness to the authorities, and so cause them to be visited by expert physicians, and that such as were sick should be separated from the whole, and that isolation hospitals should be built outside the City in separate and unfrequented places. In 1665 the Great Plague of London occurred, and was attributed by some to the importation of an infected bale of silks from the Levant. According to Hodges the disease stayed among the common people, and hence was called The Poor’s Plague. He criticised the system of shutting up infected houses, and strongly recommended that those who were untouched in infected houses should receive “ accommodation outside the city.” The sick were to be removed to convenient apartments provided on purpose for them. To quote his own words, “ Timely separation of the infected from the well is absolutely necessary to be done.” For the purification of houses his directions were to place “a chafing 256 INFECTIVE DISEASES. dish in the middle of the room, where proper things were burnt and exbaled all around.” The use of sulphur and quicklime was mentioned.* Preventive measures were drawn up and published by the Lord Mayor and Aldermen. Examiners in Health, watchmen, and searchers were appointed. Surgeons were selected to assist the searchers in making their reports, and a fee of twelve pence was allowed for every case. The disease was immediately notified to the Examiner of Health. Rules for disinfec- tion were made, and every infected house was shut up, and no one removed except toa pest-house or tent. Orders were issued for cleaning and sweep- ing the streets, Hackney coaches were not to be used after conveying patients to the pest-house until they had been well aired, Regulations were also made dealing with loose persons, assemblies, and drinking taverns. The plague was scarcely over before the whole city was in flames. A new city speedily rose upon the ashes of Old London. A few sporadic cases of plague are given in the London Bills of Mortality down to 1679, when they finally ceased. London was sterilised by the great fire. “ Great as this calamity was,” wrote Thomas Pennant, “‘yet it proved the provi- dential cause of putting a stop to one of far more tremendous nature. The plague, which, for a series of ages, had, with very short intervals, visited our capital in its most dreadful forms, never appeared there again after the rebuilding of the city in a more open and airy manner ; which removed several nuisances, which if not the origin of a plague, was assuredly one great pabulum, when it had seized our streets.” In the years 1720-22 there was a terrible outburst of plague in France. It was attributed at Marseilles to importation by a ship from Syria. This caused a panic in England, and the Lords Justices considered it necessary for the public safety that measures should be taken to defend the country from a fresh invasion of this disease. Dr. Richard Mead was entrusted with drawing up the required recommendations. Mead laid it down as an essential doctrine that the plague was not native to this country, and therefore the first thing was to prevent importation, and if such a misfor- tune occurred, it was to be prevented from spreading. How was this to be accomplished ? Briefly stated, his system was as follows : Lazarettoes were to be provided for the reception of infected men and merchandise. The healthy were to change their clothes and to be kept in quarantine, and the sick were to be kept remote from the healthy and their clothes destroyed. If, through a miscarriage in the public care, by the neglect of officers or otherwise, the disease was imported, then “the civil magistrates were to make it as much for the interest of the afflicted families to discover * During outbreaks of the plague amulets were extremely popular. Walnuts filled with mercury, pieces of cloth coated with arsenic, and arsenical cakes, were very generally worn. The College of Physicians recommended issues on tbe arms and legs. Dr. Hodges wrote, that the more of the ulcers that were made the better, although their largeness answered as well as more in number. If two issues were preferred, it was recommended to make one on the left arm and the other on the opposite leg. A somewhat similar plan was adopted in Circassia by small-pox inoculators. RELAPSING FEVER. 257 their misfortune, as it was when a house was on fire, to call in the assistance of the neighbourhood.” ‘The shutting up of infected houses was condemned in the strongest terms, and a system of notification and isolation was proposed on the lines originally suggested by Dr. Hodges. 1. A Council of Health was to be established, and entrusted with such powers as might enable them to see all their orders executed with im- partial justice. 2. Notificution.—The ignorant old women employed as searchers were to be replaced by understanding and diligent men, who were to report cases immediately to the Council of Health. 3. Lsolation.—Physicians were at once to be despatched to visit the suspected cases, and when the suspicion of plague was confirmed, all the families in which the sickness occurred were to be isolated. The sick were to be separated from the sound, and isolation houses to be provided three or four miles out of the town. ! The removal of the sick was to be made at night, so as to avoid the danger of spreading infection, and all possible care was to be taken to provide such means of conveyance for the sick that they might receive no injury. The poor were to be isolated in houses provided for the purpose, but the rich were to be allowed to be in their own homes provided that care was taken to separate the healthy from the sick, and no pains were to be spared to provide clean and airy apartments. All expenses were to be paid by the public, and a reward was to be given to the person who made the first discovery of infection in any place. Mead further pointed out that general sanitation must be carefully attended to. Officers were to see that the streets were washed and kept clean from filth, carrion, and all manner of nuisances. Beggars and idle persons were to be taken up, and such miserable objects as were fit neither for the hospitals nor for the workhouses, were to be provided for in an establishment for incurables. Houses also were to be kept clean, and sulphur was to be used as a disinfectant. After centuries of experience we have learnt that the necessary conditions for avoiding the plague are more accurate knowledge on the part of the profession and the public of the way in which the disease spreads, and the adoption of sanitary precautions, which must include personal cleanliness, sanitary dwellings, absence of overcrowd- ing, immediate notification, prompt separation of the sick from the healthy, disinfection of infected dwellings, destruction of infected clothing, and extra-mural burial-or, better still, cremation. It was because the very reverse of these sanitary conditions existed that the virus of the plague found a suitable environment in Old London and in recent times in Hong-Kong. Retapsinc FEVER. Relapsing or famine fever is a contagious disease producing a state of high fever lasting about seven days, followed by apparent 17 258 INFECTIVE DISEASES. recovery, and in about fourteen days by another. attack of fever, which may be repeated after another week. Starvation, in association with overcrowding and filth, is intimately connected with the causation of the disease. The subjects of the disease contaminate the air around them, and the virus is principally conveyed by tramps and dirty people. Obermeier discovered spirilla in the blood during the paroxysms of fever. The constant occurrence of the spirillum in relapsing fever, and the fact of its not being found in any other conditions, render it very probable that it is the cause of the disease. Fic. 124.—Sprrintum OBERMEIERI IN Bioop or Monkey Inocunatep wita SPIRILLA AFTER REMOVAL OF THE SPLEEN (SOUDAKEWITCH). Spirillum Obermeieri (Spirocheia Obermeiert, Cohn).— Threads similar to the Spirillum plicatile. In length they are mostly 16 to 40 p, with regular screw-curves. They move very rapidly, and exhibit peculiar wave-like undulations. They are absent from the blood during the non-febrile intervals, but are found in the . interior of leucocytes in the spleen. In blood serum and 50 per cent. salt solution, they preserve their movements. In cover-glass preparations they are readily stained by any of the aniline dyes, and in sections, by preference, with Bismarck brown. They are not TYPHUS FEVER.—YELLOW FEVER. 259 found in the urine, sweat, or saliva. They have not been cultivated artificially on any nutrient media. Monkeys have been successfully inoculated with blood containing the spirilla by Koch, Carter and Soudakewitch ; and Koch found the spirilla in the vessels of the brain, liver, and kidneys, after death. According to Soudakewitch a fatal result is produced in monkeys if the spleen is removed, and the spirilla are found in great numbers in the blood; but if the spleen is not excised the spirilla rapidly disappear, and recovery follows. Miinch and Motschutkowsky transferred blood containing the spirilla to healthy persons, and produced typical relapsing fever. Typuus FEver. Typhus fever is a highly contagious disease, which lasts for two or three weeks, and produces a measly eruption. Like the plague, it is intimately associated with overcrowding and filth, and is liable to occur where these conditions exist in cities, in armies, and in prisons. The virus produces profound changes in the blood, and after death the internal organs are found to be congested, especially the lungs, which are very friable. The spleen is softened and often enlarged, and the blood is dark and imperfectly coagulated. The virus is dissipated by fresh air. It is given off by the breath of patients, and possibly from the skin. It clings to the clothes of patients, and the disease may be conveyed by their agency. One attack, as arule, confers immunity. Some persons are naturally insusceptible, failing to contract the disease though daily exposed to it. Hlava has described a bacterium which he believes to be the specific micro-organism. Thoinot and Calmette found the same bacterium with others, but there was no particular micro-organism constantly present. There can be little doubt that the nature of the contagium is unknown. Stamping-out System.—Sanitary precautions, and especially the operation of the Public Health Acts in relation to lodging- houses, prisons, and the better housing of the working classes, have been instrumental in almost completely stamping out the disease in this country. YeLitow FEVER. Yellow fever is a disease of tropical climates, characterised by abdominal tenderness, hemorrhagic vomiting (black-vomit), and jaundice. The disease may end fatally, or recovery occur in about two or three weeks. It is especially prevalent in the West Indies and in parts of North and South America. 260 INFECTIVE DISEASES. The virus may be conveyed by infected ships, and has in this way made its appearance at British and French seaport towns. The disease is generally believed to be contagious, but the source of the virus is not known. According to Sternberg the virus is not conveyed by water, but spreads where there is overcrowding and filth. Bacteria in Yellow Fever.—Freire asserts that there is a specific micrococeus in yellow fever which can be grown on all ordinary nutrient media, and that cultures can be used for protective inoculation with satisfactory results. Carmonay Valle also claims to have discovered the contagium ; but Sternberg, who has carried on investigations extending over several years, maintains that there is no characteristic micro-organism present in the blood or in the tissues after death. Aerobic and anaerobic cultures were made from the blood, liver, kidney, urine, stomach, and intestines. The liver was found to contain after death a number of bacilli, most frequently Bacillus coli communis and Bacillus cadaveris. Blood or fresh liver does not produce any disease in rabbits or guinea-pigs, but liver tissue kept for forty-eight hours and inoculated subcutaneously in guinea-pigs is extremely pathogenic. Similar results occur after inoculation of healthy liver which has been kept in the same way. We may conclude from these experiments that the nature of the contagium is unknown. Stamping-out System.—Sternberg states that there are many facts relating to the origin and extension of yellow fever epidemics which support the theory that the virus is present in the evacua- tions, and that accumulations of fecal matter and of organic material of animal origin furnish in certain climates a suitable soil for the development of the contagium. According to this view the evacuations should be thoroughly disinfected, and with other sanitary precautions and efficient quarantine at seaports, the disease may be stamped out, and the danger of importation from the natural home of the disease reduce] to a minimum. CHAPTER XIX. SCARLET FEVER.—MEASLES. ScaRLet FEvErR. Scarver Fever is a highly contagious disease peculiar to man. It produces inflammation of the tonsils and adjoining parts, fever, and a general punctiform eruption. The period of incubation is about «a week, and the rash usually appears on the second day. In some cases the disease manifests itself in an extremely inild form, known as latent scarlet fever, in which there is only a slight febrile attack, or a mild sore throat, with very little or no rash. Many cases would not be recognisable as such if they were not capable of conveying scarlet fever, or unless other cases followed or occurred simultaneously which were undoubtedly typical cases of the disease. The occurrence of such cases in the early history of an epidemic often causes the greatest difficulty in tracing the origin of the -outbreak, and indeed in some cases renders it quite impossible to do so. The virus is given off by the skin, in desquamation, and possibly by the urine. It maintains its vitality in clothing for months, and sometimes longer. It may also be conveyed by the hands of the physician to women during parturition. The disease may be transferred by subcutaneously inoculating persons, who have not previously contracted scarlet fever, with virus obtained by puncturing the eruption on the skin. After death the internal organs appear to the naked eye more or less healthy. The liver is soft, the kidneys are congested, the ileum is inflamed, and Peyer’s patches enlarged and congested; but these conditions are also produced by other causes. There are inflam- matory changes in the lymphatic follicles of the tonsils, and the larynx and trachea. Other morbid lesions, especially in the kidneys, are associated with the sequele and complications, and though commonly occurring in scarlet fever are also found in other diseases. 261 262 INFECTIVE DISEASES. These changes appear to be due to the poison which is in the blood, and is exereted by the kidneys. The epithelium is in a state of cloudy swelling, a condition found in other febrile diseases and in septic poisoning. Bacteria in Scarlet Fever.—The occurrence of micro-organ- isms in cases of scarlet fever has been observed by several investi- gators—Coze and Feltz, Crooke, Léftler, Babés, Heubner and Bahrdt, and notably by Frankel and Freudenberg, and more recently by Klein, the author, Raskin, and others. Coze and Feltz found cocci in the blood, and Crooke, in cases of scarlet fever with severely affected throat, found bacilli, cocci, and streptococci in the organs of the throat, and cocci in the internal organs. Crooke left it an open question whether these cocci were the specific organisms of scarlet fever, or were to be regarded as diphtheritic or septic associates. He inclined, for clinical reasons, to the latter view. LéfMer, in cases of scarlatinal diphtheria, found the same chain- forming micrococeus which he had found in typical diphtheria. Babés was able constantly to prove the presence of a strepto- coccus in inflammatory products secondary to scarlatina. Heubner and Bahrdt, in a fatal case of scarlet fever in a boy, complicated with suppuration of the finger and knee-joints, and with pericarditis, found a streptococcus identical in form with Strepto- coceus pyogenes, but cultivations were not made. The secondary infection started from diphtheritically affected tonsils, which were followed by retro-pharyngeal abscesses. Frinkel and Freudenberg examined, for micro-organisms, three cases of scarlatina with well-marked affection of the throat. In all three cases they obtained cultivations of cocci from the submaxillary lymphatic glands, spleen, liver, and kidney. These cocci could not be distinguished from Streptococcus pyogenes derived from pus, nor from the undoubtedly identical streptococcus which one of them (A. Frankel) had repeatedly cultivated in large numbers from puerperal affections. In two of the cases Streptococcus pyogenes was the only organism present, and in all three cases it was far in excess of other colonies which developed. The organisms were also found in sections of the organs by microscopical examination. Frankel and Freudenberg could in no way distinguish the strepto- coccus in searlatina from the streptococcus in pyemia and septi- cemia. The identity of this streptococcus with Streptococcus pyogenes and Streptococcus puerperalis was established by comparison of their macroscopical and microscopical appearances. in cultivations on SCARLET FEVER. 263 nutrient agar-agar, nutrient gelatine, and in broth, both at the ordinary and at higher temperatures, and also by experiments on animals. They concluded that it could be stated with certainty that the organisms in question did not stand in causal relation to scarlet fever. They considered that special methods of microscopical and biological research were apparently needed for demonstrating the true scarlet fever contagium, which probably was especially present in the skin. They considered that the presence of the a a. b. G Fic. 125.—Purn-Curtivations or Streptococcus ProcEnes. (a) On the surface of nutrient gelatine; (b) In the depth of nutrient gelatine ; (c) On the surface of nutrient agar. streptococcus was due to a secondary infection, to which the door was ‘opened by the lesions of the throat—a view which was sup- ported by the fact that the organisms were found in submaxillary lymphatic glands. They preferred to use the term “secondary ” to “complicated” or “combined” infection, because this expresses the fact that by the effect of the scarlatinal virus the soil is rendered suitable for this ubiquitous microbe when it has once gained an entrance. This streptococcus was found by Klein in five out of eleven cases 264 INFECTIVE DISEASES. of scarlet fever in man, twice in association with certain other micro-organisms, and three times alone. The micro-organisms were isolated by inoculating tubes of nutrient gelatine, solidified obliquely, by streaking the surface with blood taken from the finger, the arm, or the heart after death. Those cases from which the organism was obtained were all cases with ulcerated throat, and the culture experiments, from the living patient, were made on or about the day at which the temperature was at its maximum. sys source * . anit Eatin: [CRMERCe) ee | Dee ood. Ay 1} LFW. Severely | Finger Streptococcus Ultimately aged 5 ulcerated recovered. i Staphylococcus 1 2) K— ’ Much pyogenes aureus . aged 2 ulcerated 5 Liquefying micro- Died of | coceus a 7 Streptococcus 38| H—— L—, Ulcerated = Staphylococcus aged 8 Snepboseeus } Recovered. 4] —— (a woman), Much Arm None (Not stated.] aged 40 ulcerated 5 —— oe) (a girl), ” ” ” ” aged 19 6| B— M—-,, | Ulcerated | Finger Streptococcus Recovered, aged 15 7| E—— Ww—. Much ai None {Not stated.] aged 22 ulcerated 8| R—— H——, | Ulcerated Ae $3 35 aged 8 : 9| F G , a Heart | Streptococcus Died. aged 23 i 10 E—— F- 5 —_ es | None “9 aged 3 : 11 R—- B——-, | Advanced ae ; - aged 20 months | ulceration | Klein regards this streptococcus as the actual cause of scarlet fever in man. The author, Raskin, Holmes, and others who have investigated this subject agree with the conclusions of Friinkel and Freudenberg. The author is convinced that the streptococci in suppuration, puerperal septicemia, pyemia, and septicemia, and in certain cases of measles, scarlatina, and diphtheria, are identical; and from overwhelming evidence we are justified in concluding that—(1) The nature of the contagium of scarlet fever is unknown. (2) The streptococcus regarded by Klein as the contagium is the Streptococcus pyogenes. MILK-SCARLATINA. 265 (3) This streptococcus is found, sometimes in company with Staphylo- coccus pyogenes aureus, as a secondary result in scarlet fever and many other diseases, and its exact relation to scarlet fever and its identity with the streptococcus from pus and puerperal fever, were definitely established in 1885 by Friinkel and Freudenberg. MiuK-ScaRLATINA. It would not be necessary to say anything further on the etiology of scarlet fever if the generally accepted belief, that scarlet fever is a disease peculiar to man, were accepted by the Medical Department of the Local Government Board; but the theory is officially held that scarlet fever is in its origin a disease of cows. Bovine scarlatina is supposed to be an eruptive disease of the teats, and it is maintained that the virus, by contaminating the milk, produces scarlet fever in the human subject. As this theory is very naturally accepted by many medical officers of health, and is mentioned in English medical text-books, it will be necessary to discuss this question in considerable detail, and especially as these opinions were promulgated in this country with official support, and have since been proved to be erroneous. The theory of the origin of the exanthemata in diseases of the lower animals is a very old one. The Arabians imagined that small- pox arose from the camel. Jenner adopted a similar theory, and expressed his belief that small-pox originated in the horse, being generated by horses suffering with “greasy” hocks. Thus Jenner wrote: “May not accidental circumstances have again and again arisen, still working new changes upon it, until it has acquired the contagious and malignant form under which we now com- monly see it, making its devastations among us? and from a consideration of the change which the infectious matter undergoes from producing a disease in the cow, may we not conceive that many contagious diseases now prevalent amongst us may owe their present appearance, not to a simple, but a compound origin? For example, is it difficult to imagine that measles, scarlet fever, ulcerated sore throats, and spotted skin, all spring from the same source, assuming some variety in their forms according to the nature of their new combinations?” Baron informs us that this idea was prevalent in Jenner’s mind as early as 1787. It is related that in that year he accompanied bis nephew, George Jenner, into a stable to look at a horse with diseased heels, and, pointing to them, he remarked : ‘“‘ There is the source of small-pox. I have much to say 266 INFECTIVE DISEASES. on that subject which I hope in «ue time to give to the world.” And again in 1794, when writing in connection with this subject, he adds: “ Domestication of animals has certainly provided a prolific source of diseases among man.” Jenner’s views were found to be incorrect, and it was shown by Loy and others that the. grease bears no relation to cow-pox, and it is now known that Jenner mistook horse-pox for the disease known as the grease. No one at the present day supports Jenner’s theory of small-pox in man arising from any disease of the horse. Indeed, the origin of small-pox from a disease of the horse was not upheld even by Jenner’s pupil and nephew, Henry Jenner. The latter promulgated the idea that small-pox originated from the cow. Hie believed that small-pox, in fact, was cow-pox intensified in its virulence by being passed through man. He thus expressed himself - ‘““Nor may it, perhaps, be too hypothetical to suppose that the cow-pox may possibly be the small-pox in its original unadulterated state, before it became contaminated by passing through the impure and scrofulous habits of human constitutions.” The theory of the origin, in animals, of human febrile diseases was, later, advocated by Copland, who stated, firstly, that scarlet fever in man was originally a disease of the horse, and that it formerly occurred, and had recently occurred, epidemically as an epizootic among horses; secondly, that it was communicated in comparatively modern times from horses to man; thirdly, that it might be, and had been, communicated to the dog. But this opinion has not been accepted, for the disease called scarlatina in the horse is a non-infectious disease, generally attack- ing but one or two horses in a large stud. It neither spreads by contagion nor infection ; and Williams states that it is impossible to transmit it from the horse to any other animal, and that many cases of the so-called scarlatina of the horse are in reality identical with purpura. The theory was again revived, but in another form, and has been adopted by the Medical Department of the Local Government Board. Owing to failure in tracing, in some cases of milk scarla- tina, the contamination of the milk from a human source, the theory was started that in such cases the disease is derived from the cow—that, in other words, there is a disease, scarlet fever in the cow, which is responsible for outbreaks of scarlet fever in man. In 1882 an epidemic of scarlatina in St. Giles and St. Pancras was investigated by Mr. W. H. Power for the Board, The disease was distributed with a milk supply from a Surrey farm. In this case MILK-SCARLATINA. 267 two facts were ascertained : the one, that a cow recently come into milk had been suffering from some ailment from the time of her parturition, of which loss of hair in patches was the most con- spicuous manifestation ; the other, that there existed no discoverable means by which the milk could have received infective quality from the human subject. In 1885 an outbreak of scarlet fever occurred in Marylebone in connection with milk from a farm at Hendon, and again Power failed to establish infection from any human source in any commonly accepted way—such, for example, as handling of milk, or milk utensils, by persons carrying scarlatina infection. But on examining the cows with a view to ascertain any new condition pertaining to them, it came to light during the inquiry that some of them, which had recently been introduced from Derbyshire, were suffering from a vesicular disease of the teats. At this stage Klein became associated with Power in the inquiry; and their belief in the existence of a disease among the cows on the farm capable of producing scarlatina among human consumers of the cow’s milk, became unreserved. Klein took away with him samples of milk, contents of vesicles, and discharges from ulcers, and afterwards two of the cows were purchased and kept under observation. Dr. Cameron of Hendon has given a detailed description of the clinical history of this disease. He expressed his belief that it was a specific disease capable of being communicated to healthy cows by direct inoculation of the teats with virus conveyed by the milker from a diseased animal. The condition of the teats is described as follows: The teats became enlarged, swollen to nearly twice their natural size, and cedematous. On handling them there was no feeling of induration. Vesicles appeared on the swollen teats and upon the udder between or near the teats. These varied in number from two to four on a teat, and in size from a pea to a horsebean. The vesicle contained a clear fluid. The vesicles were rubbed and broken in milking, and left raw sores, sometimes red, in other cases pale in colour, with raised, ulcerated edges. Sometimes a few accessory vesicles formed around the margin of these ulcerated sores. After the rupture of the vesicle a brown scab formed, which might remain attached for five or six weeks, or fall off in ten days or a fortnight, a smaller one forming afterwards. A thin, watery fluid exuded from under the scab, and the sore ultimately healed. Cameron examined the teats of several cows five or six weeks 268 INFECTIVE DISEASES. after they were attacked. The scabs then varied in size from a shilling to a florin; they were about one-eighth of an inch thick in the centre, thinning off towards the edges. Some of the cows were also suffering from an eruption on the rump and hind quarter, consisting of patches of eczematous crusts. When a crust was picked off, the hair came off with it, exposing a raw, moist sore, the crusts and sores looking exactly like eczematous scabs and sores; but this condition corresponds in description with eczema, the result of ringworm which is very common in young stock. In addition to his own observations, Cameron obtained infor- mation from the farmers, and others familiar with cows, who thought they recognised in the disease at the farm one stage of a disease which they were able to describe. Cameron thus gives an account of what he and his informants together would regard as «a connected clinical history of the disease. He did not see the earlier symptoms, and hence these were of necessity learnt from other persons. The account, therefore, of these symptoms was to be held liable to future correction or modification. Cameron stated that he learnt this disease was capable of being communicated to milkers by inoculation with virus from the vesicles on the teats, though the milkers on the Hendon farm escaped. ‘A trusty informant received the virus into a recent scratch on the forefinger while milking a diseased cow. General weakness, malaise, and loss of appetite resulted, and after about four or five days a vesicle or small blister appeared on the finger. This broke, and several others formed on the back of the hand. The whole hand and fingers became swollen and inflamed, the inflammation extending in broad lines as far as the elbow. The general disturbance lasted a fortnight.” In the course of the inquiry, Cameron adds that it was strongly asserted by several people, who examined the cows, that they were suffering from cow-pox. He, however, dismissed the diagnosis of cow-pox on the ground that no papule had been observed or subsequent formation of pustule, areola, or pitting, and because the vesicles were not umbilicated. These reasons given for dismissing the diagnosis of cow-pox at Hendon were totally inadequate; a comparison having been made between the characters of the eruption of vaccinia as it appears on an infant’s arm, instead of the eruption of the natural or so-called spontaneous disease on the teats of the cow. MILK-SCARLATINA. 269 Klein stated that on the teats and udders of two cows which he investigated there were several flat irregular ulcers, varying in diameter from one-quarter to three-quarters of an inch. Some ulcers were more or less circular, others extended in a longitudinal direction on the teat. The ulcers were covered with a brownish or reddish-brown scab. The animals looked thin, but not strikingly so. In feeding capacity, milking power, and body temperature there was nothing abnormal. Four calves were inoculated in the corium of the groin and the inside of the ear, with scrapings from the ulcers after removal of the crusts. In one, which may be taken as an example of the result obtained, there was vesiculation at the margin of the spot inoculated, and in the centre the commencement of the formation of a crust. On the seventh day each sore on the ear had enlarged to about half an inch in breadth, and was covered in its whole extent by a brownish crust. On the eighteenth day they had all healed up and become converted into flat scars. To search for micro-organisms, Klein removed the crust from an ulcer on the teat, scraped off the most superficial layer, squeezed the ulcer, and made cover-glass preparations. Tubes of nutrient gelatine and nutrient agar-agar were also inoculated, and a streptococcus was isolated which in morphological and cultural characters agreed with those of Streptococcus pyogenes. Two calves were inoculated in the groin with the cultivated micro-organism. One calf died in twenty-seven days. At the necropsy there were found peritonitis, and hemorrhagic spots on the omentum ; the liver, kidneys, and lungs were congested, and there were petechie under the pleura, and pericarditis. The second calf was killed, and at the necropsy the lungs and kidneys were congested, and there were hemorrhagic patches on the spleen. In these cases, the post-mortem appearances and anatomical features recalled to Klein the lesions of scarlatina. In the kidney, for example, the cortex was congested, and there were hemorrhages, glomerulo-nephritis, and granular or opaque swelling of the epithelial cells and infiltration with round cells. From the blood of the heart the streptococcus, which had been used in the inoculation, was recovered. In view of this evidence it was con- cluded that the streptococcus was the virus of the cow disease, and that it produced in calves a disease very closely resembling that of scarlatina in man. Two of the cows selected from the Hendon farm were killed, and it was observed in one that the lungs were congested, and 270 INFECTIVE DISEASES. that there were numerous adhesions by recent soft lymph between the lower lobes of the lung and the costal pleura. In the liver there were several reddish streaks and patches. The spleen and kidneys, with the exception of slight congestion, appeared normal. Sections of the kidney showed well-marked glomerulo-nephritis and infiltration of the sheath of the cortical arterioles with numerous round cells. The epithelium of the convoluted tubules was swollen, opaque, and in many places disintegrating. In the other cow there was great congestion of the lungs and pleural adhesions ; the cortex of the kidney was congested, but its medulla was pale. On microscopic examination there was a good deal of round- celled infiltration in the walls of the infundibula and bronchi in the lnng, and round the arterioles in the kidney. In sections of the ulcers on the teats, the corium was found to be infiltrated throughout the whole extent of the ulcer with round cells. In the superficial layers of the stratum Malpighi, close to the stratum lucidum, as also in the stratum lucidum itself, there were numerous cavities of different sizes. These cavities lay side by side, the most superficial ones being covered by the stratum lucidum, or extending between the layers of this stratum. At the marginal parts the cavities, although placed side by side, were well separated from one another by thicker or thinner trabecule, composed of epithelium, while at or near the centre of the ulcer these trabecule were destroyed, the cavities had become confluent, and the covering layers of the cuticle having here also given way, their contents extended on to the free surface of the ulcer. In short, Klein states that all the anatomical details of the distribution and arrangement of these cavities recalled vividly the conditions observed in the vesicles of cow-pox. Yet as a result of this investigation he concluded that the cow disease at Hendon was bovine scarlatina, and that towards its study and supervision every effort ought to be directed in order to check the spread of scarlet fever in man. As a result of this conclusion, the Board of Agriculture resolved to have the whole subject fully investigated, and the author was directed to study the bacteriology and micro-pathology of this disease and to report thereon. Professor Axe investigated the origin of the outbreak of the disease in the cows, and Professor M‘Fadyean carried out an investigation into the possibility of inoculating cows with the virus from cases of scarlet fever in man. MILK-SCARLATINA. 271 THE AvutTHor’s INVESTIGATION. An outbreak of an eruptive disease of the teats, alleged to be identical with the so-called Hendon cow disease, was raging in.some farms in Wiltshire. In this case every facility was given by the owner of the estate for a thorough investigation into the disease. Not only were animals sent from the farm to London, but the author was allowed to visit the farms, to inspect all the infected animals, and to make every investigation, with the hearty co- operation of the bailiff of the farms, and the voluntary assistance of the head cowmen and those under them. Some of these cowmen were unusually intelligent, while two had had experience of cows for more than half a century. Thus, theré was not only every opportunity for studying the disease on the lines indicated by Klein, but it was possible by repeated visits to the farms to enter into the clinical history of the disease in the cow, to study very fully the nature of the disease on the hands of the milkers, and to trace the probable mode of its introduction on the estate, and the way in which it spread from one part of the herd to another. Two cows were sent to London with disease of the teats and of the udder between the teats. On the right teats of one there were numerous sores, covered with crusts varying in size and in thickness, and generally fissured. In some they were flat, in others conical ; some were with difficulty removed with forceps, others were readily detached. The crusts varied in colour from reddish-brown to very dark brown or almost black. .On detaching or scraping a crust there was a granulating and somewhat indurated base. On the right anterior teat there were several ulcers, from which appa- rently the thick crusts had been detached, and new scabs were forming. On the left posterior teat there were unusually large, dark brown, or blackish crusts, covering a very extensive area of ulceration, extending over the whole of the lower third of the teat. In the other cow from Wiltshire there was the same disease on the teats, but not in such a severe form. The sores were covered with thick crusts, but though varying in size they were more regular in form, and more circumscribed. Having entirely removed the crusts from some of the ulcers, a number of inoculations in nutrient gelatine and nutrient agar-agar were made from the discharge, and cover-glass preparations were made and stained in the ordinary way. Cultures were obtained of the organisms commonly found in pus. 2T2 INFECTIVE DISEASES, With the discharge and with scrapings from the ulcers two calves were inoculated. Of the two calves, one was inoculated by scarification in both ears ; the other, a small calf, was scarified in the left ear. Scrapings from the ulcers were rubbed into the places thus prepared. In addition, in the small calf an incision was made through the corium in the left groin, scrapings from different ulcers on the teats were well rubbed in with the blade of the scalpel, and a portion of crust inserted into a small pocket in the subcutaneous tissue. In the ears and the groin there were positive results. In the large brown calf one of two places inoculated in the right ear passed through the following changes : On the third day there was apparent vesiculation and commencing formation of crust. From day to day the crust thickened, and on the eighth day the crust was at its height and detached at its edges. By removing the scab an ulcer was exposed ; there was slight inflammatory thickening. About the thirteenth day the ulcer had quite healed. Very similar appearances resulted in the ear of the smaller calf. The result of inoculation in the groin was of a very much severer character. In the course of two or three days the incision had apparently commenced to heal by scabbing, but there was a surround- ing area which was inflamed, and painful on manipulation. The inflammatory thickening which resulted continued to increase around the seat of inoculation, and the thickening could be felt to extend deeply into the groin. Suppuration followed, and on firm pressure pus welled up through the wound. The wound then showed very little disposition to heal, and the calf began to exhibit marked constitutional symptoms. During the second week after inoculation the animal became very dull, and was reported by the attendant as refusing to feed. Diarrhcea supervened, and lasted for several days, and bloody urine was passed. The calf was also noticed to cough, and the cough gradually increased in severity. Thirty-six days after the date of inoculation it was decided to kill the calf and examine the condition of the viscera. The appearances which were found at the post-mortem examination were as follows :— The upper and middle lobes of each lung were adherent to the walls of the chest; there was congestion, especially of the middle lobe, and patches of recent adherent lymph. Posterior parts of the upper lobes of both lungs were completely consolidated, and on section varied in colour from brick-red to greyish-white. The interlobular tissue was infiltrated with inflammatory products, which mapped out the tissue of the lung in small indurated areas, in which the tissue was granular-looking and friable. THE AUTHOR'S INVESTIGATION. 273 These appearances in the upper lobes were due to septic pleuro-pneumonia. They closely resembled, and were supposed to be due to, infectious pleuro-pneumonia. They were, however, found identical with the con- dition observed in septic pleuro-pneumonia in calves, and the disease was not conveyed by infection to other animals in the same stall. Scattered through the other lobes of both lungs were white, mostly firm, nodules raised above the level of the surface of the lung. They were surrounded by a zone of congestion, and in some cases sections were composed of indurated, in others of friable, lung tissue. In the posterior part of the right upper lobe there was a recent infarct. The bronchial glands at the roots of each lung were enlarged to two or three times their natural size, and were firm and hard on section. The parietal surface of the pericardium was covered with recent adherent lymph. The visceral surface of the pericardium was normal. Along the external surface of the aorta were chains of enlarged lymphatic glands connected by dilated lymphatic vessels. These glands were dark red or purplish in colour, from hemor- rhage into their substance. The heart was normal, and the endocardium not stained. There were chains of red glands on the cesophagus similar to those along the aorta. The appearance of the mesenteric glands was very striking. The mesentery, along the lymphatic vessels, was dotted with glands, varying in size from a large shot toa pea, which were deep red or prune-coloured. In addition, there were here and there enlarged glands without hemorrhage into their substance, and greyish in colour. There were scattered petechize on the spleen. The kidneys were firm on section, and there was marked congestion in both, while it was more pronounced in one kidney than the other. The liver was congested, the congestion being more marked in patches. Sections from the consolidated upper lobes showed under the micro- scope thickening of the pleura and infiltration with round cells. The exudation filled the alveoli, and was breaking down in some vases in the centre. The vessels were injected, and there were hemorrhages into the alveoli. The periphery of the lobules was infiltrated with round cells. In sections of the kidney there was slight infiltration around glomeruli and arterioles with round cells; the epithelium in the convoluted tubules was granular and disintegrating ; there was hemorrhage in the straight tubules, and engorgement of vessels. In sections of liver the inter- and intra-lobular vessels were engorged; there were interlobular collections of round cells displacing the liver cells, and the interlobular connective tissue was infiltrated with round cells; the liver cells were granular and cloudy. There can be no doubt from the symptoms and post-mortem appearances that this culf had been suffering from septicemia as the result of introducing the septic virus and crust subcutaneously in the groin. The two Wiltshire cows were killed, and there was nothing of importance to note in one, but in the other an incision into the udder revealed an enormous abscess. 18 274 INFECTIVE ‘DISEASES, Though the naked-eye appearances of the kidney in this case were practically healthy, the results of examining sections of the kidney under the microscope were extremely instructive and interest- ing, as they showed that marked changes had taken place which were indicative of septic complication. The sections showed glomerulo-nephritis ; there was infiltration of the capsule of Bowman with round cells; there was infiltration also of the sheaths of the vessels with round cells, especially in the cortex. The blood-vessels in the boundary zone of the medulla were engorged, the arterioles of the glomeruli were also engorged, and there were slight hemorrhages into the capsule. The epithelium of the convoluted tubules was granular, opaque, and in some parts breaking down. Sections of the ulcers of the teats of these cows were also carefully examined, and the appearances corresponded exactly with the description given by Klein. On visiting the farms it was found that there were altogether about a hundred and sixty cows. Only a few had proved refractory, and had not taken the disease at all. The rest had contracted the disease in varying degrees of severity. About fifty at a time were dry, and they escaped until they were in milk again. The milk was drunk on the farms and in the village, and a quantity was supplied to a large town. Most careful inquiries were instituted to ascertain the existence of scarlatina among consumers of the milk. So far the research was completely analogous to the Hendon investigation; but, in spite of the contamination of the milk, no cases of scarlatina were found either on the farms or in the village, and there was no epidemic in the town in which the milk was distributed. The disease, in fact, was cow-pox, and in no way connected with scarlet fever; and to assist others who may undertake a similar inquiry the details will now be given of the author’s investigation into the nature of the outbreak in Wiltshire. THE DISEASE PROVED TO BE Cow-Pox. Locality of the Wiltshire Outbreak.—There is considerable interest attached to the fact that the farms were situated a few miles from Cricklade. They are close to the borders of Gloucestershire, and about twenty-five miles from Berkeley. They are, therefore, within that district in which in Jenner’s time cow-pox was particularly prevalent. Time of Year.—The outbreak commenced about the end of September 1886, and’ lasted until about the middle of December. In an outbreak AN OUTBREAK OF COW-POX. 275 in 1885, a few miles from these farms, but on a separate estate, the disease appeared in June and July. Origin of the Outbreak.—The author made careful inquiries as to the origin of the outbreak, but beyond ascertaining with certainty that the disease appeared first at one farm, and was conveyed from this to the other farms, all evidence was negative. The milkers were unable to say whether it commenced in one particular cow or whether it broke out in several simultaneously. The only information which could be obtained, which was very suggestive, was that the milkers were in the habit of receiving their friends from neighbouring farms on Sundays. The friends would assist in the milking, to get the work done as quickly as possible on these occasions. As it was reported that the same disease had occurred that summer on a neighbouring farm, it is quite possible that it was introduced by one of the milkers’ friends. Mode of Dissemination—When the disease made its first appearance, the bailiff, attributing it to the farm being, for some reason, unhealthy, decided to remove the cows to other farms. The herd was therefore divided and sent to two other farms. From these cows the disease was communicated to healthy cows, and, as this interchange was repeated, not only of the cows, but of the milkers, the disease was communicated to four separate farms. In all cases the disease was limited to the teats, and was conveyed from the teats of a diseased cow to the teats of a healthy cow by the hand of the milker. In no case was there any evidence of the disease being produced in healthy cows by other means than contact. Bulls and dry cows remained free from the disease, while the cows in milk, numbering about a hundred and twenty, were all attacked, with the exception of about a dozen, which proved to be entirely refractory. These facts explain how it is that the disease has been known from time immemorial as the “cow-pox.” We never hear of cattle-pox or bull-pox. We have not, in other words, to deal with an infectious disease like cattle-plague or pleuro-pneumonia, but with a disease which is communicated solely by contact. The disease was only observed in the cows in milk, and was limited to the parts which come in contact with the hand of the milker. The virus was mechanically transferred from diseased to healthy cows, being communicated to all, or nearly all, the animals in the same shed, whether the milker had vesicles on his hand or not. Character of the Eruption on the Cow.—In a recent case which was carefully examined the teats were visibly inflamed, partly red and partly livid in colour. On each teat there were vesicles, some broken, and others which appeared to be just forming. In other cases there was nothing more than the remains of broken and dried vesicles, and more or less characteristic crusts on the teats. On visiting a byre at the time that the cows were brought in to be milked, it was a striking sight to look along the line and see one animal after another affected with the eruption ; and thus one character 276 INFECTIVE DISEASES. of the disease was clearly shown—the tendency to spread through a whole herd. On examining the eruption carefully, the degree of severity was found to differ very much in different animals. In a few cases the condition was most distressing, both to the cow and to the observer. In such cases the teats were encrusted with huge, dark brown or black crusts, which, when handled in milking, were broken and detached, exposing a bleeding, suppurating, ulcerated base. Such ulcers varied in size from a shilling to a florin, and in form were circular, ovoid, or irregular. Weeks afterwards, when the animals had recovered, the site of these ulcers was marked by irregular scars. All the milkers agreed as to the general characters of the malady, laying particular stress on the teats being red, swollen, and painful when handled. Vesicles would then appear on the teats—two, three, four, or more on each teat. They were soon broken in milking, and irritated into sores, which became covered with thick crusts. From four to six weeks elapsed before they had entirely healed. Other more observant milkers insisted that before the teats were red and swollen, spots or pimples first appeared which came to a head. This head increased if it was not broken, which might be the case if it was situated between the bases of the teats, until it formed a greyish vesicle of the size of a threepenny-piece or even larger. General Symptoms in the Cow.—As to the general condition of the cows nothing abnormal was observed. They appeared in the best of health, and in only one particular was any difference from their condition in health stated to exist. This was, that in the majority of the cases there could be no doubt that the milk had diminished. This might escape notice by inexperienced milkers in any particular animal, but the total amount of milk supplied by the herd was considerably below the average. History of the Eruption communicated to the Milkers.—The most striking characteristic of this outbreak was the communicability of the disease to the milkers. A milker, with vesicles which presented typically the characters of casual cow-pox, was taken to London and kept under observation. The various cases will be described in the order in which they first presented themselves, their history being given as much as possible in their own words. CasE I.—J. R., milker, informed the author that he was the first to catch the eruption from the cows. He stated that it came as a hard, painful spot, which formed “ matter” and then a “ big scab.”” He had been inoculated about seven weeks previously. He pointed to the scar which remained on his right hand. This scar presented the characters of an irregular cicatrix, indicating considerable loss of substance. He stated that he had also two places on his back, where he supposes he had inoculated himself by scratching. He had continued milking ever, since, but had had no fresh places. Case II.—W. H., milker. He stated that he was inoculated from the cows about the same time as J. R. They were the two milkers of the herd in which the cow-pox first made its appearance. The eruption AN OUTBREAK OF COW-POX. 277 appeared in one place on each hand. He pointed to two irregular scars as the remains of the eruption. Case DiI—J. L., milker, stated that he also caught the disease from the cows. On his right hand a spot appeared which formed a blister, then discharged matter and produced a bad sore. Lumps formed at the bend of his elbow and in his armpit. He lost his appetite, felt very poorly, and was obliged to leave off work for two or three days. Case IV.—W. K., a labourer on the farm, was put on as a milker to take the place of one of the others with bad hands. After his fifth or sixth milking—that is to say, about three days after first milking the cows, —pimples appeared on his hands, which became blistered and then ran on to bad sores. He pointed to three irregular scars on the first and third fingers and palm of the right hand. Lumps appeared in his elbow and in his armpit, but he did not feel very poorly in consequence. Case V.—J. F., milker, stated that about a month ago he noticed spots which appeared on both hands. His fingers swelled and were pain- ful. He said it came first like a pimple, and felt bard. Then it “ weeped out” water in four or five days. There were red marks creeping up to his arm. There was a sort of throbbing pain, and he could not sleep at night. On the right hand there was a scar, but on the left hand there was an ulcer about the size of a shilling covered with a thick black crust. The crust was partially detached, and exposed a granulating ulcer. It was in this stage the exact counterpart of the ulcers on the cow’s teats. Case VI.—W. H., junior, milker, stated that he had both hands bad about a month previously : first on the index finger of the left hand, and then on the right hand on his knuckle and between the first and second fingers. He said that it came up like a hard pimple, and the finger became swollen and red. After a few days it “weeped out” water, and then matter came away. Both his arms were swollen, bat his left arm was the worst. About a fortnight after, he noticed kernels in his armpits, which were painful and kept him awake at night. His arms became worse, he could not raise them, and he had to give up milking. He also had had a “ bad place” on the lower lip. On examina- tion, I found that the axillary glands were still enlarged and tender. He volunteered the statement that the places were just like the sore teats. Case VIL—J. H., the bailiffs son, also milked the cows. He had a sore on the upper lid of his right eye and on his left hand. In both cases he had been previously scratched by a cat, and the scratches were inoculated from the cow’s teats. The right hand also had been inoculated. The eruption broke out a fortnight previously. His hands were swollen, red, and hot. He felt very poorly and went to bed. Little spots like white blisters appeared on the back of his right hand. His mother remarked that they “rose up exactly as in vaccination.” Thick dark brown scabs formed. He was very ill for two or three days. but did not send for a doctor. He had painful lumps at the bend of his arm and in the armpit. He gave up milking, and had not taken to it since. On examining him, the thick crusts on his right hand were identical 278 INFECTIVE DISEASES. with the stage of scabbing in vaccinia. The scabs fell off in about three weeks toa month, and left permanent, depressed scars. Case VIII.—W. P., milker. This case was pointed out on the occasion of another visit, and is the only one in which the eruption was seen in its earlier stages. The history of this boy is as follows. He had taken the place of one of the other milkers who had vesicles on his fingers, and had been obliged to give up milking. After the seventh time of milking he noticed a small pimple on his right cheek. This became larger and vesicular. On examination it presented a depressed vesicle with a small central yellowish crust and a tumid margin, the whole being surrounded by a well-marked areola and considerable surrounding induration. On raising the central incrustation a crater-like excavation was seen, in which lymph welled up and trickled down the boy’s cheek. On the following day the crust had re-formed, and was studded with coagulated lymph. The areola became more marked, and on pricking the margin of the vesicle, the exuding contents were slightly turbid. From this day the surrounding infiltration increased enormously, the whole cheek was inflamed, and the eyelids so cedematous that the eye was almost closed. There was enlargement of the neighbouring lymphatic glands. The crust which had re-formed thickened day by day. It retained the character of central depression, and was situated on a reddened, raised, and indurated base (Plate VII.). From this date the surrounding induration gradually diminished. The crust changed in colour from dark brown to black, and finally fell off, leaving an irregular, depressed scar. This scar, when seen several months afterwards, was found to be a permanent disfigurement. The eruption appeared on the fourth day after exposure to infection, and allowing two days for incubation, the vesicle was at its height on the seventh or eighth day, and a typical tamarind-stone crust fell off on the twenty-first day after infection, leaving a depressed, irregular cicatrix. A vesicle also formed on the thumb of the left hand. Two days after the pimple appeared on his cheek, the lad said that he first noticed a pimple on his thumb, and this, on examination, presented a greyish flattened vesicle, about the size of a sixpence. Later, its vesicular character was much more marked, and a little central crust had com- menced to form. The margins became very tumid, giving it a marked appearance of central depression. The vesicle was punctured at its margin with a clean needle, and from the beads of lymph which exuded a number of capillary tubes were filled. Two days afterwards suppuration had commenced, the vesicle con- tained a turbid fluid, and the areola was well marked. Later, the crust had assumed a peculiar slate-coloured hue, and, on pressing it, pus welled up through a central fissure. The areola had increased, and there was considerable inflammatory thickening. The lymphatic glands in the armpit were enlarged and painful. Though there was deep ulceration, which left a permanent scar, the ulceration did not assume DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VII. Casual Cow-pox. ° Fig. 1—Case of W. P——,a milker, infected from the teats of a cow with natural cow-pox. There was a large depressed vesicle with a small central crust and a tumid margin, the whole being surrounded by a well-marked areola and considerable surrounding induration. Fiag. 2.—The same case a week later, showing a reddish-brown crust on a reddened elevated and indurated base. CASUAL COW -POX. Plate VIL. Vincent Brooks, Day & Son, Lith, AN OUTBREAK OF COW-POX. 279 quite so severe a character as in some of the other milkers. Possibly this may be accounted for to some extent by the fact that the pock was covered with a simple dressing instead of being subjected to the irritation and injury incidental to working on the farm. Revaccination of the Milkers.—There were in all eight milkers, varying in age from seventeen to fifty-five, who had vesicles on their hands from milking the cows. Seven had been vaccinated in infancy, but. not since ; one had been revaccinated on entering the navy at fifteen. They were all revaccinated by a public vaccinator after complete recovery from the casual cow-pox (that is to say, from three to four months afterwards), and were all completely protected. On the other hand, two of the three milkers who had escaped infection from the casual cow-pox were also vaccinated, with the result in one of typical revaccination, in the other of very considerable local irritation. Retro-vaccination of Calves.—The result of retro-vaccinating calves with the humanised lymph was strictly in accordance with the experience of Ceely, who has pointed out that in retro-vaccination from the milker’s hands the results are doubtful, and depend greatly on the animals selected. “Those of a light colour and with thin skins were generally preferred, but often without avail, scarcely one-half of the operations succeeding.” “Vaccine lymph, in passing from the cow to man, undergoes a change which renders it less acceptable and less energetic on being returned to many individuals of the class producing it ; some refuse it altogether.” Two cases out of four succeeded, and an eruption was produced with all the typical characters of vaccinia, but running rather a rapid course, and the protection passing off after a few weeks, while the result obtained in calves inoculated with pus or scrapers from ulcers was in accordance with what is well known to occur if pus instead of lymph is taken for carrying on calf to calf vaccination. That the cow-pox in Wiltshire was identical with the so-called Hendon cow-disease there can be little room for doubt, for in both cases we find that— 1, The disease spread through a whole herd of milch cows. 2. The disease was characterised by the appearance of vesicles, which were broken by the hand of the milker, and irritated into deep ulcerations. 3. The disease was conveyed from one cow to another by the hand of the milker. 4, The vesicular eruption was communicable to the hand of the milker. 5. The disease was not fatal, and in cows which were killed and examined the post-mortem appearances could not be distinguished from accidental complications. 6. The naked-eye appearances and the duration of the ulcers of the teats were the same. 280 INFECTIVE DISEASES, 7. Sections of the ulcers showed under the microscope identical appearances of a cellular character, and the purulent discharge of the ulcers contained pyogenic cocci. 8. The results produced by inoculation of calves with the septic virus were identical. If we examine the chain of argument which has been brought forward to maintain the existence of cow-scarlatina at Hendon, we find that it was urged :— 1. That the Hendon cow disease was a disease in which the post-mortem appearances resembled scarlatina. 2. That this disease was associated with a streptococcus, which produced, by inoculation in calves, a disease with post-mortem appearances similar to those of the Hendon cows. 3. That a streptococcus regarded as identical with the one above mentioned was found in certain cases of scarlatina in man, which when inoculated in calves produced post-mortem appearances similar to the post-mortem appearances in the original Hendon cows and in certain cases of scarlatina in man. But the microscopical appearances of the kidney of a Wiltshire cow were identical with those which were regarded as indicating scarlatina in a Hendon cow; and, indeed, the statements as to the post-mortem appearances in the Hendon cows, when studied, not only do not necessarily indicate scarlatina, but they cannot even be considered of primary importance, or as throwing much light on the question of scarlatina at all. The description of the Naked-eye appearances in both cows only suggests coincident pleurisy or pleurisy with pneumonia. The microscopical appearances in both were suggestive of septic complication. A careful examination of the post-mortem appearances of calves inoculated with scraping of an ulcer of a Hendon cow, or with cultivations of the streptococcus from certain cases of scarlatina, brings to light much more striking changes. These appearances, however, cannot be regarded as indicative of scarlatina. They are in reality the post-mortem appearances of septic poisoning, and occur commonly in many diseases. This is clearly shown by com- paring the post-mortem appearances in the calf which was killed while suffering from septicemia as the result of inoculation from the ulcers of a Wiltshire cow. These visceral changes are not to be distinguished from the post-mortem appearances described in the calves inoculated by Klein. Consequently, that the strepto- AN. OUTBREAK OF COW-POX. 281 coccus found in certain cases of scarlet fever should produce on inoculation in calves certain post-mortem appearances which are found in many diseases, and should fail to produce fever, ulceration of the tonsils, or scarlatinal rash, or any condition in the least resembling, clinically, the disease in man, and yet that the result should be regarded as scarlatina in the calf, is a conclusion quite untenable. It is true that visceral lesions similar in character were produced in calves whether inoculated with scrapings or with streptococci from ulcers of the Hendon cows or with streptococci from certain cases of scarlet fever. In both cases the streptococcus is pathogenic, and inoculation of Streptococcus pyogenes or the inoculation of septic virus, is liable to produce septicemia. These facts constitute a mass of evidence which justifies the conviction that the pathological data which appeared to support the theory that the vesicular disease of the teats of cows at Hendon was scarlatina in the cow, admit of an entirely different interpretation, and there can be no longer any doubt that the milk was not infected by the cows but with the virus of scarlet fever from some human source which Mr. Power failed to discover. All the other evidence reported to the Board of Agriculture pointed to the same conclusion. The disease at Hendon was admittedly introduced from Derbyshire; and from Professor Axe’s report it appears that only a part of the herd was sold to the farmer at Hendon; other cows with the same eruption were transferred to other dairy farms, and the disease communicated to healthy cows as at Hendon, but in no instance did scarlet fever occur among the consumers of the milk. At the farm of the brother of the dealer. the disease was communicated to three of the milkers, and the eruption diagnosed by Dr. Bates as vaccinia. All this evidence must be regarded as conclusive. The con- tamination of the milk at Hendon with scarlet fever must neces- sarily have been a mere coincidence; and the conclusion that the milk could not possibly have become infected from any human source is untenable. Professor Axe even ascertained that scarlet fever existed at Hendon during several months of 1885, and that the dwellings where cases occurred stood within six hundred yards of the cowsheds which contained the incriminated cows, and that out of fourteen men on the farm six lived in a district where cases occurred. Professor Axe has also stated that the father and brother of a girl with scarlet fever, visited the dairy during her illness. Whether any of those engaged on the 282 INFECTIVE DISEASES. farm suffered from latent scarlet fever does not appear to have been ascertained. There is, it is true, no evidence to show that any one daily carried infection to the milk, but the exact path of infection is not always easy to trace; and because it was not actually traced it was hardly reasonable to assume that the possibility of contamination from a human source could be altogether eliminated. In attempting to communicate scarlet fever to cows Professor M‘Fadyean confirmed the negative results which had been experi- enced in some earlier experiments by Klein. In 1882 Klein inoculated and fed cows and yearling heifers with diseased products from human patients, using desquamated cuticle and the discharges from the throat; but the experiments all failed. M‘Fadyean’s failures were still more marked. Cows and calves were inoculated with blood from scarlet fever patients, and they were made to drink water thickened with desquamated cuticle, but all the experiments proved unsuccessful. The author believes that the outbreak at Hendon was one of cow-pox, which was prevalent in this country in 1886. The outbreak in Wiltshire could not be distinguished bacteriologically or clinically or in its micropathology, from the disease at Hendon, and the Wiltshire outbreak proved on investigation to be true cow- pox. This conclusion was questioned at the time, as cow-pox was generally believed to be extinct in England; but that view is entirely fallacious, and the author’s conclusions have since been fully confirmed by independent observers, whose work will be referred to in another chapter (p. 321). Stamping-out System.—The Notification Act of 1890 may he voluntarily adopted in sanitary districts, but it would be a great advantage if notification were carried out uniformly all over the country. Prompt information may lead to detecting the origin of cases of scarlet fever, and isolation and disinfection will assist in pre- venting its spread. Epidemics have occurred on a large scale owing to scarlet fever existing’ among those engaged in dairy work, and the precaution not being taken of stopping the milk supplied to the consumers. Scarlet fever cannot be so readily controlled as small- pox, for it may be spread by mild cases before the nature of the disease is suspected, and small-pox cannot be conveyed in milk. MEASLES. 283 MEASLEs. Measles is a contagious disease peculiar to man. It lasts for one or two weeks, and produces fever, catarrh of the respiratory mucous membrane, anda characteristic rash. It is highly contagious, especially before the nature of the disease is revealed; there is consequently great difficulty in preventing its spread in schools and households. The contagium appears to be given off from the body, principally if not entirely, by the breath. One attack is pro- tective against future attacks. The whole population of a country may acquire a certain degree of immunity. Measles introduced into countries where it was previously unknown assumes a most malig- nant form. There are no characteristic post-mortem appearances. Bacteria in Measles.—Micrococci have been found in the blood, catarrhal exudation, and skin, by Keating, Babés, and others, but they are accidental epiphytes of no importance, or associated with secondary complications, as in scarlet fever. Canon and Pielicke have found in the blood small bacilli varying in form. They do not grow on nutrient agar or blood serum, but cultures were obtained by pricking the finger of a patient suffering from measles, and allowing the blood to drop into sterilised broth. After a few days the broth became cloudy, and later, a flocculent deposit formed. The bacilli were also obtained from the nasal and conjunctival secretions. The nature of the contagium of measles is unknown. Stamping-out System.—Measles is not easily controlled by the stamping-out system ; it is, in fact, extremely difficult, almost impos- sible, to prevent its spread, as it is especially infectious during the period of incubation. Notification, isolation, and disinfection assist in controlling an epidemic, but the value of the system does not apply to the same extent in measles as in other infectious diseases. CHAPTER XX. SMALL-POX.—CATTLE PLAGUE. SMALL-POx. SMALL-Pox is an infectious and inoculable disease of man, charac- terised by sudden and severe fever, followed in forty-eight hours by a characteristic papular eruption which gradually becomes vesicular and then pustular. The virus is contained in the vesicles, and in a concentrated form in mature pustules. It also passes into the air from the breath and skin. Infection may occur from the dead body, and clothes and bedding may retain the contagium for months, One attack, as a rule, gives immunity against future attacks. Small-pox is undoubtedly a disease foreign to this country. Its home is in the East. Some of the old writers held that it spread to Europe from Alexandria about the year 640 a.p., following in the wake of the Arab conquests in Egypt, Palestine, Persia, along the Asiatic coast, through Lycia, Gallicia, along the coast of Africa, and across the Mediterranean to Spain ; others maintained that it was not introduced until the end of the eleventh or beginning of the twelfth century, by the returning Crusaders. At any rate, small- pox was imported from the East, and probably from Egypt. Hero- dotus, who visited Egypt, leads us to infer that epidemics were unknown there during the rule of the Pharaohs; but Egypt undoubtedly became a hotbed of pestilence during the Mohammedan occupation. Prosper Alpinus imagined that both the plague and the small-pox were concocted in the putrid waters of the Nile, but he would probably have been more correct if he had suggested that they arose from the insanitary condition of the Arab conquerors and their filthy camp followers, who did their best to destroy all that remained of that magnificent civilisation which had existed in the days of the ancient Egyptians. We do not know the exact period at which small-pox was -first imported into England, and the records of the disease are very meagre until the sixteenth century. 284 SMALL-POX. 285 In 1593 Simon Kellwaye appended to his work on the Plague a short treatise on the small-pox. ‘ Oftentimes,” he wrote, ‘“ those that are infected with the plague are in the end of the disease sometimes troubled with the small pocks or measels, as also by good observation it hath been seen that theyare fore-runners or warnings of the plague to come.” According to Kellwaye the disease arose from the ‘“‘excrements of all the foul humours in our bodies, which striving with the purest doth cause a supernatural heat and ebullition of our blood, always beginning with a feaver in the most part.” ' Small-pox steadily increased in the seventeenth century until it was a formidable scourge, for no advantage was taken of all the experi- ence which had been gained in dealing with the plague. No public measures were adopted to cope with the disease, and the people came to regard the new pestilence as a visitation which was unavoidable. Early in the eighteenth century, small-pox inoculation was introduced, and this was superseded in the nineteenth century by vaccination. Examination of small-pox cases after death does not reveal any characteristic lesions in the internal organs, but sections of small- pox vesicles show an important structure. A vesicle is formed by the exudation raising up the outer layer of epidermis, and the chief feature is the formation of a vacuolated structure in which, especially in the later stages, bacteria are found in abundance. Bacteria in Small-pox.—Cohn and Weigert found cocci in variolous lymph. Hlava found Streptococcus pyogenes in the pustules, arid Garré streptococci in the internal organs in a case of variola hemorrhagica. In a fatal case of variola complicated with pemphigus Garré found a streptococcus in the pemphigus vesicles. Klein and Copeman have found a small bacillus which they regard as characteristic, but its biological characters are unknown, as it will not grow on any nutrient media. The bacteria commonly found in variolous pus are the usual pyogenic organisms. The nature of the contagium of small-pox is unknown. Protective Inoculation. Experience had taught that a person was not, as a rule, attacked with small-pox a second time; but when and how the method of artificially inducing a mild form of the disease was discovered, or when this preventive treatment was first employed, is unknown. Avicenna of Bokhara was credited with the discovery, and it was supposed that the practice was carried by Tartar and Chinese traders to Surat, Bengal, and China, and by the Mahommedan pilgrims to Mecca. In Constantinople it was supposed by some to have been introduced from the Morea by an old woman, and by others by the women of Circassia, ‘The 286 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Circassian women fastened three needles together, and pricked the skin over the pit of the stomach and heart, the navel, the right wrist, and the left ankle. The variolous matter was applied to the bleeding points, and the eruption came out in five or six days. In Constantinople scarifications were made on the forehead, wrists, and legs, and carefully selected virus applied to the incisions. The needle used was a three-edged surgeon’s needle, or the operation was performed with a lancet. The virus was obtained by pricking the vesicles, and pressing out the matter into a clean glass vessel. The Armenians preferred to be inoculated in both thighs. In Barbary a slight wound was made between the thumb and forefinger, and the virus obtained from a mild form of small-pox. In Hindustan the operation was performed at certain seasons of the year, and a preparatory regimen enforced. The inoculators were very careful in the selection of the virus, as they had learnt its varying intensity, and they were credited with being able to control the amount of the eruption. They preferred to inoculate the outside of the arm, midway between the wrist and the elbow in males, and between the elbow and the shoulder in females. The skin over the part to be inoculated was first well rubbed with a piece of cloth; then, with slight touches of a small instrument, little wounds were made over an area which might be covered by a small coin, and sufficient to cause just an appearance of blood. A pledget of cotton-wool charged with the variolous matter, and moistened with water, was applied to the wound. This virus was obtained from inoculated pustules of the preceding year. In China the contents of the variolous pustules were dried and kept for several years. If the virus was to be used from fresh pustules the “acrimony” of the matter was corrected by steaming. The dried powder was made into a paste, which was wrapped up in cotton-wool and introduced into the nostril. The Greeks were more cautious in their procedure, and were said to inoculate tens of thousands without an accident. They operated only upon those in perfect health, punctures were made with needles, and the virus was used in the crude state, freshly obtained from the “‘ kindly” pustules of a young child. They were particularly careful in the choice of the “ferment.” Dr. Perrot Williams, in 1722, wrote that the practice of com- municating small-pox had long been employed in South Wales. The oldest inhabitants said that it had been a common practice with them “time out of mind,” but Lady Mary Wortley Montagu was responsible for the general adoption of small-pox inoculation in SMALL-POX. 287 England by persuading physicians in London to employ it. Lady Mary had her child inoculated in Turkey. An old Greek woman inocu- lated one arm, and Mr. Maitland, surgeon to the Embassy, the other. The disease ensued in due course with an eruption of a hundred pustules. This was the first time that the Byzantine method of inoculation was performed upon an English subject. In 1721 Dr. Harris delivered a lecture before the College of Physicians, and described the successful inoculation of four children of the French consul at Aleppo, by means of a thread imbued with variolous pus. A daughter of Lady Mary was inoculated in England by Maitland in 1721, and subsequently a number of criminals were inoculated by him. Incisions were made through the cutis, and pledgets which had been steeped in variolous pus from ripe pustules, were applied to the wound. This was known as Maitland’s or the reformed operation, but it was soon modified, as troublesome ulcers resulted. Shortly afterwards Maitland encountered another obstacle. The child of a Mr. Batt was inoculated, had plenty of pustules, and soon recovered, but six of Mr. Batt’s domestic servants, “who all in turn were wont to hug this child while under this operation, and whilst the pustules were out, never suspecting them to be infectious, were all seized at once with the right natural small-pox of several and very different kinds.” Dr. Jurin in 1729 reverted to the Eastern method, and recom- mended virus from a mild case of small-pox, but the virus was still taken from perfectly maturated pustules, and the operation continued to be followed by bad results. In order to diminish the risks, Burgess in 1766 advocated certain improvements. An incision about an inch long was made on each arm through the cuticle, but not so deep as to wound the cellular tissue. A variolous thread was laid along the whole length of the wound and fixed with plaster. Ulcerations and other accidents continued to take place, and a new epoch in the history of inoculation was the introduction of the Suttonian method, in 1764-6. It was said that Mr. Sutton, with his assistants, inoculated one hundred thousand persons. The method was kept secret at first, but the essential points were all discovered and published by Dr. Dimsdale. Dimsdale recommended a very slight puncture with a lancet wet with variolous matter. Subsequently, Sutton published an account of his method, and the result of his operation may be given in his own words. “The lancet being. charged with the smallest perceivable quantity (and the smaller the better) of unripe, crude, or watery matter, immediately 288 INFECTIVE DISEASES. introduce it by puncture, obliquely, between the scarf and true skin, barely sufficient to draw blood, and not deeper than the sixteenth part of an inch. Neither patting, nor daubing of the matter, in or over the punctured part, is at all necessary to its efficacy. This practice, indeed, is rather prejudicial than otherwise, as it may affect the form of the incision, and thus be apt to confound our judgment upon it. “ Indications of the Incision.—In the incipient state of variolous increase in the incision, a small florid spot appears on the part of access, resembling a flea-bite in size; and on passing the finger lightly over it a hardness is felt not larger than a small pin’s head. This florid appearance and hardness denote that the variolous principle is effectually imbibed, and their indications point no farther, unless the progress to vesication be very slow, in which case an uncomfortable number of pustules may be expected to follow. The florid spot in most instances of inoculation is somewhat larger, or more extended on the second, than on the third day after the insertion. “About the fourth day from inoculation, should the incision begin to vesicate, an itching sensation will be complained of on the place of insertion—the occurrence of which symptom is the first indication of a favourable event, yet not of sufficient importance to justify any present relaxation in the preparatory proceedings. “ The vesication of the incision in most instances will begin to be visible on the fourth or fifth day after the insertion of the matter ; the sooner it becomes so, the more favourable may be expected to be the event. The extent or diameter of the vesication at this stage does not usually exceed that of a large pin’s head, and it has invariably a dint or small depression.” Adams obtained still more striking results by inoculating with variolous lymph from pearl-pox, a mild variety of small-pox. Starting with lymph obtained from this benign form of small-pox, and selecting the cases, and carrying on arm to arm variolation, the results obtained were practically identical with the phenomena obtained by inoculation of the arm with cow-pox lymph. Similar results were obtained by Guillou, but more rapidly. In 1827 there was an epidemic of variola, and Guillou, having no vaccine virus, took variolous lymph from a girl fifteen years of age on the fifth day of the eruption. The case was one of varioloid or mild small-pox, attri- buted to previous vaccination. The variolous lymph was inserted in ten places on the arm of a healthy infant still at the breast. This inoculation produced ten beautiful ‘ vaccine” vesicles, from which, on the ninth day, forty-two infants were inoculated under the eyes of two of the local authorities. These furnished virus for the inoculation of one hundred, who were inoculated in the presence of magistrates and many medical men. This experiment was repeated with success. Variolous lymph was taken from two lads at school, and in ten SMALL-POX. 289 cases produced appearances with a perfect similarity to ordinary vaccination. Thiele produced a benign vesicle in the following manner. Variolous lymph was diluted with warm cow’s milk, and inoculated like ordinary vaccine lymph. Large vesicles resulted. There were febrile symptoms from the third to the fourth day, and a secondary onset of fever much more pronounced between the eleventh and fourteenth days. The areola was strongly marked, and not con- fined to the inoculated place, which was occasionally surrounded by minute secondary vesicles. After watching through ten removes, the vesicles finally assumed the characters of an ordinary vaccination with cow-pox lymph. As soon as the secondary fever ceased to occur inoculation was practised from arm to arm without diluting the lymph with cow’s milk. The lymph was designated lacto-varioline, and the result was variolation in its mildest form. The result of variolating the cow will be discussed in another chapter. Small-pox inoculation, or variolation, protected the individual when genuine small-pox was produced, and ,endangered the com- munity. Persons inoculated became centres of infection, and con- veyed the disease to others. Haygarth, although in favour of inoculation, strongly condemned its use without precautions to prevent the spread of the disease. ‘‘The most serious and solid objection,” he wrote, ‘‘that has been advanced against inoculation is deduced from a comparison of the Bills of Mortality for a series of years in various places. They show that a larger proportion of inhabitants have died of the small-pox in towns where it is prac- tised than in the same before it was known, or in cthers where it is prohibited.” Even Dr. Dimsdale, an ardent inoculator, admitted that more lives were lost in London than before inoculation commenced, and the practice was more detrimental than beneficial to society ; and he added: ‘The disease by general inoculation throughout London spreads by visitors, strangers, servants, washerwomen, doctors, and inoculators, by means of hackney coaches in which the sick are sent out to take the air, or by sound persons approaching them in the streets. The poor in London are miserably lodged ; their habitations are in close alleys, courts, lanes, and old dirty houses ; they are often in want of necessaries, even of bedding. The fathers and mothers are employed constantly in laborious occupation abroad, and cannot attend the inoculated sick.” In 1798 Jenner, who had practised small-pox inoculation, proposed the use of a benign non-infectious lymph obtained from a disease of the cow or horse as a substitute , 19 290 INFECTIVE DISEASES. for variolous lymph, and in 1840 small-pox inoculation was prohibited by Act of Parliament. Stamping-out System.—The disappointing and dangerous results of small-pox inoculation led to a widespread demand for some new method for dealing with small-pox. This induced Haygarth to turn his attention to the subject, and towards the end of the eighteenth century to bring before the medical profession and the public a plan for stamping out the disease. Haygarth, who was a close observer and an able physician, studied the question of the communicability of the disease from one person to another, and its conveyance by infected clothing and other means, and ultimately drew up rules and regulations for its prevention, the importance of which we are only now beginning to fully acknowledge. Haygarth’s essential doctrine was ‘‘ that mankind was not necessarily subject to the small-pox, and that it was always caught by infection from a patient or the poisonous matter,” and might be avoided by observing his Rules of Prevention. These rules comprised a regular system of notification and isolation. Inspectors were to be provided to report cases of small-pox, and people were to be rewarded for carrying out the instructions. Several examples were given of the results at Chester, where the plan was adopted. Haygarth met with considerable encouragement from some of the leaders of the profession. Dr. Fothergill wrote to him in 1778, saying, ‘‘T have mentioned the intention of freeing this country from the small-pox to divers of the faculty, and shall continue to do so as it falls in my way. The proposal is variously received, but in exact proportion to their humanity.” In 1793 Haygarth made considerable addition to his rules, and urged that legislation should follow to make them compulsory. Provision was to be made to reward the poor for observing the rules, and public thanks to the wealthy for their support were to be published in the parish church and newspapers. Transgression of the rules was to be punished by a fine of from £10 to £50, one half to go to the informer and the other half to the fund which supplied the expense of rewards to the poor, and all details were to be supplied to the press. It was further suggested that Great Britain should be divided into districts, including a certain number of parishes or townships, and that to each of them a surgeon or apothecary should be appointed as inspector to see that the regulations were exactly observed. In addition, there were to be directors of inspectors, superin- tended by a commission of Physicians in London and in Edinburgh. All salaries were to be paid by the county rates, and the rewards for observing the rules of prevention were to be guaranteed out of the parish funds. On the requisition of the director and inspector of a circuit, power was to be given to two or more justices of the peace to appoint a separate house for the reception of patients with the small-pox. In conclusion, SMALL-POX. 291 Haygarth maintained that the plague had been completely exterminated from this country, for above a century, by civil regulations, and that there seemed to be little doubt that the small-pox was propagated on principles similar to the plague, and that it also might certainly be exterminated from this island. Haygarth’s teachings had a profound influence upon both the profession and the educated public, but his system of compulsory notification was never carried out, for no legislation followed to enforce his recommenda- tions. This is a matter deeply to be regretted, for towards the end of the eighteenth century small-pox was declining in London, general sanitation was making rapid advances, small-pox inoculation, which created fresh centres of infection, was falling into disfavour, small-pox hospitals were built, which served to limit centres of infection, and the profession and the public were influenced by the teaching of Haygarth with regard to the various ways of avoiding the spread of the disease. It only required the compulsory adoption of Haygarth’s system uniformly all over the country to have kept the disease in control, if not to have entirely extirpated it from Great Britain. That a similar conviction existed at the time is evidenced by an article which appeared in 1779 inthe Medical and Chirurgical Review, in which the following statements were made :— “Plans for the extirpation of the small-pox have been suggested. . . . To do this, however, the exertions of the physician are incompetent unless they be aided by the powerful hand of Governments, but this has hitherto been withheld. The grand means, however, of extirpating this destructive malady is an early and strict separation of the infected from those that are sound.” Small-pox in the present century has been largely controlled by legislation, especially in recent years, by the Public Health Acts for England and Wales, for Scotland, and for Ireland; the Epidemic and other Diseases Prevention Act ; the Public Health Amendment Act ; the Labouring Classes’ Dwellings Acts ; the Housing of the Working Classes Act ; the Public Health (Ships) Act; the Local Government Board Act-—-and various orders and memoranda of the Local Govern- ment Board ; the Infectious Diseases Notification Act ; the Infectious Diseases Prevention Act ; and the Public Health (London) Act. By the Public Health Act of 1875 England was divided into Urban and Rural Sanitary Districts, and powers were given to enforce regulations of the Local Government Board for guarding against the spreading of infectious diseases; to provide medical aid and accommodation for infected persons, to promote cleansing, ventilation, and disinfection, to provide hospitals, to provide for 292 INFECTIVE DISEASES. destruction or disinfection of infected bedding, clothing, and other articles, and to appoint Medical Officers of Health. As to the value of notification and isolation in cities such as Tondon we have the evidence of the Metropolitan Asylums Board. In their Report for 1889 we read in reference to the diminution of small-pox : “These very satisfactory results confirm the view taken by the Committee two years ago to the effect that the rapid and systematic removal from crowded districts of infected persons, each of whom might have become a centre of contagion, is an important factor in stamping out small-pox from the metropolitan population. The notification of cases will also greatly facilitate the action of the managers in this direction.” More recently there has been a most striking confirmation of these statements. An outbreak of small-pox occurred in Maryle- bone, and by the energy of the officials of the Board this outbreak was suppressed in a few days by means of notification and immediate isolation. The Isolation Hospitals Act of 1893 gives power to County Councils to provide, or cause to be provided, an isolation hospital in any district within their county. An application to a County Council for the establishment of an isolation hospital may be made by any one or more of the authorities defined as local authorities having jurisdiction in the county or any part of the county. Further, the County Council may direct an inquiry to be made by two medical officers of health in the county as to the necessity of an isolation hospital being established for the use of the inhabitants of any particular district in the county, and in the event of such medical officers reporting that such a hospital ought to be established for the use of the inhabitants of a district, may take the same proceedings in all respects for the establishment of such hospital, as if a petition had been presented by a local authority for the establishment of an isolation hospital for the district named in the report of such medical officers of health. Lastly, the Local Government Act of 1894 provides for the formation of District Councils; and the powers, duties, and liabilities are principally those which were conferred by the Public Health Act of 1875. In the opinion of the author the Government of this country should enter into friendly negotiations with the Governments of other countries, so that there might be concerted action to prevent an avoidable disease like small-pox: Much good might result from the formation of a permanent International Board of Health. If civilisation is not yet CATTLE PLAGUE. 293 sufficiently advanced to admit of a system of international notification, our Consular authorities should be instructed to give immediate notifica tion of the existence of small-pox in other countries, and every measure should be enforced to diminish the possibilities of importation. The duties of a Central Health Office, presided over by a Minister of Health, should include the collection of information as to the existence of small- pox in other countries, and details should be published in the Annual Reports of the Department. Regulations, for example, for dealing with the importation of rags from small-pox stricken places should be enforced, as in the case of cholera ; and if, in spite of these precautions, isolated cases occurred in this country, they should be dealt with promptly. Notification should be enforced uniformly all over the country, and there is not the slightest reason why the authorities and the public should not immediately receive information of the existence of small-pox, whilst to procure immediate isolation we have only to imitate the excellent ambulance system of the Metropolitan Asylums Board. To procure prompt notification there must be no loophole for evading the Act, and there should be a heavy penalty for failure to notify not only small-pox, but any case which may reasonably be supposed to be one of small-pox. The police should be required to report any case of small-pox in common lodging-houses or shelters ; they should have power to require any tramp suffering from small-pox, or from any disease which may reasonably be supposed to be small-pox, to be examined by the medical officer of the Union, and kept under observation, or transferred at once to the isolation hospital ; and inmates of the workhouse should be daily inspected, and no case allowed to leave when there is the least suspicion of small-pox infection. Objections no doubt will be raised to this proposal, but the frequency with which small-pox is spread by tramps fully justifies these measures. All these measures should be carried out as a matter of routine, and without the semblance of panic. Isolation should be uniformly enforced all over the country, and vaccination should be relegated to the position of a voluntary auxiliary measure, which should never be allowed to take the place of sanitary regulations to stamp out the disease. CatrLeE PLAGUE. Cattle plague is a highly contagious disease of bovines producing high fever, and characterised by an eruption with a resemblance to human small-pox. The disease is transmissible to other ruminants, and is inoculable in man. One attack gives immunity against future attacks. Cattle plague and small-pox are not intercom- municable, and are specifically distinct diseases, but the resemblance between them was recognised from early times. Ramazzini published an account of the cattle pest in Italy in 1711, and described the pustules which broke out over the body as similar to those of variola in 294 INFECTIVE DISEASES. kind and appearance. Dr. Layard, in 1780, described this disease of horned cattle as an eruptive fever of the variolous kind, with the appearance and stages of small-pox. This resemblance was endorsed by Murchison, one of the Commissioners appointed in 1866 to inguire into the origin and nature of cattle plague. Murchison pointed out that in both diseases the eruption con- sisted of pustules and scabs, and that in both it extended from the skin to the interior of the mouth and nostrils; in both, the pustules and scabs were preceded or accompanied by patches of roseola ; in both, they were occasionally interspersed with petechiee ; and in both, they sometimes left behind pitted scars and discolora- tions on the cutis. The other prominent symptoms of rinderpest were also those of small-pox—viz., pyrexia, lumbar pain, salivation, and running from the nostrils, alvine flux, albuminuria, hematuria, and “the typhoid state.” The anatomical lesions of the internal organs in rinderpest and unmodified small-pox were identical—viz., congestion or inflammation of the mucous membranes of the air passages and digestive canal, patches of ecchymosis and even gangrene of the stomach and other mucous surfaces, and darkly coloured blood. In both rinderpest and small-pox the duration of the pyrexial stage was on an average about eight days. In both diseases a peculiarly offensive odour was exhaled from the body before and after death. The two diseases resembled one another in their extreme contagiousness, and in the facility with which the poison was transmitted by fomites. Both diseases were easily propagated by inoculation, and in both cases the inoculated disease was milder and less fatal than that resulting from infection. In both diseases there was a period of incubation, which is shorter when the poison has been introduced by inoculation than when it has been received by infection. Ceely described the result of an accidental inoculation of cattle- plague virus in the human subject. A vesicle was produced which so closely corresponded with the result of inoculated cow-pox that Ceely inclined to the belief that cattle plague was a malignant form of cow-pox. The following is the account of this case as reported by Ceely. Mr. Hancock, a veterinary inspector at Uxbridge, was engaged in superintending the autopsy of a bullock recently dead of cattle plague. His assistant, who was performing the operation, while occupied in removing the skin from the scrotum, accidentally punctured the back of Mr. Hancock’s hand with the point of the knife. The puncture being slight was disregarded at the time, but was washed.as soon as practicable, and thonght of no more. Five CATTLE PLAGUE. 295 days afterwards, a small, slightly elevated, hard pimple was felt and seen on the site of the puncture. This gradually advanced till the ninth day of the puncture, the fourth from papulation, when the enlargement became distinctly vesicular. At that time there were but slight constitutional symptoms. On the next day, the tenth from the receipt of the puncture, the fifth from papulation, and the second from vesiculation, Mr. Hancock consulted Mr. Rayner, of Uxbridge, who, on seeing the hand, inquired if the patient had been handling the udder of a cow, as he thought he could recognise a cow-pox vesicle of the ninth day. The vesicle was distended with thin lymph, its margin elevated and slightly brown, its centre depressed and brownish, and the whole surrounded with a large bright red areola. There was then considerable tumefaction extend- ing from the knuckles to above the wrist. The absorbent vessels were considerably inflamed, and, like the axillary glands, were tender and painful; the pulse, naturally slow, was accelerated; there was much pain in the back and limbs, severe distracting headache, etc. ; all of which symptoms continued to increase during the two following days. At the end of that time the diffused areola had extended as far asthe elbow. Fifteen days after the puncture, and ten days after papulation, the local inflammation and constitutional symptoms had partially subsided. The vesicle contained a rather turbid brownish fluid, and there were present all the indications of a declining vaccine vesicle. Murchison also saw and described the case, and gave practically the same account of it. He pointed out that the appearances and the entire history were very different from the results of a poisoned wound, but coincided with the appearances seen after vaccination. In 1832 Macpherson, in Bengal, inoculated eleven native children with cattle-plague crusts. There was no result in six, others suffered from local inflammation, and in one a vesicle formed. With lymph from this vesicle other children were inoculated. The results in all were similar in appearance to those of vaccination. Two children were subsequently inoculated with human variola, and were said to be protected. In i834 Macpherson’s example was followed by Mr. Furnell in Assam. Furnell inoculated four children with cattle-plague crusts without result, but his assistant succeeded with crusts taken from the back and abdomen of the diseased cattle, and carried on the lymph from child to child. In one case there was a general eruption. Furnell inoculated his own child from one of the native children: a copious eruption followed, and the child died. Furnell 296 INFECTIVE DISEASES. after this misfortune issued a strong warning against taking the virus from the cow. The experiments were made in the belief that cattle plague was really small-pox in cattle, and. that the virus would protect against human variola. Similar results were obtained by Mr. Wood at Gowalpara in 1838. Bacteria in Cattle Plague.—Semner cultivated streptococci from the blood and lymphatic glands of a sheep suffering from cattle plague. A calf inoculated with a cultivation died in seven days. The cocci were stated to lose their virulence by cultivation, and the weakened cultivation to protect against the virulent disease. The micro-organism was very probably Streptococcus pyogenes, and the calf may have died of septic infection. There can be no doubt that the nature of the contagium of cattle plague is unknown. Protective Inoculation.—In the great epidemic of cattle plague in England in 1866, owing to a belief that the analogy between cattle plague and small-pox was closer than it really is, vaccination with cow-pox was attempted as a preventive measure, but was proved to be absolutely useless. Stamping-out System.—When cattle plague was imported in 1865 into London, dairymen and stock-owners made no attempts to prevent the extension of the disease, so that it spread rapidly all over the country through disposal of infected cattle. The losses were enormous, and an Order in Council was passed in July 1865, directing dairymen and others to notify outbreaks of any contagious or infectious disease among the animals under their charge. A Veterinary Department of the State was formed, and inspectors appointed in various parts of the country. A short Act was passed in February 1866. A stamping-out system, consisting of compulsory notification and the slaughter of diseased animals, was soon brought to the notice of the public. There was violent opposition, but nevertheless, after some delay, the system was carried out. The number of cases of cattle plague had reached 18,000 weekly, and on the introduction of the stamping-out system the disease rapidly declined. The disease was again importet into Great Britain in 1872, and there were outbreaks in 1877. In each instance the disease was promptly stamped out, and ever since that year the disease has been kept out of this country. CHAPTER XXII. SHEEP-POX.—FOOT-AND-MOUTH DISEASE. SHEEP-POXx. SHEEP-POX, or variola ovina, is an acute febrile disease accompanied by a general vesiculo-pustular eruption, highly infectious, and capable of being propagated by inoculation or clavelisation. It is a common disease in some parts of Europe. In France the disease is called la clavelée, and in Italy vaccuolo. It has been introduced on several occasions into this country, but has been effectually stamped out. As in human small-pox, there are varieties—the benign and the malignant, the discrete and the confluent ; and one attack is protective against the disease in future. It is very closely analogous to human small-pox. Vaccination with cow-pox lymph has been employed to protect sheep from sheep- pox, but unsuccessfully, and lymph for vaccination has been raised from sheep-pox to protect human beings from small-pox. These experiments were first performed in Italy. Marchelli, in 1802, took lymph from the vesicles of sheep-pox, and inoculated children. Sacco repeated these experiments, and found there was no appreciable difference from the results obtained with cow-pox lymph. Dr. Legni carried on the inoculations with ovine virus from arm to arm for several years, and when small-pox occurred in Pesaro, it was said that all those who were inoculated with the sheep virus were protected. Tnoculation of children with ovine virus, direct from sheep, was repeated by Sacco and Magnani in 1806. Marson in England succeeded in producing on the human subject a vesicle with the physical characters of the vaccine vesicle. The vesicle had a bluer tinge, and subsequent inoculation of the patient with human variola was ineffectual. Other experimenters were unsuccessful, but their failures, as in the case of variolation of the cow, do not invalidate the results of those who were successful. ‘ 297 298 INFECTIVE DISEASES. Sheep-pox and cow-pox are quite distinct diseases. Sheep-pox is highly infectious, whereas cow-pox is only conveyed by direct inoculation, and is never infectious, and further, cow-pox inoculated in sheep does not produce sheep-pox. Bacteria in Sheep-pox.—Hiallier and Zurn, Klein, and others, have found micrococci and bacteria in the lymph of the vesicles of sheep-pox, but they are only accidental epiphytes. The nature of the contagium is unknown. Protective Inoculation.—Extensive experiments were carried out in England to test the protective power of vaccination against sheep-pox. According to Marson and Simmonds, it was very difficult to get cow-pox to take on sheep, and when an effect was produced, the resulting affection, even when developed to its fullest extent, was very unlike the same disease in the human subject. In the sheep it seldom produced anything more than a small papule, which occa- sionally resulted in the formation of a minute vesicle, or more commonly, a pustule, which was sometimes, although very rarely, surrounded by a slight areola. Generally, however, neither vesica- tion nor pustulation followed, but a small scab was produced, which soon fell from the site of the puncture, leaving no trace behind. The disease passed quickly and irregularly through its several stages, and terminated by the eighth or ninth day, and not unfrequently even before that time. Lymph was but rarely obtainable, and then only in the smallest quantity, and this on the fifth or sixth day suc- ceeding the vaccination. The effects were only local, and the animal's health was not impaired. Sheep were found to be just as susceptible of the cow-pox virus on subsequent repetition of the inoculation as they were in the first instance, and hence the conclusion that cow-pox was utterly worthless as a protective against sheep-pox. According to Depaul, however, cow-pox takes characteristically on sheep, and sheep-pox lymph inoculated on cows produces a result indistinguishable from the appearances obtained with the inoculation of cow-pox lymph. It is impossible to say whether these conflicting results depended upon the employment in the experiments of different breeds of sheep or different stocks of vaccine lymph. The objection to clavelisation or ovination is that the disease may be introduced in localities where it was previously unknown. By ovination, as in the analogous case of variolation, fresh centres of infection are created, whereas every precaution should be taken to prevent the introduction of the disease. Stamping-out System.—Sheep-pox has been imported into this FOOT-AND-MOUTH DISEASE. 299 country on several occasions. It was introduced in 1847, and again in 1862; in 1865 it was introduced again, and active measures of repression were at once taken. The diseased flocks were carefully isolated, and day by day as fresh cases occurred the diseased animals were killed and buried. Owing to the adoption of these precaution- ary measures, the affection did not extend beyond the flock among which it first appeared. It was introduced again in 1866 at Long Buckby, in Northamptonshire. In this case the disease was exter- minated by the slaughter and burial of the whole flock, and imme- diate application of disinfectants to the hurdles and other things with which the sheep had been in contact. Then it was introduced again in Cheshire, and strict isolation being enforced the infection died out. Since 1866 we have had no outbreak of sheep-pox in this kingdom, but foreign sheep have been landed with sheep-pox in 1868, 1869, 1870, 1871, 1875, 1876, 1878, and 1880, but the disease has been prevented from spreading. The Sheep-pox Order of 1895 provides for the notification of the disease, for disinfection and for compulsory slaughter of infected sheep, and prohibits the movement of diseased or suspected sheep, and the local authority may, if they think fit, order the slaughter of suspected sheep and of sheep which have been in contact with diseased sheep. Foot-anp-mMoutH DIsEAsE. Foot-and-mouth disease is a highly contagious and infectious febrile disease, characterised by a vesicular eruption affecting the lips, tongue, roof of the mouth, and feet of sheep, cattle, and pigs, and according to some observers it also attacks horses, poultry, hares, and rabbits. Sometimes the mouth only is affected, in other cases the principal seat of the eruption is in the feet. The vesicles soon break and give rise to ulcers. When these occur in the mouth they cause pain and difficulty in taking food. Extensive ulceration may occur on the feet, causing great pain and lameness. In milch cows it sometimes happens that the eruption occurs on the udder and teats, and it is this manifestation of the disease which has received so much attention from Rayer. The milk is contaminated by the discharge of the vesicles, and is unfit for use, either as food for the human being or for the lower animals. It induces a vesicular eruption in the mouth, larynx, pharynx, and intestinal canal. It acts most vigorously when administered warm to young animals, and calves occasionally die quite suddenly after sucking cows 300 INFECTIVE DISEASES. affected with the eruption on the teats. Fatal effects also result when the milk is administered to young pigs. It has been stated that no injurious consequences arise from the consumption of the milk by human beings, but there is abundant evidence to the contrary, and the conflicting opinions probably arise from the fact that milk is seldom drunk direct from the cow, and rarely in an undiluted form. Hertwig experimented upon himself with milk freshly drawn from a cow with the eruption. He drank a pint, and two days afterwards experienced slight fever, restless- ness, and headache. The mouth was dry and hot, and there was tingling in the skin of the hands and fingers. These symptoms continued for seven days after taking the milk. On the ninth day vesicles had formed on the tongue, principally on the edges, and on the mucous membrane of the cheeks and lips (the largest being about the size of a lentil). They were yellowish-white in colour, and contained a whitish turbid liquid, which flowed when the vesicles were pricked with a needle. At the same time a number of vesicles developed on the hands and fingers; and most of them at the time of their first appearance were the size of a millet seed. They were firm to the touch, yellowish-white, and occasioned a slight ‘tingling. The vesicles of the mouth increased in size and eventually broke, and the epithelium detached itself completely from the affected parts, leaving dark red spots, which disappeared gradually. The slight fever present during the first days ceased after the appearance of the eruption; but from this time, until the disappearance of the red spots, Hertwig felt a continual burning pain in the mouth, and speaking and deglutition caused considerable uneasiness. On the lips the vesicles dried up, and were covered with thin brownish crusts, which fell off ten days after the appearance of the first vesicles. The vesicles which developed on the hands ran a slower course. From the tenth to the thirteenth day they filled with a liquid, like turbid lymph. They were large and confluent, and finally broke and dried up. Bacteria in Foot-and-mouth Disease.—Klein in 1885 isolated from the vesicles a streptococcus which in its microscopical and its cultural characters on gelatine, agar and blood serum resembled Streptococcus pyogenes. Minute differences in the size of the colonies and in their rate of growth, and in the character of the chains, were observed on making comparative cultures with Streptococcus pyogenes from a human source, but no comparison was made with Streptococcus pyogenes from acute suppuration in cattle. Baumgarten regarded this micro-organism as Streptococcus FOOT-AND-MOUTH DISEASE. 301 pyogenes, and not as the contagium of the disease. The author has pointed out the variation which exists in the size of the chains and of the colonies, and the difference which is found in the rate of growth of cultures of Streptococcus pyogenes, and these variations are especially marked in Streptococcus pyogenes bovis. Klein believes that the administrations of broth cultures produced the disease in sheep, but the results were very probably due to accidental infection. It is well known how very readily foot-and-mouth disease is spread. The appearance of a case in a flock of sheep or a herd of cattle will be almost certain to be followed by all or nearly all of the other animals being infected with great rapidity. The virus clings to the clothes of shepherds and others who have been in contact with infected sheep, and may be readily conveyed to healthy animals by those who have been visiting infected premises. Schottelius described chains composed of rounded elements, some of which resembled an ameeba or plasmodium. The chains were said to be motile, and delicate growths were obtained in blood serum and agar, and in broth and on potato. Inoculation in sheep and pigs and numerous small animals gave negative results. These organisms were described as streptocytes, to distinguish them from bacteria. Piani and Fiorentini investigated the contents of the vesicles, and also described corpuscular elements exhibiting ameboid movements. They regarded these bodies as protozoa, and concluded that foot-and- mouth disease is due to their presence. Until a micro-organism is cultivated which will produce sheep- pox in sheep on a farm or on premises where the disease does not exist, and where there can be no possibility of accidental infection, we are fully justified in concluding that the nature of the contagium of this disease is unknown. Stamping-out System.—Foot-and-mouth disease was imported into this country in 1839. It has been successfully dealt with by the stamping-out system, which in this case is very difficult to apply because of the very short period of incubation, and the value of the stamping-out method very greatly depends upon the length of the incubation period. Foot-and-mouth disease very often, from infection to recovery, does not exceed ten days; yet according to the reports of the Board of Agriculture, when foot-and-mouth disease exists in a manageable state, perfect isolation and effectual disinfection have proved equal to the complete control of the spreading of the infection, and the final extinction of the disease. Nothing more is necessary in any case than to close up all the channels through which infected matter can be conveyed; but in 302 INFECTIVE DISEASES. order that this may be done close supervision by conscientious and responsible officers is required ; without it the case is hopeless. The Foot-and-mouth Disease Order of 1895 enforces notification, isolation, and disinfection, and the question of slaughter is left to the local authority. (1) A local authority may, if they think fit, cause to be slaughtered— (a) Any cattle, sheep, or swine affected with foot-and-mouth disease or suspected of being so affected ; and (b) Any cattle, sheep, or swine being or having been in the same field, shed, or other place, or in the same herd or flock or otherwise in contact with animals affected with foot-and-mouth disease, or being or having been, in the opinion of the local authority, in any way exposed to the infection of foot-and-mouth disease. CHAPTER XXII. HORSE-POX.— COW-POX. ConsTITUTIONAL GREASE OR HoRrsE-POx. Horst-pox is a vesicular disease of the horse communicable from animal to animal by inoculation, but never infectious. It is communicable by inoculation to man, and the attenuated virus produces phenomena indistinguishable from the results of vaccina- tion with cow-pox lymph. , The existence of this disease of the horse had long been known to farmers and farriers, but Jenner was the first to draw attention to it in writing. ‘There is a disease to which the horse from his state of domestication is frequently subject. The farriers have termed it the grease; it is an inflammation and swelling in the heel accompanied at its commencement with small cracks and _ fissures, from which issues matter possessing properties of a very peculiar kind.” Jenner gave several instances in which this disease was communicated to man and to cows. Thus, a man named Merret attended to some horses with sore heels and also milked the cows. The cows were infected, and the man had several sores upon his hands. William Smith, on another farm, attended to horses with sore heels and milked the cows also. The cows were infected, and on one of Smith’s hands there were several ulcerated sores. Simon Nicholls applied dressings to the sore heels of one of his master’s horses and at the same time milked the cows, and the cows were infected in consequence. A mare, the property of a dairy farmer, had sore heels, and was attended to by the men of the farm, Thomas Virgoe, William Wherret, and William Haynes. They contracted “sores on their hands, followed by inflamed lymphatic glands in the arms and axille, shiverings succeeded by heat, lassitude, and general pains in the limbs,” and the disease was also communicated to the cows. 303 304 INFECTIVE DISEASES. But Jenner’s experience of this disease was not limited to cases in which the eruption occurred in the heel. He mentions a case in which— “ An extensive inflammation of the erysipelatous kind appeared without any cause upon the upper part of the thigh of a sucking colt. The inflammation continued several weeks, and at length terminated in the formation of three or four small abscesses.” Those who dressed the colt also milked the cows on the farm, and communi- cated the disease to them. ! Subsequently, Jenner gave a more comprehensive description of this disease. “The skin of the horse is subject to an eruptive disease of a vesicular character, which vesicle contains a limpid fluid, showing itself more commonly in the heels. The legs first become cedematous, and then fissures are observed. The skin contiguous to these fissures, when accurately examined, is seen studded with small vesicles sur- rounded by an areola. These vesicles contain the specific fluid. It is the ill-management of the horse in the stable that occasions the malady to appear more frequently in the heel than in other parts. I have detected it connected with a sore on the neck of the horse, and on the thigh of a colt.” Mr. Moore, of Chalford Hill, described a case in 1797, and re- garded the disease as virulent grease. His horse was attacked with what was supposed to be ordinary “grease.” A cow was subse- quently infected, and the disease communicated to the servant, who had “eruptions on his hands, face, and many other parts of the body, the pustules appearing large, and not much unlike the small- pox, for which he had been inoculated a year and a half before, and had then a very heavy burden.” In 1798, Mr. Fewster, of Thornbury, met with a case of this equine malady, and wrote a very full account to Jenner of its transmission to the human subject. “William Morris, aged thirty-two, servant to Mr. Cox of Almonsbury in this county, applied to me the 2nd of April, 1798. He told me that four days before he found a stiffness and swelling in both his hands, which were so painful it was with difficulty he continued his work; that he had been seized with pain in his head, small of the back, and limbs, and with frequent chilly fits succeeded by fever. On examination I found him still affected with these symptoms, and there was great prostration of strength. Many parts of his hands on the inside were chapped, and on the middle joint of the thumb of the right hand there was a small phagedenic CONSTITUTIONAL GREASE OR HORSE-POX. 305 ulcer, about the size of a large pea, discharging an ichorous fluid. On the middle finger of the same hand there was another ulcer of a similar kind. These sores were of a circular form, and he described their first appearance as being somewhat like blisters arising from a burn. He complained of excessive pain, which extended up his arm into the axilla. On the 5th of April I again saw him, and found him still complaining of pain in both his hands, nor were his febrile symptoms at all relieved. The ulcers had now spread to the size of a seven-shilling gold coin, and another ulcer, which I had not noticed before, appeared on the first joint of the forefinger of the left hand, equally painful with that on the right. J ordered him to bathe his. hands in warm bran and water, apply escharotics to the ulcers, and wrapped his hands up in a soft cataplasm. The next day he was. much relieved, and in something more than a fortnight got well. He lost his nails from the thumb and fingers that were ulcerated.” Mr. Tanner, a veterinary surgeon, was the first to succeed in experimentally transmitting horse-pox to the teats of a cow by inoculating some of the liquid matter from the heel of a horse. From handling the cow’s teats he became infected himself, and had two pustules on his hand, which brought on inflammation, and made him unwell for several days. The matter from the cow and from his own hand proved efficacious in infecting both human subjects and cattle. a In 1801 Dr. Loy published his experiments. A butcher had painful sores from dressing a horse suffering from ‘ grease,’ and Dr. Loy succeeded in transmitting the disease to the udder of a cow. Matter was taken from the cow and inserted into the arm of a child. Dr. Loy also inoculated a child direct from a horse suffering from ‘ grease, and subsequently five other children from this child. From his experiments and observations Dr. Loy was led to. differentiate constitutional grease from the merely local affection commonly known as the grease, and thus. he explained the failure on the part of many experimenters to transmit this disease to- the cow. “This fact induces me ”—he says—‘ to suspect that two kinds of grease exist, differing from each other in the power of giving disease to the human or brute animal ; and there is another circum-: stance which renders this supposition probable. The horses that communicated the infection to their dressers were affected with a general as well as a topical disease. The animals at the commence- ment of their disease were evidently in a feverish state, from which they were relieved as soon as the complaint appeared at their heels, 20 306 INFECTIVE DISEASES, and an eruption upon the skin. The horse, too, from which the infectious matter was procured for inoculation, had a considerable indisposition, previous to the disease at his heels, which was attended, as in the others, with an eruption over the greatest part of his body; but those that did not communicate the disease at all, had a local affection only. From this perhaps may be explained the want of success attending the experiments of the gentlemen I have mentioned.” Experiments with horse-pox were also made about this time on the Continent. Sacco made some observations upon this disease at Milan. Several horses were suffering from what was called giardoni, and Sacco’s servant was attacked on both arms, from dressing one of his horses troubled with this disease. Several children and cows were inoculated from the horses, but without success. In another instance, a coachman went to the hospital with the eruption on his hands, and the disease was successfully communicated to three out of nine children. In 1803 Dr. Marcet described some experiments which had been made at Salonica by M. La Font. The disease was known to the farriers in Macedonia as javart. In one case, a horse was attacked with feverish symptoms that ceased as soon as the eruption appeared. The fore legs were much swelled and several ulcers formed. M. La Font took some of the discharge from an ulcer and inoculated a cow and three children, and succeeded in transmitting the disease to two of the latter. Vaccinogenic grease was observed in Paris in 1812, and Baron cites the case of a coachman who, after dressing a horse with the “ grease,” had a crop of pustules on his hands, from which the disease was experimentally transmitted by inoculation to two children, A series of inoculations was started from an infant who was infected from one of the scabs taken from the pustules on the hand of the coachman. In 1813 Mr. Melon, a surgeon at Lichfield, met with vaccinogenic grease in the horse, and some of the virus was sent to Jenner, who carried on a series of arm to arm equinations for some months. And again in 1817, vaccinogenic grease broke out in a farm at Wansell. The farm-servants and the cows were infected, and Jenner employed this equine matter for a series of inoculations for eight months. In 1817 Baron described a case of a young man who had not less than fifty pustules on his hands and wrists from dressing a horse with this disease, and in the following year Baron obtained some fresh equine virus from the hands of a boy who had been infected directly CONSTITUTIONAL GREASE OR HORSE-POX. 307 from a horse. The disease assumed a pustular form, and extended over both arms. In 1818 Kahlert met with this equine disease in Bohemia, and confirmed the experiments made by Loy and Sacco. Kahlert noticed that the joint of the foot was swollen, and moisture exuded from it, and that the posterior part of the pastern was slightly red, swollen and hotter than the neighbouring parts,.and a clear yellowish fluid with a peculiar odour escaped. At the slightest touch the animal showed signs of pain; the hair was stuck together. The disease was successfully transmitted to cows and from cows to children. In 1860 the horses at Rieumes, near Toulouse, were attacked by an epizootic malady ; in less than three weeks there were more than one hundred cases. According to the veterinary surgeon, M. Sarrans, the animals suffered from slight fever, rapidly followed by local symptoms, the most marked of which were swelling of the hocks, and an eruption of small pustules on the surface of the swollen parts, which were, at the same time, hot and painful. After three to five days there was a discharge from the pastern which continued for eight to ten days, during which the inflammation gradually diminished. The pustules dried up, and in about a fortnight the crusts with patches of hair fell off, leaving more or less marked scars. The eruption appeared at the same time on different parts of the body, especially on the nostrils, lips, buttocks, and vulva. Sarrans believed that the mares taken to the breeding establishment at Rieumes had been infected from the ropes which had been used in tying up other affected animals, and had become thereby infected with the virus of this disease. One of the mares was taken by the owner, M. Corail, to the veterinary school to be examined by M. Lafosse. About eight days after this visit significant symptoms appeared : loss of appetite, lameness, stiffness of both pastern joints, and a hot, painful swelling of the left pastern joint. The hair was staring, and there were vesicles on the skin, from which a liquid exuded having an ammoniacal odour but less feetid than the secretion in eaux aua jambes. M. Lafosse successfully transmitted the disease to cows, and from cows to children and to a horse. In 1863 the subject of vaccinogenic grease or horse-pox again received great attention in France. A student named Amyot was engaged in dressing a horse on which an operation had been per- formed. The leg which had been operated on became the seat of a very confluent eruption of horse-pox, which was followed by such an abundant flow of serosity that at first the nature of the affection was mistaken, and it was thought to be a complication of eaua aus 308 INFECTIVE DISEASES. jambes. Amyot had a wound on the dorsal aspect of the first inter- phalangeal joint of the little finger of his right hand; in spite of this, he continued to dress the horse entrusted to his care. The wound. on his finger became accidentally inoculated with the virus, which flowed in great abundance from the horse’s leg. The wound was made on August 3rd, and the next day it was swollen, and rather painful. On the 5th, Amyot suffered from malaise and great weakness; on the 6th, 7th, and 8th, vesicles appeared successively on the fingers of his left hand, and on his forehead between the two eyebrows. On the 9th, these vesicles were fully developed; those of the fingers consisted of very large epidermic bulle on a bluish-red base. On opening them, a perfectly limpid fluid escaped in such abundance that small test-tubes might have been filled with it. The vesicle on the forehead was surrounded by a bluish-red areola, within which, the epidermis, of a leaden-grey hue, was raised, and had a slight central depression. The liquid which flowed from it when it was opened, and which continued to ooze, was also very abundant and of a deep citrine colour. The vesicles which had developed on the dorsal side of Amyoct’s fingers were extremely painful. The incessant shooting pains, of which they were the seat, prevented him from getting any rest for three days. On the 10th, inflammation of the lymphatics followed ; both arms were swollen and very painful, with red lines indicating the course of the lymphatic vessels. The glands of the axille were also enlarged. The lymphatic glands behind the jaws were also swollen and pain- ful. Amyot’s chief sufferings were occasioned by the intense local pain caused by the vesicles on the fingers, and by the inflammation of the lymphatic vessels and glands, which continued in this state up to the 18th of August. It was only at the end of the month that the vesicles were completely cicatrised. Bouley felt very great anxiety in the presence of the grave symptoms which accompanied the eruption. The eruption on the forehead was especially a cause of great uneasiness, because glanders manifests itself in a similar way. With virus from Amyot’s vesicles the disease was transmitted to cows and to children. Further, this outbreak enabled exhaustive experiments to be made, by which it was definitely established that horse-pox is never infectious, but, like cow-pox, is transmitted solely by contact. In 1880, M. Baillet, Director of the National Veterinary School of Toulouse, was informed that a contagious malady had developed CONSTITUTIONAL GREASE OR HORSE-POX. 309. in the mares, which had been served by the stallions at the breeding establishment at Rieumes, belonging to M. Mazéres, M. Peuch was delegated to investigate this outbreak, and he visited for that purpose Bérat,. Rieumes, and Labastide-Clermont. At Bérat three mares were examined. In one, there were scars and crusts, the remains of an eruption on the lips and in the vicinity of the vulva ; in another, there were several reddish. circular ulcers in the same region; and in a third, there were dried pustules with blackish adherent crusts at the circumference of the vulva and extending over the perineum. On the lower part of the left flank a vesicle was discovered surmounted by a crust, and when the latter was detached a sero-sanguinolent. liquid oozed from the exposed surface. M. Peuch recognised the true nature of this disease, having several times previously had the opportunity of examining mares with a vesicular eruption round the vulva after coition, which eruption he had studied from its first appearance to complete cicatrisation, and had ascertained to be horse-pox. On proceeding to Rieumes, M. Peuch inspected eleven stallions, six horses, and five asses. In one ass there were several vesicles. on the right side of the penis scattered about from the base to the glans. In another ass there was a trace of a vesicle on the penis and a characteristic vesicle on the left nostril. In an old bay mare there were the remains of an eruption on the circumference of the vulva, and in an old white mare there were not only vesicles:on the vulva, but in addition vesicles on the inner side of the lower lip. ‘M. Peuch drew special attention to these cases as likely to be confounded with aphthous stomatitis, but the existence of the same eruption on other parts of the body is an important aid in making a diagnosis of horse-pox. At Labastide-Clermont one mare was particularly noticed. This mare had been served on the 19th and 21st of April, and on the occasion of the inspection, May 11th, there were the remains of an eruption around the vulva, and lymphangitis existed in the right posterior limb, which was engorged, hot, and painful in its whole extent, so that the animal walked with difficulty. The proprietor had contracted the disease in attending to his mare, and exhibited a vesicle on the thumb of the right hand, excoriated and blackened, but still recognisable. Some of the crusts collected from the cases at Bérat were used for inoculating a cow. The result was successful, and the disease was transmitted by inoculation to.a heifer and several students and children. 310. INFECTIVE DISEASES. M. Peuch ascertained that horse-pox caused considerable alarm from the fact that the breeders regard this eruptive affection as syphilitic, and this alarm consequently brings discredit upon the breeding establishment whence the illness has spread. He was also led to appreciate the great necessity for further study of this disease in relation to dourine or maladie dw coit. In 1882 M. Peuch had the opportunity of investigating a case of horse-pox in Algeria. The disease occurred in a thoroughbred Arab. There was an eruption of vesicles, and there was also an ulcer the size of a five-franc piece in the nostril, In the mouth and on the lips there were a number of small vesicles about the size of a pea. The sublingual glands were engorged, hot, and painful on pressure. The coat, in patches, on the lateral aspect of the neck, on the shoulders, the flanks, and in the hollow of the heel, was staring, giving the appearance of small paint-brushes. On passing the hand over these, vesicles could be detected partly dry and partly secreting. The disease was transmitted to cows, and from cows to about one thousand five hundred persons. Cases similar to the one just described, in which there is more or less marked ulceration of the nostril or nasal septum, must be care- fully distinguished from glanders. And again, when the sublingual glands are affected the disease may be mistaken for strangles. NarureE AND AFFINITIES. ‘Horse-pox and human small-pox are quite distinct diseases, and the theory that horse-pox is derived from grooms or other attendants suffering from small-pox may be dismissed without further comment. Horse-pox is never infectious, but is communicated solely by contact—either by grooms inoculating the virus with their hands, sponges, or brushes, or by horses coming into contact with each other, and in breeding establishments by coition, Auzias 'Turenne, who wrote exhaustively on this subject, maintained that horse-pox came into the same category of diseases as syphilis in man. “A un point de vue, le grease pustuleux inoculé offre la plus parfaite ressemblance avec la verole inoculée, par le produit des accidents secondaires. Des deux cétés nous voyons, absence de contagion par la voie de l’atmosphére, travail local, retentissement lymphatique et ganglionaire, fermentation universelle de l’organisme, eruption générale et immunité acquise contre de nouvelles atteintes. “A un autre point de vue, la ressemblance avec la variole est NATURE AND AFFINITIES. 311 frappante. Mais il s’en distingue énormément par l’absence de la contagiosité atmosphérique.” Human small-pox belongs toa different group of diseases, and has affinities rather with small-pox of sheep and cattle plague, diseases which are not only inoculable, but highly infectious. Human small-pox is an infectious disease characterised by sudden and severe fever, followed after forty-eight hours by a generalised eruption; horse- pox commences as a local affection, and constitutional symptoms follow. Auzias Turenne, guided by analogy, described the general- ised eruptions following “ grease” or horse-pox as greasides (‘‘ comme on dit syphilides”). ' Horse-pox and human syphilis are absolutely distinct diseases ; and there is no more ground for believing that horse-pox originates in human syphilis than there is for accepting the theory that it arises from grooms suffering from small-pox. Syphilis artificially inocu- lated on the human subject only resembles the casual or intentional inoculation of virulent horse-pox. The stages of papulation, vesicu- lation, ulceration, scabbing, and the formation of a permanent scar, occur in inoculated syphilis, and if we examine Ricord’s illustrations and study the experiments of Auzias Turenne, we cannot fail to be struck with the remarkable similarity to the results obtained and depicted by Jenner. But in order to follow the argument of Auzias Turenne we must study the natural and casual horse-pox. And if we are not familiar with what has been written on this subject, and if we restrict our knowledge to the artificially cultivated horse-pox, we shall fail to recognise the disease when we meet with it, and we shall be liable to attribute the results of the full effect of the virus to accidental contamination. Another question of very great interest is the relation of horse- pox to cow-pox. Jenner first of all propounded the theory that all cow-pox arose from horse-pox, or as he termed it “ the grease,” and thus cow-pox and horse-pox were manifestations of the same disease. But it was established that cow-pox also arose quite independently of horse-pox, and Jenner was led to distinguish between cow-pox, a disease peculiar to the cow, and the eruptive affection transmitted to the cow from the horse, which farmers and others, by a strange perversion of terms, called the cow-pox. Whether the eruption of cow-pox can be distinguished from the eruption of horse-pox com- municated to the cow, and whether cow-pox and horse-pox are identical, or only analogous, are questions which call for further investigation. 312 INFECTIVE DISEASES, Bacteria in Horse-pox.—Outbreaks of horse-pox have not been investigated from the bacteriological point of view, and the nature of the contagium is unknown. Cow-pox. Cow-pox is a vesicular disease of the teats of cows, It is never infectious, and only attacks cows in milk, the virus being transferred from cow to cow by the hand of the milker. The disease is com- municable to milkers, and the virus artificially inoculated produces what is commonly known as vaccinia. In its clinical history and epidemiology cow-pox is totally distinct from human small-pox, and the hypothetical and entirely erroneous suggestion that the disease arises from milkers suffering from human small-pox is responsible for the belief which prevailed until recently, that cow-pox was an extinct disease in this country; but, by the author's researches, this has been shown to be a mistake. Cow-pox is not a rare disease, and it has never been found to arise from a milker suffering from small-pox. As this is a matter of great importance in discussing the etiology of the disease, the history of outbreaks and the clinical characters of cow-pox will be given in considerable detail. According to Jenner, cow-pox had been known among farmers from time immemorial. He refers to cases occurring in 1770, 1780, 1782, 1791, 1794, 1796, and 1798. In 1799 cow-pox was raging in the dairies in London, and outbreaks were investigated by Woodville, Pearson, and Bradley. In the same year cow-pox broke out at Norton Nibley, in Gloucestershire. Pearson and Aikin referred to the prevalence of cow-pox in Wilts, Somerset, Devon, Bucks, Dorset, Norfolk, Suffolk, Leicestershire, and Staffordshire ; and Barry men- tioned its prevalence in Ireland. From this time onwards, for a long period, natural cow-pox received little or no attention inthis country. Fresh stocks of lymph were raised for the purposes of vaccination, but no further attention was given to studying the disease in the cow. In 1836 Leese described an outbreak of cow-pox, and in 1838 Estlin discovered an outbreak in Gloucestershire. In 1838-39 cow-pox was met with by Mr. Fox, of Cerne Abbas, and again in 1839, in Dorsetshire, by Mr. Sweeting. Ceely frequently met with cow-pox in the Vale of Aylesbury, and particularly refers to outbreaks in 1838, 1840, 1841, and 1845. But after this, outbreaks of this disease in the cow were not recorded, though several medical practitioners met with the disease and raised fresh stocks of vaccine lymph. Thus, when COW-POX. 313 inquiries were made in 1857, it was found that Mr. Donald Dalrymple, of Norwich (on two occasions), Mr. Beresford, of Nar- borough, in Leicestershire, Mr. Gorham, of Aldeburgh, Mr. Alison, of Great Retford, Mr. Coles, of Leckhampton, Mr. Rudge, of Leominster, and one or two others, had met with outbreaks of cow-pox. : In 1885 cow-pox was discovered by the author in Wiltshire. The publication of the fact led to the recognition of the disease in the same year in many parts of England, and cases were met with in man in 1888 by Mr. Forty in Gloucestershire, and by Mr. Bucknill near London in 1894, In Italy, cow-pox was found by Sacco in the plains of Lombardy in 1800, and by other practitioners in 1808-9. In 1812 it was observed at Naples by Miglietta ; in 1830 in Piedmont; and in 1832 and 1843 at Rome, by Dr. Maceroni. More recently, several out- breaks of cow-pox have been met with in this country, and the stocks of vaccine lymph renewed. In France, in 1810, cow-pox was found in the department of La Meurthe, and in 1822 at Clairvaux; at Passy, Amiens, and Rambouillet in 1836 ; at Rouen in 1839; at St. Illide, at St. Seine, and at Perylhac, in 1841; in 1842 at Pagnac; in 1843 at Deux Jumeaux, where, during the previous thirty years, several fresh stocks of lymph had been raised and circulated. The disease occurred in a cow belonging to M. Majendie in 1844, and it was found at Wasseloune, in the department of Bas Rhin, in 1845 ; it occurred in three other departments in 1846; at Rheims, and in the department of Eure et Loire, in 1852; in the arrondissement of Sancerre, and at Beziers in 1854; and at Guyonville in 1863. It broke out on farms in three villages near Nogent in 1864 (the disease was introduced by newly purchased cows ; milkers were infected, and from one of these milkers a lymph stock was established) ; it also occurred in 1864, at Petit Quevilly, near Rouen; and in April 1866 at Beaugency; in 1881 at Eysines, near Bordeaux, and again at the same place in 1883; and in 1844 at Cérons. In Germany, as soon as attention had been drawn to the disease, cow-pox was frequently discovered. There were as many as thirty- eight outbreaks reported in one year in Wurtemberg. It is hardly necessary, after reciting these instances, to insist that cow-pox is far from being a rare disease, as many have sup- posed who are unacquainted with the literature of the subject and unfamiliar with the appearances of the natural disease in the cow. 314 INFECTIVE DISEASES. NATURAL AND CasuAL Cow-Pox. To appreciate the characters of the natural disease in the cow, we must dismiss from our minds the artificial disease vaccinia, for the ordinary results of vaccination stand in much the same relation to the natural disease cow-pox as the benign vesicle of variolation to natural smail-pox. The description of cow-pox given by Jenner, in 1798, was the first published account. The disease in the cow was described as consisting of irregular pustules on the teats, of a palish blue colour, surrounded by an erysipelatous inflammation, and characterised by a tendency to degenerate into phagedenic ulcers. The animals were indisposed and the secretion of milk lessened. In referring to an outbreak which occurred epizodtically in London in February 1799, Dr. Bradley gave a coloured plate of the disease on the arm and fingers of a milker. The cow-pox, he said, in this instance, ‘* appears to have been very mild, for no loss was experienced by the farmers from the deficiency of milk, as usually happens.” These early descriptions were supplemented by an account of cow-pox by Mr. Lawrence, author of A Philosophical and Practical Treatise on Horses, and on the Moral Duties of Man toward the Brute Creation. Lawrence's article on cow-pox not only affords evidence that this disease was known to those who had the care of cattle before Jenner’s paper was published, but it shows that it had also been made the subject of practical observation and study by veteri- narians. Lawrence concluded by saying: ‘‘ Whatever may be the fate of cow-pox inoculation, it has and will give further occasion to a pretty large and open discussion, which is always beneficial as having a tendency to produce discovery and promote improvement ; and when the public ardour for the present topic shall have become a little cool and satisfied, I hope it will be turned by enlightened men towards another, perhaps of nearly as great consequence— namely, the prevention of the original malady in the animals them- selves. Those who have witnessed it and only reflected upon the excessive filth and nastiness which must unavoidably mix with the milk in an infected dairy of cows, and the corrupt and unsalubrious state of their produce in consequence, will surely join me in that sentiment.” Lawrence was almost a century before his time. Cow-pox was not again brought forward in this light until 1887-88, when the author reported the contamination of the milk at the Wiltshire farms, and NATURAL AND CASUAL COW-POX. 315 advocated the advisability of placing this disease under the Con- tagious Diseases (Animals) Act. The numerous pathological details wanting in the early accounts of cow-pox were supplied by the painstaking. and laborious re- searches of Robert Ceely. From his classical papers in the Trans- actions of the Provincial Medical Association, we can obtain a complete picture of the natural disease in the cow. In Ceely’s experience in the Vale of Aylesbury, outbreaks occurred at irregular intervals, most commonly appearing about the beginning or end of the spring, rarely during the height of summer. There were outbreaks at all periods from August to May and the beginning of June, cases being met with in autumn and the middle of winter, after a dry summer. The disease was occa- sionally epizodtic, or occurring at times at several farms at no great distance from each other, but was more commonly sporadic or nearly solitary. It was to be seen sometimes at several contiguous farms; at other times at one or two farms. Many years might elapse before it recurred at a given farm, although all the animals might have been changed in the meantime. Cow-pox had broken out twice in five years in a particular vicinity at two contiguous farms, while at an adjoining dairy, in all respects similar in local and other circumstances, it had not been known to exist for forty’ years. It was sometimes introduced into a dairy by recently purchased cows. Twice it. had been known to be so introduced by milch heifers, It was considered that the disease was peculiar to the milch cow; it came primarily while the animal was in milk, and it was casually propagated to others by the hands of the milkers. Sturks, dry heifers, dry cows, and milch cows milked by other hands, grazing in the same pastures, feeding in the same sheds, and at contiguous stalls, remained exempt from the disease. For many years, the ‘ spontaneous” origin of cow-pox had not been doubted in the Vale of Aylesbury. In all the cases that Ceely had noticed he could never discover the probability of any other origin. Condition of Animal primarily affected.—There was much diffi- culty in determining at all times, with precision, whether this disease arose primarily in one or more individuals in the same dairy. Most commonly, however, it appeared to be solitary. The milkers believed they were able to point out the infecting individual. In two instances, there could be very little doubt on this point. In August 1838, three cows were affected with the disease. The first was attacked two months after calving and seven weeks after 316 . INFECTIVE DISEASES. weaning. This animal was considered in good health, but it looked out of condition. Heat and tenderness of the teats and udder were the first noticed signs. The other two were affected in about ten days. In December 1838, in a large dairy, a milch cow slipped her calf, had heat and induration of the udder and teats, with cow-pox eruption, and subsequently leucorrhea and greatly impaired health ; the whole dairy, consisting of forty cows, became subsequently affected, and also some of the milkers. In another dairy, at the same time, it first appeared in a heifer soon after weaning, and in about ten or twelve days extended to five other heifers and one cow, milked in the same shed, affecting the milkers. And in another dairy thirty cows were severely affected, and also one of the milkers. It appeared to originate in a cow two months after calving. The only symptoms noticed were that the udder and teats were tumid, tender, and hot just before the disease appeared. Condition of Animals casually affected.—In some animals, it was less severe than in others, depending on the state and condition of the skin of the parts affected, and the constitution and habit of the animal. It was sometimes observed to diminish the secretion of milk, and in most cases it commonly did actually affect the amount artificially obtained ; with this exception, and the temporary trouble, and accidents to the milk and the milkers, little else was observed ; the animal continued to feed and graze apparently as well as before. The topical effects varied very much in different individuals; the mildness or severity being greatly influenced by temperament and condition of the animal, and especially by the state of the teats and udder, and the texture and vascularity of the skin of the parts affected. Where the udder was short, compact, and hairy, and the skin of the teats thick, smooth, tense, and entire, or scarcely at all chapped, cracked, or fissured, the animal often escaped with a mild affection, sometimes with only a single vesicle. But where the udder was voluminous, flabby, pendulous, and naked, the teats long and loose, and the skin corrugated, thin, fissured, rough, and unequal, then the animal scarcely ever escaped a copious eruption. Hence, in general, heifers suffered least, and cows most, from the milkers’ manipulations, Progress of the Disease.—Cow-pox once arising or introduced, and the necessary precautions not being adopted in time, appeared in ten or twelve days on many more cows in succession, so that among twenty-five cows perhaps by the third week nearly all would be affected ; but five or six weeks or more were required before the teats were perfectly free from the disease. NATURAL AND CASUAL COW-POX. 317 Propagation by the Hand of the Milker—Ceely was able to confirm the way in which the disease was said to spread. In December 1838, on a large dairy farm, where there were three milking-sheds, cow-pox broke out in the home or lower shed. The cows in this shed being troublesome, the milker from the upper shed, after milking his own cows, came to assist in this for several days, morning and evening, when in about a week some of his own cows began to exhibit the disease. It appears that, having chapped hands, he neglected washing them for three or four days at a time, and thus conveyed the disease from one shed to another. During the progress of the disease through this shed, one of the affected cows, which had been attacked by the others, was removed to the middle shed, where all the animals were perfectly well. This cow, being in an advanced stage of the disease, and of course dificult to milk and dangerous to the milk-pail, was milked first in order by the juvenile milker for three or four days only, when, becoming unmanageable by him, its former milker was called in to attend exclusively to it. In less than a week, all the animals of this shed showed symptoms of the disease, though in a much milder degree than it had appeared in the other sheds, fewer manipulations having been performed by an infected hand. Topical Symptoms of the Natural Disease.—For these, Ceely was almost always, in the early stage, compelled to depend on the obser- vations and statements of the milkers. They stated that for three or four days, without any apparent indisposition, they noticed heat and tenderness of the teats and udder, followed by irregularity and pimply hardness of these parts, especially about the bases of the teats and adjoining the vicinity of the udder; these pimples on skins not very dark are of a red eolour, and generally as large as a vetch or a pea, and quite hard, though in three or four days many of these increase to the size of a horse-bean. Milking is generally very painful to the animal; the tumours rapidly increase in size, vesicate, and are soon broken by the hands of the milker. Milking now becomes a troublesome and occasionally a dangerous process. Ceely adds: “It is very seldom that any person competent to judge of the nature of the ailment has access to the animal before the appearance of the disease on others of the herd, when the cow first affected presents on the teats acuminated, ovoid, or globular vesications, some entire, others broken, not infrequently two or three interfluent ; those broken have evidently a central depression with marginal induration ; those entire, being punctured, diffuse a more or less viscid amher-coloured fluid, collapse, and at once indicate the 318 INFECTIVE DISEASES, same kind of central and marginal character. They appear of various sizes, from that of a pin’s head, evidently of a later date, either acuminated or depressed, to that of an almond or a filbert, or ever larger. Dark brown, or black, solid, uniform crusts, especially on the udder near the base of the teats, are visible; at the same time, some much larger are observed on the teats; these, however, are less regular in form and less perfect. Some are nearly detached, others quite removed, exhibiting a raw surface with a slight central slough. On the teats, the crusts are circular, oval, oblong, or irregular; some flat, others elevated, some thin and more trans- lucent, being obviously secondary. The appearance of the disease in different stages, or at least the formation of a few vesicles at different periods, seems very evident. The swollen, raw, and en- crusted teats seem to produce uneasiness to the animal only while subjected to the tractions of the milkers, which it would appear are often nearly as effectual as usual.” Referring again to the character of the vesicle, Ceely says, that “those fortunate enough to have an opportunity of watching the disease in its progress may observe that, when closely examined, they present the following characters : In animals of dark skin, at this period, the finger detects the intumescent indurations often better than the eye, but when closely examined the tumours present at their margins and towards their centres a glistening metallic lustre or leaden hue; but this is not always the case, for occasionally they exhibit a yellowish or yellowish- white appearance.” In describing the crusts in detail, Ceely says that “large black solid crusts, often more than an inch or two in length, are to be seen in different parts of these organs, some firmly adherent to a raw elevated base, others partially detached from a raw, red,.and bleeding surface; many denuded, florid, red, ulcerated surfaces, with small central sloughs secreting pus and exuding blood, the teats exceedingly tender, hot, and swollen. . . . In some animals, under some circumstances, this state continues little altered till the third or fourth week, rendering the process of milking painful to the animal, and difficult and dangerous to the milker,” “In many, however, little uneasiness seems to exist. The parts gradually heal; the crusts, although often partially or entirely renewed, ultimately separate, leaving apparently but few deep irregular cicatrices, some communicating with the tubuli lactiferi, the greater part being regular, smoothly depressed, circular, or oval.” Ceely illustrated his classical memoir with a series of valuable coloured drawings. One plate is a faithful picture of the disease on NATURAL AND CASUAL COW-POX. 319 the teats as itis ordinarily met with ; the other is a composite picture, consisting of the disease as ordinarily observed in the cow, to which is superadded a number of depressed vesicles as they occur in inocu- lated cow-pox. It is, however, an improvement on a plate published by Sacco, The latter is an elaborate drawing, representing the udder and teats of a cow, with an eruption purporting to be the natural cow-pox. Jenner had described a bluish tint in the vesicles in natural cow-pox, and Sacco deliberately represents the natural disease by a highly coloured diagrammatic illustration in which he depicts clusters of vesicles of inoculated cow-pox, coloured blue, and with a silvery lustre. Hering has given a coloured plate of the natural cow-pox. On the teats are a number of oval and circular bullous vesicles and crusts, More recently, Layet has pointed out the same characters in the cow-pox discovered near Bordeaux in 1883 and 1884. The classical characters of the inoculated disease were wanting, particu- larly the central depression. In Wiltshire, the author could only distinguish, on the cow’s teats, globular and broken vesicles and thick prominent crusts and ulcers, appearances which had very little in common with the ordinary results of vaccination. The early accounts of the severe character of the disease will appear by no means exaggerated to those who have had an oppor- tunity of studying the effects on the hands of the milkers, or indeed to those who have made themselves familiar with the descriptions given by Jenner, in some of his cases :— “ Joseph Merret had several sores on his hands, swelling and stiffness in each axilla, and much indisposition for several days. “Mrs. H. had sores upon her hands which were communicated to her nose, which became inflamed and very much swollen, “ Sarah Wynne had cow-pox in such a violent degree that she was confined to her bed, and unable to do any work for ten days. “William Rodway was so affected by the severity of the disease that he was confined to his bed. “William Smith had several ulcerated sores on his hands, and the usual constitutional symptoms, and was affected equally severely a second and a third time. “William Stinchcomb had his hand very severely affected with several corroding ulcers, and a considerable tumour in the axilla. “ Sarah Nelmes had a large pustulous sore on the hand, and the usual symptoms. ‘A girl had an ulceration on tbe lip from frequently holding her finger to her mouth to cool the raging of a cow-pox sore by blowing upon it. 320 INFECTIVE DISEASES. “A young woman had cow-pox to a g¥eat extent, several sores which maturated having appeared on the hands and wrists. ‘A young woman had several large suppurations from cow-pox on the bands.” Pearson in his investigations encountered, and was informed of, similar experiences. “Thomas Edinburgh was so lame from the eruption of cow-pox on the palm of the hand as to necessitate his being for some time in hospital. For three days he had suffered from pain in the armpits, which were swollen and sore to the touch. He described the disease as uncommonly painful, and of long continuance. “A servant at a farm informed Pearson that in Wiltshire and Gloucestershire the milkers were sometimes so ill as to lie in bed for several days. “Mr. Francis said that cow-pox was very apt to produce painful sores. on the hands of milkers. « A servant of Mr. Francis said that cow-pox affected the hands and arms of the milkers with painful sores as large as a sixpence. “Mr. Dolling describes the disease as ‘a swelling under the arm, chilly fits, etc., not different from the breeding of the small-pox. After the usual time of sickening, namely, two or three days, there is a large ulcer, not unlike a carbuncle, which discharges matter.’ “Dr. Pulteney described the disease as causing ‘a soreness and swell- ing of the axillary glands, as under inoculation for the small-pox, then chilliness and rigors and fevers, as in the small-pox. Two or three days. afterwards abscesses, not unlike carbuncles, appear generally on the hands and arms, which ulcerate and discharge much matter.’ “Mr. Bird wrote a short account: ‘It appears with red spots on the hands, which enlarge, become roundish, and suppurate, tumours take place in the armpit, the pulse grows quick, the head aches, pains are felt. in the back and limbs, with sometimes vomiting and delirium.’ “ Annie Francis had pustules on her hands from milking cows. These pustules soon became scabs, which, falling off, discovered ulcerating and very painful sores, which were long in healing. Some milk from one of the diseased cows, having spurted on the cheek of her sister and on the breast of her mistress, produced on these parts of both persons pustules and sores similar to her own on her hands.” In more recent times these descriptions have been confirmed. In 1836 cow-pox was discovered at Passy, near Paris. A black cow, in very poor condition, had cow-pox six weeks after calving. Bousquet had no opportunity of seeing the eruption in the early stage, but on examination he found reddish-brown crusts on the teats, which later gave place to puckered scars. The milk-woman, Fleury, who had had small-pox, nevertheless contracted the disease from the cow. She had several vesico-pustules on the right hand NATURAL AND CASUAL COW-POX. 321 and on her lips. A vesico-pustule, when opened with a lancet, discharged like an abscess. In a letter to Mr. Badcock, dated April 3rd, 1845, Ceely referred to another new stock of lymph raised from a milker’s hand. He added :— “In the enclosed lymph I see nothing unusually severe, except on very thin skins; although the milker’s hand exhibits now rough ulcers, one on the hand deep enough to encase a bean.” Recent discoveries of cow-pox in England._After Ceely’s cases in 1840-41, no cases of casual cow-pox on the hands of milkers were recognised as such and recorded in this country for nearly fifty years. In the outbreak of cow-pox discovered by the author in December 1887, in Wiltshire, the disease was communicated to nearly all the milkers. The reader is referred to the account of this outbreak, which has already been given in the chapter on scarlet fever (p. 274). The author's researches were confirmed by Mr. See in 1888, and Mr. Bucknill in 1895. In June 1888 Mr. Forty, in practice at Wotton- nee -Edge, Gloucestershire, reported to the Local Government Board, that at a farm at Alderley, an eruptive disease on the udder and teats’ was occurring amongst cows, and that the farmer’s son, and other persons engaged as milkers, had contracted an eruption like that of the cows. The farmer’s son had been under Mr. Forty’s care suffering from an eruption, and circum-anal piles. Mr. Forty had watched the course of the eruption from papules to vesicles and scabbing, and concluded that the eruption could not be distinguished from vaccinia. Klein visited the farm, and found a number of cows with sores on the teats and udders. The sores were of various sizes and outline, mostly irregular, and covered with brown or black scabs. Those on the teats were larger and more irregular than those on the udder. Klein was shown several milkers who had had sores on one or more fingers; one had had a bad arm with swollen axillary glands. The farmer had also contracted the eruption; but in these persons only scabs were visible as the remnants of their sores. A girl of about twenty had taken the place of an incapacitated milker, and noticed a red pimple form on the dorsal surface of her right thumb. Eight days afterwards there was a slightly raised circular vesicle, with dark centre and pale periphery ; the centre of the vesicle was slightly depressed. It was just under half an inch in diameter ; there was peripheral redness, but no marked areola. The girl had three good vaccination marks. Klein experimented on calves with lymph from the vesicle and 21 322 INFECTIVE DISEASES. crusts from the cow’s teats, with the result that from both sources an eruption was produced, which in appearance and course was like vaccinia. With lymph from one of the calves, a public vaccinator inoculated a number of infants, and fine vesicles developed, indis- tinguishable from vaccinia. In 1894 Mr. Bucknill met with a case in a milkman. He had been milking a cow affected with cow-pox, and on the ninth day after exposure to infection, and the seventh day after the eruption of the first papule, there were three pocks on the fore-arm. The pocks were elevated, circular, and umbilicated, with a dull, creamy-white ring at the circumference, and there was well-marked induration and extensive areola. There were four excellent marks of primary vaccination. The vesicles contained clear lymph, and re-inoculation of the arm failed to take. An attempt to re-vaccinate the man with current calf lymph produced only topical irritation. InocuLaTED Cow-Pox. Natural or Virulent Lymph.—Severe symptoms are not limited to milkers casually infected from the cow. Under certain conditions, artificial inoculation of fresh virus from the cow reproduces the disease without any mitigation. Thus, in Jenner’s cases :— “James Phipps. The incisions assumed at their edges rather a darker hue than in variolous inoculation, and the efflorescence around them took on more of an erysipelatous look. They terminated in scabs and subsequent eschars. “Susan Phipps was inoculated from the cow by inserting matter into a superficial scratch on December 2nd. The child’s. arm now showed a disposition to scab, and remained nearly stationary for two or three days, when it began to run into an ulcerous state, and then commenced a febrile indisposition, accompanied with an increase of axillary tumour. The ulcer continued spreading near a week, during which the child continued ill, when it increased to a size nearly as large as a shilling. It began now to discharge pus ; granulations sprung up, and it healed.” Jenner’s lymph was employed by Mr. Cline with similar results. “The child sickened on the seventh day, and the fever, which was moderate, subsided on the eleventh. ... The ulcer was not large enough to contain a pea.” Precisely similar experiences have since been encountered, in the early removes of fresh stocks of virulent lymph. Bousquet in France, in his first trials with a new lymph, in 1836, made three punctures, but he had soon to abandon this practice, because the intensity INOCULATED COW-POX. 323 of the inflammation was sometimes so great that it spread over the entire arm as far as the glands of the axilla. In one case, the vesicles were enormous, and the inflammation so violent, that baths, poultices, fomentations, and antiphlogistic diet scarcely sufficed to reduce it. The crusts when they fell off left ulcerations which were very slow to undergo cicatrisation. In some cases, the vesicles which resulted hollowed out the skin so deeply that they left regular holes. In the following year Estlin, in England, started a stock of fresh vaccine virus from the cow, and found on inoculating children that the new lymph was extremely active. In 52 the disease was regular, -, 1 severe erysipelas, » 4 erythematous eruptions of a violent character, » 2 highly inflamed ulcerated arms, » 1 no effect after twice vaccinating, » 8 result unknown ; supposed to have been favourable. 68 Cultivated or Attenuated Lymph.—When cow-pox lymph has been mitigated by successive transmission through the human subject, or by cultivation on the belly of the calf, with careful selection of vesicles, it will produce effects which are as follows: About the end of the second day after insertion, or early on the third day, a slight papular elevation is noticeable. By the fifth or sixth day, it has become a distinct vesicle, of a bluish-white colour, with raised margin and central cup-like depression. By the eighth day, the vesicle is perfect. It is circular, pearl-coloured, distended with clear lymph, and the central depression is well marked. On the same day, or a little earlier, the areola begins to appear, and gradually extends to a diameter of from one to three inches, accompanied with induration and tumefaction of the subjacent connective tissue. After the tenth day, the areola begins to fade, and the vesicle at the same time begins to dry in the centre; the lymph becomes opaque and gradually concretes, and by the fourteenth or fifteenth day, a hard mahogany-coloured scab is formed which contracts, dries, blackens, and falls off between the twentieth and twenty-fifth days. A circular, depressed, foveated, and sometimes radiated scar remains behind. By selecting characteristic vesicles on the calf or on the human subject, and by collecting the lymph at an early stage on the fifth, sixth, or seventh day, this artificial disease, commonly known as 324 INFECTIVE DISEASES. vaccinia, can be kept up in this comparatively mild form. But under certain conditions, such as a peculiarity in the subject inocu- lated, or if lymph be taken too late, there will be, just as in variolation, tendency to revert to the full intensity of the natural virus. Bacteria in Vaccine Lymph.—Cohn, Sanderson, and Godlee described micrococci in vaccinal vesicles. Quist and Ferré in 1883 investigated the same subject. Voigt in 1885 distinguished three species of micrococcus—a diplococcus, a large coccus, and a third form. Bauer in the same year described the presence of bacilli and sphero- cocci. Marotta in 1886 regarded a tetracoccus as the specific micro- organism, and Tenhot in 1887 distinguished a dozen micrococci, two bacilli, and two yeasts. In the sameyear Garré isolated a micrococcus which appeared to him to be the contagium, but inoculated on a child it neither produced local vesicles nor immunity ; while Guttmann pointed out three micro-organisms which appeared to be rather more constantly present than others. Pfeiffer much more fully investigated the bacteriology of vaccine lymph, and found Saccharomyces vaccine, which was seldom present in human lymph but constantly found in calf lymph ; sarcine, both in human and calf lymph, including Sarcina lutea, Sarcina tetragonus, Sarcina aurantiaca, Sarcina muscopus ; bacteria and bacilli were found only exceptionally in human lymph, but frequently in calf lymph. These included a bacterium corre- sponding with Proteus vulgaris. Three mice were inoculated subcutaneously with a drop of the liquefied gelatine, but the result was negative. The injection of a considerable quantity proved fatal to guinea-pigs and rabbits, a result which was probably due to ptomaine poisoning. There were also several bacilli which did not liquefy gelatine ; these were not investigated. Staphylococcus cereus albus was found very frequently, and Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus occasionally. Pure-cultivations of these micrococci inoculated on the skin of calves produced a rapid local irritation, followed by vesiculation, but without the classical characters of the vaccine vesicle. The inoculated part was com- pletely healed in three to five days. According to Pfeiffer they explain the so-called false vaccine. Micrococcus pyogenes albus was almost constantly present. Numerous other micrococci were found, but not constantly present ; vaccine lymph being a splendid medium for the growth of micrococci. Pfeiffer pointed out that the effects of Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, albus, and citreus, and of Streptococcus pyogenes on rabbits had an important bearing upon the practice of vaccination, and he reecom- INOCULATED COW-POX. 325 mended that calf lymph should be tested before use upon children by inoculation of the ear of a rabbit. If after two days no erysipelas occurs in the inoculated rabbit, the absence of streptococci may be considered as almost proved. Two or three rabbits should be inocu- lated at the same time. The author’s researches into the bacteriology of vaccine lymph extended over some years. They independently confirmed and extended the results obtained by Pfeiffer. Having on several oceasions examined vaccine lymph and vaccine pus, and failed to find a specific bacterium, the author proceeded to make a more systematic examination of the different species of bacteria in samples of current vaccinelymph. Pure-cultivations were obtained by plate-cultivation, and inoculation of the surface of nutrient agar, obliquely solidified in test tubes. Various current stocks of lymph were used in the investigation. Among the specimens of calf lymph, No. 1 yielded a torula, Bacillus pyocyaneus and Bacillus subtilis; No. 2, a bacterium, a variety of proteus, Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, and yellow bacte- rium ; No. 3, a bacterium, micrococcus, yellow bacterium, and torula ; No. 4, yellow micrococcus, white micrococcus, white torula, yellow sarcina, white diplococcus, Staphylococcus cereus albus, and a mould fungus; No. 5, yellow sarcina, Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, yellow micrococcus, white bacillus, Staphylococcus pyogenes albus, large white micrococcus, yellow bacterium, and a white micrococcus. Among the specimens of human vaccine lymph, No. 1 contained a white micrococcus, proteus, and Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus; No. 2, a micrococcus, a tetracoccus, a white liquefying micrococcus, and a yellow bacterium; No. 3, white micrococcus, yellow micrococcus, Staphylococcus aureus and flavus, a bacterium, a white micrococcus, a bacillus resembling Bacillus subtilis, Staphylococcus pyogenes cereus and a brown tetracoccus. The author is familiar with these different species of bacteria, and not one of them is peculiar to vaccine lymph ; there was no bacterium constantly present in human and calf vaccine, and there was not one which could be regarded as the contagium. To sum up, most of them are well known saprophytic bacteria, and some were identical with bacteria commonly found in suppuration. Vaccine lymph is a most suitable cultivating medium for micro- organisms, and bacteria invariably got access to the contents of the vaccine vesicle. There is no evidence to be obtained by the present methods of research as to the bacterial nature of the contagium of vaccine lymph. Copeman obtained similar results, and thus con- firmed the author’s conclusions. Klein and Copeman have also observed minute bacilli in calf- 326 INFECTIVE DISEASES. lymph and in variolouslymph. Numerous attempts to cultivate them in nutrient media and in the living animal failed entirely, and the identity of the bacilli could not be determined. Pfeiffer, Guarnieri, Monti, Ruffer, and Plimmer have drawn attention to structures in lymph, which they believe to be of the nature of parasitic protozoa. These bodies have been studied, more especially in the tissues. ‘They are four times the size of ordinary micrococci, and are found in the clear vacuole in the protoplasm of epithelial cells. Whether they are really parasites or altered anatomical elements has not been determined. No other conclusion can be drawn from all these observations, except that the nature of the contagium of cow-pox is unknown. ORIGIN oF Cow-Pox. Jenner’s original theory was that cow-pox was derived from ‘‘ grease,” but subsequently he distinguished between cow-pox, a disease peculiar to the cow, and “grease,” a disease transmitted to the cow from the horse, and the mistake of confounding these two diseases was attributed to farmers and farriers. Thus he wrote :— “ From the similarity of symptoms, both constitutional and local, between the cow-pox and the disease received from morbid matter generated by a horse, the common people in this neighbourhood when infected with this disease, through a strange perversion of terms, frequently called it the cow-pox.” Jenner’s theory of the origin of cow-pox has been discouraged ; so also has the view of its being a “spontaneous” disease in the cow, though Ceely, after many years of research in the Vale of Aylesbury, could never discover the probability of any other origin. Both opinions have given way to the theory that cow-pox is small-pox transmitted to the cow—an opinion advocated by Baron, and supported by an erroneous interpretation of Ceely’s and Badcock’s variolation experiments. Thus the cow-pox and grease of farmers and farriers no longer attracted attention in this country, and as natural cow-small-pox has never been discovered, cow-pox has been credited with being extinct. For a full discussion of this subject the reader is referred to the work by the author on the History and Pathology of Vaccination, but the variolation experiments alluded to will be briefly mentioned. In 1801 Gassner inoculated eleven cows with small-pox lymph, and succeeded in one in producing phenomena indistinguishable from the results of ordinary vaccination with cow-pox, and children were inoculated from the cow. ORIGIN OF COW-POX. 327 In 1828 Dr. McMichael reported that several physicians in Egypt had obtained similar results, and children were successfully ‘* vaccinated.” In 1836 Dr. Martin, in America, inoculated the cow’s udder with variolous lymph, and by inoculating children produced an epidemic of small-pox with fatal cases. In 1839 Reiter of Munich, after fifty unsuccessful attempts, succeeded in producing a vesicle, and a child inoculated from the vesicle contracted small-pox. In 1839 Dr. Thiele, after a number of unsuccessful attempts to inoculate cows with variolous virus, succeeded in producing a vesicle with the physical characters of the vaccine vesicle, and from it a stock of lymph was raised from which over three thousand persons were inoculated. Thiele’s method was to inoculate the udder with lymph, and to select for the purpose young cows which had recently calved and had delicate skins. In England Ceely succeeded by inoculating the vulva of a heifer. One of the punctures developed into an enormous vesicle, which was undoubtedly variolous, His assistant punctured his hand with the lancet which had been used to open the vesicle, and febrile symptoms appeared, followed by an eruption on the face, neck, trunk, and limbs, at first papular, then vesicular, and finally pustular. The lymph was used in children, and “vaccine” vesicles were produced. One child suffered from vomiting delirium, and extensive ee but there was no eruption in any other case. In 1840 Badcock of Brighton inoculated a cow successfully, and later succeeded in variolating thirty-seven out of two hundred cows upon which he experimented. In 1847. variolation of the cow was successfully performed at Berlin, but the virus produced variola, and one of the children inoculated died of confluent small-pox. In 1864 Chauveau inoculated seventeen animals with virulent small-pox lymph. Very small papules resulted, and the virus from the papules produced variola in a child, which was infectious to others. Klein in this country until recently was uniformly unsuccessful. Voigt, Fischer, King, Eternod, Haccius, Hime and Simpson, have all succeeded in inoculating cows and producing variola-vaccine. The results of these experiments have been very generally misin- terpreted, and claimed by some as conclusive evidence of the identity of cow-pox and small-pox. Instead of the vesicle being regarded as the most attenuated form of variola, the experimenters are said to have succeeded in producing cow-pox. It is quite true that they produced phenomena indistinguishable 328 INFECTIVE DISEASES. from the phenomena of an ordinary vaccination, but that does not mean that they produced the disease cow-pox. The vesicle which followed the inoculation, whether papular or vesicular, was small-pox. Ceely. Badcock, Voigt, and others, succeeded in tngrafting the cow with small-pox, and when suitable lymph and suitable subjects were employed, the virus was so attenuated that a benign vesicle resulted. Similar results were obtained by Sutton and Dimsdale, and identical results by Adams, Guillou, and Thiele, by inoculating the human subject with variolous lymph without first ingrafting the disease on the cow. Vaccination with variola-vaccine is simply a modification of the Suttonian system of small-pox inoculation, only in the first remove the cow is substituted for the human subject. All those who were inoculated with Ceely’s, Badcock’s, or Simpson’s variola-vaccine, were not in the usual meaning of the word vaccinated; they were not inoculated with cow-pox but they were variolated, and in such an extremely attenuated form that the persons so variolated do not convey the infection. By judicious selection it is thus possible to obtain a strain of lymph from variola which, by direct inoculation of the human subject or by first inoculating a cow, is deprived of infectious properties, and produces on the arm the physical characters of an ordinary vaccine vesicle. This has been regarded as a proof of the identity of small-pox and cow-pox, but it is not so. Variola. and cow-pox are not the only diseases caused by a virus which can be attenuated until only a vesicle is produced with the characters of an ordinary vaccine vesicle. The results which have been obtained with the virus of cattle plague and of sheep-pox and horse-pox have been given in previous chapters; and no one would urge on this account that human small-pox, cattle plague, cow-pox, sheep-pox, and horse-pox are all manifestations of the same disease. Cow-pox has never been converted into human small-pox, and, in their clinical history and epidemiology, natural cow-pox and human small-pox are so different, that the comparative pathologist is no more pre- pared to admit their identity than he is prepared to admit the identity of cow-pox and sheep-pox, or small-pox and cattle plague. Protective Inoculation.—Whether vaccination of all heifers on a farm would protect them from cow-pox when they came into milk is not known, the duration of the immunity in calves afforded by vaccination having not been determined. Calves undoubtedly have an immunity after vaccination, lasting for some weeks. In 1896 Béclére, Chambon, and Menard experimented upon the immunising power of the serum of vaccinated calves. They COW-POX AND SMALL-POx. 329 concluded from experiments on animals and children that the serum of a vaccinated calf from ten to fifty days after vaccination will give immunity against inoculated cow-pox. They further stated that, whereas the immunity given by vaccination in the ordinary ‘way is not complete until the eighth day, the immunity obtained by injection of the immunising serum is immediate. The serum has also heen credited with therapeutic properties and has, it is said, proved efficacious in cases of small-pox. Jenner believed that cow-pox did not protect against itself but protected against small-pox, and for a century this has been a subject of much controversy. The reader ix referred to the Reports and conclusions of the Royal Vaccination Commission. Stamping-out System.—It would undoubtedly be an advan- tage if cow-pox were scheduled under the Contagious Diseases Animals Act. Cow-keepers and dairy-men, being anxious that their trade should not be interfered with, very commonly conceal the existence of the disease, and perhaps nothing is known about it, unless a milker infected from the cows seeks for medical advice. The contamination of the milk with lymph, pus, crusts, and sometimes blood, renders it unwholesome, and therefore precautions ought to be taken to prevent its occurrence. If the infected cows in a herd are the last to be milked, and the milker washes his hands after the milking, the disease will not spread. CHAPTER XNIII. DIPHTHERIA. DIPHTHERIA is a specific infectious disease. especially of children, characterised most commonly by inflammation, and infiltration with lymph cells and fibrine, of the mucous membrane of the fauces, pharynx, larynx and trachea, followed by necrosis of the mucous membrane and the formation of a greyish-white false membrane, the diphtheritic membrane. In some cases a diphtheritic membrane forms in the stomach, intestine, the urinary organs and in wounds. After the separation of the membrane an ulcer remains, which may gradually heal. In the superficial part of the diphtheritic membrane there are masses of bacteria including cocci, streptococci, and bacilli. The diphtheria bacilli are not found in the blood or in the internal organs. There is no doubt of the fact that diphtheria is a disease which can be communicated from one person to another; but the question of its origin is stilla vexed one. There is a close association with insanitary conditions and decaying animal and vegetable refuse, and dampness. Localities with damp houses, defective drainage, and a cold exposure, are favourable to the development of diphtheria; but that does not necessarily indicate that these conditions can originate it. On the other hand, assuming the disease to be due io a living contagium, these insanitary conditions would afford a suitable environment predisposing to the development, and facilitating the spread, of the disease. Scarlet fever and measles predispose to diphtheria; and defective sanitary conditions, causing sore throat, may indirectly act as a predisposing cause. A great many cases have been quoted to illustrate the possibility of the conveyance of diphtheria by milk, and the theory which best harmonises with all these observations is the existence of a specific bacillus, which may be readily transferred from the throat of the diseased to the healthy ; which finds also in milk a suitable soil for its growth, and by its agency may be trans- mitted to the consumer. Such a bacillus was discovered by Léffler, 330 and may be easily obtained from the throat of diphtheritic patients in the fol- lowing manner :— Culture Outfit.— Steel rods like or- dinary knitting needles, about six inches in length, are beaten out or rough- ened at one end, and a pledget of wool is twisted round so as to form a swab. These swabs are placed in clean test- tubes, which are then plugged with cotton- wool, The test-tubes and swabs are steri- lised by heating in the hot air steriliser for an hour at 150° C. ‘The so-called culture outfit consists of a small box con- taining a test-tube of blood serum and a swab. They can be always kept ready for use, and after use should be conveyed hy hand for further examination. The danger of trans- mitting virulent diphtheritic material by post is obvious. When the examina- tion of the tube has been completed, the DIPHTHERIA. 331 Bia. 126.—Fre«x Sunvace or Dievruurrric Larynx x 350 (Hamivron).—A, Deposit of diphtheria bacillus on surface of falae membrane; B, false membrane ; C, mucosa; 0, lymph-cells and false membrane surrounded by meshes of fibrine ; ¢, surface of mucova deprived of its epithelium ; J,v, lymph-cells containing shed epithelium. 332 INFECTIVE DISEASES. culture outfit and its contents should be disinfected or destroyed. To inoculate the tubes the patient, if it is possible, should be turned to the light, the mouth well opened, the tongue depressed, and the swab, without touching the teeth or the tongue, should be passed strajght to the tonsils or pharynx, and especially to the membranous exudate. The swab is carefully and quickly withdrawn, and at once very gently rubbed over the surface of the blood serum. The culture outfit is then sent to the laboratory with full particulars, and the tubes are placed in the incubator at 37° C., and can be examined after twelve hours. If the throat has been disinfected Fie. 127.—Bacitivs or DIPHTHERIA ; FROM A CULTIVATION ON BLoopD Serum, x 1000 (FRANKEL and PFEIFFER). before examination, this must be taken into account, as the failure to find bacilli would not then necessarily indicate a wrong diagnosis. In all undoubted cases of diphtheria, growths will be obtained either in the form of a pure-culture of the bacillus, or far more commonly there will alsoibe colonies of various bacteria, especially Streptococcus pyogenes. Bacillus of Diphtheria.—Rods, straight or slightly curved, 3 to ‘8 w in breadth, and 1:5 to 6°5 yw in length. They occur singly, in pairs, sometimes in chains, and sometimes as short leptothrix forms. Jn some cultures very irregular forms are observed, the bacilli being swollen at one or both ends or thicker in the middle portion, or the bacillus may contain oval or spherical DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VIII. Bacillus diphtheriz and Bacillus typhosus, Fig. 1.—Cover-glass preparation from a pure-cultivation of Bacillus diph- therize on blood serum; obtained from the throat in « typical case of diphtheria. Stained with gentian-violet. x 1200. Fig. 2.—Cover-glass preparation from a pure-cultivation of Bacillus typhosus . on nutrient-agar; from the spleen in a case of typhoid fever Stained with gentian-violet. x 1200. , Plate VIII. S DIPHTHERIA Fig 1. BACILLU fig2.BACILLUS TYPHOSUS Vineent Brooks Day & Son, Lith. EM Grooksharde fecit DIPHTHERIA. 333 elements. They differ greatly in size and shape, often in the same cultures, and still more in cultures obtained from different sources. Spore formation is unknown. In unstained preparations there are highly refractive elements which correspond with the deeply stained parts of the bacillus. They stain readily with the ordinary aniline dyes. At certain stages of their growth they stain irregularly, the protoplasm of the rod being broken up into irregular segments. The bacillus is non-motile, and does not liquefy gelatine; it grows at 20° C., but much more readily at higher temperatures. Colonies in gelatine plate-cultivations are yellowish-brown, and opaque, granular, and circular, but with more or less irregular margin. In plate-cultivations on agar and on glycerine agar the same description applies. On the surface of gelatine the appearances depend greatly on the method of inoculation. The growth may occur in the form of a whitish film, but if a sub-culture has been prepared from broth the growth is often composed of a number of iso- lated white colonies (Fig. 128, a). On. blood serum, after twelve hours the colonies appear in the form of little elevated greyish- white or pearl-grey dots, which coalesce, forming a film if the serum is moist. On the surface Fis. 128.—Pure-cunrurss or Baciiius 5 av f bacilli of the = y a characteristic disease. They were described as similar to Bacillus subtilis, or Bacillus anthracis, but smaller in size. These bacilli developed into long leptothrix filaments, and formed spores. It was further asserted that on inoculation, cultures produced lesions indicative of swine fever; the bacilli were also pathogenic in mice and rabbits. Later this bacillus was re- nounced in favour of another. In the following year Det- mers described a bacillus, but subsequently renounced it in favour of a micrococcus, In 1882 Pasteur maintained aes that the virus of swine fever in 4 France (rouget) was a dumb-bell Fic. 139.—Bacrittus No. 2. From a micrococcus, which produced the Preparation or BroncutaL Mucus game effect in pigeons as the ne Ao microbe of fowl-cholera. Though rouget or swine measles is probably a different disease, the occurrence of this micro-organism is of interest in this connection. In 1883 Klein again investigated swine fever, and discovered Bacillus No. 2, and maintained Fie. 138.—Bacittus or Swine-Frver No. 1. (Kizrn.) that these bacilli were found in
while, according to others, uleeration
of the intestine and ileo-cweal valve may be found post-mortem. The
onset of the symptoms, as in pig typhoid, is very rapid ; the animals
conse to feed, and show other general signs of illness; the voice is
hoarse, and there is a rapid rise of temperature. On the neck,
chost, and abdomen, red patches make their appearance, whieh
extond and coalesce, and change to a dark reddish or brownish colour,
These symptoms may be followed by convulsions, and sometimes by
paralysis of the hind legs; and death occurs in from one to four
days. It is especially a disease of voung pigs, and from 50 to 60
per cont. of infected animals die,
On post-mortem examination there is hemorrhage and eden
in the patehes of the skin, the lymphatic glands are swollen and
dark ved, tho pevitoneum is cechymosed, the intestinal mucous
membrane is congested and swollen, and tho solitary follicles and
Peyer's patehos ave prominent, and in the neighbourhood of the ileo-
eweal valve there ave, according to Vliigge, ulcers of considerable size,
Tho liver and spleen are congested and enlarged, Pastour investi-
gated swine measles or rouget, and described a figure-of-eight miero-
coceus, Which he believed to be the coutaginm of this disease. This
organisin appears to be identical with tho bacterium of hemorrhagic
septiowmia, which is also commonly found in pig-typhoid,
In. experimenting with the virus obtained from the sploon
345
356 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
Pasteur found that, by successive inoculation of rabbits, the virulence
was exalted for rabbits, but attenuated for swine, and the virus
which had thus been passed through the rabbit was used us a
vaccine for swine, to protect them aginst virulent erysipolas.
Pasteur found that by passing the virus through pigeons it was
made more virulent for swine.
In the blood, and the juice of the internal organs, and of the
lymph glands, Schiitz found « minute bacillus identical with the
bacillus of mouse septicemia.
Bacillus of Swine Erysipelas (Schiitz)—- Mxtremely minute
rods 6 to 1°8 y in length, morphologically and in cultural charac-
ters identical with the bacillus of mouse septicamia, Milaments
and involution forms. Spore-formation present.
House mice if inoculated with « pure culture die in two to four
days. Pigeons are also very susceptible. Fowls and guinea-pigs
i ee ia)
Ge
SMS RH ie ore
AWA LES “ % @ EY
RAAT Rix cer
SL OID et
aan 2
Sha 4 ve "s
Vic. 142, -Baciiar or Swink ic. 143.- Boon or Pichon INOGULATED
EERYSIPELAS (BAUMGARTEN). wrt Bacar or Swink Maysiriias, ~ 600
(Sen),
are immune. Rabbits after inoculation of the car suffer from
érysipelatous inflammation, identical with that produced by inocu-
lation of the bacillus of mouse septicemia. The bacilli are also
pathogenic in swine and sheep,
Protective Inoculation.-—With Pasteur’s vaccine immunity is
said to be produced which lasts about a year, Schiitz and Schottelius
found the minute bacilliin Pasteur’s vaccine, which they had already
found in cases of swine erysipelas in Germany.
The results of vaccination in France ure said to be very satis-
factory, but in test experiments in Germany they were not so
favourable. Out of 119 vaccinated swine 5 por cent, died as the
result, of the inoculation, while the average loss in the ordinary way
is 2 per cent.
Metchnikoff found that the blood of immunised rabbits was
antitoxic, and Lorenz maintains that the serum of swine which
SWINE FEVER. 357
have recovered from swine erysipelas is also antitoxic, and will
produce immunity in“other animals. The treatment introduced
by Lorenz is to inject serum in the proportion of 1 cc. to every
10 kilogrammes of the weight of the animal’s body. Two days
afterwards °5 to 1 ce. of virulent culture is injected, and after
twelve days the dose is doubled. Lorenz inoculated 294 pigs;
12 were suffering from swine erysipelas, and
of these 6 recovered and 6 died.
In the opinion of the author this disease
requires re-investigation, for if it be true that
rouget or schweinrothlauf is associated with
ulceration of the intestines, the recognition
of it as a disease distinct from our English
swine fever apparently rests upon the pres-
ence of a bacillus, which cannot be distin-
guished from the bacillus of mouse septicemia.
The question arises whether this bacillus
is really the cause of a distinct disease, swine
erysipelas, or, on the other hand, whether
the bacillus is really the bacillus of mouse
septicemia which has been isolated from
certain cases of swine fever. The bacillus of
mouse septicemia is widely distributed, and
it may only be an accidental concomitant in
rouget or schweinrothlauf. The presence of
the bacterium of hemorrhagic septicemia in
both rouget and pig typhoid would not prove
identity, as this micro-organism is un-
doubtedly only secondary in both diseases. .
There is great need, therefore, for further ye, 144.—Pore-cunTuRE
careful investigation. Clinical and patho- in Nutrient GELA-
: : : . TINE OF BAcILLI
logical observations must be made in this ay’ Geen ae ka
country, to determine whether there are (BAUMGARTEN).
really two diseases included under the name
“ swine fever.” If this prove to be the case, we must ascertain the
clinical and pathological differences between rouget and pig typhoid.
How can rouget be distinguished from cases of swine fever in which
there is a patchy rash, paralysis of hind legs, but no ulceration of the
intestine? Further, how is swine erysipelas with ulceration of the
intestine and ileo-cecal valve to be distinguished from an ordinary
case of pig typhoid ?
358 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
Distemrer In Dogs.
Distemper is an infectious febrile disease of dogs, characterised by
bronchial catarrh and discharge from the eyes. Bronchitis and
pneumonia may supervene, or there may be intestinal catarrh ter-
minating in dysenteric diarrhea, sometimes complicated by jaundice.
The disease may affect the nervous system, and produce convulsive
contractions of the muscles of the nose, ears, lips, and limbs..
Occasionally there is an eruption, especially in animals which are
out of condition. The virus exists in the discharge from the nostrils
and eyes, and is given off from the lungs and the skin.
One attack of the disease does not confer entire immunity ;
and some dogs are completely insusceptible.
Bacteria in Distemper.—Millais has isolated a micro-organism
resembling the pneumococcus of Friedlander, which he believes to be
the cause of the disease. The bacillus occurs with other bacteria and
micrococci in the nasal discharge.
Protective Inoculation.—Mixed cultures of these bacteria
liquefy the gelatine, and the liquid has been used as a vaccine.
When applied to the nose, it is said to produce a mild attack of
distemper, which protects as much as an attack of the disease
contracted naturally. These results require confirmation.
Inoculation of the nasal discharge in healthy dogs has been
practised, so that they may have the disease under favourable con-
ditions ; but the system should not be encouraged, as dogs need not
necessarily contract distemper. Vaccination with cow-pox lymph
has been advocated, but it is perfectly useless.
Stamping-out System.—Dogs suffering from distemper must be
completely isolated. Any straw or litter which has been in contact
with a diseased dog should be burnt. Clothing, collars, chains, and
the kennel or premises inhabited, must be thoroughly disinfected.
The animal after recovery should be washed with carbolic soap.
Errpemic Disease oF FERRETS.
Eberth and Schimmelbusch investigated an epidemic disease of
ferrets (fretichen-seuche), and isolated a bacillus, which in mor-
phology and cultivation agrees very closely with the bacillus of
hemorrhagic septicemia.
Epipemic Disrask oF Mice.
Léfiler investigated an epidemic disease which occurred in mice
kept in confinement, and isolated a bacillus resembling Bacillus
typhosus.
EPIDEMIC DISEASE OF MICE. 359
Bacillus Typhi Murium.—Rods varying in length; and fila-
ments; motile; flagellated. The colonies are circular, brownish
and granular on the surface of obliquely solidified gelatine. The
bacteria inoculated on the surface produce a greyish-white semi-
transparent growth, and on agar and potato the appearance of the
growth is very similar. They can be cultivated readily in milk and
in broth. White and field mice are killed in from one to two
weeks, when given bread moistened with a culture.
Loffler claims to have used this method with success in Thessaly,
where there was a plague of field mice causing great losses to
agriculturists,
CHAPTER XXVII.
ASIATIC CHOLERA. — CHOLERA NOSTRAS. — CHOLERAIC DIARRHd#tA
FROM MEAT-POISONING.—DYSENTERY.—CHOLERAIC DIARRHG&A
IN FOWLS.
Asiatic CHOLERA.
THERE are several diseases in man associated with diarrhoea, which
have certain characters in common, but are totally distinct. They
include Asiatic cholera, cholera nostras, dysentery, and choleraic
diarrhea, Asiatic cholera is an endemic disease of the Delta of
the Ganges, a locality which has become notorious as the home
of cholera. Cholera is a filth disease; and the accumulation of
filth on the banks of the Ganges, with contamination of the
water, and the climate, afford most favourable conditions for the
development of the cholera virus.
Four great cholera epidemics have originated in, and spread
from, India: in 1817, in 1826, in 1846, and in 1865. Cholera
follows the routes of pilgrims and caravans, and now, owing to
the rapid means of communication by steamers and railways, it
spreads to the most distant parts of the world, covering in a few
weeks or days distances which in former times could only be traversed
in several months or even years.
In 1892 the epidemic passed from India, through Afghanistan,
to Russia in Asia, and quickly spread westwards along the route
of the trans-Caspian railway ; and all this occurred within the space
of a few weeks. By Russian emigrants it was carried to Hamburg
and Antwerp; and the virus, finding a suitable environment in the
former place, produced a severe epidemic there. Thus, in about three
months, it was brought into close proximity with England. Mecca
is one of the great infective centres of the world, for there all
the conditions are found for the propagation of cholera, including
filth, overcrowding, and the water of the famous Holy Well, which
is used for ablutions and drinking purposes. The return of
360
ASIATIC CHOLERA. 361
the pilgrims to Egypt, and the proximity of England to Egypt,
necessitate the greatest possible precautions to prevent the intro-
duction of the disease into this country.
In 1884 a German Commission was sent out to India, and Koch
discovered a micro-organism which he described as a curved or
comma-shaped bacillus, and pronounced to be the contagium of
this disease.
a
+
oh as
pe EN
has 1 \> —)) Sve =
rm
BOE xk aS “nin?
Hy, 600 MG
2) WEF
Fic. 145.—Cover-GLass PREPARATION OF A Drop or Mzart Inrusion, containing
a pure-cultivation of comma-bacilli, with (a) spirilliform threads, x 600. (Kocu.)
Spirillum cholere Asiaticz (Comma-bacillus, Koch).—Curved
rods, spirilla, and threads. The curved rods or commas are about
half the length of a tubercle-bacillus. They occur isolated, or
attached to each other forming S-shaped organisms or longer
screw-forms, the latter resembling the spirilla of relapsing fever.
H 900 Se 2 9eu
HRT ARE
TF
Fig. 146.—ArTHrospores ; (a) Comma-bacillus breaking up into spheres; (b, ¢),
formation of spheres in spiral forms; (d, ¢), groups of spheres; (f) spirilla
with spheres from an old cultivation; (y) germination of the spheres.
(Hurpre.)
Finally they may develop into spirilliform threads. In old cultiva-
tions threads are found with swellings or irregularities (Fig. 148).
The commas are actively motile, and possess flagella (Fig. 147).
Their movements; and development into spirilla may be studied in
drop-cultivations. Arthrospore formation has been described by
Hueppe (Fig. 146). In plate-cultivations, at a temperature of from
362 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
4
16° to 20° C., the colonies develop as little specks, which begin to
be visible after about twenty-four hours. Examined with a low
power, and a small diaphragm, these colonies have the following
characteristics. They appear as little masses, granular, and
Fic. 147.—FLAcELLa OF COMMA-BACILLI; STAINED BY} LOrrier’s Meron
(FRANKEL AND PFEIFFER).
yellowish-white in colour, and sometimes very faintly: tinged with
red, which have liquefied the gelatine, and sunk down to the bottom
of the resulting excavations.
In test-tubes of slightly alkaline nutrient gelatine (10 per cent.),
Fig. 148.—Invonvrion Forms, x 700 Fic. 149.—Cotonies or ComMa-BACILLI
(Van ErmMeENGEM). on Nurrient GELATINE, NaTURAL
Size (Kocw).
the appearance of the growth is very striking. In typical cultures
it begins to be visible in about twenty-four hours. Liquefaction
sets in very slowly, commencing at the top of the needle track
ASIATIC CHOLERA. 363
around an enclosed bubble of air, and forming a funnel continuous
with the lower part of the growth; the latter preserves for several
days its resemblance to a white
thread (Plate II., Fig. 1). In
about eight days, however, lique-
faction takes place along the
whole of the needle track.
On the surface of agar-agar
the cultivation develops as a Fic. 150.—Cotontss or Kocu’s Comma-
white, semi-transparent layer, BAGH 280
with well-defined margin. The
appearance on blood serum is very similar; liquefaction very slowly
takes place. In broth they form a wrinkled film on the surface,
there is a rapid and abundant growth at the temperature of the
pe
{feo Wen ree x:
Se 20. YW
= ase
«/ aire 1M id
) ls Ah Z
2 Yoel ay Was,
| Lad or Z sav ¢
= m
is sy we Voit iy \
7 pee il mad iy
Ql eyo BY v= gets |) |
SA Nt Lal = 9 |
1 San, & We) 0)
s,s 7 SG! ;
ye a ge mie 7 dye
Fig. 151.—Cover-crass Preparation Fic. 152.—Cover-ciass PREPARATION
FROM THE CONTENTS OF A CHOLERA or CHoters Desecta on Damp LINEN
InTEstTINE, x 600. (a) Remains of the (two days old), x 600. Great prolife-
epithelial cells ; (b) Comma-bacillus ; ration of the bacilli with spirilla (a)
(c) Group of comma-bacilli (Koch). (Koch).
’
blood, and the same applies to sterilised milk; and they will even
multiply in sterilised water. In potato-cultivations the microbe
will only grow at the temperature of the blood (87° C.), forming a
slightly brown, transparent layer. Inoculation of a cultivation of
the bacillus in the duodenum of guinea-pigs, with and without
364 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
ligation of the bile-duct, has given positive results. More recently
these results have been confirmed by the following method: Five
cc. of a 5 per cent. solution of potash were injected into the
stomach of a guinea-pig, and twenty minutes after, 10 cc. of a
cultivation of comma-bacilli, diffused in broth, were similarly intro-
duced. Simultaneously with the latter, an injection of tincture of
opium was made into the abdominal cavity, in the proportion of
1 ce. for every 200 grammes weight of the animal. Those who
have had success with inoculation experiments maintain that choleraic
symptoms were produced without any trace of peritonitis or putrid
infection, and that the comma-bacilli of Koch were again found
in the intestinal contents, and fresh cultivations established.
Fic. 153.—Section oF THE Mucous MEMBRANE Or A CHOLERA INTESTINE, x 600.
A tubular gland (a) is divided transversely ; in its intérior (b) and between
the epithelium and the basement membrane (c) are numerous comma-bacilli
(Koch).
On the other hand, these results have been disputed, the fatal
effects of the inoculation attributed to septiceemic poisoning, and
the proliferation of the bacilli considered to be dependent upon an
abnormal condition of the intestines, induced by the injection of
tincture of opium. It has, however, been shown that these organisms,
like several others which have been isolated from intestinal dis-
charges, produce definite poisonous substances. The comma-bacilli
were found, in’ the superficial necrosed layer of the intestine, in
the mucous flakes and liquid contents of the intestinal canal of
cases of Asiatic cholera. It is stated that they were also detected
ASIATIC CHOLERA. 365
in a tank which contained the water supply of a neighbourhood
where cholera cases occurred; but comma-shaped organisms are
frequently present in sewage-contaminated water. Koch’s comma-
bacilli are aerobic, and their development is arrested by deprivation
of oxygen. They are destroyed by drying on a cover glass, but
retain their vitality longer when dried on silk threads. Cultures
are sterilised by exposure for fifteen minutes to 55° C., and by
various antiseptic substances.
Fic. 154.—PUuRE-CULTIVATIONS IN NUTRIENT GELATINE. a, Kocn’s CHOLERA
Bacritws, twenty-four hours old. J, FINKLER’s BaciLius, twenty-four
hours old.
- Mernops oF Srarxinc THE CoMMA-BACILLI oF Kocu.
In cover-glass preparations they may be well stained in the ordinary
way, with anaqueous solution of methyl-violet or fuchsine, or by the
rapid method, without passing through the flame (p. 85, Babés’ method).
Nicati and Reitsch's method.
A small quantity of the stools, or of the scraping of the intestinal
mucous membrane, is spread out on a glass slide and dried, then steeped
during some seconds in sublimate solution, or in osmic acid (1 to 100).
It is then stained by immersion in fuchsine-aniline solution (1 or 2
grammes of Bale fuchsine dissolved in a saturated aqueous solution of
aniline), washed, dried, and mounted in Canada balsam.
366 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
In sections of the intestine their presence may be demonstrated by :—
(a) Koch’s method:
Sections of the intestine, which must be well hardened in absolute
alcohol, are left for twenty-four hours in a strong, watery solution of
methylene-blue, or for a shorter time if the solution is warmed; then
treated in the usual way.
(0) Babes’ method.
Sections, preferably from a recent case of cholera, and made as soon as
possible after death, are left for twenty-four hours in an aqueous solution
of fuchsine, then washed in distilled water, faintly acidulated with acetic
acid, or in sublimate solution 1 in 1000, passed rapidly through alcohol,
and finally treated in the usual way.
Klein investigated cholera in India, and does not accept Koch’s
conclusions, With regard to the inoculation experiments, Klein
believes that the living choleraic comma-bacilli, even if introduced
in large numbers into the small intestine, are quite innocuous,
but capable of great multiplication if the intestine is previously,
from some cause or another, diseased ; the chemical products of the
comma-bacillii then act as poisons analogous to the ptomaines
obtained from other putrefactive bacteria. The observations made
by Roy, Brown, and Sherrington, in Spain, tended to confirm
Koch’s views. Comma-bacilli were found to be present, in some
cases, in enormous numbers, and the frequency of their occurrence
led these observers to believe that they must bear some relation to
the disease. At the same time,
C C oe as they failed to find them in all
eae hy : ;
a 2. | i cases, they regarded the existence
a ( 7 ) ae of a causal relation as not proven.
oY)? f /y They failed to find the Naples
) > a the QS bacterium, or a small, straight
: Aa aa bacillus noted by Klein; and
they drew attention to certain
Fic. 155.—COMMA-SHAPED ORGANISMS peculiar mycelium-like threads
WITH OTHER Bacteria IN SEWAGE-
CONDADO WV ARR. SCIOU0: in the mucous membrane of the
intestines ; but these cannot be
considered to have any significance. Methylene-blue has been
employed by Koch and others, including the author, for staining
sections of the intestine from cholera cases, and had they been
constantly present, it is hardly possible that such striking objects
could have been overlooked. Again, we must bear in mind that
hypho-mycetous fungi occasionally have been found to occur sapro-
phytically in the intestinal canal, as well as in the lungs, external
auditory meatus, andelsewhere. Cunningham, of Calcutta, maintains
ASIATIC CHOLERA.
367
that Koch’s comma-bacilli are not constantly found; and that
the comma-bacilli obtained from typical cholera cases show a
great variation in cultivation, and cannot be distinguished from
comma-bacilli from other sources.
Cunningham asserts that
comma-bacilli resembling Koch’s
are found in the intestine in
health. Sternberg, on the other
hand, made a number of examina-
tions of the evacuations of yellow
fever patients and healthy indi-
viduals, and failed to find any
KC
abn
(Fa) 0 ne
isd FAS °
ARN Ss ec
z Paw
AA 46
CNS MN,
SSZNLNS SEY
PEO FEY
Zee
Fia.156, -CoMMA-BACILLI OF THE MOUTH,
x 700 (Van ErmeEnceEm).
micro-organism resembling the cholera spirillum.
Various comma-bacilli have been isolated from different sources
and compared with Koch’s comma-bacillus, Comma-bacilli have been
Fic. 157.—FINnKLER’s COMMA-BACILLI 5
FROM CHOLERA NosTRAS, x 700
(FLteeer).
found in the mouth by Lewis ;
in cholera nostras by Finkler and
Prior; in cheese by Deneke ;
in hay infusion and sewage by
Weibel ; in the intestines of fowls
by Gamaleia, and in water by
Sanarelli.
Whether the comma-bacillus
is the cause of cholera or
not, its detection is an aid in
diagnosis. If we are dealing
with a case alleged to be one of Asiatic cholera, and a micro-
organism is found in the intestinal evacuations, which can be
differentiated from the comma-bacillus described by Finkler in
cholera nostras, and identified
with the comma-bacillus de-
scribed by Koch, we are justified
in regarding the case as one of
Asiatic cholera, But we cannot
diagnose Koch’s comma-bacillus,
with certainty, unless we know
the source of the culture. The
clinical symptoms of cholera in
man, and especially the presence
=e
s — we = ais
oY atest {
par eee ee
SO) re
% a a
Fig. 158.—DENEKE’s CoMMa-BACILLI,
FROM CHEESE, x 700 (FLUcGE).
of rice-water stools, must be taken into account, together with
the biological, morphological, and chemical characteristics of
the bacilli which are found to be present.
There are several
368 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
chemical tests which can be applied to cultures. According to
Frankel, the Bujwid-Dunham test can be relied upon to distin-
. guish Koch’s comma-bacillus from the comma-bacillus of Finkler-
Prior (cholera nostras), and from those found by Gamaleia. The
comma-bacilli are inoculated in broth containing peptone, and,
after twelve hours in the incubator, a drop of strong sulphuric
acid added to the culture will produce a red colour, owing to the
presence of indol. A test which distinguishes Koch’s comma-
bacillus from Finkler-Prior’s and Deneke’s was introduced by Cahen.
A. solution of litmus is added to the broth, and the culture placed
in the incubator, until the following day; in the case of Koch's
commas, the colour will have disappeared.
Koch points out that in the bacteriological diagnosis of cholera
the first step is to examine the mucus in the evacuations, or in the
intestine if the examination is made after death. Cover-glass
preparations should be stained with dilute Ziehl-Neelsen solution.
Cultures are next made in peptone, and in eight hours will give the
indol reaction. In twenty-four hours the colonies may be examined
on plate-cultivations. The peptone cultures are prepared by adding
a trace of the choleraic evacuations, or of mucus containing the
bacilli, to a sterilised 1 per cent. solution of peptone, with ‘5 to 1
per cent. of common salt. The solution must be alkaline, and the
culture is placed in the incubator at 37° C. The pathogenic effects
can be ascertained by diffusing the bacilli from an agar-culture in
broth, and injecting it into the peritoneal cavity.
Toxic Products.—Brieger isolated several toxic products which he
had found in association with putrefaction, such as cadaverin and
putrescin ; but there were also present two new toxic substances, one
producing cramps and muscular tremors in inoculated animals, and
the other lowering the temperature and depressing the action of
the heart. Later, Brieger in conjunction with Frinkel, succeeded
in isolating a tox-albumin from pure cultures. Guinea-pigs were
killed in two or three days, but rabbits had an immunity. Pfeiffer
found that cultures contained a poisonous principle which proved
fatal to guinea-pigs in extremely minute doses. It is broken up
by alcohol and by boiling, and secondary products formed, of very
much mitigated virulence. Similar toxic products were obtained
from cultures of both Finkler-Prior’s and Metchnikoff’s commas.
Protective Inoculation.—Haffkine has introduced a system of
protective inoculation, which is founded on the principle of inducing
the formation of antitoxins, or defensive proteids. Comma-bacilli
when first cultivated from a cholera patient are not sufficiently
ASIATIC CHOLERA. 369
virulent, and the virulence is increased by cultivation in the
peritoneal cavities of a succession of guinea-pigs. This successive
cultivation is carried on until a virus is obtained which proves fatal
in a few hours when inoculated into the peritoneum. A culture
from the peritoneum is obtained on an agar plate-cultivation, and
a pure sub-culture on agar is thoroughly shaken up with broth,
This constitutes the vaccinating fluid. It may be used as a living
vaccine, or the comma-bacilli killed by the addition of carbolic
acid.
Haffkine, having studied the pathological and physiological effects
on some sixty persons, mostly scientists interested in the subject, and
finding the treatment to be harmless, transferred his operations to
localities in India affected by cholera. The inhabitants of the
northern part of India were the first to come forward and submit
themselves to the inoculation. In the course of the first year
22,703 were inoculated in the North-West Provinces and Oudh,
and in the Punjab. All classes of, the population were included.
In the second year operations were carried out in those parts of
the country where cholera always prevails, and where, therefore, the
method could be more satisfactorily tested.
From March 1894, to July 1895, 19,473 individuals were
inoculated in some of the most affected localities.
From observations made at Calcutta by Dr. Simpson, from March
1894 to August 1895, cholera occurred in 36 houses containing
inoculated people. There were 521 inhabitants in the infected
houses, of whom 181 were inoculated from 1 to 459 days before the
occurrence, while 340 remained uninoculated. The uninoculated had
45 cases with 39 deaths from cholera; the inoculated had 4 deaths,
1 occurring 451 days after the first inoculation, and 3 others from
1 to 4 days after the first inoculation. These four cases had not
been re-inoculated. If the occurrences in inoculated and non-inocu-
lated during the first 10 days were set aside, and those considered
that occurred after the 10 days expired, then, according to Dr.
Simpson, the proportion of cases was 19:27 and that of deaths 17°24
times smaller in the inoculated then in the uninoculated.
Cholera broke out in the Gya gaol, and inoculations were made
after 6 cases, with 5 deaths, had occurred. During the stay of the
prisoners in the gaol, there were 209 uninoculated, with 7 cases and
5 deaths, and 211 inoculated, with 5 cases and 4 deaths.
In July and August in the same year cholera attacked the Hast
Lancashire Regiment. Out of 773 men there were 133 inoculated
and 640 uninoculated,
24
370 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
The occurrences of cases and deaths were :—
In 640 uninoculated 120 cases (18°75 %), 79 deaths (12°34 %).
In 133 inoculated 18 cases (13°53 %), 13 deaths (9:77 7).
These results were, it is said, due to the weakness of the vaccines
procurable at that period of the work, and to the small doses used.
There were a great many records kept of the results of inocula-
tion of coolies on tea estates in different localities. After a summary
of the results Haffkine concludes, in his Report to the Government
of India, that, in his opinion, the experimental stage was not yet
in so advanced a condition as to be completely closed; but that
the observations made and records collected justified steps being
taken to give the inoculations a more
mn rues ri it { extended trial.
ii i
Cholera nostras, English cholera, or
| English dysentery, produces an inflamma-
El tion of the mucous membrane of the
bowels with croupous exudation. The
large intestine is commonly affected, and
the mucous membrane may be covered
with small superficial ulcers. The disease
is associated with severe diarrhea.
Finkler and Prior obtained a comma-
bacillus from the evacuations, which they
believed to be identical with the comma-
bacillus found by Koch in Asiatic cholera.
Koch pointed out that there were marked
| ; differences in the biological character of
ie
il CroLera Nostras.
Hj |
‘ the two micro-organisms.
Spirillum Finkler-Prior (Comma-
Fic. Rae bacillus in Cholera nostras).—Curved rods,
oe Se nae care thicker than the comma-bacillus of Koch,
ving. In thirty-six hours. and spirilla. The colonies on plate-
cultivations are very much larger than
those of the comma-bacillus of Koch of the same age. They have a
very faint yellowish-brown tinge, a well-defined border, and a distinctly
granular appearance. They liquefy nutrient gelatine very rapidly,
so that the first plate of a series is, as a rule, completely liquefied on
the day following inoculation, and the second plate in two or three
days more. In a test-tube cultivation in nutrient gelatine the
appearances are especially characteristic: the gelatine is very rapidly
CHOLERAIC DIARRH@A FROM MEAT POISONING. 371
liquefied along the whole track of the needle, so that the cultivation
resembles a conical sack, or the finger of a glove turned inside out.
On a sloping surface of nutrient agar-agar a white moist layer forms
very quickly. On potato they grow at the ordinary temperature
of the air, producing a brownish layer and corrosion of the surface
of the potato. They have been shown to be pathogenic.
CHoLtersic Disarra@a From Megat Poisonrne.
There are two varieties of choleraic diarrhea from meat poisoning,
and both are associated with vomiting, diarrhea, pain in the abdo-
men, in severe cases followed by suppression of urine, collapse, and
death. These conditions are brought about by poisonous foods, and
include those cases of poisoning by tinned meats, pork pies, hams,
cheese, sardines, and other articles of food improperly prepared. In
most cases putrefaction has taken place, owing to the action of
various bacteria. Associated with their growth we find highly
poisonous substances, but no bacteria are found in the body in these
cases. They are all due to chemical poisoning ; but Klein has also
described cases of poisoning due to the growth of bacteria without
the presence of putrefaction. The latter were of the nature of an
infectious disease. In the Welbeck poisoning cases, described by
Ballard, the poisonous hams contained a short bacillus, which was
also found in the kidney and spleen in the fatal cases in man. In
the Carlisle epidemic, which was due to poisonous pork pies, the pork
and gravy stock proved fatal to mice, and from the infected mice
a bacillus was cultivated, which, administered to mice by feeding or
subcutaneous inoculation, produced enteritis, diarrhea, and congestion
of the lungs.
Gartner cultivated Bacillus enteritidis from the spleen in a
fatal case of meat poisoning. Gaffky obtained a similar bacillus in
cases of gastro-enteritis, following the consumption of meat and
sausages, which had been made of horseflesh.
Bacillus of Choleraic Diarrhea from Meat-poisoning
(Klein).—Rods from 3 to 9 pin length, 1:3 » wide, rounded at their
-extremities, singly or in chains of two. Spore-formation occurs,
the spores being 1 yp thick, oval, and situated in the centre or at
the end of the rod.
Feeding mice with the bacilli and inoculation produced positive
results. At the autopsy, pneumonia, peritonitis, pleuritis, enlargement
of the liver and spleen, and hemorrhages were observed, and bacilli
were present in the blcod and exudations of these animals. They
372 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
occurred in the blood and juices, and especially in the glomeruli of the
kidneys, of several fatal cases of choleraic diarrhea.
Bacillus enteritidis (Girtner).—Short rods in pairs, and short
chains. They are motile; spore-formation not observed. Colonies
are granular, and old colonies at the margin have an appearance of
Fic. 160.—TropicaL DysenTery. Mucous membrane of large intestine some
months after an acute attack: a,a, representing remains of mucosa ; 6,6, inter-
vening parts corresponding to the muscularis (HAMILTON).
powdered glass. On the surface of gelatine a thick greyish-white
film develops, which in time becomes wrinkled. In the depth of
gelatine a white filament forms. The gelatine is not liquefied. On
agar the film is slightly yellowish. On potato it is similar in colour,
moist and shining. On blood serum it is very similar, Mice fed
CHOLERAIC DIARRHEA IN FOWLS. 373
with the bacilli die in one or two days. Subcutaneous injection is
fatal in guinea-pigs and rabbits in from two to five days. Dogs,
cats, and fowls are immune.
The bacilli were obtained from a cow suffering from a disease
associated with diarrhoea, and from the spleen of a man who died
twelve hours after partaking of the flesh of this animal.
DYsENTERY.
Dysentery is a disease of tropical climates associated with in-
flammation and ulceration of the large intestine (Fig. 160). At first
the discharge from the bowel is a whitish or brownish mucus,
which soon becomes blood-stained; later the evacuations become
thin and watery, with altered blood clots, fragments of mucous
membrane, and pieces of false membrane; and in some cases they
become purulent. The virus is believed to be in the intestinal
discharges, which by contaminating water or soil may give rise to
other cases.
Micrococci have been found in dysentery, but the micro-organism
which has received most attention is a protozoon, the dAme«ba coli,
which will be described in another chapter.
CuoLeratc Diarrua@a IN Fowts.
Choleraic diarrhea in fowls, or gastro-enteritis cholerica, is an
infectious disease of fowls, occurring in Russia during the summer.
The disease is very like fowl-cholera. The birds are sleepy, and
suffer from diarrhea, but the temperature is not raised, as in
fowl-cholera. After death there is usually an abundance of greyish
liquid in the small intestine, which is stained with blood. It was
investigated by Gamaleia, who found a comma-bacillus, to which he
gives the name Vibrio Metchnikovi.
Spirillum of Fowl-enteritis (Vibrio Metchnikovi).—Curved
rods and spirilla; thicker, shorter, and more curved than Koch’s
commas. They are motile, and possess a single flagellum at one end.
They stain with the usual dyes. Spore-formation doubtful. In plate-
cultivations minute white colonies appear in from twelve to sixteen
hours, and the gelatine is liquefied. The colonies in about three
days resemble those of both Finkler-Prior’s and Koch’s comma-bacilli,
some colonies being more like the one kind, and some like the other.
In the depth of gelatine the growth is very much like that of Koch’s
comma-bacillus, possessing the characteristic air-bubble appearance.
374 INFECTIVE DISEASES,
On agar a slightly yellowish growth is obtained, resembling that
of Koch’s commas ; on potato a yellowish-brown or chocolate layer
develops after incubation at the temperature of the blood, very
similar to cultures from Asiatic cholera. Broth becomes turbid, and
a wrinkled film forms on the surface ; the addition of sulphuric acid
gives the indol test. The spirilla grow in milk, and coagulate it;
the milk becoming strongly acid, and the casein being precipitated.
They are pathogenic in chickens, pigeons, and guinea-pigs. Pigeons
die in about twelve hours after a subcutaneous injection ; and the
spirilla are found abundantly in blood from the heart. Guinea-pigs
die from acute septicemia in about twenty-four hours. The spirilla
are found in the blood and internal organs. Inoculation of pigeons
and guinea-pigs with sterilised cultures will produce immunity.
CHAPTER XXVIII.
TUBERCULOSIS.
TUBERCULOSIS is a communicable disease of man and animals, charac-
terised by the formation of new growths associated with the presence
of the tubercle bacillus. Von Bayle, in 1810, was the first to describe
little growths like millet seeds, which were considered to be character-
istic of consumption or phthisis. Laennec, in 1834, attached much
more importance to the existence of caseous matter and classified
miliary tubercle, crude tubercle, granular tubercle, and encysted
tubercle, as varieties of tuberculosis. Virchow would not accept
all these varieties as tubercular, and only regarded those conditions
associated with the presence of miliary tubercles as genuinely
tubercular. Laennec’s so-called crude tubercle, for example, was
simply due to pneumonic caseation. Villemin threw entirely fresh
light upon this controversy by proving that tuberculosis was a
communicable disease. Rabbits and guinea-pigs, inoculated with
tubercular sputum or caseous tubercle, developed miliary tubercle in
a few weeks. Sanderson confirmed these experiments, and pointed
out that foreign bodies would produce experimental tuberculosis
in rabbits. Cohnheim also confirmed the experiments of Villemin,
and maintained that tuberculosis was a specific inoculable disease,
and, therefore, everything was tubercular which, on inoculation,
produced tuberculosis. Koch, in 1882, announced the discovery of
the tubercle bacillus, and expressed the opinion that without the
tubercle bacillus there could be no tuberculosis. Tubercle was
defined as tissue containing the tubercle bacillus, whatever might
be the clinical manifestations of the case, or the microscopical and
naked-eye appearances of the diseased parts.
A tubercle is a small growth about the size of a millet seed. In
the early stage it is circular, hard, grey in colour, and lustrous; but
when it undergoes necrosis and caseation it becomes soft and yellowish.
Tn the very early stage it consists of a little collection of round
375
376 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
cells, in which it is possible, though often with extreme difficulty,
to demonstrate the tubercle bacillus. The cells originate in the
proliferation of endothelial connective tissue and white blood cells.
Later on, large oval or circular multi-nucleated cells, or giant cells,
make their appearance. The tubercle bacilli are only occasionally
found in the interior of human giant cells, whereas in the lower
animals, in equine and bovine tuberculosis more especially, the bacilli
are often present in great numbers, and very commonly in the form
of conspicuous rings, visible under a low power of the microscope.
Fig. 161.—TUBERCLE OF THE LUNG IN A VERY EARLY STAGE, x 400; a, An alveolar
wall; b, blood-corpuscles in capillaries of the same; ¢, blood-corpuscles
extravasated into the alveolar cavities; d, alveolar capillaries filled with
blood-corpuscles carried forward by the tubercle which is growing into the
alveolar cavity ; e, large endothelium-like cells, of which the tubercle in this
stage is mainly composed ; 7, portion of « branch of the pulmonary artery
injected (HamILTon).
Whether the absence of blood-vessels or the action of the bacillus is
the main factor in producing caseation, is an open question. When
suppuration follows caseation, as commonly happens in tuberculosis
of the lungs in man, and in experimental tuberculosis in animals, an
abscess forms. In cattle there is a remarkable tendency to the
formation of calcareous deposit in the caseous masses.
The tubercle may not degenerate and die, but live and develop.
TUBERCULOSIS. 377
The giant cells, which are more or less central, have been described
as sending off processes, which, by dividing and subdividing, and
& g F <~
1 Lagnaes, el Q
“B Oe:
8 Pps fi
Fic. 162.—Priaary TUBERCLE or LUNG TWO TO THREE WEEKS OLD, x 50:
a, Portion of wall of a branch of, the pulmonary artery ; b,b, giant cells with
concentric arrangement of fibrous tissue; v, centre of tubercle beginning to
caseate ; d, small branch of pulmonary artery seen on transverse section ;
e, injected capillaries of the alveolar walls (HAMILTON).
interlacing, form a reticulum, or
meshwork. Towards the periphery
of the tubercle the reticulum may
become arranged in the form of a
capsule as the age of the tubercle
advances, and the reticular giant
cell becomes eventually converted
into fibrous tissue. The bacillus has
disappeared, and the tubercle has
healed.
Giant cells cannot be relied upon
to indicate tuberculosis. They are
not always present in tubercu-
losis, and they are not peculiar to
tubercle, being found, for example,
in actinomycosis. The only certain
indication of tuberculosis is the pre-
sence of the tubercle bacillus, which
Fic. 163.—LarcE Ova Giant CELL
FROM TUBERCLE OF Lune x 300:
a, Granular centre; b, nucleated
periphery forming a mantle-like
sheath; v, processes from the
same.
378 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
can be revealed either by microscopical examination of the suspected
tissue, or after inoculation in guinea-pigs.
Bacillus Tuberculosis (Koch).—Rods, 2 to 4 mw and occa-
sionally 8 w long, very thin, and rounded at the ends. They are
straight or curved, and frequently beaded, and occur singly, in pairs,
or in bundles; there are also involution forms and short branched
threads. Spore-formation is observed in old cultures. They are
non-motile. In the interior of giant cells they are often accompanied
by grains which exhibit the same colour reaction.
The bacilli in tissue sections of bovine tuberculosis are shorter
and less granular than those in human tubercular sputum, but in
milk they are quite as long, and even longer, and very distinctly
granular or beaded, and are thus brought much closer, morpho-
logically, to the bacilli in human sputum. Speaking generally,
however, the average length of the human bacilli is greater than
the average length of the bacilli in cow's milk, but the longest of
the bovine bacilli cannot be distinguished in length from the longest
human bacilli. There are, however, exceptional cases, for in some
preparations of pus from human lungs the bacilli are remarkable,
not only for their thinness, and their uniformly beaded character,
but more particularly for their extraordinary length. They should
be compared with other preparations, in which the bacilli, though in
human sputum, are sometimes much more distinctly rod-shaped,
much shorter and thicker, with complete absence of any beaded
appearance. Neither length nor granularity is a characteristic
sufficient to denote any specific difference between human and bovine
bacilli, The author has examined minutely the bacilli in tuberculosis
of other animals, such as the horse, pig, and cat; and of birds—the
fowl, guinea-fowl, pheasant, and ostrich. Here, again, minute
morphological differences can be observed. For example, in many
cases in fowls the bacilli are conspicuously short and straight. In
the liver and lungs of an ostrich, packets of short rod-forms are
found, while in other parts of the same sections the bacilli attain
a very great length. Many of the long, sinuous forms exhibit a
peculiar terminal enlargement. There are also short rods with a
similar appearance, and free ovoid bodies, singly and in groups, which,
from their connection with the bacilli, and their sharply defined
outline in the free state, are similar to spores in old cultures.
Thus, morphological differences are found under different circum-
stances, and within limits the morphology of the tubercle bacillus
varies with its environment.
Koch first succeeded in cultivating the bacillus by employing
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XI.
Bacillus tuberculosis.
The figures in this plate represent the bacilli of tuberculosis in
different animals, examined under the same conditions of amplifica-
tion and illumination. x 1200. Lamp-light illumination.
Fig. 1.—Bacilli in pus from the wall of a human tubercular cavity. In
this specimen the bacilli are shorter than those in tubercular sputum,
and are very markedly beaded.
Fig. 2.—Bacilli in pus from a tubercular cavity from another case in man.
They are present in the preparation in enormous numbers. The proto-
plasm occupies almost the whole of the sheath, and the bacilli are
strikingly thin and long.
Fig. 3.—Bacilli in sputum from an advanced case of phthisis, showing
the ordinary appearance of bacilli in sputum; some beaded, others
stained in their entirety; occurring both singly and in pairs, and
in groups resembling Chinese letters.
Fie. 4.—Bacilli in a section from the lung in a case of tuberculosis in man,
The bacilli in human tuberculosis are found in, and between, the tissue
cells; and sometimes, as in equine and bovine tuberculosis, in the
interior of giant cells, but not so commonly.
Fic. 5.—F rom a cover-glass preparation of the deposit in a sample of milk
from a tubercular cow. ‘The bacilli were longer than the average
length of bacilli in bovine tissue sections, and many were markedly
beaded. :
Fic. 6.—From:a section of the brain in a case of tubercular meningitis in a
calf, showing a giant cell containing bacilli with the characters usually
found in sections of bovine tuberculosis.
Fig. 7.—From a section of the liver of a pig with tubercle bacilli at the
margin of a caseous nodule.
Fig. 8.—From a cover-glass preparation of a crushed caseous mesenteric
gland from a rabbit infected by ingestion of milk from a cow with
tuberculosis of the udder.
Fig. 9.—From a section of lung in a case of equine tuberculosis, showing a
giant cell crowded with tubercle bacilli.
Fig. 10.—From a section of lung from a case of tuberculosis in the cat, with
very numerous tubercle bacilli.
Fi@. 11.—From a cover-glass preparation of a crushed caseous nodule from
the liver of a fowl, with masses of bacilli. These are for the most part
short, straight rods; but other forms, varying from long rods to mere
granules, are also found. :
Fig. 12..From sections of the liver and of the lung in a case of tubercu-
losis of a Rhea. Isolated bacilli are found, as well as bacilli packed in
large cells, colonies of sinuous bacilli, and very long forms with terminal
spore-like bodies and free oval grains,
The preparations from which these figures were drawn were all
stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method, with the exception of the
first, which was stained by Ehrlich’s method.
Plate XI.
Fig 1 Fig 12.
BACILLUS TUBERCULOSIS.
Vincent, Brocks, Day & Sor, Lith .
TUBERCULOSIS. 379
blood serum. Solid blood serum, with or without the addition of
gelatine, was employed, and the cultures incubated at 37°C. The
growth takes place very slowly, and only between the temperatures
‘ of 30° C. and 41°C. In about eight or ten days the growth appears
as little whitish or yellowish scales and grains.
The bacillus can also be cultivated in a glass capsule, on blood
serum, and the appearances of the growth studied under the
microscope. The scales or pellicles were described by Koch as made
up of colonies of a perfectly characteristic appearance, which may
be still further studied by making a cover-glass impression. They
are then seen to be composed of bacilli, arranged more or less
with their long axis corresponding with that of the colony itself,
and with an appreciable interval between the individual bacilli.
The colonies themselves appear as fine curved lines, the smallest
being mostly S-shaped. Longer colonies have serpentine twistings
and bendings, which often
recall the curves of fancy
lettering. The ends of the ~ X
lines run to sharp points, LS
but the middle of the ~
growth is spindle-formed. Sue
The youngest colonies are ee
extremely delicate and ‘
narrow, but the older a
colonies increase in size,
are thicker across, and,
blending with each other,
gradually obliterate the
characteristic appearances; a lamellated growth results, which
increases, and gives the appearance to the naked eye of the scale
or pellicle already described. The blood serum is not liquefied
unless putrefactive bacteria contaminate the culture. A fresh tube
can be inoculated with one of the little scales, and a new generation
started. The scales gradually increase in size, and consist entirely
of bacilli. In about three to four weeks the cultivation ceases to
increase, and it is then necessary to inoculate a fresh tube.
In liquid blood serum a film forms on the surface of the liquid,
and is easily broken by agitation. Jn neutralised broth there is
very little indication of success. When a triturated culture is added
to the broth, a granular, sandy, whitish deposit collects at the
bottom of the vessel, with indications of an increase in amount.
Koch also tried nutrient agar-agar, which did not prove to be at
Fic. 164. — BAcILLUS TUBERCULOSIS, FROM
TUBERCULAR Sputum, x 2500. From Photo-
graphs.
380 INFECTIVE DISEASES,
BACILLUS TUBERCULOSIS.
a
Fic. 165.—PuRE-cULTIVATIONS ON GLYCERINE-AGAR FROM Human TUBERCULAR
Sputum. u, After six months’ growth. (Fifth sub-culture.) 6 and c, After
ten months’ growth. (Fourth sub-cultures. )
TUBERCULOSIS.
381
all a favourable medium. Some increase took place, but there
was no continuous growth over the inoculated area.
Glycerine Agar-agar.—Nocard and Roux were among those who
worked at the subject and confirmed Koch’s
observations. Nocard attempted to get
cultures of avian tuberculosis on blood serum
to which peptone, salt, and cane sugar had
been added. The results were more success-
ful than with ordinary serum. But he
encountered a difficulty in the rapid drying
of the surface of the medium, which rendered
the tubes unfit for use. It occurred to
Nocard and Roux to obviate this by the
addition of a hygroscopic agent, and accord-
ingly they added sterilised glycerine. The
result, which far exceeded their expectation,
evidently was not solely attributable to the
prevention of desiccation. Following up
Fic. 167.—PURE-cULTI-
VATION IN GLYCERINE
AGAR-AGAR,—A SUB-
CULTURE FROM A PURE-
CULTURE IN GLYCERINE-
MILK. In two months.
their discovery, and
being anxious to find = yyq._ 166,—Purn-cunti-
a medium more easily VATION IN GLYCERINE
prepared than blood reg nee ten
serum, they added
6 to 8 per cent. of glycerine to ordinary
nutrient agar-agar. The bacillus grew so
abundantly in this mixture that a culture
in fifteen days equalled in extent a culture
on blood serum which was several weeks old.
The bacillus was found to grow abundantly
in veal broth, to which glycerine had been
added in the proportion of 5 per cent., the
bottom of the flask being covered in about
three weeks with a flocculent deposit, having
some resemblance to anthrax cultivations
in liquid media. In beef broth, chicken
broth, and in Cohn’s liquid, cultures were
obtained after the addition of glycerine.
Description of Cultivations on Glycerine
Agar-agar.—The cultivations on the sloping
surface of obliquely solidified glycerine agar-
agar begin to appear in from four to six days as very minute white
colonies, These steadily increase in size, and either look moist and
382 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
smooth, or, even at this early stage, appear dry and crinkled.
According to the number of bacilli inoculated, the colonies will
either remain isolated or coalesce and form a more or less continuous
film. If the nutrient agar-agar has only recently been prepared,
there is usually a quantity of liquid present, and the bacillus forms
a white coating over the inoculated area and beyond it. The
appearances are much more characteristic when this medium is,
comparatively speaking, dry. A semi-transparent membranous
growth develops, thickens, and assumes a characteristic lichenous
appearance. Such a culture, examined with a pocket lens, resembles
a model in wax in miniature of the folds of the gastric mucous
membrane. In about six weeks to two months the culture has fully
developed. In old cultures, especially when the individual colonies
remain isolated, the appearance is very characteristic. Some cul-
tures in appearance closely resemble cultivations on blood serum.
The consistency of the growth depends upon the character of the
soil and the age of the culture. When the medium is moist the
growth is moist and viscous, but more often it is distinctly tallowy,
and in old and dry cultures scaly and friable.
Cultivations in Glycerine Broth.—In a few days minute flakes are
visible, which steadily increase in size, and subside to the bottom of
the flask, forming in time a very copious deposit. On shaking the
flask, this deposit, which is extremely tenacious, rises in stringy
masses, and gives an appearance which is more or less character-
istic. If the flask is left undisturbed, a delicate veil-like film forms
over the surface, which can be readily broken up by gentle agitation,
forming flakes which gradually sink in the liquid. If undisturbed
for several weeks this film increases in thickness, is irregularly
fissured, and has more the appearance of masses of tallow floating
on the surface. The growth also may be seen to extend up the side
of the flask above the liquid. Pasteur or Erlenmeyer flasks can be
employed for these cultures. Solidified egg-albumin added to the
glycerine broth seems to increase the amount of growth, which
clings to the albumin, and waves to and fro in the liquid when the
flask is gently shaken. The author has confirmed the observation
of Nocard and Roux, that sub-cultures from glycerine agar-agar, or
from glycerine broth, will give cultures in ordinary broth without
glycerine. Ordinary broth with egg-albumin, and without glycerine,
will also give a good growth when inoculated from previous sub-
cultures, although the attempt to produce primary cultures in these
media has hitherto failed.
Cultivations in Glycerine-Milk, and other Media.—In milk the
TUBERCULOSIS. 383
author found there was only a slight increase in the number of bacilli
inoculated, but milk with glycerine in the proportion of 5 per cent.
forms a more favourable medium. The author has also cultivated the
bacillus on sterilised urine and glycerine, and ordinary nutrient
gelatine with 5 per cent. of glycerine. On potato the growth of
the bacillus is extremely slow. Beevor succeeded in obtaining
cultures at the ordinary temperature of the room.
Examination of Cultivations.—To examine the bacilli in these
various preparations the author prefers to use Neelsen’s method,
floating the cover-glasses for from five to ten minutes on warm
carbolised fuchsine, and passing them through dilute sulphuric acid.
In some cultures the bacilli are shorter and thicker than is commonly
observed in human sputum, and they are for the most part without
the beaded appearance. In old cultures on glycerine agar-agar the
number of granular or beaded bacilli increases, and there are also
numerous peculiar forms. There are bacilli, sometimes two or
three times the length of an ordinary bacillus, provided with a
club-shaped enlargement at one or both extremities, and in rare
cases with lateral branches. They are no doubt identical with the
bacilli with swollen extremities and the branched forms observed
by Nocard and Roux.
In milk the appearance is very striking, many bacilli attaining
in old cultures a great length, and all are more uniformly beaded
than in any other cultivations. Staining preparations by the method
of Gram in all cases exaggerate this appearance.
The important part played by the environment is shown by the
morphological differences observed in artificial cultivation under
varying conditions, and by the fact that by successive cultivation
the bacillus can be educated to grow upon a medium which is un-
suitable for obtaining primary cultures.
Impression preparations of the growth of the bacillus on the
surface of glycerine agar-agar in capsules show a tendency to the
formation of serpentine colonies, composed of bundles of more or
less parallel bacilli.
Spore-formation.—In old cultivations true spore-formation can
readily be observed, both in stained and unstained preparations. In
the latter case they are recognised in the form of one or two highly
refractive bodies in individual bacilli.
Toxic Products of Cultwres.—The poisonous substances found in
cultures, and the composition and use of tuberculin, have already
been described (p. 43).
Inoculation Experiments.— A relatively small portion of a culti-
384 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
vation inoculated into the subcutaneous tissue, into the peritoneal
or pleural cavities, into the anterior chamber of the eye, or directly
into the blood stream, produces after three or more weeks artificial
tuberculosis in guinea-pigs and rabbits. Dogs and cats can also be
infected by experimental inoculation.
When a trace of tubercular virus is inserted subcutaneously in
the thigh of a guinea-pig, in about a week or ten days a chain of
enlarged glands will be easily felt in the vicinity of the seat of
inoculation, This affords an unfailing test, which can be applied
when there is difficulty in ascertaining by the microscope the presence
of the bacilli in the material under examination. It also affords a
valuable method for testing the effects of antiseptics on tubercular
virus. The appearances observed at the autopsy are swollen
lymphatic glands, in the neighbourhood of the inoculation, followed
by softening and abscess ; enlargement of the spleen and liver, with
formation of caseous tubercles ; and tubercular deposits in the lungs,
bronchial glands, and peritoneum.
After inoculation of the éye, grey tubercles appear on the iris,
and undergo enlargement and caseation, followed by tuberculosis
of the eyeball and organs generally.
The bacilli appear to be the direct cause of tuberculosis, and
the presence of the bacillus in the sputum of patients is a distinctive
sign of the existence of this disease. The detection of the bacillus
has, consequently, become a test which is constantly applied.
The bacilli are found in all tubercular growths of man, monkeys,
cattle (Perlsucht), birds, and many other animals, and in cases of
artificial tuberculosis, in rabbits, guinea-pigs, cats, etc. In man the
bacillus can be detected in the tissues, in the sputum, in the blood,
and in the urine.
Tuberculosis may also be produced by inhalation and feeding
experiments. The channels of infection in man are also most
probably the pulmonary and intestinal mucous membranes. The
possibility of inoculation of skin wounds is open to doubt. The
bacilli or their spores are inhaled from the air, or taken in with
food. Morphologically identical bacilli have also been observed, but
very sparsely, in sections of lupus.
Meruops oF EXAMINING THE TUBERCLE BacILuus.
Numerous methods have been recommended for examining the
tubercle bacillus. A few of these will be described, as many are
only of historical interest,
TUBERCULOSIS. 385
The Ziehl-Neelsen method is preferred by the author both for
sections and cover-glass preparations.
Koch's original method.—Cover-glass preparations or sections are laid
in Koch’s solution (No. 23, c) for twenty-four hours, or for one hour if
the solution is warmed to 40° C. Rinse in water ; immerse in a watery
solution of vesuvin for two minutes ; rinse again in water, and examine ;
or, after rinsing in water, treat with alcohol, clove-oil, and Canada
balsam.
Ehrlich’s method.—Cover-glass preparations are allowed to float in a
watch-glass, containing a solution of gentian-violet or fuchsine, added to
aniline water. A saturated alcoholic solution of the dye is added till
precipitation commences (10 cc. aniline water, and 10 to 20 drops of the
colour solution). The cover-glasses are left in the solution for about
half an hour ; then washed for a few seconds in strong nitric acid (one
part commercial nitric acid to two of distilled water), and rinsed in
distilled water. After-stain with vesuvin or methylene-blue, rinse in
water, dry and preserve in Canada balsam.
Ehslich-Koch method.
Saturated alcoholic solution of methyl-violet or fuchsine 11
Aniline water : 100
Absolute alcohol 10
Preparations are left for twelve hours in this solution (colouring of
the cover-glass preparations can be expedited by warming the solution).
Treat the preparations with (1 to 3) solution of nitric acid a few
seconds.
Wash in alcohol (60 per cent.) for a few minutes (cover-glass prepara-
tions need only be rinsed a few times). After-stain with diluted solution
of vesuvin or methylene-blue for a few minutes.
Wash again in 60 per cent. alcohol, dehydrate in absolute alcohol.
Clear with cedar-oil, mount in Canada balsam.
Rindfleisch’s method.—Prepare a solution composed of
Saturated alcoholic solution of fuchsine . é 10 drops
Aniline water. : : 2 drams.
Pour it into a watch-glass, and float the cover-glass ; warm the watch-
glass over a spirit-lamp until steam rises. Remove it from the flame,
and set it aside for five minutes. Take out the cover-glass, and transfer
it for a few seconds to acidulated alcohol (two drops of nitric acid in a
watch-glass full of alcohol). Wash in distilled water, dry, and preserve
in balsam. After-stain, if necessary, with Bismarck-brown, or methylene-
blue.
Gibbes’ method.—Cover-glass preparations are placed in Gibbes’ double-
staining solution which has been warmed in a test-tube, and, as soon as
steam rises, poured into a watch-glass. They are allowed to remain for
five minutes, and then are washed in methylated spirit till no more colour
comes away, dried in the air or over a spirit-lamp, and mounted in
Canada balsam, If the solution is used without warming, the cover-glasses
25
386 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
must be left in it for an hour. Sections are treated on the same
principles, but must be left in the solution for several hours. The
crumpling of the sections by the action of nitric acid is avoided.
Baumgarten’s method.—Cover-glass preparations of sputum are made
as already described, and immersed in a very dilute solution of potash
(1 to 2 drops of a 33 per cent. solution of potash in a watch-glass of dis-
tilled water). The cover-glass is pressed down on a slide, and examined
with a high power. The bacilli can be thus examined in the unstained
condition, and to avoid any mistake from confusion with other species,
the cover-glass can be removed, dried, passed through the flame, and
stained with a drop of an aqueous solution of fuchsine, or gentian-violet.
The putrefactive bacteria are stained, but the tubercle bacilli remain
absolutely colourless.
Baumgarten’s new method.—A solution is prepared as follows: Drop
4 to 5 drops of concentrated alcoholic methyl-violet solution into a small
watch-glass full of water. (a) Stain the sections in this solution, wash
them in water, and decolorise in absolute alcohol (five to ten minutes) ;
or, before treating with alcohol, immerse the sections for five minutes in
a half-saturated solution of carbonate of potash. Pass through clove-oil,
and mount in a mixture of Canada balsam, free from chloroform, and
clove-oil (equal parts). The object of this process is to differentiate the
tubercle bacilli from chance bacteria, inasmuch as the tubercle bacilli
are gradually decolorised by the clove-oil. (6) Sections stained in the
above solution are placed for five minutes in alcohol, and then in a
concentrated solution of Bismarck-brown in 1 per cent. solution of acetic
acid. The after-treatment may be conducted as already described,
Zichl-Neelsen method.—Cover-glass preparations may be quickly stained
in Neelsen’s solution warmed in a watch-glass till steam rises. Sections
are left for from five to ten minutes in the solution, and then washed in a
watery solution of sulphuric acid (25 per cent.), rinsed in distilled water,
and immersed in methylene-blue solution. After two or three minutes
they are passed through alcohol and oil of cloves, and mounted in Canada
balsam.
Frénkel’s method.—Sputum preparations are rapidly double-stained
by the following method: Prepare a solution by adding concentrated
alcoholic methyl-violet or fuchsine solution, drop by drop, till opalescence
arises, to 5 ccm. of aniline-water heated to 100° C. Float the prepared
cover-glasses two minutes in the warmed solution. The process of after-
staining and decolorisation is effected by placing the preparation for one
to two minutes in one of the following solutions: for fuchsine-stained
preparations, a saturated solution of methylene-blue in a mixture of
Alcohol : : : , 50
Distilled water : 30
Nitric acid . : : 20
which is filtered before use ; for preparations stained in methyl-violet, a
saturated solution of vesuvin may be used in
Alcohol : ; : 70
Nitric acid . ” ‘ ‘ 30
TUBERCULOSIS. 387
Ehrlich’s Method and Eosin.—The author has found that after sections
have been stained with methyl-violet and Bismarck-brown by Ehrlich’s
method, as described by Koch, they may with advantage be immersed in
a weak alcoholic solution of eosin, then rinsed in clean absolute alcohol,
clarified with clove-oil, and mounted in Canada balsam. The giant cells
are then stained pink, while their nuclei are brown, and the bacilli blue.
TUBERCULOSIS IN Man.
The disease manifests itself in various forms in man, and most
frequently in the lungs, producing phthisis or consumption. The
sputum contains the bacilli in large numbers, and is extremely
virulent. Scrofula and lupus are forms of tuberculosis; they are
Fic. 168.--SEcTION THROUGH A LUPUS NODULE or THE Noss.
probably produced by an attenuated variety of the tubercle bacillus.
Lupus can be distinguished from tuberculosis of the skin; and
scrofulous lymphatic glands are distinguished from tubercular glands
by the tendency of the latter to produce generalised tuberculosis.
This difference in the intensity of the virus in the two cases,
Lingard illustrated by the effect upon inoculated guinea-pigs.
Cavities in the lungs are often thickly lined with bacilli. ‘They
are present in great numbers in the caseous matter, though in
equine and bovine tuberculosis this is not the case.
Whether the disease in man is contagious is an open question,
though numerous cases of supposed communication between husband
and wife, brothers and sisters, have been reported, and Ransome
388 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
showed that tubercle bacilli were present in the breath in phthisis.
On the other hand, the experience in consumption hospitals does not
Fic. 169.—TUBERCULAR ULCERATION 1OF Mucosa or Human ILeum.
Between the ulcers there are tubercular lymph-follicles (Haminron).
support this view, there being no evidence of the communication of
the disease to nurses and hospital attendants.
TUBERCULOSIS. 389
TUBERCULOSIS OF CATTLE.
In cattle the disease may occur as the result of inhaling bacilli,
or of ingestion with food. It is very frequently found in the lungs;
and calves may be infected by milk from cows with tubercular
udders. Calves may also suffer from congenital tuberculosis, the
bacilli having been transmitted from the mother during gestation.
Breeding in-and-in, over-production of milk, and confinement with
insanitary surroundings, predispose to tuberculosis. The disease is
known in Germany as “ Perlsucht”; and in this country the lesions
on the pleura are known as
“grapes,” and the animals
themselves are commonly
called ‘“ wasters.”
The disease may also exist
in the lungs or in other
organs, in a limited form,
without any indication of
ill health. In such cases
the disease can be detected
by injection of tuberculin, a
marked rise of temperature
occurring in tubercular
animals.
In advanced cases, the
symptoms commonly observed Fs. 170. --Section or Lurvs or THE SKIN,
2 5 x 700. Giant cell containing a tubercle
are cough, difficulty in breath- bacillus (Fiiices).
ing, staring coat, wasting, and
diarrhea ; and if the udder is infected, nodules in the gland, and thin
bluish milk. In the lungs, after slaughter, a few small cheesy tubercles
may be found in animals apparently in perfect health and in prime
condition for the market. In advanced cases, the lungs on section
show large yellow masses, containing calcified matter, and the
bronchi may be full of yellowish pasty contents. The disease will be
found to involve the bronchial glands. The serous membrane may
be covered with little warts or grape-like masses. The lymphatic
glands may be enlarged to an enormous size. Tubercular ulceration
of the intestine is sometimes found, but not commonly. In tubercular
disease in the udder, a painless swelling is found which may affect
one or more quarters of the gland.
Transmission of Tuberculosis from Man to Cattle.—It is
390 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
for obvious reasons impossible to ascertain by experiment whether
tuberculosis can be transmitted from cows to man by mill or other-
wise; but some light may be thrown upon this important question
by ascertaining the result. of inoculating bovines with human tuber-
culosis. Tf calves ean be infeeted with tuberculosis from a human
source by inoculation ov ingestion experiments, and especially if
the effect of administering human and bovine tubercle to calves
by these ineans is found to be the same, such expertnents will
not only serve to dispel any doubt there may bo as to tho identity
of the two affections, but they will strengthen the hands of those
Fic. 171.—Tusrrcutosis or PLeura ; “GRAPE-DISNASK.”
who insist upon the necessity of more thorough inspection of dairy
cows, and of power to deal with tubercular animals,
Inoculation of a Calf with Human Tuberenlar Nprutin.-—Tho
author obbained sputum containing auumerous bacilli from an
advanced case of phthisis, The sputum was shaken up with sterilised
salt solution and injected into the peritoneal cavity. A few weeks
ufterwards the calf showed signs of illness. The animal looked dull,
did not feed well, had a slight cough, and showed less inelination to
move about than usual. These symptoms gradually Increased, aad
death occurred forty-two days after inoculation, —Eixtensive lesions
TUBERCULOSIS. 391]
were discovered at the post-mortem examination. The mesentery
was adherent to the abdominal wall, at the seat of the inoculation,
and to the rumen ; the liver was adherent to the diaphragm. There
was extensive tubercular deposit at the seat of inoculation, and
an abscess the size of a walnut. Eixtending over the mesentery
from this point there were hundreds of wartlike, fleshy, new growths,
some quite irregular in form, others spherical or button-shaped.
There were similar deposits on the under surface of the liver, on the
spleen, in the gastro-splenic omentum, and on the peritoneal surface
of the diaphragm. The spleen was adherent to the rumen, and
on dissecting away the adhesions another abscess was opened. The
lungs were congested and the pleure thickened. On microscopical
examination of sections extremely minute tubercles were found to
be disseminated throughout the whole of the substance of the lungs
and liver, and tubercle bacilli were found in these and in the
peritoneal deposits. The abscesses contained Streptococcus pyogenes.
The calf died of pyzmia, but sufficient time had elapsed for marked
loca] infection leading to generalised miliary tuberculosis.
TuBERCcULosiIs iy RELATION TO THE PreLic MILK Scppty.
There is not the slightest doubt that when the udder is involved
the milk is highly virulent to the lower animals, and presumably
is, therefore, dangerous to man. The virulence of the milk was
first insisted upon by Klencke in 1846, and confirmed by Gerlach in
1869, and later, by others.
This subject was again brought forward with the discovery of
the tubercle bacillus, and the demonstration of its existence in the
milk in certain cases of bovine tuberculosis. Koch pointed out that
the milk only contained bacilli, and was only infective, when the
udder itself was tubercular. By this he explained the contradictory
results obtained by various experimenters with milk from cows un-
doubtedly suffering from “ Perlsucht.” Koch considered that positive
effects were obtained with milk when it happened to contain tubercle
bacilli, and negative with milk from which they were absent. Bang
in a number of cases verified the presence of tubercle bacilli in milk,
and, owing to the contradictory results of previous investigations,
repeated the ingestion experiments. The milk was found to be
virulent both to pigs and rabbits.
In this country Woodhead and M‘Fadyean tested milk for
tubercle bacilli. They examined six hundred cows in the Edinburgh
dairies, and fonnd thirty-seven suffering from mammitis, but in only
392 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
six were they able to demonstrate the presence of tubercle bacilli in
the milk, and then only in small numbers.
Hirschberger found in twenty cases of tuberculosis in cattle
that the milk of eleven was virulent to guinea-pigs. Three cows out
of nine in which the disease was restricted to the lungs gave infected
milk. On the other hand, Nocard inoculated milk from eleven
tuberculous cows, of which only one had diseased udder, and only
this one gave infective milk. Bang injected rabbits with milk from
twenty-one cases of tuberculosis, with the udders apparently normal,
and the milk was virulent in two.
The author had two cases of udder tuberculosis under observation,
and as no experiments had at the time been made in this country
with milk known to contain tubercle bacilli, it was decided to study
the effect on rabbits, and test the results obtained by Bang. These
cases were both interesting and instructive, and may be referred to
in detail.
One was a case of advanced general tuberculosis. There was extreme
emaciation, general apathy, and a peculiar dull expression of countenance.
The skin was dry and harsh, the coat staring, and there was loss of hair .
in patches about the face and neck. There was dulness on percussion
over a large area of the thorax, and the respirations were increased in
rapidity. There was also occasional cough and some diarrhoea. But the
most interesting condition was observed on examination of the udder.
The gland was swollen, especially posteriorly, and distinct induration
could be felt on examination. The deposit appeared to be more or less
limited to the posterior quarters. The cow evinced no pain during the
examination of the udder, not even on the application of firm pressure.
The author took samples in test-tubes of the milk from all four teats ;
when freshly drawn, it differed noticeably from the normal secretion. It
was a thin, watery, turbid fluid with whitish flakes in suspension, but it
was not gelatinous or muco-purulent in character, and was free from any
markedly yellow colour. After being set aside in the laboratory for
some hours it separated into a layer of cream and a turbid liquid of a
yellowish tint, while at the bottom of the test-tube there was a whitish
flocculent deposit, especially in the samples from the posterior quarters.
There were tubercle bacilli both in the cream and in the deposit. In
the cream they were only present in small numbers, and were detected,
therefore, only after careful search. But in the deposit they were readily
found, as in a cover-glass preparation there were sometimes four or five
in the field of the microscope.
The method adopted for the examination of this deposit was as
follows: The whole of the liquid in the test-tube was carefully poured
off, and a trace of the sediment spread out on a cover-glass. This was
allowed to dry, and passed through the flame, and stained in hot Ziehl-
Neelsen solution in the usual manner.
TUBERCULOSIS. 393
The other cow was also a case of general tuberculosis, and presented
somewhat similar lesions of the udder. The induration of the gland was
readily detected, and examination of the milk showed, as in the previous
case, the presence of tubercle bacilli.
Tt will be observed that in neither of these cases was the disease
limited to the udder ; in both the implication of the gland was part of
general tuberculosis.
Hic. 172.—Tubpercunark ULCERATION Ov THE INTESTINE OF A Cow.
The first cow was killed, and the following lesions were found at the
post-mortem examination.
Thovrax.—The lungs and bronchial glands were extensively invaded
with tubercular deposit. The glands were greatly enlarged and densely
fibrous, in many cases with central, stone-like masses, grating on section
against the edge of the knife. In the lung there was every stage, from
the early deposit to purulent cavities, cheesy masses, and calcified débris.
Abdomen.—There were a few caseous nodules in the liver, but none
in the spleen. The mesenteric glands formed an almost continuous chain
394 INFECTIVE DISEASES,
of large tumours, mostly with central cretification. Tubercular deposit
in the intestines could be recognised from the outside, and on laying
them open the mucous membrane was found to be studded with tuber-
cular ulcers. These ulcers were most numerous in the large intestine,
and varied in size from a sixpence toa florin. Some were circular, others
slightly irregular in form, and others again distinctly oval. In the latter
case they were generally situated with their long diameter transversely.
The base of the ulcer involved the muscular coat, and was irregularly
radiated. The margin was broad, and elevated above the general surface,
producing a ring-like appearance,
Mammary Gland.—The udder was infiltrated throughout with tuber-
cular new growth, but the invasion was most marked in the posterior
quarters. There was apparently very little tendency to caseation.
Microscopical Examination of the Udder.—In order to study the histo-
logical characters of the gland, and the distribution of the bacilli, sections
were stained with logwood and rubin, and others again with fuchsine
and methylene-blue, The tubercular new growth consisted of the usual
histological elements, round cells, epithelioid cells, and giant cells.
Healthy lobules here and there were sharply marked off from those in
which the growth was compressing and obliterating the alveoli in its
progress. Bacilli were present in the giant cells, and also distributed in
vast numbers throughout the tubercular tissue generally. Bacilli were
found in epithelioid cells close to the alveolus, and also between the cells
lining the alveoli, In parts also the new growth had involved the milk
ducts, and therefore it was easy to account for the presence of the bacilli
in the milk.
The bacilli were found in considerable numbers also in sections of the
intestinal ulcers,
EXPERIMENTAL INFECTION OF Rassits.
Ingestion.—A rabbit received the contents of a test-tube which
had been filled with milk from one of the posterior teats, mixed with
a small quantity of bran. In four weeks there was commencing
emaciation ; later, diarrhoea set in, and death occurred exactly fifty-
eight days after administration of the milk. At the post-mortem
examination the mesenteric glands were found to be much enlarged
and caseous. A cover-glass preparation from a crushed gland
revealed numerous tubercle bacilli. On opening the intestines there
was a patch of ulceration, showing the point of access of the bacilli.
The intestinal ulceration was a reproduction, to a certain extent, of
the condition in the cow which had been the source of the virus.
Subcutaneous Injection.—A second rabbit was injected under the
skin of the back by means of a capillary pipette with about ten
drops of milk, including some of the deposit from the bottom of the
test-tube. The sainple of milk had in this case also been taken from
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XII.
Tubercular Mamumitis.
Fig. 1.—From a section of the udder of a milch cow. The tubercular deposit
is seen to invade the lobules of the gland. Lobules comparatively healthy
are marked off, more or less sharply, from the diseased ones in which the
new growth in its progress compresses and obliterates the alveoli. Stained
by the Ziehl-Neelsen method and with methylene-blue. x 50.
Fig. 2.—Part of the same preparation. On the right of the section part of a
healthy lobule is seen. On the left a lobule is invaded by tubercular new
growth composed of round cells, epithelioid cells and typical giant cells.
Tubercie bacilli can be seen both singly and collected in groups. They
are found in and between the cells, and in the interior of giant cells.
Bacilli may be seen between the cells lining an alveolus and projecting
into its lumen. x 800.
ta
TUBERCULOSIS. 395
one of the posterior teats. The rabbit was placed in a separate
hutch, and death from general tuberculosis occurred ninety-two days
after inoculation.
The diaphragm and mesentery were studded with tubercles the
size of a pin’s head. The kidneys superficially showed whitish
rounded nodules projecting above the surface. These were found
on section to be continuous, with wedge-shaped deposits in the sub-
stance of the kidney. The lungs presented a very striking appear-
ance, being, in short, a mass of tubercular deposit; and the bronchial
and tracheal glands were similarly affected. In sections of the
kidney and lung the bacilli were present, but they were distributed
irregularly; in one part of a section it was difficult to detect a
single bacillus, in other parts they were present in large numbers.
The milk from the two cows,
previously to their coming under :
observation, had been mixed with
the general supply of a dairy. There
is indeed ample evidence that, both
in this and in other countries, the
milk of tuberculous animals finds its
way intothe market. The question
which naturally arises is the possi-
bility of any manifestation of tuber-
culosis in man, arising from the
consumption of unboiled milk con-
taining tubercle bacilli, We must
admit that there is no direct Fic. 173.—Tupercutar ULcERA-
evidence of the transmission of oe THR INTEStNw OF A
tuberculosis by milk from cow to ,
man; but this may arise from the difficulty in tracing such a
source of infection, owing to the long time which elapses before
symptoms manifest themselves in man. Yet, if milk be a source of
infection, we should naturally expect that primary tuberculosis of the
intestine would be by no means an uncommon manifestation of the
disease; and this in the adult is not in accordance with clinical
experience. Such an argument would tend to contra-indicate
danger to adults; but, on the other hand, the possible danger to
children has been rightly insisted upon by the earliest writers on
this subject. Woodhead has recently stated that, from his experi-
ence in two large hospitals, he has been much struck by the fact
that, in children who had died from other diseases during the course
of tubercular disease of the abdominal glands, there was frequently
4
396 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
not any trace of tubercular disease in other parts; thus pointing to
the intestine as the channel by which the bacillus made its way into
the body. Woodhead also remarks that in a large number of cases
Fic. 174.—TUBERCULOSIS Or THE LuNGs.
From a photograph of the lungs of a rabbit which had been injected sub-
cutaneously with about ten drops of milk, including in suspension a small
quantity of the deposit at the bottom of a sample of milk from a cow with
tuberculosis of the udder. Death occurred from general tuberculosis ninety-two
days afterwards. The appearance of the lungs was very striking. They were
almost completely composed of tubercular deposit. The bronchial glands,
as well as the tracheal, of which one is seen in the photograph, were also
enlarged and caseous. There were tubercular deposits in the kidneys and
other organs, and also at the seat of inoculation.
of general tuberculosis, where the possibility of infection by the
pulmonary passages was evidently excluded, the tubercular process
TUBERCULOSIS. 397
appeared to have invaded the body by the intestinal canal. These
facts, taken in connection with the occasional existence of tubercle
bacilli in milk, went far to prove, in his opinion, that milk was a
source of tubercular infection, especially to young children.
From his own experiments and observations the author has
drawn the following conclusions :—
1. Cows with tuberculosis of the udder are to be found in dairies
in this country.
2. The milk of these cows is, as a rule, mixed with the general
supply.
3. The milk in cases of udder tuberculosis contains tubercle
bacilli.
4, Rabbits inoculated with, or fed upon, milk containing tubercle
bacilli contract tuberculosis.
_5, Direct evidence of transmission of tuberculosis by milk to man is
wanting, but from the effect of such milk on the lower animals
it is reasonable to conclude, in the present state of our know-
ledge, that there may be danger in using the milk of cows
with tubercular udders, and therefore strict inspection of
dairies should be enforced; and boiling of milk before
use will, as a rule, be a wise, if not absolutely a necessary
precaution.
Bollinger has shown that the virulence of cow’s milk is reduced
by dilution with water in the proportion of 1 in 40 and even of
1 in 100, and that therefore there would be much less danger
in consuming tubercular milk which had been mixed with the
milk of healthy cows, than there would be in taking it direct
from the infected cow. This is a matter of scientific interest ; but
it would be no justification for a dairyman to mix the milk of a
tubercular cow with milk of cows known to be healthy. The milk
of cows suffering from tuberculosis should undoubtedly be rejected.
TUBERCULOSIS AND THE Pusitic Meat Surrty.
The question of the advisability of allowing the flesh of tuber-
cular animals to be sold for food, especially when the disease exists
in a very small degree, is a vexed one. Numerous experiments
have been made upon the infectivity of the flesh of tubercular
animals, Kastner inoculated the juice expressed from the flesh of
tubercular cows, Sixteen guinea-pigs were unaffected after injection
398 INFECTIVE DISEASES,
of 1 to 2 ce. into the peritoneal cavity. Nocard injected ten to
twenty drops of the muscle juice of the hearts of tubercular cattle, in
which the disease was well marked, and none of the guinea-pigs were
infected. With juice of the muscles of the thigh derived from ten
tubercular cows Nocard inoculated forty guinea-pigs, and one only
showed signs of tubercle. Nocard concluded that if there was any
danger in the flesh of tuberculous animals, it was the exception and
not the rule. On the other hand, Chauveau and Arloing produced
tuberculosis in two guinea-pigs out of ten inoculated with muscle
juice from a tubercular steer.
In 1890 a Royal Commission was appointed to investigate this
subject, and the report was issued in 1895. Martin, on behalf of
the Commission, tested the flesh of twenty-one tubercular cows. In
two cases only was evidence obtained of the presence of the bacillus
by inoculation of guinea-pigs. The flesh of eight cows affected with
mild tuberculosis produced tubercle in one instance by inoculation,
but the ingestion experiments were negative. The flesh of five cows
severely affected with tubercle gave the disease in four cases, either
by feeding or inoculation, but only one gave the disease both ways.
Martin thought that some of the results were due to the butcher
infecting the meat in the process of dressing the carcase, either by
his hands or knives. Woodhead made a series of experiments to test
the effects of roasting and boiling on the tubercular virus in meat.
It was found that in boiling and roasting experiments, as ordinarily
carried out in the kitchen, the temperature, however high it may be
on the surface, seldom reaches 60° C. in the centre, except in the
case of joints less than about six pounds in weight. Boiling and
roasting were found insufticient to destroy tubercular virus enveloped
in rolls of meat.
The following were among the conclusions of the Commissioners :—
We have obtained ample evidence that food derived from tuberculous
animals can produce tuberculosis in healthy animals. The proportion of
animals contracting tuberculosis after experimental use of such food is
different in one and another class of animals; both carnivora and
herbivora are susceptible, and the proportion is high in pigs. In the
absence of direct experiments on human subjects, we infer that man also
can acquire tuberculosis, by feeding upon materials derived from tuber-
culous food-animals.
The actual amount of tuberculous disease among certain classes of
food-animals is so large as to afford to man frequent occasions for
contracting tuberculous disease through his food. As to the proportion
of tuberculosis acquired by man, through his food or through other means,
we can form no definite opinion, but we think it probable that an
TUBERCULOSIS. 399
appreciable part of the tuberculosis that affects man is obtained through
his food.
The circumstances and conditions with regard to the tuberculosis in
the food-animal which lead to the production of tuberculosis in man are,
ultimately, the presence of active tuberculous matter in the food taken
from the animal, and consumed by the man in a raw or insufficiently
cooked state.
Tuberculous disease is observed most frequently in cattle and in
swine. It is found far more frequently in cattle (full grown) than in
calves; and with much greater frequency in cows kept in town cow-
houses than in cattle bred for the express purpose of slaughter. Tuber-
culous matter is but seldom found in the meat substance of the carcase ; it
is principally found in the organs, membranes, and glands. There is
reason to believe that tuberculous matter, when present in meat sold to
the public, is more commonly due to the contamination of the surface
of the meat with material derived from other diseased parts, than to
disease of the meat itself. The same matter is found in the milk of cows
when the udder has become invaded by tuberculous disease, and seldom
or never when the udder is not diseased. Tuberculous matter in milk is
exceptionally active in its operation upon animals fed either with the
milk or with the dairy produce derived from it. No doubt the largest
part of the tuberculosis which man obtains through his food is by means
of milk containing tuberculous matter.
Provided every part that is the seat of tuberculous matter can be
avoided and destroyed, and provided care be taken to save from contami-
nation by such matter the actual meat substance of a tuberculous
animal, a great deal of meat from animals affected by tuberculosis may
be eaten without risk to the consumer.
Ordinary processes of cooking applied to meat which has got con-
taminated on its surface are probably sufficient to destroy the harmful
quality. They would not avail to render wholesome any piece of meat
that contained tuberculous matter in its deeper parts. In regard to milk
we are aware of the preference by English people for drinking cow’s milk
raw—a practice attended by danger, on account of possible contamination
by pathogenic organisms. The boiling of milk, even for a moment, would
probably be sufficient to remove the very dangerous quality of tuber-
culous milk.
TUBERCULOSIS IN EQUINES.
Tuberculosis is not very common in the horse, but when it does
occur, it is frequently mistaken for glanders, There may be miliary
tuberculosis in the lungs, or nodules disseminated throughout the
lungs, liver, spleen, and bones. In a number of cases investigated
by Nocard, the disease commenced in the abdominal organs, and
the affection of the lungs appeared to be secondary. The author
has examined several cases of eyuine tuberculosis. In some cases
400 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
the lungs were affected with the disease in a miliary form. The
bacilli could not be distinguished from bacilli in sections of the bovine
disease. Giant cells were extraordinarily numerous, and in many
cases were densely packed with bacilli, so that they could be recog-
nised en masse under a low power. The bacilli were also distributed
in the tissue generally, but were much more numerous in the giant
cells.
TUBERCULOSIS IN Dogs.
Peters described a case of tuberculosis in a pet dog, from eating
sputum from a tubercular patient. This is said to be a not
wmcommon cause of canine tuberculosis.
TUBERCULOSIS IN Carts.
Nocard reported a case of tuberculosis in a cat from eating tuber-
cular sputum. The abdominal organs were diseased. Bollinger
has described two cases of miliary tuberculosis. M‘Fadyean also has
described a case. The bacilli are very plentiful in the lung. A
minute examination of the individual micro-organisms by the author
did not reveal any distinctive character.
TUBERCULOSIS IN SWINE.
The author examined the tubercular liver of a pig. The pig
was about six months old, and after suffering from cough and
emaciation, died.
The liver had caseous nodules scattered throughout its substance,
some the size of a pea, and others larger. Tubercle bacilli without
distinctive characters were found on examination of sections; but
it was in some parts of a preparation difficult to detect any bacilli,
and in’other parts there were not more than five or six in the
field of the microscope. Tuberculosis in swine is said to be very
rare in America.
TUBERCULOSIS IN Brrps.
Hens, guinea-fowls, turkeys, pheasants, and partridges, are sub-
ject to tuberculosis, and ostriches and other birds kept in confinement
may contract the disease.
Tuberculosis in fowls appears to be introduced principally with
the food, the disease occurring commonly in the intestines and
Jiver.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XIII.
Tuberculosis in Swine.
Section of liver of a pig with scattered tubercular nodules. Microscopica
sections of the liver showed tubercle bacilli in very small numbers.
Plate XII.
“OTd AO AAAIT MVTINONAE NL
Vincent Brooks, Day & Son, Lith .
TUBERCULOSIS. 401
The author has examined several cases of so-called spontaneous
tuberculosis in fowls. Sections of the liver were in one case remark-
able on account of the extraordinary invasion of the caseous deposits
with bacilli. Cover-glass preparations had been made from the
liver in the following way for diagnostic purposes: A tubercle was
readily picked out on the point of a scalpel and crushed between two
slides, and the cover-glass preparations stained with the Ziehl-
Neelsen solution. The bacilli are for the most part very small. A
few attain a considerable length, but the majority are in the form
of small, straight rods, with many sizes intervening between these
rods and isolated granules.
In July 1888 the author received from Mr. Bland Sutton the
liver and lungs of a Rhea, which had died in the Zoological Gardens.
The lung was infiltrated with caseous deposits, and there were
scattered caseous nodules in the liver varying in size from a pea
to a marble. The naked-eye appearance of a section of the liver
through these nodules, at once recalled to mind the naked-eye
appearance of the deposits in the pig’s liver already described. But
whereas in microscopical preparations of the pig’s liver, bacilli were
very scantily present, the sections of the lung and liver of the Rhea
contained bacilli in such extraordinary numbers that, under a power
of fifty diameters, the collections of bacilli could be recognised as red
granular masses. These red masses under a high power were re-
solved into dense colonies of bacilli. In their number and their
distribution in the tissues, in their varying size, and in the extra-
ordinary length of the longest forms, they presented very interesting
points for observation. From the naked-eye appearance of the
disease and the general microscopical characters, as well as the
presence of bacilli agreeing in their staining reactions with the
classical tubercle bacilli, the author had no hesitation in pronouncing
the disease to be avian tuberculosis.
Klein, who had examined a similar case, alluded to it in a
description of leprosy; but this disease is unknown in the lower
animals, and all attempts to infect them from man have been
almost, if not entirely, negative.
The bacilli in the Rhea are principally collected in the caseous
parts, but they are also found in the tissue generally, and often
collected in large cells. In size they vary to a marked extent. In
the cells they often form compact masses of short bacilli, but in
other parts, both in collections and singly, they attain a greater
length than is observed in any other form of tuberculosis. Some of
the bacilli present a very interesting appearance. They are provided
26°
402 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
terminally with a sharply defined ovoid body. There are also
collections of short bacilli, many with these spore-like appearances.
The author has also seen free ovoid forms, sometimes singly, some-
times in groups. From their connection with the bacilli and their
sharply defined outline they are very suggestive of spores.
Johne examined the livers of a number of fowls accidentally
infected by phthisical sputum. Nocard reported an outbreak in
a poultry-yard where the man in charge had consumption. He
also found the disease amongst fowls fed with the infected organs
of tubercular cattle. Subcutaneous inoculation, and feeding of fowls
with sputum or bovine virus, will produce the disease.
Experimental inoculation of tubercular virus from different
sources affords an illustration of the different pathogenic effects
obtained by varieties of the same species of bacillus. The bacillus
of fowl-tuberculosis is a distinct variety. A very small proportion
of guinea-pigs, inoculated in the peritoneal cavity with fowl-tubercle,
succumb to the disease, though so susceptible to the effects of human
or bovine virus. Maffucci maintains that guinea-pigs have an
immunity, and that rabbits rarely develop a generalised tuberculosis.
Cultures are not identical in appearance with those obtained from
man, and on microscopical examination show many long, thick, and
branched forms, which are only rarely found in cultures from a
human source.
Stamping-out System.—In 1888 a Departmental Committee
was appointed to inquire into pleuro-pneumonia and tuberculosis,
and they considered that legislation ought to be directed not only
to the protection of cattle from tuberculosis, but also to prevent
the possibility of the disease being communicated to man.
The following extracts are from the recommendations of the
Committee, which were made on the lines of :—
A. PREVENTION.
B. Extirpation.
A.—Preventive Measures,
These should include provision for :—
Improved hygiene of cattle sheds, etc. (especially in the direction of
providing proper ventilation, pure water supply, and adequate disinfection
of stalls, etc., wherein tubercular animals have been kept). This has.
been partly met in the Dairy and Milk Shops Order, but its administra-
tion by the local health authorities is at present imperfect ; and we would
suggest that it should be much more stringently enforced, and that
veterinary inspectors should be given more extended powers of entry into-
all places where animals are kept.
TUBERCULOSIS. 403.
Improvement in the hygienic surroundings of animals should include
isolation of all suspected cases, precautions against the flesh or milk of
diseased animals being given as food to others—e.g., to pigs, fowls, etc.—
and care that fodder, litter, and water should not be taken from one
animal or stall and given to another.
Our attention has been drawn to the frequency with which animals,
obviously diseased, sometimes even in the last stage of the malady, are
sold in open market.
Although in England and Ireland, under the provisions of the
Nuisances Removal Act as embodied in the Public Health Act, 1885,
the medical officer of health or inspector of nuisances may seize such
animals, yet such seizure is rarely performed.
We find the veterinary inspector has no power to prevent such sales,
or to seize the beasts for slaughter, since tuberculosis is not included in
the Contagious Diseases (Animals) Act of 1878.
We further find that there is actually a regular trade in such stock
infected with tuberculosis, and that they go by the name of ‘ wasters”
and ‘“‘ mincers,” being frequently slaughtered in the neighbourhood of the
larger towns, to which such portions of the meat as are likely to escape
the observation of the inspector of nuisances are sent, for the purposes
of sale among the poorer inhabitants, and especially for the making of
sausages.
We are, therefore, very strongly of opinion that power should be given
to the veterinary inspector to seize all such animals in fairs, markéts, or
in transit.
Notwithstanding the uniform prevalence of the disease in Europe and
elsewhere, there seems to be no reason to apprehend that, with our
present regulations for the slaughter of animals at the port of debarka-
tion, and for quarantine of those imported for breeding, there is any
special danger of increasing the infection in England by introduction
from abroad. The danger, however, exists in regard to the stock brought
from countries, which are exempt from slaughter on landing, and sub-
jected to the ordinary veterinary inspection during the present period of
detention of twelve hours.
It is, therefore, evident that the present rules for the prevention of
the introduction of disease into the United Kingdom from abroad, are
incomplete.
Since all authorities are agreed that the disease is very marked by
heredity, we think it highly desirable that breeders should in their own,
as well as in the public interest, discontinue breeding from tuberculous
stock.
B.—Extirpation.
In order to insure the gradual extirpation of tuberculosis, we are of
opinion that it should be included in the Contagious Diseases (Animals)
Acts for the purposes of certain sections of those Acts, so as to provide :—
(a) For the slaughter of diseased animals, when found diseased on.
the owner’s premises.
404 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
(b) For the payment of compensation for the slaughter of such
animals,
(c) For the seizure and slaughter of diseased animals exposed in fairs,
markets, etc., and during transit.
(d) For the seizure and slaughter of diseased foreign animals at the
place of landing in this country.
Notification of this disease should not be compulsory, because it may
exist without developing any sufficient outward evidence to enable the
owner to detect it, and its growth is so slow, that non-notification of its
existence, even in a large number of cases, would do litdle to nullify the
stamping-out effect of the Act of 1878. :
The powers and responsibilities of inspectors in ordering the slaughter
of diseased animals should be the same for tuberculosis as for pleuro-
pneumonia, according to section 51 (5) of the Act of 1878.
Further, tubercle, though hereditary, is nevertheless much less conta-
gious than the other diseases included under the Act of 1878, and it is
clear, therefore, that the immediate slaughter of diseased animals would
go far to stamp it out, though, doubtless owing to heredity, this stamping-
out process would be gradual in its effect.
A supplementary report was made by Professor Horsley, in
which he expressed the opinion that there ought to be legislation
to prevent breeding from diseased animals, and compulsory notifi-
cation :-—
1. Breeding.
Tuberculosis is notorious, even among the laity, as a disease which is
transmitted from parent to offspring. This is a fact with which cattle
breeders are specially familiar, and which finds strong expression in the
evidence attached to this report. Further, this generally received truth
has been completely confirmed by the results of scientific investigation,
as is also duly set forth in the report. Considering, therefore, the
extreme importance of this point, I think that the act of wittingly breed-
ing from animals so affected should be made an indictable offence. The
only objection that can be raised to such legislation, which if effected
would prevent the dissemination of the disease among cattle in this
country, is that, owing to the present state of want of knowledge among
cattle owners, and even veterinary surgeons, of the early symptoms, and
physical signs on examination, of this disease, prosecutions would occa-
sionally occur in cases in which no fault could properly be attributed to
the owner, and that, therefore, such prosecutions would be needlessly
vexatious. ;
Considering, however, the extreme rarity with which such cases would
occur, and that, as in the matter of non-notification, each case would be
tried before district magistrates on its own merits, this objection is
deprived of the force it might have possessed.
TUBERCULOSIS. 405
2. Notification of the Existence of the Discase.
This point requires no explanation, since it is clear that, unless the
veterinary inspectors or authorities receive information of occurrence of
diseases, it is impossible to ensure the thorough carrying out of the
provisions of the Contagious Diseases (Animals) Act.
That deliberate non-notification should be punished cannot be doubted
by any one. Objection, however, to legislation in this direction has been
put forward, on the same grounds as those upon which the prevention of
breeding from diseased animals was contested. As, however, I consider
that these objections have been already shown to have no weight, I
recommend that both the forbiddance of breeding from diseased animals,
and the notification of the disease, should be included in any legislation
for tuberculosis.
The difficulty referred to by the Committee, is presented by
cases of the disease which cannot be detected by the ordinary
methods of examination, and might possibly be overcome by the
use of tuberculin as a diagnostic agent.
CHAPTER XXIX.
LEPROSY.—SYPHILIS.—RHINOSCLEROMA.— TRACHOMA.
LEPROSY.
LEprosy occurs in three forms—tubercular, anesthetic, and mixed '
tubercular. It may be classed with the granulomata, as the most
common form of the disease is characterised by deposits in the skin,
mucous membrane, and internal organs. These deposits are composed
of small cells, and large cells resembling giant cells. The cells
become deposited in the surrounding tissues, and so the tubercle
enlarges, involving the epidermis and developing into an ulcerating
sore; or, after a certain stage of development, beginning to decline,
and finally leaving a puffy discoloration. In the anesthetic form
the cells invade the connective tissue of nerves. In the mixed
form the varieties occur together, but the tubercular character
predominates,
Tubercular leprosy commences with the development of an
erythematous patch, which becomes infiltrated, and finally tubercu-
lated, the tubercles varying in size from a millet seed to a marble,
or even larger. The eruption on the head and face produces a
characteristic leonine expression. ‘The progress of the disease is very
slow. After death the following changes may be found in the
internal organs: Cirrhosis of the liver and spleen, enlargement of
the lymphatic glands, and a condition of the lungs corresponding
to cheesy bronchial pneumonia.
In the anesthetic form patches develop on the skin, which
become anesthetic; ulceration follows, and the fingers and toes, or
the entire hand and foot, may slough off.
The disease is undoubtedly communicable, but the infectivity is
of a very low type.
The infectiousness is illustrated by the well-known case of Father
Damien. Arning inoculated a man named Keanu, a condemned
criminal, and leprosy developed three years afterwards, but this case
406
LEPROSY. 407
is not regarded as conclusive, as the man had a family history of
leprosy. The disease has never been known to spread from patients
in this country, who have contracted the disease abroad.
The bacilli of leprosy were first observed by Hansen in 1874, and
subsequently fully described by him, and his observations confirmed
by Neisser, in 1879,
Bacillus Lepre.—Rods 5 to 6 » in length and 1 p in breadth.
The bacilli are straight or curved, resembling very closely the
tubercle bacilli. They are present in the leprous tubercles of the
skin and mucous membrane, in the lymphatic glands, and in the
liver, testicles, and kidney; and in the nerves in the anesthetic
variety. They are found between the cells, and in colonies in the
cells, They stain readily with the aniline dyes, especially by the
Ziehl-Neelsen and Gram’s methods. The bacilli are found in extra-
ordinary numbers in the skin, and they are rather straighter than
tubercle bacilli, and stain more readily.
Numerous unsuccessful attempts to cultivate the bacillus have
been made by many bacteriologists. The author has made repeated
inoculations upon glycerine-agar, upon which the tubercle bacillus
grew abundantly, but always with disappointing results. On the
other hand, Bordoni-Uffreduzzi showed the author a cultivation
which he had obtained from the bone marrow of a leper. The
cultivation was made on blood serum and glycerine, and cover-
glass preparations resisted decolorisation with acid. There were
slight morphological differences when compared with the appear-
ance of bacillus lepre in the tissues, and the results were hardly
conclusive.
The English Leprosy Commission also reported successful cultiva-
tion of the leprosy bacillus. ‘The author had the opportunity of
examining one of the first cultures received in this country, and
found that the bacilli stained deeply in ordinary cover-glass pre-
parations, they did not resist decolorisation by the Ziehl-Neelsen
method, and they corresponded in culture with one of the varieties
of Bacillus subtilis, commonly found on the skin.
Tnoculation of animals has given equally unsatisfactory results.
Numerous experiments have been made by Beaven Rake on small
animals and birds, with invariably negative results. The blood of
leprous patients, tubercles from the living subject, fragments of the
skin and of the internal organs after death, have been inoculated by
different observers without result. Melcher and Ortmann alone claim
to have produced really definite results. These observers excised
leprous tubercles from the living subject, and inoculated fragments
408 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
in the anterior chamber of the eye of rabbits. The animals died
after some months with extensive deposits in the ccecum, lymphatic
glands, spleen, and lungs.
These tubercles varied in size from a pin’s head to a millet seed,
and contained bacilli, resembling leprosy bacilli in their staining
reactions. The question naturally arises whether the lesions were
really indicative of leprosy or tuberculosis. Until the experi-
ments are independently confirmed, and the result of inoculation
differentiated from tuberculosis, it would be rash to accept these
experiments as conclusive.
It has been suggested that tuberculosis and leprosy are identical.
There is a similarity in the bacilli and in the lesions of leprosy and
tuberculosis, the injection of tuberculin produces a reaction in leprosy
nodules, and many lepers die from tubercular disease of the lung.
But while tuberculosis is very readily transmitted to guinea-pigs
and rabbits by inoculation of fragments of tubercular tissue, leprosy
is inoculable, if at all, in most exceptional instances. The bacilli
of tubercle are cultivated with the greatest facility, the bacilli of
leprosy, if at all, only with exceptional difficulty; tubercle bacilli
are found in giant cells, leprosy bacilli in the so-called leprosy
cells. Leprosy bacilli are straighter than human tubercle bacilli,
and differ slightly in their behaviour to staining reagents. On
the other hand, the morphological differences are not greater than
those existing between different forms of tubercle bacilli obtained
from tuberculosis in animals and birds. It would be premature
to regard leprosy as a variety of tubercle until cultivations of
the bacillus have been obtained, and carefully compared with
those of the tubercle bacillus. Differences in morphological details
and results of inoculation would then carry less weight as a means.
- of differentiation.
The tubercular pneumonia of lepers would be regarded, if the
bacilli are identical, as a development of leprosy in the lungs, and
not, as at present, a result of double infection with tuberculosis.
Meruops oF EXAMINING THE BaciLius oF LEPRosY.
Cover-glass preparations may be made in the ordinary way, or bya
special method, which consists in clamping a nodule with a pile clamp
until a state of anemia of the tissue is produced. On pricking with a
needle or sharp knife a drop of clear liquid exudes, from which cover-
glass preparations may be made, and stained by Neelsen’s method.
For sections the author prefers Neelsen’s method and methylene-blue.
They can also be stained by Gram’s method, which, as a rule, brings out
very clearly the beaded appearance of the bacilli.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XIV.
Bacillus Lepre.
Fic. 1.—From a section of the skin of a leper. The section is, almost in
its entirety, stained red, and, with moderate amplification, has a finely
granular appearance. Stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method (carbolised
fuchsine and methylene-blue). x 200.
Fic. 2.—Part of the same preparation with high amplification, showing that
the appearances described above are due-entirely to an invasion of the
tissue by the bacilli of leprosy. x 1500.
Plate XIV.
BACILLUS LEPR&
Vincent Brocks,Day & Son, Lith .
LEPROSY. 409
Method of Babes.—Preparations are stained in rosaniline hydrochlorate
in aniline water, decolorised in 33 per cent. hydrochloric acid, and after-
stained with methylene-blue.
Stamping-out System.—tThe history of leprosy in the British
Islands during the Middle Ages, and the conditions under which it
both increased and declined, have been discussed by several writers.
A large number of institutions of a charitable and ecclesiastical
character were established in endemic areas and were occupied by
the lepers either voluntarily, or compulsorily by means of the Act
De leproso amovendo. These institutions were to a very small extent.
a means of segregation. According to Dr. Newman the disease,
which had reached its zenith about the twelfth or thirteenth century,
began to decline from that time owing to “a general and extensive
social improvement in the life of the people, to a complete change
in the poor and insufficient diet (which it is evident consisted far
too largely of bad meat, salt, putrid and dried fish, and an almost
entire lack of vegetables) and to agricultural advancement, improved
sanitation and land drainage.” Of all the unfavourable conditions
it would appear that food in some way was especially associated with
the cause of the disease, either by introducing the bacillus or by |
rendering the tissues a suitable soil for its reception and development.
In other countries segregation has been attempted voluntarily
or compulsorily, but it has never been completely carried out. There
can be very:little doubt that the presence of a leper in a healthy
community is no greater source of danger than the presence of
an individual suffering from tuberculosis, but, for other reasons,
voluntary isolation should be carried out as completely as local
circumstances will permit.
The Leprosy Commission in India recommended—
(a) That the sale of articles of food and drink by lepers should
be prohibited, and that lepers should be prevented from
following certain specified occupations.
(b) That the concentration of lepers in towns should be discouraged.
(c) That Leper Asylums should be established in which lepers
might live voluntarily.
(d) That Leper Farms scattered over the country should be
encouraged.
(e) That the few children who are born of lepers should be
removed to Orphanages.
They concluded that by means of improved sanitation and good
dietetic conditions a diminution of leprosy will result.
410 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
SYPHILIS.
Syphilis is a disease peculiar to man, and communicable only by
inoculation. The local infection is followed by a period of latency,
and by a period during which generalised eruptions appear. One
attack confers immunity from future attacks. The virus in its
most virulent form is found in the primary seat of inoculation, and
in the indurated glands which
follow. It is also supposed to be
present in the blood and secretions.
Lustgarten, Eve and Lingard have
found bacteria which they believed
to be specific.
Bacillus in Syphilis (Lustgar-
ten).—Rods resembling the bacilli
aD feet SU ne re of leprosy and tuberculosis, 3 to 4
TION OF Pus FROM A CHANCRE, X long, ‘8 » thick. Two or more
1050 (Lust¢arTeEn). colourless, ovoid points in the course
of the rod are visible with a hich
power; it is thought that possibly they are spores. The bacilli
are always found in the interior of nucleated cells, which are
more than double the size of
leucocytes. They have been ob-
served in the discharge of the
primary lesion, and in tertiary
gummata,
Alvarez and Tavel state that
an identical bacillus is found in
normal secretions (smegma). Eve
and Lingard have described a bacil-
lus associated with specific lesions,
which differs from the above in its
morphology and behaviour towards Fic. 176.—Wanperine CELL con-
TAINING BaciLir (LUsTGARTEN).
staining reagents.
MertuHops oF STAINING THE BACILLUS oF SYPHILIS.
a
Method of Lustgarten :—
Sections are placed for twelve to twenty-four hours in the following
solution, at the ordinary temperature of the room, and finally the solution
is warmed for two hours at 60° C. :—
Concentrated alcoholic solution of gentian-violet . 11
Aniline water . : Ne “3s : : . 100
SYPHILIS. 411
The sections are then placed for a few minutes in absolute alcohol,
and from this transferred to a 1‘5 per cent. solution of permanganate of
potash. After ten minutes they are immersed for a moment in a pure
concentrated solution of sulphurous acid. If the section is not completely
decolorised, immersion in the alcohol and in the acid bath must be
repeated three or four times. The sections are finally dehydrated with
absolute alcohol, cleared with clove-oil, and mounted in Canada balsam.
By this method the bacillus is distinguished from many bacteria, but
not from the bacilli of tubercle and leprosy which are stained by this
process.
Aethod of De Giacomi :—
Cover-glass preparations are stained with hot solution of fuchsine
containing a few drops of perchloride of iron. They are then decolorised
in strong perchloride of iron, and after-stained with vesuvin or Bismarck-
brown.
Method of Doutrelepont and Schiitz :—
Sections are stained in a weak aqueous solution of gentian-violet and
after-stained with safranin.
The nature of the contagium in syphilis is unknown.
Protective Inoculation.—Inoculation of the virus, or syphilisa-
tion, as a protective measure, was at one time practised and strongly
advocated; but it is rightly regarded in this country as dangerous
and unjustifiable. From the experiments of Ricord it would appear
that the local results in the vesicular stage resemble the results of
the inoculation of virulent vaccinogenic grease or horse-pox. The
inoculation goes through the stages of papule, vesicle, ulcer, scab,
and scar. The accidental inoculation which occurs in cases of
vaccino-syphilis may so closely resemble the results of inoculation
with very virulent cow-pox, that it is sometimes difficult to decide
as to the exact nature of these cases.
RA#INOSCLEROMA.
Rhinoscleroma is a rare disease, resembling lupus, and pro-
ducing in the nostrils and neighbouring parts nodular swellings,
composed of granulation-tissue. The disease is met with in
America, Egypt, Austria, and Italy. There are no giant cells, but
peculiar large cells, which were first described by Mikulicz. Frisch
discovered bacteria in sections, and Cornil and Alvarez pointed out
the existence of a capsule. In morphology and cultivation they
resemble, according to Dittrich, Friedlinder’s pneumococcus. They
are probably identical with this micro-organism, and Paltauf and
Eiselsberg, and others, found that they produced septicemia in rabbits
and guinea-pigs,
Bacterium of Rhinoscleroma (Bacillus of Rhinoscleroma,
412 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
Cornil and Alvarez).—Coeci and short rods, 1°5 to 3 » in length,
‘5 to 8 w thick. Deeply coloured points or granules may occur
in the course of the rods when stained, but it is very doubtful
whether these can be considered as spores. The bacteria are en-
capsuled, the capsule being round when enclosing a coccus, and
ovoid when enclosing a rod. ‘The capsule is composed of a tough
resisting substance; two or more capsules may unite by fusion,
enclosing two, three, or a greater number of rods. The bacilli were
observed in sections of the tumours, which developed on the lips
and in the nasal and pharyngo-laryngeal regions.
MeEtuop or Srainine THE Bacittus oF Ruino-ScueRoma.
Method of Cornil and Alvarez :—
Sections are immersed in a solution of methyl-violet (B) for twenty-
four to forty-eight hours, with or without the addition of aniline-water ;
and are then decolorised after treatment with the solution of iodine in
iodide of potassium. If the sections are left to decolorise in alcohol for
forty-eight hours, the capsule is rendered visible.
TRACHOMA.
Trachoma is a disease of the conjunctiva, common in Egypt.
The new growth is composed of round cells, and may be regarded,
according to Kartulis, as the chronic stage of either gonorrheal or
Egyptian ophthalmia. Koch failed to find any micro-organisms
in the swollen lymph follicles. Sattler asserted that he had culti-
vated a micrococcus which produced the disease when inoculated
on the conjunctiva. Other observers have found the common
pyogenic micrococci in the secretions, especially Staphylococcus
pyogenes aureus and albus.
CHAPTER XXX.
ACTINOMYCOSIS.—MADURA DISEASE.
ACTINOMYCOSIS.
Actinomycosis belongs to the class of infective granulomata. It is
a chronic inflammatory affection characterised by the presence of a
special microphyte, which by irritation produces a neoplasm, composed
of round cells, epithelioid cells, giant cells, and fibrous tissue. These
neoplasms form nodular tumours of various sizes. In some cases
there is a tendency to develop very large tumours, and in others to
break down early and suppurate. In cattle, cretification takes
place in the fungus tufts. Actinomycosis closely resembles tuber-
culosis in its histological characters. The disease attacks man,
horses, cattle, and pigs.
Many interesting observations have been made upon the origin
of this disease in man. Two cases have been recorded in support of
the theory of direct infection from the cow. Stelzner described a
case of actinomycosis in a man who had had the care of animals,
some of which had suppurating glands. Hacker had a case of
actinomycosis of the tongue in a man who had charge of cows, one
of which had a tumour of the jaw which he had opened. On the
other hand, Moosbrugger found that out of 75 cases, 54 were in men,
and 21 in women, including 2 children. In 11 of these men the
occupation was not stated. In 33 their occupation did not bring
them into contact with diseased animals; they were, for example,
millers, glaziers, tailors, shop people, and students. Only 10 cases
occurred among farmers, peasants, and farm-labourers, and in only
one case ont of the 10, had the patient been brought into contact
with diseased animals.
Out of the 21 women, there were only 4 peasants, and none
of them had been associated with diseased cattle,
Infection by the flesh of diseased animals has also been dis-
cussed. But there is no evidence of prevalence of the disease
413
414 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
among slaughterers and butchers, who would be particularly liable
to it, if flesh were a source of infection. The chances of infection
by ingestion are minimised by the flesh being almost always cooked.
Actinomycosis occurs also in pigs, and pork is very often eaten in an
uncooked state ; but Israél has pointed out that this may probably
be excluded, as many of the cases occurred among strict Jews.
The evidence points to the disease originating in man and lower
animals from the same source, and there is a very strong suspicion
attached to cereals. This view is supported by important obser-
vations, with reference to the part played by cereals in inducing
the disease in cattle, and it gains additional support from a case
described by Soltmann, where the disease resulted from an awn of
wall barley. A boy, aged eleven, accidentally swallowed an awn
of Hordeum murinum. He became very ill, and suffered great pain
behind the sternum, extending to the back. An abscess formed,
covering an area extending over six intercostal spaces, and when
opened, the awn of this grass was found in the evacuated pus.
The pain, however, continued, and fresh deposits occurred, and when
the boy was taken to the hospital, the ray-fungus was detected.
Possibly the spores of the fungus can be conveyed both by air and
water.
This disease in cattle has long been known in this country, but:
its various manifestations were either mistaken for other diseases,
or simply received popular names, Indeed, the various forms are
still familiar to many as wens, clyers or crewels, scrofulous, tuber-
cular or strumous abscesses, polypus, lymphoma, cancer of the
tongue, scirrhous tongue, indurated tongue, ulcerated tongue, cancer
of bone, bone tubercle, osteo-sarcoma, fibroplastic degeneration of
bone, spina ventosa, and carcinoma.
Bovine antinomycosis is especially prevalent in river valleys,
marshes, and on land reclaimed from the*sea. The disease occurs
at all times of the year, but general experience leads to-the belief
that it occurs more commonly in the winter.
It is more frequently met with in young animals, and usually
occurs between one and three years, but it may be found at almost.
any age, and probably affects equally both sexes.
There is little if any evidence to show that the disease is heredi-
tary. In numerous cases, the family history has been most carefully
inquired into by the author; and in the case of some imported
pedigree animals, the disease was quite unknown on the farm where
they had been bred.
The tongue is so commonly the seat of the disease, that suspicion.
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 415
at once falls on food as the means by which the parasite is conveyed.
Skin wounds produced by rubbing against the mangers, posts, or
wire fencing, may also become infected.
The evidence is very strong in favour of believing that the micro-
organism gains access to the system through wounds or lacerations
of the mucous membrane and skin, or through carious teeth, It
has been pointed out that the common occurrence of the disease
at the time of the second dentition may be owing to the wounds
produced in the alveolar mucous membrane by the shedding of
the teeth. Experience also points to straw being sometimes a
factor in the production of the disease, and it is possible that thistles
and frozen roots also, by wounding the mucous membrane, may
afford a way for the entrance of the micro-organism. The disease
in the jaws, both in man and in cattle, is very commonly associated
with carious teeth.
The cowsheds, pastures, and drinking tanks may become infected
with the discharges from diseased animals. The discharge con-
taminates the fodder in the sheds, and falls on thistles and siliceous
grasses in the pasture, which may first wound, and then introduce
the micro-organism. The discharge is also coughed out of the
mouth, and expelled from the nose, in cases in which a tumour in
the pharynx, or the nasal chambers, has undergone suppuration.
Jensen believed that the disease was produced by different kinds
_ of grain, especially when cultivated on ground reclaimed from the
sea. He mentions an instance of a farm, where nearly the whole
of the young stock, about thirty in number, had actinomycosis after
feeding on mixed forage, grown on a certain field. Two years after-
wards the same disease occurred in the same stalls in four animals,
after being fed on barley-straw from the same field. According to
Jensen, the fungus grows on grain, husks, and straw of different
cereals, but most abundantly on barley, which is also the most
likely to wound the mucous membrane. Johne's observations tend
to corroborate this view, for in twenty-two out of twenty-four cases
in which he found barley sticking in the tonsils of pigs, he found
the beard thickly beset with a fungus very similar to, if not identical
with, the ray-fungus. These observations are of great interest in
connection with Soltmann’s case.
Experience points to the belief that the disease is not readily
communicable from animal to animal, and it is possible that when
it affects a large number of cattle in a herd, the same causes have
been acting to produce the disease in a number, which in another
instance may only produce it in one. At the same time, isolated
416 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
cases are possibly not quite so common as they are reported to be.
It is well known that, as a rule, the services of a veterinary surgeon
are not called for except in hopeless or very severe cases. The
cowmen themselves, in many districts, treat the cows successfully,
and then send them into the market, and thus the existence of
previous cases may not have come to the knowledge of the veterinary
surgeon.
Historical.—In 1845 Professor von, Langenbeck, of Kiel, made
notes of a case of vertebral caries in a man, and prepared drawings
of peculiar bodies in the pus from an abscess. The drawings were
published together with a reference to the case by Israé] in 1878.
There can be little doubt that these structures were the fungi of
actinomycosis. But the first to publish observations was Lebert
in 1848.
Lebert received from M. Louis some pus, of a thick, almost
gelatinous consistency, which had been obtained from an abscess of
the thoracic wall in a man aged fifty. The patient had been attacked
four months previously by a pulmonary affection, which was
suspected by M. Louis to be cancerous in nature. The pus contained
a very considerable number of little spherical bodies of a slightly
greenish-yellow colour, about the size of a pin’s head. They
could be readily crushed between two strips of glass, and on
examination with a power of fifty diameters two elements could be
distinguished : a soft connective substance, and many hard, narrow,
wedge-shaped corpuscles, arranged in a radiating manner. Under
a high power these bodies were observed to be Ay to 7, of an inch
in length, zi, in width at the base, and 335 in width at the
apex. Some of these corpuscles were regular, while others showed
one or two constrictions, with intermediate flask-shaped swellings.
Lebert tested these structures with reagents, with the following
results. The bodies were found to remain unaltered by concentrated
mineral acids. Acetic acid freed them from foreign elements
adhering to their surface. Solution of caustic potash did not affect
them if used cold, but a boiling solution reduced the cuneiform
structures to a fine greyish powder without dissolving them. Ether,
alcohol, and chloroform had no effect upon them when used either
hot or cold. Solution of potash, in which these bodies had been
heated, mixed with a solution of sulphate of copper and brought to
boiling point, did not offer any uniform red colour, which would
have been the case if they had contained albumin. Thus, the chief
chemical characters of albuminous and fatty substances were
wanting, and they resembled chitine in their behaviour to reagents.
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 417
Lebert bore in mind the possible existence of some helminthic débris,
of which these bodies might be hooklets, but he sought in vain for
echinococci and cysticerci.
Actinomycotic pus was later described and figured by Robin.
In the illustration accompanying the description, the fungi are most-
Fic. 177.—Section or LivER FROM A CasE OF ACTINOMYCOSIS IN MAN.
accurately depicted. Robin states that he had found, in two or
three cases in the pus of deep-seated chronic abscesses, yellowish grains
attaining a diameter of one-tenth of a mm., surrounded by a sort of
halo or thin, viscous, finely granular stratum, containing leucocytes.
These grains were composed of elements 2 to 6 mm. in length, swollen
27
2
418 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
#
at one end and tapering off at the other, arranged in a regular series,
radiating from a common centre which consisted of granular matter.
They were highly refractive, possessed a brilliant centre and sharply
defined outline ; they were dissolved, or at least rendered indistinct,
by acetic acid, and proved insoluble in ammonia and ether.
The disease in man was next described by Israél in the paper
mentioned above. Ponfick was the first to clearly recognise the
identity of the disease in man with the disease in cattle, and he
described a number of cases in man. Israél subsequently published
a work on the subject. The various cases which had been observed
up to that date were described, and the disease classified according
to the seat of invasion.
From this time onwards numbers of cases in man have keen
described, and various important researches published, of which
those of Bostrém and Moosbrugger may be especially mentioned.
In England, Acland recognised a case on examining the liver
after death (Fig. 177). H. Taylor was the first, in this country,
to detect the fungus during the life of a’ patient. Shattock found
specimens of the disease in museums. Skerrit, Powell and Godlee,
Eve, Delepine, Ransome, Poore, Malcolm Morris and others have
published cases.
In Italy, Perroncito studied the sarcomata of cattle, and claims
to have first observed the micro-organism in 1863. In 1875 he
described it in the Encyclopedia Agraria, and, from the negative
results obtained by inoculation experiments, was led to regard it,
not as the cause, but as a result of the disease.
Rivolta of Turin also claims to have been the first to have
discovered the fungus in actinomycosis bovis. As early as 1868
he published a paper on a sarcomatous tumour of the jaw of
an OX.
Hahn of Munich, in 1870, undoubtedly met with the fungus, for
he states that in a case of “ wooden-tongue” he found characteristic
organised structures, which he provisionally described as a species of
mould fungus.
Bollinger was the first to recognise the nature of this disease in
cattle. In 1876 he pointed out that new growths occasionally
occurred on the upper and lower jaws of cattle, which either started
from the alveoli of the back teeth, or from the spongy tissue of the
bone, and by increasing in size loosened the teeth. In their progress
they destroyed bone, muscles, mucous membrane, and skin. After
some time they frequently broke down, forming ulcers, abscesses,
and fistule ; but in some cases tumours were formed, which adtained
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 419
the size of a child’s head. Bollinger stated that this disease had
been known by various names,—Osteosarkome, Winddorn (Spina
ventosa), Knochenkrebs, Knochenwurm ; in other instances it had been
regarded as bone tuberculosis, or mistaken.for a simple chronic
glossitis. Among breeders of cattle and owners of stock in Germany
it had been known under the following names: Ladendruck, Laden-
geschwulst, dicker Backen, Backel, Kinnbeule, Kiefergeschwulst, etc.
Bollinger pointed out that these swellings consisted of several
centres of growth, bound together by connective tissue. They were
often as large as a walnut or a hen’s egg, and of a pale yellow
colour and moist appearance. The cut surface presented yellowish-
white, suppurative foci, while in other cases the growths had a
spongy texture, owing to the formation of lacune or hollow spaces
in a fibrous stroma, which contained a turbid, thick, yellow, caseous
pulp.
Microscopical examination of the tumour showed that it had a
structure like a sarcoma, while the squeezed-out pulp consisted
principally of pus cells, granulation cells, fat granules, and granular
detritus. In addition, there were numerous opaque, pale-yellow, and
coarsely granular bodies of different sizes, which had a mulberry-
like appearance, and were sometimes encrusted with chalk. After
careful examination Bollinger found that these bodies were true
fungi, and he further maintained, from the constancy of their
appearance in all parts of the sarcomatous growth, that they were
not accidental, but of pathogenic significance. This was found to
be the case, not only in fresh preparations, but in old specimens
preserved in the museum. This remarkable form of mycosis was
observed by Bollinger, not only in the upper and lower jaws, but
also in the tongue. It had long been observed that the tongue was
sometimes covered with more or less tubercular growths, scattered
abundantly over the surface of the mucous membrane, mostly the size
of a millet seed or hemp seed, but often reaching the size of.a cherry
or walnut, or even larger. In the fresh state these nodules were
greyish-white, and semi-transparent, but they soon became cloudy
or distinctly puriform in the centre; they were surrounded externally
with a connective tissue capsule. If the nodules were situated on
the surface of the tongue, destruction of the mucous membrane very
readily followed, leading to the formation of ulcers. The tongue
also might become affected with an interstitial glossitis, which often,
in spite of the partial atrophy of the muscular fibres, led to a great
enlargement and wood-like hardness of the tongue. On account
of this peculiar character, such a tongue was long known in South
420 INFECTIVE DISEASES, ,
Germany as Holzzunge. In other cases the condition was regarded
as “ tubercle of the tongue,” ‘ chronic sarcoma,” ‘“ chronic interstitial
glossitis,” or simply “degeneration of the tongue.”
Bollinger described this disease as occurring in cattle of all ages,
developing itself gradually, and being always incurable. As a rule,
the animals were slaughtered, because the diminished mobility and
enlargement of the tongue interfered with feeding. He also pointed ,
out that this disease of the tongue was by no means rare, as he had
had no less than six’ such tongues from different parts of Bavaria in
the space of a year, and he also had been able to prove the existence
of the disease in museum specimens.
On further continuing his researches, Bollinger found the same
fungus in tumours which occurred in the pharynx, larynx, and
the mucous membrane of the stomach. These tumours were very
common in the throat in some parts of North Germany, where as
many as 5 per cent. of the animals had been known to be affected.
The disease frequently occurred in the form of subcutaneous
neoplasms, called Lymphome, Hohzgeschwiilste, Fibrome, Tuberkel,
Tuberkel-scropheln.
This disease also appeared in the form of abscesses, which were
called, in many districts, Schlundbeulen. These growths were found
in the neighbourhood of the parotid gland, the larynx, and pharynx,
and were similar in every respect to the affection of the jaw. They
were described as starting apparently from lymphatic vessels in
these parts. Bollinger discovered the fungus in a case of so-called
fibroid of the second stomach of a cow, a spongy growth nearly the
size of the fist; and he believed that in another case the disease
manifested itself in the form of tubercular ulceration of the
intestines.
Bollinger submitted the fungus to Dr. Harz, a botanist, who
described the fungi as mulberry-like masses from 5 to 1 mm. in
diameter. They appeared to the naked-eye as opaque, white grains,
and when calcified were difficult to recognise. On slight pressure
the tufts of the fungi fell apart into segments of unequal size, each
of which appeared to correspond to an individual fungus. The
latter was described as beginning at the pointed end of the wedge,
with a somewhat cone-shaped basal cell, which, in the absence of a
mycelium, perhaps took its place, and bore a great number of short
linked hyphe. At the ends of the hyphe there were oval, globular,
or elongated club-shaped bodies, the reproductive cells or gonidia.
Cultivation experiments, and inoculation of the tongue of a calf
with liquid containing the micro-organism, failed. Harz proposed
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 421
to call the fungus, from its ray-like appearance, actinomyces ; but
what the position of the fungus in nature might be, was difficult to
determine. It did not, he believed, belong to the yeast fungi, but to
the mould fungi, and might be compared to Botrytis, Monosporium,
and Polyactis.
Bollinger concluded that there could be no doubt that actino-
mycosis occupied an important position in the pathology of cattle
diseases. As further evidence of the prevalence of the affection, he
remarked that Zippelius of Obernburg had observed in the course of
about ten years’ practice not Jess than 254 cases of lymphoma, in
the neighbourhood of the larynx and pharynx, besides 157 cases
of disease of the jaw; and Bollinger says that he had very little
doubt that the greater part of the former, and very likely all the
cases in the jaw, were due to the fungus which he had discovered.
In certain parts of Franconia, according to a communication received
from Professor Frank, these tumours of the throat were extremely
abundant in cattle.
Bollinger’s researches were followed by those of Siedamgrotzky,
and later by a communication from Johne. Johne described the
various forms of the disease which had up to that date been
recognised, including a description of actinomycosis of the bones
of the jaws, of the fauces, of the larynx, of the cesophagus, of the
stomach and intestinal canal, and of the udder. He carried out a
series of experiments, by which it was clearly established that the
disease could be communicated. from cattle to cattle. Previously
Bollinger, Harz, Perroncito, Ponfick, Siedamgrotzky, and Johne had
failed, but subsequently by employing fresh material from the
living animal, both Johne and Ponfick succeeded.
Siedamgrotzky not only confirmed Bollinger’s researches, but he
described the presence of the fungus in so-called “‘ multiple sarcomas ”
of the mucous membrane of the esophagus. Rabé described the
presence of the fungus in tumours known as Winddorn, and pointed
out that, in at least one case, he considered that the disease had
been carried by the lymphatics. There were eleven subcutaneous
tumours in a row on the face, which were connected by swollen,
rope-like, lymphatic vessels. They appeared to be ata to a
growth on the nostril, the size of a hen’s e8s.
Perroncito described a case of “sarcoma” of the intestines and
stomach, which proved to be actinomycosis.
Many additional communications were made on the subject of
this disease. Ponfick produced it in the lungs by intravenous
injection, and subsequently three cases occurring naturally in the
422 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
practice of veterinary surgeons were published. They not only
deserve especial mention, but as this form of the disease appears to
be so seldom recognised, they will be given in detail.
Plug described a case in the lungs. The cow had been out of
health for four weeks, did not eat, and had a cough, and two days
previous to the visit had become rapidly worse. Schmidt found
dyspnea with abdominal respiration ; the nostrils were dilated, the
head protruded, and the mouth kept open. There was dulness on
percussion, and crepitation. The animal was killed, and the lungs,
which alone were diseased, were sent to Plug. The pleura on exami-
nation was normal, but beneath it were numbers of miliary
tubercles, many equal in size to a pin’s head. On section the lung
had a granular appearance from the presence of countless numbers
of minute deposits, which all had the appearance of grey tubercles ;
in none was there any central softening. They were present in
enormous numbers around the bronchi, and in the vessels of the
interlobular tissue. Microscopical examination showed, in the middle
of most of these nodules, the presence of greenish-yellow, radiating
bodies, which under a high power appeared to be undoubtedly
actinomycotic granules. In many there were only rudimentary fungi
consisting of four or five clubs; there was only one rosette in each
tubercle. The fungus was surrounded by round cells and fibrous
tissue. Larger nodules resulted from the agglomeration of several
tubercles, or from diffuse infiltration of round cells in the neighbour-
hood of a tubercle. .
Hink met with a somewhat similar case. A ten-year-old cow
was slaughtered, and in the middle lobe of the right lung there were
yellowish nodules about the size of a pea, scattered over an area
the size of the palm of the hand. These nodules were not at
first sight distinguishable from ordinary tubercles, but on closer
inspection they appeared to be somewhat different, and could be
easily shelled out from the thickened lung tissue. On making a
section, pus welled up at several points, and contained yellowish,
calcareous particles. These particles, on microscopical examination,
were found to be strongly calcified tufts of the actinomyces embedded
in granulation cells. Addition of hydrochloric acid dissolved the
calcareous matter, but had no action on the fungus.
Pusch described a third case. The lungs of a cow, which had
been killed on suspicion of having pleuro-pneumonia, were sent for
examination. The front lobe of the left lung was collapsed and
firm, the pleura was thickened and opaque ; the larger bronchi were
enlarged, filled with pus, and their walls thickened. In the posterior
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 423
lobe of the left lung there was a cavity the size of the fist, which
had been opened, and the contents had, for the most part, escaped ;
what remained was a greyish, purulent liquid, full of yellowish
bodies. By the side of this cavity there was another collection of
pus, the size of a walnut. In the lower part of the second lobe of
the right lung there was a firm, grey tumour, the size of a hen’s
egg, over which the pleura was much thickened. On section this
was cavernous, with similar purulent contents, and yellow grains.
These grains under the microscope proved to be ray-fungi.. The wall
of the cavity consisted of dense connective tissue lined with a soft
granulation tissue, bathed in pus. There was no disease of any
other parts in this case, so that it corresponded in this respect with
the two previous ones. Pusch adds that it was difficult to determine
whether tke organism had gained access to the lungs by the blood-
vessels, or by the inspired air. In his case he inclined to the latter
view, and concludes by saying that the organism is probably very
common and attached to the most varied objects, from which it
may be conveyed by the air.
Pusch refers in the same paper to an interesting case which
occurred in the practice of Eggeling. The latter had under his care
a cow with extensive paralysis. The spinal cord was compressed
by a compact swelling in the neck, consisting of the nodules of
actinomyccsis. There were no manifestations of disease in any other
part of the body.
Prevalence of the Disease.—The author found that the disease
was not generally recognised as a common affection of cattle
in this country, in spite of the interest excited by the work of
Fleming, to whom is due the credit of first recognising a case in
England. In 1887 there was a disease prevailing in Norfolk, and
in the following year outbreaks were investigated by the author
in Essex, Hertfordshire, Cambridgeshire, anid ‘Middlesex. In the
Norfolk outbreak the author found on one farm 8 per cent. of the
beasts affected with the so-called ‘“‘ wens” or “ sitfasts,” which
proved on microscopical examination to be cases of actinomycosis.
These growths had previously been described in veterinary text-books
as the result of strumous or scrofulous inflammation; but in all
the specimens of wens received from this country and the colonies,
the author has been able to demonstrate the presence of the ray-
fungus.
A case of pulmonary actinomycosis, with grape-like growths on
the pleura, indicated that wens were not the only manifestation of
this disease, which had keen lost sight of under the designation of
424 INFECTIVE DISEASES,
tuberculosis. Many other cases were examined, and the disease
was shown to be prevalent in this country.
Fig. 178.—From a photograph of a Norfolk steer. There is a growth about the
size of an orange in front of the throat, an example of a so-called “‘ scrofulous ”
or “strumous” tumour. This growth was associated with a large polypoid
growth in the pharynx which, by interference with deglutition, produced
emaciation (Fig. 180).
In Australia actinomycosis commonly occurs in the form of
tumours of the upper and lower jaw, which were attributed to
“cancer” or to “scrofulous
inflammation.” The disease
is still commonly known in
Australia as “cancer” and
“Vampy jaw.”
Reports of the prevalence
of actinomycosis in the United
States have been published
by the Board of Live Stock
Commissioners for the State
of Illinois. In their Report
for 1890 several interesting
communications were pub-
TTC 70. — q BLY yIT- ] /
Fie. 179.—A Norvotk HEIFER WITH A dished. Mr. Casewell, State
Lance ‘ WEN” IN THE PAROTID REGION. ; , ‘ 4
Veterinarian, investigated an
outbreak of this disease, known also in America as “lumpy jaw,’
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 425
on a farm in Yates City, where there were 80 head of cattle, and
16 were found to be suffering from actinomycosis. Mr. Casewell
Fic. 180.—Photograph of a steer nearly three years old, but about the size of a
yearling. The emaciation and deplorable aspect recall the appearance of
“a piner ” or ‘‘ waster ” (tuberculosis).
reported that the disease was prevalent in nearly every county in
that State, and that in his opinion it was spreading. In one
instance 109 cases were slaughtered.
Actinomycosis in Relation to Tuberculosis——When we consider
the very high percentage of cases
of tuberculosis which has been
reported in some localities, the im-
portance of differentiating actino-
mycosis from tuberculosis cannot
be over-estimated. The very
great contrast in the appearance
of the micro-organisms in the
two cases renders this a very
easy matter for the pathologist.
But practical veterinarians and
breeders of cattle are liable to
mistake some manifestations of
actinomycosis for tuberculosis.
f 3 7] —AcTINOMYC : NopvULES
It is of the greatest im- Fic. 181.—AcTINOMYCOTIC
Ms A ue FROM THE PLEURA.
portance to bear in mind that
wens or clyers are really not tubercular, but actinomycotic ; and
426 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
that a condition of the lungs may occur as the result of actino-
mycosis, which from the naked-eye appearances may be mistaken for
“‘srapes” or “angleberries.” It will be well also to remember in
connection with the above remarks, that extreme emaciation may
result in actinomycosis, producing a condition which, without a
post-mortem examination, would probably be attributed to tuber-
culosis, the animal being regarded as a ‘“‘piner” or ‘“ waster.”
If these possible fallacies are taken into account, the excessive per-
centage of tubercular cases so commonly reported will be very
considerably reduced. . |
There is no evidence to show that the flesh of animals suffering
from actinomycotic tumours is unfit for human consumption. In
very severe cases it is unwholesome, but there is no evidence that
it can produce actinomycosis in man.
Manirestations or ActTinomycosis In Man.
(I.) Invasion by the Mouth and Pharynx.—The fungus may gain
access through carious teeth, or wounds or fistule of the jaw, and
very possibly by inflammatory processes in the pharynx and tonsils.
The disease attacks the ‘lower jaw most frequently. The tumour
is found in close connection with the bone, or in the sub-maxillary
or sub-mental regions, and also in the pre-tracheal region. It occurs,
though rarely, in the interior of the bone.
In a case described by Israél, which occurred in a woman aged
forty-six, there was a small tumour about the size of a cherry
attached to the external surface of the lower jaw, with an opening
through which a probe could be passed into the bone. The tumour
was incised and scraped away, and a cavity discovered in the bone,
admitting a small sharp-spoon. Later, a further operation was
performed: the periosteum was detached, the cavity of the bone
enlarged, and the contents scraped out, consisting of granulation
tissue, fragments of bone, and the yellowish fungi. At the bottom
of the cavity the fang of the canine tooth was found. No return of
the growth occurred.
The first cases of actinomycosis which were observed in America
were connected with the jaw. In 1884 Dr. Murphy described two
cases at Chicago. The first was that of a woman aged twenty-eight.
Two weeks previously she had suffered from severe toothache, with
swelling in the throat and great pain in swallowing. It disappeared
after poulticing, but she was again attacked with toothache, and a
swelling appeared on the angle of the jaw on the left side. The
ACTINOMYCOSIS. 427
mouth could not be opened without difficulty ; the tonsil was much
enlarged, and pus was set free on incision. She still suffered with
toothache, and a small swelling now occurred on the left side of the
neck below the jaw. She had several carious teeth. The swelling,
which was about the size of a walnut, was punctured, and a drainage
tube inserted ; a creamy-looking discharge containing yellow granules
continued to escape, but the swelling and induration increased. A
further operation was decided upon. The carious tooth was removed,
and a probe passed into the alveolus showed a communication with
the external wound; the angle of the jaw was chiselled away, and
the alveolus scraped out. Jodoformed gauze was applied, and the
case recovered.
The second case was a man aged eighteen, who had also suffered
with severe toothache and swelling at the angle of the jaw. On
examination a carious tooth was noticed. The swelling was well
marked, and there was fluctuation ; it was as large as a pigeon’s
egg, and situated below the jaw. When punctured, thick creamy
pus escaped containing the fungi; the sinus was scraped out, and in
ten days the wound was healed. Another swelling appeared, and
this was treated as before, and the case recovered.
The peculiar feature of these growths is their apparent migra-
tion. Israél states that in one case a tumour occurred on the alveolar
process, close to carious teeth, and later was close to the edge of
the jaw in the sub-maxillary region. From thence it disappeared,
and a large swelling formed below the hyoid bone, and after this had
been incised and had healed, an abscess formed above the clavicle.
Actinomycotic tumours in this region would sometimes appear to
correspond very closely with wens or clyers in cattle; they may dis-
charge through the skin, and the opening close, or a fistula result ;
but they differ, from their tendency to form burrowing abscesses
instead of recognisable tumours. In this respect they recall chronic
inflammation rather than the sarcoma-like growths in cattle.
Cases in which the upper jaw is attacked are not so frequent as
those in the lower jaw. The progress is usually described as slow,
and there is a tendency for the deep-seated soft parts to be involved,
while in the lower jaw there is a tendency for the tumour to come
to the surface. There may be burrowing suppuration, or small
tumours, which, after a time, fluctuate and form distinct abscesses.
These ‘may involve the skin, discharge their contents, and leave
fistulous openings. ;
In other cases the disease has been described as extending from
the alvcolar process to the temporal bone, or the base of the skull,
A428 INFECTIVE DISEASES.
be
Fic. 212.—PuRg-cULTURE OF BACILLUS
Suptitis IN NUTRIENT GELATINE
(BAUMGARTEN).
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, liquefaction occurs rapidly in
the track of the needle, and a film
536
floats on the surface. The liquefied
gelatine, at first turbid, becomes
DESCRIPTION
clear as the bacilli settle at the -
bottom of the tube.
On agar a wrinkled film develops.
and also on serum.
Fic. 213. PurRE-cULTURE oF BacILius
SUBTILIS ON THE SURFACE OF Nv-
TRIENT AGAR.
On potato the growth is white,
and there is copious spore-forma-
tion.
On ordinary nutrient liquids they
develop at first a thin, and subse-
quently a thick, dense, crumpled
pellicle, with copious spore-forma-
tion.
The simplest way to obtain a
culture of the bacillus is to make
a decoction of hay. The hay is
chopped into small pieces, and
boiled with distilled water in a
flask for a quarter of an hour.
The infusion is then filtered into a
beaker, covered with a glass plate, |
_and set aside in a warm place.
In .
.two or three days the liquid swarms |
OF SPECIES,
with the bacilli, the spores of which
exist in great numbers in ordinary
hay. A more sure method for
obtaining a pure cultivation is as
follows :—
(a) Add only a small quantity of
water to some finely chopped hay,
and set aside for four hours at
36° C.
(b) Pour off the extract, and
dilute it to the sp. gr. 1-004.
(c) Boil gently for one hour in
a bulb plugged with cotton wool.
(d) Set aside 500 ccm. of the
extract at 36° C.
In about twenty-four hours, as
a rule, a pellicle has commenced
to develop upon the surface of the
liquid. If the reaction is definitely
acid, carbonate of soda solution
must be added to the decoction.
MetuHops or Staining Hay Baciiius.
To demonstrate the flagella of the
bacilli, they may be stained with
aol ed solution (Koch), or by
Loffler’s method.
The linking together of cocci, long
rods and short rods in the threads, is
shown by treating with alcoholic solu-
tion or fuchsine, or with iodine solution
(Zopf).
To stain the spores the cover-glass
preparations must be heated to a very
high temperature (210°C.), in the hot-
air steriliser for half an hour, or they
may be exposed for a few seconds to
the action of concentrated sulphuric
acid (Biichner), or floated for twenty
minutes on hot solution of the dye.
Bacillus subtilis similans.—
There are several bacilli closely
resembling Bacillus subtilis.
Two have been isolated from
human feces by Bienstock which
do not liquefy nutrient gelatine. |
No. I. Rods and filaments ;
spore-formation present.
On agar they produce a delicate
wrinkled veil.
No. II. Rods morphologically
identical with No. I.
On agar they produce a smooth,
shining layer.
Bacillus superficialis (Jordan).
—Rods 2°2 » in length, and ‘1 p in
width ; singly, and in pairs. Motile.
Colonies have a yellowish-brown
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
nucleus and transparent marginal |
zone.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is a slight growth in the
track of the needle, and after a time
liquefaction at the upper part.
On agar the growth is smooth and
shining.
In broth they produce turbidity.
They will not grow on potato.
They occur in sewage.
Bacillus tenuis sputigenus
(Pansini).—Short rods, singly, and
in pairs ; capsulated.
They produce a whitish growth
on the surface of gelatine.
They coagulate milk.
They are pathogenic in rabbits.
They were isolated from sputum.
Bacillus termo (Macé).—Thick
rods 1:4 » long, and -8 » wide,
usually in pairs,sometimesin chains.
Actively motile.
Colonies whitish, with a grey edge
surrounded by liquefied gelatine. .
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they form a funnel-shaped
area of liquefaction, and later the |
whole of the jelly is liquefied.
Broth is rendered turbid and a
thin brittle pellicle is formed.
They are associated with decom-
position.
Bacillus tetani (p. 457).
Bacillus thalassophilus (Rus-
sel).—Slender rods varying in
length ; and filaments. They are
anaerobic. Spore-formation pre-
sent.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth appears in the
lower part of the track of the
needle in the form of cloudy colo-
nies, liquefying the jelly and pro-
ducing gas-bubbles. Cultures emit
a penetrating odour.
They were isolated from sea-mud.
Bacillus thermophilus (Mi-
quel).—Rodsvarying in size accord-
ing to the temperature at which
they are cultivated. In broth they
grow best between 65° and 70° C.,
forming a copious deposit. They
occur in air, soil, and water.
Bacillus tremelloides (Tils).—
Rods ‘75 to 1 » in length, 25 » in
width ; and in masses.
537
Colonies
brown.
The bacilli inoculated in the
depth of gelatine produce a growth
composed of isolated yellow colo-
nies in the track of the needle,
and a yellow mass on the surface.
They liquefy the. gelatine.
On agar the growth is slimy and
golden-yellow.
On potato they form an abund-
ant yellow growth.
They occur in water.
Bacillus tuberculosis (p. 378).
Bacillus tuberculosis galli-
narum (p. 402).
‘Bacillus tumescens (Zopf).—
Cocci, long and short rods. They
form a jelly-like disc ‘5 to 1 cm. in
diam. on slices of boiled carrot,
with the appearance of a rather
tough, crumpled skin of a whitish
colour. Examination of. this pel-
licle. shows that it is formed of
circular, yellowish-
| rows of rods lying closely together.
These rods can be observed to
divide into short rods, and cocci.
Spore-formation occurs in two
stages of development—viz., in the
cocci and in the short rods. A
cultivation is obtained by exposing
slices of boiled carrot, slightly
moistened, to the air at the tem-
perature of the room.
Bacillus typhi
(p. 342).
Bacillus ubiquitus (Jordan).—
Rods 1:1 to 2 p in length, ‘1 p
in width ; and filaments.
Colonies granular
defined.
The bacilli inoculated in the
depth of gelatine produce a growth
resembling that of Friedlander’s
pneumococcus.
On agar and potato the growth
is greyish-white.
They coagulate milk and reduce
nitrates.
They occur in air and water.
Probably. a variety of Bacillus
candicans.
Bacillus ulna (Cohn).—Cocci,
short rods, long rods, and threads.
Diam. of the cocci 1:5 to 2:2 p.
Spore-formation in both short and
long rods. No septic odour is pro-
abdominalis
and well
538 DESCRIPTION
duced by this bacillus in a nourish-
ing liquid. Cloudy masses are
found on the surface of the liquid,
which later form a thick dry
pellicle, consisting of bundles of
threads matted together. The for-
mation of ellipsoidal spores occurs
in the usual way; they measure
2°5 to 2°8 w long, and more than
1 » wide. The bacillus is found
in rotting eggs, and can be culti-
vated on boiled white of egg.
Bacillus ulna (Vignal).—Rods
2 in length ; singly, and in pairs,
and in short chains.
Colonies composed of concentric
zones varying in granularity.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, liquefaction occurs rapidly in
the track of the needle ; later, there
is a deposit at the bottom of the
liquefied area and a pellicle on the
surface.
On agar. they form a white ad-
herent layer, and the jelly is tinged
with brown.
In broth a pellicle forms on the
surface.
On potato they form a pellicle
with characteristic linear markings.
They liquefy serum. Cultures
produce a putrefactive odour.
They occur in human saliva.
Bacillus vacuolosis (Sternberg).
—Rods 1°5 to 5 pw in length, 1 » in
width, containing vacuolated proto-
plasm; filaments, and involution
forms. At times slowly motile.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, liquefaction occurs slowly at
the upper part of the track of
the needle, forming a cup-shaped
cavity ; the liquefied gelatine is
viscid, and a cream-white layer
forms on the surface.
In agar the development in the
track of the needle is scanty ; on
the surface a cream-white layer is
formed, and the bacilli are united
in long jointed filaments.
On potato a similar growth is
produced, ’
They were isolated from the in-
testine in fatal cases of ycllow fever.
Bacillus varicosus conjunctive
(Gombert).—Rods 2 to 8 in length,
1 » in width.
OF SPECIES.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce a greyish-white
filament in the track of the needle,
and a greyish-white patch on the
surface ; liquefaction follows with-
out turbidity.
On the surface of agar a white,
dry, adherent film is formed.
On potato the growth is, at first,
white and dry, later, reddish-brown.
They produce hyperemia when
injected into the conjunctiva.
They were isolated from the
healthy human conjunctiva.
Bacillus venenosus (Vaughan).
—Motile rods.
Colonies circular, whitish.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is growth in the track of
the needle and on the free surface.
On agar they form a white film,
and on potato a moist brownish
layer.
They are pathogenic in small
animals.
They occur in water.
Bacillus’ venenosus brevis.
(Vaughan ).—Rods short and thick.
Colonies are yellow and composed
of concentric rings.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they grow in the track of the
needle and over the free surface.
On agar they produce a white
film.
On potato the growth is brownish.
They are pathogenic in small
animals,
They occur in water.
Bacillus venenosus invisibilis.
—Slender rods.
Colonies irregular, granular.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth is extremely slow
both in the track of the needle and
on the surface. j
On agar there is a whitish film,
and on potatoes a brownish layer.
They are pathogenic in small
animals.
They occur in water.
Bacillus venenosus
faciens (Vaughan).—Rods.
Colonies circular, granular, yel-
lowish.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they grow in the track of
lique-
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES,
the needle and on the surface, and
liquefaction occurs after some
weeks,
On agar they produce a white
growth, and on potato it is brown-
ish or yellowish.
They are pathogenic in small
animals.
They occur in water.
Bacillus ventriculi (Raczyn-
sky).—Rods 1:5 to 3 yw in length,
1 » in width, singly, in pairs, and
in short chains.
Colonies have a dark nucleus and
transparent periphery. ;
On agar they form a white layer.
They were isolated from the
digestive tract of dogs.
Bacillus vermicularis (Frank-
land).—Large bacilli 2 to 3 p» in
length, 1 » in width, and long
threads. Spore-formation present.
Colonies are irregular in contour,
the irregularity increasing as the
colony comes to the surface. The
peripheral part is composed of
closely packed, wavy bands of bacilli,
and the centre is irregular and
wrinkled.
The bacilli inoculated in the
depth of gelatine form a flattened
band in the track of the needle, and
a grey layer on the surface ; lique-
faction slowly follows.
On agar they produce a smooth,
shining, grey layer, and on potato
a thick, irregular, flesh-coloured
growth.
They reduce nitrates.
They occur in water. Probably
identical with Bacillus vermicu-
losus.
Bacillus vermiculosus (Zimmer-
mann).—Rods 1°5 » in length, °85
in width, singly, in pairs, very short
chains and long filaments. They
are slowly motile.
, Colonies irregular ; grey, granu-
ar. :
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce, after four days,
liquefaction in the upper part of
the needle track, which spreads
downwards, and a reddish-grey sedi-
ment collects at the bottom of the
liquefied area. :
On agar the growth is smooth and
539
shining, and on potato yellowish-
grey.
They occur in water.
Bacillus violaceus (vide Bacil-
lus ianthinus).
Bacillus violaceus Laurentius.
(Jordan).—Rods 3 to 3°6 pv in length,
‘7 » in width.
Colonies violet, surrounded by
liquefied gelatine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction occurs in the track
of the needle, and a violet sediment
collects at the bottom,
On agar the growth is violet, later
black.
On potato there is a copious.
growth, changing in colour from
violet to black.
In broth a violet colour is pro-
duced in the presence of nitrates.
They coagulate milk, and render
it bluish-violet.
They occur in water. Probably
identical with Bacillus ianthinus.
(Zopf).
Bacillus virescens (Frick).—
Rods and filaments.
Colonies irregular,
green.
On the surface of gelatine they
colour the medium green.
They grow on agar:
On potato they form a brownish
growth.
In broth a pellicle is formed on
the surface, and beneath it the
liquid is coloured green.
They were isolated from green
sputum.
Bacillus viscosus (Frankland).
—Rods 1:5 to 2 u in length, singly
and in pairs.
Colonies granular, with hairlike
processes extending into the gela-
granular,
‘tine, which is liquefied and has a
green colour.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce liquefaction and
a green fluorescence.
On agar they form a greenish-
white layer, and colour the jelly
green. ;
On potato the growth is brown.
Probably identical with Bacillus
fluorescens liquefaciens.
Bacillus Zurnianus (List).—
540 DESCRIPTION
Rods 1-2 to 1°5 win length, ‘6 to °8 u
in width. Colonies greyish-white,
viscid.
The bacilli inoculated in the
depth of gelatine develop slightly
in the track of the needle, and pro-
duce a prominent grape-like growth
on the free surface.
On potato the growth is grey or
tinged with yellow.
They occur in water.
Bacterium aerogenes (Miller).
—Short rods, singly and in pairs.
Motile.
The colonies are circular, well
defined, and yellowish.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth in the track of the
needle is brownish-yellow, and a
flat greyish button forms on the
free surface.
On agar a pulpy layer develops.
On potato the growth is pulpy
and yellowish-white.
The bacteria possess great power
of resisting the effect of acids.
They were isolated from the diges-
tive tract.
Bacterium brunneum
(Schréter).—Motile rods, produ-
cing a brown colour.
They were observed on a rotting
infusion of maize.
Bacterium decalvans (Thin).—
Cocci, singly or in pairs, 1°6 p in
length.
They were observed in the roots
of the hair in cases of Alopecia
areatu,
Bacterium fusiforme (Warm-
ing).—Rods spindle-shaped, with
pointed ends, 2°5 » long, and 5 to
*8 uw thick, They were described
as forming a spongy layer on the
surface of sea-water.
Bacterium gingivae pyogenes
{Miller).—Short rods.
The colonies are circular and
rapidly liquefy gelatine.
The bacteria inoculated in the
depth of gelatine produce rapid
liquefaction in the track of the
needle and a white sediment.
On agar they produce a moist
white growth.
They are pyogenic when inocu-
lated subcutaneously in small ani-
OF SPECIES,
mals, and cause a fatal result when
injected to the peritoneal cavity.
They occur in the deposit on the
teeth. —
Bacterium hyacinthi (Wakker).
— Cocci resembling Bacterium
termo.
They were observed in the yellow
slime of diseased hyacinth bulbs.
Bacterium —hydrosulfureum
ponticum (Zelinsky). — Long
motile rods.
On agar a dark coffee-coloured
pigment is produced, which turns
black when exposed to air.
Cultures give off sulphuretted
hydrogen.
They were isolated from dredgings
in the Black Sea.
Bacterium litoreum (Warming).
—Cocci ellipsoidal, 2 to 6 » long,
1:2 to 24 w wide; singly, never
as chains or zoogloea.
They occur in sea-water.
Bacterium luteum (List).—
Rods from 1‘1 to 1°3 wlong. Non-
motile. The colonies are slimy, with
orange centres.
Inoculated in the depth of
gelatine an orange growth occurs,
principally at the point of puncture.
Milk is coagulated.
They occur in water.
Bacterium merismopedioides
(Zopt).—Threads 1 to 15 wu in
thickness; these subdivide into
long rods, short rods, and finally
into cocci. The cocci divide first
in one and subsequently in two
directions, forming characteristic
groups, which appear like merismo-
pedia. These groups may eventually
consist of 64 by 64 cells or more,
and ultimately form zooglea. The
cocci develop again into rods and
threads.
They were observed in water
containing putrefying substances
(River Panke, Berlin).
Bacterium navicula (Reinke
and Berthold).—-Cocci spindle-form
or ellipsoidal, including motile and
non-motile forms. They have one
or more dark spots, which may be
coloured blue by iodine.
They have been observed in rot-
ting potatoes.
DESCRIPTION
Bacterium photometricum (En-
gelmann).—Rods slightly reddish in
colour ; motile.
The movements are stated: to
depend on light.
Bacterium synxanthum (Ebren-
berg ; Bacterium axanthinum ; Bac-
tertum of yellow milk).—Cocci ‘7 to
1 » in length, and rod-forms.
They produce a yellow colour in
boiled milk, which at first becomes
acid, and then strongly alkaline.
They also occur on boiled potatoes,
carrots, etc., where they form small
lemon-yellow masses.
The colouring-matter is soluble
in water, insoluble in ether and
alcohol, unchanged by alkalies, de-
colorised by acids. It is similar
to- yellow aniline colours, both
spectroscopically and in ordinary
reactions.
Bacterium termo (Vignal).—
Rods 1:5 to 2 w in length, 5 to ‘7 p
in width.
Colonies white, surrounded by
liquefied gelatine.
The bacilli inoculated in the
depth of gelatine produce a funnel-
shaped area of liquefaction ; later,
the jelly is completely liquefied and
coloured green. Cultures have a
strong putrefactive odour.
In broth they form a white
deposit and colour the medium
green. ‘
They were isolated from human
saliva.
Bacterium tholoeideum (Gess-
ner).—Rods similar to Bacillus
lactis aerogenes.
Pathogenic in small animals.
They were isolated from healthy
human evacuations. ;
Bacterium urex# (Cohn).—Cocci
1:25 to 2 » in diam., singly or in
chains, and rods. The rods split
up by division into chains of cocci,
which after a time are set free. The
, cocci increase further by subdivi-
sion, and a jelly-like membrane
develops around them. Masses of
cocci exist in the form of irregular
or roundish lumps. They are
aerobic.
Cultivations, after twenty-four
hours, consist: exclusively of rods ;
OF SPECIES, 541
after forty-eight hours, of cocci
chains; and in fourteen days, of
zoogleea ; the cocci transplanted
into fresh nourishing solution again
grow into rods. These observations.
point to the existence of a pleo-
morphic species, Bacterium urece ;
and the former nomenclature, Micro-
coccus uree, must be regarded as
untenable.
In urine they set up ammoniacal
fermentation, converting urea into
carbonate of ammonia. Rods, 2 p.
long and 1 » wide, have been iso-
lated from stale urine (Bacillus
ureze, Leube), which also most
energetically cause the ammoniacal
fermentation of urine.
Bacterium uree (Jaksch).—
Rods 2 » in length, 1 » in width.
Colonies on gelatine semi-trans-
parent.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the bacilli form a delicate
branching growth in the track of
the needle.
They convert urea into carbonate
of ammonia, and cultures smell of
herring brine.
They occur in ammoniacal urine..
Bacterium violaceum (Bergon-
zini).—Rods similar to Bacterium
termo, ‘6 to 1 » thick, 2 to 3 yp long..
They occur on white of egg,
forming a violet pigment.
Bacterium Zopfii (Kurth).—
Cocci, 1 to 1:25 » in diam.; rods
and threads. Cultivated in a streak.
on nutrient gelatine spread out on
a glass slide, a peculiar develop-
ment takes place. In twenty-four
hours after inoculation threads
have developed; in forty-eight
hours windings of the threads
are observed, and in six days the
threads have broken up into cocci..
They were observed in the intestine
of fowls, especially in the contents
of the vermiform appendix. In-
oculation of rabbits was followed
by negative results. Identical with
Bacillus figurans (Crookshank).
Beggiatoa alba (Vauch).—Cocci,.
rods, spirals and threads (Fig. 215).
The threads are indistinctly articu-
lated, actively oscillating, and colour-
less; their protoplasm contains.
342 DESCRIPTION
numerous strongly refractive gran-
ules consisting of sulphur. They
‘occur as greyish or chalk-white
gelatinous threads, 3 to 3°5 yp
thick, in sulphur springs and
marshes,
Beggiatoa mirabilis (Cohn).—
Threads distinguished by their
breadth, which may reach 30 uw.
They are motile, bent and curled
in various ways, and rounded at
the ends. Around the threads,
isolated cells have been observed,
OF SPECIES.
families, bound together by gela-
tinous substance. Later they be-
come larger, globular or ovoid in
shape, and hollow, containing
watery fluid in their interior. The
families reach a diameter of 660 p,
in which the cocci form simply a
peripheral layer. The hollow fami-
lies or vesicles are often perforated,
presenting a delicate reticulated ap-
pearance, which finally may become
broken up into irregular structures.
The red colouring-matter can be
Fic. 214.—Bacterium Zopvit.
Successive CHANGES IN THE SAME THREAD,
x 740. u, A thread form ; b, breaking up into rod forms; c¢, into cocci (Kurth).
macrococci, but spiral forms are as
yet unknown. The threads are
filled with sulphur granules. They
occur in sea-water, forming a white
gelatinous scum on decomposing
alge.
Beggiatoa roseo-persicina
(Cohnia roseo-persicina. Bacterium
rubescens, or Peach-coloured bac-
terium, Lankester).—Cocci, rods,
spirals, and threads (Fig. 216). The
cocci, globular or oval, reach 2°5 p
in diam. They form at first solid
distinguished from other red pig-
ments, and it is designated by the
name bacterio-purpurin. It is quite
distinct from the pigment produced
by Micrococcus prodigiosus, being
peach-blossom red, and insoluble
in water, alcohol, etc. Examined
spectroscopically, it shows a strong
absorption in the yellow, and a
weaker band in the green and blue,
as well as a darkening in the more
refrangible half of the spectrum.
In the cocci, especially of the older
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES,
vesicles, dark granules are to be
seen, which consist of sulphur.
‘The micro-organisms occur on the
surface of marshes, or on water in
which alge are rotting. They
form a rose-red, blood-red, violet-
red, or violet-brown scum; and
sometimes in such quantity that |
543
Cladothrix dichotoma (Cohn),
—Threads resembling those of lep-
tothrix ; slender, colourless, not
articulated, straight or slightly
undulated, and in places twisted
in irregular spirals with pseudo-
branchings. The development can
be traced from the cocci to rods and
Fic. 215.—BEcGGIATOA ALBA.
A. Threads at base distinctly linked, partly spiral. : 1
whole length. ©, D, Fragments detached from threads ; immotile.
B. A thread, spiral in its
E. Active
spirillum-forms, with a flagellum at either end. F, G. Thin and short spiral
forms. H. A spiral showing the individual links. x 540 (Zopf).
whole marshes and ponds may be
coloured blood-red by them.
Spirillum sanguineum, rosaceum,
violaceum, monas vinosa and Okenii,
and Rhabdomonas rosea are pos-
sibly phase-forms of Beggiatoa
roseo-persicina.
threads. The latter are at the
beginning simple threads, which
were formerly described as Lepto-
-thrix parasitica, or, if coloured by
impregnation with iron, as Lepto-
thrix ochracea. Later they form,
false branches by single rods turning
544
aside, which by repeated division :
A thread —
lengthen into threads.
appears to be first composed of
long rods, then of short rods, and
lastly of cocci. The iodine reaction
must be applied to distinguish these |
forms, especially when the sheath
of the threads has a ‘yellow, rust-
red, olive-green, or dark brown
coloration. The cocci may grow
into rods while still in the sheath,
and finally become leptothrix
threads, surrounded by a delicate
gelatinous sheath, from which the
DESCRIPTION
OF SPECIES.
media small tufts, about 1 to 3 p,
and floating masses.
Cladothrix Forsteri (vide Strep-
tothrixc Férsteri, Cohn).
Cladothrix intricata (Russell).
—Rods and filaments.
Colonies are composed of a net-
work of twisted threads. .
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine fine filaments spread out from
the track of the needle, and the
gelatine is liquefied.
Grown on agar the
penetrate the jelly.
filaments
i
a
3
O's
ove
o.S
sgboge a
Og
“6
2° QO
G0 o0 6:
Pao
Oo
SOT eS
.
O05
Fic, 216.—PHASE-FORMS OF BEGGIATOA ROSEO-PERSICINA (WARMING).
false branching proceeds. Frag-
ments may break off, which are
actively motile, and appear as
vibrios, spirilla, and spirochzeta-
forms. They may also occur in
zoogloea (Fig. 217).
They are the commonest of all
bacteria in both still and running
water, in which organic substances
are present. They are observed
also in the waste water of certain
manufactures, such as sugar. Arti-
ficially they can be cultivated on
infusions of rotting alge and ani-
mal substances, forming on these
In broth the growth is abundant..
They were isolated from sea
dredgings.
Cladothrix invulnerabilis (Ac-
osta, y Grande Rossi).—Filaments
which produce in gelatine a white
thread, and liquefy it very slowly.
On potato the growth is abundant
and chalky in appearance.
In milk they form a firm yel-
lowish pellicle ; and in broth and in
water the growth is abundant.
They occur in water.
Clostridium butyricum (cide
Bacillus butyricus).
DESCRIPTION
Clostridium fetidum (Libo- |
rius).—Rods 1 » in width, singly and |
in filaments. Spore-formation re-
sembles that of Bacillus butyricus.
They are anaerobic.
Colonies rapidly liquefy gelatine.
mT
!
|
|
a een
OF SPECIES. 545
gas-formation with unpleasant smell
and splitting up of the jelly.
They were isolated from earth.
Crenothrix Kiihniana (Raben-
horst).—Cocci, rods, and _ thread-
forms. The cocci are globular,
Poem odie aeia &
ote!
Fic. 217.—CLADOTHRIX DICHOTOMA.
A. Branching schizomycete :—(a) Vibrio-form ; (b) Spirillum-form [slightly mag-
nified
B. A screw-form with (a) Spirillum-form ; (b) Vibrio-form.
C. Long spirocheta-form.
D. Fragment with spirillum-form at one end, vibrio-form at the other.
E. Screw-forms :—(a) continuous ; (b) composed of rods; (c) composed of cocci.
F. Spirocheta-form :—(a) continuous ; (b) composed of long rods; (c) short rods ;
(d) cocci (Zopf).
_ On agar the colonies form branch-
ing processes resembling colonies of
Bacillus cedematis maligni.
_ Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction spreads from be-
1to6 pindiam. The threads are
colourless, 1°3 to 5 » thick, and club-
shaped at the extremity, reaching
a diam. of 6 to9 yu. The threads
form colonies with a brick-red, olive-
low upwards. There is abundant , green, or dark-brown tobrown-black
35
546 DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
coloration, caused by impreg- | set free when the sheath bursts,
nation with oxide of iron. The | and develop into new threads. In
threads are distinctly articulated, | other cases the segments remain
and ensheathed. The segments are | enclosed, and subdivide into discs,
é rf c cer Po,
@® “geReo
aot O
a Po0°
e a5
FS
eo.
es s°50]
Eek
e) Bo),
@® +/3
, 'E
ig :
\l ka bk
A
mo kB
mM kB
il kb
i"
& Kd
" ©
4 ‘se
ae
Soe
= 5 SS
<<
4
ane
oe
SEI
\ GES ces
TLL
La a fo
a
Fic. 218.—CRENOTHRIX KUHNIANA.
a, b, ¢, d, e. Cocci in various stages of fission, x 600.
f. Zooglcea of cocci, x 600. ;
yg. Various forms of zooglea, natural size.
h. Colony of threads composed of rods grown out of a zooglcea of cocci,
i—r. Thread-forms ; some straight, others spiral, with more or less differentia-
tion between base and apex. (7) is composed of short rods at the base, and above
these of cylindrical segments, and at the apex these segments have divided into
cocci, x 600 (Zopf).
DESCRIPTION
which, by vertical fission, break up
into globular forms (cocci), These
again develop into new threads,
either within the sheath, eventually
penetrating it, or after they are set
free.
The micro-organism appears in
little whitish or brownish tufts in
wells and drain-pipes, and it not
only renders drinking-water foul,
but may stop up the narrower
pipes.
Diplococcus albicans amplus
(Bumm).—Cocci resembling gono-
cocci but much larger, singly and
in tetrads.
Colonies are prominent
greyish-white.
In the depth of gelatine they
produce a greyish-white growth in
the track of the needle and on the
free surface. They slowly liquefy
the gelatine.
They were obtained from the
vaginal mucous membrane.
Diplococcus albicans tardis-
simus (Bumm).—Cocci morpho-
logically identical with gonococci.
They grow extraordinarily slowly
on gelatine.
They form very minute colonies,
which are opaque and greenish-
brown in colour.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine isolated greyish-white colonies
develop in the track of the needle,
and on the free surface a thin,
white, waxy film with dentated
edge.
On agar the growth is very
similar.
They were isolated from the
vaginal mucous membrane.
Diplococcus citreus conglome-
ratus (Bumm).—Cocci in pairs
resembling gonococci, 1°5 » in diam.,
in tetrads and in masses.
Colonies lemon-yellow ; irregular
in form.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the cocci develop in the track
of the needle, and liquefaction com-
mences at its upper part.
The growth on the free surface
is yellow, and floats on the liquefied
gelatine or subsides to the bottom
of the liquefied area.
and
OF SPECIES. 547
They are present in gonorrhceal
pus, in air and in dust.
Diplococcus citreus lique-
faciens (Unna).—Oval cocci -4 to
‘1 p in diam., in pairs, tetrads,
short chains, and masses.
Colonies appear in the form of
circular discs, at first greyish-white,
later lemon-yellow. They are finely
| granular, and have sharply defined
contours.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, at the end of a week the
growth is found on the free
surface, forming a shining yellow
layer ; in two weeks liquefaction
commences, and the growth floats
on the liquefied gelatine which is
also yellowish and turbid.
On the surface of agar a yellow-
ish-brown layer is rapidly formed.
The appearance is similar on
potato.
They were isolated in cases of
eczema seborrhoeicum.
Diplococcus coryze (Hajek).—
Large diplococci.
Colonies are white, prominent.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth resembles the
pneumococcus.
On agar a white layer is formed.
They are probably identical with
Friedlinder’s pneumococci.
They were isolated from the
mucus in acute nasal catarrh.
Diplococcus flavus liquefaciens
tardus.—Cocci resembling gono-
cocci.
Colonies are circular, shining,
and chrome-yellow in colour.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a yellowish growth occurs
along the needle track, and also
on the free surface. In a month
the surface is depressed, but the
gelatine is not liquefied until about
two months have elapsed.
On agar a yellowish-white layer
is formed, and on potato the colour
is more pronounced.
They were isolated from the
skin in eczema seborrhoeicum.
Diplococcus fluorescens foti-
dus (Klamann).—Cocci in pairs and
chains.
Colonies
circular, forming a
548 DESCRIPTION
brownish deposit surrounded by
liquefied gelatine which has a violet
or greenish tinge.
noculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce liquefaction along
the track of the needle, with a
hemispherical excavation of the
gelatine at the upper part. An
iridescent film floats on the surface
and a greenish sediment forms at
the bottom of the liquefied area.
On agar the layer is brownish,
On potato the growth is granular,
and the potato in the vicinity has
a bluish colour.
They were cultivated from the
nasal mucus.
Diplococcus intercellularis
meningitidis (Weichselbaum).—
Cocci singly, in pairs, tetrads and
masses. They grow at 37°C.
Colonies on agar are granular and
yellowish-brown.
On the surface of agar they form
a greyish-white viscid growth. In
the depth of agar the growth only
occurs in the upper part of the
needle track.
On blood serum and broth there
is very little growth, and none on
potato.
Cultures quickly lose their
vitality.
They are pathogenic in mice,
guinea-pigs, rabbits, and dogs,
They were isolated from the exu-
dation in cases of cerebro-spinal
meningitis, and were observed in
the interior of pus cells.
Diplococcus luteus (Adametz).
—Cocci 1°2 to 1°3 p» in diam., singly
and in chains. Motile,
Colonies are circular and slightly
yellow, and granular. Old colonies
are bright yellow.
On the surface of gelatine a
growth occurs in concentric circles
of a lemon-yellow colour, and the
gelatine is coloured reddish-brown.
After several weeks liquefaction
sets in. :
On agar a yellow layer forms, and
the jelly is coloured reddish-brown.
On potato the growth changes
from yellow to brown. Milk is
coagulated.
They were obtained from water.
OF SPECIES,
Diplococcus of pneumonia in
horses (Schutz).—Oval cocci, singly
or in pairs, capsulated.
Colonies small and white.
In the depth of gelatine a row of
colonies develops in the track of the
needle.
On agar the growth is composed
of transparent droplets.
Injection into the lung is said to
produce pneumonia, ending fatally
in eight or nine days.
They are pathogenic in rabbits,
guinea-pigs, and mice.
They were isolated from the
lungs of a horse suffering from
pneumonia.
Diplococcus roseus (Bumm).—
Cocci identical in description with
gonococci.
Colonies are pink, granular, and
irregular in form,
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the cocci grow freely in the
track of the needle and on the
surface, developing a pink colour
and slowly producing liquefaction.
They are present in the air.
Diplococcus subflavus (Bumm).
—Diplococci similar to gonococci.
Colonies greyish-white, later
yellow.
They grow in gelatine and on
blood serum, and liquefy broth.
They produce suppuration when
injected subcutaneously in man.
They were isolated from lochial
discharges, the vesicles of pem-
phigus, and from the secretion in
colpitis in children.
They stain by Gram’s method.
Hematococcus bovis (Babes).—
Cocci oval, singly, in pairs, and in
masses.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine minute colonies develop in the
track of the needle.
On agar the growth is composed
of transparent droplets.
On potato a yellowish shining
film is formed.
On blood serum the growth is
similar to that on agar.
They produce a fatal result in
rabbits and guinea-pigs in a week
or ten days.
They were isolated from the
DESCRIPTION
blood and organs of cattle which
died of an epidemic disease asso-
ciated with hemoglobinuria.
Helicobacterium aerogenes
(Miller).—Bacilli singly, in chains
and long wavy filaments. Motile.
Colonies whitish, varying in form.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the bacilli give rise to a faintly
yellow growth in the track of the
needle, and an almost invisible,
rapidly growing layer on the
surface,
On potato the growth is dry and
brownish.
They were isolated from the
healthy intestinal tract.
Leptothrix buccalis (Robin).—
Long, thin threads, ‘7 to 1 » broad,
colourless, often united in thick
bundles or felted together. Masses
of cocci occur with the threads,
and the threads themselves are com-
posed of long rods, short rods, and
cocci. The threads may break up
into spiral, vibrio, and spirocheta
forms. The last-named occur in
large numbers in the mouth, and
have been named Spirocheta buc-
calis. Leptothrix buccalis is found
in teeth slime, and is believed
‘to be intimately connected with
dental caries. The threads pene-
trate the tissue of the teeth, after
the enamel has been acted upon by
acids generated by the fermentation
of food. The short rods, long rods,
cocci, leptothrix-forms, and screw-
forms are found in the dental
canals.
The threads of Leptothrix buc-
calis have a special staining reaction
(Leber). They become coloured if
placed in an acid medium with
iodine ; if the medium be alkaline,
it must first be acidified with very
dilute hydrochloric acid or acetic
acid. The contents are stained
violet, and contrast with the sheath
and septa, which remain uncoloured.
Leptothrix buccalis (Vignal).—
Rods 1 to 1:5 » in width, 1°6 to
30 in length.
Colonies greyish-white, promi-
nent and furrowed. j
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a filament forms in the track
OF SPECIES. 549
of the needle, and a growth occurs
on the free surface. Liquefaction
sets in at the upper part, forming
a cup-shaped cavity, and a bluish
skin floats upon the liquid. The
liquefaction gradually extends to
the side of the tube, and a deposit
is formed at the bottom of the
liquefied gelatine.
On agar the layer is white,
wrinkled and transparent, and later
yellowish.
In broth there is turbidity, but
no skin on the surface.
On potato the growth is greyish-
white.
They are occasionally present
in the mouth in health, and
are possibly identical with lepto-
thrix buccalis (Robin).
Leptothrix gigantea (Miller).—
Long rods, short rods and cocci
can be observed in the same thread.
There are also screw-threads, which
may take the form of spirals,
vibrios, or spirochetz. The threads
increase in diameter from base
to apex ; corresponding with the
thickness of the threads, the rods
and cocci show different dimensions.
They have been observed in the
diseased teeth of dogs, sheep, cats
and other animals.
Leuconostoc mesenteroides,
Cienkowski (Gomme de sucrerie,
Froschlaichpilz, Frogspawn fungus).
—Cocci and rods singly, in chains,
and in zoogloea, surrounded by a
thick gelatinous envelope. The life-
history has been very thoroughly
investigated. The spores, 1°8 to
2 w in diam., are of a round or
ellipsoidal form, with thick mem-
brane and shining contents. The
outer membrane-layer bursts, and a
middle lamella oozes out, and forms
a thick gelatinous envelope, while
the inner layer remains adherent
to the plasma. Thus the spore-
germination leads to the formation
of a coccus with a gelatinous en-
velope. The coccus ‘then elongates
into a short rod-form, and the
gelatinous envelope becomes ellip-
soidal. The rod divides into two
cocci, and each of these lengthens
intoarodand divides. Byrepetition
550 DESCRIPTION
of this process a chain of cocci
results, encased in a cylindrical
or ellipsoidalenvelope. The chains
increase in length, become twisted
up, and eventually fall apart into
pieces of various lengths.
In nourishing liquids a great
number of little masses are formed,
which adhere together, and produce
pseudo-parenchymatous structures.
These latter may join together,
forming still larger agglomerations.
y
29
So
OF SPECIES.
This micro-organism occurs occa-
sionally in beet-root juice and the
molasses of sugar-makers, forming
large gelatinous masses resembling
frog-spawn. The vegetation is so
rapid that forty-nine hectolitres of
molasses, containing 10 per cent.
of sugar, were converted within
twelve hours into a gelatinous
mass ; consequently, it is a for-
midable enemy of the sugar manu-
facturers.
ah
Fic. 219.—LEUcONOSTOC MESENTEROIDES.
1. Spores. 2. Spores after germination, showing gelatinous envelope. 3, 4, 5, 6.
nerease by division.
mass of zoogloea.
kowski).
The masses of zoogloea are of
almost a cartilaginous consistency,
and admit of sections being made
with a razor. After a long time
the envelope liquefies, and the cocci
are set free ; the latter introduced
into fresh nourishing media develop
new colonies, In the chains some
of the cocci become enlarged with-
out changing their form. These
acquire the properties of spores,
and are arthrospores.
7. Glomerular form of zooglcea.
9. Cocci chains with arthrospores (Tieghem and Cien-
8. Section of an old
Micrococcus acidi lactici
(Marpmann).—Large cocci, singly
and in pairs.
Colonies yellowish-white.
On the surface of gelatine the
cocci produce a yellow layer.
They grow in milk, producing a
reddish colour, and coagulation due
to the formation of lactic acid.
They were isolated from milk.
Micrococcus acidi lactici lique-
faciens (Kreuger).—Cocci oval, 1
DESCRIPTION
to 15 » in diam., in pairs and in
tetrads.
Colonies white.
Tnoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the cocci produce a granular
filament, changing in two or three
days to liquefaction in the form of
a funnel; later, a wrinkled mem-
brane floats on the surface of the
liquid. .
In milk they produce lactic acid.
They were isolated from butter
which had turned cheesy.
Micrococcus aerogenes (Miller).
—Oval cocci.
Colonies are dark and regular in
contour, but have a peculiar spotted
appearance.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a brownish-yellow growth
occurs along the track of the needle,
and on the free surface a white
button-like elevation. After a time
the gelatine is slowly liquefied.
On agar a yellowish-white pulpy
layer forms, and a similar growth
appears on potato. ;
They resist the action of acids, so
_that the presence of gastric juice
does not impede their develop-
ment.
They were obtained from the
intestine.
Micrococcus agilis (Ali-Cohen).
—Cocci 1 » in diam., singly, in
pairs, tetrads, and in chains. They
are motile, and possess flagella.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they grow in the track of the
needle, and produce, after two or
three weeks, liquefaction or excava-
tion of the jelly.
On agar and potato the growth
is pink.
They occur in water. :
Micrococcus agilis citreus
(Menge).—Cocci in pairs, chains
and masses. They are motile, and
each coccus possesses a single fla-
gellum.
Colonies appear surrounded by
clouded gelatine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is a scanty growth in the.
track of the needle, and on the sur-
face a bright yellow patch.
On agar they form a yellow layer,
OF SPECIES. 551
which is viscid, and may be drawn
out in long threads.
In broth they produce cloudiness
and a viscous deposit.
The ‘growth on potato is bright
yellow.
Milk is not coagulated.
They were isolated from an in-
fusion of peas.
Micrococcus albus liquefaciens
(Besser ).—Large cocci in chains and
in masses. They are anaerobic.
Colonies on agar exhibit concen-
tric rings of different shades of
brown.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce liquefaction in
the track of the needle.
They occur in mucus from the
nose.
Micrococcus amylivorus (Bur-
rill).—Oval cocci, 1 to 1:4 » long,
‘7 p broad, singly, in pairs, and rarely
in fours, never in chains, are found
embedded in an abundant mucilage
which is very soluble in water.
They have been described as pro-
ducing the so-called “fire blight”’
of the pear tree and other plants.
Micrococcus aquatilis (Bolton).
—Small cocci in masses.
Colonies circular, prominent, and
pure-white.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, there is a white growth in the
track of the needle and also on the
free surface.
On agar the growth is white.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus aquatilis invisi-
bilis (Vaughan).—Cocci oval.
Colonies brown.
In gelatine there is a slight
growth in the track of the needle,
and a more abundant growth on
the free surface.
On agar they form a white film.
On potato the growth is in-
visible.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus aurantiacus
(Cohn).—Cocci spherical or oval,
1:3 to 1°5 » in diam., singly, in pairs,
and in groups.
Colonies orange-yellow.
Inoculated in gelatine they form
minute colonies in the track of the
552 DESCRIPTION
needle, and a prominent hemi-
spherical yellow growth on the free
surface.
On agar the growth is orange-
yellow, and on potato yellow and
slimy.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus botryogenus
(Johne, Rabe).—Cocci 1 to 15 » in
diam., in wavy chains.
Colonies circular, sharply defined.
At first silver-grey, later yellowish-
grey with metallic lustre, they
produce an odour like that of
strawberries.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a greyish-white filament de-
velops, with: slight liquefaction of
the gelatine; later, it becomes
milk-white, and at its upper part a
characteristic bubble appears.
They make hardly any growth
on agar.
On potato they grow very abun-
dantly, forming a yellowish layer
with the same odour as the colonies
on plate cultivations.
Inoculated guinea-pigs die of
septicemia ; in sheep and goats
severe inflammation spreads from
the point of inoculation. Mice are
immune. In horses an inflamma-
tory oedema is at first set up,
followed in four to six weeks by
the formation of new growths,
which sometimes suppurate and
contain large numbers of micro-
cocci.
They were found in tumours of
the spermatic cord and of the
connective tissue in other parts in
horses.
Micrococcus candicans
(Fliigge)—Cocci which collect in
masses.
In plate-cultivations they form
in two or three days milk-white
colonies; while those below the
surface of the gelatine are yellow-
ish. Under. a low power the deep
colonies are quite circular, with
smooth margins, of a blackish-brown
colour, and very slightly granular ;
the superficial colonies are quite
irregular in outline, and are finely
granular.
Cultivated in test-tubes they form
OF SPECIES.
a white nail-shaped cultivation.
They were isolated from contami-
nated plate-cultivations.
They occur in the air.
Micrococcus candidus(Cohn).—
Cocci forming snow-white points
and spots upon slices of cooked
potato.
Micrococcus carneus (Zimmer-
mann).—Cocci ‘8 » in diam., occur-
ring in masses,
Colonies circular, greyish-white,
with the centre tinged with red.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they form a white, granular
filament in the track of the needle,
and a pale pink layer on the free
surface.
On the surface of oblique gela-
tine a flesh-coloured layer develops,
which later assumes a violet colour.
On agar the growth is similar.
On potato the growth is abundant
and red in colour.
They were. isolated from water.
Micrococcus cerasinus siccus
(List).—Cocci -25 to -12 » in diam.,
singly and in pairs. They can best
be cultivated at 37° C.
On agar they form a cherry-red
layer, and a similar growth on
potato.
The pigment is insoluble in alco-
hol, ether, and water, and is not
destroyed by acids or alkalies.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus cereus albus
(p. 178).
Micrococcus cereus flavus
(p. 178).
Micrococcus cinnabareus
(Fliigge).—Large cocci occurring in
twos, threes, and fours.
Colonies develop very slowly, and |
are punctiform, and bright red at
first, and afterwards reddish-brown.
The cocci inoculated on the sur-
face of gelatine form a heaped-up,
red-coloured growth.
They were found contaminating
old cultivations.
Micrococcus citreus (List).—
Cocci 15 to 2-2 w in diam., singly,
in pairs and chains.
Colonies are irregular in form,
moist and shining, and yellowish in
colour,
DESCRIPPLION
In tho depth of gelatine the
growth is very sonnty,
On the surface of agar the growth
is yellowish,
On potato the growth is. similar
but more abundant.
Micrococcus concentricus
(Zimmermann) = Cocei Yin dian,
TN Masses,
Colonies bluish-grey.
Tnoenlated in the dopth of gela-
tine there is no growth in the track
of tho needle, but conoontric rings
form an the free surface,
On agar the growth is grovish-
white and smooth.
On potatoe vellowish and slimy.
Thoy oveur in water.
Micrococous cremoides (“im-
mermann), Covet 8 x in dinm.,
aveurring in Masses.
Colonies are spherical, granular
and yellowish, “The margins are
doutatod or irregular, and processes
extend into thesurrounding gelatine,
Ineeulated in the depth at gela-
tine Liquefaction ovours in the
track of the needle Ina few days.
A yellow growth floats on the
Rquetiod gelatine, and a yellowish
mass subsides to the bottom of the
Nquid.
On agar a smooth shining layer
is formed, and on potate the growth
is abundant,
They ovenr in water,
Micrococcus crepusculum
(Cohn, Moras erepuscnda, Rhren-
berg, Mikrokodten tn faulenden
Sudstniten, Pligge). Round — ar
short oval cells, seareely 20 ia
diam. ; singly or in rooghea,
They avour in varions: infusions’
and putrefying fluids in company
With Bacterium terme,
Micrococeus cumulatus tenuis
(Resser), -Targe cocei, oval: in
MASS.
Colonies an agar have a brown
nucleus,
Ineeulated in the depth of gela-
tine they form a white filament,
and on tho surface ao transparent
layer.
In broth there is an abundant
deposit, and the supernatant liquid
is clear,
OF SPRCTES, 03
They oveur in mucus from the
Nose,
Micrococous endocarditidis ru-
gatus (Weiohselbaum). —Cocei re
sombling pyogenic staphylovovei.
Colonies have a brown or yellow-
ish-brown nucleus,
In the dopth of agar there is a
slight growth in the trek of the
nevdle, aud a wrinkled. waxy layer
on the surface,
On potato the growth is dry and
brownish,
On blood serum the growth is
colourless and adherent,
Injected suboutancously, they pro-
duce, in rabbits, local swelling and
redness, and suppuration in guinea-
pigs. Lnjected into the veins after
lnjury to the aortic valves, they
produce ondovarditis.
They were isolated from a case
of ulvorative endocarditis.
Micrococous fervidosus (Ada-
mota) Covet 6 je in dinm,, in pairs
and in masses.
Tho deop colonies are pale-yellow,
and look like watery droplets : but
superticial colonies are granular and
irregular with jageod edges.
thoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a granular Alament develops in
the track of the needle, and on the
surfave a circular pateh with den-
tated margin.
Onagar the growth is white and
slimy, and on potato greyish-
white,
They oveur in water.
Micrococcus Finlayensis
Sternberg), - Covel ote vo pin
dian. singly, in pairs, tetrads, and
in masses,
In the depth of gelatine they
produce a growth iv the track of
the neevdle, with Lquetretion at
the upper part with a pale-vellow
deposit.
Onagar the growth is pale-yellow.
hoy wore isolated trom the liver
ina fatal case of yellow tover,
Micrococeus flavus desidens
(Bhigge).—Coevi singly. in pairs,
or chains of a fow elements.
Colonies vellowish-white.
ncenlated in the depth of gela-
tine they grow along the track of
554 DESCRIPTION
the needle, and form a yellowish-
brown layer at the point of punc-
ture.
Later liquefaction sets in, and a
deposit forms at the bottom of the
turbid liquid.
They occur in air and in water.
Micrococcus flavus lique-
faciens (Fliigge).—Cocci mostly in
twos and threes, also in masses.
Small yellow colonies appear after
two or three days, which have a
shallow depressed zone surrounding
them. Under a low power they
are granular and yellowish-brown,
with lines radiating from the centre
to the circumference. Later they
liquefy the gelatine, and coalesce,
Inoculated in the depth of gelatine
the cocci produce spherical yellow
colonies in two days along the track
of the needle. These become con-
fluent, and at the end of eight days
the whole of the jelly has become
liquid ; later the upper part becomes
clear, and a yellow mass subsides to
the bottom of the tube.
They occur in air and in water.
Micrococcus flavus tardigra-
dus (Fliigge).—Large cocci showing
at times peculiar dark poles ; gener-
ally arranged in masses.
Colonies develop slowly; the
superficial ones have a smooth wax-
like surface with projecting centre ;
those below the surface are of a
dark chrome-yellow colour, and are
round or oval.
Inoculated in gelatine the cocci
develop slowly along the track of
the needle, forming small isolated
colonies; the gelatine is not
liquefied.
They occur in air and in water.
Micrococcus feetidus(Klamann).
—Cocci singly, in pairs, and short
chains and masses.
Colonies circular or oval, white.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a pure white, shining growth
forms in concentric circles at the
point of puncture, and develops a
brownish colour : and liquefaction
occurs after a time, and extends
along the needle track.
A white layer spreads over the
surface of agar.
OF SPECIES.
On potato the growth is slimy
and grey in colour, with a red tinge.
Cultures produce an odour like
that of ozeena.
They were isolated from the
nose.
Micrococcus fetidus (Rosen-
bach).—Small oval cocci.
Cultivated in agar-agar they
develop gas-bubbles and a foetid
odour. They were isolated from
carious teeth,
Micrococcus Freudenreichi
(Guillebeau)—Large cocci, singly
and in chains.
Colonies are granular and puncti-
form.
In broth turbidity is produced,
and, later, a flocculent deposit.
On potato a shining film develops,
yellowish or brownish-yellow in
colour.
In milk the cultures become
viscous, and can be drawn out into
threads several yards in length.
They were isolated from milk
with viscous fermentation.
Micrococcus fuscus (Maschek).
—Coeci oval.
Colonies pale-brown or black.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is a slight growth along
the track of the needle, and a brown
layer forms on the surface followed
by liquefaction. :
On potato the growth is brown
or brownish-black and slimy.
Cultures give off an odour of
putrefaction.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus gingive pyogenes
(Miller).—Large cocci, singly and
‘in pairs.
Colonies spherical, with sharp
contours.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is an abundant growth
along the track of the needle and
on the free surface.
On agar a thick film develops,
with a faint tinge of purple by
transmitted light.
Injected into mice subcutaneously
they produce local suppuration, and
sometimes death. Injected into
the peritoneal cavity they produce
' peritonitis and death.
DESCRIPTION
They were isolated from an
abscess of the gums.
Micrococcus gonorrhese
(p. 190).
_Micrococcus havaniensis
(Sternberg).—Cocci 4:5 » in diam.
The colonies are circular and of
a blood-red colour.
The cocci inoculated in the depth
of gelatine produce a colourless
growth in the track of the needle
and a carmine patch on the surface.
On agar and on potato they form
a thick irregular carmine layer.
Micrococcus in Biskra-button
(Heydenreich).—Cocci in pairs,
°86 to 1 w in length, occasionally
tetrads ; capsulated.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they form a greyish-white fila-
ment composed of closely packed
colonies, and a yellowish-white film
on the free surface. Liquefaction
commences at the upper part of the
needle track in a few days, forming
a funnel which extends until, in
two weeks, the gelatine is com-
pletely liquefied.
On the surface of agar a shining
white or yellowish-white layer de-
velops in twenty-four hours.
On potato the growth is similar.
Inoculations are said to produce
in rabbits, dogs, fowls, sheep and
horses a morbid condition of the
skin similar to the disease known as
Biskra-button or Pendjeh sore. In
man they produce suppuration when
rubbed on the skin.
They were isolated from the
disease known as Pendjeh sore,
Biskra-button or clouw de Biskra.
Micrococcus in gangrenous
mastitis in sheep.—Cocci singly,
in pairs, and in masses.
Colonies are spherical, white, and
under a low power have a brown
nucleus and transparent margin.
The cocci inoculated in the depth
of gelatine produce a conical area
of liquefied jelly with a copious
white deposit.
On agar they produce a white
layer, which later turns yellowish
in colour.
On potato they form a greyish
growth. :
OF SPECIES. 555
Injected into the mamary gland
of sheep they produce inflammatory ~
edema, and a fatal result in
twenty-four to forty-eight hours.
In rabbits they are pyogenic.
They were isolated from the milk
in cases of gangrenous mastitis in
sheep.
Micrococcus in infectious
pleuro-pneumonia (Poels and
Nolen)—p. 242.
Micrococcus in influenza (Fis-
chel).—-Cocci from 1 to 1:25 w in
diam., singly, in pairs, and chains.
Extremely minute colonies appear
in three days.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a milk-white filament forms
along the track of the needle. Lique-
faction commences in four days
at the upper part, and extends
slowly.
On agar the colonies are pure-
white.
On potato the growth is yellowish-
white.
They do not grow on blood serum
or in milk.
Intravenous injection in dogs is
said to produce symptoms like
distemper.
They were obtained from the
blood in cases of influenza.
Micrococcus in influenza
(Kirchner).—Cocci in pairs and
chains ; capsulated. They grow at
87°C.
The colonies are transparent,
whitish.
On the surface of agar there is
an abundant growth, but it is
limited in the depth of the jelly.
Inoculation experiments were
inconclusive.
They were obtained from the
sputum in cases of influenza.
Micrococcus in pemphigus
(Almquist).—Cocei -5 to 1 win
diam., singly and in pairs ; identi-
cal with. Staphylococcus pyogenes
aureus.
The cocci vaccinated on the arm
are said to have produced bulle.
They were isolated from pem-
phigoid bull in children.
Micrococcus in pemphigus
(Demme).—Cocci 8 to 1-4 pw in
556 DESCRIPTION
diam., singly, in pairs, and in
masses. They can be cultivated |
at 37° C.
The colonies on agar are milk-
white and prominent. Later, off-
shoots occur from the margin,
producing a rosetted appearance.
Inoculated in the depth of
gelatine the cocci form clubbed or
stalactitic out-growths from the
filament which develops in the
track of the needle.
On the surface of agar a creainy
layer is formed with similar off-
shoots.
Injected into the lungs of guinea-
pigs they are said to produce
broncho-pneumonia.
They were obtained from the
bulle in acute pemphigus.
Micrococcus in pneumonia
(Manfredi).—Oval cocci *6 to 1 p
in width, 1 to 1°5 » in length, singly,
in pairs, and short chains.
Colonies on gelatine are circular,
whitish, and later spread out and
become bluish by.transmitted light,
and of a pearly lustre by reflected
light.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is a limited growth along
the track of the needle.
On blood serum they form a
shining, granular, faintly greenish-
yellow layer.
They also can be cultivated on
potato and in broth.
They are pathogenic in dogs,
rabbits, guinea-pigs, mice and birds.
Birds die in a few days; mammals
in from one to three weeks. After
death new growths composed of
granulation tissue are found in the
internal organs, varying in size
from a millet seed toa pea. They
were obtained from the sputum of
pneumonia complicating measles.
Micrococcus in progressive
abscess formation in rabbits
(Koch).—Cocci only about °15 » in
diam., principally in thick zoogloea.
The disease was induced by the in-
jection into rabbits of decomposing
blood. At the place of injection a
spreading abscess formed, which was
fatal to the animal in about twelve
days. No bacteria were observed
| found.
OF SPECIES.
in the blood, but in the walls of the
abscess thick masses of cocci were
The pus is_ infectious,
causing the same disease in healthy
rabbits.
Micrococcus in pyxemia in
rabbits (Koch).—Round cocci and
diplococci ‘25 » in diam.
The disease was produced by the
subcutaneous injection, in a rabbit,
of distilled water in which the skin
of a mouse had been macerated.
At the autopsy there were found
great infiltration around the site of
injection, peritonitis, and accumu-
lations in the liver and lungs; in
short, the appearances of pysmia.
Fig. 220.—Micrococcts In Pyzmia
In RaBBITS: VESSEL FROM THE
CorTEX OF THE KipNEY x 700.
a, Nuclei of the vascular wall;
c, ‘Masses of micrococci adherent
to the wall and enclosing blood-
corpuscles (Koch).
In the capillaries of the organs
examined, masses of cocci were
observed enclosing blood-corpuscles.
Fresh inoculations in rabbits with
exudation-fluid, or blood from the
heart, reproduced the same disease.
Micrococcus in septicemia in
rabbits.—Ellipsoidal cocci ‘8 to 1
» in largest diam. The disease
was produced by the injection of
putrid meat infusion. After death
slight cedema was noted at the site
of injection, slight extravasation of
blood, and great enlargement of
the spleen. No emboli or peri-
tonitis resulted. Masses of cocci
were found in the capillaries of
DESCRIPTION
different organs, especially in the
glomeruli of the kidneys. Rabbits
and mice inoculated with blood
from the heart proved susceptible
to the disease.
Micrococcus in syphilis (Disse
and Taguchi)—Cocci. and diplo-
cocci.
They produce a greyish-white
growth in nutrient media.
They are said to produce inflam-
matory changes in the internal
organs and disease of the blood-
vessels when inoculated in dogs,
rabbits and sheep.
They were obtained from the
blood in cases of syphilis.
Micrococcus in trachoma
(p. 190).
Micrococcus in yellow fever
(p. 260).
Micrococcus lactis viscosus
(Conn).—Cocci in pairs and chains.
Colonies circular and granular.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction begins at the upper
part of the needle track, and extends
until the gelatine is completely
liquefied. The liquefied gelatine is
viscous, and may be drawn out in
long threads.
On the surface of agar they form
a white, shining layer.
In broth there is an abundant
growth, and a film on the surface.
They coagulate milk, producing
butyric acid, and giving it a bitter
taste. They were obtained from
bitter cream.
Micrococcus luteus (Cohn).—
Oval cocci 1 to 1:2 » in diam.
Colonies yellow, with irregular
contours, and granular.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a granular filament develops in
the track of the needle, and on the
free surface a yellow patch.
On agar the growth is slimy and
yellow.
On potato the growth is yellow,
and after a time wrinkled.
The pigment is insoluble in water,
ether and alcohol, and not destroyed
by acids or alkalies.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus luteus (Schroter).
—Cocci similar in size to the above,
OF SPECIES, 557
elliptical, with highly refractive cell
contents.
They form yellow drops of 1 to
3 mm. diam. on boiled potato ; and
a thick, wrinkled, yellow skin on
nutrient liquids.
The colouring-matiter is insoluble
in water, and unchanged by sul-
phuric acid or alkalies.
Micrococcus ochroleucus
(Prove).—Cocci °5 to °8 w in diam.,
singly, in pairs, and short chains.
Colonies minute and colourless,
with crenated margin, from which,
later, processes extend into the gela-
tine, while the centre of the colony
becomes yellow.
On the surface of gelatine a film
develops, which in afew days turns
yellow. Old cultures have a pecu-
har smell.
The yellow pigment can be ex-
tracted with alcohol. It is insoluble
in water, and decolorised by acids:
They were obtained from human
urine.
aa OnOneU of Forbes (p.
Micrococcus plumosus (Brauti-
gam)—Cocci -8 » in diam., in
masses,
Colonies yellowish-white,
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine long delicate acicular processes
shoot out from the needle track
and on the free surface.
On potato the growth is similar.
They were isolated from water.
Micrococcus pneumoniez crou-
pose (p. 236).
Micrococcus pyogenes tenuis
(R osen bach).—Cocci irregular,
somewhat larger than staphylococci,
and with much less tendency to
form masses. The ends colour
deeply, leaving a clear space in the
middle.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a slightly opaque growth is
formed.
On agar a thin deposit appears
along the needle track, which is
almost as clear as glass.
They occur in the pus of un-
opened abscesses, but not often, as
they were found by Rosenbach only
in three out of thirty-nine cases.
558
Micrococcus rosettaceus (Zim-
mermann).—Cocci ‘7 tol »indiam.,
singly, and in masses.
Colonies circular,
greyish-yellow.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth is very scanty in
the track of the needle, but
spreads over the surface as a grey
rosette.
On agar a smooth layer with den-
tated margin is formed.
On potato the growth is faintly
whitish, or
yellowish.
They occur in water. :
Micrococcus roseus (Hisen-
berg).—Cocci forming pink colonies,
and a rose-coloured growth on the
surface of nutrient agar-agar.
They were found in sputum in a
case of influenza.
Micrococcus salivarius septi-
cus (Biondi).—Oval cocci, diplo-
cocci, in chains and small masses ;
capsulated.
They grow best on acid gelatine,
or in an atmosphere of carbonic
acid.
Colonies are small and circular,
with an opalescent centre and a
transparent margin, with sharply
defined outline. In the interior of
the colonies there is an appearance
of a network. -
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the cocci form a delicate fila-
ment and white dots on the free
surface.
On agar the cultures should be
made direct from the blood. The
growth appears on the surface and
resembles dewdrops.
Broth cultures remain clear.
They are fatal to mice in twenty-
four to seventy-two hours, and to
rabbits in fifteen to thirty days,
producing septicemia. Attenuated
cultures are said to give immunity.
They were found in the saliva of
healthy and diseased persons.
Micrococcus stellatus (Mas-
chek).—Cocci singly.
Colonies stellate.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a branching growth appears in
the track of the needle. The jelly
becomes brownish.
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
On potato the growthis brownish-
yellow and shining.
They occur in water.
Micrococcus tetragenus
(Gaffkey).—Cocci about 1 p in
diam., in tetrads, and surrounded
by a hyaline capsule.
Colonies form in twenty-four to
forty-eight hours as small white
dots, which are finely granular, and
have a vitreous lustre; when they
reach the surface they form thick
raised masses.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the cocci form an irregular
white growth, especially in the
upper part of the track of the
needle.
On agar the colonies occur along
the needle track, and are white,
round and circumscribed.
On potato they form a thick,
slimy, viscous layer.
White mice inoculated with a
minute quantity of a pure-cultiva-
tion die in from two to ten days,
and the groups of the characteristic
tetrads may be found in the capil-
laries throughout the body, especi-
ally in the spleen, lung and kidney.
Double infection can be produced
by inoculating a mouse with a
pure cultivation of Bacillus an-
thracis two or three days after
inoculation with Micrococcus tetra-
genus. On examination after
death, the capillaries of the lungs,
liver and kidney are filled with
both anthrax bacilli and masses of
tetrads (Plate V., Fig. 3).
Micrococcus tetragenus
mobilis ventriculi (Mendoza).—
Cocci in tetrads; capsulated ;
motile.
Colonies circular, whitish and
granular.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they grow on the free surface
only, and give off a peculiar odour.
They were isolated from the
stomach.
Micrococcus tetragenus sub-
flavus (Von Besser).—Cocci singly,
and in tetrads.
They do not grow on gelatine.
Colonies on agar are brown and
irregular in contour.
DESCRIPTION
On the surface of agar the cocci
form a greyish-white band, which
turns brown at the periphery, and
later is all dark or orange-yellow.
On potato the growth is brown.
They occur in nasal mucus.
Micrococcus tetragenus ver-
satilis (Sternberg and Finlay).—
Cocci varying in size from ‘5 to 1°5
p, in tetrads and irregular groups.
Colonies are circular and lemon-
yellow in colour,
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is very scanty develop-
ment along the line of puncture,
and the gelatine is liquefied in the
form of a cup near the surface.
At the bottom of the liquefied
gelatine a viscid, pale-yellow mass
accumulates.
On the surface of agar a thick,
viscid, yellow layer is formed along
the line of inoculation, which gradu-
ally extends over the entire sur-
face. The colour varies from cream-
yellow to lemon-yellow, and the
surface is moist and shining.
On potato there is a similar
growth.
They were isolated from the
skin of patients suffering from
yellow fever, from mosquitoes after
attacking these patients, and from
the air.
Micrococcus urex liquefaciens
(Fliigge).—Cocci spherical, 1-25 to
2 » in diam., singly, or in chains
of three to ten elements, or in
irregular groups.
Colonies appear in two days
as small white points. They have
sharply defined edges and a granular
surface. The gelatine gradually
liquefies, and the edges of the colo-
nies become irregular.
The cocci inoculated in the depth
of gelatine produce a continuous
white line along the track of
the needle. Finally, the whole of
the gelatine liquefies, and appears
as a whitish-turbid fluid with a
thick whitish-yellow deposit at the
bottom.
They were obtained from urine.
Micrococcus versicolor
(Fliigge).—Small cocci, in pairs
and in masses.
OF SPECIES. 559
White colonies develop in twenty-
four hours ; after two days they are
yellowish, with sharp contours of
yellowish-green colour, and finely
granular. The superficial colonies
form flat deposits, 2°6 mm. in size,
increasing to 10 mm. after four or
five days.
On the surface of gelatine the
cocci form a shining layer with a
greenish or bluish shimmer like
mother-of-pearl.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth is composed of
spherical yellowish colonies, and
on the free surface they form an
iridescent film. :
They occur in the air.
Micrococcus violaceus (Schré-
ter).—Cocci or elliptical cells, de-
scribed as uniting into violet-blue
gelatinous spots, which again unite
to form larger patches,
The colonies on gelatine are violet
in colour.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth is scanty in the
track of the needle.
On the surface of gelatine they
form a bluish-violet layer, and the
same on agar and potato.
They were observed on boiled
potatoes exposed to the air, and are
also found in water.
Micrococcus viticulosus (Katz).
—Oval cocci 1 » in width, and 1:2 p
in length, in masses, but without
formation of much gelatinous ma-
terial.
The superficial colonies are quite
different in appearance from the
deep colonies. From the deep
colonies fine hairlike tendrils are
thrown off from a centre, forming
a very delicate and extensive net-
work. The threads are found to
consist of zoogloea masses, irregular
in size, arranged like strings of
beads. The colonies which are ex-
posed to the air form a thin layer
of muddy-white gelatinous sub-
stance, which rapidly spreads, some-
times sending out hairlike processes
into the depth of the gelatine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a delicate feather-like growth
occurs along the track of the needle,
560 DESCRIPTION
and on the free surface they pro-
duce the appearance which has been
described in colonies. This micro-
organism is exceedingly rare. It
was obtained from a contaminated
culture.
Monas Okenii.—Shortcylindrical
cells, 5 » wide, 8 to 15 » long, with
rounded ends. They exhibit lively
movements, each end being provided
with a flagellum twice as long as
the cell itself. They have pale-red
cell-substance, with dark grains.
They occur in stagnant water.
Monas vinosa.—-Round or oval
cells of about 2°5 » in diam., often
united in pairs. Their motion is
slow and tremulous, and the cell-
substance is pale-red with dark
grains interspersed. Flagella have
not been observed.
They were found in water with
decaying vegetable mater.
Monas Warmingii—Cylindrical
cells, rounded at the ends, 15 » long,
5 to 8» broad. They are possessed
of a flagellum at each end, and
exhibit rapid, irregular movements.
The cell-substance is pale-red, inter-
spersed at the ends with dark-red
grains.
Myconostoc gregarium (Cohn).
—The threads are very thin, colour-
less, unarticulated, but fall apart
into short cylindrical links when
dried.
They form gelatinous masses,
10 to 17 » in diam., singly or
heaped into slimy drops on water
in which algze are decomposing. ©
Nitromonas of Winogradsky.—
Very short rods, ‘9 to 1 » in width,
1:1 to 1:8 » in length. Singly, in
masses, and in very short chains.
They can be cultivated in silica-
jelly.
They are active agents of nitrifi-_
cation.
They were obtained from the soil.
Pediococcus acidi lactici
(Lindner).—Cocci °6 to 1» in diam.,
singly, in pairs, and tetrads.
Coionies colourless.
On the surface of agar the cocci
form a colourless layer.
On potato the growth is almost
invisible.
OF SPECIES.
The cocci produce lactic acid in
solutions containing sugar.
They occur in hay infusion and
malt.
Pediococcus cerevisie (Balcke).
—Cocci singly, in pairs, and tetrads.
Colonies at first colourless, later
yellowish-brown.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a -greyish-white filament
occurs in the track of the needle,
and a white layer on the free
surface.
On agar the growth is transparent
and iridescent, and on potato almost
invisible.
They were isolated from the air
of a brewery.
Pneumobacillus liquefaciens
bovis (p. 242). :
Proteus capsulatus septicus
(Banti).—Rods isolated from a case
of septiceemia, and identical with
Proteus hominis capsulatus.
Proteus hominis capsulatus
(p. 224).
Proteus in gangrene of the
lung (Babés).—Rods.°8 to 15 p
thick, irregular in form, and fila-
ments with irregular enlargements.
Colonies whitish and transparent,
with ramifications extending over
the gelatine.
In the depth of gelatine a growth
occurs along the track of the
needle, and a ramifying growth on
the free surface.
On agar the growth is slightly
yellowish. : ;
On potato the growth is brownish.
They are extremely pathogenic
in mice and guinea-pigs.
They were isolated from a case
of gangrene of the lung.
Proteus microsepticus (Kar-
linski).—Cocci, rods and filaments
in morphology, and cultures re-
sembling Proteus vulgaris.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction occurs in the
track of the needle, forming a
funnel with cloudy contents, and
in a few days the whole of the
gelatine is liquid.
They produce a general infection
in mice, and death in twenty-four
hours, and occasionally death in
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES. 561
rabbits, and local suppuration in | concentric circles, which in time
guinea-pigs and white rats. liquefies the medium. Similar
They were isolated from pus in | movements are observed in capsule-
a fatal case of puerperal pyzemia. cultivations as in Proteus vulgaris.
They were isolated from
putrid meat infusion.
Proteus septicus
(Babés).—Rods “4 p in
width, and filamentous
forms.
Colonies rapidly liquefy
the gelatine.
Inoculated in the depth
of gelatine the bacilli form
a turbid funnel, or com-
pletely liquefy the gelatine
in twenty-four hours.
On agar the growth is
reticulated.
On potato brownish-
white.
Cultures have an un-
pleasant odour.
They are pathogenic in
mice. :
They were isolated from
the organs in a case of
human septicemia. :
Proteus sulfureus (Lin-
. denborn).—Rods ‘8 » in
Fic. 221.—Prorevs Mrrasinis: SwarMine width, varying in length,
ISLANDS ON THE SURFACE OF GELATINE, x 285 20d long filaments. _
(Hauser). They correspend in mor-
phology and cultures with
Proteus mirabilis—Cocci -4 » ' Proteus vulgaris.
to 9 ». They occur singly and in They produce sulphuretted hy-
zoogloea, and sometimes in tetrads, drogen in cultures.
pairs, chains, or as short rods in They were isolated from water.
twos resembling Bacterium termo— Proteus vulgaris (Hauser).—
os
’ an
2 Ye
2. oo aa
: “ Fy ff
aes Bf OBER
eo ) byXxe OP No ial
FY xs De Yu Of soe
= Se
a2
Fic. 222.—Prorevs Mrrasitis: InvoLution Forms, x 524 (Hauser).
in fact, in all conceivable transition ; Rods varying in size ; some mea-
forms. sure 4 » in length, and are almost
Cultivated on nutrient gelatine | as broad as long, and others vary
they form a thick whitish layer in | from -94 to 1:25 » long and ‘42 to
36
562 DESCRIPTION
63 pw wide.
motile.
Cultivated on nutrient gelatine
they convert it into a turbid, grey-
isH-white liquid. If cultivated in
a capsule containing 5 per cent. of
nutrient gelatine, a few hours after
inoculation the most characteristic
movements of the individual bacilli
They are actively
-
Gs
NINOS
SSS
=e
FROM
Surrace or Nutrient GELATINE, x
(HAUSER).
Fic. 223.—Protsus VvLGAaRIS,
are observed on the surface of the
nutrient gelatine, although at this
early stage no superficial liquefac-
tion can be detected. Probably the
movements depend upon the exist-
ence of a thin liquid layer, as they
are not observed if the nutrient
medium contains 10 per cent. of
gelatine.
They were isolated from putrid
meat infusion.
Proteus Zenkeri.—Cocci -4 p, in
twos like Bacterium termo, and
short rods 1°65 » long.
Cultivated on nutrient gelatine
no liquefaction results, but a thick
whitish-grey layer is formed. The
OF SPECIES.
bacilli are motile, and the same
phenomena are observed on the
solid medium as in Proteus vulgaris.
In cover-glass impressions most
varied groupings of the bacilli are
seen, and also developmental and
involution-forms.
They were isolated from putrid
meat infusion.
Pseudo-diphtheritic bacil-
lus (p. 335).
Pseudo-diplococcus pneu-
moniz (Bonome).—Oval cocci
in pairs and short chains ; cap-
sulated.
Inoculated in the depth of
gelatine small colonies develop
in the track of the needle in
twenty-four hours.
On agar there is a scanty,.
moist growth.
On potato an almost in-
visible film.
In broth the cocci grow
rapidly, and the cultures give
off a peculiar odour.
They produce septicemia in
mice, guinea-pigs and rabbits.
This micro-organism is
probably a variety of the
pneumococcus.
They were isolated from a
fatal case of cerebro-spinal
meningitis.
Rhabdomonas _ rosea, —
Spindle-form rods, 3°8 to 5 p
broad, 20 to 30 » long. They
exhibit slow, trembling move-
ments, having at each end of
the cell a flagellum. The
cell-substance is very pale, with
dark grains interspersed.
They occur in brackish water.
Sarcina alba—Small cocci.
They form small white colonies on
nutrient gelatine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they grow slightly along the
needle track, but are heaped up on
the surface without liquefying the
gelatine.
They are present in the air.
Sarcina aurantiaca.—Cocci
singly, in pairs, in tetrads, and in
packets.
Colonies orange-yellow.
Inoculated in the
THE
285
depth of
DESCRIPTION
gelatine they slowly liquefy it along
the whole needle track, and form
on the surface an orange-yellow
growth. On potatoes they slowly
develop the same pigment.
Sarcina candida (Reinke).—
Cocci 1°5 to 1:7 » in diam., singly,
in‘ pairs, and in tetrads.
Colonies are circular and shining,
white, and later yellowish. |
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction quickly takes place
along the track of the needle.
On the surface of agar a white,
moist layer develops.
They were found in the air of
breweries.
Sarcina flava (De Bary).—Small
cocci in packets.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce liquefaction.
On agar they form a yellow
layer.
On potato the growth is limited
and yellow. ;
They were isolated from beer.
Sarcina hyalina (Kiitzing).—
Cocci round, 2°5 » in diam., almost
colourless. United in families of
4 to 24 cells, reaching 15 p in diam.
They occur in marshes.
Sarcina intestinalis (Zopf).—
Cocci in groups of four or eight.
Very regular in form; never in
the large packets which occur in
Sarcina ventriculi.
They are found in the intestinal
canal, especially the. cecum, of
poultry, particularly fowls and:
turkeys.
Sarcina litoralis (Ocersted).—
Cocci 1:2 to 2 » in diam., bound
together in 4 to 8 families, which,
in their turn, may unite and in-
clude as many as 64 tetrads.
Plasma colourless; in each cell
1 to 4 sulphur granules.
They were found in sea water
containing putrefying matter.
Sarcina lutea (Schréter)—
Cocci singly, in pairs, tetrads and
packets. A single individual in a
tetrad may be divided into two, or
into four, so that a tetrad within a
tetrad results. :
Colonies are round, _ slightly
granular in appearance, and yellow.
OF SPECIES. 563
Inoculated in the depth of
gelatine they grow rapidly ; the
gelatine becomes liquefied, and the
yellow growth sinks to the bottom
-of the tube.
meets
aa
Bese, oe
abla, “Ss? ob
See? eee
agey oes
Fic. 224.—Sarcina x 600 (Fiticce.
Cultivated in agar. they form a.
colourless growth along the track
of the needle, and a bright canary-
-yellow layer upon the surface.
On potato they form a yellow
layer.
They are present in air.
Sarcina mobilis (Maurea).—
Cocci 1:5 w in diam., in pairs, and
in tetrads. They are motile.
Colonies, at first white, become
brick-red.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, there. is, after several days, a
slight growth along the track of
the needle, and a patch of growth
on the free surface which gradually
turns red. In .about two weeks
liquefaction produces a funnel-
shaped appearance ; later the lique-
faction extends to the sides of the
test-tube.
In broth turbidity is produced,
and a yellowish-red deposit.
On agar the growth, at first white,
changes to a brick-red colour.
There is no growth on potato,
and milk is not coagulated.
They were isolated from ascitic
fluid,
Sarcina pulmonum (Hauser).—
Cocci from 1 to 15 pw in diam., in
tetrads and packets.
Colonies white and small.
are coarsely granular.
Tnoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the growth is scanty in the
track of the needle, but on the free
surface there is a circular, well-
defined, translucent patch, which
They
564
later becomes greyish-brown, shin-
ing, wrinkled and irregular.
On potato the growth is very
slight and limited. .
They cause ammoniacal decom-
position of urine.
They were isolated from phthisi-
cal sputum.
Sarcina Reitenbachii (Caspary).
—Cocci about 1:5 to 2°5 » in diam.,
at the time of division lengthened
to 4 pw. Mostly united together
from 4 to 8 in number ; occasion-
ally 16 or more. Colourless cell-
wall, lined with rose-red layer of
plasma.
They were found on rotting
water-plants. :
Sarcina rosea (Schréter).—
Large cocci, in packets.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, liquefaction quickly takes
place, and cultures after a time
have a reddish colour.
On agar the growth is slow and
limited.
On potato the growth is abundant
and of a bright-red colour.
In broth they produce turbidity,
and a red deposit.
They occur in the air.
Sarcinaurine (Welcker).—Very
‘small cocci, 1:2 » in diam., united
in families of 8 to 64. They were
observed in urine.
Sarcina ventriculi (Goodsir).—
Cocci reaching 4 » in diam., united
in groups of four, or multiples of
four, producing cubes or packets ,
with rounded-off corners. Contents
of the cells are greenish or yellow-
ish-red.
Colonies are round and yellowish.
A yellowish growth forms on the
surface of oblique gelatine without
liquefaction.
On potato they form a yellow
growth, and on serum also.
They grow well in hay-infusion,
forming brownish scales and a simi-
larly-coloured deposit.
They occur in the stomach of man
and animals in health and disease,
and were first detected in vomit.
Spherotilus natans.—Cells 4 to
9 » long, and 3 p thick, united in
a gelatinous sheath to form threads.
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
The cells comprise rods and cocci-
forms ; the cocci are set free, and
develop into rods, which again form
threads. In the last a false branch-
ing has been observed. The plasma
of the cells break up into minute,
strongly-refractive portions, which
develop into round spores, at first
of a red and afterwards a brown
colour.
They occur in stagnant and flow-
ing water contaminated with or-
ganic' matter, and form floating
flakes of a white, yellow, rust-red,
or yellow-brown colour.
Spirillum amyliferum (Van
Tieghem).—Filaments 6 » in length
and 1:4 to 1:5 » in width; with
from 2 to 4 screw curves.
They act asa strong ferment in
the absence of air.
They occur in water.
Spirillum anserum (Sakharoff).
—Spirilla resembling the Spiro-
cheta Obermeieri. Extremely
motile.
They have not been cultivated
artificially.
Blood from diseased geese, con-
taining the spirilla, produces the
disease when inoculated in healthy
birds. The geese suffer from
diarrhoea, and die in about a week.
They were found in the blood of
geese suffering from an epidemic
form of septicemia prevailing at
some of the stations on the Trans-
caucasian Railway. ;
Spirillum attenuatum (Warm-
ing).—Threads much attenuated at
the ends, which consist usually of
three spirals. The middle spiral is
about 11 » high and 6 p» in diam.,
and the end ones 10 » high and 2 »
in diam. :
They are found in brackish water.
Spirillum aureum (Weibel).—
Curved rods with blunt ends, spi-
rilla and spirilliform filaments, and
involution forms. |
Colonies are circular and golden-
yellow.
‘Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine, a finely granular growth forms
in the track of the needle, and a
yellow-ochre prominent mass on
the free surface.
DESCRIPTION
On agar a greyish growth ex-
tends over the surface, and later
prominent yellowish heaps make
their appearance.
On potato there is an abundant
growth of a golden-yellow colour.
They were found in sewage
mud.
Spirillum cholere Asiatice
(p. 361).
Spirillum choleroides (Buj wid).
—Curved rods very similar mor-
phologically and in cultures to
Koch’s comma-bacilli.
They were isolated from river
water. ,
Spirillum choleroides (Orlow-
ski).—Curved rods very similar to
Koch’s comma-bacilli.
They were found in well water.
Spirillum concentricum
(Kitasato).—Short spirilla, and -
spirilliform filaments. x
Colonies are circular, and com-
posed of concentric rings alternately
opaque and transparent.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is only a little growth
in the track of the needle, and a
cloudy growth on the surface
extending into the jelly.
On agar the growth is extremely
adherent. :
In broth they produce turbidity,
which disappears after a time ; and
there is a slimy deposit at the
bottom of the tube.
They were found in putrefying
blood.
Spirillum dentium (Miller).—
Spirals 10 to 20 » in length, pointed
at the ends. :
They have not been cultivated.
They occur in the deposit on the
teeth, and in company with Lepto-
thrix buccalis in carious teeth.
Spirillum flavescens (Weibel).
—Commas thicker than those found
in Asiatic cholera, spirilla, and
spirilliform filaments.
Colonies yellowish.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a finely granular filament
develops in the track of the needle,
and on the free surface a pale-
yellow patch.
On agar the growth, at first
OF SPECIES. 565
greyish-white, becomes yellow, and
forms a thick layer.
On potato the growth is abun-
dant, and similar in colour.
They were found in
mud. |
Spirillum flavum (Weibel).—
Spirilla morphologically identical
with spirillum aureum.
Colonies on gelatine are pale-
yellow, and later the colour is more
intense.
On agar and potato they forma
layer the colour of yellow-ochre.
They were isolated from sewage
mud.
Spirillum leucomelaneum
(Koch).—Dark and glass-like spaces
alternate in the spirillum, resulting
from a regular arrangement of the
dark granular contents. A rare
form observed in water covering
rotting alge.
Spirillum lingue (Weibel).—
Curved rods, spirilla, and spirilli-
form filaments, and involution
forms,
Colonies are composed of inter-
lacing filaments, and offshoots
extend into the surrounding gela-
tine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a delicate growth occurs in the
needle track.
On agar the growth is whitish
and granular.
In broth a cloudiness is produced,
as well as a flocculent deposit.
They are especially distinguished
from other spirilla described by
Weibel by their staining by Gram’s
method. ‘
They were isolated from the
tongue.
Spirillum marinum (Russell).
—Curved.rods, and spiral filaments.
Colonies circular, granular and
striated ; later, flocculent masses
float in liquefied areas.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction occurs in the
track of the needle, and a mem-
sewage
. brane forms on the surface of the
cloudy liquid.
On agar the growth is yellowish
and abundant. —
On potato a thick, waxy mass
566
develops, and extends over the
surface,
Broth made with sea-water be-
comes rapidly turbid.
They were obtained from sea-
water.
Spirillum Metchnikovi (p. 378).
Spirillum nasale (Weibel).—
‘Large curved rods and spirilliform
filaments. Non-motile.
Colonies circular, finely granular,
and brownish-yellow.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a delicate growth develops in
the track of the needle.
On the surface of agar they form
a whitish slimy film.
They occur in nasal mucus.
Spirillum Obermeieri (p. 258).
Spirillum of Finkler and
Prior (p. 258).
Spirillum of Gunther (Vibrio
aquatilis)—Curved rods, very simi-
lar to Koch’s comma-bacilli, but
there is no growth on potato.
They occur in water.
Spirillum of Miller.—Curved
rods, singly, in pairs, and spiral
filaments.
They liquefy gelatine.
They were isolated from carious
teeth.
Spirillum of Neisser (Vibrio
berolinensis).—Similar to Koch’s
comma-bacillus, but smaller.
Colonies colourless, granular and
transparent, liquefying the gelatine
much more slowly than Koch’s
comma-bacillus.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine they produce a growth similar
to that of Koch’s comma-bacilli,
but much more slowly in milk.
Tn broth they grow abundantly.
They were found in water.
Spirillum of Rénon.—Curved
rods longer and broader than the
comma-bacilli of Koch.
Colonies yellowish, with dark
nucleus.
In gelatine the cultures resemble
those of Koch’s comma-bacillus.
On agar the growth is white and
abundant.
‘They cause turbidity in broth,
They were isolated from impure
water from a well.
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES,
Spirillum of Smith (vide
Spirillum suis).
Spirillum of Weibel.—Curved
‘| rods resembling Koch’s comma-
bacilli, morphologically, and in
cultures on jelly. The gelatine is
more quickly liquefied.
There is no growth on potato.
They occur in well water.
Spirillum plicatile (Ehrenberg).
—Thin threads 2°25 y in breadth,
110 to 125 » long, occurring also in
spirulinar forms. The threads have
primary and secondary windings ;
the former are in each example of
equal size, but the latter are often
Fie 225.—SprrocHata PLicaTILe.
irregular. Their ends are cut off
bluntly, and they exhibit rapid
movement.
They occur abundantly in marsh-
water in summer, and can be ob-
tained by allowing alge to decom-
pose in water. On cultivation the
threads break up into long rods,
short rods, and, finally, cocci. This
change is rendered visible by making
cover-glass preparations, and stain-
ing with aniline dyes.
Spirillum rosaceum (Klein).—
Resembles Spirillum undula, but is
reddish in colour ; the colouring-
matter is insoluble in water, alcohol
or chloroform.
Spirillum Rosenbergii.—
Threads with 1 to 1$ windings, 4
\
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
to 12 p long, 1:5 to 2°6 p thick.
They are colourless, but the con-
tents include strongly refractive
sulphur granules. Also spirals 6 to
75 w in height, which are actively
motile.
They were found in brackish
water.
Spirillum rubrum (Esmarck).
—Curved rods, spirilla and spiro-
-chetz. They are actively motile.
The growth on artificial media is
extremely slow.
Inoculated in the depth of gela- |
tine they grow along the track of
the needle, forming a filament of a
wine-red colour, without causing
liquefaction ; and on the free sur-
face the growth is colourless. ;
In broth long spirillar threads
are formed.
They were isolated from the
putrid tissues of a mouse.
Spirillum rufum (Perty).—
Filaments from 8 to 16 p» in length,
with 13 to 4 screw curves; non-
segmented ; chiefly motile ; tinged
with red.
They form rose or dark red spots
on the sides of wells.
Spirillum sanguineum (Cohn).
—Threads 3 » and more in thick-
ness, with 2 to 24 spirals, each 9 to
12 » high. The ends are provided
with flagella. Their colour is due
to the presence of reddish granules
contained in the cells.
They were observed in brackish
water containing putrefying sub-
stances. (Vide Beggiatoa roseo-
persicina. ) .
Spirillum — saprophiles.—(1.)
Curved rods with pointed ends, ‘6 p
in width, 3 » in length; spirilla,
spirilliform filaments, and involu-
tion forms.
, Colonies yellowish or’ greenish-
yellow.
' Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a white growth forms in the
track of the needle, later becoming
yellowish ; and on the free surface
there is a white growth, and
beyond this a transparent film
spreads over the jelly.
On agar the growthis creamy,
and the jelly clouded beneath it.
567
On potato the growth is slimy
and yellowish or dark-brown in
colour.
They were obtained from sewage -
Fic. 226.—ComMa-BacILLI IN WATER -
’ CONTAMINATED wiTH SEWAGE.
mud and decomposing hay infu-
sion.
(IL.) Curved rods about 2 » in
length, with blunt ends and in pairs.
Extremely motile.
Colonies circular and yellowish-
brown. :
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a white growth develops in
the track of. the needle, and later
becomes yellowish-red ; on the free
surface a white patch forms, sur-
rounded by a transparent film.
In the depth of agar there is no
growth in the track of the needle,
but a yellowish-white patch on
the free surface adherent to the
jelly.
On potato the growth is also
adherent, and in appearance shining
and brownish-green.
They were isolated from decom-
posing hay infusion.
(TIL) Curved rods, spirilla, and
spirilliform filaments, and involu-
tion forms.
Colonies are circular, granular,
and with irregular margin ; yellow
in the centre, and white at the
periphery.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a white growth develops in
the track of the needle, and on the
surface, without producing lique-
faction.
On the surface of agar the growth
is white.
On potato the growth is distinctly
brown,
568 DESCRIPTION
They were isolated from sewage
mud.
Spirillum serpens (Miiller).—
Long spirilliform filaments ; often
collected in masses.
They were observed in vegetable
infusions and stagnant water.
Spirillum sputigenum (Lewis).
—Curved rods, very similar to the
comma-bacilli of Koch ; but many
observers having failed in repeated
Savy
‘ Hy 1)
RGN e ©
oy
sie
Fic. 227.—ComMa-BacILLI or THE
Movrs, x 700 (Van ERMENGEM).
attempts to cultivate them, main-
tain that they are biologically dis-
tinct from those associated with
Asiatic cholera. Klein asserts that
they can be cultivated in an acid
gelatine, and that they are iden-
tical with Koch’s comma-bacilli in
their mode of growth. They
occur with other bacteria in saliva
and in scrapings from carious
teeth.
Spirillum suis (Smith).—Com-
mas and spirilla.
Colonies in gelatine are circular,
granular and brownish, and later
appear to be composed of concen-
tric rings. The gelatine is not
liquefied.
Broth with 1 per cent. of peptone
becomes in a few days clouded.
On potato they develop a thin
yellowish layer.
The commas are said to be slightly
larger than those obtained from
Asiatic cholera, and are not
pathogenic. !
They were obtained from the
large intestine in swine.
Spirillum tenue.—Very thin
threads, with at least 13, usually
2to 5 spirals. Height of a single
screw is 2 to 3 p, and the length of
spiral therefore 4 to 15 p. They
are very swiftly motile.
OF SPECIES.
They often occur in dense felted
swarms in vegetable infusions.
Spirillum tyrogenum (Deneke).
—Curved rods, slightly smaller
than Koch’s comma-bacilli, with
a great tendency to form long
spirillar threads (Fig. 228).
4 ‘
sS - Ve Pe)
wo aye wrt
~%) Sat Ors
See eS
Le, Us
be a a
Fic. 228.—Drneke’s Comma-BacILur
FROM CHEESE, xX 700 (FLUGGE).
Colonies on _plate-cultivations
are sharply defined and of a
greenish-brown colour. After a
time they liquefy the gelatine, but
the liquefaction is much more
marked than in colonies of Koch's
commas of the same age, though
not so rapid as in the case of the
commas of cholera nostras.
Inoculated in the depth of nu-
trient gelatine a turbid liquefaction
occurs along the needle track, and
on the surface of nutrient agar-agar
a yellowish-white layer develops.
Inoculation of potatoes gives no.
result.
Administration of the bacilli by
the mouth, in the manner employed
for testing the pathogenic effect of
Koch’s bacilli, produced a fatal
result in a few cases ; on the other
hand, injection into the duodenum
failed entirely. The pathogenic
properties may be therefore con-
sidered as not yet established.
They were isolated from old
cheese.
Spirillum undula.—Threads
11 to 144 thick, 9 to 12 » long ;
spirals 4°5 » high ; each thread has
13 to 3 spirals. They are actively
motile, and possess a flagellum at
each end.
They occur in various infusions.
Spirillum volutans (Ehrenberg).
—Tohreads 1°5 to 2 » thick, 25 to
30 » long, tapering towards their
Fd
DESCRIPTION
extremities, which are rounded off.
They possess dark granular con-
tents. Each thread has 23 to 33
windings or spirals, whose height is
9 to 13 p. They have a flagellum
at each end, and are sometimes
motile, sometimes not.
They are found in the water of
marshes and in various infusions.
Spiromonas Cohnii—Colourless
cells, consisting of 13 spirals, with
both ends acutely pointed and pro-
vided with a flagellum. Breadth
of the cells, 1:2 to 4 p. ,
They occur in water containing
decomposing matter.
Spiromonas volubilis (Perty).
—Colourless, transparent cells, 15
to 18 » long. Rapidly motile, and
revolving round a longitudinal
axis.
They occur in marsh-water and
putrefying infusions.
Staphylococens pyogenes albus
Staphylococcus pyogenes
aureus (p. 176).
Staphylococcus pyogenes cit-
reus (p. 178).
Staphylococcus _pyosepticus
(Heucourt and Richet).—Cocci
identical with Staphylococcus pyo-
genes aureus.
Subcutaneous injection causes in
rabbits intense oedema, and death
in twenty-four hours.
They were isolated from pus
from an abscess in a dog.
Stanhy lncucoue salivarius pyo-
genes (Biondi).—Cocci *3 to “D p
in diam., singly and in masses.
Colonies white and opalescent,
producing liquefaction.
Inoculated in the depth of gela- |
tine the growth appears in the
track of the needle, and is followed
by liquefaction.
On agar the growth is orange-
yellow.
The cocci produce local suppura-
tion when inoculated in animals.
They were isolated from an
abscess in a guinea-pig following
subcutaneous injection of saliva.
This coccus is probably identical
with Staphylococcus pyogenes
aureus.
OF SPECIES. 569
Staphylococcus viridis flaves-
ceus (Guttmann).—Cocci singly, in
pairs and masses ; morphologically
agreeing with Staphylococcus pyo-
genes aureus.
Colonies are greenish-yellow.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a filament forms composed of
greyish colonies. :
On agar the growth is greenish-
yellow.
They grow well on potato.
They were isolated from the
vesicles of chicken-pox.
Streptococcus acidi lactici
(Grotenfeld).—Oval cocci ‘5 to 1 p
long, ‘3 to ‘6 » in width, and long
chains. They are partially anaerobic.
Colonies are circular and white.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a growth occurs only in the
track of the needle.
Milk is coagulated.
They were isolated from coagu-
lated milk.
Streptococcus albus (Tils).—
Cocci forming motile chains.
Colonies are flat and circular,
with white periphery and dark
nucleus, rapidly liquefying.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is rapid liquefaction in
the: track of the needle, and a
white deposit.
On potato they form a white
slimy layer.
They were found in water.
Strep ypeocuahombycieie!
Streptococcus brevis (lingels-
heim).—Cocci singly, in pairs
and chains, of eight to ten
elements.
Colonies on gelatine are circular
and very minute.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is a funnel-shaped cavity
near the surface, and below this,
in the track of the needle, small
isolated colonies.
On agar a yellowish-grey film
develops along the line of inocula-
tion.
On potato there is a copious white
growth in forty-eight hours.
Broth is made turbid.
They were isolated from healthy
saliva.
570 DESCRIPTION
Streptococcus cadaveris (Stern-
berg).—The description corresponds
with that of Streptococcus pyo-
genes.
"(Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the colonies are said to be
larger and more opaque.
On the surface of agar they form
a thin translucent layer.
_ In broth little flocculi develop,
composed of chains in which in
some cases the elements varied
considerably in size.
They were obtained from the
liver in a fatal case of yellow fever.
Streptococcus coli gracilis
(Escherich).—Cocci from ‘2 to ‘4 p
in diam., forming chains composed
of from six to twenty elements.
Some elements in a chain are irre-
gular in form, and show transverse
» fission.
The colonies are spherical and
sink down in the liquefied gela-
tine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction occurs in the track
of the needle on the second day,
and a white deposit forms at the
bottom of the liquid. In about a
week the gelatine is completely
liquefied.
On agar there is a very slight
growth.
On __blood-serum
develop.
On potato the growth is com-
posed of small white prominent
colonies.
Milk is coagulated.
They were found in the evacua-
tions of healthy infants.
Streptococcus conglomeratus
(Kurth).—Cocci and chains, identi-
cal with Streptococcus pyogenes.
They form an adherent film at
the bottom of the tube, which is
not broken up by agitation. This
is observed in other varieties of
Streptococcus pyogenes, and is not
sufficient to distinguish it.
They are pathogenic in mice.
They were isolated from cases of
scarlet fever.
Streptococcus flavus desidens
(Fligge)—Cocci, diplococci, and
short chains. They form yellowish-
small scales
OF SPECIES,
white colonies, which gradually
sink down in the gelatine.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine the cocci form china-white,
confluent masses in the track of
the needle, and on the surface a
yellowish-brown slimy layer,
They occur in air and in water,
and were originally isolated from
contaminated cultures.
Streptococcus giganteus
urethre (Lustgarten).—Cocci ‘8
to 1 » in diam., forming chains
composed of several hundred
elements. In description they
correspond with Streptococcus
pyogenes.
They do not grow at the tem-
perature of the room.
Colonies on agar are transparent
and iridescent.
They were isolated from the
healthy urethra.
Streptococcus Havaniensis
(Sternberg).—Cocci ‘6 to ‘9 w» in
diam., forming long chains, com-
posed of cocci, in pairs, and oval
elements showing transverse divi-
sion. ; :
This streptococcus is: probably
a variety of Streptococcus pyo-
genes.
They were found in the acid
vomit of a yellow-fever patient.
Streptococcus in contagious
mammitis in cows (Nocard and
Mollereau).—Cocci spherical or
oval, united in long chains.
Colonies are spherical, granular,
pale-yellow, or brownish by trans-
mitted light.
The cocci inoculated in the depth
of gelatine produce a granular
filament in the track of the
needle.
On the surface of nutrient gela-
tine minute spherical colonies are
formed, which are bluish by re-
flected light.
Injected into the mammary gland
| of cows and goats they produce
mastitis.
They were isolated from the milk
of cows suffering from contagious
mammitis,
From the description this strepto-
coccus appears to be closely related
DESCRIPTION
to, if not identical with, Strepto-
coccus pyogenes bovis(Crookshank).
Streptococcus in progressive
tissue necrosis in mice—Koch
produced a disease in mice by sub-
cutaneous injection of putrid blood.
In tissue sections a chain coccus
was found which was similar to
Streptococcus pyogenes.
Fic. 229,—StTrREePtococcts PrRo-
IN
GRESSIVE TissvuE Necrosis 1n MIcs.
a, Necrotic cartilage cells, and *(b)
chains in masses; c, isolated chains.
(Koch. )
Streptococcus in Strangles
(Schutz).—Cocci forming long
chains, which, it is said, do not grow
on nutrient gelatine or agar, but
form a transparent iridescent cul-
ture on blood serum. Cultures in
broth produced the disease in horses
and mice. Rabbits, guinea-pigs,
and pigeons are not affected.
Strangles is a disease of the horse,
associated with suppuration of the
glands of the head and neck, prin-
cipally in the sub-maxillary, sub-
parotideal, and retro-pharyngeal
regions. Schutz found that the pus
contains streptococci and produces
a fatal disease in mice.
Streptococcus liquefaciens
(Sternberg).—Spherical and oval
~
OF SPECIES. 571
cocci, 4 to °6 w in diam., singly, in
pairs and short chains. ;
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine liquefaction occurs rapidly in
the track of the needle, and in a
week the gelatine is completely
liquefied, slightly opalescent, and a
scanty deposit forms at the bottom
of the tube. ;
In the depth of agar a filament
is formed composed of closely-
crowded colonies.
On potato a thin and limited
dry white layer is formed along the
line of inoculation in four to five
days. : ;
They are non-pathogenic.
They were isolated from the liver
and intestines of fatal cases of
yellow fever.
Streptococcus mirabilis (Ros-
coe and Lunt).—Cocci 4 » in diam.,
singly, and in long chains.
The growth on nutrient media is
very scanty.
In broth the growth is composed
of a mass of delicate filaments
which collect at the bottom of the
liquid.
They were isolated from sewage.
Streptococcus of Bonome.—
Cocci forming chains. They corre-
spond in description with Strepto-
coccus pyogenes, but, it is said,
they do not grow in gelatine or
on blood-serum, and they are said’
to be distinguished by the characters
of the colonies on agar plates.
They are pathogenic.
Inoculated in rabbits and white
mice they produce symptoms
similar to those produced by in-
oculations of the pneumococcus.
Sub-cultures rapidly lose their
virulence.
They were isolated from cases
of cerebro-spinal meningitis.
Streptococcus of Manneberg —
Cocci ‘9 » in diam., singly, in pairs,
and in chains.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a white filament forms along
the track of the needle composed
of minute colonies. In about a
month the filament is replaced by
_ a funnel of semi-liquefied gelatine.
On the surface of agar the
572 DESCRIPTION
growth resembles Streptococcus
pyogenes.
On potato they form a slimy
layer.
Milk is rapidly coagulated.
They are pyogenic in dogs and
rabbits. Injected into the veins
they produce inflammation of the
kidneys.
They were isolated from the
urine in a case of Bright’s disease.
Streptococcus perniciosus
sittacorum (Parrot disease).—
occi, singly, in chains, and in
zoogleea, have been described in
connection with a disease of the
grey parrot (Psittacus erithacus).
This disease is fatal to about 80 per
cent. of these parrots imported to
Europe. They suffer from diarrhoea
and general weakness ; their feathers
are ruffed; their wings hang
loosely, and their eyelids close ;
convulsions set in, and death fol-
lows. At the autopsy greyish
nodules are found in the lungs, liver,
spleen and kidney. In and around
the capillaries of these nodules, and
in the blood of the heart, the cocci
are found in great numbers in
zoogloea, and more rarely in chains.
Inflammatory change in the sur-
rounding tissue is absent.
Streptococcus pyogenes (p. 178).
Streptococcus radiatus
(Fliigge).—Cocci less than 1 p» in
diam., singly, in small masses, and
sometimes in short chains.
Colonies appear in twenty-four
hours. They are white, with a
yellowish-green sheen; later they
liquefy the gelatine and develop a
circlet of rays.
Inoculated in gelatine, isolated
centres form along the track of the
needle which throw out horizontal
rays. At the same time a funnel-
shaped area of liquefaction forms
very slowly in the upper part.
On potato the growth is yel-
lowish-brown.
They occur in air and in water.
Streptococcus septicus (Fliigge).
—Cocci in chains, indistinguishable
microscopically from’ Streptococcus
pyogenes. ;
Colonies on gelatine grow more
OF SPECIES,
slowly than those of most strepto-
cocci.
They are pathogenic, Mice die
in forty-eight to seventy-two hours
after subcutaneous inoculation of
a minute quantity of a cultivation.
During the last twenty-four hours
there is a distinct motor and sensory
paralysis of the hind legs. In
rabbits inoculation of the ear pro-
duces local redness, then a general
disease, and death in two or three
days.
They were found by Nicolaier,and
independently by Guarneri, in earth.
Streptococcus septicus lique-
faciens (Babés).—Cocci °3 to “4 p,
in pairs, in short chains.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine a granular filament forms in
twenty-four hours along the track
of the needle, followed by lique-
faction of the gelatine forming a
funnel in which the gelatine is
clouded ; flat, whitish deposits
form on the side of the funnel.
On the surface of agar minute
shining, transparent colonies are
formed.
On blood-serum the growth is
almost invisible.
They are pathogenic. Subcu-
taneous injection in mice and
rabbits produces local inflammation
and cedema, followed by death in
about a week. :
They were found in the blood
and organs of a child which had
died of septicemia complicating
scarlet fever.
Streptococcus | vermiformis
(Tils).—Cocci forming motile
chains.
Colonies are yellowish-white, the
central portion finely granular,
the periphery radiated.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine there is rapid liquefaction,
and a yellowish deposit at the
bottom of the liquid.
On potato the culture forms a
dirty-yellow layer.
They were found in water.
Streptothrix actinomycotica
(p. 431).
Streptothrix alba (Gasparini).
—A variety of Actinomyces bovis.
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
Streptothrix asteroides
Oospora asteroides, Sauvageau
and Radais ; Cladothrix asteroides,
Eppinger). — Branching filaments
which form on the surface of
grape-sugar-agar a whitish growth,
which is later of a brownish-yellow
colour.
Broth remains clear, and small
pellicles float on the surface re-
sembling drops of stearin.
On potato they form snow-white
points, which turn brick-red in
colour, and are later covered with
a delicate white efflorescence.
The streptothrix is pathogenic -
in rabbits and guinea-pigs.
It was isolated from pus..
, Streptothrix aurantiaca
(Oospora aurantiaca, Sauvageau and
Radais, and Doria).—Similar to
Streptothrix asteroides.
Streptothrix carnea (Doria ;
Oospora carnea, Sauvageau and
Radais).—Similar to Streptothrix
asteroides, but the cultures on
gelatine are pink.
They are not pathogenic.
Streptothrix chromogenes
(Gasparini; Oospora chromogenes,
Lehmann and Neumann).—Culti-
‘vated on the surface of gelatine the
filaments produce a chalky growth,
and the jelly is coloured brown, and
is slowly liquefied.
, On potato the growth is yellowish
or brown, and the potato itself is
coloured dark brown or black.
The streptothrix has been isolated
from air and water and the con-
tents of the stomach.
Streptothrix farcinica (Bacille
du farcin de beuf, Nocard ; Oospora
facinica, Sauvageau and Radais).
Inoculated on the surface of
gelatine there isin about two weeks
a very scanty granular growth.
In broth greyish pellicles develop
with a dusty surface. They are
pathogenic in cattle, guinea-pigs,
and sheep.
They were isolated from the
disease known as farcin de beuf.
Streptothrix Forsteri (Cohn).
—Cocvi rods, and leptothrix threads.
The threads are twisted in irregular
spirals, and branch sparingly and
’
573
irregularly. Screw-forms are pro-
duced by the threads breaking up
into small pieces.
Colonies slowly liquefy gelatine.
On agar they form a whitish
growth.
In broth they form shining
masses, floating in clear liquid.
They occur in the lachrymal
canals of the human eye, in the
form of closely felted masses, and
in the air, and in fresh- and sea-
water.
Streptothrix Hofmanni (Jicro-
myces Hoffmanni, Gruber ; Oospora
Hoffmanni, Sauvageau and Radais)-
—The filaments flourish in the ordin-
ary culture media with the addition
of sugar, but they do not grow on
potato.
They produce
rabbits.
They were isolated from the air.
Streptothrix liquefaciens
(Cladothrix liquefaciens, Garten).
A variety of Actinomyces bovis.
Streptothrix madurae (p. 449).
Streptothrix musculorum
suis (Actinomyces suis, Dunker).
—A variety of actinomyces found
in the muscles of swine.
Streptothrix odorifera(Oospora
odorifera, Rullmann). Probably
identical with Oospora chromogenes.
Streptothrix violacea (Oospora
violacea, Sauvageau and Radais,
and Doria.—This streptothrix
liquefies gelatine, and gives it a
pale wine-red colour.
Agar is coloured a violet tint,
and potato becomes a reddish-
brown.
Urobacillus Duclauxi
(Miquel).—Rods -6 to ‘8 p in
diam., and filaments 2 to 10 pin
length. Motile. Spore-formation
present.
In gelatine containing ammonia
or urea they develop in the track
of the needle and cause liquefac-
tion. The liquefied gelatine is
viscid.
Broth containing ammonia be-
comes turbid, a sediment forms, and
the liquid gives off an unpleasant
odour.
They occur in sewage.
suppuration in
574
Urobacillus Freudenreichi
(Miquel).—Rods 1 to 1:3 » in width,
and filaments 5 to 6 p in length.
Colonies circular, white.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine growth occurs in the track of
the needle, and a pure white growth
on the surface, followed by slow
liquefaction.
In broth they produce turbidity.
They decompose urea.
They occur in air, sewage and
dust.
Urobacillus Maddoxi (Miquel).
—Rods 1 » in width, 3 to6 p in
length, and involution forms.
Inoculated in the depth of gela-
tine containing urea they produce
white colonies and crystals.
In broth they produce turbidity.
They decompose urea.
They occur in sewage.
Urobacillus Pasteuri (Miquel).
—Rods attaining 1:2 » in width.
and 4 to 6 p» in length, singly and
in pairs. Spore-formation present.
They grow in ammoniacal gela- |
tine, slowly liquefying it and form-
ing crystals. The liquefied gelatine
is viscid.
They ferment urine, producing
a copious deposit of crystals.
They were isolated from decom- |
posing urine.
Urobacillus Schutzenbergi
(Miquel).—Short rods ‘5 » in width,
1 » in length.
They rapidly liquefy gelatine.
On agar they form a white layer.
They grow readily in_ broth,
especially after the addition of
urea. The liquid is made cloudy,
but after a few days it becomes
clear again.
They occur in water.
Vibrio rugula (Miiller).—Rods
and threads, 6 to 16 » long, about
‘5 to 2:5 p thick. The rods are
either simply bowed, or possessed
of one shallow spiral (Fig. 230).
DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
They bear a flagellum at each end.
The rods form swarms when caus-
ing decomposition, and then, or
after, grow out into threads, curved
in a screw-like manner. In the
x 1020.
B. Slightly-
C. Rods swollen pre-
ated to spore-formation. D.
ods swollen at the spore-forming
E. Various. stages of the
(Prazmowski. }
Fic. 230.—Visrio Rueuta,
A. Bowed threads.
curved rods.
end.
developing spores.
next stage of development the rods
cease to move, and become swollen
with granular contents. One ex-
tremity develops an enlargement,
giving the rod the appearance of
a pin. The spore formed by
the contraction of the plasma in
the swollen end finally becomes
globular.
The vibrios appear in vegetable
infusions, causing fermentation of
cellulose.
APPENDICES.
575
APPENDIX I.
YEASTS AND MOULDS.
Yeast-fungi and mould-fungi, like bacteria or fission-fungi, are
achlorophyllous Thallophytes. They belong to two separate orders—
the Saccharomycetes and Hyphomycetes—which are intimately related
to each other, but quite distinct from bacteria. Their germs occur
widely distributed in air, soil and water, and are constantly
encountered in bacteriological investigations. In addition, many
species are of hygienic and pathological interest and importance in
being either accidentally associated with, or the cause of various.
morbid processes and fermentations. For a complete account of
all the described species and full details of the various forms of
development, reference must be made to botanical and other
works.* A description of certain species is appended here, and may
afford some useful information to the worker in a bacteriological
laboratory.
YEAST-FUNGI OR SACCHAROMYCETES.
Saccharomyces cerevisiz (Torula cerevisice).—Cells round or
oval, 8 to 9 pw long, singly or united in small chains. Spores
occur three or four together in a mother-cell, 4 to 5 w in diam.
8. cerevisie, S. pastorianus and 8. ellipsoideus are active alcoholic
ferments. According to Jorgensen they will produce in fourteen.
days in beer-wort from 4 to 6 per cent., by volume, of alcohol.
Saccharomyces ellipsoideus (Hansen). I.—Elliptical cells,
mostly 6 « long, singly or united in little branching chains. Two to
four spores found in a mother-cell, 3 to 3°5 » in diam. Cultivated
on the surface of wort-gelatine they produce in eleven to fourteen
days, at 25° C.,a net-like growth by which they can be recognised
* Sachs, Zewt-book of Botany ; Jorgensen, Micro-organisms and Fermen-
tation.
BIT 37
578 APPENDICES.
with the naked eye. II.—Round, oval, and rarely elongated
cells, They produce yeast-turbidity. There are two so-called
disease-yeasts allied to this species. The colonies of one kind form
a network. This yeast causes turbidity in beer, and a bitter after-
taste. In the other kind the colonies are sharply defined. It
‘produces a disagreeable aromatic taste to beer, and an astringent
after-taste. It is widely distributed, and is the principal agent in
accidental fermentation.
Saccharomyces conglomeratus (Reess).—Cells round, 5 to
6 p in diam., united in clusters, consisting of numerous cells
produced by budding from one or a few mother-cells. There are
2 to 4 spores in each mother-cell, They occur on rotting grapes
and in wine at the commencement of fermentation.
Saccharomyces exiguus (Reess)._Conical or top-shaped
cells, 5 ms long, and reaching 2°5 yw in thickness, in slightly
branching colonies. Spore-forming cells are isolated, each contain-
ing 2 or 3 spores in a row. They occur in the after-fermentation
of beer; but, according to Hansen, they do not produce disease
in beer.
Saccharomyces Joérgensenii (Lasche).—Cells small, round
or oval. On the surface of wort-gelatine the culture is greyish-
white, and the gelatine is slowly liquefied. They ferment saccharose
and dextrose, but not maltose. When grown in wort with other
yeasts they are rapidly crowded out.
Saccharomyces pastorianus, J.—Cells oval or club-shaped.
Colonies consist of primary club-shaped links, 18 to 22 yw long,
which build lateral, secondary, round or oval daughter-cells, 5 to
6 w long. Spores 2 to 4. They occur in the after-fermentation
-of wine, fruit-wines, or fermenting beer, and in the air of breweries.
They produce a bitter taste and unpleasant odour and turbidity
in beer. II.—Cells mostly elongated, but also oval or round.
Cultivated on the surface of gelatine and yeast-water a growth is
produced with smooth edges, by which it can be differentiated
from No. III. They occur in the air of breweries, but do not
produce disease in beer. IIJ.—They produce yeast-turbidity in
beer. On the surface of yeast-water gelatine the cultures, after
sixteen days, have hairy edges.
Saccharomyces apiculatus.—Cells lemon-shaped, both ends
bluntly pointed, 6 to 8 » long, 2 to 3 » wide. Budding occurs only
at the pointed ends. Rarely united in colonies. Spores unknown.
‘They occur with other yeasts in various accidental fermentations
and in ripe fruits.
YEASTS AND MOULDS. 579
Saccharomyces sphericus.—Cells varying in form; the
basal ones of a colony oblong or cylindrical, 10 to 15 yu long,
5 p thick; the others, round, 5 to 6 u in diam. United in ramified
families. Spores. unknown.
Saccharomyces anomalus (Hansen).—Cells small, oval, and
sometimes elongated. Spores are hemispherical, with projecting rims
at the base. They were found in impure brewery yeast.
Saccharomyces mycoderma (Mycoderma cerevisie et vini).—
Cells oval, elliptical, or cylindrical, 6 to 7 uw long, 2 to 3 yp thick,
united in richly-branching chains. Spore-forming cells may be
20 »% long. Spores 1 to 4 in each mother-cell. The colonies in
gelatine are greyish and filmy. They form the so-called “mould ”
on fermented liquids, and develop on the surface without. exciting
fermentation. When forced to grow submerged, a little alcohol is
produced, but the fungus soon dies. They occur on wine, beer, fruit-
juices and sauerkraut.
Saccharomyces albicans (Oidium albicans, Fungus of thrush).
—Cells round, oval, or cylindrical, 3:5 to 5 w thick; the cylindrical
cells 10 to 20 times as long as they are thick. The bud-colonies
mostly consist of rows of cylindrical cells, from the ends of which
oval or round cells shoot out. Spores form singly in roundish cells.
In plate-cultivations the colonies are pure white. In the depth
of gelatine a filament is formed composed of white colonies, some
with ray-like processes extending into the gelatine. On potato the
fungus forms a rapid white growth, and on bread also. They
can be easily cultivated in a nutrient solution containing sugar
and ammonic tartrate. The cells germinate according to the rich-
ness of the fluid in sugar; they either grow into long threads,
or, in a very strongly saccharine solution, many daughter-cells are
formed and bud out in various directions. According to Klemperer
the thrushfungus is pathogenic in rabbits, death taking place
twenty-four to forty-eight hours after an intravenous injection of
a pure-culture. Long mycelial threads are found in the internal
organs. They occur on the mucous membrane of the mouth,
especially of infants, in greyish-white patches, which consist of
epithelium, bacteria, yeasts, and the mycelia of various moulds.
Saccharomyces pyriformis (Marshall Ward).—Cells oval.
They convert saccharine solutions containing ginger into ginger-
beer. They occur with other micro-organisms in the so-called
* ginger-beer plant.”
Saccharomyces glutinis.—Cells round, oval, or short
cylinders, 5 to 11 » long, 4 mw wide, isolated, or united in twos.
580 APPENDICES.
Cell-membrane and contents are colourless in the fresh state, but
when dried and re-moistened possess a pale-reddish nucleus in the
middle. Spore-formation unknown. They form rose-coloured, slimy
spots on starch paste, and on sterilised potatoes. The colouring
matter is not changed by acids or alkalies.
Saccharomyces ilicis (Grénlund).—Cells spherical. Spore-
formation present without vacuoles. Cultures on the surface of
gelatine have a powdery appearance. They produce about 2°8
per cent., by volume, of alcohol in beer-wort, and cause a disagree-
able, bitter taste. They were obtained from the fruit of Ilex
aquifolium. :
Saccharomyces aquifolii (Grinlund)—Cells large and
spherical. Spores contain vacuoles. Cultures on gelatine are
variable, smooth and shining, or powdery. They produce about
3°7 per cent. alcohol in beer-wort, and cause a sweet taste with
bitter after-taste. They also were obtained from the fruit of Ilex
aquifoliwm.
Saccharomyces Marxianus (Hansen).—Cells elongated.
They develop a mycelial growth on solid nutrient media. They
occur on grapes.
Saccharomyces membranzfaciens (Hansen).—Cells elon-
gated and vacuolated. Spore-formation abundant. Cultivated on
wort-gelatine they produce circular, flattened and wrinkled colonies,
greyish, and sometimes with a reddish tinge. The gelatine is slowly
liquefied. They occur in the slimy Secretion of the roots of the
elm, and were also isolated from well-water.
Saccharomyces Hansenii (Zopf).—Cells with small spherical
spores. They set up alcoholic fermentation in solutions containing
sugar. They were found in cotton-seed flour.
Saccharomyces Ludwigii.—Cells irregular in form, oval,
bottle-shaped, lemon-shaped, and elongated, and mycelial filaments.
On wort-gelatine the growth is greyish or yellowish.
Saccharomyces acidi lactici (Grotenfelt).—Cells oval, 2 to
4:35 w in length, and 1°5 to 2:9 win width. Colonies on nutrient.
gelatine are porcelain-white. They coagulate milk.
Saccharomyces minor (Engel).—Cells spherical. Spore-
formation present. They are said to be the most active ferment
in the fermentation of bread.
Saccharomyces rosaceus (Pink Torula).—Cells 9 to 10 p
in diam. They form a coral-pink growth in nutrient gelatine,
nutrient agar-agar, or on sterilised potatoes. They are present
in the air.
YEASTS AND MOULDS. 581
Saccharomyces niger (Black Torulu).—Cells also present
in the air. Cultivated in nutrient gelatine they form a black
crust (Fig. 231),
Mov.p-runet on HypHomyceres.
The mould-fungi have been divided into
five orders: Hypodermii, Phycomycetes, A sco-
mycetes, Basidiomycetes and Myxomycetes.
The following species, with the orders to
which they belong, are of especial interest :—-
HYPopERMII.
Ustilago carbo (Mildew, Smut).—Spores
brown, circular ; episporium smooth ; sporidia,
ovoid cells. The spores or conidia occur as
a black powder in the ears and panicles of
wheat, barley and oats.
Tilletia caries.—Spores round, pale
brown ; episporium with reticulated thicken-
ings. In germinating, the sporidia grow
out radially from the end of the promyce-
lium ; these, at their lower part, conjugate ae ae eee ee
by a cross branch and separate from the yp, :Purr Curtrva-
promycelium, and at some point of the pair § TIon on Poraro.
a hypha grows out, on which abundant
secondary sporidia develop. The latter are long, oval cells, which
can in turn germinate. The fungus occurs in the form of a
stinking powder in grains of wheat, which renders the meal im-
pure, and gives it a disagreeable smell.
Urocystis occulta.—The spores consist of several cells united
together ;. partly, large dark-brown cells in the interior, and out-
side, several flat, semicircular, colourless cells. The promycelium
germinates as in Jilletia, but the cylindrical cells produce a hypha,
without, as a rule, previous conjugation. They occur as a black
powder in rye-straw in long disintegrated stripes, which are at first
greyish. The affected plant produces abortive ears.
Empusa muscze.—A spore or conidium of this fungus
alighting upon the white area of the under surface of the body
of the house-fly germinates into a hypha. The latter, penetrating
the skin, forms toruloid cells, which multiply by germination, and
are disseminated in the blood throughout the body of the fly.
582 APPENDICES.
These cells again grow into hyphe, which penetrate the skin, each
forming a conidium, which is cast off with considerable force. The
parasite is fatal to flies, especially in the autumn. They are often
ohserved attached to the walls or window-panes, surrounded by a
powdery substance, consisting of the extruded conidia.
Empusa radicans.—The spores form long hyphe, which pierce
the transparent skin of the caterpillar of the cabbage white butter-
fly. The terminal cells ramify, and fill the body of the caterpillar
with a network of mycelial filaments. The caterpillars attacked
become restless, then motionless, and death ensues.
Tarichium megaspermum.—tThe spores are black in colour,
and provided with a thickened episporium. They occur at the
sides and ends of mycelial threads, attacking caterpillars (Agrotis
segetumt).
PHYCOMYCETES.
Saprolegnia.—Colourless threads, forming dense radiating tufts,
occur on living and dead animal and vegetable matter in fresh
water. The filaments penetrate into the substratum, and branch
more or less in the surrounding water. The cylindrical ends of the
threads are shut off by a septum—forming zoosporangia, or mother-
cells, in the interior of which a number of spherical zoospores
develop. These are set free through an apical opening in the
thread, and after a time coming to rest, give rise to new plants.
In the sexual mode of reproduction a spherical bud, the oogoniwm,
develops at the end of a mycelial thread; from the thread small
processes or antheridia sprout out laterally towards the oogonium
and blend with its protoplasm. The latter breaks up into a number
of oospores, which clothe themselves with a membrane while still
within the mother-cell, and, eventually being set free, grow into
fresh mycelial filaments. The fungus attacks fish and tritons,
and produces a diseased condition of the skin, which may be
ultimately fatal. In salmon it produces the common “disease of
salmon.”
Peronospora infestans.—The conidia-bearers of this fungus
have as many as five branches, each bearing an egg-shaped
conidium. The contents of the conidia falling off and reaching a
drop of moisture, break up into a number of swarming zoogonidia,
which in turn develop upon plants. Fixing themselves to the
cuticle of the host, they throw a germinating filament into an
epidermal cell; after piercing first its outer wall, and then its inner
YEASTS AND MOULDS. _ 583:
wall, the filament reaches an intercellular space, where the mycelium
develops. This continues to grow and spread throughout the plant.
In tubers it can hibernate and develop in the young shoots in the
following spring. The fungus appears in the form of brown
patches on the green parts of the plants, especially the leaves.
The attacked parts wither and turn yellow or brown in colour.
If the under surface of a diseased leaf is examined, a corresponding
dark spot may be observed, accompanied with a faint greyish-white-
bloom, which covers it. The latter consists of the conidia-bearing
branches.
Pilobolus.—The fruit-hyphe possess spherical receptacles
containing conidia. When ripe the receptacles with their conidia
are detached at their bases, and spring by their elasticity to some
distance. The fungus occurs as glassy tufts on the excrement of
cows, horses, etc. A cultivation can generally be obtained by
keeping fresh horse-dung under a, bell-glass.
Mucor mucedo.—Hyphe colourless, simple or branched ; spo-
rangia yellowish-brown or black; spores ovoid. They form the
familiar white mould on fruits, bread, potatoes and excreta, and
penetrate into the interior of nuts and apples. A network of
fibrils develops in the substance of nutrient gelatine, with forma-
tion of sporangia on the free surface. The germination of the
spores and development into hyphz can be observed in a few
hours if the fungus be cultivated in a decoction of horse-dung.
Mucor racemosus.—Hyphe short; sporangia, yellowish to-
pale-brown; spores round. By continued cultivation in liquids
saturated with carbonic acid, the hyphe become still shorter
and exhibit a yeast-like sprouting. These yeast-like or toruloid
cells can, when the carbonic acid is withdrawn, germinate into.
normal mycelium. They occur on bread and decaying vegetable
matter.
Mucor stolonifer (Lichtheim).—Mycelium grows in the air and.
then bends down and re-enters the nutrient substratum ; sporangia
black, and spores globular. The mycelium can penetrate through
the shell of eggs, and form conidiophores within them.
Mucor aspergillus (Lichtheim).—Fruit-hyphe thinned at the
base, and with many fork-like divisions; dark-brown spores.
Mucor phycomyces (Lichtheim).—Mycelium thick-walled ;
olive-green fruit-hyphe ; black sporangia, and oblong spores.
Mucor macrocarpus (Lichtheim).—Spindle-formed, pointed
spores.
Mucor fusiger (Lichtheim).—Ovoid spores.
584 APPENDICES.
Mucor mellittophorus (Lichtheim).—Spores elliptical. Found
in the stomach of bees.
Mucor corymbifer (Lichtheim).—This fungus forms branched
fruit-hyphe. The sporangia have a smooth membrane. It has
been found in the external auditory meatus, and on bread it forms
a dense snow-white growth. Pathogenic in rabbits.
Mucor rhizopodiformis (Lichtheim).—The spores of Mucor
rhizopodiformis and Mucor corymbifer, when introduced into the
vascular system of rabbits, can germinate in the tissues, especially
in the kidneys, where they set up hemorrhagic inflammation.
Dogs are immune, and only artificial mycosis is known. It occurs
on bread.
Mucor erectus.—Resembles Mucor racemosus. It occurs on
rotting potatoes.
Mucor circinelloides.— Mycelium much branched, and
sporangium carrier is curved.
Mucor spinosus.—Sporangia chocolate. Columella has short
processes or spines.
ASCOMYCETES.
Oidium Tuckeri.—Fruit-hyphe bearing single ovoid conidia.
Observed in the form of brown patches, covered with a white mildew-
like layer on the leaves, branches and young fruit of the vine,
producing “‘ grape disease.”
Oidium lactis.—Fruit-hyphe simple, erect and colourless,
bearing at their ends a series or chain of conidia. In some cases,
the fruit-hypha branches beneath the chain of spores. Spores are
short cylinders. The conidia germinate into filaments of varying
length, which by subdivision form septate mycelial hyphe; these
and their branches give rise in turn to spores or conidia. The
fungus is deeply stained by the ordinary aniline dyes. Ina plate-
cultivation the colonies appear as white points, and develop into
delicate stellate colonies which ultimately coalesce and form a fine
mycelial network covering the surface of the gelatine. The gela-
tine is not liquefied. The growth on the surface of agar is similar
to that on gelatine. The fungus occurs in sour milk.
Achorion Schonleinii (fungus of fauvus).—Threads branching
at right angles. Favus in man forms yellow crusts on the hairy parts
of the body. The crusts are composed of epidermis and mycelial
filaments and spores. In plate-cultivations whitish colonies are
formed surrounded by liquefied gelatine. Cultivated on the surface
YEASTS AND MOULDS. 585
of gelatine the growth resembles that of Tricophyton tonsurans, but
the liquefaction takes place more slowly, and there is a more distinct
yellow colour. On agar the growth is white, dry and firmly
adherent.
Tricophyton tonsurans (Fungus of ringworm).—Mycelial
filaments and spores occur on the crusts and in diseased hairs.
In plate-cultivations white colonies are formed, and liquefaction
quickly follows. In test-tube cultivations the gelatine is liquefied
Fie. 232.—Hrap anp Neck or CaL¥ wiTtH ADVANCED Ringworm (Brown).
and the fungus forms a membrane on the liquid jelly which is white
above and yellow beneath. The surface of the growth is powdery
In man the disease varies in appearance in different parts of the
body. Cattle, horses and dogs also suffer from ringworm ; but sheep
and pigs rarely, if ever. The disease is very common in calves.
Sometimes a small portion of the skin is diseased; in other cases,
the head, neck, chest and abdomen, or even the whole trunk, may be
covered with scabs or crusts. There is often loss of hair in patches,
and the skin may be covered with scurf. The disease is transmissible
586 APPENDICES.
to the human subject. In one case, according to Brown, seven
grooms were infected on the arms from a grey pony which was
suffering from the disease in an aggravated form. ’
Fungus of fowl-scab.—Fowls are liable to a disease similar
to favus. According to Schiitz this disease is characterised by
greyish-white patches on the comb and wattles of fowls, which may
extend over the neck and body. On nutrient gelatine a white
mycelium is formed; and the gelatine is liquefied, and acquires a
reddish tint. The fungus can be readily cultivated on bread-paste,
agar-agar and potato. Cultures inoculated in fowls produce the
disease, but have no effect on mice and rabbits.
Fungus of mouse-favus.—Mice suffer from a form of favus
which can be communicated to healthy mice by inoculation of scabs
or infected skin (Nicolaier), On nutrient agar the fungus forms a
thick mycelium, at first white, and later of a red or reddish-brown
colour. Mice can be infected with cultures.
Microsporon furfur.—This fungus occurs in Pityriasis.
versicolor. Grawitz regarded it as identical with Oidium lactis, and
itis very closely related. Cultivated on gelatine the jelly is hollowed
out and the mycelial growth sinks down, and is yellowish in colour.
Oidium albicans.—Vide Saccharomyces albicans.
Aspergillus glaucus (Lurotiwm aspergillus glaucus).—Mycelium
at first whitish, becoming grey-green or yellow-green. Spores
grey-green, thick-walled. It is found on various substances, chiefly
cooked fruit, and is non-pathogenic.
Aspergillus repens (Hurotium repens, De Bary).—Fruit-heads
fewer than in the above, which are at first pale and then blue-green
to dark-green in colour. Conidia mostly oval, smooth, colourless
or pale to grey-green.
Aspergillus flavus.—Gold-yellow, greenish and brown tufts.
Fruit-heads round, yellow, olive-green or brown. Conidia round,
seldom oval, sulphur-yellow to brown in colour. Saprophytic in
man, pathogenic in rabbits.
Aspergillus fumigatus.—Greenish, bluish or grey tufts.
Fruit-heads long and conical. Conidia round, and rarely oval,
smooth, mostly pale and colourless. This fungus occurs on bread,
and has been found in the human lungs, external auditory
meatus and middle ear, and in the lungs of birds. The spores
introduced into the vascular system of rabbits, or into the peritoneal
cavity, establish metastatic foci in the kidneys, liver, intestines,
lungs, muscles, and sometimes in the spleen, bones, lymphatic
glands, nervous system and skin.
YEASTS AND MOULDS. 587
Aspergillus niger (Zurotium aspergillus niger, De Bary).—
Dark chocolate-brown tufts. Conidia round, black-brown, or grey-
brown when ripe. This mould can be cultivated readily on bread
moistened with vinegar, on slices of lemon, and on acid fruits and
liquids. It flourishes best of all, according to Raulin, in a liquid
of the following composition :—
Grammes,
Waters. ; : : : 1500:
Sugar-candy : : : 70°
Tartaric acid 4:
Nitrate of ammonia . ; ; ‘ : 4:
Phosphate : ; : : , : ‘ 6
Carbonate of potassiu ; 3 : 3 6
a », Magnesium . : : ‘ : “4
Sulphate of ammonia : : : : 25
53 »» zine : i : : F ‘07
‘5 », iron ; 5 ; i ‘07
Silicate of potassium : j : ; 07
It was also found that the fungus grew best when the liquid
was spread out in a layer 2 or 3 cm. in depth in a shallow dish;
and a temperature of 35° C. proved to be the most favourable.
The abstraction of zinc from the nutritive liquid reduced the weight
of a crop from 25 (the average) to 2 grammes, and the presence
of seabuoo part of nitrate of silver, or zg$5q part of corrosive
sublimate, stopped the growth altogether. It is saprophytic in the
living body.
Mernop or Examining ASPERGILLUS NIGER.
Species of aspergillus stain intensely with carmine, fuchsine or methyl-
violet ; but to examine Aspergillus niger with a high power a little
special technique is employed, as follows :—A drop of glycerine is placed
on a clean slide, and a drop of alcohol on a cover-glass. With a fine pair
of forceps a few of the fruit-hyphe with their black heads are immersed
in the alcohol. The cover-glass is then turned over on to the drop of
glycerine, and the slide held in the flame of a Bunsen burner till the
spores or conidia are dispersed. To make a permanent preparation
remove the cover-glass, and transfer the fruit-hyphe so treated to a
mixture of glycerine and water (1 to 5); a drop may be conveniently
placed ready on a slide provided with a ring of Canada balsam. The
specimen is then, permanently mounted by employing a circular cover-
glass, and surrounding it with a ring of cement in the usual way.
588 APPENDICES.
Aspergillus ochraceus.—At first flesh-coloured, and then
ochre-yellow heads.
Aspergillus albus.—Pure-white fruit-heads.
Aspergillus clavatus.—Club-shaped fruit-heads on long stems.
Aspergillus nidulans.—Bread and potatoes acquire a reddish-
brown colour. Pathogenic in rabbits. Occurs on bread.
Aspergillus subfuscus.—-The growth is olive-yellow in colour.
Pathogenic in rabbits. Occurs on bread.
Aspergillus flavescens.—The growth is yellowish-green.
Pathogenic in dogs and rabbits. Occurs on bread.
Penicillium glaucum.—Occurs as a white, and later a blue-
green, mould, on which dew-like drops of liquid may appear. Its
spores are present in large numbers in the air, and are liable
to contaminate cultivations. The fruit-hypha bears terminally a
number of branched cylindrical cells, from which chains of greenish
conidia are,developed. It is the commonest of all moulds.
Botrytis Bassiana.—Hyphe and spores colourless. Hyphe
usually simple, but sometimes united in arborescent stems. It is
the cause of muscardine, a fatal disease of silkworms, and occurs
also in various other caterpillars and insects.
Chionyphe Carteri.—Mycelial filaments observed by Carter
in Madura disease.
APPENDIX IL.
HAMATOZOA.
HEMATOZOA IN MAN, BIRDS AND TURTLES.—HAMATOZOA IN
EQUINES, CAMELS, RATS AND FISH.—HAMATOZOA IN FROGS.
Hamatozoa In Man (Matarta).
In 1880 Laveran, in Algiers, noticed the existence of peculiar
structures in the blood of a patient suffering from malaria, and
his researches were communicated to the Academy of Medicine in
Paris in 1881 and 1882, and subsequently published in extenso in a
treatise on the subject.
Laveran described various bodies which he was led to regard as
different stages in the life-history of the same micro-parasite. The
most striking forms were cylindrical elements with pointed extre-
mities. They were crescent-shaped and pigmented in the middle.
There were other forms, more frequently found, which were either
free in the serum or in contact with the red blood-corpuscles.
They were more or less spherical, pigmented, and endowed with
ameeboid movement. Other forms, again, were provided with motile
filaments three or four times as long as the diameter of a red blood-
corpuscle, And, lastly, there were little masses of hyaline material,
which Laveran regarded as dead forms.
These observations at first attracted little attention; but they
have since been confirmed and extended by Richard, Councilman and
Abbot, Marchiafava and Celli, Golgi, Sternberg, Osler, the author,
Vandyke Carter, Manson, and others, and their importance fully
recognised.
The different forms assumed by the hematozoon of malaria may
be described in two groups: those within the red blood-corpuscles,
and those free in the serum.
Intra-corpuscular bodies.—These are of three kinds. First,
5x0
590 APPENDICES.
structureless protoplasmic bodies much smaller than, and within
or attached to, the red blood-corpuscles (Fig. 233). These rapidly
change their shape, exhibiting emceboid movement. They were
first described by Marchiafava and Celli, and possibly represent the
first stage in the life-history of the hematozoon. Marchiafava and
Celli suggested the name Plasmodium malarie. Second, minute
Fig, 233.—Non-PIGMENTED AM@BOID Forms (Marchiafava and Celli).
masses of finely granular or of hyaline protoplasm enclosing granules
of pigment (Fig. 234). These forms are sometimes present in large
numbers, and at other times can be found only with difficulty.
They are more or less spherical, but exhibit amceboid movement,
and rapidly change their form. The pigment granules are also in
active movement. There may be one or more of these ameeboid
Fic. 234.—Piementep AM@BOID Forms (Golgi).
bodies to a blood-corpuscle, and they vary in size; one may occupy
the whole of the corpuscle. In cases of pernicious malaria, similar
bodies may be seen, in tissue sections, in the corpuscles filling the
capillaries. Third, forms which appear like isolated grains, and
larger homogeneous bodies surrounded by clear spaces which change
in outline.
Extra-corpuscular bodies.—These are the most striking, and
eo »
Fic. 235,—SEMI-LUNAR Bopies or LAvERAN (Golgi).
perhaps the most interesting, forms. First, the semi-lunar bodies
of Laveran. These are crescent-shaped bodies, sometimes pointed
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 591
at the extremities, but more usually rounded off (Fig. 235). They
are not always curved; some, indeed, are almost spherical, and
others sausage-shaped. They are motionless. In many specimens
a delicate line is visible on the concave side of the crescent connect-
ing the extremities. On careful examination this is found to be
o ©
e Ve eSo of
So OM CMOS
0 /J\2 8) ©
Fic. 236.—Rosetre Forms witH SEGMENTATION (Golgi).
«
the edge of a very delicate membrane. The body is composed of
homogeneous protoplasm. Centrally placed is a collection of pigment
granules, which on careful examination can be distinctly seen to be
in movement. The semi-lunar bodies vary in number in different
cases. Sometimes several can be seen in the field at the same time,
and in other cases they are only observed after a long and patient
search. They are, as a rule, free in the serum; but they have also
been seen within the red blood-cells. Second, finely granular masses
of protoplasm, which arise, according to Golgi, from the intra-
corpuscular pigmented bodies. The pigment is collected in a rosette,
and the protoplasm by segmentation gives rise to a number of small
Fic. 237.—FLAGELLATED Forms (Vandyke Carter).
1. A flagellated spherule ; a, the same in the interior of a phagocyte; 6, free
motile filaments.
spherical forms, which are ultimately set free (Fig. 236). Golgi
believes that these changes occur in definite relation to the develop-
ment of the paroxysm. Third, spherical, pear-shaped, or ovoid
bodies, rather smaller than the red blood-corpuscles,-and provided
with one or more actively motile flagella (Fig. 237). These flagella
592 APPENDICES.
are long lash-like filaments, which by their activity set the neigh-
bouring blood-corpuscles in motion. Free filaments in active move-
ment have also been observed. Fourth, small spherical pigmented
bodies about one-quarter the size of a red blood-corpuscle, which
exhibit amcboid movement.
Inoculation experiments.—Marchiafava and Celli assert that.
inoculation of a healthy subject with blood containing the parasites
will produce a paroxysm of ague with development of the hematozoa.
The pathogenic power of these parasites, however, has not been
established. There has been no cultivation of the parasite outside
the animal body, and reproduction of the disease with a pure culti-
vation. In favour of its being a pathogenic organism, Laveran
points out its invariable presence in some form or other in cases of
malaria; the marked changes it effects in the red blood-cells; the
increase in the number of the parasites in proportion to the severity
of the attack; and, lastly, their disappearance after the admini-
stration of quinine. Others, again, have doubted the parasitic
nature of these bodies, and have looked upon them as representing
pathological changes in the blood-cells.
Laveran first of all suggested the name Oscillaria malariz ; but
subsequently he recognised that these bodies belonged to the animal,
not to the vegetable, kingdom. Osler has suggested that, tempo-
rarily at any rate, the organism should be placed in the genus
Hematomonas of Mitrophanow, thus: “Genus, Hematomonas;
species, Hamatomonas malarie. Definition—Body plastic; ovoid
or globose ; no differentiation of protoplasm, which contains pigment
grains; flagella variable, from one to four; highly polymorphic,
occurring in (1) ameeboid form, (2) crescents, encysted form, (3)
sporocysts, (4) cellular free pigmented bodies.”
EXAMINATION OF THE HaMatozoa oF LAVERAN.
In the Living Condition.—Select a patient by preference who has had
several attacks of malaria, and is markedly anemic. Examine before the
invasion of the febrile paroxysm. Take two perfectly clean cover-glasses
and two clean slides ; wash one of the fingers of the patient with soap
and water, and then cleanse with alcohol ; apply a ligature, and with a
clean needle puncture the thin skin near the root of the nail; touch the
drop of blood which collects, with a clean slide; cover quickly with a
cover-glass, and gently press it if the layer of blood be too thick.
Examine with a 7, 0. i.
In Stained Preparations—Puncture the finger again if necessary ;
touch the droplet of blood with a clean cover-glass ; apply another cover-
glass; press them gently together, and then slide them apart ; stain with
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 593
two or three drops of alcoholic solution of methylene-blue ; wash off
excess, and examine in water, or allow the preparation to dry, and mount:
in balsam.
Hamatozoa oF Birps..
According to Danilewsky, birds suffer from malaria in both an
acute and a chronic form. The hematozoa are very similar to
those found in malaria in man, and any slight difference may be
attributed to the different character of the blood in birds. Grassi
and Feletti have described two kinds of malarial hematozoa in
birds, one kind belonging to the genus Hemameba and the other
to the genus Laverania.
s
Hamarozoa oF TURTLES.
Danilewsky has also minutely described and figured hematozoa in
the blood of turtles, which in some stages of their life history very
closely resemble those found by Laveran in man.
Hamatozoa or Equines anp Camets (Surra Disease.)
Surra is a blood disease occurring in horses, mules, and camels,
characterised by fever accompanied by jaundice, petechiz of mucous
membranes, great prostration, and rapid wasting terminating in
death. The average duration of the disease is about two months.
No organic lesions are found after death, but a parasite exists in
the blood during life. By means of subcutaneous inoculation, and
by the introduction into the stomach of blood containing the
parasite, the disease, according to Evans, can be transmitted to
healthy animals. The importance of this disease may be realised
from the fact that on one occasion in India the 3rd Punjab, Cavalry
lost no less than three hundred horses from it.
The disease has not been observed to be contagious or infectious
in the ordinary sense, but the possibility of its conveyance by means
of large brown flies has been suggested. These flies attack the
horses so vehemently that the blood frequently streams from the
bites ; and the opinion that they propagate the disease is prevalent.
among the natives. At the same time it has been particularly
noted that where the disease has broken out the water was very
impure.
Evans discovered a hematozoon, in 1880, in all the diseased horses.
and mules examined ; in all diseased camels, with one exception; and.
in the dogs which had been subjected to experimental inoculations,
38
594 APPENDICES.
Evans stated that when he first discovered the parasite he
thought it was a spirillum, but very speedily on closer examination
arrived at an opposite opinion.
To him the organism presented the appearance, when fresh and
active, of an apparently round body, tapering in front to form a
neck and terminating in a blunt head. Posteriorly he described a
tapering tail, from which there extended a long slender lash. At
the head end there appeared in one or two cases a circlet of
pseudopods, and as the body slowly died in serum it gave the
appearance of flattening out. After watching very closely all its
changes of form and movements, Evans came to the conclusion that
there existed on either side of the body two fin-like papillz, one
near where the neck betan and the other close to where the tail
began. In only very few instances he was able to see the four at
once. He suggested that these processes were of the nature of
pseudopods.
The parasite he described as extremely active in its movements,
with an undulatory, eel-like motion, progressing for the most part
head-end foremost, but occasionally moving in the direction of the
lash when tugging at a corpuscle. In fresh blood these organisms
resembled spermatozoa in colour; but their peculiar characteristic
was the power they possessed of attacking and disintegrating the
red corpuscles.
Occasionally two were observed to unite and swim off as one
body ; but the mode of union was a disputed point. Evans thought
that they joined with their respective heads and tails in the same
direction, overlapping each other; but others to whom they were
shown were of opinion that they fastened with their tails in
opposite directions.
The parasites were not always present in the blood, but were
observed to come and go in successive broods. Evans referred the
organism to Lewis for his opinion as to its nature. Lewis arrived
at the conclusion that the parasite was “more nearly related to
that which he found in the blood of rats than to any other”; but
he was of opinion at the time that they did not appear exactly
the same.
Five years later Surra broke out in British Burma, and Steel
was deputed to investigate the outbreak. Steel confirmed the
communicability of the disease to dogs, horses and mules by
ingestion and inoculation, but he considerably supplemented Evans’
views as to the nature of the disease by careful thermometric
observations : these finally led him to regard the disease as a true
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 595
relapsing fever, closely resembling relapsing fever in man. At the
same time it is worth recording that until Steel cbserved the
presence of the parasite described by Evans he regarded the out-
break as malarious in origin, and provisionally termed it gastric
typhoid. In the Burma outbreak, as in the Punjab epidemic,
considerable evidence was adduced in favour of regarding the disease
as being due to bad water supply.
Steel succeeded in staining the organism with aniline dyes, but
his description of the parasite in the fresh state differs very
materially from that given by Evans.
Steel failed to recognise the round body tapering in front toa
neck. To him the bodies appeared thick in the middle, gradually
diminishing in size in either direction, with a blunt and rigid
extremity at one end. The opposite end he described as tapering
in such a way as to produce a subspiral prolongation, which was
uncurled and lashed about freely like a whip. This tail was
described as slender in relation to the general size of the parasite ;
but under the highest power available the presence of a colourless
flagellum could not be detected, nor, he adds, did the movements of
the blood-constituents indicate its existence.
Steel also failed to see the slightest sign of the two fin-like papille
on each side as described by Evans—an opinion in which. he was
supported by Lewis.
These two observers, Evans and Steel, also differed as to whether
the movement could be called spiral. Steel felt. convinced that their
movement was as much of that nature at times as can be expected
from organisms with so open a corkscrew shape; while Evans
maintained an opposite view. In the dried and stained specimens
Steel observed that they retained their subspiral form of body and
markedly spiral form of tail.
Steel found that the disease could be communicated to the dog
and to the monkey, and then discussed the resemblance of the parasite
to the spirillum of relapsing fever in man.
From the different appearances presented by the parasite when
in the living state and when dried and stained, Steel thought that
there was probably a still closer resemblance to the living spirillum
than to the dried and stained one, and argued that the figures of
spirilla like corkscrews must be purely imaginary. Steel, it
must be observed, founded these remarks upon figures in text-
books, and not on photographs or on a practical acquaintance
with the spirillum of relapsing fever. One cannot refrain from
pointing out the value of photomicrographs, for they cannot be
596 APPENDICES.
called into question; and had Steel studied photographs of
spirilla he would not have regarded the corkscrew appearance as
imaginary.
Steel found the parasite in all cases, and further observed that
it appeared as the temperature rose and disappeared during the
apyrexial periods.
From all these observations Steel concluded as follows :—That
relapsing fever of mules is an invariably fatal disorder, characterised
by the periodical occurrence of attacks of high fever, during which a
special organism closely resembling the spirillum of relapsing fever
in man is found in the blood. ‘This organism is one-sixth the size of
a red corpuscle in width and three to six times in length. It is
eel-like, and, when dried and stained, presents a thick portion—the
body—and a spiral tail. The latter takes less of the dye than the
former, and commences as a sudden narrowing of the body, termi-
nating by a fine point. This, he insisted, had nothing of the nature
of an infusorian flagellum. The thick portion tapers in either
direction from its centre, and terminates in front abruptly in a rigid
process, with probably some holdfast organ. The sharpness of the
head end varies in different animals. The body portion he described
as spiral, and so closely in general appearances to resemble the
spirillum of relapsing fever that he concluded that the organism
was undoubtedly a spiral bacterium and named it after its discoverer
Spirocheta Evansi. This view, however, would not be accepted by
Evans, who maintained that, whatever it might be, it was not a
member of the family of bacteria.
In the face of these conflicting opinions Evans, in 1885, submitted
to the author preparations of the organism in the blood as well
as material from the lungs and intestines of a camel that had
succumbed to the disease.
On examining a stained preparation the author found that
with a power of 200 diameters a number of the parasites could
be distinguished in the field of the microscope, and with 4, and
qs 0. i. objectives the individual characteristics were clearly brought
out. These were quite sufficient at once to dispel the idea of its being
a spirillum. It was obvious that it was a more highly organized
micro-parasite, presenting very peculiar and distinctive structural
appearances.
The author came to the following conclusions :—
The somewhat tapering central portion, or body, of the parasite
is continuous at one end with a whip-like lash, and at the other end
terminates in an acutely-pointed stiff filament or spine-like process.
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 597
Here and there, possibly from injury or want of development, the
spine-like process appears to be blunted or absent. By very careful
focussing on the upper edge of the central portion, the author
discovered the existence—much more markedly in some of the
parasites than in others—of a longitudinal membrane with either
a straight or undulating margin. The membrane is attached along
the body, arising from the base of the rigid filament, and becomes
directly continuous at the opposite end with the flagellum. In some
cases the edge only is deeply stained, giving the appearance of a
thread continuous with the flagellum, so that one might’ be ‘easily
led to overlook the membrane, and imagine that the flagellum arose
from the opposite end of the body, at the. base of the spine-like
process,
Close to the base of the spine-like process a clear unstained spot
is in many parasites easily distinguished; and at the opposite end
there is, in some, the appearance of the deeply-stained protoplasmic
contents having contracted within the faintly-stained membranous
investment. When the longitudinal membrane has a wavy outline
the undulations are much more marked in some cases than in others.
Here and there the wavy outline appears first on the one -side of
the central portion and then on the other; but there never is any
waving outline on both sides of the same part of the body, and this
was explained by a careful examination, which showed that the
somewhat ribbon-like parasite had become doubled on itself. The
discovery of this undulating membrane at once suggested to the
author an explanation of the lateral pseudopodia described by
Evans. If we imagine that we are looking down upon the parasite,
with the edge of the membrane towards us, one can conceive that
the rapid undulations, first on one side and then on another,
might give an image upon the retina which could be construed
as due to the protrusion of lateral pseudopodia. In stained
preparations no trace of the circlet of pseudopods could be
discovered, and the undulating membrane may account for this
appearance also.
Owing to the somewhat curved and twisted shape of the parasite
and the curling of the flagellum in the stained preparations, it
was difficult to make exact measurements; but the average width,
according to whether the membrane was visible or not, varied from
1 to 2 pw, and the length of the body from 20 to 304. The flagellum
was about the same length as the body. ,
Here and there in a stained preparation there were the forms
already described by Evans resulting from the fusion of two para-
598 APPENDICES.
sites. But the union obviously took place by the non-flagellated
ends, for the two flagella were frequently turned in the same
direction, so, that the fused parasites resembled, as Evans sub-
sequently suggested, a trophy of buffalo horns. Here and there
more than two parasites had united, forming a stellate group; and
in one case the author noticed that the individuals had apparently
united with their non-flagellated ends just overlapping, so that the
unstained spot in one was just situated in a line with the unstained
spot of the other.
In Evans’s Report, Lewis's opinion is given that these parasites
differed slightly, but still were closely allied to certain flagellated
organisms which had been observed by him in rats in India. On
Fig. 238.—‘‘ Supra” PARASITES OCCURRING SINGLY AND FUSED.
(From preparations stained with magenta, x 1200. Lent by Dr. Evans.)
referring to his original memoir, it will be found that his description
and woodcut differed very materially from the Surra parasite as
just described, though a microphotograph which Lewis had appended
to the memoir after it was written, indicated a great similarity
to this organism. To the author the organisms appeared not only
closely allied, but, as far as one can judge from figures and descrip-
tions, morphologically identical with the parasites described by
Mitrophanow in the carp, and as a matter of fact, instead of a
mere resemblance, the rat and the Surra parasites, when stained,
are found to be morphologically identical.
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 599
Hamatozoa oF Rats,
In describing these organisms, Lewis remarked that it was
strange that they had not occupied attention before, and suggested
as an explanation that possibly European rats did not harbour these
parasites. The author examined a few white rats, but without
success, and then proceeded to examine the blood of common brown
rats, trapped from the London sewers, and discovered that these:
organisms are to be found in no less than 25 per cent. of apparently
healthy animals. The first question which naturally arose was
whether these organisms in European rats were identical with those:
described by Lewis in Indian rats.
If we refer to the description given by Lewis, we find that he
states that when he first noticed them he thought they were vibrios
or spirilla. The drop of blood
under examination appeared to
quiver with life; and on diluting
the blood, motile filaments could
be seen rushing through the
serum and tossing the blood-
corpuscles about in all directions.
The filaments were pale and
translucent, without any trace
of visible structure or granu-
larity, and they were more un-
dulatory in movement than Fic. 239.—-PaRASITES IN THE BLoop
spirilla. A corpuscle might be or Rats (Lewis).
observed to quiver, and this
could be distinctly traced to be due to the existence of a flagellum,
apparently a posterior flagellum, as the organisms seemed generally
to move with the thicker end forward; no flagellum could be
detected at the opposite end. The greater number of the figures
in the woodcut (Fig. 239) are described as representing these
organisms a few hours after the blood had been obtained, when
their movements are not so rapid, and the flagellum becomes more
easily recognisable.
This observation led Kent, who named the organism Herpetomonas:
Lewisi, to remark that if, as Lewis is inclined to maintain, that.
organ “propels instead of draws the animalcule through the in-
habited serum, we have presented a structural and functional feature
-- without parallel among the other representatives of these Protozoa
flagellata, the recognition of which would demand the creation of a
600 APPENDICES.
distinct generic and family group for the reception of these singular
organisms.” In his later paper, however, Lewis came to the con-
clusion that, like the generality of flagellated organisms, the rat
parasites moved with the lash in front.
On careful examination the plasma which constituted the thicker
portion of their substance was observed to suddenly swell out so as
to divide the body into two parts, as seen in the centre of the figure ;
at other times two or three such constrictions or dilatations were
detected, and at other times the body assumed an arrow shape, as
depicted at the lower part of the figure. When dried, and stained
with a little weak solution of aniline-blue, the body presented’a very
different appearance. It was found to have contracted irregularly,
and to manifest a somewhat granular and shreddy appearance,
suggestive of a coagulated fibro-albuminous substance. The body
portion became flattened towards its middle to double its original
width, and both ends almost acutely pointed, while the flagellum
was only partly visible. After fixing with osmic acid they measured
0-8 to 1 » in width, and 20 to 30 pw in length; the flagellum was about
as long as the body: so that the total length of the organism was
about 50». Lewis detected these parasites in 29 per cent. of the
species Mus decumanus and Mus rufescens, but failed to find them
in mice. He considered that they had many features in common
with motile organisms of vegetable origin; but they appeared , to
approach much more closely to the Protozoa, more particularly
several of the species of Dujardin’s Cercomonas. He points out
that many, however, believe that these organisms are zoospores and
not animalcules. To him they also seemed to be not unlike the
flagellated parasite described by Biitschli.
The latter observer detected flagellated organisms (Leptomonas
-Biitschlii) in the intestinal canal of a free nematode (Trilobus
gracilis). They, too, form stellate colonies, like the Surra parasite,
owing to their being attached by their non-flagellated ends. When
detached from these colonies they presented a somewhat spindle-
shaped body about 11 y» in length, with a somewhat thick flagellum
about double this length, so that the total length of the protozoon
would be 33 yp, or, as Lewis states, about half the length of the
flagellated organism in the rat’s blood. Near the base of the
flagellum, Biitschli’s protozoon presented a contractile vacuole,
but Lewis was unable to detect any such vacuole in the rat
heematozoa.
In conclusion, Lewis observed that very probably these organ-
isms corresponded withthe vermicules observel by Goss in the
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 601
blood of a field mouse, and he also mentions that Chaussat found
minute ‘ nematodes” in the blood of a black rat.
Wittich discovered in the blood of hamsters whip-like bodies with
lively movements. They resembled frog's spermatozoa, possessing
a thick portion continued into a long lash-like thread. Wittich
considered them identical with the organisms described by Lewis, and
they also were observed in apparently healthy animals. Koch later
met with the same organisms.
Like Lewis, the author found that the blood of the commor
brown rat in England appeared to quiver with life, and that the
parasites were extremely difficult to examine until their movement
was arrested for a moment or they became imprisoned in the serum
areas. After examining with various powers, from a 4 dry
to a si o. i. of Powell and Lealand, the author came to the
25
following conclusion :—That they are polymorphic, presenting for
Fic. 240.—A Mownap in Rat’s Bioop. The organism is represented at partial
rest with its posterior filament impinging on a corpuscle, and showing the
undulating, longitudinal membrane, the long flagellum, and the refractive
spherules in the granular protoplasm ( x 3000).
the most part slightly tapering bodies which terminate at one end in
a stiff, immotile, acutely-pointed flexible filament or spine-like process,
and at the opposite end are provided with a long flagellum, while,
longitudinally attached, a delicate undulating fin-like membrane can
be traced, which starts from the base of the posterior filament, and
becomes directly continuous with the flagellum (Fig. 240).
With careful illumination the body is found to be distinctly
granular, with one or more highly-refractive spherules. When the
rapid movement is arrested the undulating membrane is distinctly
visible. The best opportunity occurs for seeing this when the
organism comes to partial rest with its stiff filament against a
corpuscle, as if to obtain a point dappui, while lashing its flagellum
in all directions (Fig. 241, 6). At other times, when the parasite has
impinged with its posterior extremity against a corpuscle, or the
stiff filament is apparently entangled in débris, the movements of
the organism give one the idea of its endeavouriig to set itself free,
602 APPENDICES.
but the author has not been able to persuade himself that they
“attack and disintegrate” the red blood-corpuscles.
In the active state the thicker portion, or body, appears to
twist and bend from side to side with great activity. The organism
can turn completely round with lightning rapidity, so that the
flagellum, at one moment lashing in one direction, is suddenly
observed working in the opposite direction. Then suddenly the
organism makes progression, and it can be distinctly seen to move
in the direction of the flagellum, the flagellum threading its way
between the corpuscles and drawing the rest of the organism after
at. Currents set up by evaporation may undoubtedly here and
there produce the appearance of the organism “ wriggling along ”
with its flagellum posterior ; but the author was convinced, after
Fic. 241.—Mownaps 1n Rat’s Bioop, x 1200. u, A monad threading its way among
the blood-corpuscles ; 6, another with pendulum movement attached to a cor-
puscle; c, angular forms ; d, encysted forms ; e and f, thesameseen edgeways.
hours of patient observation, that in the normal mode of progression
the flagellum acts as a tractellum and not as a pulsellum. By
treating cover-glass preparations with osmic acid the appearances
obtained are very similar to those shown in Lewis’s photographs,
so that there is no doubt, in spite of the descriptions not completely
according, that they are one and the same organism. There was a
great likeness to the organisms described by Mitrophanow, and to the
Surra parasite ; and when the author had stained the rat parasites,
the closest examination confirmed his belief that they were morpho-
logically identical with the stained parasites of Surra.
Cover-glasses with a thin layer of blood may be passed three
times through the flame of a Bunsen burner in the way commonly
employed for examining micro-organisms, and stained with an
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 603
aqueous solution of fuchsin, methyl-violet, or Bismarck-brown,
or with aurantia, nigrosin, and other aniline dyes. The following
method will, however, be found most instructive:—Use freshly
prepared saturated solution of fuchsin or methyl-violet in absolute
alcohol, and put a drop with a pipette on the centre of the prepara-
tion ; do not disturb the drop-form for a few moments ; then, before
the alcohol has evaporated, wash off the excess of stain. It will be
found that where the drop rested the organisms will be very deeply
stained, while in the surrounding area the colour will vary in
intensity. By the effect of the different degrees of staining much
Fic. 242,—Monaps 1n Rat’s Bioop sTaINED WITH METHYL VIOLET, SHOWING
MEMBRANE UNDER DIFFERENT ASPECTS, BLOOD-CoRPUSCLES, SOME CRE-
NATED AND Sta1nED Discs (x 1200).
may be learnt (Fig. 242). In one organism the body and entire
membrane will be equally stained; in another the margin of-the
membrane only. In some the posterior stiff filament is stained,
and at its base a darkly stained speck is very striking; and in
other cases, again, the posterior filament is only faintly tinged, or
an unstained spot occurs near its base.
Hamatozoa oF Fisx.
In the year 1883 Mitrophanow published a paper in which he
gave an account of organisms in the blood of the mud-fish and the
carp.
In the blood of the mud-fish (Cobitis fossilis) the organisms at
the first glance looked like minute nematodes, but the appearances
and changes which took place on further examination showed
nothing in common with worms (Fig. 243). As a 1 per cent. salt
solution had been added to the blood under examination, it occurred
604 APPENDICES,
to Mitrophanow that they were possibly the cytozoa described by
Gaule; but this idea was dismissed by the fact that they were
found in blood to which no salt solution was added. Their size
varied from 30 to 40 » in length and 1 to 14 p» in width. At first
their rapid movements baffled examination, but as the rapidity
lessened there was the appearance of a curling movement in the
‘body portion and a swinging movement of the lash. The organism
moved in the direction of the lash, the anterior end of the body
being more pointed than the posterior, and gradually fining off into
the lash. When the body seemed to rest, the lash might be seen to
Fic. 243.—ORGANISMS IN THE BLoop or Mup-FIsH (Hematomonas cobitis). a, First
variety ; b, second variety; c, third variety. d, First variety in a state of
diminished activity. e, The same after treatment with osmic acid. (Mitro-
phanow.)
whip out in all directions. As the movement of the body gradually
diminished, it appeared to have a complicated screw form, the axis
of the serew corresponding to the body to which an undulating
membrane is fastened spirally. This could be distinguished when
the organism was dying, because the body in death contracted, and
the membrane then looked like a spiral addition. Thus the
organism consisted of a body, a spiral membrane, and a flagellum.
With higher magnification the organism appeared to consist of a
refractive, strongly contractile protoplasmic substance, which, when
death occurred, formed a shapeless mass. In the same blood two
other forms were observed: one without a membrane, but having
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 605
two highly refractive spherules in the protoplasm ; and another with
neither membrane nor flagellum, consisting of very granular proto-
plasm with several refractive spherules, and capable of protruding
processes like pseudopodia.
In the carp (Fig. 244) the parasite is perceptibly larger, and
possesses an undulating membrane fastened along the edge of the
long body. When the body bent first towards one side and then to
the other, a wave-like movement was observable at the free edge of
this membrane.
These parasites were found in all the mud-fish examined except
‘ Fic. 244.—ORGANISMS IN THE BLoop oF THE CARP.
| a, 6; c, Hematomonas carassti ; d, e, f, g, h, other organisms in the same blood
_ (Mitrophanow).
one, and in greater numbers in the hot months. In the carp
they were only found occasionally. Mitrophanow described other
varieties, which he considered were possibly not complete organisms,
but developmental forms. He considered that these organisms were
infusoria between the genera Cercomonas and Trichomonas, with
great similarity to the Trichomonas described in the Lieberkuhn’s
glands of fowls and ducks (Eberth).
On account of their special habitat, Mitrophanow suggested a
new genus— Hematomonas, defining this genus as follows :—Parasites
of normal fish-blood, worm-like, actively moving organisms, with
indistinct differentiation of body parenchyma. Bodies pointed at
606 APPENDICES.
both ends, 30 to 40 p long and 1 to 14 » wide. May possess in
front a flagellum, and on one side an undulating membrane.
Species :—
Hematomonas cobitis.—Body provided with a spiral membrane
and a flagellum at the fore-end. Parenchyma of body homogeneous.
Second variety, body and flagellum only. Movement undulatory,
body containing highly refractive spherules. Third variety, plasma-
like body, without membrane or flagellum; quickly changes form
by sending out processes laterally, and contains two to four refractive
spherules. Blood of mud-fish.
Hematomonas carassiii—Long bodies, with narrow membrane
attached along the whole length; less actively motile. Several
forms also observed strikingly smaller than the above; many disc-
shaped. Often seen attached to a red corpuscle, setting them in
motion by their movements. Blood of carp.
The morphological identity of the rat and Surra parasites has been
established by the author, and both seem morphologically identical
with the organism of Mitrophanow. If we follow Mitrophanow, we
must obviously enlarge his genus of Hematomonas. The author does
not agree with Mitrophanow in the advisability of adopting this
entirely new generic name. Mitrophanow suggested this new term
because of the special habitat, normal fish-blood, of the species he
discovered. But the characteristic features of these organisms are the
characteristic marks of the genus Trichomonas. It seems, therefore,
that they are embraced by the old genus, Trichomonas, and that there
is no need to create a new one—Hematomonas. The common habitat
of these species may be expressed by grouping them together in one
sub-genus—Trichomonas sanguinis ; but the question arises whether
they are distinct species. If it were not for the different description
given by Mitrophanow of the organism in the mud-fish, the author
would be inclined to say that all these organisms belonged to one and
the same species, which might well be named Trichomonas sanguinis.
The monad in the rat and the Surra parasite are morphologically
identical with each other, and both, as far as one can judge from
the description, morphologically identical with the monad in the
blood of the carp. We have, however, seen that the organism in
Surra is believed to be pathogenic, and too much stress must not be
laid on morphological identity. There is strong evidence in favour
of believing in its’ pathogenic properties; but at the same time it
must be borne in mind that the organism has never been isolated
apart from the blood, and the disease then produced by its introduc-
tion into healthy animals. It is quite possible that the parasites in
ANIMAL ‘MICRO-PARASITES. 607
Surra are only associated with the disease, the impoverished blood
affording a suitable nidus for their development, while the con-
taminated water may be the common source of the organism and of
the disease. On the other hand, the organism in the rat is found in
apparently perfectly healthy, well-nourished animals. The author
suggests that the parasites observed in the rat and hamster should
be named after Lewis, Trichomonas Lewist; the organism in the
mule, camel and horse after its discoverer, Trichomonas Evansi;
and that the names Z'richomonas cobitis and Trichomonas carassit
should be substituted for the names of the species described by
Mitrophanow. Thus we should have added provisionally to the
Genus—TRICHOMONAS.
Sub-genus—Trichomonas sanguinis. Definition: Elongated
tapering bodies, provided with a spiral (Z. coditis), or
longitudinal (7. carassii, Lewisi, Hvansi) membrane, ter-
Minating in a rigid filament and an anterior flagellum.
Highly polymorphic. Habitat, the blood.
Species.—Trichomonas cobitis (Hamatomonas cobitis
Mitrophanow)—Mud-fish.
Trichomonas carassit (Hematomonas carassit
Mitrophanow)—Carp.
Trichomonas Lewisi (Herpetomonas Lewisi
Kent)—Rat, hamster.
Trichomonas Evansi—(Spirocheta Evansi
Steel)—Horse, mule, camel ; (pathogenic ?).
Hamatozoa OF THE FRoG.
Lankester described an. organism which he had discovered in the
blood of the frog (Rana esculenta). It consisted of a minute pyri-
form sac, with the narrower end bent round on itself somewhat
spirally, and the broader end spread out into a thin membrane,
which exhibited four or five folds and was prolonged on one side into
a very long flagellum. The wall of the sac was striated, nucleated
and granular; the membrane undulated during life, and the
flagellum was also motile. It was named Undulina ranarum, but
subsequently recognised as idnetical with Z'rypanosoma sanguinis
described by Gruby. In the same blood Lankester also discovered
little oblong bodies, in many cases attached to the end of the red
corpuscles, and suggested a genetical connection with the Undulina,
608 APPENDICES.
One or more motionless filaments were occasionally observed attached
to these bodies. Gaule subsequently observed the same bodies, and
regarded them as resulting from the metamorphosis of the cells of
the frog’s blood. Gaule’s observations were refuted by Lankester in
1882, the parasitic nature insisted upon, and the organism named
Drepanidium ranarwm. Lankester suggested that they were
probably the young stage of a sporozoon allied to Sarcocystis or to
Coccidium
APPENDIX ITI.
PSOROSPERMS OR COCCIDIA.—AMGBA COLI.
PsoRosPERMS OR COCCIDIA.
GREYISH-WHITE nodules may occasionally be found in the liver of a
rabbit, the result of a disease which may be mistaken for tuber-
culosis, This disease often™ proves fatal, and may occur in an
epidemic form in rabbit warrens. The nodules have cheesy or
purulent contents, which are found, on microscopical examination,
to contain great quantities of Coccidium oviforme.
The coccidia pass from the intestine into the bile-ducts. The
walls of the bile-ducts become dilated and folded; and irregular
cavities result from the partial or complete disappearance of the
dividing walls of the altered ducts. The folds are composed of
connective tissues lined with columnar epithelium, and the coccidia,
in different stages of development, are found between the cells, and
free in the cavities of the nodules.
The individual coccidia are egg-shaped bodies. They possess a
thick smooth shell, with an opening, or micropyle, at one end, and
protoplasmic contents which may completely fill the capsule or be
collected into a spherical mass.
After passing from the liver and intestine, these oval bodies
undergo a further development. According to Leuckart, who has
very fully described this parasite, the protoplasmic contents divide
into four masses, and from each is developed a C-shaped hyaline
rod, the cavity of which is occupied by closely packed granules. In
this condition they remain until they gain access to a fresh host.
Coccidium oviforme has been found in the human liver, and also
in sheep, dogs, and cats. Similar, but not identical, bodies occur in
mice, and also in fish and other cold-blooded animals.
Miescher’s tubes are peculiar structures found in swine, cattle,
sheep, deer, and mice. They consist of a firm envelope inclosing a
number of reniform or bean-shaped bodies.
609 39
610 APPENDICES.
Pfeiffer’s bodies—Pfeiffer has described certain appearances
which he attributes to coccidia, in epithelial cells in small-pox,
vaccinia, and other vesicular diseases. They are probably only
derived from the cell nucleus, and are not parasites.
Cancer bodies.—In sections of malignant growths stained by
aniline dyes, certain bodies have been found and minutely described
and figured by various investigators, and a causal relation sug-
gested. Darier first described bodies like cysts, with spores, in
Paget’s disease of the nipple. Wickham found similar structures
and figured them. Nils Sjobring described a cancer parasite, and
illustrated his researches with plates. Russell drew attention to
certain bodies in cancerous tumours, with a great affinity for
fuchsine. Soudakewitch, Podwyssozki, Sawtschenko, Ruffer, and
Walker have, among others, contributed to the literature of the so-
called cancer parasites. These bodies appear in the form of refractile
spherical elements, which stain well with reagents, such as the
Ehrlich-Biondi stain. Sections are left in this stain for twenty-four
hours, washed in alcohol, cleared in xylol, and mounted in xylol
balsam. The spherical bodies have sometimes a radiate appearance,
These bodies have not been cultivated, and inoculation experiments
with cancerous tissue have been negative. The opinion is now very
generally held that these bodies are not parasites, but that changes
occur in the cells and nuclei, resulting in the formation of peculiar
structures, which have been brought to light by the use of aniline
dyes and complex staining methods. We are justified in concluding
that the cause of cancer is unknown.
Ballance and Shattock have made repeated attempts to cultivate
parasitic protozoa from malignant tumours, and they have extended
their researches to vaccinia and molluscum contagioswm, but with
negative results. Sand and water were used as the medium for
these experiments. Cultivations were made from nine scirrhous
carcinomata of the breast, five sarcomata from different sources, two
melanotic sarcomata from horses, and a sarcoma from a dog. In
every instance the result was negative. No traces of protozoic life
could be found, in spite of examinations at regular intervals, and
repeated for periods of many months.
AmcesBa Cot,
Lésch, Grassi, Kartulis, and others have described an amceba in
the intestines of patients suffering from dysentery. Liésch adminis-
tered the fresh dejecta of a patient containing the amcebe to dogs,
ANIMAL MICRO-PARASITES. 611
and in one case a mucous mass was passed containing a number
of amebe. Eighteen days afterwards the dog was killed, and the
mucous membrane of the intestine was reddened, swollen, and
Fic. 245.—Ama@spa Cour 1n Intestinat Mucus (LOscu).
ulcerated in three places. The mucus in the rectum and in the
ulcers contained numerous amebe., Cunningham, who has found
the ameebe in choleraic and other cases, and in the intestine of the
cow and horse, does not attach any importance to their presence.
APPENDIX IV.
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS EMPLOYED
IN A BACTERIOLOGICAL LABORATORY.
(A) Hisrotocica, Apparatus,
Microscope.—For the investigation of micro-organisms a good
microscope with oil-immersion system and a condenser, such as
Abbée’s, is essential. Such instruments are supplied by Zeiss, Leitz,
Reichert & Hartnack in Germany, and Powell & Lealand, Swift
& Baker in England. Zeiss supplies a micrometer eyepiece, with
directions for use. Some such arrangement is essential for the
measurement of bacteria. Other accessories to the microscope are:
A large bell-glass, for covering the microscope when not in use.
About a foot square of blackened plate-glass,
A white porcelain slab of the same size.
Glass bottles, with ground-glass stoppers, for alcoholic solutions of
aniline dyes, etc.
Glass bottles, with funnels, for aqueous solutions of the dyes, and
others provided with pipettes.
A small rod-stoppered bottle of cedar oil, This is recommended by
Zeiss in preference to other oils for his immersion lenses,
Set of small glass dishes or capsules and watch-glasses, for section-
staining, etc,
Stock of best glass slides, in packets of fifty.
Several boxes of round and square thin cover-glasses, in various sizes,
of the best quality.
Needle-holders, with a couple of platinum needles, and a packet of
ordinary sewing-needles.
Glass rods drawn out to a fine point ; useful for manipulating sections
when acids are employed.
Platinum or plated copper section-lifters.
One pair of small brass or spring-steel platinum-pointed forceps, for
holding cover-glasses.
One pair of brass tongs.
612
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 613
Collapsible tubes, for containing Canada balsain ; very serviceable for
transport and general use. _ "i
Turn-table for sealing cover-glass preparations, with rings of cement.
Boxes for preparations, book-form.
Tickets and labels, various sizes.
Soft rags or old pocket-handkerchiefs, for removing cedar oil from
immersion lens, cleaning cover-glasses, etc.
Chamois leather for wiping lenses.
Warm Stages.—In addition to those already described, Schafer
and Stricker have constructed warm stages for accurate observations.
Schifer’s apparatus consists of a vessel (/), filled with water which
has been boiled to expel the air, and heated by means of a gas-flame
at g. The warmed water ascends the indiarubber tube (c) to the
Fic. 246.—Scu4rer’s Warm Stace.
brass box (a). The box is pierced by a tubular aperture to admit
light to the object, and has an exit tube (c'), by which the cooled
water from the stage returns to be reheated by the flame g. At d
is a gas-regulator, so that a constant temperature at any desired
point.can be maintained.
Stricker’s stage, in which warm water or steam can be used for
heating, and by the employment of iced water also used for observing
the effects of cold, is shown in Fig. 247. It consists of a hollow
rectangular box, with a central opening (C’) permitting the passage
of light. The water makes its exit and entrance at the side tubes
(a, a), and the temperature is indicated by a thermometer in front.
614 APPENDICES.
A more complicated apparatus, combining both a warm stage
and a gas chamber, is shown in Fig. 248. This consists of a rect-
angular piece of ebonite (# £) fixed to a brass plate which rests
on the stage of the microscope. On the upper surface of the ebonite
is another brass plate (P), with an aperture (C’) leading into a brass
-
ES Tro nn
Fic. 247.—StTRicKER’s Warm STAGE.
tube closed below by a piece of glass. To heat the apparatus the
copper wire B is placed on the tube a, and its extremity heated by
the flame of the lamp. The nearer the lamp to the stage the higher
the temperature, which is indicated by the thermometer (¢). To
aw
alo 3|o
Fic. 248.—Stricker’s CoMBINED GAS CHAMBER AND Warm Stace.
employ it as a gas chamber the wire B is laid aside, and the gas
is conducted into the chamber by the tube a’, and escapes by the
tube a.
Microtome.—Schanze’s is much in favour in Germany, but
Jung’s of Heidelberg, though a somewhat cumbrous instrument, is
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 615
preferred by many workers, Smaller accessories, which should be
within reach, are—
A small can of sewing-machine oil.
A soft rag and chamois leather, for wiping the knives immediately
after use. :
Stone and leather, for setting and sharpening the same.
Two or three camel’s-hair brushes.
A freezing microtome is very useful: such as Swift’s, which is
used by the author; and the method of embedding in celloidin is
combined with the ordinary process of freezing.
(B) Reacents anp MarertaL Empioyep IN THE PROCESSES OF
Harpentne, Decatciryine, Empeppine, Fixine anp Currine
oF TIssuEs.
Aleohol, absolute.
Bergamot oil.
Celloidin.
Dissolved in equal parts of ether and alcohol.
Cork, or stock of ready-cut corks.
Ebner’s solution. A mixture in the following proportions :—
Hydrochloric acid . ‘ : ; ‘ ; . 3
Alcohol ‘5 F F F : F : : 100
Distilled water. : : . 20
Chloride of sodium ; s 7 : F 5
Formalin.
Gelatine.
Melted in a small porcelain capsule, and set aside ready to be
re-melted when required for use.
Glycerine gelatine (Klebs).
Best well-washed gelatine . 10
Add distilled water, allow palatine: to swell up, pour
off excess of water, melt gelatine with gentle heat,
add
Glycerine . 10
Lastly, a few dap of heuel for pomeceation:
Gum.
616 APPENDICES.
Kleinenberg’s solution.
Saturated watery solution of picric acid , . 100
Strong sulphuric acid . : : ; ; 2
Filter, and add
Distilled water. ; ; 3 ; ‘ . 300
Miiller’s fluid.
Bichromate of potash . : ; ‘ ; ; 2
Sulphate of sodium : i ; ‘ ‘ : 1
Distilled water ‘ : . 100
Osmic acid.
Distilled water. : ; ; i . 100
Osmic acid . 3 3 : : : ; D
Paper trays (or small glass capsules).
Paraffine.
Spermaceti.
Xylol.
(C) Reacents ror Examinina anp Srarnina MicroscoPicaL
PREPARATIONS.
. Acetic acid, strong.
. Alcohol, absolute.
. Alcohol, 60 per cent.
. Alcohol, acidulated.
Alcohol . : . : ‘ ; : , 100
Hydrochloric acid. 5 : : ; : 1
em ww bp
5. Alum Carmine (Grenacher).
Carmine . ‘ : : : 1
Five per cent. sstatiow of alate ‘ . 100
Boil twenty minutes; filter when ead:
6. Ammonia, strong.
7. Aniline.
8. Aniline water.
Distilled water : ; F : . 100
Aniline . F ; : ‘ : ; 5
Shake well, and filter emulsion.
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS, 617
9. Bismarck-brown.
(a) Concentrated solution in equal parts of glycerine and water.
(6) Aqueous solution.
Bismarck-brown . ‘ ‘ : f 2
Alcohol . i : ; . : ; » ¥5
Distilled water 7 ss - : : . 85
10. Borax-carmine (Grenacher).
Borax . 3 ‘ ‘ : : : : 2
Carmine . F : : 3 . é 4 5
Distilled water : 2 : : . 100
To the dark purple solution add a 5 per cent. solution of acetic
acid until a red colour is produced; set aside twenty-four hours ;
filter, and add a drop of carbolic acid.
11. Cedar oil.
12, Ehrlich-Biondi solution (Heidenhain).
To
Saturated aqueous solution of Orange. G. 100
Add
Saturated aqueous solution of Rubin. 8. . . 20
re * ‘9 Methyl-green. OO. 50
To the mixture 5 , : F : 1
Add water. : F 2 : . 100
13. Eosin.
(a) Saturated alcoholic solution.
(6) Aqueous solution.
Distilled water. : ; : . 100
Eosin Z é : ; 3 5
14, Ether.
15. Fuchsine.
(a) Saturated alcoholic solution.
(6) Aqueous solution.
Fuchsine . ; ‘ : : . ; : 2
Alcohol . é ‘ : . 15
Water . : ‘ ; : . ‘ . 85
16. Gentian-violet.
(a) Saturated alcoholic solution.
(6) Aqueous solution.
Gentian-violet . : : , ‘ 2°25
Distilled water : i : : . 100
618 APPENDICES.
17. Gibbes’ solution, for double staining.
Take of
Rosaniline hydrochlorate .
Methylene-blue
Triturate in a glass mortar.
Dissolve aniline oil .
In rectified spirit
and add slowly to the above
Lastly, slowly add distilled water
Keep in stoppered bottle.
18. Giycerine, pure.
19, Hematoxylin solution.
Hematoxylin .
Alcohol .
Distilled water
Glycerine
Alum
20. Iodine solution.
Iodine, pure
Todide of potassium .
Distilled water
21. Iodine solution ee,
Todine
Iodide of pemcud,
Distilled water
22, Lithium-carmine solution (Orth).
Saturated solution of carbonate of lithium
Carmine .
23. Magenta solution (Gibbes).
Magenta.
Aniline oil
Alcohol (sp. gr. 830)
Distilled water
24, Methylene-blue.
(a) Concentrated alcoholic solution.
(6) Aqueous solution.
Methylene-blue
Alcohol .
Water
15
85
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS.
{c) Koch’s solution.
Concentrated alcoholicsolution of methylene-blue
Ten per cent. potash solution
Distilled water
(d) Liffler’s solution.
Concentrated alcoholic solution of methylene-blue
Solution of potash, 1 to 10,000
25. Methyl-violet.
(a) Concentrated alcoholic solution.
(6) Aqueous solution.
Methyl-violet .
Distilled water
(c) Koch’s solution.
Aniline water .
Alcoholic solution of cach: ae
Absolute alcohol
26. Neelsen’s solution.
Dissolve fuchsine
In alcohol
Add a 5 per cent. watery soigben of eapbone acid
27, Nitric acid, pure.
28. Orseille (Wedl).
Dissolve pure ammonia-free orseille in
Absolute alcohol
Acetic acid
Distilled water : “
until a dark red liquid oo Filter.
29. Piecric acid.
(a) Concentrated alcoholic solution.
(b) Saturated aqueous solution.
30. Picro-carmine (Ranvier).
Carmine .
Distilled water
Solution of ammonia
Triturate; add cold saturated saiveion ae picric
acid
30
100
20
40
200
619
620 APPENDICES.
31. Picro-lithium-carmine (Orth).
To above-mentioned lithium-carmine solution
add saturated solution of picric acid. . 23
32. Potash solution.
(a) 1to3 per cent.
(0) 10 ” ”
(c) 33 ” ”
33. Safranine.
(a) Concentrated alcoholic solution.
(6) Watery solution . ; : d . 1 per cent.
34, Sulphuric acid, pure.
35. Salt solution ‘ : ; . 0°8 per cent.
36. Turpentine.
37. Vesuvin.
(a) Concentrated alcoholic solution.
(6) Watery solution.
Water, distilled.
Water, sterilised.
Distilled water can be kept for use in a wash bottle, or far
better in a siphon apparatus. Sterilised water is convenient in
plugged sterile test-tubes, which may be kept close at hand in a
beaker, or tumbler, with a pad of cotton wool at the bottom. The
numbered reagents can be conveniently arranged on shelves within
easy reach. Alcoholic solutions of the aniline dyes and other special
preparations should be kept in bottles with ground-glass stoppers.
Aqueous solutions of the dyes may be kept in bottles with funnel
filters, and the solution filtered before use. To both aqueous and
alcoholic solutions a few drops of phenol, or a crystal of thymol,
should be added as a preservative. For the rapid staining of cover-
glass preparations, it is convenient also to have the most frequently
used stains (fuchsine, methyl-violet) in bottles provided with pipette
stoppers.
(D) Reagents ror Mounrine AND PresERvinc Preparations,
Acetate of potash.
Concentrated solution,
Asphalte lac.
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 621
Canada balsam.
Dissolved in xvlol.
Glycerine gum (Farrant’s solution),
Glycerine.
Waiter.
Saturated solution of arsenious acid.
Equal parts ; mix, and add of picked gum arabic half a part.
Hollis’ glue.
Zinc-white.
(E) Drawixe axp PuorograPHic APPARATUS.
Camera Lucida.—The camera lucida of Zeiss is an excellent
instrument, though many prefer the pattern made by Nachet of
Paris. Combined with the use of a micromillimeter objective, it
affords also a simple method for the measurement of bacteria.
For drawing microscopical appearances, and for illustrating
microscopical specimens with or without the use of a camera lucida,
the following materials should be within reach :-—
Pencils.
Etching pens.
Prepared Indian ink.
Water-colour painis and brushes.
Ordinary and tinted drawing paper and other usual accessories.
Photo-micrographic Apparatus.—Zeiss of Jena, Seibert &
Kraft of Wetzlar, Nachet of Paris, and Swift & Son of London, may
all be recommended for constructing an arrangement in which the
photographie camera is combined with the microscope.
The best models have been described fully in the chapter on
Photography of Bacteria. The accompanying figure (Fig. 249)
illustrates a model in which the microscope is used in the vertical
position.
For illumination either sunlight or artificial light may be em-
plored. In the case of sunlight a heliostat is necessary to procure
the best results ; but as sunlight is not always available by day, and
it is also more convenient for many to work at night, it is better to
have recourse altogether to artificial light. Excellent results may
be obtained with an ordinary paraffine lamp, or with magnesium,
oxycalcium, or electric light.
622 APPENDICES.
mi a i ii
Fic. 249.—VeErRticaL Micro-PHoTocRaPHic APPARATUS.
(F) Srerisarion APPARATUS.
Steam-steriliser.—A cylindrical vessel of tin about half a metre
or more in height, jacketed with thick felt, and provided with a
conical cap or lid (Fig. 250). The lid is also covered with felt, has.
handles on either side, and is perforated at the apex, to receive a
thermometer. Inside the vessel is an iron grating or diaphragm
about two-thirds the way down, which divides the interior into
two chambers—the upper or “ steam-chamber,” and the lower or
“ water-chamber.” A gauge outside marks the level of the water
in the lower chamber; this should be kept about two-thirds full.
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 623.
The apparatus stands upon three legs, and is heated from below with
Fic. 250.—Kocn’s Srram-
STERILISER.
dicated by a thermometer inserted through SPahtans
a hole in the roof; in a second opening a Maw Sa ee
gas regulator can be fixed. Test-tubes, at holt
flasks, funnels, cotton
sterilised by exposure to a temperature ie
of 150° C. for an hour or more.
two or three Bunsen burners, or a Fletcher’s
burner. It is employed for sterilising
nutrient media in tubes or flasks, for cooking
potatoes, or hastening the filtration of agar-
agar, When the thermometer indicates.
100° C. the lid is removed, and test-tubes
are lowered in a wire basket by means of
a hook and string, and the lid quickly re-
placed. Potatoes or small flasks are lowered
into the cylinder in a tin receiver with a
perforated bottom, which rests upon the
grating and admits of its contents being
exposed to the steam. A larger model is.
shown in Fig. 33.
Hot-air Steriliser.—A cubical chest of
sheet iron with double walls, supported on.
four legs ; it may also be suspended on the
wall of the laboratory, with a sheet of
asbestos intervening (Figs. 251 and 252).
It is heated with a rose gas-burner from
below, and the temperature of the interior in-
wool, etc., may be
Fic. 252.—Srction or Hot-
Fic. 251.—Hot-ark STERILISER. AIR STERILISER.
624 APPENDICES,
(G) Apparatus anD Materia ror PREPARING AND SroRING
Nvrrient GELATINE AND Nurrient AGAR-AGaR.
Water-bath,— A water-bath on tripod stand is required for
boiling the ingredients of nutrient jellies and for general purposes.
The lid may be conveniently composed of a series of concentric
rings, so that the mouth of the vessel may be graduated to any
size required.
Test-tube Water-bath.—This consists of a circular rack for
test-tubes within a water-bath. It is sometimes employed instead
of the steam cylinder for sterilising nutrient jelly in tubes, by
boiling for an hour for three successive days.
Hot-water Filter.—A copper
funnel with double walls, the inter-
space between which is filled with
hot water. A glass funnel fits in-
side the copper cone, the stem of
the glass funnel passing through
and being tightly gripped by a per-
forated caoutchouc plug, which fits
in the opening at the apex of the
cone. The water in the cone is
heated by applying the flame of a
burner to a tubular prolongation
of the water-chamber. In a more
recent model, as represented in
Fig. 31, this prolongation is dis-
pensed with, and the temperature is
maintained by means of a circular
burner which acts at the same time
as a funnel ring. In Rohrbeck’s
model the funnel of the filter is
connected with a flask, from which
the test-tubes can be easily filled with the liquid jelly (Fig. 253).
Glass Vessels.—A number of glass vessels should be kept in
stock according to requirements.
Bohemian hard glass flasks are employed in several sizes, for
boiling nutrient media. The conical forms are especially used in the
larger sizes for storing nutrient jelly.
Glass funnels, large and small, are necessary, not only in the
processes of preparing nutrient jelly, but for filtering solutions of
aniline dyes and for general purposes.
Fic. 253.—Hor-water FILTERine
APPARATUS WITH RinGc BURNER .
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 625
A liberal supply of test-tubes should:always be kept in stock, as
they are not only employed for the tube-cultivations, but can be
conveniently used for storing bouillon, sterilised water, ete.
Cylindrical glasses graduated in cubic centimetres, 10 ccm., 100
cem., 500 cem., are required for measuring the liquid ingredients
of nutrient jelly, and also in preparing the various staining
solutions.
A large wide-mouthed glass jar, with a glass cover, is extremély
useful. It must be padded at the bottom with cotton wool for
containing a stock of tubes of sterilised nutrient jelly, and should
be placed within reach on the working table.
Balance and Weights.—A balance, with large pans and set of
" “gramme weights, is constantly required.
Cotton Wool.——The best or “ medicated” cotton wool should be
procured.
Gelatine.—The gelatine for bacteriological purposes must be of
the very best quality (gold label).
Agar-agar.—This is also called Japanese Isinglass; it consists
of the shrivelled filaments of certain Alge (Gracilaria lichenoides
and Gigartina speciosa).
Peptonum Siccum.
Table Salt.—Prepared table salt can be obtained in-tins or
packets.
Litmus Papers.—Blue or red litmus paper in cheque-books, for
testing the gelatine mixture, etc.
Carbonate of Soda.—A bottle, containing a saturated solution
of carbonate of soda, and provided with a pipette stopper, may be
kept, especially for use in the preparation of nutrient jelly.
Lactie Acid.
Filter Paper.—For filtering gelatine, stout Swedish filter paper
of the best quality is recommended.
Flannel or Frieze.—This is employed as a substitute for, or
combined with, filter paper in the preparation of nutrient agar-
agar. :
(H) Apparatus For EmpLoyMent oF Nutrient JELLY In TEst-TUBE
AND PLATE-CULTIVATIONS.
Wire Cages.—These cages or crates are used for containing
test-tubes, especially when they are to be sterilised in the hot-air
steriliser ; or for lowering tubes of nutrient jelly into the steam-
steriliser, etc. (Fig. 254).
40
626 APPENDICES.
Test-tube Stands.—The ordinary wooden pattern, or the
metallic folding stands, are called into use
for holding cultivations. Pegged racks are
also recommended for draining test-tubes
after washing.
Caoutchouc Caps.—tThese are caps for
fitting over the cotton-wool plugs, and may
be used in different sizes for test-tubes and
stock-flasks.
Platinum Needles.—A platinum
‘needle for inoculating nutrient media, ex-
Fig. 254.—Wire Caczk = amining cultivations, etc., consists of two or
ee three inches of platinum wire fixed to the
end of a glass rod. Several of these needles should be made with
platinum wire of various thicknesses. A piece of glass rod, about
seven inches long, is heated at the extreme point inthe flame of
Fic. 255.—Piatinum NEEDLES; StRarcuHt, HooKep, Loorep.
a Bunsen burner, and a piece of. platinum wire, held near one
extremity with forceps, is then fused into the end of the rod.
Some needles should be perfectly straight, and kept especially for
Fic. 256.—Damp CHAMBER FOR PLATE-CULTIVATIONS.
inoculating test-tubes of nutrient. jelly. For other purposes the
needles may be bent at the extremity. into a small hook, and
others provided with a loop (Fig. 255).
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 627
Tripod Levelling-stand.—-A triangular wooden frame sup-
ported upon three screw-feet which enable it to be raised or lowered.
to adjust the level.
iE :
Th
Fic. 257.—APPARATUS EMPLOYED FOR PLATE-CULTIVATIONS.
Tripod Stand ; Glass Dish, filled with cold or iced water ; Sheet of Plate-glass >
Spirit Level, and Glass Bell.
Large Glass Plate.—A piece of plate-glass, or a pane of
ordinary window-glass, about a foot square.
Spirit Level. 7
Glass Bells and Dishes.—Shallow glass bells"and dishes, for
making a dozen or more damp chambers
(Fig. 256), and for completing the apparatus ; (a
for pouring out liquefied nutrient jelly on z
glass plates or slides (Fig. 257). -
Iron Box.—A box of sheet-iron
(Fig. 258), for containing glass plates during
their sterilisation in the hot-air steriliser,
and for storing them until required for use.
Glass Plates.—Small panes of glass,
about six inches by four. Not less than Fic. 258.—Box For
three dozen are required for a dozen damp Gass PLatss.
chambers.
‘Glass Benches.—These are necessary for arranging the glass
plates or slides in tiers in the damp chambers (Fig. 256). Metal.
Fic. 259.—Giass BENCHES FOR GLASS PLaTEs oR SLIDES.
shelves may be substituted for them, but the former are to be
preferred. They can be easily made, in any number required, by
$28 APPENDICES.
cementing a little piece of plate-glass at either end of a glass
Slip (Fig. 259).
Glass Rods.—One dozen or more glass rods, twelve to eighteen
inches in length. They are employed for smoothly spreading out
the liquefied nutrient gelatine or agar-agar on the glass plates, ete.
Thermometers.—Two or three centigrade thermometers.
(1) Apparatus ror PREPARATION OF PoTaTO-CULTIVATIONS.
Israel’s Case.-— Sterilising instruments in the flame of a Bunsen
burner is most destructive. It is better, therefore, to have a sheet-
iron case (Fig. 260) to
contain potato-knives,
scalpels and other in-
struments, and to ster-
ilise them by placing
the case in the hot-air
steriliser for an hour
at 150° C. The box
Ng ee : can be opened at the
Fic. 260.—IsRAEL's Case. side, and each instru-
ment withdrawn with
a pair of sterilised forceps when required for ase
Glass Dishes.—Several shallow glass dishes are required for
preparing damp chambers for potato-cultivations (Fig. 261). The
upper, being the larger, fits
over the lower, and having
no handle, admits of these
damp chambers being placed,
if necessary, in the incubator
in tiers. The large size may
also be used in the same
way for plate-cultivations. Fic. 261.—Damp CHAMBER FoR PoraTo-
Potato Knives.—A alcatel
common broad smooth-bladed knife set in a wooden handle is sold
for this- purpose.
Scalpels.— Half a dozen scalpels, preferably with metal handles,
may be kept especially for inoculating sterilised potatoes.
Brush.—A common stout nail-brush, or small scrubbing-brush,
is essential for cleansing potatoes.
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS, 629
(J) Apparatus FoR Preparation or Sonpirien STERILE
Bioop-sERUM.
Glass Jar.—A tall cylindrical glass jar, on foot, with a broad
ground stopper, for receiving blood.
Pipette.—An ordinary or graduated pipette, for transferring the
serum from the jars to sterile test-tubes or glass capsules.
Koch’s Serum Ster-
iliser.—A cylindrical case,
with double walls forming an
interspace to contain water,
closed with a lid, also double-
walled and provided with a
tubular prolongation of the
enclosed water-chamber (Fig.
262). The water in the
cylinder is heated from below,
and that in the lid by means
of the prolongation.
In the centre of the
cylinder is a column which
communicates with the water-
chamber of the cylinder, and
from it pass four partitions,
which serve to support the
-test-tubes. Fic, 262.—Kocn’s Szrum STERILISER.
In the lid are three
openings, one of which communicates with the water-chamber in the
lid by which the latter is filled, and into which a thermometer is
then fixed. In the centre an
opening admits a thermo-
meter, which passes into the
central pipe of the cylinder ;
through a third opening a
thermometer passes to the
cavity of the cylinder. The
7 cylinder and cover are jacketed
with felt, and the apparatus
is supported on iron legs.
Koch’s Serum Inspis-
sator.—A shallow tin case
with glass cover, both case and cover jacketed with felt (Fig. 263)
Fic. 263.—Srerum INsPIssaTor.
630 APPENDICES.
The case is double-walled, and the water contained in the interspace
is heated from below. It is supported on four legs, and the two
front ones move in grooves in the case, so that the latter can be
placed obliquely at the angle required and secured in position by
screw-clamps. It is employed for coagulating sterile liquid serum,
and for solidifying nutrient agar-agar so as to give them a sloping
surface.
Hueppe’s Serum Inspissator.—By the new process the serum
is obtained with every possible precaution, and solidified at once in
Hueppe’s apparatus (Fig. 44).
Glass Capsules.—Small capsules. or hollowed-out cubes of
crystal-glass are employed for cultivation on solid blood-serum, on
nutrient gelatine, and on agar-agar. They may be procured of
white and blackened glass, and are provided with glass slips as
covers.
(K) APPARATUS FOR SrorING, AND FoR CuLTiIvaTions IN, LiquiID
Mepia.
Lister’s Flasks.—Lister devised a globe-shaped flask with two
necks—a vertical and a lateral one. The lateral one is a bent spout,
tapering towards its constricted extremity. When the vessel is
restored to the erect position after pouring out some of its contents,
a drop of liquid remains behind in the end of the nozzle, and
prevents the regurgitation of air through the spout. A cap of
cotton wool is tied over the orifice, and the residue in the flask kept
for future use. The vertical neck of the flask is plugged with
sterilised cotton wool in the ordinary way (Fig. 60).
Sternberg’s Bulbs.—Sternberg advocates the use of a glass
bulb, provided with a slender neck drawn out to a fine point and
hermetically sealed (Fig. 62).
Aitken’s Test-tube.—This is an ingenious device for counter-
acting the danger of entrance of atmospheric germs on removal from
the ordinary test-tube of the cotton-wool plug. Each test-tube is
provided with a lateral arm tapering to a fine point, which is
hermetically sealed (Fig. 62).
Drop-culture Slides._-About a dozen or more thick glass
slides with a circular excavation in the centre are required for
drop-cultures (Fig. 48).
Vaseline.—A small pot of vaseline with a camel’s-hair brush
should be reserved especially for use in the preparation of drop-
cultures.
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 631
Bulbed Tubes.—Glass vessels, such as test-tubes, flasks
and pipettes, which are used in dealing with liquid media, have
already been mentioned under other headings; but bulbed tubes,
Pasteur’s bulbs, and various other forms are also required for special
experiments.
(L) Apparatus FoR IncuBATION.
There are several forms of incubator, each of which has its
advocates. They are mostly rectangular chests, with glass walls
front and back, or in front
only. A cylindrical model
is preferred by some. Two
only will be described
here—D’Arsonval’s and
Babés’. The former admits
of very exact regulation of
. temperature, and the latter
is a very practical form for
general use.
D’Arsonval’s Incu-
bator.—The “Ftuve
D Arsonval” (Fig. 264) is
a very efficient apparatus,
and is provided with a heat-
regulator, which enables
the temperature to be
maintained with a mini-
mum variation. It consists
of a cylindrical copper
vessel, with double walls,
enclosing a wide interspace
for containing a large
volume of water. The roof
of the water-chamber is Fic. 264.—D’Arsonva’s IncuBaTor.
oblique, so that the wall -
rises higher on one side than on aie other. This admits of the inter-
space being completely filled with water. At the highest point is
an opening fitted with a perforated caoutchouc stopper, through
which a glass tube passes. The mouth of the cylinder itself is
herizontal, and is closed by a lid, which is also double-walled to
contain water. In the lid are four openings: one serves for filling its
632 APPENDICES.
water-chamber, aud the others for thermometers and for regulating
the air supply in the cavity of the cylinder. The cylinder is con-
tinued below by a cone, also double-walled, and there is a perforated
grating at the line of junction of the cylinder and cone. The cone
terminates in a projecting tube provided with an adjustable
ventilator. The apparatus is fixed on three supports united to
one another below. One of them is utilised for adjusting the height
of the heating apparatus. Situated above this leg is the heat-
regulating apparatus (Fig. 265), attached to a circular, lipped
aperture in the outer wall of the
incubator. To the lip is fixed with
six screws the corresponding lip of
a brass box, with a tightly-stretched
diaphragm of indiarubber inter-
vening. Thus the diaphragm
separates the cavity of the box from
the water in the interspace of the
incubator. The cap of the box,
which screws on, is bored in the
Fig. 265,—Scuiosine’s MremMBRANE ; , :
REGULATOR. centre for the screw-pipe, by which
the gas is supplied. Another pipe
entering the box from below is connected with the gas-burners.
Around the end of the screw-pipe a collar loosely fits, and is pressed
against the diaphragm by means of a spiral wire spring. Close
to the mouth of the screw-pipe a small opening exists, so that the
gas supply to the burners. is not entirely cut off even when the
diaphragm completely occludes the mouth of the screw-pipe.
To work the apparatus the tube and plug must be removed, and
the. water-chamber filled completely with distilled or rain water at the
temperature required. The caoutchouc plug is replaced and the tube
placed in position. Gas enters through d (Fig. 265), and passes through the
opening at its extremity into the chamber of the box, Thence it passes
through the vertical exit which is connected with the gas-burners. As
the temperature rises the water rises in the tube, and at the same time
exercises a pressure on every part of the walls of the incubator, and
hence on the diaphragm. In consequence of this, the diaphragm bulging
outwards approaches the end of the tube d, and gradually diminishes the
gas supply. Asa result the temperature falls, the water contracts and
sinks in the tube, and the diaphragm receding from d, the gas supply
is again increased. By adjusting the position of the tube d to the
diaphragm, any required temperature within the limits of the working of
the apparatus can be regulated to the tenth of a degree—provided (1)
that the gas supply is rendered independent of fluctuations of pressure
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 633
by means of a gas-pressure regulator ; (2) that the height of the water
in the tube is controlled daily by the
withdrawal or addition of a few drops of
distilled water; and (3) that the apparatus
is kept in a place with as even a tempera-
ture as possible, and sheltered from currents
of air,
The burners in Fig. 264 are protected
with mica cylinders similar to the burner
represented in Fig. 266. The flames of Ges
these burners can be turned down to the |!
smallest length without danger of extinction,
and the temperature may be regulated very
satisfactorily without using the heat-regulator
just described, if the gas first passes through =
a pressure-regulator (Fig. 269). To provide F1¢. 266.—Gas-BURNER
against the danger resulting from accidental eens wily ee
extinction of the gas, Koch has devised a ;
self-acting apparatus (Fig. 267), which, simultaneously with the extinction
of the flame of the burner, shuts off the supply of gas.
= \
= mise —_
Fic. 267.—Kocu’s Sarety BURNER.
Babés’ Incubator.—The pattern used by Babés is a very
simple one, and may be recommended for economy and efficiency
(Fig. 268).
It consists of a double-walled chest with sides and roof jacketed
with felt. Water fills the interspace between the walls, and on
the roof are two apertures—one for a gas-regulator and the other
634
for a thermometer.
Fic. 268.—Basis’ IncubaTor.
APPENDICES.
In front the chest is closed in’ by a sheet
of felt, a glass door, and a sliding
glass panel. The apparatus can be
suspended on the wall or supported
on. legs, and is heated from below
by means of protected burners.
The gas should pass first through
a pressure-regulator, and then
through a thermo-regulator to the
burners.
Moitessier’s Gas - pressure
Regulator.—This apparatus is best
explained by reference to the dia-
gram (Fig. 269). In the bottom of
the cylinder (a) are the entrance ()
and exit (J) gas-tubes. The tap (m)
regulates the size of the flame. The
cover (n ) roofs in the cylinder (a).
The bell (B) supports, by means of
e and f, the ball valve (d), which
lies in the cover (¢ c). The gas,
entering by &, passes through the
valve (d), and i is thence conducted by the tube a to the tube 7. The
bell (8) and the weighted dish (4) are screwed on to the connecting-
rod (g). To diminish as
much as. possible the
friction of g in i, g
only touches ¢ by three
projecting ridges. Section
of 4 and g is shown at s.
To put the apparatus in
use it is first levelled, then
h is screwed off, and the
cover (n n) removed. A
mixture of two parts of
pure acid-free glycerine to’
one of distilled water is
poured into the cylinder
until it flows out at gq,
which is. then closed, and
the cover (m n) replaced.
Fic. 269.—MOoITESSIER’s GAS-PRESSURE.
REGULATOR.
The manometers are filled with coloured water, and k&. and 1
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 635
connected with the entrance and exit gas tubing respectively. The
pressure of the incoming gas raises the bell (8) ; and with it the valve
(d) is raised towards the opening at cc. The weight (h), which is
replaced on g, by its downward pressure counteracts this upward
pressure of the gas and opens the valve (cc). Thus the flame is
best regulated in the morning, when the pressure is at a minimum ;
then supposing an increase of pressure occurs, the weight of h is
overbalanced, B is raised, and with it d, and the gas supply pro-
portionately diminished by the gradual closing of the valved opening.
Reichert’s Thermo-regulator.—This regulator (Fig. 270)
consists of three parts—a hollow T-piece, a stem and a bulb.
The T-piece fits like a stopper in the upper widened
portion of the stem. One arm of the T is open
and connected with the gas supply; the vertical
portion terminates in a small orifice, and is also
provided with a minute lateral opening. The stem is
provided with a lateral arm, and this arm, the stem,
and the bulb contain mercury. The regulator is
fixed in the roof of the incubator, so that the bulb
projects either into the interior of the incubator or
into the water-chamber. When the incubator reaches
the required temperature, the mercury is forced up
by means of the screw in the lateral arm, until it Fic. 270.—
closes the orifice at the extremity of the vertical ae
portion of the JT. The gas which passesithrough gpeuzator.
the lateral orifice is sufficient to maintain the
apparatus at the required temperature. If the temperature of the
incubator falls, the mercury contracts, and gas passing through the
terminal orifice of the JT increases the flame of the burner, and
the temperature is restored.
Page’s Thermo-regulator resembles the above, but instead
of the T-piece there are two pieces of glass-tubing. The outer
tubing envelops the upper part of the stem of the regulator, and
admits of being raised or lowered. The upper end of this tubing
is closed by a cork, which is perforated to admit the narrow glass-
tubing, which represents the vertical arm of the T, passing within
the stem of the regulator. This has a terminal and a lateral
opening, and is the means of entrance for the gas. This regulator
is adjusted by noting when the thermometer indicates the desired
temperature, and then pushing down the outer tube until the
terminal opening of the inner tube, which is carried down with
it, is obstructed by the mercury.
636 APPENDICES.
Meyer’s Thermo-regulator is represented in Fig. 271. No. I.
shows the construction of the regulator: its inner tube terminates
in an oblique opening, and is also provided with a minute lateral
perture, which prevents the complete shutting off of the gas supply-
Fic. 271.—Mayer’s THERMO-REGULATOR.
No. II. illustrates the method of introducing the mercury by suction.
through a filling tube, which is substituted for the inner tube of the
regulator. No. III. represents Frankel’s modification of the same
instrument.
(M) Inocutatine anp Dissectinc INstRUMENTS AND APPARATUS
in Common Use.
Mouse-cages.—As mice are the animals most frequently
employed for experimental purposes, mouse-cages have been
APPARATUS, MATERIAL, AND REAGENTS. 637
especially introduced, consisting simply of a cylindrical glass jar
with a weighted wire cover.
Dressing-case.—A small surgical dressing-case, with its usual
accessories—forceps, knives, small, straight and curved scissors,
needles, silk, and so forth—will serve for most purposes.
Pravaz’ Syringe.—Koch’s modification of Pravaz’ syringe
admits of sterilisation by exposure to 150° C. for a couple of hours.
Special Instruments and Material.
for special operations, and the materials necessary for strict anti-
septic precautions, need not be detailed here.*
Dissecting-boards.—Slabs of wood in various sizes, or gutta-
percha trays, provided with large-headed pins, are employed for
ordinary purposes.
Dissecting-case.— A dissecting-case, fitted with scalpels,
scissors, hooks, ete., should be reserved entirely for post-mortem
examinations.
Fig. 272. eee BottLe, WITH FLEXIBLE TUBE, GLass Nozze, AND A
Mour’s PIncucock.
(N) GevzraL Lanornatory REQuIsITEs.
Siphon Apparatus.—Two half-gallon or gallon glass bottles,
with siphons connected with long flexible tubes provided with
glass nozzles and pinchcocks (Fig. 272), should be employed for the
* Vide Cheyne, Antiseptic Surgery. 1882.
638 APPENDICES.
following purposes :—One is used to contain distilled water, with
the nozzle hanging down conveniently within reach of the working
table; the other is to contain a solution of carbolic acid (1 in 20),
and may be placed so that the nozzle hangs close to the lavatory
sink or basin. The former replaces the use of the ordinary wash-
bottle, in washing off surplus stain from cover-glasses, etc., and the
latter is conveniently placed for disinfection of vessels and hands
after cleansing with water. They should be placed on the top of a
cupboard or on a high shelf.
Desiccator.—The desiccator (Fig. 273) consists of a porcelain
pan containing concentrated
sulphuric acid and covered
over with a bell-glass receiver.
The sheet of plate-glass upon
’ which the pan rests is ground
upon its upper. surface, and
the rim of the glass bell is
‘also ground and well greased.
In the centre of the pan is a
column supporting a circular
frame, which is covered with
wire gauze. Slices of potatoes,
upon which micro-organisms
have been cultivated, are
rapidly dried by the action of
sulphuric acid in confined air.
A detailed description of sie kinds of apparatus commonly in
use in a research laboratory—-such as the various forms of apparatus
for filtering cultures in liquids, and the reagents necessary for
special chemical investigations—must be sought for elsewhere.
Much information may be obtained about the most recent improve-
ments in bacteriological, chemical and physical apparatus by
reference to manufacturers’ catalogues.*
Fic. 273. —Dusiccaton.
* All bacteriological apparatus may be obtained from Berlin from Dr.
Muencke, 58, Louisen Strasse, or Dr. Hermann Rohrbeck, 24, Karlstrasse.
Dr. George Griibler, Leipzig, is recommended for special staining reagents.
In London, chemicals and bacteriological apparatus can be obtained from
Becker & Co., Hatton Wall, or from Baird & Tatlock, 14, Cross Street, Hatton
Garden, E.C. Mr. Baker, of High Holborn, W.C., is recommended as the
agent for microscopes and objectives by Continental makers, including
Zeiss’ apochromatic objectives.
APPENDIX V.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
CHAPTER I. -
HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION.
‘
Andry, De la Génération des Vers dans le Corps de Homme, 1701. Charlton
Bastian, Proc. Royal Soe. 1872. Bonnet, Considérations sur les Corps orga-
nisés, 1768. Davaine, Compt. Rend., T. lviii. and lix. Gleichen, Dissertation
sur la Génération, 1778. Hill, Essays in Natural History and Philosophy.
Kircher, Ars magna lucis et umbra, 1646. Koch, Beitriige zur Biologie der
Pflanzen, 1876. Lister, Pharmaceut. Journal and Transact., 1877. Miller,
Animalia infusoria, 1786. Pasteur, Compt. Rend., 1859, 1880; Etude sur la
Maladie des Vers-a-soie, 1870. Plenciz, Opera Medico-Physica, 1762. Schrider
and Von Dusch, Ann. der Chem. und Pharm., vol. lxxxix. Schiiltze, Poggen-
dorff’s Ann., vol. xxxix. Schwann, Poggendorff’s Ann., vol. xli. Tyndall, Essays
on floating matter of the air, 1881.
CHAPTER II.
MORPHOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF BACTERIA,
MoRPHOLOGY.
Baumgarten, Lehrbuch der Pathologischen Mykologie, 1890. Biedert,
Virch. Archiv, Bd. 100, 1885, Billroth, Unters. iiber d. Veg. Form der Cocco-
bacteria septica, 1874. Brefeld, Botanische Untersuch. iiber Schimmelpilze,
Heft 1, 1881. Cohn, Beitriage zur Biologie der Pflanzen, Bd. I., 1872, 1875.
Cornil and Babés, Les Bactéries, 1885. Dallinger and Drysdale, Monthly Micro-
scop. Journ., 1875. De Bary, Verg. Morph. und Liolog. der Pilze,. Mycetozoen,
und Bacterien, 1884; Vorlesungen iiber Bacterien, 1885. Dujardin, Histoire
Naturelle des Zoophytes, 1841. Ehrenberg, Die Infusionsthierchen als Volkom.
Organism, 1838. Fisch, Biolog. Centralbl., V., 1885. Fliigge, Handbuch
der Hygiene, 1883; Die, Micro-organismen, 2nd Edition, 1886. Gram,
_Fortsch der Med., IL, No. 6. Grove, Synopsis of the Bacteria.and Yeast
Fungi, 1884, Hallier, Die Pflanzlichen Parasiten, 1866. Hauser, Ueber
Fdulniss Bacterien, 1885. . Hueppe, Die Formen der Bakterien, 1885. Lankester,
Quart. Journ. Microscop. Science, 1873. Leunis, Synopsis d. Pflanzenkunde :
. 639
640 APPENDICES.
Hanover, 1877. Lister, Quart. Journ. Microscop. Science, 1873, Lutz,
Fortschr. d. Med., 1881. Marpmann, Die Spaltpilze, 1884. Miller, Deut. Med.
Woch., 1884. Nageli, Die Niederen Pilze, 1877. Neelsen, Biol. Centralbl., IIL.,
No. 18, 1883. Sachs, Text-book of Botany, 1882. Van Tieghem, Compt.
Rend., 1879; Traité de Botanique, 1883. Zopf, Die Spaltpilze, 1885.
GENERAL BIOLOGY.
Arloing, Archiv de Physiol., 1886. Bordoni-Uffreduzzi, Fortschr. d. Med.,
1886. Cheyne, Brit. Med. Journ., 1886. Cohn and Mendelsohn, Beitr. z.
Biol. d. Pflanzen, Bd. III., Heft 1. Cortes, Compt. Rend., T. 99, p. 385, 1884.
Downes, Proc, Roy. Soc., 1886. Duclaux, Compt. Rend., 1885. Engelmann,
Arch. f. d. Ges. Physiologie, Bd. 26, 1881; Botan. Zeitg., 1882. Fodor,
Archiv f. Hygiene, 1886. Hauser, Archiv f. Exper. Patholog. u. Pharmacologie,
1886. Hofmann, Allgem. Med. Centralbl., 8. 605. Liborius, Zeitschrift f.
Hygiene, 1886. Nageli, Die Niederen Pilze: Miinchen, 1877; Unters. iiber
Niedere Pilze: Miinchen, 1882. Nencki, Virchow’s Archiv, 1879 ; Beitrige zur
Biol. der Spaltpilze : Leipzig, 1879; Ber. d. Deutschen Chem. Gesellsch., 8S.
2605, 1884. Regnard, Compt. Rend., T. 98, p. 744, 1884. Tumas, St. Petersb.
Med. Wochenschr., 1879. Wyssokowitsch, Zeitschrift f£. Hygiene, 1886.
t
CHROMOGENIC BACTERIA.
Babés, Biolog. Centralbl., Bd. 2, 1882. Chabert and Fromage, D’une Altéra-
tion du Lait de Vache, désignée sous le Nom du Lait Bleu, 1880, Charrin,
Communication faite a la Société Anatomique, 1884. Cohn and Miflet, Cohn’s
Beitraige zur Biol. d. Pilanzen, Bd. JIL, Heft 1, 1879. Eberth, Centralbl. f. d.
Med. Wissensch., 1863, Ehrenberg, Micr. Prodigiosus, Verhandl. d. Berl.
Acad., 1839. Fordos, Compt. Rend. de lAcad. de Sc., 1860. Frank, Cohn’s
Beitr. z. Biol. d. Pflanzen, Bd. I., Heft 3, 1875. Gessard, De la Pyocyanine
et de son Microbe, 1882; Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, T. iv. Gielen, Mag. f.
Ges. d. Thierheilkunde, 1852. Girard, Unters. itiber Blauen Hiter; Chirurg.
Centralbl., II., 1875; Revue des Sc., T. 5, 1877. Hermstédt, Ueber die
Blaue und Rothe Milch., 1833. Hugues, Echo Vétérinaire, 1884. Klein,
Quart. Journ. of Micr. Sc., Vol. 15, 1875, Lankester, Quart. Journ. of Micr. 8c.,
Vol. 18, 1873, 1876. Liicke, Arch. f. Klin. Chir., 1862. Mosler, Virchow’s
Archiv, Bd. 43, 1868. Neelsen, Cohn’s Beitr. z. Biologie d. Pflanzen, Bd. III.,
Heft 2, 1880. Schréter, Cohn. Beitr. z. Biol. der Pflanzen, Bd. I., Heft. 2,
1872. Steinhoff, Neue Ann. d. Mecklenb. Landw. Ges., 1838. Wernich, Cohn’s
Beitraige zur Biol. d. Pflanzen, Bd. ITL., Heft 1, 1879. Van Tieghem, Bull. de
la Soc. Bot. de France, 1880.
ZYMOGENIC BACTERIA AND FERMENTATION.
Béchamp, Compt. Rend., T. 60, p. 445, 1865; T. 93, 1881. Boutroux, Compt.
Rend., T. 86, 1878. Brefeld, Landwirthsch. Jahresber., Bd. 3, 1874; Bd. 4,
1875; Bd. 5, 1876. Cienkowski, Die Gallertbildungen d. Zuckerrtibensaftes,
1878. Colin, Bull. de l’Acad. de Méd., 1875. Dubrunfaut, Compt. Rend.,
T. 73, 1871. Duclaux, Théses présentées 4 la Faculté de Paris, 1865.
Dumas, Compt. Rend., T. 75. Nr. 6, 1872; Ann. de Chim. et de Phys., 1874.
Eriksson, Unters. aus. d. Botan.; Institut in Tiibingen, Heft 1,1881. Feltz
and Ritter, Journ. de l’Anat. et Phys., 1874. Fermi, Centralb. f. Bact.,
1891. Fitz, Berichte d. Chem. Ges., Bd. 6, 8. 48, 1875; Bd. 10, p. 216, 1878;
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 641
Bd. 11, pp. 42 and 498, and Bd. 12, p. 474, 1879; Bd. 13, p. 1309, 1880;
Bd. 15, p. 857, 1882; Bd. 16, p. 844, 1883; Bd. 17, p. 1188, 1884. Fleck,
Ber. d. Chem. Contualaks Dresden, 1876. Fisnkletd, Cantor Lectures, 1892.
Gessard, De la Pyocyanine et de son Microbe. Guiard, Thése de Paris, 1883.
Hallier, Gabrungserscheinungen, 1867. Hansen, Untersuch. aus. d. Prax. der
Gahrungsindustrie, 1890, 1892. Harz, Grundziige der alkoholischen Gih-
rungslehre, 1877. Hiller, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 8. 53,1874. Hofmann,
Aerztl. Verein zu Wien, Mai 1873; Allgem. Med. Centralbl., 8. 605, 1873.
Hoppe-Seyler, Medic.-Chem. Untersuchungen, Heft 4, 1871. Hueppe, Mitth.
a. d. Ges. Amt, Bd..ii., 1884; Deut. Med. Woch., 1884. Jacksch, Zeitschr. f.
Physiol. Chemie, Bd. 5, 1881. Jorgensen, Microorg. of Ferment Trans., 1893.
Karsten, Chemismus der Pflanzenzelle, 1869. Kern, Bull. de la Soc. Imp. des
Naturalistes de Moskau, No, 3, 1881. Krannhals, Deut. Arch. f. Klin. Med.,
Bd. 35, 1884. Ladureau, Compt. Rend., T. 99, p. 877, 1884. Lépine and Roux,
Compt. Rend., T. 101, 1885. geo Virch. Arch., Bd. 100, 8. 540, 1885. Lex,
Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 8. 291, 1872. Liebig, Verhandl. der Miinchener
Akad. d. Wiss., 1861; 5 os 1869; Ueber Gahrung, Quelle der Muskel-
kraft und Eméhrung; Leipzig u. Heidelberg, 1870. Lister, The Pharmac.
Journ. and Transact., 1877. Mayer, Lehrbuch der Gihrungschemie; 2 Aufl.,
1876. Monoyer, Thése de Strassburg, 1862. Miller, Journ. f. Prakt. Chem.,
1860. Musculus, Ber. d. Chem. Ges., 8. 124, 1874; Compt. Rend, T. 78, 1874.
Nageli, Theorie der Gahrung: Miinchen, 1879. Pasteur, Annal. de Chim. et
de Phys., III. Sér., T. 58, 1860; Compt. Rend., 1860, 1861, 1863, 1864, 1871,
1872; Bull. de la Soc. Chim., 1861; Ann. de Chim. et de Phys., T. 64, 1862;
Etudes sur le Vin, 1866; Bull. de Acad. de Méd., No. 27, 1876; Etudes sur
la Biére, 1876. Pasteur and Joubert, Compt. Rend., T. 83,1876. Popoff, Botan.
Jahresber., 1875. Prazmowski, Untersuchungen iiber die Entwicklungs-
geschichte und Fermentwirkung einiger Bakterien, 1880, Richet, Compt.
Rend., T. 88, 1879. Scheibler, Zeitschr. f. Riibenzuckerindustrie, 1874.
Schiitzenberger, Die Gihrungserscheinungen, 1874. Sheridan Lea, Journ.
of Physiology, 1885. Trécul, Compt. Rend., T. 61, 1865; T. 65, 1867 ; Ann.
des Sc., Sér. 7, T. 7, 1867. Tyndall, Compt. Rend., T. 58, 1864; Essays on
the Floating Matter of the Air, 1881. Van Tieghem, Compt. Rend., 1864,
1874, 1879, 1880, 1884.
PHOTOGENIC BACTERIA,
Beyerinek, Archiv Neerland, XXIII. Fischer, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1887;
Centralbl. £ Bakteriolog., 1888. Forster, Centralbl. f. Bakteriolog., 1887.
Girard, Compt. Rend., 1890. Girard and Billet, Compt. Rend., 1889. Katz,
Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. 1891. Lehmann, Centralbl. f. Bact., 1889. Ludwig,
‘Centralbl. f. Bact., 1887.
CHAPTER III.
EFFECT OF ANTISEPTICS AND DISINFECTANTS ON BACTERIA.
Arloing, Cornevin and Thomas, Lyon Méd., 1883. Blyth, Proc. Roy. Soc.,
1885. Buchholz, Ueber das Verhalten von Bakterien zu einigen Antiseptics,
1876; Arch. f. Exp. Pathol., Bd. 7,1877. Chairy, Compt. Rend., 1884. Chamber-
Jand and Roux, Compt. Rend., 1883. Chauveau, Compt. Rend., 1883, 1884.
Cheyne, Antiseptic Surgery, 1882. Colin, Compt. Rend., T. 99, sire De la
4
642 APPENDICES.
Croix, Arch. f, Exp. Pathol., Bd. 13, 1881. Dujardin-Beaumetz, Bull. de l’Acad.
de Méd. de Paris, 1884. Eidam, Cobn’s Beitr. zur Biol., Bd. L., Heft 3, 18765.
Fischer, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1882, Fischer and Proskauer, Mitth. a, d. Kaiserl.
Ges. Amt, Bd. IL., 1884, Frank, Ueber Desinfection von Abtrittsgruben, 1885.
Frisch, Sitzungsber. d. Wiener Akad., Bd. 75 u. 80, 1877. Gartner and Plagge,
Deut. Med. Woch., 1885, Haberkorn, Das Verhalten von Harnbakterien gegen
einige Antiseptica ; Dissert. Dorpat., 1879. Handford, Brit. Med. Journ., 1885,
Heydenreich, Compt. Rend., T. 98, 1884. Hoffmann, Experimentelle Unter-
suchungen iiber die Wirkung der Ameisensiéure Diss. Greifswald, 1884.
Hueppe, Mittheilg. a, d. Kaiserl. Ges. Amt, Bd. I., 8. 341, #881 ; Deut. Militar-
arztl. Zeitschr., 1882, Koch, Cohn’s Beitr. zur Biol. der Pflanzen, Bd. JI.,
Heft 2, 1876 ; Mitth, a. d. Ges. Amt, Bd. 1, S. 234, 1881. Koch and Gaffky,.
Arbeit, a. d. K. Gesundh. Amt, 1885. Koch, Gaffky and Liffler, Mitth. a.
d. Kaiserl. Ges. Amt, Bd. I., 8. 322, 1881. Koch and Wolffhiigel, Mitth. a. d.
Kaiserl. Ges. Amt, Bd. I., 8. 301, 1881. Kénig, Chirurg, Centralbl., 1885.
Laillier, Ann. d’Hygiéne,*1883, Larrivé, L'Eau Oxygénée: Thése de Paris,
1883. Lassar, Deut. Med. Woch., 1880. Lebedeff, Arch. de Physiol. Norm. et
Pathol., 1882. Maly and Emich, Sitzungsber. d. Kais. Akad, d. Wiss. zu Wien.
Jan, 1883, Marié-Davy, Revue d’Hygiéne, 1884. Merke, Virchow’s Archiv,
Bd. 81, 1880. Meyer, Ueb. d. Milchsiiureferment u. sein Verhalten gegen
Antiseptica, 1880. Mignet, Annuaire de l’Observatoire de Montsouris, 1884--
Miquel, Semaine Médicale, 1883. Morscheli, Deut. Med, Woch., 1880. Nageli,
Die Niederen Pilze, 1877. Pasteur, Ann. d’Hyg., 1880; La Vaccination Char-
bonneuse, 1883. Perroncito, Arch. Ital. de Biol., 1883. Pictet and Young,
Compt. Rend., T. 98, 1884. Plaut, Desinfection der Viehstille, 1884. Reinl,
Prager Med. Woch., Nr. 10 u. 11,1885. Rochefort, Herscher, Revue d’Hygiéne,.
1884. Rossbach, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1884. Schede, Sammlung Klin. Vortriige,.
Nr. 25,1885. Schill and Fischer, Mitth. a, d. Kaiserl. Ges. Amt, Bd. II. 1884.
Schnetzler, Archiv de Généve, 1884. Schréter, Cohn’s Beitr. zur. Biol. der
Pflanzen, Bd. I., Heft 3, 1875. Schultz, Deut. Med. Woch., Nr. 17, 1883;
Nr. 24, 1885. Schwartz, Sitzungsber. d. Dorpater Naturf. Ges., 1879. Soyka,
Ber. d. Bayr. Akad. d. Wissensch., 1879. Steinmeyer, Ueber Desinfectionslehre,.
1884. Sternberg, Amer. Journ. Med. Soc., 1883; Report of Com. on Disin-
fectants, 1888. Thol, Ueber d. Einfluss nicht aromat. organ. Saéuren. auf
Faulniss u. Gahrung: Diss. Greifswald, 1885. Toussaint, Bull. de lAcad.,
1880, Tyndall, Phil. Trans. of the Roy. Soc., 1877. Vallin, Ann. d’Hyg., 1877;
Traité des Désinfectants et de la Désinfection, 1883; Les Nouvelles Etuves
& Désinfection: Revue d’Hygiéne, 1883; Ann. d’Hygiéne, 1884. Wernicke,
Virchow’s Archiv, Bd. 78, 1879; Diss. Dorpat., 1879. Grundriss der Desin-
fectionslehre, 1880. Wolff, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., Nr. 11, 1885. Wolff-
hiigel, Mittheilg. a. d. Kais, Ges. Amt., Bd. I, 8. 188, 1881. Wolffhiigel and
Knorre, Mittb. a. d. Kaiserl, Ges. Amt, Bd. L., 8. 352, 1881.
CHAPTER IV.
CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF BACTERIA.
Backlisch, Ber. d. Deutsch. Chem. Gesellsch., Bd. 18, 1880. Bergmann,
Das Putride Gift., 1866; Deut. Zeitschr. f. Chirurgie, Bd. 1., 1872. Bergmann
and Angerer, Wiirzburger Jubil. Festschr., 1882. Bergmann and Schmiedeberg,
Med. Centralbl., 1868, Blumberg, Virch. Arch., Bd. 100, 8. 377, 1885. Boceci,
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 643
Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss, 1882. Bouchard, Compt. Rend. de Biol., 1882.
Brieger, Zeitschr. f. physiol. Chemie, Bd. 7, 1883; Ber. d. Deutsch. Chem. Ges.,
Bd. 17, 1884; Berl. Klin. Woch., Nr. 14, 1884 ; Ueber Ptomaine, 1885; Weitere
Untersuchungen tiber Ptomaine, 1885; Ueber Ptomaine: Berl. Klin. Woch.,
1886. Brouardel and Boutmy, Compt. Rend., T. 92, p. 1056, 1881. Clementi
and Thin, Wien. Med. Jahrb., 1873. Eber, Centralb. f. Bact., 1892. Etard and
Olivier, Compt. Rend., 1882. Frisch, Exper. Studien iib. d. Verbreitung d.
Faulnissorganismen, 1874. Gautier, Compt. Rend., T. 94,1882. Gautier and
Etard, Compt. Rend., T. 94, 1882. Groebner, Beitriige z. Kenntniss der
Ptomaine, 1882. Guareschi and Mosso, Arch. Ital. de Biolog., 1883. Hauser,
Ueber Fiaulnissbakterien, 1885. Hemmer, Exper. Studien tiber d. Wirkung
Faulender Stoffe, 1866. Hiller, Centralbl. f. Chirurgie, 1876 ; Die Lehre von der
Faulniss, 1879. Husemann, Arch. d. Pharmac., 1880, 1882, 1883. Kaufmann,
Journ. f. Prakt. Chemie, Bd. 17, 1878. Kehrer, Archiv f. Exper. Pathol.,
Bd. I, 1874, Konig, Ber. iib d. Veterinirwesen im Konigreich Sachsen,
1881. Maas, Fortschr. d. Med., IIL., 729, 1884. Martin, Rep. Med. Off. Local
Govt. Board, 1890-91. Nencki, Ueber die Zersetzung der Gelatine und des
Eiweisses bei der Faulniss mit Pancreas, 1876; Journ. f£.. Pract. Chem.,
Bd. 26, 1882. Offinger, Die Ptomaine, 1885. Otto, Anleitung zur Ausmittelung
der Gifte, 1884. Panum, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 60, 1874. Raison, Zur Kenntniss
der Putriden Intoxication, 1866. Ravitsch, Zur Lehre von der Putriden In-
fection, 1872. Rosenbach, Deut. Zeitschrift fiir Chir., XVI., 8. 342, 1882.
Salomonsen, Die Faulniss des Blutes, 1877. Schiffer, Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol. :
Physiol. Abtheil, 1882. Schweninger, Ueber d. Wirkung Faulender Org. Sub-
stanzen, 1866. Selmi, Chemische Ber., Bd. 6, 7, 12, 1878. Tanret, Compt.
Rend., T. 92,1881. Tappeiner, Med. Centralbl., 1885. Wandevelde, Arch. de
Biol. par van Beneden, 1884. Willgerodt, Ueber Ptomaine, 1884. Ziilzer and
Sonnenschein, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1869.
CHAPTER V.
IMMUNITY.
Arloing, Cornevin and Thomas, Du Charbon Bactérien; Pathogénie et
Inoculations Préventives, 1883. Behring, Deutsche Med. Woch., 1890.
Behring and Kitasato, Deutsche Med. Woch., 1890. Blazekovic, Oesterr
Monatschr. f. Thierheilk., 1884. Bouchard, Compt. Rend., 1889. Bouley,
LUInoculation Préventive de la Fiévre Jaune: Compt. Rend., T. 100, 1885.
Brieger and Frankel, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1890. Biichner, Hine neue Theorie
iiber Erzielung v. Immunitit gegen Infectionskrankheiten, 1883. Chamberland,
Le Charbon et la Vaccination Charbonneuse d’aprés les Travaux Récents de
M. Pasteur, 1883. Chamberland and Roux, Compt. Rend., T. 96, Nr. 15, 1883.
Chauveau, Compt. Rend., T. 89, 1879; T. 96, Nr. 9; Nr. 10; Nr, 11, 1883; Gaz.
Hebdom. de Méd. et de Chir., 22, 1884. Feltz, Compt. Rend., T. 99, p 246,
1884. Frank, Jahresber. d. K. Thierarzneischule in Miinchen, 1883. Gamaleia,
La Semaine Med., 1890. Grawitz, Die Theorie der Schutzimpfung: Virchow’s
Arch., Bd. 48, 1881. Hankin, Brit. Med. Journ., 1889 and 1890; Proc. Roy.
Soc., 1890; Centralb. f. Bacteriolog., Bd. IX., Lancet, 1891. Hess, Schweiz,
Arch. f. Thierheilk., Bd., 27,1885. Kitasato, Zeitschr.f. Hygiene, Bd. X. Koch,
Ueber die Milzbrandimpfung, 1882. Koch, Gaffky and Léffler, Mitth. a. d. Ges.
Amt, Bd, II., 1884, Léffler, Mitth. a.d. Ges, Amt, Bd. 1.,1881, Martin, Reports
644 APPENDICES.
Med, Dept. Loc. Govt. Board, 1890-91; Brit. Med. Journal, 1891. Massé, Des
Inoculations Préventives dans les Maladies Virulentes, 1883. Metschnikoff,
Virchow’s Archiv XCVI. and XCVIL, Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1887, 1889,
1890, 1891, 1895. Nuttall, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1888. Oemler, Arch. f. Wiss.
u. Pract. Thierheilk., 1876, 1881. Ogata, Centralb. f. Bacteriolog., 1891. Ollive,
Compt. Rend., T. 89, 1879. Pasteur, Bull. de l’Acad. de Méd, and Gaz.
Méd. de Paris, Nr. 18, 1880; Compt. Rend., 1883; La Vaccination Charbon-
neuse, 1883; Revue Scientifique, 1883; Bull. de l’Acad. de Méd., 1883.
Perroncito, Atti R. Acc. d. Lincei., 1883. Piitz, Vortriige f. Thierirzte,
Ser. 7, Heft 1, 1884. Roux, Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1888. Rdészahegyi,
Pester Med.-Chir. Presse, 1882. Salmon and Smith, Centralb. f. Bacteriolog.,
1887. Semmer, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 83, 1881. Semmer and Krajewski,
Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1880. Strebel, Schweiz. Arch. f. Thierheilk., 1885.
Tizzoni and Cattani,. Centralb. f. Bacteriolog., 1891. Toussaint, Bull. de
TAcad. de Méd.; and Compt. Rend., 1880, 1881; Gazette Médicale de Paris,
Nr. 32, 1881. Wooldridge, Proc. Roy. Soc., 1887; Archiv f. Anat. and Phys.,
1888.
CHAPTER VI.
ANTITOXINS AND SERUM-THERAPY.
Béclére, Chambon and Ménard, Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1896. Behring
and Kitasato, Deutsche Med. Woch., 1890; Trans. Internat. Cong. f. Hygiene,
1891. Behring and Wernicke, Zeitschrift f. Hygiene, 1892. Buchner, Munich
Med. Woch., 1891. Calmette, Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1895. Emmerich and
Mastbaum, Archiv f. Hygiene, 1891. Fedoroff, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1893.
Gromakowsky, Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1895. Heubner, Trans. Internat.
Med. Congress, 1894. Hewlett, Practitioner, 1895. Kossel, Zeitschrift f.
Hygiene, 1894. Marchoux, Ann, de l'Institut Pasteur, 1895. Marmorek, Ann.
de l'Institut Pasteur, 1895, 1896. Ogata, Centralb. f. Bakteriolog., 1891.
Report, Med. Sup. Metropolitan Asylums Board, 1896. Roux, Trans. Internat.
Congress of Hygiene, 1894; Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1894. Roux, Martin,
Chaillou, Ann. de 1l’Instit. Pasteur, 1894. Tizzoni and Cattani, Centralb. f.
Bakteriolog., 1891. Welch, Trans. Assoc. Amer. Physicians, 1895. Wladmoroff,
Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1893.
CHAPTERS VIL, VIIL, IX, X.
VII.—THE BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE. VIII.—MICROSCOPICAL
EXAMINATION OF BACTERIA. IX.—PREPARATION OF NUTRIENT
MEDIA AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION. X.—-EXPERIMENTS
UPON THE LIVING ANIMAL,
Almquist, Hygeia, XLV.; Stockholm, 1883. Banti, Manuale di Tecnica
Batteriologica, 1885. Baumgarten, Zeitschr. f. Wissensch. Mikr., 1884. Behrens,
Hilfsbuch zur Ausfiihrung Mikroskop. Untersuch., 1883. Bizzozero and Firket,
Manuel de Microscopie Clinique, 1885. Blanchard, Rev. Inter. Sci., III., 1879.
Bordoni Uffreduzzi, Microparasitici, 1885. Brefeld, Bot. Untersuch. iiber
Schimmelpilze, Bd. IV., 1881; Botan. Unters. iiber Hefenpilze, Bd. V., 1883;
Verhandl. d. Physik. Med. Ges. in Wiirzburg, 1875. Biichner, In Nigeli’s
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 645
Untersuch. iiber Niedere Pilze: Munich, 1882; Aerztl. Intelligenzbl., No. 33,
1884. Carpenter, The Microscope and its Revelations (6th Edition), 1881.
Cohn, Beitrige zur Biologie der Pflanzen, Bd. I., Heft 3, 1875, 1876. Cornil
and Babés, Les Bactéries, 1886. Crookshank, Manuel Pratique de Bactério-
logie, traduit par Bergeaud; avec 4 Photomicrographies, 1886. Dolley, Tech-
nology of Bacteria Investigation, 1885. Duclaux, Ferments et Maladies, 1881.
Ehrlich, Deut. Med. Woch., No. 19, 1882; Zeitschr. f. Klin. Med.; Bd. I. 1880.
Bd. II., Heft 3,1881, Eisenberg, Bakteriologische Diagnostik, 1886. Esmarch,
Zeitschrift f. Hygiene, 1886. Fehleisen, Ueber Neue Method. der Untersuch.
u. Cultur Pathogen. Bakterien ; Physik. Med. Ges. zu Wiirzburg, 1882. Fligge,
Handbuch der Hygiene und der Gewerbe Krankheiten, 1883. Friedlander,
Microscopische Technik (1st Edition), 1884. Gibbes, Practical Histology and
Pathology, 1885. Gram, Fortsch. d. Med., IL, No. 6, 1884. Hauser, Ueber
Faulnissbacterien; mit 15 Tafeln in Lichtdruck, 1885. Hazlewood, American
Monthly Microscop. Journ., 1883. Hiiber and Breker, Die Path. Histolog. und
Bacteriologischen Untersuch. Methoden, 1886. Hueppe, Bakteriologische
Apparate : Deut. Med. Woch., 1886; Die Methoden der Bakterien Forschung,
1886; translated by Biggs, 1886. Johne, Ueber die Kochschen Reinculturen,
1885. Klebs, Archiv f. Exp. Pathoi., Bd. I, 1873. Klein, Micro-organisms and
Disease, 1886. Koch, Biol. Klin. Woch., No. 15, 1882; Mitth. a. d. Kais. Ges.
Amt, Bd. I, 1881.; Bd. If., 1884; Untersuchungen iiber Wundinfections
Krankheiten, 1878; Beitriige z. Biol. d. Pflanzen, Bd. II., Heft 3, 1877. Lee,
The Microtomist’s Vade Mecum, 1885. Magnin and Sternberg, Bacteria, 1884.
Malley, Photomicrography, 1885. Orth, Path. Anat. Diagnostik, 1884. Pasteur,
Etudes sur la Biére, 1867. Perty, Zur Kenntniss Kleinster Lebensform,
1852. Plaut, Farbungs Methode z. Nachweis. der Micro-organismen; 1885 ;
Salomonsen, Bot. Zeit., No. 39, 1879; No. 28, 1880. Schafer, Course of Practical
Histology, 1877. Woodhead an‘ Hare, Pathological Mycology, 1885.
CHAPTER XI.
EXAMINATION OF AIR, SOIL AND WATER.
Angus Smith, Rep. to the Loc. Gov. Board, 1884; Sanitary Record, 1883.
Becker, Reichsmedicinalkalender, 1885. Beumer, Deut. Med. Woch., 1886.
Bischof, Journ. Soc. Chem. Industry, 1886. Biichner, Vortrige im Aerztl.
Verein zu Miinchen, 1881. Chamberland, Compt. Rend., T. 99, p. 247, 1886.
Cramer, Die Wasserversorgung von Ziirich, 1885. Crookshank, Notes from a
Bact. Labor., Lancet, 1885. Cunningham, Micr. Exam. of the Air: Calcutta,
1874. Fodor, Hygienische Unters. iiber Luft, Boden u. Wasser., 1882.
C. Frankel, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1886. Frankland, P. and G., Proc. Roy. Soc.,
1885, 1886 ; Microorganisms in Water, 1894. Gunning, Arch. f. Hyg., 3, 1883.
Hereus, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1886. Hesse, Deut. Med. Woch., Nr. 51, 1884 ;,
2, 1884; Mitth. a. d. Ges. Amt, Bd. IT., 1884; Ueber Wasserfiltration : Deut.
Med. Woch., 1885; Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1886. Klebs and Tommasi-Crudeli,
Archiv f. Exper. Path., Bd. 11, 1879. Koch, Mitth. a. d. Ges. Amt, Bd. L,
1881. Laurent, Journal de Pharmacie et de Chimie, 1885. Lemaire, Compt.
Rend., T. 57, 1863. Letzerich, Exp. Unters. iih. die Aetiologie des Typhus
mit bes. Beriicksichtigung der Trink. u. Gebrauchswisser, 1883. Maddox,
Month. Microscop. Journal, 1870. Meade Bolton, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1886.
Miflet, Cohn’s Beitr, z. Biol, d. Pflanzen, Bd, III., 1879. Miquel, Annuaire
646 APPENDICES,
de l’Observat. de Montsouris, 1877, 1882; Compt. Rend., T. 86, 1878; Bull.
de la Soc. Chim., 1878; Ann. d’Hygiene, 1879; Les Organismes Vivants
de l’Atmosphére, 1883. Miquel and Freudenreich, La Semaine Médicale, 1884.
Moreau and Plantymausion, La Semaine Médicale, 1884. Nageli, Unters. tiber
Niedere Pilze., 1882. Olivier, Les Germes de l’Air, Thése, Rev. Ncientif.,
1883. Pasteur, Ann. de Chim. et de Phys., T. 64,1862; Compt. Rend., T. 50,
1860; T. 52,1861; T. 56, 1863; T. 85, 1877. Pfeiffer, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene,
1886. Pouchet, Compt. Rend., T. 47, 1858. Schrakamp, Archiv f. Hygiene,
Bd. II., 1884. Sehlen, Fortschr. d. Med., Bd. II., S. 585, 1885. Smart, Germs,
Dust and Disease, 1883, Soyka, Sitz.-Ber. der. K. Bayr. Akad. d. Wiss. : Math.
Physik. Classe, 1881; Vortriige im Aerztl., Verein in Miinchen, 1881; D.
Vierteljsch. f. Oeff. Ges., Bd. 14,1882; Prager Med. Woch., 1885; Fortschr,
d. Med., 1885. Tissandier, Compt. Rend., T. 78, 1874, Torelli, La Malaria
in Italia, 1883. Tyndall, Brit. Med. Journ., 1877; Essays on the Floating
Matter of the Air, 1881; Med. Tim. and Gaz., 1870. Wernich, Cohn’s Beitrige
z. Biol. d. Pflanzen, Bd. IIT., 8. 105, 1879. ‘Wolffhiigel and Riedel, Arbeit.
a. d. K. Ges. Amt, 1886. Wollny, Viert. £. Oeff. Ges., 8. 705, 1883. Zander,
Centralbl. f. Allg. Ges., 1883.
CHAPTER XII.
PHOTOGRAPHY OF BACTERIA.
Crookshank, Photography of Bacteria, 1887. Frankel and Pfeiffer, Mikro-
photog, Atlas, 1889. Giinther, Photogram. Path. Mikroorg., 1887. Itzerott
and Niemann, Atlas der Microphotograph, 1895. Koch, Cohn’s Beitriige zur
Biol, der Pflanz., 1877 ; Mitth. a. d. K. Gesundheitsamte, Bd.I.,1881. Neuhaus,
Centralbl. f. Bakteriolog., Bd. IV. Sternberg, Photomicrographs and How to
Make them, 1884, Woodward, Rep. to Surg. Gen. U. S. Army, 1870.
CHAPTER XIII.
SUPPURATION. PYA:MIA. SEPTICEMIA. ERYSIPELAS. GONORRH@A.
OPHTHALMIA.
Ainstie, Lancet, 1870. Arloing, Recherches sur les Septicémies, 1884.
Babés, Compt. Rend., 1883. Balfour, Edinb. Med. Journ., 1877. Barthold,
Pyszmisch-Metast. Dissert. Berlin, 1875. Bastian, Brit. Med. Journ., 1878.
Béchamp, Compt. Rend., 1881; Trans. Internat. Med. Cong. London, 1881.
Beck, Rep. Loc. Govt. Board, 1880. Birch-Hirschfeld, Untersuchungen iiber
Pyimie, 1873. Braidwood and Vacher, Brit. Med. Journ., 1882. Burdon-
Sanderson, Trans. Path. Soc., 1872; Brit. Med. Journ., 1875.. Crookshank,
Trans. Internat. Congr. of Hygiene, 1892. Dowdeswell, Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sc. London, Vol. 18, 1878; Proc. Roy. Soc. London, Vol. 34, 1883, Dreschfeld,
Brit. Med. Journ., 1883. Drysdale, Pyrexia, 1880. Garré, Fortschritte d.
Med., 165, 1885. Heiberg, Die Puerperalen u. Pyamischen Processe, 1873.
Hoffa, Fortsch. d. Med., 1885. Horsley, Rep. Med. Officer Loc. Govt. Board,
1881. Klemperer, Zeitschr. f, Klin. Med., 1885. Koch, Wundinfectionskrank-
heiten: Leipzig, 1878; Mittheil. d. Kais. Ges. Amts, Bd. I, 1881. Lister,
Lancet, 1867 ; Med. Times and Gazette, 1877; Quart. Journ. Microscop. Science,
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 647
1887, Oertel, Zur Aetiologie der Infectionskrankheiten, 1881. Ogston, Brit.
Med. Journ,, Vol. I., 1881; Journ. of Anat. and Phys., Vol. 17, 1882. Passet,
Ueber Mikroorganismen der Eitrigen Zellgewebsentziindung des Menschen ;
Fortschritte d. Med., Nr. 2, 1885, Bd. 3, 1885. Perret, De la Septicémie :
Paris, 1880. Rindfleisch, Lehrb. der Pathol. Gewebelehre: 1 Aufl, S. 204,
1866. Rosenbach, Mikrooganismen bei den Wundinfectionskrankheiten des
Menschen: Wiesbaden, 1884. Sternberg, Amer. Journ. Med. Sc.; Johns
Hopkins Univ. Stud. Biol. Lab., 1882. Steven, Glasgow Med. Journal, 1884.
Sutton, Trans. Path. Soc., 1883. Tiegel, Ueber d. Fiebererregenden Higen-
schaften des Microsporon Septicum: Bern. Diss., 1871; Virchow’s Archiv, Bd.
60, 1874. Waldeyer, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 40, 1867; Vortrag. i. d. Med. Ges.
zu Breslau, 1871. Watson-Cheyne, Trans. Path. Soc., xxxv., 1884.
OSTEOMYELITIS,
Becker, Deut. Med. Woch., and Berl. Klin. Woch., 1883. Collmann, Bak-
terien im Organismus eines an einer Verletzung am Oberschenkel verstorbenen
Madchens: Gottingen, 1873. Colzi, Lo Sperimentale, 1890. Courmont and
Jaboulay, Compt. Rend. Soc. de Biolog., 1890. Eberth, Virchow’s Arch.,
Bd. 65, 1875. Fehleisen, Phys. Med. Ges. Wiirzburg, 1882. Friedmann, Berl.
Klin. Woch., 1876. Garré, Fortschr. d. Med., 1885. Giordano, Prog. I. Mic.
Pyog. infett. u. Eziolog. d. Osteom. Impett. Acuta, 1888. Krause, Fortschr. d.
Med., Bd. 2, 1884. Lannelongue and Achard, La Semaine Med., 1890; and
Compt. Rend. Soc. de Biolog., 1890. Peyroud, Compt. Rend., 1884. Rodet,
Compt. Rendus, T. 99, 1884. Rosenbach, Centralbl. f. Chirurgie, 1884.
Sehiiller, Centralbl. f. Chirurgie, Nr. 12, 1876.
ENDOCARDITIS.
Birch-Hirschfeld and Gerber, Archiv d. Heilkunde, 1876. Bramwell,
Diseases of the Heart, 1884. Bristowe, Brit. Med. Journ., 1884, Coupland,
Brit. Med. Journ., 1885. Gibbes, Brit. Med. Journ., 1884. Goodhart, Trans..
Path. Soc., vol. xxxi., 1880. Hamburg, Berlin: Inaug.-Diss., 1880. Klebs,
Archiv f, Exper. Pathol., Bd. 9, 1878. Koch, Mittheil. a,d. Kais. Ges. Amt,
Bd. I., 1881. Koester, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 72, 1875. Kundrat, Sitz.-Ber.
d. Kais. Acad. d. Wissensch. zu Wien, 1883. Leyden, Zeitschr. f, Klin. Med.,
1881. Nocard, Recueil de Méd. Vét., 1885. Oberbeck, Casuistische Beitrige
zur Lehre von der Endocarditis Ulcerosa : Inaug.-Diss., 1881. Orth, J., Ver-
sammlung Deutscher Naturf. zu Strasburg, 1885. Osler, Brit. Med. Journ., 1885;
Trans. Int. Med. Congress, 1881. Ribbert, Fortsch. d. Med., 1886. Rosenbach,
Archiv fiir Exper. Pathol., Bd. 9, 1878. Wedel, Berl. Klin. Wochenschr., 1877.
‘Weichselbaum, Wien. Med. Woch., 1885. Weigert, Virchow’s Arch., Bd, 84,
1881. Wilks, Brit. Med. Journ., 1882. Wyssokowitsch, Centralbl. f. d. Med.
Wissensch., Nr. 33, 1885.
ERYSIPELAS,
Baader, Schweiz. Naturf. Gesellsch., 1875. Denuce, Etude sur la Pathogénie
et l’Anatomie Pathologique de l’Erysipéle, 1885. Dupeyrat, Recherches
Cliniques et Expérimentales sur la Pathogénie de l’Erysipéle, 1881. Fehleisen,.
Wiirzburger Phys. Med. Ges., 1881; Deut. Zeitschr. f. Chir, Bd. 16, 1882; Die,
Aetiologie des Erysipels.: Berlin, 1883, Hiiter, Med. Centralbl., Nr, 34, 1868.
648 APPENDICES.
Janicke and Neisser, Centralbl. f. Chir., Nr. 25, 1884. Klebs, Archiv f. Exper.
Pathol. u. Pharmacol., Bd. 4, 1875. Lukomsky, Virchow’s Archiv, Bd. 60, 1874.
Nepven, Des Bactéries dans l’Erysipéle, 1885. Orth, Archiv f. Exper. Pathol.
u. Pharmacol., Bd. ., 1873. Raynaud, Union Méd., 1873, Recklinghausen and
Lankowski, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 60, 1874, Rheiner, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 100,
Heft 2, 1884. Tillmanns, Verhandl. d. Deutsch. Ges. f. Chirurgie, 1878;
Archiv f. Klin. Chirurgie, Bd. 23, 1879. Trosier, Bull. Soc. Anat. de Paris,
1875. Wolff, Virchow’s Arcb., Bd. 81, 1880.
PUMBPERAL FEVER.
Aufrecht, Naturforsch. Versamml.,1881. Doléris, La Fiévre Puerpérale et
les Organismes Infect., 1886. Heiberg, Die Puerperalen und Pyimischen
Processe, 1873. Karewski, Zeitschr. f. Geburtsh. u. Gynikologie, Bd. 7, 1881.
Laffter, Bresl. Aerztl. Ztg., 1879. Mayrhofer, Monatsschr. f. Geburtsk. u.
Frauenkrankheiten, Bd. 25, 1865. Orth, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 58, 1873.
Pasteur, Bull. de !Acad. de Méd., T. 9, 1880. Recklinghausen and Lankowski,.
Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 60, 1873. Waldeyer, Arch. f. Gynikologie, iii., 1872.
GONORRH@A.
Arning, Viertelj. f. Dermatol. u. Syph.,. 5. 371, 1883. Aufrecht, Patho-
logische Mittheilungen, 1881; Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., Nr. 16, 1883.
Bockhart, Sitzungsbericht d. Phys. Med. Ges. zu Wiirzburg, 1882; Viertelj. f.
Dermatol. und Syph., 1883: Bokai, Allgem. Med. Centralzeitung, Nr. 74,
1880. Bokai and Finkelstein, Prager Med. Chir. Presse, 1880. Bicker,
Ueber Polyarthritis Gonorrhoica. Diss., 1880. Bumm, Der Mikroorganismus
der Gonorrhoischen Schleimhauterkrankungen, 1885. Campona, Italia Medica,
1883, Chameron, Progrés Medical, 43, 1884. Eschbaum, Deut. Med. Woch.,
S. 187, 1883. . Frankel, Deut. Med. Woch., Nr. 2, 1883; S. 22,1885. Haab,
Der Mikrokokkus der Blennorrhcea Neonator, 1881. Hirschberg and Krause,
Centralbl. f. Pract, Augenheilk., 1881. Kammerer, Centralbl. f. Chirurgie,
Nr. 4, 1884. Krause, Die Mikrokokken der Blenorrhcea Neonator, 1882.
Kroner, Naturforschervers. in Magdeburg, Arch. f. Gyn., xxv., 8. 109, 1884.
Leistikow, Charité-Annalen, 7 Jahrg., 5. 750, 1882. Lundstrém, Studier ofver
Gonokokkus : Diss. Helsingfors, 1885. Martin, Rech. sur les Inflamm. Métast.
a Ja Suite de la Gonorrhée, 1882. Neisser, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss.,
Nr. 28, 1879; Deutsche Med. Woch., 1882. Newberry, Maryland Med. Journ.,
1883. Petrone, Rivista Clin., No. 2. Reter, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1879.
Sanger, Naturforschervers. in Magdeburg ; Ibid., 8. 126, 1884. Schrotter and
Winkler, Centralbl..f. Bact., Bd. ix. Smirnoff, Vrach., 1886. Steinschneider,
Verhandl. der Deutsch. Dermat. Gesellsch., 1889.; Berl. Klin. Woch., 1890.
Sternberg, Med. News, Vol. 45, Nr. 16, 1884. Weiss, Le Microbe du Pus
Blennorrhagique, 1889. Welander, Gaz. Med. de Paris, 1884..
OPHTHALMIC DISEASES.
Balogh, Med. Centralbl., xiv., 1879. Bock, Virchow’s Arch., Bd., 91, 1883.
Cornil and Berlioz, Compt. Rend. de Acad.’ d. Sc., 1883. Deutschmann,’
y. Graefe’s Archiv, Bd. xxxi., 1885. Gifford, Archiv f. Augenheilkunde, 1886.
Goldzieher, Centralblatt f. Prakt. Augenheilk., 1884. Kahler, Prager Zeitschr,
£. Prakt. Heilk., Bd. 1, 1882. Klein, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., Nr. 8, 1884.
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 649°
Kroner, Verh. d. Naturforscher-Vers. Magdeburg, 1884. Kuschbert, Deutsch.
Med. Woch., Nr. 21, 1884. Kuschbert and Neisser, Bresl. Aerztl. Zeitschr.,
Nr. 4, 1883. Michel, Graefe’s Archiv f. Augenbeilkunde, 1882. Neisser,
Fortschr. d. Med., Bd. 2, 8. 73, 1884. Reuss, Wien. Med. Presse, 1884.
Roth, Virchow’s Archiv, Bd. 55, 1872. Salomonsen, Fortschr. d. Med., Bd. 2,
8. 78, 1884. Sattler, Ber. iib. d. Ophthalmologen Congress zu Heidelberg,
1882; Zehender’s Klin. Monatsblatt, and Wien. Med. Woch., Nr. 17, 1883.
Sattler and de Wecker, L’Ophthalmie Jéquiritique, 1883. Schleich, Verh. des
Ophthalmologen Congr. zu Heidelberg, 1883. Vennemann and Bruylants, Le
Jéquirity et son Principe Pathogéne, 1884. Vossius, Berl. Klin. Wochenschr.,
Nr. 17, 1884. Widmark, Hygeia: Stockholm, 1885. Zehender, Bowman
Lecture : Lancet, 1886.
CHAPTER XIV.
ANTHRAX.
Archangelski, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1882, 1883. Bert, Compt. Rend.
Soc. de Biol., T. 4, 1877; T. 5, 1878; T. 6, 1879. Bleuler, Correspondenzbl. d.
Schweiz Aerzte, 1884. Bollinger, Arbeit. a. d. Patholog. Inst. zu Miinchen,
1886; Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., Bd. 10, 1872 ; Sitzungsber. d. Ges. f.
Morphol. Physiol. zu Miinchen, 1885. Bouley, Bull. Acad. de Méd.: Paris,
T. 9, 1880; T. 10,1881; Compt. Rend., T. 92 and 93, 1881. Brauell, Virchow’s
Arch., Bd. 11, 1857; Bd. 14, 1858. Biichner, Ueber die Exper. Erzeugung
des Milzbrandcontagiums aus den Heupilzen, 1880; Sitzungsber. d. K. Bayer.
Akad. d. Wissensch., 1880; Vortrige im Aerztl. Verein zu Miinchen, 1881;
Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 91, 1883. Chauveau, Compt. Rend., T. 90 and 91, 1880;
T. 92, 1881; T. 94, 1882; T. 96, 1883. Chelchowsky, Der Thierarzt, 1884. Colin,
Bull. Acad. de Méd.: Paris, T. 2, 1873; T. 7, 1878; T. 8, 1879; T. 9, 1880;
T.10, 1881. Crookshank, Rep. Agric. Dept., 1888. Davaine, Compt. Rend.-
Paris, T. 77, 1873; T.57 and 59, 1863; T. 60, 1865 ; T. 61, 1866, 1877; Rec. de
Méd. Vét., T. 4,1877. Dowdeswell, Rep. Med. Off. Local Gov. Board, 1883. Esser
and Schiitz, Mitth. a K. Preuss Amtl. Vet. Sanitatsbericht, 1882. Ewart,
Quart. Journ. of Microsc. Sc., 1878. Feltz, Compt. Rend., T. 95, 1882. Fodor,
Deut. Med. Woch., 1886. Fokker, Centralbl. f. d.. Med. Wissensch., Bd. 18,
1880; Centralbl. £ d. Med. Wiss, 1881; Virchow’s Archiv, Bd. 88, 1882.
Frank, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1886. Friedrich, Zur Aetiologie des Milzbrands.,
1885, Greenfield, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc. London, 1879; Proc. Roy. Soc.
London, 1880. Hoffa, Die Natur des Milzbrandgiftes : Wiesbaden, 1886.
Huber, Deut. Med. Woch., Bd. 7, 1881. Johne, Ber. ti. d. Veter. Wesen. i. K.
Sachsen, 1886. Kitt, Sitzungsb. d. Ges. f. Morphol. u.- Physiol. zu Miinchen,
1885. Klein, Rep. of the Medical Officer of the Local Govt. Board, 1881 ; Quart.
Journ. Micr. Sc., 1883. Koch, Beitriige zur Biologie der Pflanzen, Ba. IL,
Heft 2, 1876 ; Wandinfectionskrankheiten, 1878; Mitth. aus d. Ges. iat:
Bd. I.,1881 ; Milzbrand und Rauschbrand : Stuttgart, 1886. Martin, Proc. Roy.
Soc., 1890 ; Rep. Med. Off. Local Govt. Board, 1890-91; Brit. Med. Journal,
1891. Oemler, Archiv f. Wiss. u. Pract, Thierheilk., Bd. 4, 1878, 1879, 1880.
Osol, Experiment. Untersuch. ti. das Anthraxgift: Inaug. Diss. Dorpat, 1885.
Pasteur, Bull, Acad. de Méd., 1877, 1879, 1880 ; Compt. Rend., Paris, T. 84, 1877 ;
T. 90 and 91, 1880; T. 92, 1881; T. 95, 1882. Pollender, Vierteljahrschr.
f. Ger. Med., Bd. 8, 1855. Prazmowski, Acad. d. Wissensch. in Krakau, 1884 ;
650 APPENDICES.
Biol. Centralbl., Bd. 4, 1884. Rodet, Contribution 4 Etude Expérimentelle
du Carbon Bactéridien, 1881; Compt. Rend., T. 94, 1882. Roloff, Archiv f.
Wissensch. u. Pract. Thierheilk., Bd. 9, 1883 ; Der Milzbrand: Berlin, 1883.
Schmidt, Deut., Zeitschr. f. Thiermed, u. Vergl. Pathol., 1879. Schrakamp,
Archiv f. Hygiene, Bd. 2, 1884. Semmer, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wissensch.,
Bd. 18, 1880, 1884; Der Milzbrand und das Milzbrandcontagium, 1882.
Sternberg, Am. Monthly Micr. Journ., 1881. Szpilman, Zeitschr. f. Physiol.
Chemie: Strassburg, Bd. 4, 1880. Toepper, Die Neueren Erfahrungen iiber
d. Aetiologie d. Milzbrands., 1883. Toussaint, Compt. Rend., T. 85, 1877,
1878, 1880; Recherches Expérimentales sur la Maladie Charbonneuse, 1879.
Wachenheim, Etude Expérimentelle sur la Septicité et la Virulence du Sang
Charbonneux, 1880.
CHAPTER XV.
QUARTER-EVIL. MALIGNANT (EDEMA. RAG-PICKER’S SEPTICEMIA
OF GUINEA-PIGS. SEPTICEMIA OF MICE.
QUARTER-EVIL,
Arloing, Cornevin and Thomas, Compt. Rend., 1880; Bull. de l’Acad. de
Méd., and Revue de Méd., 1881; Du Charbon Bactérien, Charbon Symptoma-
tique, etc., 1883; Revue de Méd., 1884; Chabert’s Disease : Transl. by Dawson
Williams in Micro-parasites and Disease (New Syd. Soc.), 1886. Babés,
Journ. de l’Anatomie, 1884. Bollinger and Feser, Wochenschr. f. Thierheil-
kunde, 1878. Ehlers, Unters, iib. d. Rauschbrandpilz: Inaug. Diss. Rostock,
1884. Hess, Bericht iiber die entschaddigten Rauschbrand u. Milzbrandfalle
im Canton Bern, 1886. Kitt, Jahresber. der K. Thierarzneisch. in Miinchen,
1884. Neelsen and Ehlers, Ber. d. Naturforsch. Ges. zu Rostock, 1884.
Strebel, Schweiz. Archiv f. Thierheilk., 1886.
MALIGNANT CEDEMA,.
Brieger and Ehrlich, Berl. Klin. Wochenschr., N. 44, 1882. Chauveau and
Arloing, Archiv Vét., 1884; Bull. Acad. de Méd., 1884. Davaine, Bull. de
YAcad. de Méd., 1862. Gaffky, Mitth. as. d. K. Ges. Amt., 1881. Hesse, W.
and R., Deut. Med. Woch., 1885. Kitasato and Weyl, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene,
Bd. VIII. Kitt, Jahresber. der K. Thierarzneischule in Miinchen, 1884. Koch,
Mitth. aus dem Ges. Amt, I, S. 54, 1881. Lebedeff, Arch. de Phys. Norm. et
Path., 1882. Lustig, Jahresber. d. K. Thierarzneischule zu Hannover, 1884.
Pasteur, Bull. de l’Acad. de Méd., 1877, 1881. Roger, Compt. Rend. Soc. de Biol.,
1889. Roux and Chamberland, Ann. de l'Institut Pasteur, 1887. Trifaud, Rev.
de Chirurg, T. iii, Van Cott, Centralb. f. Bact., 1891. Verneuil, La Semaine
Méd., 1890.
RAG-PICKER’S SEPTICZMIA. SEPTICHMIA OF GUINEA-PIGS. SEPTICAMIA
OF MICE.
Bordoni-Uffreduzzi, Zeitsch. f. Hygiene, 1888. Klein, Centralbl. f. Bac-
teriolog., 1890. Koch, Wundinfectionskrankeit, Trans. New Syd. Soc., 1880.
Paltauf, Wiener Klin. Woch., 1888.
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 651
CHAPTER XVI.
HEMORRHAGIC SEPTICEMIA,
SEPTICEMIA OF BUFFALOES. SEPTIC PLEURO-PNEUMONIA or CALVES.
SwINE FEVER. SEPTIC@MIA OF DEER. SBPTIC@MIA OF RABBITS.
Fow.L CHOLERA. FowL ENTERITIS. Duck CHOLERA. GROUSE DISEASE.
Babés, Compt. Rend. de l’Acad. d. Sc., 1883; Arch. de Physiol., 1884.
Barthélémy, Compt. Rend., T. 96, No. 18, 1883. Bunzl-Federn, Centralbl. f.
Bacteriolog., 1891. Camera, Centralbl. f. Bacteriolog., 1891. Cornil, Arch. de
Physiol., Bd. 10, 1882. Cornil and Chantemesse, Le Bulletin Méd., 1887.
Cornil and Toupet, Bull. de la Soc. Nat. d’Acclimation., 1888. Davaine,
Bull. de YAcad. de Méd., 1879. Eberth and Schimmelbusch, Virchow’s
Archiv, 1889 ; Fortschr. d. Med., Bd. VI. Gaffky, Mitt. aus dem K. G. Amte,
1881. Gamaleia, Centralb. f. Bacteriolog., 1888. Hueppe, Berl. Klin. Woch.,
1886. Ioannés and Mégnin, Journ. d’Acclimatation, 1877. Kitt, Allg. Deut.
Gefliigelzeitung, 1885. Klein, Rep. Med. Off. Local Govt. Board, 1877-78;
Fortschr. der Med., 1888; Centralb. f. Bakteriolog., 1889. Koch, Aetiologie
der Wundinfections R., 1878. Oreste and Armani, Atti de R. Instit, d’Incorrag.
Alle Sci. Nat., Econ e Tech., 1887. Pasteur, Compt. Rend., T. 90, 1886.
Perroncito, Arch. f, Wiss. u. Prakt. Thierheilk., 1879. Petri, Centralbl. f. d.
Med. Wiss., 1885. Rietseh and Jobert, Compt. Rend., 1888. Salmon, Reports
Bureau of Animal Industry, 1886, 1887, 1888. Salmon and Smith, Amer.
Monthly Med. Journ., 1881, Sehiitz, Archiv f. Wiss. und Prakt. Thierheilk., 1888.
Semmer, Deut. Zeitschr. f. Theirmed. u. Vergl. Path., 1878. Smith, Journ. f.
Comp. Med. and Surg., 1887; Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1891. Smith and Veranus
Moore, Rep. Bureau of Animal Industry, 1895. Ziirn, Die Krankheiten des
Hausgefliigels, 1882.
CHAPTER XVII.
PNEUMONIA. INFECTIOUS PLEURO-PNEUMONIA OF CATTLE.
INFLUENZA.
; PNEUMONIA.
Afanassiew, Compt. Rend. Soc. de Biol. Paris, T, 5,1884, De Blasi, Rivista
Internaz. di. Med. e Chir., 1885.: Bruvlant and Verriers, Bull. de l’Acad.
Belge, 1880. Dreschfeld, Fortschr. d. Med., Bd. 3, 389, 1885. Foa and
Bordoni-Uffreduzzi, Deut, Med. Woch., 1886. Frankel, Verhandl. d. Congr.
f. Innere Med., Fortschr. d. Med. Nov., 1884; Deut. Med. Woch., 1886;
Zeitschr. f. Klin, Med., Bd. x. and xi., 1886. Friedlander, Virchow’s Arch.,
Bd. 87, 1882; Fortschr. d. Med., Bd. I., 1883; Bd. IL, 1884; Bd. 3, 92, 1885.
Friedlander and Frobenius, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1883. Germain-Sée, Compt.
Rend. Acad. de Sc. Paris, 1884; Des Maladies Spécifiques du Poumon, 1885.
Giles, Brit. Med. J., Vol. II., 1883. Griffini and Cambria, Centralbl. f. d. Med.
Wiss., 1883. Jaccoud, La France Médicale, 1886. Jiirgensen, Berl. Klin.
Woch., Bd, 22, 1884. Klein, Centralbl. f.°d. Med. Wissensch., 1884. Koranyi
and Babés, Pester Med. Chir. Presse, 1884. Kiihn, Deutsch. Arch, f, Klin.
Med., 1878 ; Berl. Klin. Woch., Nr. 38, 1881. Lancereaux and Besancon,
652 APPENDICES.
Archiv Gén. de Méd., 1886. Maguire, Brit. Med. Journ., Vol. II., 1884.
Manfredi, Fortsch. d. Med., 1886. Matray, Wien. Med. Presse, Nr. 23, 1883.
Mendelssohn, Zeitschr. f. Klin. Med, Bd. 7, 1884. Nauwerck, Beitr. zur
Pathol. Anat. von Ziegler, 1884. Neumann, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1885. Paw-
lowsky, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1885. Peterlein, Bericht ii. d. Vet.-Wesen. i. K.
Sachsen, 1885. Pipping, Fortsch. d. Med., Nos. 10 and 14, 1886. Platanow,
Mitth. a. d. Wiirzburg. Med. Klinik, 1885; Ueber die Diagnostische
Bedeutung d. Pneumoniekokken: Inaug.-Diss. Wiirzburg, 1884. Ribbert,
Deut. Med. Woch., Nr. 9, 1885. Salvioli and Zaslein, Centralbl. f. d. Med.
Wissensch., 1883. Arch. pour les Sc. Méd.; T. 8., 1884. Schou, Fortschr. der Med.,
Bd. 3, Nr. 15, 1886. Sternberg, Amer. Journ. Med. Sciences, 1885; Journ.
Roy. Micr. Soc., 1886. Talamon, Progr, Médic., 1883. Thost, Deut. Med.
Woch., 1886. Weichselbaum, Wien. Med. Woch., 1886. Ziehl, Centralbl. f. d.
Med. Wiss., 1883; Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1884.
CEREBRO-SPINAL MENINGITIS.
Bonome, Centralbl. f. Bact. u. Parasitolog., 1V. Foa, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene,
IV. Leichtenstern, Deut. Med. Woch., Nr. 23 u. 31, 1885. Leyden, Centralbl.
f, Klin. Med., Nr. 10, 1883. Weichselbaum, Wien. Klin. Woch., 1888.
PLEURO-PNEUMONIA. '
Arloing, Compt. Rend. cix., 1889, Bruce and Loir, Ann. de 1’Institut
Pasteur, 1891. Bruylants and Verriers, Bull. de l’Acad. Belg., 1880. Cornil
and Babés, Arch. de Physiol. Norm. et Path., T. 2, 1853. Lustig, Centralb. f.
die Med. Wiss., 1885. Mayrwieser, Woch. f. Thierheilk. u. Viehzucht, 19, 1884.
Pasteur, Recueil de Méd. Vét., 1882. Poels, Fortsch. d. Med., 1886. Poels
and Nolen, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., Nr. 9, 1884; Fortsch, d. Med., 1886.
Putz, Thier. Med. Vortrige, Bd. 1, 1889. Report on Pleuro-pneumonia and
Tuberculosis, 1888. Schiitz and Steffen, Archiv f. Wiss. und Prakt. Thierheilk.,
Bd. xv. Sussdorff, Deutsche Zeitschr. f. Thiermed. u. Vergl. Pathol., 1879.
INFLUENZA.
Babés, Centralbl. f. Bacteriolog., 1890; Deutsche Med. Woch., 1892. Bein,
Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1890. Bouchard, La Semaine Méd., 1890, Canon, Deutsche
Med. Woch., 1892. Fischel, Prager Med. Woch., 1890; Zeitschr. f. Heilkunde,
1891. Jolles, Wiener Med. Blatt., 1890. Kirchner, Centralbl. f. Bacteriolog.,
1890; Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, 1890. Kitasato, Deutsche Med. Woch., 1892. Klein,
Brit. Med. Journ., 1892. Klebs, Centralbl. f. Bakteriolog., 1890 ; Deutsche Med.
Woch., 1890. Pfeiffer, Deutsche Med. Woch., 1892, Prudden, New York Med.
Rec., 1890,
CHAPTER XVIII.
ORIENTAL PLAGUE. RELAPSING FEVER. ‘TYPHUS FEVER. YELLOW.
FEVER.
ORIENTAL PLAGUE.
Aoyama, Mitth, ti. d. Pest. Epidemie im Jahre 1894; in Hong Kong, 1895.
Yersin, Ann, ‘de l'Institut Pasteur, 1894. Yersin, Calmette and Borrel, Ann.
de l'Institut Pasteur, 1895.
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 653
RELAPSING FEVER.
Albrecht, St. Petersb. Med. Woch., 1879. Carter, Lancet, 1879; Trans.
Internat. Med. Congress, 1881. Cohn, Deut. Med. Woch., 1879. Engel, Berl.
Klin. Woch., 1873. Giinther, Fortschr. d. Med., 1885. Guttmann, Virchow’s
Arch., 1880. Heydenreich, St. Petersb. Med. Woch., 1876 ; Der Parasit des Riick-
falltyphus, 1877. Jaksch, Wien. Med. Woch., Juli, 1880. Koch, Deut. Med.
Woch., 1879. Laptschinsky, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., Bd. 13, 1875. Manas-
sem, St. Petersb. Med. Woch., No. 18, 1876. Metchnikoff, Virchow’s Archiv,
1877. Moczutowsky, Deutsches Archiv fiir Klin. Med., Bd. xxiv., 1876.
Miihlhauser, Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 97, 1880. Obermeier, Med. Centralbl., 11;
Berl. Med. Ges.; Berl. Klin. Wochenschr., 1873. Soudakewitch, Ann. de
l'Institut Pasteur, 1891. Weigert, Deut. Med. Woch., 1876.
YELLOW FEVER.
Babés, Compt. Rend., 17 Sept., 1883. Bouley, Compt. Rend., T. 100, p. 1276,
1885. Carmona y Valle, Lecons sur l’Etiol. et la Prophylax. de la Fiévre
Jaune, 1885. Cerecedo, El Siglo Medico, 1886. Domingos Freire, Recherches
sur Ja Cause de la Fiévre Jaune, 1884; La Fiévre Jaune et ses Inoculations
Préventives, 1896. Domingos Freire and Rebourgeon, Compt. Rend., T. 99,
p. 804, 1884.
CHAPTER XIX.
SCARLET FEVER AND MEASLES.
SCARLET FSLVER.
Coze and Feltz, Les Maladies Infectieuses, 1872. Crooke, Lancet, 1883;
Fortsch. d. Med., 1885. Crookshank, Report Agric. Dept., 1887. Hahn, Berl.
Klin. Woch., No. 38, 1882.. Heubner and Bahrdt, Berl. Klin. Woch., Nr. 44,
1884. Klein, Nature, xxxiv., 1886; Report of the Medical Officer of the
Privy Council, 1887, 1888, 1889. Laure, Lyon Médical, 1886. McKendrick,
Brit. Med. Journal, 1872. Pohl-Pincus, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., No. 36,
1883. Roth, Miinch. Aerztl. Intelligenzbl., 1883.
MEASLES.
Cornil and Babés, Archiv de Phys., 1883. Keating, Phil. Med. Times, 1882.
CHAPTER XX.
SMALL-POX. CATTLE PLAGUE.
SMALL-POX.
Chauveau, Compt. Rend., 1868. Cohn, Virchow’s Archiv, Bd. 55, 1872.
Copeman, Brit. Med. Journ., 1896; The Practitioner, 1896. Cornil and Babés,
Soc, Méd. des Hép., 1883. Crookshank, History and Path. of Vaccination, 1889.
Haccius, Variola-vaccine, 1892. Hamerink, Ueber die sog. Vac. u. Variola, 1884.
Ischamer, Aerztl. Verein. Steiermark, 1880. Klebs, Arch. f. Exp. Path. u.
Pharmakol., Bd. 10, 1874. Klein, Rep. Med. Off. Loc. Govt, Board, 1893-4.
654 APPENDICES.
Luginbuhl, Verhdl. d, Phys. Med. Ges. in Wiirzburg, 1873, Marchand, Revue
Mycologique, 1882. Pfeiffer, Die Protozoen als Krankheitserreger, 1890;
Behandl. und Prophylax. der Blattern, 1893. Pissin, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1874.
Plaut, Das Organis. Contagium der Schafpocken, 1883. Pohl-Pincus, Vaccina-
tion, 1882. Quist, St. Petersburg Med. Woch., Nr, 46, 1883. Reports, Royal
Vaccination Commission, 1888-96. Ruffer and Plimmer, Brit. Med. Journ.,
1894. Weigert, Ueber Bakterien in der Pockenhaut, 1871; Anat. Beitr. z.
Lehre v. d. Pocken, 1874. Wolf, Berl. Klin. Woch., Nr. 4, 1883. Zitilzer, Berl.
Klin. Woch., 1872.
CATTLE PLAGUE.
Crookshank, History and Pathology of Vaccination, 1889. Report of the
Cattle Plague Commission, 1865. Report on Indian Cattle Plague, 1871.
Semmer and Archangelski, Ueber das Rinderpestcontagium und dessen Miti-
gation ; Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1883. Simpson, Brit. Med, Ji ournal, 1896,
Smart, Reports on Cattle Plague, Edinburgh, 1865.
CHAPTER XXI.
SHEEP-POX. FOOT AND MOUTH DISEASE.
SHEEP-POX.
Crookshank, History and Path. of Vaccination, 1889.
Foot AND MovutH DISEASE.
Klein, Report Med. Off. Local Govt. Board, 1885. Schottelius, Centralb. £.
Bakteriolog., 1892.
CHAPTER XXII.
HORSE-POX. COW-POX.
HORSE-POX.
Crookshank, History and Pathology of Vaccination, 1889.
Cow-Pox.
Bucknill, Prov. Med. Journ., 1895. Crookshank, Brit. Med. Journ., 1888;
History and Pathology of Vaccination, 1889 (Vol. II. contains reprints of the
works of Jenner, Pearson, Woodville, Loy, Rogers, Birch, Bousquet, Estlin,
Ceely, Badcock, Auzias-Turenne, Dubreuilh, Layet). Reports of the Royal
Vaccination Commission,
CHAPTER XXIII.
DIPHTHERIA.
Abbot, Bull. Johns Hopkins Univ., 1891, 1893 ; Journ. of Path. and Bact.,
1893. Babés, Virchow’s Archiv. 1890. Behring, Deutsche Med. Woch.
1890. Behring and Kitasato, Deutsche Med. Woch., 1890. Birch-Hirschfeld,
Archiv fiir Heilk., 1872. Brieger and Frankel, Berl, Klin. Woch., 1890.
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 655
Buhl, Zeitschr. fiir Biol., 1867. Cornil, Arch. de Physiol., 1881. Eberth, Med.
Centralbl., XI., Nr. 8, 1873. Emmerich, Compt. Rendus et Mémoires du V.
Congrés Internat. d’Hygiéne, 1884 ; Deut. Med. Woch., 1884. Everett, Med.
and Surg. Reporter, 1881. Forster, Wien. Med. Woch., 1881. Francotte, La
Diphthérie, 1883. Freidberger, Deut. Zeitschr. fiir Thiermed.u. Vergl. Pathol.,
1879. Fiirbringer, Virch. Arch., Bd. 91, 1883. Gerhardt and Klebs, Verhandl.
d. Congresses f. Inn. Med., 1882, 1883. Heubner, Die Experimentelle Diph-
therie, 1883. Hueter and Tommasi, Centralbl. f. d. Med. Wiss., 1868. Klebs,
Arch. f. Exp. Pathol., Bd. 4, 1875. Klein, Report Med. Dept. Local Govt.
Board, 1889. Letzerich, Berl. Klin. Woch., xi., 1874; Virch. Arch., Bd. 55,
1872; Bd. 68, 1876. Léffler, Mittheil. a. d. Kais. Ges. Amt, Bd. II., 1884;
Microparasites and Disease (New Syd. Soc.), 1886 ; Centralbl. f. Bacteriolog.,
1887, 1890; Deutsche Med. Woch., 1890. Lumner, Aerztl: Int. Bl, No. 31,
1881. Martin, Rep. Med. Off. Loc. Gov. Board, 1890. Neumayer, Neue
Thesen zu Diphtheritisfrage, 1880. Nicati, Compt. Rend., T. 88, 1879. Oertel,
Deut, Arch. f. Klin. Med., Bd. 8, 1871; Zur Aetiologie der Infectionskrank-
heiten, 1881. Park, New York Med. Record, 1892, 1893. Prudden, Amer.
Journal of Med. Sci., 1889 ; New York Med. Rec., 1891. Rivolta, Giornale de
Anat. Fisiol. e Patol. delli Anim., 1884. Roux and Yersin, Ann. de I’Institut
Pasteur, 1888, 1889, 1890. Salisbury, Gaillard’s Med. Journ.: New York, 1882.
Talamon, Bull. de la Soc. Anat. de Paris, T. 56, 1881. Welch, Amer. Journal
of the Med. Sci., 1894. Welch and Abbott, Bull. Johns Hopkins Univ., 1891.
Wood and Formad, Bull. Nat. Board of Health, Wash. and Med. Times and
Gazette, 1882. Zahn, Beitrige zur Pathol. u. Histol. der Diphtherie, 1878.
Zarniko, Centralbl. f. Bact., 1889.
CHAPTER XXIV.
TYPHOID FEVER.
Almquist, Typhoidfeberus-Bakterie, 1882. Beumer and Peiper, Zeitschr. f.
Hygiene, 1886. Birch-Hirschfeld, Zeitschr. f. Epidemiologie, I., 1874. Boens,
Acad. Roy. de Méd. de Belgique: Bull. 3 Sér., T. 17, 1883. Brautlecht,
Virchow’s Arch., Bd. 84, 1881. Coats, Brit. Med. Journ., 1882. Crooke, Brit.
Med. Journ., 1882. Eberth, Arch. f. Pathol. Anat., Bd. 81, 1880; Volkmann,
Klin. Vortrige, 1883. Eppinger, Beitr. zur Pathol, Anatomie aus d. Patholog,
Institut. Prag., 1880. Feltz, Compt. Rend., T. 85, 1877. Fischel, Beitr. zur
Pathol. Anat. aus d. Pathol.-Anat. Inst. Prag., 1880. Fraenkel and Simmonds,
Die Aetiologische Bedeutung des Typhus-Bacillus, 1886. Gaffky, Mitth. a, d.
Ges, Amt, Bd. IL., 1884. Klebs, Arch. f. Exper. Pathol. u. Pharmakol., 1880.
Klein, Med. Centralbl., xii, 1874. Letzerich, Virchow’s Archiv, Bd. 68, 1876 ;
Archiv f. Exper. Pathol., Bd. 9, 1878; Bd, 10, 1881; Experimentelle Unter-
suchungen iiber die Aetiologie des Typhus Abdominalis: Leipzig, 1883. Luca-
tello, Bollet. d. R. Accad. Med. di Genova, 1886. Maraghano, Centralbl. f. d.
Med. Wiss., Bd. 15, 1882. Meisels, Wien. Med. Woch., 1886. Meyer, Unters.
iiber den Bacillus des Abdominaltyphus: Inaug. Diss., 1881. Michael, Fortsch.
d. Med., 1885. Neuhauss, Berl. Klin. Woch., 1886. Pfeiffer, Deut. Med.
Woch., Nr. 29, 1885. Rappin, Contrib. 4 l’Etude des Bact. de la Bouche,
a Etat Normal et dans la Fiévre Typhoide, 1881. Seitz, Bakteriolog. Studien
z. Typhusitiologie, 1886. Sirotinin, Zeitsch. f. Hygiene, 1886. Tayon, Compt.
Rend., T. 99, p. 331, 1884. Tizzoni, Studi. di Pat. Sperim. sulla Gen. d. Tifo.:.
Milan, 1880, Wernich, Zeitschr. f. Klin. Med., Bd. 6, 1882.
656 APPENDICES,
CHAPTER XXYV.
SWINE-TYPHOID.
Klein, Rep. of the Med. Offic. of the Privy Council, 1877-78 ; Virchow’s
Archiv, 1884. M‘Fadyean, Journ. of Comp. Path. and Therapeutics, 1895.
Report of a Conference on Swine-fever: Board of Agriculture, 1896. Rietsch,
Jobert and Martinaud, Compt. Rend., T. 106. Selander, Centr. f. Bakt. u.
Parasitenk., 1888 ; Ann de l'Institut Pasteur, 1890. Smith and Veranus Moore,
Bull. of Bureau of Animal Industry U.S., 1894. Welch and Clement, Trans.
Internat. Vet. Congress of Amer., 1893.
CHAPTER XXVI.
SWINE-MEASLES. DISTEMPER IN DOGS. EPIDEMIC DISEASE OF
FERRETS. EPIDEMIC DISEASE OF MICE.
SWINE-MEASLES.
Cornil and Babés, Arch. de Physiol., 1883. Detmers, Science, 1881.
Eggeling, Fortschr. d. Med., 1883. Loffler, Arbeiten aus dem Kaiserl. Gesund-
heits Amt, Bd. I., 1885. Lydtin and Schottelius, Der Rothlauf der Schweine :
Wiesbaden, 1885. Pasteur, Compt. Rend., T. 95,1882. Pasteur and Thuillier,
Bull. de Acad. de Méd. de Paris: Compt. Rend., T. 97, 1883. Salmon,
Report Depart. Agricul. Washington, 1881, 1884. Schtitz, Ueber den Rothlauf
der Schweine und die Impfung desselben, 1885.
CHAPTER XXVII.
ASIATIC' CHOLERA. CHOLERA NOSTRAS. CHOLERAIC DIARRH@A
FROM MEAT-POISONING. DYSENTERY. CHOLERAIC DIARRH@GA
OF FOWLS.
CHOLERA.
Ali-Cohen, Fortschr. der Med., 1887, 1888. Almquist, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene,
1887. Babés, Virchow’s Archiv, 1885. Bianchi, Lancet., 1884. Bitter, Archiv f.
Hygiene, 1886. Bochefontaine, Expér. pour servir 4 I’Etude des Phénoménes